iso4217:GBP iso4217:GBP xbrli:shares PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:OtherEquityInterestMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfChangeInValueOfTimeValueOfOptionsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfChangeInValueOfTimeValueOfOptionsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-01-01 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:OtherEquityInterestMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:OtherEquityInterestMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfChangeInValueOfTimeValueOfOptionsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2025-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:OtherEquityInterestMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfChangeInValueOfTimeValueOfOptionsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2024-01-01 2024-12-31 ifrs-full:OtherEquityInterestMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:OtherEquityInterestMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfChangeInValueOfTimeValueOfOptionsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfExchangeDifferencesOnTranslationMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2022-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfGainsAndLossesOnFinancialAssetsMeasuredAtFairValueThroughOtherComprehensiveIncomeMember PTCQB104N23FMNK2RZ28 2023-01-01 2023-12-31 ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember

UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

FORM 20-F
(Mark One)

☐ | REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

☒ | ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2025
OR

☐ | TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

☐ | SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report
For the transition period from to
Commission file number 001-14928
Santander UK plc
(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)
England
(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)
2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN, England
(Address of principal executive offices)
Lee Grant
2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN, England
Tel: +44 (0) 800 085 1491
E-mail: lee.grant@santander.co.uk
(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act.
None

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act.
None
Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act.
7.95% Term Subordinated Securities due October 26, 2029
Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period
covered by the annual report

Ordinary shares of nominal value of £0.10 each* | 31,051,768,866
10 3/8% Non-cumulative Preference Shares of nominal value of £1 each | 200,000,000
8 5/8% Non-cumulative Preference Shares of nominal value of £1 each | 125,000,000

* | All of the issued and outstanding ordinary shares of Santander UK plc are held by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ☒ No ☐
If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13
or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Yes ☐ No ☒
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities
Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports),
and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes ☒ No ☐
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant
to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant
was required to submit such files). Yes ☒ No ☐
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer or an emerging
growth company. See definition of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer,” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the
Exchange Act.

Large accelerated filer | ☐ | Accelerated filer | ☐ | Non-accelerated filer | ☒ | Emerging growth company | ☐

If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the
registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards†
provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐

† | The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the effectiveness
of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by the registered
public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. ☐
If securities are registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act, indicate by check mark whether the financial statements of the registrant
included in the filing reflect the correction of an error to previously issued financial statements. ☐
Indicate by check mark whether any of those error corrections are restatements that required a recovery analysis of incentive based
compensation received by any of the registrant's executive officers during the relevant recovery period pursuant to §240.10D-1(b). ☐
Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

U.S. GAAP | ☐ | International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board | ☒ | Other | ☐

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant
has elected to follow. Item 17 ☐ Item 18 ☐
If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange
Act). Yes ☐ No ☒

Santander UK plc
2025 Annual Report
Part of the Banco Santander group

Important information for readers
Santander UK plc (the Company) and its subsidiaries (collectively Santander UK or the Santander UK group) operate primarily in the UK, and are part of
Banco Santander (comprising Banco Santander SA and its subsidiaries). Santander UK plc is regulated by the UK Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA)
and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). Certain other companies within the Santander UK group are regulated by the FCA and the PRA.
This Annual Report contains forward-looking statements that involve inherent risks and uncertainties. Actual results may differ materially from those contained
in such forward-looking statements. See Forward-looking statements on page 214.
Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the immediate parent company of Santander UK plc. The two companies operate on the basis of a unified business strategy,
albeit the principal business activities of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group are carried on by Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries.
The Santander UK Group Holdings plc Corporate Governance and Risk Frameworks have been adopted by the Company and its subsidiaries to ensure consistency
of application.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 1

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Strategic report |  |  | Contents |  |
|  |  | Strategic report | 1 |
The strategic report outlines the key elements of the Annual Report and provides context for the related financial statements. |  |  |  | Our business model and overview | 2 |
|  |  | Our m arket overview | 4 |
|  |  | Our strategic priorities | 6 |
It is also designed to help members of the Company assess how the Directors have performed their duty under section 172 of the Companies Act 2006. The report highlights key financial and non-financial metrics which help to explain our performance over the past year. It also highlights the external environmental factors affecting the business along with Santander UK’s positions in the UK banking market. |  |  |  | Our performance and KPIs | 6 |
|  |  | Risk management overview | 7 |
|  |  | Financial overview | 9 |
|  |  | Sustainability highlights | 11 |
|  |  | Section 172: Stakeholder voice | 13 |
|  |  | Non-financial and sustainability information statement | 12 |
By Order of the Board. |  |  | Sustainability | 14 |
|  |  | Governance | 16 |
Tom Scholar |  |  | Risk review | 39 |
Chair |  |  | Financial statements | 112 |
9 March 2026 |  |  | Shareholder information | 211 |

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 2

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Our business model and overview
We follow the Santander Way
Our purpose: To help people and businesses prosper.
Our aim: To be the best open financial services platform, by acting responsibly and earning the lasting loyalty of our people, customers, shareholders
and communities.
Our how: E verything we do should be Simple, Personal and Fair.
We create value for all

| A motivated, engaged and talented team |
enabling us to support our communities |  | generates customer loyalty
| creating strong financial results for our shareholders |

Santander UK
We provide financial products and services
Mortgages, consumer auto finance, unsecured loans, credit cards, banking and savings accounts, investment and insurance products for individuals and growth-focused
support and services for companies.
Competitive advantages
Scaled and established bank in the UK - Scale in our core banking businesses combined with an innovative mindset.
Strong balance sheet with a prudent approach to risk - High asset quality and capital metrics well above regulatory requirements.
Part of a global banking group - Benefit from Banco Santander’s global capabilities and scale.
A talented and motivated team - A highly talented and engaged team, with the right skills in place to support our customers and transform the bank.
Strategic priorities
Continue to be customer centric and increase primacy.
Focus on simplification, automation, AI and digitalisation.
Create value and be disciplined with capital allocation.
Be a responsible bank.
Our behaviours
We live our values of Simple, Personal and Fair through great behaviours and our people leaders.
T - Think Customer
E - Embrace Change
A - Act Now
M - Move Together
S - Speak Up
At a glance
13.6 million active UK customers.
c.15,400 full time equivalent (FTE) employees
£167.3 bn in mortgage lending
£183.6 bn in customer deposits
Our sustainability strategy
Environment: Supporting our customers in their transition goals, embedding climate into risk management and aiming to align our activity with the Paris
Agreement Goals.
Social: Support productive and inclusive growth for our customers, communities, and employees, enabling prosperity through financial health, skills, inclusion, and
opportunity.
Governance: Maintain clear and robust governance systems, with well-defined accountability, that support the success of Santander UK, its customers, and wider
stakeholders.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 3

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Our business model and overview continued
A significant part of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group
The Company and its subsidiaries represent almost all the business and operations of its immediate parent Santander UK Group Holdings plc. More information on
the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group, including the role of the Company as a ring-fenced bank, can be found in the Santander UK Group Holdings plc 2025
Annual Report, which does not form part of this report.
Santander’s proposed acquisition of TSB
On 1 July 2025, Banco Santander announced that it reached an agreement to acquire 100% of TSB Banking Group plc (TSB) from Banco de Sabadell SA (Sabadell)
with a valuation of approx. £2.65bn in an all-cash transaction. Sabadell shareholder approval was given at Sabadell's Extraordinary General Meeting on 6 August
2025. Completion of the acquisition of TSB by Santander UK plc is contingent on regulatory approval and other consents and is expected to occur in Q2 2026.
This transaction would involve acquisition of approx. £34bn of mortgages and approx. £35bn in customer deposits. When combined with Santander UK plc, the two
banks would serve nearly 28 million retail and business customers nationwide, giving TSB customers access to Banco Santander's international network and
allowing them to benefit from the Santander UK group's leading technology platforms.
Proven integration capability
Banco Santander is one of the largest international investors in the UK financial services industry, having successfully acquired and integrated Abbey National plc in
2004 and both Alliance & Leicester plc and the Bradford & Bingley savings business in 2008. It has a proven track record in successful banking platform migrations.
By integrating technology across Santander UK and TSB, Banco Santander expects to unlock substantial operational efficiencies and support long-term profitability
through a simplified, scalable digital banking model.
We are fully committed to ensuring a seamless integration following completion of the acquisition, by leveraging our market leading technology and significant
experience. Maintaining the highest levels of service for customers across both banks will be a key priority.
We look forward to welcoming our new colleagues from TSB, and we will support all colleagues through the transition as we invest in building a stronger bank for
the future.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 4

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Our market overview

Improving economic environment |  |  | Competitive UK market |  |  | Customers becoming digital
What we have seen In the UK, we saw economic conditions improve with annual growth of 1.3% in 2025 compared to 1.1% in 2024. Inflation remained volatile over 2025 peaking in September 2025 at 3.9%, but falling further over the rest of the year. The housing market was less buoyant in 2025 compared to 2024 due to uncertainty and the change in Stamp Duty Land Tax. The Bank of England’s Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) cut Bank Rate four times in 2025, to end the year at 3.75%. Our response and looking ahead In a declining interest rate environment, our focus remains on ensuring profitable balance sheet growth. Further, with inflation above the Bank of England target and continued Bank Rate cuts, cost discipline remains a focus. In 2025, we returned to growth while reducing our funding gap and improving our margins. We ensured strong transformation momentum through simplification, automation and digitisation, ensuring better customer experiences while reducing our operating expenses. Looking ahead, we expect the Bank of England to cut the Bank Rate twice in 2026 as inflation approaches target. As this occurs and affordability improves for our customers, we expect to see activity in the mortgage market increase further. |  |  | What we have seen In 2025, the UK banking market remained highly competitive. Balance sheet scale continues to be concentrated among the largest UK banks, while digital challengers continued to grow their customer base through different digital propositions. The UK banking industry delivered a strong performance in 2025, recording robust financial results that have been reflected in improved equity market valuations across the sector. Consolidation remained a prominent feature, with several acquisitions in the year. In July 2025, Banco Santander announced the proposed acquisition of TSB, with the aim to add scale to its UK operations and accelerate our transformation. Across the market, banks continued to invest in common strategic themes in response to evolving customer needs, including further digitisation, AI, and enhancing capabilities for SME banking and mass-affluent customers. Our response and looking ahead 2025 saw a return to balance sheet growth, underpinned by continued pricing discipline. Our focus remains on serving our customers’ needs better while continuing to transform our business, including the use of AI to strengthen financial crime controls and fraud management. Banco Santander’s global capabilities continue to be our competitive advantage, supporting enhancements across our product and technology platforms, including our cards’ infrastructure. Looking ahead, we expect large peers to continue investing in product propositions and customer experience to attract and retain customers, while digital banks are likely to continue their focus on market share growth and improving profitability. |  |  | What we have seen 2025 was another year of customers increasingly choosing digital channels to manage their banking needs. Digital engagement continued to rise, with 82% of all transactions now completed through digital channels. This ongoing shift demonstrates our customers’ preference for convenience, speed, and the enhanced functionality our digital platforms provide. Our response and looking ahead Throughout 2025, we continued to enhance our OneApp, introducing new functionality designed to make banking even simpler and more personalised. In 2026, we plan to continue to build on the success of OneApp by further enhancing its functionality and personalisation, so customers can access a wider range of products and journeys within the app. In 2025, we launched a digital onboarding journey with a pilot for Sole Traders – the new journey improves time-to-open and customer experience. In 2026 we plan to expand and scale the pilot with a safe and controlled approach to extend this digital capability to more customers including Limited Companies, delivering a faster, simpler onboarding experience for UK businesses. At the same time, we remain focused on ensuring that customers who prefer in-person support continue to receive exceptional service. We are optimising our branch network to reflect evolving customer needs, including opening three new Work Cafés in 2025. This reinforces our commitment to combining digital innovation with community-focused, face-to-face banking.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 5

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Our market overview continued

Deployment of AI technology |  |  | Evolving regulatory landscape |  |  | Delivering on our sustainability ambitions
What we have seen The market continues to evolve at pace, with enterprise AI adoption now common through tools such as OpenAI’s ChatGPT and Microsoft Co- Pilot. Across the industry, banks have increased their strategic focus on AI whilst maintaining strong risk management practices, delivering use cases with a ‘human in the loop’ ensuring review of outputs before they are communicated to customers. The emergent use of Agentic AI which uses autonomous AI systems that can reason, plan, and act independently to achieve a defined set of goals is the next transformative phase for many businesses, with banks exploring implementation. Our response and looking ahead In 2025, we mobilised our strategy to accelerate our transformation using Data and AI. This helped us to continue delivering machine learning and AI solutions into the business supporting our customers and our people. We have deployed enterprise solutions like ChatGPT to many parts of the business and the majority of our customer- facing teams are now using AI for better customer interactions. Most of our developers are using AI to increase productivity and deploy AI-assisted code. We have also developed new tools to detect, deter and disrupt criminal networks, working closely with government agencies, to protect our customers from financial crime. Looking ahead, we plan to deploy a number of global AI platforms in the UK to accelerate our transformation further. We will start exploring the use of Agentic AI and put AI tools directly in front of our customers whilst maintaining strong risk management and oversight to ensure we deliver innovation and good customer outcomes. |  |  | What we have seen 2025 saw significant activity in the financial services regulatory environment. The government encouraged UK regulators to reduce the regulatory burden faced by banks in order to encourage economic growth, which has led to a wide range of proposals from the FCA and PRA. This includes a number of changes to the mortgage rules, including the LTI limit, and discussion papers from the FCA and PRA on broader rule changes. We have also seen consultations to improve the operation of the Financial Ombudsman Service and the SMC&R regime, delays to the implementation of the market risk element of the Basel package and introduction of targeted support for investments and pensions. There has been progress on a new model for the design and delivery of next generation payments infrastructure, linked to the National Payments Vision and Strategy. Policymakers are also conducting reviews of the UK’s capital and ring-fencing regimes. The FCA also published a consultation paper on 7 October 2025 regarding a proposed industry-wide motor finance consumer redress scheme (Consultation). Our response and looking ahead We welcome the government’s commitment to improving the balance of regulation. Throughout 2025, we worked with industry regulators to support the government’s growth agenda and identify areas where the regulatory regime can be improved to foster growth, whilst maintaining the stability of the financial system and delivering good outcomes for customers. We responded to the FCA’s Consultation on motor finance commission and continue to engage constructively with the FCA on its detailed consideration of the Consultation proposals. |  |  | What we have seen Investors, regulators, and other stakeholders continue to increase their scrutiny of sustainability practices, with particular attention to alignment between stated objectives and actual outcomes. This heightened focus is driving organisations to provide clearer disclosure with progress toward their sustainability ambitions. Our response and looking ahead In 2025, we continued to support our customers in their transition goals, with tailored green finance solutions and practical advice. Since 2021, we have provided £23.6 bn in green financing surpassing our ambition of £20bn and supported over 237,500 customers with products and services that make the green transition more achievable, surpassing our ambition to support 180,000 customers. In 2025, we also launched our social strategy to support productive and inclusive growth with our customers, communities and our people. We contacted over 2.1m illion customers showing early signs of financial difficulty, potential money worries, or who have missed payments. We also launched a new five-year charity partnership with The King’s Trust to help young people build skills for a brighter future. For our people, we made progress towards our inclusive culture ambitions through increased senior female representation, now 35.3%, and senior ethnic minority representation, now 14.5%.1 We continue to implement our new Governance Strategy, with a primary focus in 2025 on appointing a new Chair. Looking ahead, we continue to focus on ensuring our sustainability strategy delivers wider value to our business and real world impact.

1 Our workforce is UK-based and our ambitions relate to UK performance in compliance with relevant UK law. These ambitions support business performance and all employment decisions are based on merit.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 6

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Our strategic priorities
Focused on customer loyalty, improved efficiency and growth
Customer centric & increase primacy
Initiatives aimed at enhancing how we serve and engage with our customers, leveraging the Banco Santander group’s global technology and operational
capabilities to provide consistent and accessible financial services across multiple channels.
2025 progress: in mortgages, we were the first lender to change our affordability rules enabling some families to borrow as much as £133k more. We launched
several new propositions for our customers, including Edge Explorer, our new added value current account with lifestyle benefits, our classic Business Current
Account and digital onboarding for cards.
For our corporate customers, following Santander Navigator’s success in the UK, we have now launched Navigator Global which is an end-to-end digital first,
human-led platform that helps ambitious businesses grow internationally. We also digitised and automated processes reflected in a more than 20% reduction in
the time it takes to onboard a client.
Simplification, automation, AI & digitalisation
Reduce complexity, decrease friction and increase automation to streamline our products and processes. This is supported by becoming a ‘digital bank with a human
touch’.
2025 progress: we are bringing the power of AI and automation to our customers and employees. We deployed enterprise solutions like ChatGPT to large portions
of the business and the majority of our customer-facing teams are using AI to have better informed customer interactions. Most of our developers are using AI to
increase productivity and deploy AI-assisted code, which helps to digitise and transform the business at pace.
AI is game-changing in the fight against Economic Crime, and we deployed a number of use cases in Financial Crime to detect, deter and disrupt criminal networks,
with a 50% alert reduction in some use cases. Across all our payment services, we invested in AI-powered fraud capabilities too, using machine learning models for
real-time fraud detection.
Value creation & disciplined capital allocation
Continued focus on sustainable value creation for all stakeholders - customers, employees, shareholders and communities - while maintaining strong risk and
profitability management and a disciplined approach to capital allocation.
2025 progress: returned to balanced balance sheet growth while maintaining a disciplined approach to capital allocation across asset classes. This approach
ensured that we maintained significant headroom above regulatory capital requirements.
Be a responsible bank
Initiatives aimed at supporting our customers with a just and orderly transition to a low carbon economy and helping them get the skills they need to thrive.
2025 progress: achieved two of our public ambitions in 2025. This includes from 2021-2025 surpassing our ambition of £20bn green finance raised and facilitated,
together with our ambition to support 180,000 customers with products and services to support their transition goals.
Our performance and key performance indicators
The directors of the Company’s immediate parent, Santander UK Group Holdings plc, manage the operations of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group (which
includes the Santander UK group) on a business division basis. Key performance indicators are not set, monitored or managed at the Santander UK group level. As a
result, the Company’s Directors believe that analysis using key performance indicators for the Company is not necessary or appropriate for an understanding of the
development, performance or position of the Company.
The development, performance and position of the business of the Santander UK group is set out in the Financial review.
The key performance indicators of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group can be found in its 2025 Annual Report, which does not form part of this report.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 7

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Risk management overview
Managing continuous transformation in Risk & Compliance was a key focus throughout 2025 and remains a priority in 2026, as we also manage the proposed
acquisition and integration of TSB into the business (subject to regulatory approvals).
In 2025, and moving into 2026, we continue delivering a transformation focused on streamlining, simplification and enabling business growth. Through key initiatives
we are reducing duplication, embedding automation and enhancing clarity and timeliness of risk insights.
By investing in technology, data and process redesign, we are improving efficiency and strengthening resilience in line with regulatory expectations.
Top Risks
We monitor our Top Risks bi-annually at the ERCC and BRC. Along with Emerging Risks, they are used as part of our risk challenge to strategic business plans, and
are considered in our ICAAP scenario testing. In 2025, we continued to ensure our Top and Emerging risks are relevant to the changing strategic landscape.
Changes made include the addition of TSB's integration, which will require execution in a timely and controlled manner, and Execution of AI as we build towards
deployment at scale and pace. Model risk impacts have been combined with Regulatory Capital given the importance of compliance with SS1/23; and Outsourcing
and Third Party and Resiliency have been combined as Operational Resilience, given the inter-related nature of these risk types.

Top Risk Descriptions |  |  | Mitigating Actions
Economic Crime Sanctions Complexity Sanctions risks and complexity has increased with the evolving geopolitical landscape. Addressing emerging sanctions evasion risks remains a key focus. The G7 continues to use sanctions and associated “tools”, requiring continued vigilance across the industry. |  |  | Our Economic Crime risk team work closely with the business units, providing continued support in identifying evolving sanctions risks. We also engage closely across the banking industry to ensure our approach to managing complex sanctions risks remains in line with best practice.
Responding to Regulatory Change It is vital to keep pace with and respond to Regulatory Change in an increasingly complex environment driven by ever higher customer expectations. Failure to do so can lead to compliance risks and fines, as well as lost commercial opportunities. |  |  | We continue to enhance our Compliance oversight function through a transformation programme which is deploying a range of regulatory technology compliance tools, AI, automation and data analytics which provide real-time oversight, enhanced risk detection and simplified workflows.
Execution Risks associated with TSB integration Integrating TSB in a timely and controlled manner is key to achieving planned commercial benefits from the acquisition and a significant contribution to the achievement of our business plans. Linked to Execution of Strategic Transformation. | X |  | Risk and Compliance have been heavily involved in the ‘change in control’ process and engagement with the PRA. Already established and embedded Line 2 leads are now focused on the integration project across a range of workstreams. Risk is offering a wide range of support on governance, risk frameworks, and risk appetite and reporting.
Execution Risks associated with Strategic Transformation This remains a key focus to ensure we have adequate funding, resource capacity and capability to deliver. With the addition of TSB integration to the list of priorities, there are increased delivery risks and challenges that need to be managed. |  |  | We continue to focus on enhancing our management of change, with planned actions implemented on clarifying roles and responsibilities, book of work prioritisation, overall governance, and our wider Transformation and Change Framework. Utilisation of ‘Agile’ programmes has become a relatively new feature in our approach.
Geopolitically Motivated Cyber-Attack We are focused on reducing the potential for ransomware to be injected into our technology platforms either directly or through a third-party supplier, which could cause significant business disruption, a potential regulatory fine and reputational risk. |  |  | We have an ongoing dedicated Cyber & Information Security plan for continuous enhancement and strengthening of our cyber risk and control environment. Cyber is an asymmetric risk heavily influenced by the evolution of the external threat landscape and accordingly our aim continues to be to minimise risks to acceptable levels.
Operational Resilience threats Identifying and mitigating Operational Resilience threats, for example a ransomware attack or loss of a third-party, is critical in supporting our ability to recover Important Business Services (IBS), reducing the risk of a regulatory fine and possible reputational risk. |  |  | We have developed a framework which encompasses a plan for mitigating actions to address key identified threats, which also include loss of Critical National and Financial Markets Infrastructure. We will continue to drive maturity in our approach during 2026.
Technology Infrastructure Obsolescence Maintaining a robust and fit for purpose Technology Infrastructure reduces the risk of a single point of failure in our network and loss of an IBS, as well as limiting the potential for increased reputational risk or a regulatory fine. |  |  | Reducing network single point of failure risk (SPOF) and obsolescence within our Zero Tolerance assets remains a key focus, with significant progress made during 2025 via our technology remediation programme. These efforts have significantly enhanced the health, security and resilience of our IT platform estate.
Execution of Payment Systems Transformation It is important that we continue to keep pace with the scale of change impacting payments technology platforms across the industry to ensure we take full advantage of commercial opportunities and retain our competitive advantage relative to our peers. |  |  | Our focus is on enhancing our payments processes through leveraging Banco Santander’s platforms and also ensuring that we have the capacity and capability to participate in regulatory or payment scheme initiatives, for example, the National Payments Vision; and industry initiatives such as tokenisation, CBDC, and Regulated Liability Network (RLN).
Model Risk and Regulatory Capital Changes Compliance with SS1/23 Model Risk Principles is vital in retaining IRB Models approvals and avoiding capital add-ons, impacting regulatory capital. There also remains an ongoing sensitivity to regulatory capital changes and decisions, and other factors such as potential crystallisation of conduct losses, although Model Risk is regarded as most significant. |  |  | We are further transforming our Models capability, whilst ensuring regulatory compliance. Our Transformation Programme has been addressing SS1/23 requirements, whilst building a modern, compliant and efficient Model Risk Management framework. Targeted benefits include reduction in lifecycle effort and improvement in delivery timelines.
Data Ownership and Controls Weak Data Ownership, and ineffective and insufficient controls can lead to poor customer outcomes, inaccurate regulatory reporting and ineffective decision making. Poor quality external data is also a risk to making effective policy decisions (e.g. ONS revisions). |  |  | We are progressing with our plans to enhance and embed our Data Management Operating Model with clearly defined roles and responsibilities. Data Management metrics are reported regularly to Risk and Governance forums, and new Governance Standards are being developed in close co-ordination between key business areas and risk.
Volatile Geopolitical and Macroeconomic Environment Future shocks such as volatile energy prices, renewed Middle East or Ukraine related supply disruptions, tariff and trade related impacts, and divergent US-European rate paths, could trigger sterling weakness, higher import costs and renewed inflationary pressures. |  |  | Geopolitical related risks including tariffs remain a key focus for our risk reporting. We co- ordinate this through our ‘Agile Squad’ of subject-matter experts across the business and risk. This facilitates regular and consistent messaging, related to any potential impacts on our overall Risk Profile, to ERCC, BRC, and Board, as well as to Banco Santander.
Execution of AI adoption Poor execution of AI adoption could lead to strategic underperformance against peers, and loss of competitive advantage. The potential also exists for undesirable events such as significant data loss, a major cyber security incident, and GenAI deepfakes. |  |  | We continue to build our GenAI Capability, which is critical to our deployment of AI use cases across the bank. We are taking a phased approach to developing our AI maturity over the next year building towards deployment at scale and pace. AI use cases and risk issues are being discussed at local business and risk and control forums enabling Line 2 oversight.
Mitigating Margin Compression risks Proactive hedging actions in a timely fashion is vital to mitigating Margin Compression risk particularly in a falling rate environment where we are unable to reprice our deposits as quickly as our mortgage assets. |  |  | Structural Position (SP) hedging over 2024 and 2025 has reduced our exposure to downwards rate movements, as deposits remain relatively fixed to downwards rate moves. Higher for longer is less of a concern, and with respect to rate increases, there is the opportunity to undertake SP hedging at higher rates.
Sophisticated Social Engineering Fraud Failure to develop prevention and detection technology to mitigate the scale and sophistication of Social Engineering Fraud aided by AI, could lead to significant losses, regulatory attention and poor financial performance. |  |  | We have a broad range of controls to manage the prevention and detection of fraud, which requires continuous investment and enhancements of capabilities to maintain and improve performance. Despite the increased sophistication of fraud attacks, our fraud target performance has improved compared to 2024.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 8

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Emerging Risks
We monitor these risks via our Risk Radar and regularly provide a combined bi-annual update, alongside Top Risks to ERCC and BRC. Highlighted below are our
Emerging Risks in 2025 and our associated mitigating actions. Most Emerging Risks we face are systemic risk issues which also impact our peers. However,
Santander UK may be exposed to more idiosyncratic risk in areas impacting regulation, where we face dual regimes, principally the PRA and FCA in the UK and the
ECB in Europe.
In 2025, we made some changes to our Emerging Risks, although the overall profile remained broadly unchanged. We added: Loss of Critical National and Financial
Market Infrastructure considering elevated geopolitical risks; Developments in Quantum Technology noting the need to ensure our cryptography estate becomes
‘post quantum safe’; Credit impacts of AI Deployment cognisant of employment displacement risks; and Climate Change, now redefined and reclassified from a Top
Risk to an Emerging Risk.

Emerging Risks Descriptions |  |  | Mitigating Actions
Demanding Regulatory Agenda |  |  |
Inconsistent Implementation of Global Regulation This may leave the UK at a competitive disadvantage compared to other global finance jurisdictions such as the EU and the US, which could adversely impact our ability to meet future growth plans. |  |  | Government’s ‘pro-growth’ initiatives, such as the ‘Leeds Reforms’ are welcomed in key areas such as ring-fencing, regulatory capital levels, and retail mortgage lending initiatives related to affordability. However the overall pace of regulatory change in relative terms remains a concern and our Regulatory Affairs team continue to engage with regulators and ministers to promote reforms.
Uncertain Macroeconomic and Geopolitical Environment |  |  |
UK Macro and Government Policy UK Government Policies may fail to stimulate economic growth, and as a result the fiscal position could worsen during the next 18 months, adversely impacting the attractiveness of investing in the UK and our ability to meet future growth plans. Bank of England quantitative tightening has put further pressures on government borrowing costs. |  |  | UK domestic related challenges remain an area of primary concern for the bank including: ‘sticky’ inflation, persistent low growth, lack of long-term fiscal policy credibility, weak productivity and business investment, labour market fragility, and data uncertainty (e.g. ONS revisions). Our risk coverage and reporting on these issues is co-ordinated between the business and risk via our ‘Agile Squad’ as described under Top Risks.
Loss of Critical National & Financial Market Infrastructure This could lead to failure to recover Important Business Service(s) within set timeframes. This would have significant regulatory and reputational risk implications, and is also an increasing threat, given the heightened geopolitical risk environment. |  |  | Our Business and Services Management team assess these risks with a view to developing scenarios and playbooks in the event that they materialise. Potential scenarios include loss of power (requiring back-up provision) and loss of communications and other essential business facilities for a sustained period. We also have defined emergency protocols and processes for these situations, depending upon the severity.
Markets, Competition & Technology |  |  |
Digital Bank challengers There are challenges to our growth plans from Digital Banks with a lower cost basis that are looking to gain a commercial edge by attracting a growing number of digital based customers. Open Finance legislation may also impact in the future, with auto switching between savings providers and disintermediation via Digital Wallets. |  |  | We continue to leverage Banco Santander capabilities in the digital customer space and maintain our investment in the development of AI to enable quick and accurate responses to customer needs through a range of digital channels. Overall this approach facilitates a cost-efficient approach, supported by Banco Santander’s scale and platforms.
Digital Currencies, Tokenisation & Crypto Assets Failure to keep pace with developments in Digital Currencies, Tokenisation, and Crypto assets could increase the risk of loss of commercial deposits, increase wholesale funding costs and adversely impact the achievement of our longer-term business plans. |  |  | Our Regulatory Affairs team have responded to consultations held by the Bank of England with respect to the Digital Pound initiative. Santander UK is also involved in an evolving alternative banking industry solution, the Regulated Liability Network. We recognise digital currencies and payments industry transformation are closely related and we continue to have close engagement with our peers and industry regulators on future developments.
Developments in Quantum Technology This is an evolving technology which could pose security risks to Santander UK and our customers over the medium to longer term, particularly via long-standing and trusted security measures such as cryptography which to date has protected financial data and communications. |  |  | Our Line 1 Cyber team maintains an inventory of internal cryptography and is ensuring that we have identified any potential areas that may require upgrading and modernisation. Finding a potential solution is an industry wide issue in order to move towards becoming ‘Post Quantum Safe’, as these capabilities evolve and mature.
Environmental and Social |  |  |
UK Political and Social Dislocation A growing sense of public frustrations relating to government policies over many years, could result in political and social fragmentation. This may impact future business and investor confidence in the UK, if sentiment deteriorates further, and pose additional challenges to the achievement of our business plans. |  |  | Through our regular co-ordinated monitoring and reporting of the external risk environment across the business and risk, we closely assess both external and internal warning indicators, to aid in the assessment of our overall risk profile. This informs discussion, review and challenge at both ERCC and BRC as to whether further mitigating actions need to be taken across financial and non-financial risks.
Credit Impacts from AI Deployment AI deployment at scale and pace over our planning period and more widely across industry in the UK could impact upon our customers through job displacement and ultimately affect the performance of our credit portfolios. |  |  | Whilst AI adoption may initially have only a modest and relatively temporary impact on unemployment, once longer-term efficiency gains materialise, job displacement could become more material in some industries. Unemployment is one of the key economic factors we monitor closely and factor into our credit policies and provisioning.
Climate Change: Impacts of Future Events Climate change related risks either from impacts of future physical events or net-zero policy and transition failure could lead to both economic and operational resilience challenges. |  |  | Our internal climate change risk scenario analysis, is considered as part of our ICAAP scenario testing, and identifies related risks covering government policies (net-zero transition) and physical events such as severe flooding in certain UK regions.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 9

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Financial overview
In 2025, we made great progress in our ambition to become the best bank for customers.
Our 2025 financial results reflect strong business performance, with an increase in profit before tax in the year, mainly due to higher income, and lower costs and
provision charges, partly offset by higher transformation costs.
2025 saw a return to growth in our balance sheet after several years of deleveraging. Customer loans and deposits increased, with broad based growth across all
segments. As a result, we saw an improved customer funding gap.
Our balance sheet remains robust, with strong asset and credit quality. We are well capitalised and continue to have a strong liquidity and funding position. Our
CET1 capital ratio increased due to ongoing organic capital generation and almost no dividend for 2025, in anticipation of the proposed acquisition of TSB. We
remain focused on capital efficiency.
Our financial results
Summarised consolidated income statement

| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Net interest income | 4,380 | 4,312
Non-interest income 1 | 349 | 345
Total operating income | 4,729 | 4,657
Operating expenses before credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | (2,457) | (2,548)
Credit impairment charges | (193) | (71)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges | (597) | (689)
Profit before tax | 1,482 | 1,349
Tax on profit | (396) | (378)
Profit after tax | 1,086 | 971

1 Comprises ‘Net fee and commission income’ and ‘Other operating income’.
– Profit before tax increased to £1,482m in 2025, a 10% increase from 2024. This increase reflects higher income, and lower costs and provision charges, partially
offset by higher transformation costs.
– Net interest income increased 2%, driven by lower cost of deposits and supported by our structural hedge.
– Non-interest income was up 1%, mainly due to higher retail and corporate fee income.
– Operating expenses before credit impairment charges, provisions and charges were down 4%, driven by simplification and automation, including a 12-month
headcount reduction of over 2,700 FTE.
– Cost management discipline will remain a key focus for management throughout 2026.
– Credit impairment charges were up £122m, trending to pre-pandemic levels, as previously guided.
– Provisions for other liabilities and charges were down 13%, mainly due to a lower provision charge in 2025 relating to historical motor finance commission
payments, partly offset by higher transformation related charges.
– Tax on profit increase d by 5%, reflecting the increase in profit before tax in the year.
Motor Finance
Further to the publication of the FCA’s consultation paper on 7 October 2025 regarding a proposed industry-wide motor finance consumer redress scheme
(Consultation), the Santander UK group has reassessed the potential financial impact arising from motor finance related redress payments. The Santander UK group
responded to the Consultation and continues to engage constructively with the FCA in respect of its detailed consideration of the Consultation proposals.
Based on its detailed consideration, the Santander UK group considers that there remains significant uncertainty regarding the ultimate outcome of the
Consultation.
The Santander UK group recognised a provision of £295m in its financial results for 2024. This provision was determined based upon the information then available.
It included estimates for operational and legal costs and potential awards based on various scenarios and used a range of assumptions, including the possible
outcome of an appeal to the Supreme Court in 2025 of the Court of Appeal’s decision in Hopcraft.
The Santander UK group has updated its range of scenarios which has resulted in an additional estimated charge of £183m, increasing the total provision to £461m.
The provision is based on various scenarios using a range of assumptions, including potential changes to the proposed scheme following responses to the
Consultation or publication of the FCA’s final scheme rules.
There continue to be significant uncertainties as to the nature, extent and timing of redress payments. The ultimate financial impact could be materially higher or
lower than the amount provided.
For more, see Note 27 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 10

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Summarised segmental balance sheet
At 31 December | 2025 | 2024
| £bn | £bn
Customer loans by segment |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 173.5 | 171.7
Consumer Finance | 5.0 | 4.8
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 18.9 | 18.0
Corporate Centre | — | —
Customer loans | 197.4 | 194.5
Loans to JVs, accrued interest, ECL and other | 5.2 | 4.9
Loans and advances to customers | 202.6 | 199.4
Cash, repos, other financial assets and other assets non-interest earning | 64.2 | 60.5
Total assets | 266.8 | 259.9
Customer deposits by segment |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 155.7 | 151.8
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 24.4 | 22.1
Corporate Centre | 3.5 | 2.8
Customer deposits | 183.6 | 176.7
Deposits from JVs, accrued interest and other | 3.7 | 4.2
Deposits by customers | 187.3 | 181.0
Financial liabilities, repos and other liabilities non-interest earning | 64.4 | 65.2
Total liabilities | 251.7 | 246.2
Shareholders' equity | 15.1 | 13.8
Total liabilities and equity | 266.8 | 259.9

2025 saw a return to growth in our balance sheet after several years of deleveraging. Customer loans and deposits increased, with broad based growth across all
segments. As a result, we saw an improved customer funding gap.
Our loan portfolio continues to underpin the performance of our balance sheet and has performed well throughout the cycle.
As a lender who is primarily focused on UK mortgages, our mortgage portfolio accounts for 85% (2024: 84%) of customer loans and has a relatively low stock loan-
to-value ratio of 52% (2024: 51%).
Mortgage loans increased to £167.3bn (Dec-24: £165.1bn) and we saw higher gross mortgage lending in 2025 of £25.3bn (2024: £16.1bn) with £14.7bn in H2-25
and £10.6bn in H1-25. We also c ompleted the sale of £1.2bn of high RWA mortgage loans in Q3-25 with positive capital generation.
Unsecured retail lending, which includes credit cards, overdrafts and UPLs continued to account for 3% (2024: 3%) of our portfolio. Consumer Finance accounted for
3% (2024: 3%) of the loan book at the year-end and is largely collateralised on vehicles.
Our corporate loan customers remain well diversified across sectors. Customers remain largely resilient, with an overall improvement in asset quality in the year.
We maintain relatively low exposures to Commercial Real Estate (CRE) and Buy-To-Let (BTL).
Arrears remain low. Loans in Stage 2 and Stage 3 improved, highlighting underlying asset quality and the sale of high RWA mortgage loans in Q3-25.
The Stage 3 ratio 1 of our loan book was 1.18%, down 24bps from Dec-24, 13bps of which was due to the sale of high RWA mortgage loans in Q3-25.
Customer deposits increased to £183.6bn (Dec-24: £176.7bn) driven by growth across all segments. In Retail & Business Banking, Savings increased following a
successful ISA season, successful deposit campaigns, including cahoot, and customer migration from Current Accounts.
1 Non-IFRS measure

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 11

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Segmental performance
We continue to manage our business through three core operating segments plus the Corporate Centre. We work closely with our Banco Santander colleagues in
Spain and across Europe to ensure consistency and to leverage shared investment, best practice, and expertise.
Our business segments
Retail & Business Banking - provides UK residential mortgages for customers with good credit quality, lending and banking services and unsecured lending to
individuals and small businesses.
Corporate & Commercial Banking - provides banking products and services to SMEs, mid-sized and larger corporates.
Consumer Finance - provides prime auto consumer financing for cars, vans, motorbikes and leisure vehicles.
Corporate Centre - provides treasury services for asset and liability management of our balance sheet.
Retail & Business Banking remained focused on growing our franchise, by delivering more value for our customers with new propositions and improved digital
journeys, while maintaining a human touch for the moments that matter. At the same time, we continued to transform the bank and deploy capital effectively.
We expanded our Santander Edge product with the launch of Edge Explorer, a premium product offering customers a range of insurance and lifestyle benefits,
cashback and access to a preferential savings rate. We also consolidated our Business Banking proposition into one product, the Business Current Account Classic to
ensure a consistent offering.
We enhanced our mobile apps, OneApp and Kingfisher, with 15 new releases in 2025 and enhanced our customer journeys, launching new digital onboarding for
Business Banking and credit cards. For mortgage customers, we strengthened their digital experience through improvements to My Home Manager and partnered
with Energy Saving Trust (EST) to deliver a new online Home Energy Saving Tool to help homeowners make energy efficiencies and reduce their household bills.
Customer loans and deposits grew with targeted competitive pricing. Profit before tax of £1,291m (2024: £1,224m) was up, mainly due to higher income, and
lower costs, partly offset by higher credit impairment charges and transformation costs, including charges relating to changes in our branch network.
Consumer Finance maintains a prime portfolio, with 98% of lending secured on the vehicle and relatively low levels of default. Customer loans increased slightly in
2025, and we continue to focus on value and capital generation.
In 2025, our Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) partners were responsible for 24% of all new car registrations in the UK, and 30% of new business was for
green assets (i.e. electric vehicles and hybrids), with tailpipe emissions under 50CO 2 e/km.
Loss before tax of £76m (2024: loss before tax of £175m) decreased, mainly due to lower provision charges in respect of historical motor finance commission
payments
Corporate & Commercial Banking (CCB) continued to focus on high-value and international business, with over 400 new clients onboarded in 2025. We saw a
higher proportion being internationally active and choosing to transfer their prime banking.
We saw a significant increase in corporate facilities and grew our participation in the Government Growth Guarantee Scheme which provided additional access to
finance SMEs.
Working closely with Banco Santander, we increased support for multinational businesses arriving in the UK, whilst helping exporters that are reaching out into new
overseas markets.
We launched our new Navigator Global platform that provides online, personalised support for businesses looking to expand overseas.
Profit before tax of £324m (2024: £351m) was down, mainly due to higher credit impairment charges, partly offset by cost discipline.
Corporate Centre loss before tax increased slightly to £57m in 2025 (2024: loss before tax of £51m) due to lower non-interest income and increased credit
impairment charges, mostly offset by higher income on liquid assets.
Strong liquidity, funding and capital position
We remain strongly capitalised, with our capital position well above the regulatory requirements and remain focused on capital efficiency. CET1 capital ratio
increased to 15.8% due to ongoing organic capital generation and almost no dividend for 2025, partially offset by higher RWAs.
A strong LCR of 162% (Dec-24: 154%), increased largely due to a reduction in the customer funding gap in 2025.
Our diversified funding across well-established issuance programmes across a range of currencies and classes continued in 2025. We issued £10.5bn in Sterling
equivalent medium-term funding, including Covered Bond, RMBS, AT1 and Senior Unsecured issuances.
We repaid £7.1bn of TFSME in 2025, with an outstanding balance of £3.9bn at the year-end, of which £2.5bn is due for repayment in 2027 and £1.4bn is due in
2031.
The structural hedge position decreased to £103bn at Dec-25 (Dec-24: £110bn), as we position ourselves well for further Bank Rate reductions.
Looking ahead
Following our return to growth in 2025, we expect to see net lending growth continue in 2026.
Our structural hedge position keeps us well positioned for further Bank Rate reductions.
We expect further cost efficiencies in 2026, driven by simplification and automation of our business.
Sustainability overview
At Santander UK, we are here to help people and businesses prosper. Our core business is critical to this, but we also know that we need to go beyond banking. For
us, prosperity includes opportunity, fairness, and resilience for our customers, communities, and our people. It also means working with stakeholders to support a
just and orderly transition to a more sustainable future.
Further detailed information on the progress of our Sustainability strategy is provided in the 2025 Sustainability Supplement. The Supplement is published on the
Santander UK website and does not form part of this Annual Report. It includes the results of a limited assurance exercise on specific sustainability metrics.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 12

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Non-Financial and Sustainability Information Statement
The Company’s disclosures under Section 414CA and 414CB of the Companies Act 2006, are included in the Strategic Report in Santander UK Group Holdings plc’s
Annual Report which reports on behalf of that company and its subsidiaries, including the Company.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 13

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Section 172: Stakeholder voice
The Boards of the Company and Santander UK Group Holdings plc (the Boards) have identified our customers, employees, regulators, communities and investors as
our key stakeholder groups on the basis of their importance in ensuring the continuing success of Santander UK. While not a stakeholder in the strictest sense, we
also take into account our impact on the environment and climate given its criticality to life and business in general, and as required by s172 Companies Act 2006
(s172).
Balancing the interests of these stakeholder groups alongside the interests of Santander UK is key to ensuring that we operate as a sustainable, responsible and
profitable business, and we therefore seek to ensure that this is embedded in our strategy and culture.
To support the Boards and their Committees in their considerations, our Board paper template and training includes a specific focus on the directors' duties arising
from s172 and how management's preparation of their papers plays a key role in ensuring that the Directors can discharge their responsibilities in a fully informed
manner.
In 2025, the Boards continued to spend time, inside and outside of formal meetings, engaging with stakeholders and discussing their interests, including visiting
branches, contact centres and offices around the UK to better understand the needs of our customers, employees and communities. You can read more about
Directors’ engagement with employee networks in 2025 below.
Each Director meets with our principal regulators, the PRA and FCA, on a periodic basis to understand their views, and these regulators also attend our Board
meetings from time to time. The Board meets regularly with members of management and the directors of Banco Santander SA, the Company’s shareholder, and,
as usual, the Board held its March 2025 Board cycle in Madrid in order to strengthen relations and understand Banco Santander’s views more clearly.

Section 172 matters |  | A. The likely consequences of any decision in the long term B. The interests of the company’s employees C. The need to foster the company’s business relationships with suppliers, customers and others D. The impact of the company's operations on the community and the environment E. The desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for high standards of business conduct
Social Strategy |  |
Section 172 matters |  | A, B, C, D, E
Stakeholders considered |  | Customers, Employees, Communities
Background In Spring 2025, the Boards approved Santander UK’s Social Strategy, providing a clear framework to support productive and inclusive growth for customers, communities and employees. The strategy prioritises financial inclusion and financial health for customers, supporting communities through skills development and creating a productive and inclusive workplace for colleagues.
How the Board approached it The Boards considered the Social Strategy in the context of their duties under s.172 and recognised the importance of aligning the strategy to Santander UK’s purpose and long-term success. There was a particular emphasis on delivering tangible benefits for customers and society, supporting customers to improve their financial health and access banking products and services that meet their needs. The Boards also examined how Santander UK could help communities to build the skills that improve career prospects.
Outcome The approval of the Social Strategy provided a clear mandate for management to strengthen support for customers’ financial inclusion and financial health, embedding these considerations more consistently into products, services and customer interactions. The strategy also reinforced Santander UK’s efforts for its communities, supporting initiatives that help individuals develop skills and improve employability, while strengthening the people agenda to support colleague wellbeing, skills development and inclusion. The Boards continue to receive updates on progress, ensuring that the Strategy delivers sustainable, long-term benefits for customers, communities and employees.
Employee Network Engagement |  |
Section 172 matters |  | B, C
Stakeholders considered |  | Employees
Background The Boards support Employee Networks through individual NED sponsorship. Each Network has a NED sponsor who stays informed on its activities and champions its priorities throughout the year. NED sponsors meet with their respective Networks at least annually, and in 2025 the Board met with the Networks collectively.
How the Board approached it In July 2025, the Boards invited employee Network Leads and members of their leadership teams to join them at an informal lunch. Each Board and Executive Committee Network Sponsor sat with their respective Network with the aim of the session to discuss opportunities for Network growth, as well as increasing Network impact and the current lived experiences of members working in Santander UK.
Outcome The Boards praised the engaging work undertaken by each of the Networks, highlighting the impact of their work as well as the motivation and drive of their members. In the context of transformation and acquisition activities, it was acknowledged that there was a degree of hesitancy from some individuals around speaking up due to concerns around negative perceptions on their capabilities or performance. The Boards noted therefore that it would be essential for Network sponsors and their respective Network Chairs to work together to create a safe and supportive environment where employees felt comfortable voicing their thoughts and concerns. we will also ensure that the work of the Networks is communicated and promoted not only within the Network community but more broadly to ensure alignment and reinforce trust. Clear actions were identified from the session along with designated owners responsible for addressing each to ensure accountability and follow-through on key points raised.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 14

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Sustainability

In this section |
Climate-related financial disclosures | 15
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) | 15

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 15

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Sustainability overview
Climate-related financial disclosures
Our Climate strategy supports our customers in the transition to a lower carbon economy, as we work to align our activity with the UN Paris Agreement. We are
implementing the recommendations of the TCFD, and taking action to meet the expectations set by the PRA, BoE and FCA. This requires wide-ranging collaboration
both within the bank and externally to develop the tools and methodologies needed. As such, we adopted a unified approach across the Santander UK Group
Holdings plc group and therefore present TCFD disclosures on that basis in the Santander UK Group Holdings plc Annual Report.
–
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR)
We continue to monitor and evaluate our energy use and carbon footprint in line with SECR regulations. Emissions are calculated using the UK Government
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) conversion factors. In 2025, we consumed 79,991,734 kWh of energy, compared to the 89,511,041 kWh
used in 2024. The reduction was primarily driven by the rationalisation of our head office estate. Electricity consumption also decreased, reflecting these head office
closures and the continued upgrade and optimisation of building systems to improve energy efficiency. Santander UK plc partially occupies our Triton Square office,
which is also used by other Banco Santander entities. As Santander UK plc holds operational control, including areas of the building that we do not directly occupy,
we have made the decision to fully account for its emission profile within the reporting for this entity. This approach was jointly agreed with Banco Santander and
has been in place since 2019, our baseline year. In 2025, we recorded 4,509 tCO 2 e of greenhouse gas emissions compared with 5,466 tCO 2 e in 2024. Our total
Scope 1, 2, and 3 emissions for 2025 are set out in the SECR table. In 2025, emissions from business travel reduced from 3,009 tCO2e to 2,394 tCO2e. The majority
of this reduction was driven by updates to the UK Government’s emission conversion factors, which lowered the calculated emissions compared to the prior year. In
addition, there was a modest reduction attributable to changes in travel behaviour. While total distance travelled increased during the year, the travel mix shifted
towards lower-emitting modes, including increased use of rail and electric vehicles. This lowered emissions per kilometre travelled and helped moderate the
impact of increased travel volumes.

| 2025 | 2024
Scope 1 tCO 2 e | 2,115 | 2,456
Scope 2 tCO 2 e (Location-based) | 12,339 | 16,195
Scope 2 tCO 2 e (Market-based) | — | 1.13
Scope 3 tCO 2 e (Business Travel) | 2,394 | 3,009
Total | 4,509 | 5,466
YoY % | (18)% | 3%
Total emissions per employee (tCO 2 e/FTE) | 0.3 | 0.3

Additional notes on GHG emissions calculations
Boundary
Scope 1-3 GHG emissions include the activities and facilities owned and/or under operational control of Santander UK plc.
Calculation
Scope 1: GHG emissions from oil, gas, direct transport, and fugitive gas emissions. Emissions calculations from these sources follow the GHG Protocol Corporate
Standard. Consumption and transport data is extracted from relevant source systems and records. Internal systems include meter readings, maintenance records,
mileage claims, and internal travel systems. External systems include bill validation systems and external supplier invoices. We use the relevant UK Government
Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) conversion factors and collate emissions into a total Scope 1 emissions figure.
Scope 2: GHG emissions from purchased electricity and electric fleet and company cars. For Santander UK, we use the market-based approach to quantify our
Scope 2 emissions. This means we use emissions factors provided by our electricity suppliers. For our Scope 2 emissions, this method reflects the emissions from
electricity we have purchased via green tariffs. These provide electricity from renewable sources including biomass and wind generation. Scope 2 emissions for electricity
consumption are calculated using the relevant UK Government DESNZ conversion factors and guidance. Emissions from electric vehicles are calculated using the Residual Mix
from DESNZ Fuel Mix Disclosure. Data for electricity consumption and travel by electric vehicles are extracted from relevant source systems including billing invoices and
mileage claims.
Scope 3 – Business travel: This includes GHG emissions from indirect travel that have not been included in Scope 1 and 2. Business travel by air, road, and rail is
included. Business travel records are taken from relevant internal systems or provided by our third-party travel administrator. The distance travelled in kilometres is
converted into GHG emissions using relevant factors from UK Government DESNZ and collated into a total for Scope 3 business travel emissions. Car data is based
on engine size, flight figures are based on average cabin seat class, and rail data is based on average cabin seat class. Rail figures are based on national rail
conversion factors. Taxi travel is excluded due to lack of mileage data. Business travel data expenses are recognised for reporting when they are logged into our
systems. There can be a small amount travel that occurred shortly before 1 January 2025 included in 2025 reporting. This is in line with the company policy grace
period for registering travel. We have completed the analysis to understand the impact of this approach, and we have deemed it immaterial compared to the total
amount of travel undertaken throughout the year.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 16

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Governance

In this section |
Governance overview | 17
Corporate Governance report | 18
| Chair's report on corporate governance | 18
Directors' Remuneration report | 28
| Remuneration policy report | 28
| Remuneration implementation report | 30
Directors' report | 34

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 17

Strategic Report | Sustainability and Responsible Banking | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Governance overview

Santander UK plc Board
Board Nomination & Governance Committee |  | Board Risk Committee |  | Board Audit Committee |  |  | Board Responsible Banking Committee |  | Board Special Projects Committee |  | Board Remuneration Committee
Executive level committees
Due to the alignment in Board membership, the Santander UK Group Holdings plc and Santander UK plc Board and Board Committees meet substantively simultaneously. As such, this report details the governance arrangements, practices and activities of both Santander UK Group Holdings plc's and Santander UK plc's Boards and Board Committees.

Board changes in 2025
12 February |  | 31 March |  | 16 May |  | 18 July |  | 30 September |  | 1 October |  | 3 October
Enrique Alvarez appointed 1 |  | Ed Giera resigned |  | Tom Scholar appointed 2 |  | William Vereker resigned |  | Dirk Marzluf resigned |  | Mahesh Aditya appointed |  | Mike Regnier announced intention to step down
1 Resigned from the Board on 25 February 2026. |  |  |  |
2 Tom Scholar became Chair on 18 July 2025

Compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code
The UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) sets out a framework of principles and provisions for corporate governance for premium listed companies in the UK. We feel that it is appropriate for a Company of our size and systemic importance to the UK economy to adopt the Code and as such, this Governance section details how we comply with its principles and provisions. Any sections of the Code that we do not comply with are explained in the Directors’ Report.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 18

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance

Our approach
Board and governance structure
Maintaining high standards of corporate
governance is vital to ensuring effective decision
making by the Board and therefore the ongoing
success of the Company. As well as voluntarily
applying the UK corporate Governance Code, as
far as is applicable to Santander UK, we adhere
to various internal governance frameworks and
practices which ensure that we have the right
systems and controls in place to allow the Board
to effectively oversee the business and provide
challenge where needed. These include:
– The UK Group Framework, which defines
clearly our responsibilities and relationship with
Banco Santander SA, our ultimate shareholder,
taking account of our fiduciary and regulatory
responsibilities. This gives us the autonomy to
discharge our responsibilities in the UK in line
with best practice as an independent board while
providing Banco Santander SA with the oversight
it needs. Clarity of roles and responsibilities is
key to ensuring proper accountability for
decisions and outcomes.
– The Corporate Governance Framework (CGF),
which is designed to support the Boards in
discharging their responsibilities and ensuring
an appropriate degree of delegation throughout
the Santander UK group.
We review the CGF regularly to confirm that
governance arrangements remain effective and
appropriate. The corporate governance structure is
supported by internal control and risk management
systems. An important principle applied throughout
the CGF is the delegation of the day to day running
of the business by the Board to the CEO, who
further delegates aspects of their authority to
Executive level committees or other individuals.
This supports effective decision making and
accountability in discharging their responsibilities.
Santander UK group structure and ring-fencing
governance arrangements
The substantive business of the Santander UK
group continues to be conducted by Santander UK
plc, our principal ring-fenced bank (RFB). Ring-
fenced banks operate within governance rules
defined and overseen by the PRA who has granted
Santander UK plc certain ring-fencing governance
rule modifications, recognising our ownership
structure and chosen business model. These ring-
fencing rule modifications have allowed us to
simplify our governance arrangements while not
losing strength, including the ability to have
common Santander UK Group Holdings plc
and Santander UK plc Board and Board Committee
memberships, subject to certain safeguards. The
composition of the Board and Board Committees of
the two companies are fully aligned.
One of the safeguards agreed is that if a conflict
matter (as defined by the PRA) arises between the
two companies, three INEDs holding PRA senior
management functions (SMF) will have veto rights
on Board decisions. These INEDs are Nicky Morgan,
Mark Lewis and David Oldfield. Nicky Morgan
would chair the RFB Board meeting in the event of a
conflict matter decision.
The role and responsibilities of the Board
The Board is collectively responsible for promoting
the success of Santander UK for the benefit of its
shareholders, taking into account the likely impact
of our decisions in the long-term, as well as
balancing the interests of our other stakeholders
and our contribution to wider society. Our Section
172: Stakeholder voice statement in the Strategic
Report explains how we engaged with our
stakeholders in the year and provides some
meaningful examples of how we have taken
stakeholders into consideration in our decision
making.
The key decisions and matters reserved for the
Board's approval, such as the long-term strategy
and priorities, are set out in the CGF. A copy of the
Schedule of Matters Reserved for the Board is also
available on our website, which does not form part
of this Annual Report.
The Chair, has overall responsibility for the
leadership of the Board, for ensuring its
effectiveness in all aspects of operation and for
promoting a culture of openness and debate. These
responsibilities are formalised in the CGF. The
composition of the Board helps to ensure that no
one individual or small group dominates the
Board's decision-making. The diversity of skills,
experience and background of Directors enables
them to provide constructive challenge, strategic
guidance and offer specialist advice.
There is a clear division of responsibilities between
the leadership of the Board and the executive
leadership of the business. The responsibilities of
the Chair, CEO, Senior Independent Director (SID)
and Executive and Non-Executive Directors (NEDs)
are agreed by the Board and set out in separate role
statements within the CGF and are available on our
website, which does not form part of this Annual
Report. The Board is also supported by its
Committees, who make decisions and
recommendations on specific responsibilities
delegated to them. This enables the Board to spend
more of its time on business performance and
strategic, forward-looking matters.
Board Committees
The Committees play an essential role in
supporting the Board, giving focused oversight
of key areas and aspects of the business. Their
roles and responsibilities are set out in their
Terms of Reference which are available at
aboutsantander.co.uk and which do not form part
of this Annual Report. The Terms of Reference are
regularly reviewed by each Committee to make
sure they remain appropriate. Cross-Committee
membership provides visibility and awareness of
matters relevant across the Committees, and the
chair of each Committee reports back to the Board
on its activities after each meeting.
In addition to our six core Board Committees,
shown on the previous page, the Boards are also
supported by committees which are stood up as
needed to allow dedicated time for topics at a more
focused forum.
Each of the core Committees is chaired by and
comprised of only INEDs, except for the Board
Nomination & Governance Committee, where
Pamela Walkden, a Banco Santander group
appointed NED (GNED) is a member.
How governance contributes to the delivery of
our strategy
Our governance arrangements contribute to the
development and delivery of our strategy by
promoting accountability and responsibility, and
ensuring information flows and independent
insight from the NEDs.
While all Directors are collectively responsible for
the success of the Company and are expected to
exercise independent judgement, the INEDs bring
external perspective, objective judgement in
respect of Board decisions, and provide
constructive challenge to management. Directors
also have collective responsibilities for the integrity
of financial information, internal controls and risk
management systems.
As a Board, we are responsible for ensuring that the
business is purpose-led and that our decision
making and activities reflect our core purpose to
help people and businesses prosper. We do this by
setting and developing our strategy, approving risk
appetite, frameworks and policies and overseeing
their delivery and implementation by management.
The Board is accountable to our shareholders for
the proper conduct of the business and seeks to
consider the interests of all stakeholders.
The Board has identified the following key
stakeholders: customers, employees, regulators,
communities and investors. For more on how the
Board balances the interests of these stakeholders,
see Stakeholder voice statement in the Strategic
Report.
Culture and hearing the views of the workforce
at the Board
The Board recognises that culture plays a
fundamental role in delivering our strategic
priorities and ensuring the success of the business.
We are ultimately responsible for ensuring that we
lead by example and that our activities reflect the
culture we wish to instill throughout the business
to deliver on our values of simple, personal and fair.
Every year we hold one Board meeting at one of
our regional offices, when we have the opportunity
to meet local staff, and listening to their views.
Our Code of Conduct sets out how we and all
employees of Santander UK should act and behave
towards everyone we encounter through our work.
This, alongside our TEAMS behaviours - Think
Customer, Embrace Change, Act Now, Move
Together and Speak Up - contribute to drive our
culture and maintain the standards that underpin it.
All new employees are required to complete
training on the Code of Conduct and annual
refresher training is required for all employees.
Our employees are central to delivering our
strategy, and the Board ensures continuous
engagement with them to create a culture of
inclusivity and belonging, and a healthy working
environment.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 19

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Throughout the year, the Board received feedback
from colleagues via a number of mechanisms
including reports from Peakon employee voice
surveys, considering matters such as future ways of
working. Directors also engaged with colleagues
directly, participating in employee listening, visiting
offices, branches and contact centres and inviting
our eight people networks, which each have a
Board sponsor, to a Board lunch to hear about their
activities and needs. Our people engagement is led
by our designated workforce NED, Lisa Fretwell,
who also had regular meetings with the Chief
People Officer and Head of Culture and Experience
to discuss results and emerging themes from the
employees. These activities help to ensure that the
views of the workforce are made known to the
Board and that workforce policies and practices are
consistent with the Company's values,
The right information and support
The Chair, supported by the Company Secretary,
ensures that all Board members receive
appropriate and timely information. All Directors
have access to the advice of the Company Secretary
and the Company provides access, at its expense, to
the services of independent professional advisers
to help the Directors discharge their role.
Board membership & succession planning
Through the work of the Board Nomination &
Governance Committee, we make sure there is the
right mix of individuals on the Board, giving an
appropriate balance of knowledge, skills, experience
and perspectives. Our aim to ensure orderly succession
for Board positions is supported by continuous
and proactive review, taking into account our strategic
priorities and the main trends and factors affecting the
sustainability and success of the business. We oversee
and regularly review the development of a diverse
pipeline for succession.
William Vereker stepped down as Chair on 18 July
2025. The Board would like to thank William for the
invaluable role he played in steering the business
through some of the most challenging circumstances
in recent times, including Covid and the Cost of Living
Crisis.In addition to me joining the Board, in 2025,
we welcomed Enrique Alvarez Labiano as an
Executive Director (ED) and Mahesh Aditya as
Group-nominated Director (GNED). Enrique
subsequently stepped down from the Board after a
year of service. Mahesh succeeded Dirk Marzluf as
a GNED. David Oldfield succeeded Ed Giera as chair
of the Board Risk Committee (BRC) in March 2025.
We would like to thank Dirk and Ed for their
commitment and valuable contributions and
insights during their tenure.
Nicky Morgan was appointed as SID with effect
from 20 February 2025, succeeding Ed Giera.
In October 2025, Mike Regnier announced his
intention to step down as CEO and Executive
Director in 2026. Following a thorough and
comprehensive succession process, the Board
appointed Mahesh Aditya as CEO, with effect from
1 March 2026. The Board is very grateful to Mike
for his remarkable leadership and drive over the
last four years. He has delivered significant and
very valuable transformation during his tenure,
while also strengthening our culture through what
has been a period of significant change. The Board
looks forward to working with Mahesh as he leads
the next phase of Santander UK’s development.
On 5 March 2026, the Board approved the
appointment of Victoria Roig and Manuel Preto as
GNEDs, with effect from 13 March 2026. These
appointments further strengthen the breadth and
experience on the Board.
At 31 December 2025, the Board consisted of the
Chair (independent on appointment), seven INEDs,
three EDs and three GNEDs. Biographies of the
Directors are available at aboutsantander.co.uk,
which does not form part of this Annual Report. The
letters of appointment for INEDs and GNEDs are
available at the Company’s registered office and at
the Annual General Meeting (AGM).
Appointment and retirement of Directors
The Company's Articles of Association require each
Director to retire every year at the AGM and any
Director may offer themselves for re-election by
members. For more, see the Directors’ report.
Monitoring independence
The Board Nomination & Governance Committee
monitors whether there are relationships or
circumstances which may affect a Director's
independence, and have concluded that all INEDs
remain independent in character and judgement.
The Chair was independent on appointment when
assessed against the circumstances set out in
Provision 10 of the Code. No INEDs have a material
relationship with the Company nor receive
additional remuneration to Directors' fees. In
addition, no INEDs serve as directors of any external
companies or affiliates in which any other Director
is also a director.
Monitoring Director interests, time commitment,
and fees
The Board Nomination & Governance Committee is
responsible for oversight of conflicts of interest.
Each Director has a duty under the Companies Act
2006 to avoid a situation in which they have or may
have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or
may conflict, with the interests of the Company.
This duty is in addition to the existing duty Directors
owe to the Company to disclose to the Board any
interest in a transaction or arrangement under
consideration by the Company.
The Board Nomination & Governance Committee
continued to review the time commitment and
Directors' potential conflicts of interest to ensure
that any such conflicts are managed appropriately,
including compliance with CRD IV and ring-fencing
requirements.
In accordance with Provision 15 of the Code, any
proposed external appointments are required to be
disclosed to the Board, before appointment, with
an indication of the expected time commitment. All
Directors continue to devote sufficient time to their
roles at the Company. The Board considers and, if it
sees fit, authorises situational conflicts.
Any authorisations given are recorded by the
Company Secretary and Directors are asked to
certify, on an annual basis, that the data in the
register is correct.
The fees paid to INEDs for Board and Board
Committee chairmanship and membership were
unchanged in 2025. Adjustments to individual
INEDs' total fees were solely due to changes in
their responsibilities, such as appointment or
cessation of committee roles or assumption of a
committee chair or other notable position. For
more, see the Remuneration Implementation
Report.
Director induction and training
The Company Secretary supports the Chair in
designing individual inductions for NEDs, which
include site visits and cover topics like strategy,
balance sheet and capital, risk and compliance, and
current issues including the legal and regulatory
landscape.
Directors who assume new or additional
responsibilities during the year, including
membership of a new Board Committee, receive
tailored induction or handover support as
appropriate. Committee Chairs also agree
committee-specific training and workshop sessions
where relevant. Directors are provided with
ongoing opportunities to undertake further
development on key topics.
During the year, workshops covered cyber
readiness, enhancing understanding of
containment considerations during a cyber incident;
the corporate technology and operations
framework; adoption of the Go-To Model; the
Recovery Plan; and Digital Internal Audit. These
sessions are designed to ensure that the Board
remains well informed on matters relevant to
Santander UK and is equipped to discharge its
duties and responsibilities effectively.
Board meetings in the year
We held 12 Board meetings in 2025. As part of our
governance cycle, the Board held a dedicated Board
Strategy day, to consider the five year road map
and ensure alignment between executive priorities
and shareholder interest at a time of rapid
technological change. Meetings of the Company
were held concurrently with Santander UK Group
Holdings plc.
Regular updates are provided to the Board by the
Chair, each of the Committee Chairs, the CEO, CFO
and CRO. We have a comprehensive and
continuous agenda setting and escalation process
to enable the Directors to take decisions efficiently
and effectively. The Chair, leads the Board agenda
setting process, assisted by the Company Secretary
and with input from the CEO, with a view to
ensuring that enough time is set aside for strategic
discussions and business critical items. Together
with the Committee Chairs, we ensure Board and
Committee meetings are structured to facilitate
open discussion, debate and challenge. The NEDs
also receive regular updates from management to
give context to current issues, and there is always
time allowed on each Board agenda for discussion
between the NEDs without the EDs present.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 20

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Board activities in the year
The Chair, together with the CEO and Company Secretary, and supported by the Directors and senior management, make sure that the Boards have an appropriate
schedule for the year. This is focused on the opportunities to drive growth and profitability of the business, transformation to support its success, business
performance and risk management, customer experience and outcomes, and remaining apprised of the external operating environment. It includes ensuring the
Company is run in a responsible and sustainable way in the interests of its stakeholders, and ensuring that the Company’s culture is aligned with its purpose, values,
and strategy.
The Boards ensure regular contact with management and employees through several means. These include inviting relevant business and function heads to
present to the Board or its Committees on latest developments; challenges and opportunities, sharing successes and allowing directors to provide advice and
oversight; supporting senior management development plans by welcoming them as observers; scheduling regular meetings for Committee Chairs with relevant
senior managers; site visits by NEDs; and topical or technical workshops. INEDs are also available to Senior leaders for advice and support.
The Boards regularly monitor progress against the strategic priorities and performance targets of the business, and in 2025, once again held a separate Board
Strategy Day. This was an opportunity to look at a longer-term horizon to consider the type of bank we want to become over the next five years, at a time of rapid
technological and competitive change. The Board discussed options to radically transform our operating model by leveraging global scale and capabilities. External
presenters gave their thoughts on opportunities for Santander in the AI space, and around high-performance culture.
In July 2025, Banco Santander announced an agreement to acquire 100% of TSB Banking Group plc (TSB) from Banco de Sabadell. The Board considered the
acquisition of TSB and the governance arrangements around the acquisition and integration, providing oversight of the Change in Control regulatory application
process. The transaction remains subject to regulatory approval. This acquisition is an opportunity to accelerate our strategy to create the best bank in the UK for our
customers and demonstrates Banco Santander's long-term commitment and confidence in the UK.
Alignment with Banco Santander group strategy is also strengthened by holding one board cycle in Madrid each year, providing the Boards with opportunities to
interact with executives and senior management of Banco Santander SA. An annual Board offsite held at one of the UK regional offices provides an opportunity for
the Board to interact informally and listen to colleagues's views. This year we have incorporated a customer engagement session to hear about external
perspectives, local business environment and general economic landscape.
The Board aims to consider the views of all impacted stakeholders, whilst acting in the best interests of the Company and its members as a whole, as set out in the
Stakeholder Voice statement in the Strategic report. In 2025, the Boards and Board Committees participated in the workshops listed below to consider important
topics in depth and to engage with key stakeholders. To ensure the most effective use of the time at Board meetings, informal discussions between Board members
and senior management took place on a regular basis.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 21

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

| –
Theme | Action taken by the Board and outcomes | Stakeholders considered
Business and Customer Strategy | – As part of the Board Strategy Day, considered approaches to transforming the operating model to improve outcomes for customers and stakeholders, and strategies for using technology and scale to enhance time to market, customer satisfaction and operational efficiency. – Discussed reports on performance against strategy from principal business areas including: – Corporate and Commercial Banking – Retail and Business Banking, including Mortgages and the re-launch of our Business Banking offering – Private Banking and Select – Payments and cards – Considered our strategic workforce plan and strategy to optimise the real estate portfolio. – Considered our marketing and communication plan and its alignment with Santander global operating model to leverage tech capabilities. – Reviewed, challenged, and approved the 3-year business plan (2026-2028) and the 2025 budget, including assumptions underpinning the plan. – Conducted a customer engagement session to gather insight on customer's views of the economic landscape, including customer's business risk and opportunities. – Received periodic updates on the progress of the TSB acquisition and market outlook and competitor insights. | Customers Investors Employees
Transformation including leveraging Banco Santander scale | –Reviewed initiatives and opportunities to collaborate and leverage resources and capability across Europe and the Banco Santander group, including approving the Banco Santander Go-to Model strategy and Technology & Operation Corporate Framework. –Received regular reports on progress driving operational efficiencies and management’s revised approach to strategic change management and investment prioritisation. –Received a demonstration of the agile working practices and their implementation in the Cards and Payments and Financial Crime businesses. –Considered the AI data strategy and received a demonstration on AI use cases. –Participated in workshops delivered on operationalising the Banco Santander's Go-to Model technology and operations framework and the UK adoption of the Go-To Model. –Considered the impact of a high-performance culture in the transformation of Santander UK. | Customers Investors Employees
People and Culture | –In addition to reports from the Board Responsible Banking Committee (RBC) on delivery of the culture strategy, the Board participated in several informal activities to assess the culture and sentiment of employee cohorts including our top female talent. –Participated in engagement activities throughout the year including listening events, branch and head office visits where two-way interaction was encouraged and valuable feedback shared, as well as an engagement event with the Santander Network leads where key inclusive culture priorities were discussed. –Considered employees' ways of working and opportunities to enhance collaboration across teams. –Considered succession planning across all key control, support functions and business functions. | Customers Employees
Audit, risk, compliance and control | –Received regular enterprise-wide risk updates from the CRO, and updates on specific risks, such as third-party outsourcing, IT, data management, financial crime compliance, fraud, sustainability, cyber security, operational resilience, strategic transformation, payment systems, treasury, corporate credit, retail credit and inflation. The Board closely monitored overall operational risk given the ongoing extensive transformation agenda. –Considered financial crime remediation, including oversight of programmes to enhance controls and regulatory engagement, and progress made to return Santander UK plc to Board Risk Appetite on a sustainable basis. –Reviewed and approved the Consumer Duty report on recommendation of the RBC, recognising the valuable enhancements it had made to customer outcomes and value. –As part of the annual review, approved the Risk Appetite Statement and the Risk Framework, the tax strategy and the operational resilience self-assessment. –Approved the 2025 Internal Audit plan and received annual reports on whistleblowing. –Participated in a crisis readiness workshop based on a cyber scenario. Discussed an internal report on the approach to ongoing oversight of the UK Ring Fence Bank Group and other elements of Santander UK control framework. Participated in an Internal Audit digitalisation workshop to explore how digital initiatives are reshaping the way we deliver assurance and prepare for the future. | Customers Employees Regulators
Regulation, Balance Sheet and Capital | –On recommendation of the BRC, reviewed, challenged, and approved the ICAAP, ILAAP, adequacy and effectiveness of stress-testing and capital management, AT1 payments and ordinary and preference share dividend payments in line with PRA guidance. The Board followed the methodology set out in the Board-approved Surplus Capital Allocation Framework to determine the assessment and utilisation of surplus capital. Approved a revised Dividend Policy and Surplus Capital Allocation Framework amid the proposed TSB acquisition and latest Total Capital Requirements from the PRA. Considered and approved a management proposal to reduce the share premium account of Santander UK plc by £4.5bn and increase its retained earnings by the same amount, which received Court approval with effective date September 2025. –Approved the 2025 Recovery Plan; received regular reports on recovery and resolution; participated in a Recovery and Resolution workshop testing in line with the Board's ongoing commitment to maintaining the Santander UK group's Recovery and Resolution planning capabilities. –Considered the future regulatory landscape and implications, as well as considering regular reports from the General Counsel on | Customers Investors Regulators
Governance and Responsible Banking | – Invited the PRA to provide an overview of the Periodic Summary Meeting letter. Participated in an internally-facilitated Board evaluation led by the Chair and monitored progress against 2024 action plan from the externally-facilitated Board evaluation. – Approved appointments to the Board on the recommendation of the Board Nomination & Governance Committee. Approved the appointment of the new CRO, CEO and Chair. – Reviewed, challenged, and approved the 2024 Annual Report. – Reviewed and approved the Complaints Monitoring risk appetite change, the Social Mobility Strategy, the Modern Slavery report, the Employee Code of Conduct and the FSCS Single Customer view effectiveness report. Considered and approved the adoption of certain changes to the Santander Group Subsidiary Governance Model and guidelines for subsidiaries. | Communities Regulators Climate

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 22

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Board and Board Committee attendance

| Board |  | Board Nomination & Governance Committee |  | Board Risk Committee |  | Board Audit Committee |  | Board Responsible Banking Committee |  | Board Special Projects Committee |  | Board Remuneration Committee |
| Scheduled | Ad hoc |  | Scheduled | Ad hoc |  | Scheduled | Ad hoc |  | Scheduled | Ad hoc |  | Scheduled | Ad hoc |  | Scheduled | Ad hoc |  | Scheduled | Ad hoc |
Chair |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
William Vereker 1 | 5/5 | – |  | 4/4 | 0/4 |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |
Tom Scholar | 6/6 | 2/2 |  | 3/3 | 1/1 |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |
Independent NEDs |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Lisa Fretwell 2 | 8/9 | 1/3 |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | 7/8 | 6/7 |  | 5/5 | – |  | – | – |  | 7/7 | 0/1 |
Ed Giera 1 | 2/2 | – |  | 2/2 | 4/4 |  | 2/2 | 1/1 |  | 2/2 | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | 2/2 | – |
Dave Gledhill 2&3 | 9/9 | 1/3 |  | – | – |  | 5/5 | 4/4 |  | 8/8 | 4/7 |  | 5/5 | – |  | 8/8 | 4/7 |  | 7/7 | 0/1 |
Michelle Hinchliffe 2 | 9/9 | 3/3 |  | 6/6 | 5/5 |  | 7/7 | 3/4 |  | 8/8 | 5/7 |  | – | – |  | 8/8 | 5/7 |  | – | – |
Mark Lewis 2 | 9/9 | 2/3 |  | 6/6 | 5/5 |  | 7/7 | 4/4 |  | – | – |  | 4/5 | – |  | – | – |  | 7/7 | 1/1 |
Nicky Morgan 2 | 9/9 | 3/3 |  | 6/6 | 5/5 |  | 7/7 | 3/4 |  | – | – |  | 5/5 | – |  | 8/8 | 6/7 |  | – | – |
David Oldfield 2 | 9/9 | 3/3 |  | 4/4 | 3/3 |  | 7/7 | 4/4 |  | 8/8 | 6/7 |  | – | – |  | 8/8 | 6/7 |  | 6/7 | 1/1 |
Jose Maria Roldan | 9/9 | 3/3 |  | – | – |  | 7/7 | 4/4 |  | – | – |  | 5/5 | – |  | – | – |  | 7/7 | 1/1 |
Banco Santander GNEDs |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Mahesh Aditya 3 | 3/3 | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |
Pedro Castro e Almeida 2 | 8/9 | 2/2 |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |
Dirk Marzluf 3 | 6/6 | 1/2 |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |
Pamela Walkden 2 | 9/9 | 1/3 |  | 6/6 | 5/5 |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |  | – | – |
Executive Directors |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Enrique Alvarez | 8/8 | 2/2 |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |
Mike Regnier | 9/9 | 2/2 |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |
Angel Santodomingo 2 | 9/9 | 1/2 |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |  | – |  |

1 With effect from 18 July 2025, William Vereker stepped down from the Board and, with effect from 31 March 2025, Ed Giera stepped down from the Board Risk Committee.
2 Meetings not attended due to Directors' prior commitments/ Board or Board Committee composition changes.
3 For dates of Board appointments or resignations in the year, see the timeline on the 'Governance overview' page. Appointments to, or resignations from, the relevant Board Committees were aligned to these dates
unless stated otherwise.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 23

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Board diversity
The Board values the unique perspective that
each Director and Santander employee brings
to work every day. Diverse views encourage the
sharing of a wide range of perspectives and ideas
alongside challenging and raising concerns for
good decision making. The basis of this premise
applies to our Boards and Board Committees as
much as it does to any other area of our
organisation.
We recognise that the Board sets the tone for an
inclusive culture and that our success is integrally
linked to the diverse composition of our people.
With this in mind, the Board fosters an environment
where all our employees feel that they belong in our
business, and for our people to reflect the customers
and communities we serve.
As a Board, we approve the Santander UK
Diversity and Inclusion strategy, as required by
UK regulation, and monitor its implementation
through our Board Responsible Banking
Committees. The Committees oversee and support
efforts to advance inclusion, recognising its
importance for culture, risk management, conduct
and innovation. People Networks are supported
through Non-Executive Director sponsorship, with
NED sponsors engaging with members and
championing their priorities. Further information
about the work the bank does to embed inclusion
can be found in the 2025 Pay Gap Report, which
does not form part of this Annual Report.
We also have a Board Diversity & Inclusion
(D&I) Policy, which recognises that an inclusive
Board representing a diversity of experience
and backgrounds supports a broad
strategic perspective and is available on the
Company’s website. Board appointments are
always made on merit by assessing candidates
against measurable, objective criteria.
Our current ambitions are to achieve a gender
balance of at least 40% male and female; at least
one senior Board position (Chair, CEO, CFO or SID)
to be female and at least one member from a non-
white minority ethnic background by 2028.
We proactively consider our Board D&I targets as
part of our succession planning and appointment
processes. While we are proud to have strong
representation, including a Director from an
ethnic minority background and a female in a senior
Board position, we recognise that we have not yet
met our gender balance ambitions of at least 40%
male and female. The Board and its Committees
remain committed to achieving a more balanced
and inclusive Board as part of future appointments.
In accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6(9), the
statistics on this page outline the diversity metrics
for Board members and executive management at
31 December 2025.
At 31 December 2025, 29% of the Board were
female and one senior Board position is held by a
female (SID). One Director is from an ethnic
minority background.
At 31 December 2025, 16.7% of Executive
Committee members were female, 38.1% of our
Leadership Group (the level below the Executive
Committee) were female. The Board places high
emphasis on ensuring the development of different
perspectives in the senior management and
through succession planning

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 24

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Board and Committee effectiveness
To ensure that the Board and its Committees' remain effective, we carry out an annual evaluation which includes the performance of individual Directors. In line
with the Corporate Governance Code, this evaluation is typically facilitated externally at least once every three years, allowing for an independent review of the
Boards' performance. The Board approves an action plan to address any areas of improvement identified in the annual evaluations and the Board Nomination &
Governance Committee oversees the progress on these. An update on the findings from the 2024 evaluation is set out below.
Progress against 2024 evaluation findings

Opportunities for improvement | Update on actions
Future board composition | Good progress has been made in strengthening the Board’s technology insight, with a series of AI-focused discussions during 2025 covering AI governance, strategy and funding, supported by practical demonstrations and a cyber simulation workshop. In parallel, the Board has achieved its ethnic minority representation target and continues to focus on further improving gender balance, while also considering the mix of technology skills required in future Board composition.
Cyber risk | The Board further strengthened its understanding of cyber threats through an unscripted cyber simulation session held in July 2025, designed to enhance Board-level awareness of response considerations and decision-making, complemented by an external expert session.
External landscape | The Board’s understanding of the competitive and sector landscape was further enhanced during the year through a range of external insights and discussions on AI and broader market developments. This was complemented by direct customer engagement, including a CCB customer invited to attend a Board meeting in Glasgow to share their experience, supporting the Board’s understanding of sector dynamics, customer outcomes and emerging barriers to action.
Measuring our culture | The Board continued to focus on how the desired culture is measured and communicated, including oversight of internal communications during the year and ongoing work to strengthen the assessment of culture, including risk culture. In parallel, the Board enhanced its understanding of how our strategic priorities are embedded across the organisation, supported by regular workforce insights, including input from the Non-Executive Director representing the workforce, and the development of updated employee survey arrangements to help identify areas requiring targeted action.

Following the external review completed in 2024, an internal review was completed in 2025. The process included the completion of a questionnaire, covering the
Boards and each Board Committee, issued by Lintstock, an independent service provider with no other connection to the Company or any individual Directors.
2025 Effectiveness review process

Stage 1
Scope of review | The scope for the Review was agreed to ensure a formal and rigorous evaluation of the performance of the Board and its Committees. A questionnaires was produced which focused on a number of key areas: Board composition; Relationships and dynamics; Meeting management; Board Committees; Board support; Strategic oversight; External environment; Risk and governance oversight; People and succession; and Board priorities.
Stage 2
Review activity | A questionnaire was issued to each Director and members of management who often interact with the Board and its Committees.
Stage 3
Findings and actions | A comprehensive report evaluating the Board’s performance was compiled by Lintstock based on feedback provided by participants. The Board collectively discussed the results and recommendations, before agreeing the key priorities and action plan (see below).

Outcomes from the 2025 Board evaluation
Overall, the Review concluded that the Board and its Committees continue to operate effectively and are rated highly. Areas of particular strengths identified
included the Board's oversight of Risk, management of meetings and the quality of Board support.
The Review identified opportunities for improvement for the Board as a whole. The Board agreed to focus on two key actions, set out below. All the Review's
recommendations were considered, with additional actions to be tracked and delivered by the Corporate Governance Office under the oversight of the Company
Secretary. Progress against the agreed priority actions will be overseen by the Board Nomination & Governance Committee across 2026.
Areas of focus for 2026

Themes | Commentary and actions
Relationships and dynamics | The Board reflected on its relationship with Banco Santander and concluded that it had continued to strengthen throughout the year, underpinned by effective engagement and alignment. Recognising the ongoing importance of close strategic alignment, building on this positive momentum, in 2026 the Board and its Committees will focus on creating more opportunities for formal and informal engagement with our shareholder, through joint workshops and business visits, and by seeking feedback from colleagues to deepen the relationship. The Committee Chairs will continue to meet with their Banco Santander counterparts and receive updates on group-wide developments.
Quality of information | The Board recognised the opportunity to further enhance the effectiveness of Board and Committee papers by sharpening the focus on key issues and insights through reducing length and duplication, and supporting more targeted, “need-to-know” reporting. To support this, in 2026 the Board paper template will be refreshed and targeted training will be provided to management to help deliver clearer, more concise and insightful papers that support effective discussion and decision-making.

The review also included an assessment of the performance of each individual Director, including identifying any areas for development.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 25

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Summary of Board Committee activities in 2025
Our Board Committees conduct their business concurrently with the Santander UK Group Holdings plc Board Committees to ensure alignment of practices, policies
and procedures. The following sections describe the governance arrangements, practices and activities of both committees. For more information, see each of the
Board Committee Chair's Reports in the Santander UK Group Holdings plc 2025 Annual Report, which does not form part of this Annual Report.
Board Nomination & Governance Committee

Committees' responsibilities
Lead the process for Board and Board Committee appointments and oversee succession planning for the Board and senior management positions.
Oversee the evaluation of the performance and composition of the Board and Board Committees.
Monitor the governance arrangements for Santander UK and make appropriate recommendations to the Board to ensure that those arrangements remain adequate.

Committee members
Tom Scholar (Chair)
David Oldfield
Michelle Hinchliffe
Mark Lewis
Nicky Morgan
Pamela Walkden
Ed Giera 1

1 Left on 31 March 2025
Key activities in the year
Succession planning
The Committee continued to oversee a formal,
rigorous and transparent process for identifying
and recommending candidates for Board and
senior management roles. As part of our ongoing
work, we reviewed succession plans for the Board,
the CEO and other senior positions, including the
Board skills, experience and diversity matrix to
assess current Director attributes, identify gaps in
the Board’s collective profile and anticipate
capabilities that may be lost through planned
retirements.
For senior management roles, we worked closely
with Banco Santander as part of this Group-led
process to ensure a strong pipeline of ‘Emergency’,
‘Ready Now’ and ‘Ready in 1–3 years’ candidates
from across the Banco Santander group, including
the UK.
Appointments continue to be based on merit and
objective criteria, while also supporting diversity
in its broadest sense and meeting all legal and
regulatory requirements.
In 2025, the Committee led the process to
recommend candidates for appointment to two key
positions (CEO and Chair of the Board), following
announcements by the previous position holders of
their decisions to step down from the Board. In
each case the Committee worked closely with
Banco Santander, given their formal role in the
appointment process.
The Committee:
– identified the key attributes for the role
– appointed an executive search firm, Heidrick &
Struggles which has no other relationships with
the Company, to support the process
– reviewed existing succession plans, using them
as the starting point for the process
– considered the field of possible candidates,
including people not previously identified in
succession plans
– after careful evaluation, developed a short list
for further consideration
– reviewed a detailed independent assessment on
each short-listed candidate, prepared by the
executive search firm; and considered external
references, and
– arranged a set of structured interviews with
Board directors and key Banco Santander
stakeholders.
After considering all the available evidence, the
Committee recommended the successful
candidates for appointment by the Board. The
appointments were announced in May 2025 (for
the Chair) and December 2025 (for the CEO).
The Committee also proactively reviewed
succession arrangements for the Group-nominated
Directors in light of role changes within Banco
Santander. Dirk Marzluf stepped down from the
Board on 30 September 2025 after six years of
service, and Mahesh Aditya was appointed on 1
October 2025 as his successor and the new Group-
nominated Director (subsequently CEO with effect
from 1 March 2026).
We also oversaw and approved changes to the
Executive Committee and other senior
management roles in 2025. Christine Palmer left
the bank in May 2025 and Steve Stearns was
appointed Chief Risk Officer in June 2025. Stephen
White left the bank in October 2025 and Jas Narang
was appointed Chief Transformation, Data and AI
Officer in August 2025.
On behalf of the Board, I would like to welcome
those who joined during the year and thank those
who stepped down for their valuable contributions.
Committee Composition
The Committee reviewed the composition of each
Board Committee to ensure balanced membership,
appropriate rotation and the right blend of skills
and experience across all Committees. As a result
of this review, Mark Lewis was appointed as a
member of the Board Special Projects Committee
with effect from 1 March 2026.
Governance
The Committee recommended the implementation
of specific updates to the Banco Santander Group
Subsidiary Governance Model and Guidelines for
Subsidiaries (GSGM) and certain Corporate
Frameworks and also reviewed the Santander UK
Group Framework, which outlines our
responsibilities and relationship with Banco
Santander SA, to confirm it remains fit for purpose
and aligned with our fiduciary and regulatory
obligations.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 26

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Board Risk Committee

Committees' responsibilities
Advise the Board on the Enterprise Wide Risk profile, Risk Appetite and strategy.
Provide advice, oversight and challenge to embed and maintain a supportive risk culture.
Review the Risk Framework and recommend it to the Board for approval.
Review and approve the risk types and risk activity frameworks in the Risk Framework.
Review the capability in the organisation to identify and manage new risks and risk types.
Review risks and issues escalated by the CRO, and their associated action plans.
Oversee and challenge the day-to-day risk management, oversight and adherence to risk frameworks and policies.

Committee members
David Oldfield (Chair)
Michelle Hinchliffe
Mark Lewis
Nicky Morgan
Jose Maria Roldan
David Gledhill 1
Ed Giera 2

1 Joined on 1 April 2025
2 Left 31 March 2025
Key activities in the year
The Committee undertook a thorough assessment
of the Company's top and emerging risks, including
financial, operational, and compliance controls. Our
top risks and emerging risks are discussed in the
Strategic report and Risk review sections of this
report. The process for identifying, assessing, and
managing the Company's top and emerging risks is
integrated into the overall risk governance
framework. The Committee regularly reviews and
discusses a consolidated enterprise wide risk report
to ensure that they are satisfied with the overall
risk profile, risk accountabilities, and mitigating
measures.
Board Audit Committee

Committees' responsibilities
Oversight of the integrity of the financial statements of the Company and any formal announcements relating to its financial performance, including significant financial reporting judgements and estimates.
Oversight of internal financial control effectiveness.
Oversight of the relationship with our external auditors including their independence and objectivity, audit scope and effectiveness of the audit process in respect of their statutory audit of the annual financial statements.
Oversight of the Internal Audit function.
Oversight of Recovery and Resolution planning
Oversight of Whistleblowing arrangements.

Committee members
Michelle Hinchliffe (Chair)
Ed Giera 1
Lisa Fretwell
David Gledhill
David Oldfield

1 Left 31 March 2025
Key activities in the year
Financial reporting
Overseeing the integrity of financial
reporting, including related disclosures, is a key
role of the Committee. The Committee’s focus is
on key management judgements and estimates
and challenging management on the assumptions,
models and data inputs underlying these
calculations. During the year the Committee
challenged management’s approach to the
determination of provisions, particularly in
respect of historical motor finance commission
arrangements, taking account of the outcome of
the FCA commissioned review, and also other
litigation and customer remediation provisions.
Significant financial reporting issues including
judgements and estimates
The use of assumptions or estimates and the
application of management judgement is an
essential part of financial reporting. This is
considered by the Committee throughout the year
where interim reports are issued and at year-end.
In 2025, we focused on the following financial
reporting matters:
Financial Reporting including disclosures

– Concluded that the 2025 Annual Report was fair, balanced and understandable.
– Concurred with management’s conclusion on the appropriateness of the APMs.
– Agreed that the impacts of climate risk and sustainability reporting are appropriately reflected in the financial statements.

Provisions and Contingent Liabilities
– Analysed the judgements and estimates made
by management to evaluate the adequacy of
provisions regarding a range of customer
remediation, litigation and other regulatory
matters including.
• Historical motor finance commission
arrangements including the outcome of the
review commissioned by the FCA
• Litigation with a third party over an alleged PPI
liability
• A legacy tax dispute with an overseas tax
authority for equity related transactions
• German dividend tax arbitrage transactions
regulatory and law enforcement investigations
– Acknowledged the inherent uncertainty
underlying management’s estimates and
judgements.
– Satisfied itself that the approach resulted in an
appropriate level of provision and disclosure in
respect of these matters
Credit impairment charges
– Satisfied ourselves with the robustness of the
process used to arrive at the management
judgements and estimates as well as with the
management judgements and estimates
themselves.
– Concurred with management that the credit
impairment charge and provision were
appropriate.
Defined Benefit Pension Schemes
– Agreed with managements proposed
quantitative and qualitative disclosures in
respect of pension obligations.
– Agreed with management on decisions made
with respect to valuation of illiquid assets and
application of mortality tables
Goodwill
– Concurred with management that no
impairment of the goodwill balances should be
recognised in 2025.
Going concern and viability
– Concurred with management’s conclusions on
going concern and longer-term viability.
– Recommended to the Board that the financial
statements should be prepared on a going
concern basis.
– Recommended the Viability Statement to the
Board for approval.
Valuation of intercompany derivatives
– Agreed with management's approach to
valuing the Company's level 3 intercompany
interest rate swaps.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 27

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Chair’s report on corporate governance continued

Whistleblowing
The Committee has oversight of Santander UK’s
whistleblowing arrangements.
The Committee received and considered bi-annual
management reports covering the progress and
outcomes of concerns raised, identifiable trends
and risks, developments in the regulatory
environment and evolving best practice to support
a culture in which colleagues feel safe to Speak Up
without fear of retaliation.
The Committee also reviewed the annual
Whistleblowing Report prior to its submission to
the Board and considered the results and
recommendations of the Internal Audit review,
together with management’s actions in response.
The Committee is satisfied that Santander UK
complied with FCA and PRA whistleblowing
regulations during the year.
Internal Audit
The Committee monitors and assesses the
performance of Internal Audit through review
of the audit strategy and plan including scoping,
including feedback received from Banco Santander.
The Committee also has oversight of the
independence, capability and capacity of resources
available to deliver the plan with enhanced focus
on strategic workforce planning, to confirm the
effectiveness of the function. The Committee
considers matters raised by Internal Audit and the
follow up of management’s resolution of these
matters.
Oversight of External Auditors
External Auditors
The Committee monitors the work and
performance of PwC, the external auditors for
Santander UK. PwC were appointed external
auditor in 2016 and a group wide tender was
undertaken in 2024, with PwC being reappointed
for the financial years 2026, 2027 and 2028. Ian
Godsmark has been the lead audit engagement
partner since June 2022.
During the year, key members of the PwC audit
team attended Audit Committee meetings and met
separately with the Committee in private sessions
and at other times throughout the year. Key
activities during the year included:
– Consideration and approval of the external
audit plan, including updates and monitoring
progress of the audit against that plan
– Consideration and approval of the engagement
letters and the audit fees for 2025
– Review of PWC’s reports on findings and
recommendations on financial reporting matters
with a focus on key estimates and judgements
and recommendations on internal controls
identified during the audit
– Consideration of the summary of misstatements
not corrected by management. The Committee
was satisfied that the misstatements were not
quantitatively or qualitatively material, either
individually or in aggregate at each quarter-end.
Non-audit fees
To safeguard the auditor’s independence and
objectivity, Santander UK have a robust policy
on non-audit services provided by our external
auditors. Non-audit services were under continuous
review throughout 2025 to determine that they
were permitted by reference to their nature,
assessing potential threats and safeguards to
auditor independence as well as the overall ratio
of audit to non-audit fees
All engagements require approval, either by the
Chair (or in their absence their alternate), under
delegated authority for amounts under £250,000
plus VAT or, if larger, by the Committee. This
process is in addition to the need for all non-audit
fees to be approved by the Banco Santander Audit
committee. The external audit lead partner must
also confirm that any non-audit engagement meets
the auditor’s own ethical standards and does not
pose a threat to their independence and objectivity.
Board Responsible Banking Committee

Committees' responsibilities
Support management in shaping, driving and delivering the responsible banking agenda of the business across a broad spectrum of areas including customers, inclusive culture, conduct, communities and climate change and the environment (the Board Risk Committee is responsible for overseeing the risks associated with climate change).

Committee members
Nicky Morgan (Chair)
Lisa Fretwell
David Gledhill
Mark Lewis
Jose Maria Roldan

Board Special Projects Committee

Committees' responsibilities
Oversight of programmes to address matters that are outside Board Risk Appetite or are considered critical change programmes.
Oversight of any activity related to mergers or acquisitions.
Oversight of any litigation or contentious regulatory investigations.

Committee members
Nicky Morgan (Chair)
David Gledhill
Michelle Hinchliffe
David Oldfield

Board Remuneration Committee

Committees' responsibilities
Setting the overarching principles and parameters of the remuneration policy and ensuring that the framework supports compliance with applicable legal and regulatory obligations, including ring-fencing.
Supporting the long-term sustainable success of Santander UK through effective oversight of remuneration adjustments.
Overseeing the implementation of the remuneration policy, including approving individual remuneration packages and the bonus framework and outcomes for Executive Directors (EDs) and other senior executives.
Approving the framework for identifying Material Risk Takers (MRTs) and overseeing their remuneration arrangements.

Committee members
Mark Lewis (Chair)
Lisa Fretwell
Ed Giera 1
David Gledhill
Jose Maria Roldan
David Oldfield

1 Left on 31 March 2025
Details of the structure of our remuneration
arrangements and the activities of the Board
Remuneration Committee in the year are provided
in the Remuneration Policy and Implementation
Reports.
Tom Scholar
Chair,
9 March 2026

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 28

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Remuneration policy report

Basis of preparation
This report has been prepared by the Board
Remuneration Committee on behalf of the Board.
We meet all the statutory reporting requirements
for large private companies.
We follow the UK Corporate Governance Code
2024 (the Code) and comply with its Provisions,
except where noted in the Directors' Report.
Several voluntary disclosures are included.
Remuneration policy for Executive Directors
(EDs)
Our policy for EDs has two elements: fixed
and variable pay. Fixed pay is set at market
competitive levels. Variable pay rewards
achievement of financial targets, strategic goals
and individual performance. All variable pay is
subject to risk adjustment.
Our remuneration policy meets regulatory
requirements.
Santander UK is part of the Banco Santander
group, which remains subject to the maximum
2:1 pay ratio. We therefore apply a 2:1 cap as
approved by Banco Santander SA shareholders.
For control function roles, a lower 1:1 ratio
normally applies.
Executive remuneration principles
Our policy reflects our values of Simple, Personal
and Fair. It is designed to be clear, balanced and
aligned with prudent risk management.
The key drivers of our Remuneration Policy
Customer focus and responsible outcomes
Delivering good outcomes for customers is
central to Santander UK’s strategy and culture.
Our remuneration policy promotes customer-
centric behaviours, responsible decision-making
and high standards of conduct. Variable pay
awards reflect both financial and non-financial
performance, including customer outcomes, and
are designed to avoid conflicts of interest and
foreseeable customer harm.
Purpose, culture and Our People Deal
Our remuneration policy supports Santander UK’s
strategy, long-term sustainable success and
culture. It reinforces Our People Deal and
promotes behaviours aligned with our purpose
and values of being Simple, Personal and Fair.
Performance assessment recognises both what is
delivered and how it is delivered.
Link to strategy and performance
Reward outcomes are aligned with the delivery
of Santander UK's strategic priorities. Variable pay
is determined through a balanced assessment
of performance, including measures of efficiency,
sustainable profitability and capital generation,
and the effectiveness of the risk and controls
environment. Remuneration arrangements
reflect Santander UK's Risk Appetite and support
responsible conduct, effective risk management
and long-term sustainability.
Clear and transparent reward arrangements
Our remuneration policy is designed to be clear,
transparent and easy to understand. Simple and
consistent structures support engagement and
trust by reinforcing the link between individual
contribution and business performance.
Fair, responsible and well-governed outcomes
Executive remuneration reflects performance
against stretching objectives set at the start
of the year, with outcomes determined in the
context of wider workforce pay and conditions.
All remuneration arrangements comply with
applicable legal and regulatory requirements.
The Committee exercises independent
judgement, with safeguards to manage conflicts
of interest.
Remuneration policy applicable to Executive Directors in the year

Fixed pay | Principle and description | Policy
Base salary | – To attract and retain EDs with the skills needed to deliver our strategy and meet the demands of the role. | – Base salaries are normally reviewed each year. When setting or reviewing salaries, the Committee considers: – the complexity of the role, its responsibilities, and market benchmarks; – the need to set pay at a level that discourages inappropriate risk-taking; and – salary increases awarded to other employees.
Pension arrangements | – To provide an element of the package that supports retirement savings. | – EDs receive a cash allowance instead of a pension contribution. This is normally set at 9% of salary, in line with the wider workforce average, other than in exceptional circumstances which may include international assignments.
Other benefits | – To offer a competitive package which supports employee wellbeing. | –Benefits include: –private medical insurance for EDs and their dependants; –life assurance; –health screening; –relocation allowances where relevant; and –access to share schemes on the same terms as other employees.

Variable pay | Principle and description | Policy
Variable pay plans | – Our Variable Pay Plan motivates EDs to achieve and exceed annual targets, within our Risk Appetite and in line with our strategy and values. – Multi-year deferral and delivery in Banco Santander SA shares aligns EDs’ interests with the long-term success of Santander UK. Additional long-term performance testing applies to a portion of the CEO's deferred award. – The PagoNxt Incentive Plan rewards those critical to the success of PagoNxt, a Banco Santander strategic priority. | – Bonus awards are discretionary and based upon financial, non-financial and individual performance. – Bonus structure: At least 40 % of any bonus is paid upfront after the end of the performance year, with at least half delivered in shares. – Deferral: Up to 60% of the bonus award is deferred and delivered in equal tranches over four or five years. At least half of each tranche is delivered in shares. – Long-term performance testing: For EDs, either two or three deferred tranches are subject to further performance testing, which may reduce or increase the final award. – PagoNxt Long-Term Incentive Plan: Awards can be granted in restricted share units and/ or premium priced options in PagoNxt, and vest in line with regulation. – Malus and clawback: Recovery (malus and clawback) can apply to variable pay for up to ten years post grant. – Retention period: Shares or share instruments are subject to a one-year retention period following vesting. – Shareholder alignment: The structure of variable pay means EDs build a meaningful shareholding in Banco Santander SA. This may continue for a significant period after employment ends. – CEO shareholding policy: The CEO must, within five years of appointment, build and maintain a shareholding equal to two times net salary set on appointment. No formal post-employment shareholding requirement is in place.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 29

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Remuneration policy report continued

On recruitment
When we appoint a new ED, we set salary at a
market competitive level reflecting role scope,
peer benchmarks and individual experience.
New EDs usually receive a benefits package
and pensions allowance aligned with the wider
workforce.
Remuneration is established in line with our
policy, as set out in the table above. We may
provide relocation support and international
mobility benefits where appropriate. Relocation
support is normally capped and provided for
a limited time. For international assignments,
we may offer benefits and pension which reflect
home-country practice and law.
Buy-out awards
We may provide compensation to EDs who forfeit
awards when leaving a previous employer. The
Committee may use discretion to make such
payments to secure the person’s employment.
Any payments will reflect the value, structure,
vesting dates, and conditions of the awards
forfeited. Awards will align with our long-term
interests and comply with regulation.
Service agreements
The terms and conditions of employment are
set out in individual contractual agreements. EDs
have contracts with a six-month notice period for
both the Director and the Company. The Company
may terminate employment immediately with a
payment in lieu of the ED's fixed pay for the notice
period. In the event of termination for gross
misconduct, neither notice nor payment in lieu of
notice is required.
Termination payments
If an ED ceases employment, treatment of
variable pay and any termination payments,
will reflect the terms of the service agreement,
scheme rules, regulation and our leavers policy.
Typically, outstanding variable pay awards lapse
on termination, unless the Committee decides
the person is a ‘good leaver’. Good leaver reasons
include: injury, ill-health, disability, redundancy,
retirement and death. The Committee may, at
its discretion, determine an ED is a good leaver in
any other circumstances. For good leavers, any
variable pay typically continues on the normal
payment schedule and remains subject
to performance. Other than redundancy
payments, no additional termination payments
are generally made.
In the event of a change in control, variable pay
awards will be treated in line with the relevant
scheme rules and regulation.
Risk and Performance adjustment
We comply with all regulatory requirements for
risk and performance adjustment. All variable
pay can be adjusted for current and future risks
through our Additional Risk Adjustment Standard,
which is linked to our Board approved Risk
Appetite. The Standard provides a quantitative
assessment against our Risk Appetite and a
qualitative assessment of risk events. This
supports the Committee to apply its discretion,
under which the bonus pool or individual awards
may be reduced, including to zero.
Our Individual Remuneration Adjustment
Standard sets out the process, governance
and criteria for making individual performance
adjustments, including the use of malus
and clawback.
Performance adjustments may include, but are
not limited to:
– reducing an award for the current year;
– reducing the amount of any unvested deferred
variable remuneration;
– requiring an award which has not yet been paid
to be forfeited; and
– requiring repayment on demand (on a net
basis) of any cash and share awards received at
any time for a period of up to ten years
following the date of award.
The Committee has full discretion to prevent
vesting of all or part of an amount of deferred
remuneration and/or to freeze an award during
an ongoing investigation in a range of
circumstances, including:
– employee misbehaviour, misconduct or
material error;
– material downturn in the performance of
Santander UK or a relevant business unit; and
– Santander UK or a relevant business unit
suffering a material failure of risk
management.
Our directors’ contracts and variable pay
documentation contain appropriate malus and
clawback provisions. These provisions apply for
seven years from the date of grant but may be
extended up to ten years during an investigation.
The length of the recovery period ensures
executives’ variable pay aligns with the company’s
long-term interests and supports prudent risk
management.
When determining variable pay awards, or
adjustments, for individuals performing roles
across Santander UK plc and Santander UK
Group Holdings plc, the decision is made by
the Santander UK Group Holdings plc Board
Remuneration Committee. The outcome is
validated by the Santander UK plc Board
Remuneration Committee.
The Committee seeks input from the Chairs of
the Board Risk and Audit Committees, Chief Risk
Officer, Chief Compliance Officer, Chief People
Officer and Chief Internal Auditor when
considering any performance or risk adjustments.
We have an NYSE-compliant recovery policy
applying to Executive Officers. Under this policy
variable pay could be recovered in the case of
an accounting restatement that would have
impacted variable pay.
Policy for all employees
Our approach to reward supports our business
strategy, rewards strong performance and
promotes sound risk management. The general
principles of the Remuneration Policy apply to all
employees, where appropriate.
The structure of remuneration packages for
EDs is aligned with our broader employee
population, comprising salary, benefits, pension
and variable pay.
The Committee reviews and approves all
employee variable reward schemes each year.
This ensures our schemes continue to drive the
right behaviour and do not encourage activities
outside our risk appetite.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 30

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Remuneration implementation report

Introduction
This section of the report outlines how our
Remuneration Policy was implemented for 2025.
Variable Pay Plan
EDs participate in an annual Variable Pay Plan
designed to reward and incentivise superior
and sustainable performance. Each year the
Committee selects a balanced mix of financial and
non-financial measures aligned with our strategy.
Multi-year deferral and delivery in Banco Santander
SA shares aligns EDs’ interests with our long-term
success. Both upfront and deferred awards are
delivered at least half in shares. The deferred
portion is released over four or five years. Awards
released in shares are also subject to a one-year
retention period from the point of delivery.
Determining the 2025 Variable Pay Pool
Quantitative assessment
A quantitative assessment is made against a
balanced scorecard of metrics. These metrics are
key to our strategy and for 2025 included:
– Transformation (Active Customers and Fees over
Costs)
– Capital (Capital Generation)
– Sustainable Profitability (RORWA SVA)
A profit underpin applies which requires Profit after
Tax to remain positive for any award to be made.
The pool is reduced should profit fall greatly from
the prior year.
Qualitative assessment
A qualitative assessment adds context to the
quantitative assessment and ensures a balanced
view of performance is taken. Performance is
assessed across:
– Compliance and risk management;
– Network collaboration;
– Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) /
responsible banking; and
– Performance versus market (including an
assessment of Net Promotor Score (NPS)).
Banco Santander Group Multiplier
The bonus pool may be adjusted upwards or
downwards to reflect overall Banco Santander
performance as appropriate.
Exceptional Adjustment
Exceptional adjustments allow for unexpected
factors or additional internal targets not covered in
the bonus scorecard to be reflected in variable pay
outcomes.
UK-focused risk adjustment
This provides both a formula-based assessment
against our Risk Appetite and an additional
qualitative overlay. Consideration is given to risk
appetite breaches including, but not limited to:
customers, conduct, operational, reputational and
financial crime risk.
At the discretion of the Committee, the pool or
individual awards can be reduced by up to 100%.
Individual assessment
The allocation of the pool is based on an
individual's performance, considering a range
of factors. Performance is assessed against the
delivery of priorities (the 'What'), the behaviours
shown in delivering these priorities (the 'How'), and
Risk management.
Deferred long-term awards
Performance testing applies to a portion of the
CEO’s deferred awards. Specifically, to the tranches
of the 2025 award (around a third of the total
award) which are payable in 2029, 2030 and 2031.
Performance will be assessed over a three-year
period from 2026 to 2028. The performance
measures for 2025 awards are relative Total
Shareholder Return (TSR), Return on Tangible
Equity (ROTE) and Environmental, Social and
Governance (ESG) metrics. Following the
assessment, the value of the deferred awards
will be adjusted upwards or downwards to reflect
performance outcomes.
PagoNxt Incentive Plan
The PagoNxt Incentive, a multi-year plan,
rewards those employees across the Banco
Santander group whose contribution is critical
to the success of PagoNxt. Awards can be granted
in share options and/or Restricted Share Units
(RSUs) in PagoNxt SL. Awards will vest in
accordance with the achievement of UK specific and
PagoNxt performance conditions. The design of the
plan aligns to UK regulatory requirements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 31

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Remuneration implementation report continued

2025 Business Performance and Impact
on Remuneration
During 2025, Santander UK made continued
progress against its ambition to become the best
bank for customers, with a focus on innovation,
technology and the introduction of new products.
The bank delivered strong business performance
during the year, supported by increased income and
the benefits of ongoing efficiency initiatives.
Customer lending and deposit balances grew, cost
discipline remained effective, and Santander UK
maintained a strong capital and liquidity position
throughout the year. Customer experience
remained a core priority, with Retail Net Promoter
scores continuing to improve.
In determining remuneration outcomes for the
2025 performance year, the Committee assessed
performance against a balanced range of financial
and non-financial measures, having regard to
risk outcomes and the experiences of customers,
employees and communities. The Committee
exercised independent judgement and considered
the application of malus and clawback provisions in
line with the remuneration policy and applicable
regulatory requirements; however,
no circumstances arose during the year that
warranted their application.
The Committee did not apply discretion to override
formulaic outcomes, as the resulting pay outcomes
were considered to be appropriate, proportionate
and reflective of performance delivered during the
year.
Context for decision making
The Committee considers pay policies and practices
across Santander UK when determining executive
remuneration. In doing so, it reviews trends across
the Santander UK group, including the outcomes of
pay negotiations with recognised trade unions, as
well as broader UK market data.
The Committee oversees workforce pay practices,
the implementation of remuneration policies and
the salary and variable pay awards for all Material
Risk Takers across Santander UK. It also approves
the design of any material performance-related pay
plans. In doing so, it considers:
– Santander UK’s engagement with its recognised
trade unions on pay and benefits matters for all
employees;
– Annual pay reviews for the general employee
population;
– Santander UK group-wide pension and other
benefit provisions;
– The design of and overall spend on variable
incentive arrangements; and
– An assessment of conduct across the business.
The Committee is committed to ensuring that
employees are not subject to undue pressures or
inappropriately incentivised. This is monitored
through employee engagement measures,
including engagement surveys.
In setting policy and making decisions on executive
remuneration, the Committee also takes into
account the broader stakeholder environment to
ensure that outcomes are fair, responsible, and
aligned with long-term sustainable success.
Executive Directors' remuneration
Total remuneration of each ED for the year ended 31 December 2025

| Mike Regnier |  | Angel Santodomingo 4 |  | Enrique Alvarez Labiano 5
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £000 | £000 |  | £000 | £000 |  | £000 | £000
Salary and fees | 1,575 | 1,575 |  | 1,169 | 951 |  | 681 | —
Taxable benefits 1 | 20 | 12 |  | 275 | 233 |  | 470 | —
Pension | 142 | 142 |  | 151 | 123 |  | 142 | —
Total fixed pay | 1,737 | 1,729 |  | 1,595 | 1,307 |  | 1,293 | —
Bonus (paid and deferred) 2 | 1,607 | 1,432 |  | 1,751 | 1,440 |  | 1,623 | —
Long-term incentive plan 3 | 1,755 | — |  | — | — |  | — | —
Total variable pay | 3,362 | 1,432 |  | 1,751 | 1,440 |  | 1,623 | —
Total remuneration | 5,099 | 3,161 |  | 3,346 | 2,747 |  | 2,916 | —

1 | Taxable benefits for the Executive Directors comprise a range of benefits including, but not limited to, private health care and living expenses for expatriates.
2 | 33% of the Chief Executive Officer's Variable Pay Plan award is subject to long-term performance metrics assessed over three years, which can increase the value of this element by up to 125% or decrease the award to 0%. No other executives are subject to long-term performance metrics. The value of the current Chief Executive Officer's 2025 Variable Pay Plan awards not subject to performance conditions, i.e. 67%, is disclosed above. The value subject to further performance conditions, 2025: £780,205 (2024: £805,282) will be disclosed at the close of the performance period upon vesting.
3 | The Long Term Incentive Plan value represents the portion of the 2022 Variable Pay Plan that was subject to additional performance conditions and vested during 2025. Following performance testing, 115.2% of the deferred award vested. The value of awards made in share-linked instruments has been calculated with reference to Banco Santander’s share price over the final thirty days of the year in which the award vested. Nathan Bostock, former Chief Executive Officer, received an award with a value of £551,111.
4 | Angel Santodomingo was appointed to the Board as an Executive Director on 5 March 2024 and the figures above reflect remuneration received whilst serving as a Board Director. The pension and benefit provisions reflect his expatriate status and allow maintenance of home country pension and living arrangements. All other elements of remuneration align with UK based colleagues.
5 | Enrique Alvarez Labiano was appointed to the Board as an Executive Director on 12 February 2025 and the figures above reflect remuneration received whilst serving as a Board Director. The pension and benefit provisions reflect his expatriate status and allow maintenance of home country pension and living arrangements. All other elements of remuneration align with UK based colleagues.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 32

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Remuneration implementation report continued

Stakeholder views
During 2025, Santander UK continued to engage
with key stakeholders on remuneration related
matters including its main regulators, the PRA
and FCA.
Regular engagement takes place with our
shareholder to align pay across the Banco
Santander group, while meeting all local regulatory
requirements. The outcome of these discussions
drives our bonus pool design.
Lisa Fretwell, a member of the Committee, is the
designated NED with responsibility to enhance the
employee voice in the boardroom on cultural
matters. Lisa facilitates a quarterly listening session
to develop a comprehensive understanding of
employees’ perspectives. These sessions cover a
diverse range of colleagues across different levels,
locations and teams. Other NEDs are encouraged to
join Lisa for at least one session during the year.
Frequent employee pulse surveys were conducted
throughout 2025. The 'Your Voice' survey enables
employees to speak up and share feedback,
thoughts and ideas anonymously, providing
insights on employee sentiment. Additionally, we
discuss business performance and reward matters
with union representatives during the annual pay
review cycle and on a frequent basis throughout
the year.
CEO pay ratio
We are committed to delivering fair pay which
attracts, retains and motivates employees of
the highest calibre across all grades. In line with
this commitment, the Committee oversees
compensation across the organisation, including
pay ratios, and considers this when determining
reward outcomes.
We continue to voluntarily disclose the ratio of the
CEO’s total pay to that of employees. The CEO's pay
mix is weighted towards variable pay to incentivise
the achievement of stretching targets and long-
term value creation. This can lead to greater
variability in total pay. By contrast, the pay mix for
our less senior employees places greater emphasis
on fixed pay, providing stability and supporting
financial wellbeing.
The CEO pay ratio has increased from 69:1 in 2024
to 103:1 in 2025. This movement does not reflect
an increase in the CEO’s underlying annual
remuneration. Rather, it arises from the vesting in
the year of the portion of the CEO’s 2022 Variable
Pay Plan award that was subject to long-term
performance conditions, which is now included in
the single total figure of remuneration. In addition,
the value of the shares delivered under that award
has been positively impacted by share price
appreciation since grant.
The Committee remains satisfied that the
Company’s remuneration policy is fair,
proportionate and aligned with our approach to the
wider workforce.
Advice and support provided to the Committee
The Committee engaged the advice of Deloitte LLP
(Deloitte) as independent remuneration
consultants. Total fees (excluding VAT) for advice
and support provided to the Committee in 2025
were £74,050 (2024: £74,600).
Deloitte was initially appointed as Adviser to
the Committee following a formal tender in
2015 and was reappointed after a further tender
process in 2022. In 2025, Deloitte also provided
unrelated tax, advisory, risk, assurance and
consulting services to Santander UK. Deloitte's
independence and effectiveness as the Committee
adviser is reviewed annually. The Committee is
satisfied that the Deloitte team have no
connections with Santander UK which may impair
their independence.
Deloitte is a founding member of the Remuneration
Consultants Group and chooses to operate under
the Code of Conduct in relation to executive
remuneration consulting in the UK.
By Committee invitation, the Chair, CEO and
designated representatives from business
functions attend meetings as appropriate to advise
on People & Culture, Risk, Legal and Regulatory
matters in support of the Committee's work.
Attendees included the Chief People Officer,
Director of Performance & Reward, CRO and
Company Secretary.

CEO pay ratio
| Methodology 1 | 25th percentile | Median | 75th percentile
2025 CEO pay ratio 5 | Option A | 148:1 | 103:1 | 61:1
2024 CEO pay ratio 4 | Option A | 98:1 | 69:1 | 40:1
2023 CEO pay ratio | Option A | 106:1 | 75:1 | 45:1
2022 CEO pay ratio | Option A | 119:1 | 84:1 | 48:1
2021 CEO pay ratio | Option A | 140:1 | 96:1 | 54:1
| CEO remuneration 3 | 25th percentile 2 | Median 2 | 75th percentile 2
2025 CEO pay ratio | £ | £ | £ | £
Total salary | £1,575,000 | £28,004 | £38,871 | £59,894
Total remuneration | £5,098,360 | £34,420 | £49,495 | £83,432

1 | Employee pay is calculated based on the 'Option A' methodology. We chose Option A as it gives the most reliable and accurate result by calculating a comparable single figure for each employee.
2 | Employee pay data is based on full time equivalent pay for Santander UK plc employees. This excludes a small number of employees in the rest of the Santander UK group. Including those employees results in a ratio consistent with the above. For each employee, total remuneration is calculated based on fixed pay accrued in the 2025 financial year, and variable pay is either based on actual bonuses in respect of the 2025 year (where these are available) or modelled target bonuses where actuals are not yet available.
3 | The CEO's total remuneration is aligned to that disclosed in the Executive Directors' remuneration table on the previous page.
4 | The 2024 ratios are re-stated above. These were originally calculated based on fixed pay accrued within the 2024 year, in addition to target bonuses for eligible employees. The 2024 ratios have now been recalculated using 2024 fixed pay and bonuses paid in 2025 in respect of 2024 for all employees.
5 | The values used for the CEO's 2025 Variable Pay Plan awards are the same as those stated in the Executive Directors’ remuneration table i.e. the component which is not subject to performance conditions is used for the CEO pay ratio calculation above. The calculation also includes the vesting value of the 2022 Variable Pay Plan award that was subject to additional performance conditions and vested during 2025.

Relative importance of spend on pay
2025 | 2024 | Change |
£m | £m | % |
Profit before tax | 1,482 | 1,349 | 10
Total employee costs | 1,198 | 1,277 | (6)

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 33

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Remuneration implementation report continued

Chair and Non-Executive Director remuneration
The Chair’s fee is reviewed and approved by the
Committee. The fees paid to NEDs are reviewed
and approved by the CEO and the Chair. Fees are
reviewed annually considering the market rate and
time commitment for the role. The Chair is paid an
all-inclusive base fee. NEDs are paid a base fee,
with a supplement for serving on or chairing a
Board Committee, except for the Board Nomination
& Governance Committee.
All NEDs and the Chair serve under letters of
appointment. In respect of the NEDs appointed
prior to 2021, either party can terminate the
appointment by giving three months’ written
notice. From 2021, we increased the notice
period for NEDs to six months to support orderly
succession planning. For the Chair, 12 months’
written notice is required.
Neither the Chair nor the NEDs have the right to
compensation on the early termination of their
appointment beyond payments in lieu of notice at
the discretion of Santander UK. In addition, neither
the Chair nor the NEDs are eligible for pension
scheme membership or to participate in any
variable incentive arrangements.

Chair and Board Committee member fee
| 2025 | 2024
| £000 | £000
Chair (inclusive of membership fee) | 725 | 725
Board member | 100 | 100
Additional responsibilities |  |
Senior Independent Director | 45 | 45
Chair of Board Risk Committee | 70 | 70
Chair of Board Audit Committee | 70 | 70
Chair of Board Responsible Banking Committee | 60 | 60
Chair of Board Remuneration Committee | 60 | 60
Membership of Board Risk Committee | 35 | 35
Membership of Board Audit Committee | 30 | 30
Membership of Board Responsible Banking Committee | 30 | 30
Membership of Board Remuneration Committee | 30 | 30
Chair of Board Special Projects Committee 1 | 30 | 30
Membership of Board Special Projects Committee 1 | 15 | 15
Consumer Duty Champion | 8 | 8
Designated NED to represent views of the workforce | 8 | 8

(1) With effect from 1 December 2024, the Litigation and Contentious Regulatory Board Sub-Committee was renamed and is now known as the Board Special Projects Committee. In addition, the Chair fee increased
from £15,000 to £30,000 and a membership fee of £15,000 was introduced.

| 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024
| Fees | Fees | Expenses 10 | Expenses 10 | Benefits | Benefits | Total | Total
Non-Executive Directors | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000 | £000
Chair |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Thomas Scholar 1 | 455 | — | — | — | 1 | — | 456 | —
William Vereker 2 | 423 | 725 | — | — | 1 | 2 | 424 | 727
Independent Non-Executive Directors |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Lisa Fretwell | 197 | 224 | — | — | — | — | 197 | 224
Ed Giera 9 | 62 | 299 | — | — | — | — | 62 | 299
David Gledhill 4 | 231 | 65 | — | — | — | — | 231 | 65
Michelle Hinchliffe | 220 | 229 | — | — | — | — | 220 | 229
Mark Lewis 5 | 244 | 257 | — | — | — | — | 244 | 257
Nicky Morgan | 278 | 241 | — | — | — | — | 278 | 241
David Oldfield 6 | 239 | 18 | — | — | — | — | 239 | 18
José María Roldan 7 | 195 | 188 | — | — | — | 5 | 195 | 193
Banco Santander Group nominated Non-Executive Directors 8 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Mahesh Aditya 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
Pedro Castro e Almeida | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
Dirk Marzluf 9 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
Pamela Walkden | 100 | 109 | — | — | — | — | 100 | 109

1 Thomas Scholar was appointed to the Board on 16th May 2025 and as Chair on 18th July 2025. Fees are in respect of services from his appointment to the Board. Taxable benefits relate to private health care.
2 William Vereker stepped down from the Board on the 18th July 2025 and fees received are in respect of services to that date. Taxable benefits relates to private health care
3 Mahesh Aditya was appointed on 1 October 2025. Fees received are in respect of services from that date.
4 David Gledhill was appointed on 1 September 2024. Fees received are in respect of services from that date.
5 Mark Lewis' fee includes £20,000 per annum in relation to his services as a Non-Executive Director of Santander Consumer UK plc.
6 David Oldfield was appointed on 1 December 2024. Fees received are in respect of services from that date.
7 José María Roldan's taxable benefits relate to professional tax advice.
8 With the exception of Pamela Walkden, none of the Banco Santander nominated Non-Executive Directors received any fees or expenses.
9 Ed Giera stepped down from the Board on 31 March 2025 and Dirk Marzluf stepped down from the Board on 30 September 2025.
10 Only true business expenses have been incurred in the course of Non-Executive Directors’ duties. In prior years, these expenses were processed via payroll and as such attracted tax and were declared.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 34

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Directors' report

Introduction
The Directors submit their report together with the
financial statements for the year ended 31
December 2025. The information in the Directors’
Report is unaudited, except where indicated.
Corporate structure, Subsidiaries and Branches
The Company (incorporated on 12 September
1988) is a subsidiary of Santander UK Group
Holdings plc whose ultimate parent is Banco
Santander SA, a Spanish retail and commercial
bank with a market share in ten core countries in
Europe and the Americas.
Santander UK was formed from two former
building societies, Abbey National and Alliance &
Leicester, together with the branch network and
savings business of Bradford & Bingley, and has
operated under a single brand since 2010.
All of Santander UK plc's ordinary shares are
unlisted and held by Santander UK Group Holdings
plc, which is a wholly owned subsidiary of Banco
Santander SA.
The Company’s preference shares are listed on the
London Stock Exchange and both the Company and
Santander UK Group Holdings plc have other equity
instruments in the form of AT1 securities listed on
various securities exchange markets, including the
London Stock Exchange.
In addition,the Company is subject to reporting
requirements under the US Securities Exchange Act
of 1934 as it has a registration statement on file
with the US Securities and Exchange Commission
for issuances of its debt securities in the US.
The Santander UK group consists of a parent
company, Santander UK plc, incorporated in
England and Wales, and a number of subsidiaries
and joint ventures held directly and indirectly by it.
The Company directly or indirectly holds 100% of
the issued ordinary share capital of its principal
subsidiaries. All companies operate principally in
their country of incorporation or registration.
In line with the ring-fencing requirements set out in
the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013,
Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries consist of only
entities whose business is permitted under the Act
as a ring-fenced bank. For more information, see
Note 18.
Results and dividends
For details of the results for the year, see the
Income Statement in the Consolidated Financial
Statements. For more on dividends, see Note 10.
Details of Santander UK’s activities and business
performance in 2025, together with an indication of
the outlook, are set out in the Strategic report.
Events after the balance sheet date
There have been no material post balance sheet
events, except as set out in Note 41.
Directors
A list of the Directors that served in the year can be
found in the Board and Board Committee
Attendance table in the Chair's report on Corporate
Governance. Details of their emoluments and
interests in shares are set out in the Remuneration
implementation report. For more on changes to the
composition of the Board, see the Chair’s report on
Corporate Governance.
Between 31 December 2025 and 9 March 2026,
the following was noted:
– Enrique Alvarez resigned from the Board
effective 25 February 2026.
– Mahesh Aditya was appointed CEO, effective on
1 March 2026, replacing Mike Regnier.
– On 5 March 2026, the Board approved the
appointment of Victoria Roig and Manuel Preto
with effect from 13 March 2026.
Appointment and retirement of Directors
All Directors are appointed and retire in accordance
with the Company’s Articles of Association, the UK
Companies Act 2006 and the UK Group Framework.
The Directors are required to retire each year at the
Annual General Meeting and may offer themselves
for re-election.
Directors’ indemnities
Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover was
in place throughout the year, in addition to a deed
of indemnity to provide cover to the Directors for
liabilities to the maximum extent permitted by law.
These remain in force for the Directors’ period of
office from the date of appointment until such time
as any limitation periods for bringing claims against
the Directors have expired. The Directors, including
former Directors who resigned in the year, benefit
from these deeds of indemnity which constitute
qualifying third party indemnity provisions for the
purposes of the Companies Act 2006. Deeds for
existing Directors are available for inspection at the
Company’s registered office.
The Company has also granted an indemnity which
constitutes ‘qualifying third party indemnity
provisions’ to the Directors of its subsidiary and
affiliated companies, including former Directors
who resigned in the year and since the year-end.
Qualifying pension scheme indemnities were also
granted to the Trustees of the Santander UK
group’s pension schemes.
Employees
We continue to ensure that Santander UK’s
remuneration policies are consistent with its
strategic objectives and are designed with its long-
term success in mind.
Communication
Santander UK aims to involve and inform
employees on matters that affect them. The
intranet is a focal point for communications and the
‘AskHR’ website connects employees to all
the information they need about working for
Santander UK. We also use face-to-face
communication, such as team meetings and
roadshows for updates.
Santander UK regularly considers employees’
opinions and asks for their views on a range of
issues through regular engagement and surveys.
For more on colleague engagement and initiatives,
see the Strategic report.
Employee Designated Non-Executive Director
Lisa Fretwell is Santander UK's Employee
Designated NED and represents the views of
employees in the Boardroom. For more
information, see the Section 172: Stakeholder voice
section in the Strategic Report.
Consultation with Employees
Santander UK has a successful history of working in
partnership with its recognised trade unions,
Advance and the Communication Workers Union
(CWU), who collectively negotiate on behalf of
approximately 99.5% of our UK workforce. Both
trade unions are affiliated to the Trades Union
Congress. We consult Advance and the CWU on
significant proposals including those relating to
change across the business at both national and
local levels.
Employee share ownership
Santander UK continues to operate two all-
employee, HMRC approved share schemes: a Save-
As-You-Earn (Sharesave) Scheme and a Share
Incentive Plan (SIP). Those employees who are
designated as Material Risk Takers receive part of
their annual bonus awards in Banco Santander SA
shares/share linked instruments. Details of the
plans and the related costs and obligations can be
found in the Share-based payments and
compensation sections in Notes 1 and 35.
Inclusive culture
Information on our diversity and inclusion policies,
as required by UK regulation, can be found in the
Chair's report on Corporate Governance and the
Pay Gap Report and Sustainability Supplement,
which do not form part of this Annual Report.
Disability
Santander UK is committed to equality of
employment, access and quality of service for
disabled people and complies with the UK Equality
Act 2010 throughout its business operations. We
have processes in place to help train, develop,
retain and promote employees with disabilities,
and we are a Disability Confident Employer
achieving the 'Leader' level. We are committed to
giving full and fair consideration to employment
applications by disabled people, having regard to
their particular aptitudes and abilities, and for
continuing the employment of employees who
have become disabled by arranging appropriate
training and making reasonable adjustments in the
workplace.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 35

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Directors' report continued

Engagement with stakeholders and employees
Santander UK recognises the importance of
fostering relationships with its principal
stakeholders and that this is key to the long-term
success of our business. We understand the
importance of acting fairly and responsibly and
actively engage with our stakeholders and
employees. For more, see the Section 172:
Stakeholder voice section in the Strategic Report.
Streamlined Energy & Carbon Reporting (SECR)
For details on our energy use, carbon emissions and
efficiency measures implemented in 2025,
including Scope 1, 2 and 3 data, see the SECR
section in the Sustainability review.
Political contributions
In 2025 and 2024, no contributions were made for
political purposes and no political expenditure was
incurred by the Company.
Share capital
Details about the structure of the Company’s
capital can be found in Note 31.
For details of employee share schemes and how
rights are exercisable, see Note 35.
The powers of the Directors in relation to share
capital are set out in the Company’s Articles of
Association. These are available for inspection on
request.
Financial instruments
The financial risk management objectives and
policies of Santander UK and the policy for hedging,
along with details of Santander UK's exposure to
credit risk, market risk and liquidity risk are set out
in the Risk review.
Research and development
Santander UK has a comprehensive product
approval process and policy. New products,
campaigns and business initiatives are reviewed by
Santander UK’s Proposition Approval Forum.
Supervision and regulation
The Company is authorised by the PRA and
regulated by the FCA and the PRA (dual regulated).
Some of its subsidiaries and joint venture
companies are also authorised by the FCA and the
PRA (dual regulated) or the PRA or the FCA (solo
regulated).
While Santander UK operates primarily in the UK, it
is also subject to the laws and regulations of other
jurisdictions in which it operates or has listed debt
securities such as the US.
Internal controls
Risk management and internal controls
The Board and its Committees are responsible
for reviewing and ensuring the effectiveness of
management’s system of risk management and
internal controls.
We carried out a robust assessment of the principal
and emerging risks facing Santander UK including
those that would threaten its business model,
future performance, solvency or liquidity. Details of
our principal risks, our procedures to identify
emerging risks, and how these are being managed
or mitigated are set out in the Risk review. A
summary of our Top and Emerging Risks is also set
out in the Strategic report.
Management’s Report on Internal Control over
Financial Reporting
Management is responsible for establishing and
maintaining adequate internal control over
financial reporting (ICFR). ICFR is a process designed
by, or under the supervision of, the Company's
principal executive and principal financial officers,
and effected by the Company's Board of Directors,
management and other personnel, to provide
reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of
financial reporting and the preparation of financial
statements for external purposes in accordance
with applicable accounting standards.
The Company's internal control over financial
reporting includes policies and procedures that:.
– Pertain to the maintenance of records that, in
reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect
the transactions and dispositions of the
Company's assets
– Provide reasonable assurance that transactions
are recorded as necessary to permit preparation
of financial statements in accordance with UK-
adopted IAS and IFRS, and that receipts and
expenditures are made only in accordance with
authorisations of management; and
– Provide reasonable assurance regarding
prevention or timely detection of unauthorised
acquisition, use or disposition of the Company's
assets that could have a material effect on the
financial statements.
Management evaluated the effectiveness of the
Company's internal control over financial reporting
as at 31 December 2025 using the criteria
established in the Internal Control-Integrated
Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of
Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway
Commission (COSO). Based on this evaluation,
management concluded that the Company
maintained effective internal control over financial
reporting as at 31 December 2025.
Because of inherent limitations, internal control
over financial reporting may not prevent or detect
misstatements. In addition, projections of any
evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are
subject to the risk that controls may become
inadequate because of changes in conditions, or
that the degree of compliance with the policies or
procedures may deteriorate.
There were no changes in the Company's internal
control over financial reporting during the period
ended 31 December 2025 that have materially
affected, or are reasonably likely to materially
affect, the Company's internal control over financial
reporting.
As a registrant under the US Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, Santander UK's management is
responsible for establishing and maintaining an
adequate system of internal control over financial
reporting in order to ensure the accuracy and
reliability of Santander UK's Financial Statements
and the Form 20-F submitted to the SEC.
In line with COSO and SEC requirements, controls
recognised as Sarbanes-Oxley applicable are
subject to annual testing and certification by
management including an attestation by the CEO
and the CFO that they are operating effectively and
that the internal control over financial reporting can
be relied on.
All Sarbanes-Oxley control weaknesses identified
are captured, assessed and included in the year-
end assessment of the reliability of the Internal
Control environment. They are reported on
an ongoing basis to the Board Audit Committee
to ensure the control environment is
continuously improved.
Based on this assessment, management concluded
that, at 31 December 2025, Santander UK’s internal
control over financial reporting was effective.
Disclosure controls and procedures over financial
reporting
Santander UK’s management has evaluated,
with the participation of its CEO and CFO, the
effectiveness of its disclosure controls at 31
December 2025. There are inherent limitations
to the effectiveness of any system of disclosure
controls and procedures, including the possibility of
human error, and the circumvention or overriding
of the controls and procedures. Accordingly, even
effective disclosure controls and procedures can
only provide reasonable assurance of achieving
their control objectives.
– Based upon this evaluation, the CEO and the
CFO concluded that, at 31 December 2025,
Santander UK’s disclosure controls and
procedures were effective to provide
reasonable assurance that information required
to be disclosed by Santander UK in the reports
that it files and submits under the US Securities
Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed,
summarised and reported within the time
periods specified in the applicable rules and
forms, and that it is accumulated and
communicated to Santander UK’s management,
including the CEO and CFO, as appropriate, to
allow timely decisions regarding disclosure.
Changes in internal control over financial
reporting
There were no changes to our internal control over
financial reporting during the period covered by this
report that have materially affected, or are
reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal
control over financial reporting.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 36

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Directors' report continued

Statements of Compliance
The UK Corporate Governance Code 2024
(the Code)
Santander UK complies with the Code (which
can be found at frc.org.uk) wherever applicable
in order to achieve the best standards of corporate
governance. The Code applied to the financial year
ended 31 December 2025 and the Board confirms
that it applied the principles and complied with
those provisions of the Code throughout the year,
except as follows:
– Provision 10: For 2025, there were no
circumstances which were likely to impair an
INED's independence. Ed Giera, who served on
the Board for more than 9 years (appointed on
19 August 2015) stepped down on 31 March
2025, following an orderly hand over to his
successor. We are confident that in the time that
Ed served, he had the strength of character and
integrity to ensure his independence had not
been affected by the length of his tenure.
– Provision 39: Our pension contribution rates for
EDs align with those available to the workforce,
except in exceptional circumstances such as
expatriate arrangements. This is to ensure that
expatriates can continue to maintain home
country pension arrangements.
– Provision 36: The Board Remuneration
Committee has not developed a policy for post-
e mployment shareholding requirements.
However, the structure of variable pay for EDs
and other senior executives ensures that they
acquire a meaningful shareholding in Banco
Santander SA which extends for a significant
period post-employment. For de tails, see the
Remuneration policy report.
– Provision 41: The only area that we do not
provide disclosure of is the engagement with the
workforce to explain how executive
remuneration aligns with wider company
pay policy. However, an explanation is available
for employees in the Directors’ Remuneration
report. Details of the structure of our
remuneration arrangements and key
considerations of the Board Remuneration
Committee in the year are included in the
Remuneration policy and Remuneration
implementation reports.
UK Finance Disclosure Code for Financial
Reporting
Santander UK’s financial statements for the year
ended 31 December 2025 have been prepared in
compliance with the principles of the UK Finance
Disclosure Code for Financial Reporting.
Going concern
The going concern of Santander UK is reliant
on preserving a sufficient level of capital and
adequately funding the balance sheet. In making
their going concern assessment in connection with
preparing the financial statements, the Directors
considered a wide range of information similar to
that considered as part of their assessment of
longer-term viability including Santander UK’s
business and strategic plans, top and emerging
risks, including those associated with climate
change, capital position and liquidity and funding
profile, stress scenarios, and contingent liabilities,
and the reasonably possible changes in trading
performance arising from potential economic,
market and product developments. The Directors'
assessment included consideration of the potential
impacts arising from mixed signals about the UK's
recent economic performance
Having assessed this information and the principal
risks and uncertainties, the Directors are satisfied
that the Santander UK group has adequate
resources to continue operations for a period of at
least 12 months from the date the financial
statements were authorised for issue and therefore
consider it appropriate to adopt the going concern
basis of accounting in preparing the financial
statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 37

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Directors' report continued

Viability
In accordance with Provision 31 of the UK Corporate
Governance Code 2024, the Directors must make a
statement in this Annual Report regarding the
viability of Santander UK, including an explanation
of how they assessed the prospects of Santander
UK and the period of time for which they made the
assessment, including why they consider that
period to be appropriate.
Considerations
In making their assessment, the Directors
considered a wide range of information including
Santander UK's:
– Three-year business plan and other longer-term
business and strategic plans
– Risk profile and risk management practices,
including the processes by which risks are
identified and mitigated, including updates
on climate change risk and progress towards
embedding them into Santander UK's
Risk Framework
– Top and emerging risks, with a focus on
those which the Directors believe could cause
Santander UK’s future financial performance
or financial condition to differ materially from
current expectations or could adversely impact
its ability to meet regulatory requirements
– Capital position and liquidity and funding profile,
and projections over the relevant period
– Viability under specific internal and regulatory
stress scenarios, as explained further below,
including scenarios which might affect
operational resiliency, and
– Contingent liabilities and the reasonably possible
changes in trading performance arising from
potential economic, market and product
developments.
The Directors’ assessment also takes account of the
potential impacts on Santander UK’s performance,
capital position, and liquidity and funding profile,
including those arising from mixed signals about
the UK's recent economic performance.
For capital, liquidity and funding purposes,
Santander UK operates on a standalone basis and is
subject to regular and rigorous monitoring by
external parties. In addition, for capital purposes,
the Company operates as part of the ring‑fenced
bank subgroup Capital Support Deed. For liquidity
and funding purposes, the Company operates as
part of the Domestic Liquidity sub-group.
Assessment
The viability of Santander UK is reliant on
preserving a sufficient level of capital and
adequately funding the balance sheet.
Santander UK’s business activities and financial
position, together with the factors likely to affect its
future development and performance, are set out
in our CFO's review on the year. Santander UK’s
objectives, policies and processes for managing the
financial risks to which it is exposed are described in
the Risk review.
Threats to the achievement of Santander UK’s plans
are controlled and managed in line with Santander
UK’s Risk Framework and within the risk appetite
approved by the Board. The risk profile, including
an assessment of top and emerging risks, is
reported regularly to the Board Risk Committee and
the Board. Risks are selected on the basis of their
ability to impact viability over the time frame of the
assessment but most risks extend beyond this
period.
Stress testing
Santander UK participates in regulatory stress tests
usually carried out annually by the BoE as well as
being part of the biennial stress testing of Banco
Santander carried out by the EBA. Internal stress
testing encompasses a series of extreme but
plausible scenarios covering a wide range of
outcomes, risk factors, time horizons and market
conditions.
We also conduct reverse stress testing, in
which we identify and assess scenarios that
could cause Santander UK's business model to
become unviable.
The Directors review the outputs of stress testing
as part of the approval processes for the ICAAP, the
ILAAP, Risk Appetite and regulatory stress tests. For
more on stress testing and reverse stress testing,
see the Risk review.
Time horizon
While a five-year plan is prepared for regulatory
purposes and our stress testing encompasses
scenarios some of which also extend out to that
time period, using a longer time horizon increases
uncertainty.
After taking account of Santander UK’s current
position and principal risks and uncertainties,
the Directors consider that a period of three
years from the balance sheet date is the most
appropriate time frame from which a reasonable
assessment of viability can be made.
This period is consistent with the period covered by
Santander UK’s three-year business plan and is
representative of the time horizon to consider the
impact of anticipated regulatory changes in the
financial services industry.
Statement
Based on their assessment of longer-term viability,
the Directors have a reasonable expectation that
Santander UK will be able to continue in operation
and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the next
three years.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 38

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Directors' report continued

Code of Conduct
Santander UK is committed to ensuring we
hold ourselves to high ethical standards. This
means adhering to laws, regulations, policies
including our Code of Conduct and also carrying out
business in a responsible way. High standards of
professional and personal conduct help Santander
identify, manage and respond to risks, create a
positive, collaborative working environment and
ensure positive customer interactions and
outcomes.
The Santander Way determines how we deliver on
our purpose, to help people and businesses
prosper. How we deliver that purpose is as
important as the end result. Our conduct and our
culture matters. Our aim is to be the best open
financial services platform by acting responsibly
and earning the lasting loyalty of our colleagues,
customers and communities.
How we do business is intrinsically linked to
our behaviours and values and supports our
aim. Santander UK’s Code of Conduct sets the
standards expected of all colleagues and forms
part of the terms and conditions of employment.
It makes clear our corporate values, our
expectations regarding corporate behaviours
and general principles and standards we expect
with regard to customers, colleagues, conflicts
of interest, data, media and our approach
to sustainability.
There are numerous policies and processes, as well
as support and guidance, that help colleagues meet
these expectations and do the right thing to ensure
Santander UK remains a Simple, Personal and Fair
bank for its colleagues, customers, shareholders
and the communities it serves.
The Code of Conduct applies to all colleagues
including permanent and temporary colleagues as
well as EDs and NEDs. The SEC requires companies
to disclose whether they have a code of ethics that
applies to the CEO and senior financial officers
which promotes honest and ethical conduct,
full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable
disclosures, compliance with applicable
governmental laws, rules and regulations, prompt
internal reporting of violations, and accountability
for adherence to a code of ethics.
Santander UK meets these requirements
through its Code of Conduct and supporting
policies, including but not limited to the Anti-
Bribery and Corruption Policy, the Whistleblowing
Policy, the FCA’s Principles for Businesses, and the
FCA’s Statements of Principle and Code of Practice
for Approved Persons, with which the CEO and
senior financial officers comply. The Company
has not granted any waivers to its principle
executives, financial or accounting officers.
Copies of these documents are available on
application to Santander UK plc, 2 Triton Square,
Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN The Code of
Conduct can be found on our website at
santander.co.uk.
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities
The Directors are responsible for preparing the
Annual Report and the financial statements in
accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
Company law requires the Directors to prepare
financial statements for each financial year.
Under that law, the Directors have prepared
the Santander UK group and Company financial
statements in accordance with UK-adopted
IAS. In preparing the Santander UK group and
Company financial statements, the Directors have
also elected to comply with IFRSs as issued by
the IASB.
Under company law, the Directors must not
approve the financial statements unless they
are satisfied that they give a true and fair view
of the state of affairs of the Company and of
the profit and loss of the Santander UK group for
that period.
In preparing the financial statements, the Directors
are required to:
– Select suitable accounting policies and then
apply them consistently
– State whether applicable UK-adopted IAS and
IFRSs as issued by the IASB have been followed,
subject to any material departures disclosed and
explained in the financial statements
– Make judgements and accounting estimates that
are reasonable and prudent, and
– Prepare the financial statements on the going
concern basis unless it is inappropriate to
presume that the Santander UK group and the
Company will continue in business.
The Directors are responsible for safeguarding
the assets of the Santander UK group and the
Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for
the prevention and detection of fraud and other
irregularities.
The Directors are also responsible for keeping
adequate accounting records that are sufficient to
show and explain the Santander UK group’s and the
Company’s transactions and disclose with
reasonable accuracy at any time the financial
position of the Santander UK group and the
Company, and enable them to ensure that the
financial statements comply with the Companies
Act 2006.
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance
and integrity of Santander UK’s website. Legislation
in the UK governing the preparation and
dissemination of financial statements may differ
from legislation in other jurisdictions.
The Directors are responsible for presenting and
marking up the consolidated financial statements
in compliance with the requirements set out in the
Delegated Regulation 2019/815 on European
Single Electronic Format.
Having taken into account all the matters
considered by the Board and brought to its
attention during the year, the Directors are satisfied
that the Annual Report taken as a whole is fair,
balanced and understandable, and provides the
information necessary to assess Santander UK’s
position and performance, business model and
strategy.
Directors' confirmations
Each of the Directors confirms that, to the best of
their knowledge:
– The Santander UK group and Company financial
statements, which have been prepared in
accordance with UK-adopted IAS and IFRSs as
issued by the IASB, give a true and fair view of
the assets, liabilities and financial position of the
Santander UK group and the Company, and of
the profit of the Santander UK group, and
– The management report, which is incorporated
into the Directors’ report, includes a fair review
of the development and performance of the
business and the position of the Santander UK
group and the Company, together with a
description of the principal risks and
uncertainties they face.
Disclosure of information to Auditors
Each of the Directors at the date of approval of this
report confirms that:
– So far as the Director is aware, there is
no relevant audit information of which
Santander UK’s auditor is unaware
– The Director has taken all steps that they ought
to have taken as a Director to make themselves
aware of any relevant audit information and to
establish that Santander UK’s auditor is aware of
that information.
This confirmation is given and should be
interpreted in accordance with the provisions of
Section 418 of the UK Companies Act 2006.
Auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP will continue in the
office of auditor. A resolution to reappoint them
will be proposed at the Company’s forthcoming
Annual General Meeting.
By Order of the Board
Roz Rule
Company Secretary
9 March 2026
2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place,
London NW1 3AN

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 39

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Risk review

In this section |
Risk governance | 40
Credit risk | 46
Liquidity risk | 86
Capital risk | 94
Market risk | 96
Pension risk | 99
Strategic and business risk | 101
Reputational risk | 102
Non-Financial Risks: |
Operational risk | 103
Economic crime risk | 107
Model risk | 109
Compliance risk | 110

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 40

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Risk governance
INTRODUCTION
The Risk review consists of unaudited financial information unless otherwise stated. The audited financial information is an integral part of our Consolidated
Financial Statements.
As a financial services provider, managing risk is a core part of our day-to-day activities. To be able to manage our business effectively, it is critical that we
understand and control risk in everything we do. We aim to use a prudent approach, underpinned by advanced risk management techniques to help us deliver
robust financial performance, withstand stresses, and build sustainable value for our stakeholders. We aim to keep a predictable medium-low risk profile,
consistent with our business model. This is key to achieving our strategic objectives.
RISK FRAMEWORK
How we define risk
Risk is any uncertainty about us being able to achieve our business objectives. It covers both financial and non-financial risks (NFRs). NFR is a broad term usually
defined by exclusion, i.e. any risks other than the traditional financial risks of Credit, Liquidity, Capital, Market and Pension, Strategic and business, and Reputational.
Risk can be split into a set of risk types, each of which could affect our results and our financial resources. Enterprise risk is the aggregate view of all the risk types.
Our Risk Framework sets out how we define, manage and control risk.
Top and emerging risks
In addition to the cross-cutting areas described above, several of our risk types also have Top risks associated with them. We regularly review the Top risks that
could impact our business, customers and shareholders, with challenges at the Executive Risk Control Committee (ERCC) and Board Risk Committee (BRC). The
Top risks we actively monitored in 2025 are set out in the relevant section of this Risk review and summarised in the 'Top risks' section of the Risk management
overview in the Strategic report. We also made changes to our Top Risks with the addition of TSB integration where we will need to execute in a timely and
controlled manner, whilst also focusing on existing strategic transformation priorities. We added Execution of AI, as we build towards deployment at scale and pace.
Model Risk impacts have been added and combined with Regulatory Capital given the importance of Model Risk compliance with SS1/23. We combined
Outsourcing and Third-Party and Resiliency into Operational Resilience with the increased regulatory focus in this area, given the elevated geopolitical and cyber risk
landscape. We reclassified and refocused Climate Change as an Emerging Risk from a Top Risk, taking into account the potential for both physical events and net-
zero transition related risks.
We also regularly review emerging risks that could impact our business, customers and shareholders, with challenge and discussion at the ERCC and BRC.
The identification of emerging risks is co-ordinated by the Risk Division. A key part of the process is continual scanning of the external environment, focusing on
emerging risk drivers such as: Uncertain Regulatory Agenda, Uncertain Macro-economic and Geopolitical Environment, Markets, Competition and Technology,
and Environmental and Social. The emerging risks we actively monitored in 2025 are set out in the relevant section of this Risk review and summarised in the
‘Emerging risks’ section of the Risk management overview in the Strategic report.
Our risk culture and principles

Risk Culture Statement
Santander UK places good customer outcomes at the heart of our decision-making and our people take personal responsibility for doing the right thing. We are thoughtful about taking risks, meaning we only take risks that we understand, we balance risk and reward when making decisions and are proportionate in our approach.

The Board reviews and approves our Risk Culture Statement every year. Senior executives are responsible for promoting our risk culture from the top. They drive
cultural change and increased accountability across the business. We reinforce our Risk Culture Statement and embed our risk culture in all our business units
through our Risk Framework, Risk Certifications and other initiatives. This includes highlighting that:
– It is everyone’s personal responsibility to play their part in managing risk
– We must Identify, Assess, Manage and Report risk quickly and accurately
– We make risk part of how we assess our people’s performance and how we recruit, develop and reward them
– Our internal control system is essential to ensure we manage and control risk in line with our principles, standards, Risk Appetite and policies.
We use Risk Certifications to confirm how we manage and control risks in line with our Risk Framework and within our Risk Appetite. As an example, every year,
each member of our Executive Committee confirms that they have managed risks effectively in line with the Risk Framework in the part of the business for which
they are responsible. Their certification lists any exceptions and the agreed actions to be taken to correct them. This is a tangible sign of the personal responsibility
that is such a key part of our risk culture.
We assess the performance of all of our people in respect of risk as part of our formal performance management processes, and all our people must complete a
suite of risk mandatory training at least annually.
Evolving our risk culture
In 2025, we continued to enhance our risk processes by focusing on further maturing the risk behaviours (RiskPro) of our people to ensure they have the skills and
confidence to make risk-based decisions, acting in the interests of all our stakeholders and to provide good customer outcomes.
We also executed a risk culture maturity self-assessment across the business. This helped identify areas of good practice and some areas of focus to further mature
our risk culture and capability. This will continue to evolve in 2026.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 41

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Our risk governance structure
We are committed to the highest standards of corporate governance in every part of our business, including risk management. For details of our governance,
including the Board and its Committees, see the ‘Governance’ section of this Annual Report. The Board delegates certain responsibilities to Board Level Committees
as needed and where appropriate. Our risk governance structure strengthens our ability to identify, assess, manage and report risks, as follows:
– Committees: A number of Board and Executive committees are responsible for specific parts of our Risk Framework
– Key senior management roles: A number of senior roles have specific responsibilities for risk management
– Risk organisational structure: We have the ‘three lines of defence’ model built into the way we run our business.
Committees
The Board and Board Level Committee responsibilities for risk are:

Board Level Committee | Main risk responsibilities
The Board | – Has overall responsibility for business execution and for managing risk
– Reviews and approves the Risk Framework and Risk Appetite
Board Risk Committee (BRC) | – Assesses the Risk Framework and recommends it to the Board for approval
– Advises the Board on our overall Risk Appetite, tolerance and strategy
– Oversees our exposure to risk and our strategy and advises the Board on both
– Reviews the effectiveness of our risk management systems and internal controls
– Reviews reports from the Chief Compliance Officer (CCO) on the adequacy and effectiveness of the compliance function
– Responsible for oversight of cybersecurity risks and receives regular updates on cybersecurity risk position including cybersecurity incidents
– Receives regular updates on economic crime compliance and risks including money laundering, bribery and corruption and sanctions compliance, and monitors KPIs in line with approved Board risk appetite
Board Responsible Banking Committee | – Responsible for culture and operational risk from conduct, compliance, competition & legal matters
– Ensures that adequate and effective control processes are in place to identify and manage reputational risks
– Oversees our Sustainability and Responsible Banking programme and how it impacts on employees, communities, the environment including sustainability and climate change, reputation, brand and market positioning
– Reviews updates on key risk issues, customer, reputational and conduct matters
Board Audit Committee | – Monitors and reviews the financial statements integrity, and any formal announcements on financial performance
– Reviews the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal financial controls and whistleblowing arrangements
– Monitors and reviews the effectiveness of the internal audit function
– Receives regular updates from the internal audit function, including on its reviews of cybersecurity risk and controls
– Oversees the independence and performance of the external auditors
Board Remuneration Committee | – Oversees and approves remuneration policies and frameworks, long-term strategy, objectives, risk appetite, culture and values, including risk adjustment and malus and/or clawback provisions.
Board Special Projects Committee | – Advises the Board, Board Risk Committee, and other Committees, as appropriate, in respect of special projects and transformation matters
Board Nomination and Governance Committee | – Oversees Board and Committee composition and governance arrangements, including recommending membership of the Board Risk Committee and evaluation of Board and Committee effectiveness.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 42

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The Executive Level Committee responsibilities for risk are:

Executive Level Committee | Main risk responsibilities
Executive Committee (ExCo) | – Reviews business plans in line with our Risk Framework and Risk Appetite before they are sent to the Board to approve
– Receives updates on key risk issues (not already reported to the CEO through other forums) and monitors the actions taken
– Focuses on the responsibilities of the Executive Committee Senior Management Function holders and how they are discharged
– Reviews updates on key risk issues, customer, reputational and conduct matters
Executive Transformation Committee | – Reviews, monitors and challenges the bank-wide transformation outcomes, benefits and risks
Executive Risk Control Committee (ERCC) | – Reviews Risk Appetite proposals before they are sent to the BRC and the Board to approve
– Ensures that we comply with our Risk Framework, Risk Appetite and risk policies
– Reviews and monitors our risk exposures and approves any corrective steps we need to take
Disclosure Committee | – Ensures the adequacy and effectiveness of disclosure controls and procedures and reviews material financial information prior to external disclosure
Gold Committee | – Oversees Special Situations, including endorsement of Recovery/Resolvability plans and indicators, approval of contingency and action plans, and coordination of recovery and resolution responses with regulators
Asset and Liability Committee (ALCO) | – Reviews liquidity risk appetite (LRA) proposals
– Ensures we measure and control structural balance sheet risks, including capital, funding and liquidity, in line with the policies, strategies and plans set by the Board
– Reviews and monitors key asset and liability management activities to ensure we keep our exposures within our Risk Appetite
Capital Committee | – Puts in place reporting systems and risk control processes to make sure capital risks are managed within our Risk Framework
– Reviews capital adequacy and capital plans, including the ICAAP, before they are sent to the Board to approve
Incident Accountability Committee | – Considers, calibrates, challenges and agrees any appropriate individual remuneration adjustments
– Presents recommendations to the Board Remuneration Committee
Credit Approval Committee | – Approves corporate and wholesale credit transactions which exceed levels delegated to lower level forums or individuals
Economic Crime Committee | – Ensures due reporting, consideration, oversight and informed decision making regarding compliance with financial crime laws and regulations, fraud, and best industry practice aligned to our Risk Appetite

Key senior management roles
Senior roles with specific responsibilities for risk management are:

Role | Main risk responsibilities
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) | The Board delegates responsibility for our business activities and managing risk on a day-to-day basis to the CEO. The CEO proposes our strategy and business plan, puts them into practice and manages the risks involved. The CEO must also ensure we have a suitable system of controls to manage risks and report to the Board on them.
Chief Risk Officer (CRO) | Oversees and challenges risk activities, and ensures that the business activity is conducted within our risk appetite. Responsible for control and oversight of all risk types with regulatory responsibility to report on these risk types to Executive and Board Committees.
Chief Financial Officer (CFO) | Responsible for developing strategy, leadership and management of the CFO Division. The CFO is responsible for managing interest rate, liquidity, pension and capital risks. The CFO also aims to maximise the return on Regulatory and Economic Capital.
Chief Internal Auditor (CIA) | Designs and uses an audit system that identifies the main risks and evaluates controls. The CIA also develops an audit plan to assess existing risks that involve producing audit, assurance and monitoring reports.
Chief Compliance & Non-Financial Risk Officer (CCO) | Responsible to the CRO for control and oversight of conduct, compliance, reputational and economic crime risk, but has direct responsibility to report on conduct, compliance and reputational risk to Executive and Board Committees and the regulator.
Money Laundering Reporting Officer (MLRO) | Responsible to the CCO for control and oversight of economic crime risk but has regulatory responsibility to report on this risk type to Executive and Board Committees and the regulator.

Risk organisational structure
We use the ‘three lines of defence’ model to manage risk. This model is widely used in the banking industry and has a clear set of principles to put in place a
cohesive operating model across an organisation. It does this by separating risk management, risk control and risk assurance. The reporting lines to the Board with
respect to risk are as follows:

Line 1: Risk management
Business Units and Business Support Units identify, assess and manage the risks which originate and exist in their area, within our Risk Appetite. It is under the executive responsibility of the CEO.
Line 2: Risk control & oversight
Risk Control Units are independent monitoring, control and oversight functions. They make sure Business Units and Business Support Units manage risks effectively and within our Risk Appetite. The Risk Control units are: Risk – responsible for credit, liquidity, capital, market, pension, strategic and business, operational, model and enterprise risks; Economic Crime; and Compliance - responsible for reputational and conduct and regulatory risks. It is under the executive responsibility of the CEO, but responsible to the CRO for overseeing the first line of defence.
Line 3: Risk assurance
Internal Audit is an independent corporate function. It gives assurance on the design and effectiveness of our risk management and control processes. It is responsible to the CIA.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 43

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Internal control system
Our Risk Framework is an overarching view of our internal control system that helps us manage risk across the business. It sets out at a high level the principles,
standards, roles and responsibilities, and governance for internal control. Our Risk Framework covers the categories below:

Category | Description
Risk Frameworks | Set out how we should manage and control risk across the business, our risk types and our risk activities.
Risk Management Responsibilities | Set out the Line 1 risk management responsibilities for Business Units and Business Support Units.
Strategic Commercial Plans | Plans produced by business areas, at least annually, which describe the forecasted objectives, volumes and risk profile of new and existing business, within the limits defined in our Risk Appetite.
Risk Appetite | See our Risk Appetite section that follows.
Delegated Authorities/Mandates | Define who can do what under the authority delegated to the CEO by the Board.
Risk Certifications | Business Units, Business Support Units or Risk Control Units set out each year how they managed/controlled risks in line with our risk frameworks and Risk Appetite, and explain any action to be taken. This helps drive personal accountability.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 44

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

RISK APPETITE
How we control the risks we are prepared to take
When our Board sets our strategic objectives, it is important that we are clear on the risks we are prepared to take to achieve them. We express this through our
Risk Appetite Statement, which defines the amount and kind of risk we are willing to take, and able to accept, in pursuit of the strategic objectives defined. Our Risk
Appetite and strategy are closely linked, and our strategy must be achievable within the limits set out in our Risk Appetite. Our Risk Appetite Statement establishes
principles that we use to set our Risk Appetite and defines our overall approach to risk management.
How we describe the limits in our Risk Appetite
Our Risk Appetite sets out detailed limits across all types of risk, using metrics and qualitative statements.
Metrics
We use metrics to set limits across principal risk areas including metrics focused on losses, capital, liquidity and concentration. We set:
– Limits for losses for our most important risks, including credit, market, operational and conduct risk
– Capital limits, reflecting both the capital that regulators expect us to hold (regulatory capital) and our own internal measure economic capital (EC)
– Liquidity limits are set based on hypothetical, forward-looking scenarios that represent a moderate adverse but plausible level of stress for our business
– Concentration limits, to determine the maximum concentration level that we are willing to accept.
These limits apply in normal business conditions, but also where appropriate, when we might be experiencing a far more difficult economic environment. We refer
to conditions like this as being under stress. For more on EC and stress scenarios, see the Stress Testing section that follows.
Qualitative statements
For some types of risk, we also use qualitative supporting statements that describe prohibitions and restrictions supplementing the overarching risk appetite
statements. We also use them to prohibit or restrict exposure to certain sectors, types of customer and activities.
How we set our Risk Appetite, and stay within it
We control our Risk Appetite through our Risk Appetite Framework.
The Board
– Approves the Risk Appetite Statements and Primary metrics at least annually or as changing circumstances require.
– Reviews and ratifies the Secondary metrics limits approved by the Executive Risk Control Committee.
– Approves the corporate strategy and reviews the consistency with the Risk Appetite.
– Oversees adherence to Risk Appetite when the Board meets.
– Receives the Risk Appetite reports related to Board Risk Appetite, breaches and remedial plans.
The Executive Risk Control Committee (ERCC)
– Reviews the proposal for Primary metrics limits and qualitative statements, prior to their approval by the Board
– Reviews and approves Secondary metrics with corresponding limits of Risk Appetite.
– Reviews and challenges the alignment of strategic, business, capital and liquidity plans with the RAS.
– Receives information on risk appetite excesses or breaches by means of a regular appetite monitoring report.
– Reviews and monitors risk exposures and approves any corrective actions, business plans and budgets.
We embed our Risk Appetite by setting more granular risk limits for each business unit and key portfolios. These act as an early warning to the overall Risk Appetite
limit. When we use qualitative statements to describe our appetite for a risk, we link them to lower-level risk indicators, so that we can monitor and report our
performance against them.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 45

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

STRESS TESTING
Stress testing helps us understand how different events and economic conditions could affect our business plan, earnings and risk profile. This helps us plan and
manage our business.
Scenarios for stress testing
To see how we might cope with difficult conditions, we regularly develop challenging scenarios that we might face. We consult a broad range of internal
stakeholders, including Board members, when we design and choose our most important scenarios. The scenarios cover a wide range of outcomes, risk factors,
time horizons and market conditions. They are designed to test:
– The impact of shocks affecting the economy as a whole or the markets we operate in
– Key potential vulnerabilities of our business model, and the processes and systems which support it
– Potential impacts on specific risk types.
We describe each scenario using a narrative setting out how events might unfold, as well as a market and/or economic context. For example, the key economic
factors we reflect in our Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) scenarios include house prices, interest rates, unemployment levels, inflation rates,
and the size of the UK economy. We also explore sensitivities around several macro variables where there may be concerns or levels of uncertainty.
In 2025, we ran the Bank Capital Stress Test (BCST), which was designed as a severe but plausible ‘tail risk’ scenario, with deep simultaneous recessions in both the
UK and global economies, large falls in asset prices across markets and higher interest rates. In addition, we continue to explore our exposure to climate risks
through our Climate Internal Scenario Analysis (CISA). In 2025, the focus was on a bespoke physical risk scenario, followed by delayed transition, as set out in the
'Sustainability' section.
Uses of stress testing
We use stress testing to estimate the effect of these scenarios on our business and financial performance, including:
– Our business plan, and its assessment against our Risk Appetite
– Our capital strength, through our ICAAP
– Our liquidity position, through our Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP)
– Our long- and short-term impacts of climate change, through regulatory exercises and CISA
– Impacts on other risk types.
We use a wide range of models, approaches and assumptions supported by robust governance. These help us interpret the links between factors in markets and
the economy, and our financial performance. For example, one model looks at how changes to key macroeconomic variables like unemployment rates might affect
the number of customers who might fall into arrears on their mortgage or other loans.
Our stress testing models are subject to a formal review, independent validation and approval process. We highlight key weaknesses and related model
assumptions in the approval process for each stress test. In some cases, we overlay expert judgement onto the results of our models. Where this is material to the
outcome of the stress test, the approving governance committee reviews it. We take a multi-layered approach to stress testing to capture risks at various levels.
This ranges from sensitivity analysis of a single factor to a portfolio, to wider exercises that cover all risks across our entire business. We use stress test outputs to
design business plans that aim to mitigate potential impacts of possible stress scenarios.
We also conduct reverse stress tests. These are tests in which we identify and assess scenarios that are most likely to cause our business model to fail.
Board oversight of stress testing
The ERCC reviews design of scenarios in our ICAAP, ILAAP and CISA. The BRC reviews scenarios and key business assumptions and approves the stress testing
framework. The Board reviews stress test outputs as part of the approval processes for the ICAAP, ILAAP, Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD), Risk
Appetite and regulatory stress tests.
Regulatory stress tests
We take part in several external stress testing exercises. These include stress tests of the UK banking system conducted by the PRA and the BoE. We also contribute
to the stress tests of Banco Santander that are conducted by the European Banking Authority (EBA).
For more on capital and liquidity stress testing, see the ‘Capital risk’ and ‘Liquidity risk’ sections.
HOW RISK IS DISTRIBUTED ACROSS OUR BUSINESS
Economic capital
As well as assessing how much regulatory capital we need to hold, we use an internal EC model to measure our risk. We use EC to get a consistent measure across
different risk types. EC also takes account of how concentrated our portfolios are, and how much diversification there is between our various businesses and risk
types. Consequently, we can use EC for a range of risk management activities. For example, we can use it to help us compare requirements in our ICAAP or to get a
risk-adjusted comparison of income from different activities.
Regulatory capital – risk-weighted assets
We hold regulatory capital against our credit, market and operational risks. In 2025, over half of our total risk-weighted assets accounted for credit risk in Retail &
Business Banking. This reflects our business strategy and balance sheet.
For more on this, see ‘Risk-weighted assets’ in the ‘Capital risk’ section.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 46

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Credit risk

| Overview Credit risk is the risk of financial loss due to the default or credit quality deterioration of a customer or counterparty to which we provided credit, or for whom we have assumed a financial obligation. In this section, we describe our key credit risks, including our exposures in each of our business segments, and how we manage credit risk across the credit risk lifecycle. We discuss our ECL approach and the key inputs to our ECL model. We then analyse our key metrics, credit performance and forbearance. |  |  | Key metrics Stage 3 ratio of 1.18% ( 2024: 1.42% ). Loss allowances of £812m (2024: £869m ). Balance weighted average LTV of 65% (2024: 64%) on new mortgage lending. |

OUR KEY CREDIT RISKS
Exposures (audited)
Exposures to credit risk arise in our business segments from:

Retail & Business Banking | Consumer Finance | Corporate & Commercial Banking | Corporate Centre
In Mortgages: – Residential mortgages for customers with good credit quality (prime lending). – We provide these mostly for owner- occupiers, with buy-to-let mortgages for non-professional landlords. In Everyday Banking: – Unsecured lending to individuals, such as loans, credit cards and overdrafts. – Unsecured lending to businesses with annual turnover up to £6.5 m and simpler borrowing needs such as loans, credit cards and overdrafts. | – Financing for cars, vans, motorbikes and leisure vehicles through Santander Consumer (UK) plc (SCUK). – Through our joint ventures, Hyundai Capital UK Ltd and Volvo Car Financial Services UK Limited, we provide retail point of sale customer finance and wholesale finance facilities (stock finance). | – Loans, overdrafts, treasury services, invoice finance, trade and supplier finance. – We provide these to SMEs and mid-sized corporates typically with annual turnover up to £500m, Commercial Real Estate and Social Housing customers. | – Asset and liability management of our balance sheet. – Exposures include financial institutions (derivatives and other treasury products), structured products, and sovereign and supranational assets chosen for diversification and liquidity.

CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT
Our approach to credit risk
We manage our portfolios across the credit risk lifecycle, from formulating our risk strategy and planning, through assessment and origination, monitoring, arrears
management and debt recovery. We make sure the actual risk profile of our exposures stays in line with our business plans and within our Risk Appetite. We tailor
the way we manage risk to the type of product and regularly review our approach and refine it when we need to.
1. Risk strategy and planning (audited)
Relevant areas of the business work together to create our business plans. We consider our strategy, goals, and financial and technical resources alongside our
Risk Appetite. We focus on economic and market conditions and forecasts, regulations, conduct matters, profitability, returns and market share.
2. Assessment and origination (audited)
Managing credit risk begins with lending responsibly. That means only lending to customers who are committed to paying us back and can afford to. We take
proportionate steps to assess whether a customer will be able to repay the money borrowed including under foreseeable changes in their circumstances. We
do this by a series of initial affordability and credit risk assessments. When a customer applies, we assess the data they provide, plus data from credit reference
agencies (for Retail & Business Banking and Consumer Finance) and performance on their other Santander UK accounts (if they have any) against our Credit Policy.
Retail & Business Banking
In Mortgages, we assess affordability by reviewing the customer’s income and spending, their other credit commitments, and what would happen if interest
rates went up. Many of our decisions are automated as we use data available to us. We tailor our process and application assessment based on the product.
More complex transactions often need greater manual assessment using our credit underwriters’ skill and experience.
In Everyday Banking, many of our decisions are automated. We assess affordability by reviewing the customer’s income and spending, including other credit
commitments and adjusting for future inflation and expected interest rates. For Business Banking, we also consider business turnover and ongoing commitments
including any personal drawings and existing credit obligations.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 47

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Credit risk mitigation
The types of credit risk mitigation, including collateral, across each of our portfolios are:

Portfolio | Description
Residential mortgages | Collateral is in the form of a first legal charge over the property. Before we grant a mortgage, the property is valued either by a surveyor or using automated valuation methodologies where our confidence in the accuracy of this method is high.
Unsecured lending to individuals | There is no collateral or security tied to the loan that can be used to mitigate any potential loss if the customer does not pay us back.
Unsecured lending to businesses | Business banking lending is unsecured. When lending to incorporated businesses, we typically obtain personal guarantees from each director, but we do not treat these as collateral. We consider the UK Government guarantee under its Coronavirus Loan Schemes as collateral, covering 100% of losses for the Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS).

Consumer Finance
In Consumer Finance, similar to Retail & Business Banking, many decisions are automated and we tailor the process to the product. Residual value risk is one of our
top risks and these exposures are set using forward looking market data, at the level of vehicle derivative by age and anticipated mileage. This data is obtained from
a third party.
Credit risk mitigation
The type of credit risk mitigation, including collateral, is:

Portfolio | Description
Consumer (auto) finance | Collateral is in the form of legal ownership of the vehicle for most loans, with the customer being the registered keeper. Only a very small proportion of business is underwritten as a personal loan. In these cases, there is no collateral or security tied to the loan. We use a leading vehicle valuation company to assess the LTV at the proposal stage to ensure the value of the vehicle is appropriate.

Corporate & Commercial Banking
In Corporate & Commercial Banking, we assign each customer a credit rating, using our internal rating scale (see ‘Credit quality’ in ‘Santander UK group level – credit
risk review’ section). To do this, we look at their financial history and trends in the economy, backed up by the expert judgement of a risk analyst. We review our
internal ratings on a dynamic basis and at least once a year for those clients that are rated. We also assess the underlying risk of the transaction, taking account of
any mitigating factors (see the tables below) and how it fits with our risk policies, limits and Risk Appetite.
Responsible lending, including climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy
As part of the Banco Santander group, we comply with the Equator Principles to factor social, ethical and environmental impacts into our risk analysis and
decision making for qualifying financial transactions. We aim to support clients and economies in their transition to a low carbon economy, providing financial
products and/or services to business activities that are environmentally and socially responsible. Our ESG policy sets out how we identify, assess, monitor and
manage environmental and social risks and other climate change related activities in the Oil and Gas, Power Generation and Mining and Metals sectors and those
arising from businesses engaged in soft commodities. Our ESG policy prohibits project-related financing for new coal-fired power plants (CFPP) worldwide and we
will only work with new clients with CFPPs to provide specific financing for renewable energy projects. In line with Banco Santander's aim, by 2030 we will aim to
eliminate all exposure to thermal coal mining and stop providing financial services to power generation clients with more than 10% of revenue from thermal coal.
Credit risk mitigation
The types of credit risk mitigation, including collateral, across each of our portfolios are as follows. In addition, from time to time, we may take credit insurance over
individual transactions, and at a portfolio level we execute significant risk transfer transactions, which typically also result in reducing RWAs.

Portfolio | Description
SME and mid corporate | Includes secured and unsecured lending. We can take mortgage debentures or a first charge on commercial property as collateral. Before agreeing the loan, we obtain an independent professional valuation of the property. Loan agreements typically allow us to obtain revaluations during the term of the loan. We can also take guarantees, but we do not treat them as collateral unless they are supported by a tangible asset charged to us. We also lend against assets (like vehicles and equipment) and invoices for some customers. We value assets before we lend. For invoices, we review the customers' ledgers regularly and lend against debtors who meet agreed criteria.
Commercial Real Estate (CRE) | We take a first charge on commercial property as collateral. The loan is subject to criteria such as the property condition, age and location, tenant quality, lease terms and length, and the sponsor’s experience and creditworthiness. Before advancing the loan, and where appropriate, a bank representative visits the property. We also obtain an independent professional valuation which typically includes a site visit. Loan agreements typically allow us to obtain revaluations during the term of the loan.
Social Housing | We take a first charge on portfolios of residential real estate owned and let by UK Housing Associations as collateral, in most cases. We revalue this every three to five years (in line with industry practice), using the standard methods for property used for Social Housing.

Corporate Centre
Credit risk mitigation
The types of credit risk mitigation, including collateral, across each of our portfolios are as follows. In addition, from time to time, we may take credit insurance over
individual transactions, and at a portfolio level we execute significant risk transfer transactions, which typically reduce RWAs.

Portfolio | Description
Sovereign and Supranational | In line with market practice, there is no collateral against these assets.
Structured Products | These are our High Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) in our Eligible Liquidity Pool. They are mainly Asset Backed Securities (ABS) and covered bonds, which hold senior positions in the creditor hierarchy. Their credit rating reflects over-collateralisation in the structure and the assets that underpin their cash flows.
Financial Institutions | We use standard legal agreements to reduce credit risk via netting and collateralisation on derivatives, repos and reverse repos, and stock borrowing/ lending. We also reduce risk by clearing trades through central counterparties (CCPs) where possible.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 48

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

3. Monitoring (audited)
We measure and monitor changes in our credit risk profile on a regular and systematic basis against our budgets, limits and benchmarks.
Credit concentrations
A core part of our monitoring and management is a focus on credit concentrations, such as the proportion of our lending that goes to specific borrowers, groups or
industries. We set and monitor concentration limits in line with our Risk Appetite and review them on a regular basis.
– Geographical concentrations: We set exposure limits to countries and geographies, with reference to the country limits set by Banco Santander and our own Risk
Appetite. For more geographical information, see ‘Country risk exposures’.
– Industry concentrations: We also set exposure limits by industry sector. We set these limits based on the industry outlook, our strategic aims and desired level of
concentration, and relevant limits set by Banco Santander. We analyse committed exposures in the ‘Credit risk review’ section that follows.
Retail & Business Banking
We use IT systems and data available to us to monitor accounts. The main parts are:
– Behavioural scoring: we use statistical models that help predict whether a customer will have problems repaying, based on how they use their accounts
– Credit reference agencies: we often use data from agencies on how the borrower is handling credit from other lenders in our behaviour scoring models
– Other Santander UK accounts: each month, we also look at how the customer uses their other accounts with us, so we can identify problems early.
Our day-to-day retail credit risk monitoring relies on a mix of performance measures as described above. However, changes in the wider UK economy also impact
our Mortgages and Everyday Banking portfolios. As part of our day-to-day risk monitoring, we use a Retail Risk Playbook tolerance tool that monitors the most
relevant macroeconomic variables to retail portfolio performance against our forecasts. If the economy deviates materially from our forecasts, we review our retail
risk management policy and strategy.
We also ensure that portfolio quality remains within our Risk Appetite by measuring against trigger values for key risk profile and performance metrics.
For secured lending, our monitoring also takes account of changes in property prices. We estimate the property’s value every three months. In most cases, we use
statistical models based on recent sales prices and valuations in that local area. Use of this model is subject to Model Risk Governance. Where a lack of data means
the model’s valuation is not available, we use the original surveyor valuation with a House Price Index (HPI) adjustment as needed.
For unsecured lending with ongoing credit limits, i.e. credit cards and overdrafts, monitoring might lead us to raise or lower credit limits.
Consumer Finance
In Consumer Finance, we track customer accounts using IT systems and data tools. Alongside our relationship with the customer, we use data provided by credit
reference agencies that shows how our customers manage their financial commitments. The Retail Risk framework ensures our portfolio stays within agreed limits.
We review our residual value risk on a regular basis, which allows us to spot changes in market trends early.
Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre
We regularly monitor and report our credit risk by portfolio, segment, industry, location and customer. We monitor detailed analyses of our credit exposures and
risk trends each month.
We use a Watchlist for exposures subject to annual reviews to identify potential problem debt early. If a customer is on our Watchlist, it does not mean they have
defaulted. It just means their probability of default has increased, such as they have breached a covenant or lost a major contract.
We classify Watchlist cases as:
– Proactive: for heightened monitoring. We monitor these cases more often and where appropriate may consider more collateral.
– Intensive/Specialised: for more serious cases. We may take steps to restructure debt including extending the term, taking more collateral, agreeing a lower credit
limit, or seeking repayment of the loan through refinancing or other means.
We assess Watchlist cases for impairment as set out in the ‘Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR)’ section. When a customer is on the Proactive watchlist, we do
not consider it has suffered a SICR for ECL purposes, so it remains in Stage 1 for our loss allowance calculations. When a customer is on the Intensive or Specialised
watchlist, we consider it has suffered a SICR and apply a lifetime ECL for our loss allowance calculations. Further measures are considered which include additional
security, guarantees or equity available and the potential to enhance value by asset management.
In Corporate & Commercial Banking, as part of our annual reviews, for loans nearing maturity, we look at the prospect of refinancing the loan on current market
terms and applicable credit policy. If this is unlikely, we put the case on our Watchlist. We manage exposures not subject to annual reviews, mainly high volume and
low value cases, using early warning indicators including credit reference agency data, supported by teams of expert analysts.
In Corporate Centre, we typically monitor the credit quality of our exposures daily. We use internal and third-party data to detect any potential credit deterioration.
4. Arrears management (audited)
Retail & Business Banking and Consumer Finance
We use multiple strategies to manage arrears, starting as soon as the day after a missed payment. We also contact customers who are up to date but may be at risk
of falling into arrears, offering support where needed. When a customer faces financial difficulties, we assess their situation to provide the most suitable help and
ensure they can manage their agreement while in arrears. The level of support depends on the customer’s risk profile and individual circumstances, with solutions
tailored to their needs.
Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre
We identify problem debt by close monitoring, supported by our Watchlist process for exposures subject to annual review. We aim to identify warning signs early
by monitoring customers’ financial and trading data, checking to see they do not breach covenants, and having regular dialogue with them. We tailor our strategy
to the type of customer, their circumstances and the level of risk. We try to help our customers find their own way out of financial difficulty and agree on a plan
that works for both parties. Where required, we engage and hand over to our Restructuring & Recoveries team serious cases. For exposures not subject to annual
review, we have strategies to manage arrears that we can use as early as the day of the missed payment. If a case becomes urgent or requires specialist attention,
and if it transfers to Stage 3, we transfer it to our Restructuring & Recoveries team.
For more, see the Forbearance section.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 49

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

5. Debt recovery (audited)
Sometimes, even when we have taken all reasonable and responsible steps to manage arrears in our Financial Support area, they are not effective. If this happens,
we may choose to end our agreement with the customer and try to recover the outstanding balance (with recourse to any associated collateral), or as much of it as
we can.
Retail & Business Banking
In Mortgages and Everyday Banking, we may use a debt collection agency, sell the debt, or take the customer to court. For residential mortgages, we may repossess
the property as a last resort or to protect it from damage or third-party claims. We make sure our estimated losses from repossessed properties are realistic by
getting two independent valuations and the estimated selling costs, and using them in our loss allowances calculations. Where we repossess a property, we do not
take ownership. We use agents to realise the value and settle the debt. Any surplus funds are returned to the borrower or dealt with in line with insolvency rules.
Consumer Finance
In Consumer Finance, the customer agreement is usually secured by a motor vehicle asset. We will seek to recover this asset if we are unable to rehabilitate the
customer, or they remain in arrears with no contact. As in Retail & Business Banking, we may use a debt collection agency or specialist law firm to recover any
remaining balance.
Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre
Where we look for an exit, we aim to do this, if we can, by agreeing with the borrower that they will sell some or all their assets on a voluntary basis or agreeing
to give them time to refinance their debt with another lender. Where we cannot reach an agreement, we consider recovery options. This can be through an
insolvency proceeding, enforcing over any collateral or selling debt on the secondary market. We may also consider other legal action to recover what we are
owed. If there is a shortfall, we write it off against our loss allowances. In very rare cases, we may act as mortgagee in possession of assets held as collateral
against non-performing commercial lending. In such cases, we carry the assets on our balance sheet and classify them in line with our accounting policies.
Loan modifications (audited)
We sometimes change the terms of a loan when a customer gets into financial difficulty (this is known as forbearance), or for other commercial reasons.
Forbearance (audited)
We can change the terms of a customer's loan, temporarily or permanently, to help them through temporary periods of difficulty so they can get back on to
sustainable terms. We assess what we offer to make sure the customer can afford it. Forbearance improves our customer relationships and we review our approach
regularly to make sure it is still effective.
We try to offer forbearance before a customer defaults. In few cases, we also help a customer more than once. This can happen if the plan to repay their debt does
not work and we have to draw up another one. When this happens more than once in a year, or more than three times in five years, we call it multiple forbearance.
We only use foreclosure or repossession as a last resort.
The main types of forbearance we offer are:

Action | Description
Term extension | We can extend the loan term, making each monthly payment smaller. We may offer this if the customer is in arrears or up to date with payments but shows signs of financial difficulties. We may also offer this if the loan is about to mature and refinancing is not possible on market terms. In selected instances, we may offer term extensions for interest only loans that are past the point of product maturity. This will typically be where no viable repayment solution has been identified for the outstanding capital balance, and legal enforcement activity is not deemed to be appropriate to the customer's circumstances.
Interest-only | Historical conversions to interest-only repayment plans due to financial difficulties are classed as forborne. For corporate customers, interest-only concessions are considered on a case by case basis. Concessions are only granted if the nature of the financial difficulties is assessed to be temporary. Counterparties are expected to recover in full and resume making full capital and interest payments once they are in a stronger financial position.
Other payment rescheduling, including capitalisation | For retail mortgage customers, we may add the arrears to the mortgage balance (this is known as capitalisation) if they cannot afford to increase their monthly payment to pay off their arrears in a reasonable time but have been making their monthly payments, usually for at least six months. We can capitalise property charges due to a landlord. We pay them for the customer to avoid the lease being forfeited, although these are not classed as forbearance. We may combine this help with term extensions and, in the past, interest-only concessions. In certain exceptional cases, we may offer interest rate concessions. We may agree an arrangement to pay less than the Contractual Monthly Payment (including zero) for a short period of time where they are experiencing temporary financial difficulties, or to pay more than the Contractual Monthly Payment in order to pay back accrued arrears. For credit card and bank account customers, we may agree to suspend fees and/or interest for a short period of time where they are experiencing temporary financial difficulties. A refinance of a personal loan over a longer term to reduce the contractual monthly payment may be agreed, where a customer is showing signs of financial difficulties. The interest rate remains the same, or the closest lower rate available. For corporate customers, we may lower or stop their payments until they have time to recover. We may reschedule payments to better match the customer’s cash flow – for example if the business is seasonal - or provide a temporary increase in facilities to cover peak demand ahead of their trading improving. We might do this by arrears capitalisation or drawing from an overdraft. We may also offer to provide new facilities, interest rate concessions and interest roll-up. In rare cases, we agree to forgive or reduce part of the debt.

When we agree forbearance, we consider the account has suffered a SICR, as we explain in the ‘Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR)’ section later on, and we
classify it as Stage 2 or 3. Non-performing forborne accounts will be classified as Stage 3 and performing forborne accounts as Stage 2. All forborne accounts will
be minimum Stage 2 unless the account is deemed unlikely to pay, involves forgiving fees and interest or debt, or is being granted multiple forbearances. In these
cases it will be Stage 3. A loan moves out of forbearance once the exit criteria below are met. We monitor the performance of all forborne loans.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 50

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Exit from forbearance criteria

| Exit from | Conditions to be met
Cure | Non-performing to Performing / Stage 3 to Stage 2 | For an account classified as non-performing forbearance/Stage 3 to exit, all the following conditions must be met:
– If the account was classed as Stage 3 due to being more than 90 days past due, then the account should be 90 days or less past due
– If the account was classed as Stage 3 due to being unlikely to pay, then the account should no longer be deemed unlikely to pay
– The customer has no other material default debt with us more than 90 days past due.
– Account has exited its forbearance trigger for 12 consecutive months
If all the conditions are met, the account is re-classed as Stage 2 forbearance until the Stage 2 forbearance exit conditions set out below are also met
Performing forbearance to Non-Forborne / Stage 2 to Stage 1 | For an account classified as forbearance/Stage 2 to exit, all the following conditions must be met:
– The account is no longer in arrears, and the customer has no other material debts with us which are more than 30 days in arrears
– The account no longer triggers SICR
– The account has been classed as Stage 2 for at least two years since the end of the latest forbearance strategy

If a borrower fails to meet the post forbearance contractual obligations during probation, the loan is re-classified as non-performing and Stage 3 and the probation
period is reset.
Other forms of debt management and modifications
Retail & Business Banking
For mortgage customers we can offer other modifications (Contract Variations) at the customer's request that are not motivated by financial difficulty. These
modifications are not classified as forbearance. Within Mortgages and Everyday Banking, we do not classify insolvency solutions for any unsecured retail customers
as forbearance and this is in line with industry guidelines.
Consumer Finance
We do not classify insolvency solutions for any unsecured retail customers as forbearance. This is in line with industry guidelines.
Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre
When customers are in financial difficulty, we can also manage debt in other ways, depending on the facts of the specific case:

Action | Description
Waiving or changing covenants | If a borrower breaks a covenant, we can either waive it or change it, taking their latest and future financial position into account. We may also add a condition on the use of any surplus cash (after operating costs) to pay down their debt to us.
Asking for more collateral or guarantees | If a borrower has unencumbered assets, we may accept more collateral in return for revised financing terms. We may also take a guarantee from companies in the same group and/or major shareholders. We only do this where we believe the guarantor can meet their commitment.
Asking for more equity | Where a borrower can no longer pay the interest on their debt, we may accept fresh equity capital from new or existing investors to change the capital structure in return for better terms on the existing debt.

Risk measurement and control
We measure and control credit risk at all stages across the credit risk lifecycle. We have a range of tools, processes and approaches.
Retail & Business Banking and Consumer Finance
These businesses involve managing large numbers of accounts, so they produce a significant amount of data. This allows us to take a more analytical and data
intense approach to measuring risk. This is reflected in the wide range of statistical models we use across the credit risk lifecycle. We use:
– Risk strategy and planning: econometric models
– Assessment and origination: application scorecards, and attrition, pricing, loss allowance and capital models
– Monitoring: behavioural scorecards and profitability models
– Arrears management: models to estimate the proportion of cases that will result in possession (known as roll rates)
– Debt recovery: recovery models.
We assess and review our loss allowances regularly. We look at factors such as the cash flow available to service debt. We also use an agency to value any
property collateral.
Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre
We measure the credit risk on treasury products by adding their potential future exposure to market movements over their lives to their fair value. Then we add it
to any other exposure and measure the total against our credit limits for each client. We assess our loss allowances regularly by looking at factors such as the cash
flow available to service debt and the value of collateral based on third-party professional valuations.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 51

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Key metrics (audited)
We use a number of key metrics to measure and control credit risk, as follows:

Metric | Description
Expected Credit Loss (ECL) | ECL tells us what credit risk is expected to cost us either over the next 12 months or over the lifetime of the exposure where there is evidence of a SICR since origination. We explain how we calculate ECL below.
Stages 1, 2 and 3 | We assess each facility’s credit risk profile to determine which Stage to allocate them to, and we monitor where there is a SICR and transfers between the Stages, including monitoring of coverage ratios for each Stage.
Stage 3 ratio | The Stage 3 ratio is the sum of Stage 3 drawn and Stage 3 undrawn assets divided by the sum of total drawn assets and Stage 3 undrawn assets. The Stage 3 ratio is a key indicator used to monitor underlying asset performance.
Expected Loss (EL) (unaudited) | EL is based on the CRD IV regulatory capital rules and gives us another view of credit risk. It is the product of the probability of default, exposure at default and loss given default, and we include direct and indirect costs. We base it on our risk models and our assessment of each customer’s credit quality. The rest of the Risk review, impairments, losses and loss allowances refer to calculations in accordance with IFRS, unless we specifically say they relate to CRD IV. For our IFRS impairment accounting policy, see Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

We also assess risks from other perspectives, such as geography, business area, product and process to identify areas to focus on. We also use stress testing to
establish vulnerabilities to economic deterioration. Our business segments tailor their approach to credit risk to their customers, as we explain later on.
Recognising ECL (audited)
The ECL approach estimates the credit losses arising from defaults in the next 12 months on qualifying exposures, or defaults over the lifetime of the exposure
where there is evidence of a SICR since the origination date. Our ECL approach for portfolio assessments uses models that consider forward-looking data on
economic scenarios, including a range of possible outcomes, which are unbiased and probability-weighted to reflect the risk of a loss being incurred even when
it is unlikely. In some cases, we need to apply Judgemental Adjustments (JAs) to our model outputs. We use internal credit ratings for corporate borrowers and
individually assessed corporate exposures.
Critical judgements and accounting estimates applied in calculating ECL (audited)
The application of the ECL impairment methodology for calculating credit impairment allowances is susceptible to change from period to period. The methodology
requires management to make judgemental assumptions in determining the estimates.
For more on our approach to making critical judgements and accounting estimates applied in calculating ECL, see 'Critical judgements and accounting estimates'
Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Multiple economic scenarios and probability weights (audited)
For all our portfolios, we use forward-looking economic scenarios. Our scenarios consist of a central base case, one upside scenario and two downside scenarios.
We use these scenarios to reflect a wide range of possible outcomes for the UK economy.
Our forecasting approach
We derive our scenarios in part by using a set of parameters in GDP fan charts published by the Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR). These fan charts reflect the
probability distribution of a deviation from the OBR’s central forecast to show the uncertainty about the outcome of a variable, in this case GDP.
Once we have established the GDP paths for each scenario, we run them through the Oxford Global Economic Model (OGEM) to derive the other macroeconomic
variables, such as unemployment and house prices. These variables are the product of the GDP growth paths we have forecast and the output of the OGEM for
these growth paths. We then review them to ensure consistency with the narrative of each scenario and so changes to the variables may be needed in some cases.
We then impose a Bank Rate profile for each scenario using expert judgement with the base case as the starting point and then adjusting this for each of the other
scenarios based on the narratives. We produce a range of Bank Rate profiles to reflect a range of possible outcomes the Bank of England may follow depending on
how it sees the trade-off between growth and inflation evolving over the forecast period. For example, this might consist of higher rates initially in response to
inflationary concerns followed by lower rates as inflation falls towards target, and that this may be sharper in the event of a deep recession.
We update the baseline in our economic scenarios at least twice a year in line with our annual budgeting and three-year planning processes, or sooner if there is a
material change in current or expected economic conditions. We refresh all our economic scenarios quarterly to reflect the latest data and OBR fan charts if these
changed, which are then reviewed and approved by the Credit Risk Provisions Forum (CRPF). The CRPF also assesses the probability weights at least once a quarter.
We do not use consensus forecasts as inputs to our models, but we do compare the outputs of our models against consensus views for the base case, to make
sure that we understand any significant differences and address them where needed. At 31 December 2025, there were no significant differences between our
base case forecasts and the consensus views.
In 2025, as in previous years, we undertook a further peer benchmarking analysis of the economic scenarios, which for Q4-25 included the mean weighted analysis
for a selection of economic variables, including GDP, unemployment rate and HPI and CRE. This meant that we could compare our weighted scenarios against the
average of our peers to understand what differences there may be. The analysis demonstrated that our economic scenarios were in line with our peers.
In 2025, we also considered any likely impact from climate risk on our forecasting approach and concluded that no adjustment to the multiple economic
scenarios for climate risk was required. This is because climate change effects are generally regarded to be relevant over a longer timeframe than our forecast
period of five years.
Our use of four different scenarios is designed to reflect different possible outcomes to the base case, highlighting the upside and downside risks associated with
the central scenario.
Our forecasting period for GDP is five years and we use the OGEM 25 year model for the outer years, post five year forecast. As part of this, we set a floor on the
unemployment rate at 4% to ensure that the long-term view is near to the Non-Accelerating Inflation Rate of Unemployment set out by the Bank of England in its
annual supply side review.
Key changes to our forecasting approach in 2025
In 2025, there were no major changes to our forecasting approach. We incorporated the OBR's March 2025 fan chart parameters to generate the GDP paths
(excluding the base case).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 52

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Base case
We review the scenarios and associated weights every quarter to ensure they appropriately reflect the current economic circumstances and UK Government policy
which is subject to change.
In summary, the outlook for the UK economy has GDP growth rising over the forecast period. As inflation gradually returns to the target rate, further Bank Rate
cuts should support a recovery in business and consumer confidence. However, downside risks to the outlook remain particularly around geopolitical tensions and
potential productivity gains.

Base case key macroeconomic assumptions
GDP: The UK economy slowed in Q3-25 with growth of 0.1% quarter-on-quarter. It was always likely that a slow-down from the above average quarterly growth rates of H1-25 would happen, but with weak PMIs as well there is a concern that the economy will stagnate in Q4-25. However, Q3-25 GDP did see a slight improvement in household spending while business investment posted a solid gain, as such we would expect that post-Budget growth will pick up, although some underlying weakness means the economy growing at levels similar to those experienced pre-pandemic, rather than the stronger growth needed to help repair the UK’s public finances. For 2026, we expect to see another year of positive growth, although slightly weaker than in 2025 as real wage growth eases and the pace of interest rate cuts slows. Over the longer term, the key issue for growth remains productivity and without a boost to this, growth will remain at the average pre-pandemic levels of 1.4%. It remains to be seen whether artificial intelligence (AI) or government policy can help to improve this.
Bank Rate: The Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) lowered Bank Rate four times in 2025 to 3.75%, in line with our expectations. Our base case assumes a further two rate cuts in 2026, taking Bank Rate to 3.25% by the end of the year, with no further reductions thereafter. The outlook for further interest rate cuts remains uncertain, with the MPC stating that decisions to lower Bank Rate further will be influenced by policymakers' views on how restrictive the current stance of monetary policy is.
House price growth: House prices grew marginally in 2025, helped in part by falling mortgage rates, despite some weakness towards the end of the year. House prices have proved resilient given the heightened levels of uncertainty experienced throughout the year. Lower inflation and interest rates coupled with the gradual improvement in affordability, and ongoing weakness in housing supply, is expected to ensure steady house price growth over the forecast period. We anticipate growth of c.2.5% year-on-year in 2026 with an annual house price growth of c.3% year-on-year growth for the rest of the forecast period.
Unemployment rate: Recent data for unemployment indicates there is a loosening of the labour market in response to higher employment costs. However, some caution needs to be taken as the unemployment data is still subject to problems with the ONS Labour Force Survey data. The unemployment rate has risen to over 5%, payroll numbers have fallen in most months over the past year and redundancies have risen too, all chiming with weakness seen across various survey data. In terms of the forecast, we expect the unemployment rate to remain elevated in the short term with businesses reporting pay pressures and squeezed margins as reasons for reducing headcounts. The unemployment rate then drops back to 4.3% by the end of the forecast period, broadly in line with Bank of England's prediction for the natural rate of unemployment which is, as growth recovers, businesses and consumer sentiment improves and CPI inflation remains at the target rate.
CRE price growth: After falling for seven quarters in a row, CRE prices stabilised in Q2-24 and have since risen in each of the five quarters through to Q3-25 as the sector continues to recover, after two years of falling prices. Cuts in Bank Rate have likely helped prices to rise and despite monthly increases slowing towards the end of 2025, we expect CRE price growth to stabilise throughout the forecast period around the 2% year-on-year mark.

In the medium-term, the projections assume that current demographic trends will continue, which could impact the UK’s growth potential. For instance, it is likely
that the reduction in the UK workforce will continue and this will have a knock-on impact for the economy, particularly if there are shortages of skilled workers
in particular sectors. The same can be said for current productivity trends, although there is potential for AI to improve growth towards the end of the decade.
However, our assumption of the average annual growth of c.1.5% for our medium-term forecasts is in line with the OBR’s latest estimate of the UK’s long run
average growth rate.
Key changes to our base case in 2025
For our base case, key changes were stronger GDP growth compared to 2024; higher unemployment exacerbated by the higher costs of employment businesses
have experienced since the 2024 Autumn Budget; lower house price growth which was affected by uncertainty and the Stamp Duty Land Tax change. Risks to the
base case remain with potential for rising geopolitical risks affecting the UK economy. Base case was updated to reflect back data changes to GDP pushing up
growth. We anticipate a modest rise in unemployment as firms adjust to the higher cost of employment.
Other scenarios
Based on this revised base case, we reviewed our suite of scenarios to ensure that they capture the wide range of potential outcomes for the UK economy.
These include; (i) a slower recovery that is more akin to the ‘U’ shape of past recessions; (ii) labour market frictions due to skills mismatches and a shrinking
workforce as some discouraged workers leave altogether (for example longer-term sickness levels remaining above pre-pandemic levels); (iii) fragmentation of
the global economy in particular changes and additional frictions to supply chains; and (iv) the global economy recovering more swiftly from higher inflation and
supply constraints.
To reflect these potential outcomes, we use the base case and three additional scenarios, which we consider sufficient to reflect all the above potential outcomes.
As with the base case, the scenarios are forecast over a five-year period with the OEGM 25 year model used to determine the forecasts after this period with a floor
on the unemployment rate set at 4%.
The other scenarios are:
One upside scenario
This scenario has quicker economic performance, that is driven by an improvement in the supply side of the economy that allows for stronger growth with lower
inflation. Inflation falls slightly below target at the start of the forecast period helped by lower wage growth, and stays just below the 2% target over the period.
This allows the Bank of England to cut rates faster than the base case, bringing them back towards what might be considered the neutral rate earlier. This results
in higher consumer and business confidence enabling higher levels of spending and investment, with savings rates returning to levels consistent with economic
growth as real earnings growth returns. In this scenario GDP remains stronger than the base case, as does house price growth. Unemployment peaks at a lower
level and drops more quickly than the base case.
Two downside scenarios
The downside scenarios capture a range of risks, including further escalation of geopolitical events, continuing weaker investment (reflecting the unstable
environment and higher cost of employment), a continuing and significant mismatch between job vacancies and skills (as well as a smaller labour force) and a
return to upside inflation surprises causing interest rates to remain at higher levels for longer.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 53

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Downside 1 – In this scenario, the economy contracts and although the recession is small and short lived, the recovery is weak and below potential. The increase in
various employment costs mean growth is tempered and employment shrinks as businesses restructure to deal with the extra costs. Consumers opt to save more
rather than spend which affects the recovery path, as consumer confidence is low in part due to concerns about the unstable geopolitical environment and the
increase in lay-offs as businesses restructure. With inflation remaining above target, Bank Rate remains in restrictive territory and only gradually falls back, while
house prices fall as households look to downsize in response to persistently high rates of unemployment. The global economy is affected by a combination of
factors, such as commodity prices becoming increasingly volatile due to geopolitical events and the potential impact of additional tariffs. This affects global inflation
which negatively impacts UK trade and hinders a return to growth.
Downside 2 – This scenario shows a marked fall in GDP, with rising unemployment and falling house prices reflecting lower growth and productivity, which
feeds across the whole economy. It also reflects the increase in geopolitical risk which affects market sentiment and causes further fragmentation of the global
economy. It also assumes that major risk events continue to occur, exposing the vulnerability of countries' fiscal positions and the means to respond to such events.
Unemployment peaks at 8.5% and although there are some inflationary pressures from changing trade patterns, the sharp fall in demand means inflation falls
below target and allows the MPC to cut rates sharply from the start of the scenario to stabilise demand. This fails to support the housing market with house values
falling sharply. Inflation below target and lower interest rates eventually eases some of the pressures on the UK economy and growth picks up in the medium-term.
Key changes to our alternative scenarios in 2025
In 2025, there were no key changes to the alternative scenarios, however the narratives were updated to reflect key risks.
Despite mixed signals about the UK's recent economic performance, which may impact the path of the Bank Rate, our scenarios continue to capture a broad range
of forecasts.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 54

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Our macroeconomic assumptions and their evolution throughout the forecast period
Our macroeconomic assumptions and their evolution throughout the forecast period for each of the scenarios at 31 December 2025 were:

Economic scenarios 1 |  | Upside | Base case | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | Weighted
|  | % | % | % | % | %
GDP | 2024 (actual) | 1.1 | 1.1 | 1.1 | 1.1 | 1.1
| 2025 | 1.5 | 1.4 | 1.3 | 1.3 | 1.4
| 2026 | 1.7 | 1.0 | (0.4) | (3.3) | 0.3
| 2027 | 2.3 | 1.4 | — | (1.0) | 0.9
| 2028 | 2.5 | 1.4 | 0.4 | 1.4 | 1.3
| 2029 | 2.6 | 1.5 | 0.4 | 1.4 | 1.4
| 2030 | 2.7 | 1.5 | 0.7 | 1.4 | 1.5
| Start to trough 2 | n/a | n/a | (0.7) | (5.0) | n/a
| 5-year average increase/decrease 3 | 2.3 | 1.4 | 0.2 | (0.1) | n/a
Bank Rate | 2024 (actual) | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75
| 2025 | 3.75 | 3.75 | 3.75 | 3.75 | 3.75
| 2026 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 4.50 | 2.00 | 3.40
| 2027 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.25 | 1.50 | 3.04
| 2028 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.25 | 2.50 | 3.14
| 2029 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.25 | 2.75 | 3.16
| 2030 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.25 | 3.00 | 3.19
| 5-year end period | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.25 | 3.00 | n/a
| 5-year peak | 3.75 | 3.75 | 4.50 | 3.75 | 3.79
HPI | 2024 (actual) | 4.0 | 4.0 | 4.0 | 4.0 | 4.0
| 2025 | 2.3 | 1.5 | 0.1 | 0.3 | 1.2
| 2026 | 4.1 | 2.5 | (5.3) | (12.1) | (0.6)
| 2027 | 4.5 | 3.0 | (4.4) | (11.9) | 0.2
| 2028 | 4.5 | 3.0 | 0.7 | (4.9) | 2.1
| 2029 | 4.5 | 3.0 | 3.4 | 7.2 | 3.7
| 2030 | 4.5 | 3.0 | 4.4 | 7.1 | 3.9
| Start to trough 2 | n/a | n/a | (10.2) | (28.0) | (0.3)
| 5-year average increase/decrease 3 | 4.4 | 2.9 | (0.7) | (3.7) | n/a
Unemployment | 2024 (actual) | 4.4 | 4.4 | 4.4 | 4.4 | 4.4
| 2025 | 4.7 | 4.8 | 5.1 | 5.2 | 4.9
| 2026 | 4.7 | 4.9 | 5.7 | 6.8 | 5.3
| 2027 | 4.1 | 4.7 | 5.8 | 8.5 | 5.3
| 2028 | 4.0 | 4.4 | 5.8 | 7.9 | 5.0
| 2029 | 4.0 | 4.3 | 5.9 | 7.1 | 4.9
| 2030 | 4.0 | 4.3 | 6.0 | 6.4 | 4.9
| 5-year end period | 4.0 | 4.3 | 6.0 | 6.4 | n/a
| 5-year peak | 4.7 | 4.9 | 6.0 | 8.5 | 5.3
CRE price growth | 2024 (actual) | 0.5 | 0.5 | 0.5 | 0.5 | 0.5
| 2025 | 2.1 | 1.7 | (0.2) | (0.8) | 1.0
| 2026 | 6.7 | 2.2 | (3.1) | (16.8) | (0.3)
| 2027 | 5.8 | 2.5 | (1.9) | (7.2) | 1.2
| 2028 | 3.6 | 2.2 | (0.8) | 2.5 | 1.8
| 2029 | 4.0 | 1.9 | 0.3 | 3.0 | 2.0
| 2030 | 2.3 | 1.5 | 2.4 | 3.9 | 2.1
| Start to trough 2 | n/a | n/a | (6.7) | (24.1) | (0.1)
| 5-year average increase/decrease 3 | 4.6 | 2.2 | (0.9) | (3.8) | n/a

1 Our Q4-25 forecast used for ECL calculation. GDP is the calendar year annual growth rate. HPI and CRE price growth is Q4 annual growth rate and all other data points are at 31 December in the year indicated.
2 GDP, HPI and CRE start is taken from level at Q3-25.
3 This is the compound annual growth rate (CAGR) based on a 5-year period which represents an average annualised growth rate.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 55

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The table below sets out our macroeconomic assumptions and their evolution throughout the forecast period for each of the scenarios at 31 December 2024:

Economic scenarios 1 |  | Upside | Base case | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | Weighted
|  | % | % | % | % | %
GDP | 2023 (actual) | 0.3 | 0.3 | 0.3 | 0.3 | 0.3
| 2024 | 0.9 | 0.9 | 0.8 | 0.4 | 0.8
| 2025 | 2.0 | 1.4 | (0.4) | (3.4) | 0.6
| 2026 | 2.5 | 1.6 | 0.3 | (0.9) | 1.2
| 2027 | 2.5 | 1.4 | 0.9 | 1.3 | 1.4
| 2028 | 2.5 | 1.4 | 1.0 | 2.8 | 1.6
| 2029 | 2.5 | 1.4 | 1.1 | 2.8 | 1.6
| Start to trough 2 | n/a | n/a | (0.7) | (5.2) | n/a
| 5-year average increase/decrease 3 | 2.4 | 1.5 | 0.6 | 0.3 | n/a
Bank Rate | 2023 (actual) | 5.25 | 5.25 | 5.25 | 5.25 | 5.25
| 2024 | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75
| 2025 | 3.25 | 3.75 | 4.50 | 2.25 | 3.71
| 2026 | 3.00 | 3.50 | 3.25 | 1.50 | 3.16
| 2027 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.00 | 2.50 | 3.08
| 2028 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.00 | 2.75 | 3.10
| 2029 | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.00 | 3.00 | 3.13
| 5-year end period | 3.00 | 3.25 | 3.00 | 3.00 | n/a
| 5-year peak | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75 | 4.75
HPI | 2023 (actual) | (0.7) | (0.7) | (0.7) | (0.7) | (0.7)
| 2024 | 4.8 | 4.5 | 2.0 | 1.3 | 3.6
| 2025 | 4.3 | 3.0 | (5.8) | (20.1) | (1.2)
| 2026 | 4.7 | 3.0 | (3.7) | (14.7) | 0.3
| 2027 | 4.6 | 3.0 | 2.9 | 5.8 | 3.4
| 2028 | 4.5 | 3.0 | 4.4 | 9.6 | 4.0
| 2029 | 4.6 | 3.0 | 4.6 | 7.7 | 4.0
| Start to trough 2 | n/a | n/a | (10.1) | (33.0) | (0.8)
| 5-year average increase/decrease 3 | 4.7 | 3.2 | n/a | (3.7) | n/a
Unemployment | 2023 (actual) | 3.8 | 3.8 | 3.8 | 3.8 | 3.8
| 2024 | 4.4 | 4.3 | 4.4 | 4.4 | 4.4
| 2025 | 4.1 | 4.4 | 5.2 | 8.3 | 4.9
| 2026 | 4.0 | 4.2 | 5.5 | 8.2 | 4.9
| 2027 | 4.0 | 4.2 | 5.5 | 7.6 | 4.8
| 2028 | 4.0 | 4.2 | 5.5 | 7.0 | 4.8
| 2029 | 4.0 | 4.2 | 5.5 | 6.4 | 4.7
| 5-year end period | 4.0 | 4.2 | 5.5 | 6.4 | n/a
| 5-year peak | 4.4 | 4.4 | 5.5 | 8.5 | 4.9
CRE price growth | 2023 (actual) | (5.6) | (5.6) | (5.6) | (5.6) | (5.6)
| 2024 | 0.4 | (0.1) | (2.3) | (2.7) | (0.9)
| 2025 | 5.7 | 2.5 | (5.5) | (14.9) | (0.7)
| 2026 | 5.2 | 2.8 | 1.7 | (8.5) | 2.0
| 2027 | 2.9 | 2.5 | 2.0 | 4.4 | 2.6
| 2028 | 3.3 | 2.2 | 1.8 | 3.8 | 2.4
| 2029 | 3.0 | 2.1 | 2.4 | 3.4 | 2.4
| Start to trough 2 | n/a | n/a | (7.4) | (24.7) | (1.2)
| 5-year average increase/decrease 3 | 4.0 | 2.3 | (0.1) | (3.3) | n/a

1 Our Q4-24 forecast used for ECL calculation. GDP is the calendar year annual growth rate. HPI and CRE price growth is Q4 annual growth rate and all other data points are at 31 December in the year indicated.
2 GDP. HPI and CRE start is taken from level at Q3-24.
3 This is the compound annual growth rate (CAGR) based on a 5-year period which represents an average annualised growth rate.
Scenario weights
Each quarter, we review the scenario weights we apply. We consider the weights of the economic scenarios as a whole, while ensuring that the scenarios capture
the non-linear distribution of losses across a reasonable range. To support our initial assessment of the weight of a scenario, we undertake a Monte Carlo analysis
to estimate the likelihood of a five-year average GDP forecast growth rate occurring based on the long-run historically observed average. We then create a standard
distribution bell curve around this long run average. This allows us to estimate the probability of a given GDP scenario occurring based on past experience and
therefore assign a weight to that scenario. We also consider the UK economic and political environment when applying weights.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 56

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The scenario weights we applied for 2025 and 2024 were:

| Upside | Base case | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | Weighted
Scenario weights | % | % | % | % | %
2025 | 15 | 50 | 25 | 10 | 100
2024 | 15 | 50 | 25 | 10 | 100

2025 compared to 2024
We remain of the view that the risks to UK growth are still biased to the downside and include: further geopolitical events creating more challenges for economies
both the UK and abroad; the potential for further upside inflation surprises causing inflation to stay above target for longer, raising the cost of living and so reducing
consumer demand; continuing weak investment reflecting the uncertain nature of the economic environment; and a continuing and significant mismatch between
vacancies and skills along with a smaller labour force, which may bring disruption to any recovery in the latter years of the forecast.
Definition of default (Credit impaired) (audited)
We define a financial instrument as in default (i.e. credit impaired) for the purpose of calculating ECL if it is more than three months past due, or if we have data that
suggests the customer is unlikely to pay. The data we have on customers varies across our business segments. It typically includes where:

Retail & Business Banking and Consumer Finance
– They have been reported bankrupt or insolvent and are in arrears
– The loan term has ended, and the customer has not repaid the principal in full after three months.
– They have had forbearance while in default and have failed to perform under the new arrangement terms, or have had multiple forbearance. Performing forborne accounts while not in default are reported in Stage 2
– We have suspended their fees and interest because they are in financial difficulties
– We have repossessed the property or the asset.
Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre
– They have had a winding up notice issued, or something happens that is likely to trigger insolvency – such as another lender calls in a loan
– Something happens that makes them less likely to be able to pay us – such as they lose an important client or contract
– They have regularly missed or delayed payments, even though they have not gone over the three-month limit for default
– Their loan is unlikely to be refinanced or repaid in full on maturity
– Their loan has an excessive LTV that is unlikely to be resolved, such as by a change in planning policy, pay-downs, or increase in market value
– Loans restructured under financial difficulties, classified as forborne transactions, in last 12 months.

Where we use the advanced internal ratings-based basis for a portfolio in our capital calculations, there are differences with the default definitions for ECL
purposes. The main differences are as follows:
– Performing forborne accounts while not in default are in Stage 2 until they cure their forbearance status (measured as 12 consecutive months of successful
payments).
– Performing non-forborne accounts, which under our internal rating-based basis are subject to a 3-month cure period. For accounting purposes, we classify them
in Stage 2 until they cure all SICR triggers.
Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR) (audited)
Loans which have suffered a SICR since origination are subject to a lifetime ECL assessment which extends to a maximum of the contractual term of the loan, or the
behavioural term for a revolving facility. Loans which have not experienced a SICR are subject to 12-month ECL. We assess the credit risk profile of each facility to
determine which of three stages to allocate them to:
– Stage 1: when there has been no SICR since initial recognition. We apply a loss allowance equal to a 12-month ECL i.e. the proportion of lifetime expected losses
that relate to that default event expected in the next 12 months
– Stage 2: when there has been a SICR since initial recognition, but the exposure is not considered credit impaired. We apply a loss allowance equal to the lifetime
ECL i.e. the expected loss resulting from all possible defaults throughout the residual life of a facility
– Stage 3: when the exposure is considered credit impaired. We apply a loss allowance equal to the lifetime ECL. Objective evidence of credit impairment is
needed. For more, see the section ‘Definition of default (Credit impaired)’ above.
We use quantitative, qualitative and backstop criteria to identify exposures that suffer a SICR. The Credit Risk Provisions Forum (CRPF) reviews and approves our SICR
thresholds periodically. The Board Audit Committee reviews and challenges their appropriateness each year, or more often if we change them.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 57

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Quantitative criteria
We use quantitative criteria to identify where an exposure has increased in credit risk. We base our criteria on whether any increase in the lifetime PD since
origination exceeds a threshold in relative and absolute terms. We base the value anticipated at origination on similar assumptions and data to the ones we use at
the reporting date, adjusted to reflect the account surviving to that date. The comparison uses either an annualised lifetime PD, where the lifetime PD is divided by
the forecast period, or the absolute change in lifetime PD since origination.
The criteria for 2025 and 2024 were: accounts above the lower absolute PD thresholds below, where the PD has doubled since origination, are treated as Stage 2.
Any account above the upper threshold (i.e. 20%) is also treated as Stage 2:

Retail & Business Banking | Consumer Finance 2 | Corporate & Commercial Banking | Corporate Centre
Mortgages | Unsecured Lending 1
Personal loans | Credit cards | Overdrafts
30bps | 30bps | 30bps | 30bps | 300bps | 30bps | Internal rating method

1 For larger business banking customers, we apply the same criteria as we use for CCB. Credit cards and Overdrafts lower PD thresholds aligned with the rest of Everyday Banking for consistency.
2 Consumer Finance use the comparison of lifetime PDs to determine Stage allocation, unlike other products which first turn the lifetime PD into an average yearly PD (annualised) and then do the comparison. In
addition, Consumer Finance does not apply the upper absolute PD threshold criteria.
Qualitative criteria
We also use qualitative criteria to identify where an exposure has increased in credit risk, independent of changes in PD. The criteria for 2025 and 2024 were:

Retail & Business Banking | Consumer Finance | Corporate & Commercial Banking | Corporate Centre
Mortgages | Unsecured Lending 1
Personal loans | Credit cards | Overdrafts
–In forbearance –Default in last 24m –30 Days Past Due (DPD) in last 12m –Bankrupt –£100+ arrears –Over-indebted customers –Interest Only accounts 24m pre-maturity | –In Collections –Default in last 12m –£50+ arrears | –In forbearance –Default in last 12m –In Collections –£100+ arrears –Behaviour score indicators | –Fees suspended –Default in last 12m –Debit dormant >35 days –Any excess in month | –In forbearance –Deceased or Insolvent –Court ‘Return of goods’ order or Police watchlist –Agreement terminated –Payment holiday –Cash Collection | –In forbearance –Default in last 12m –Watchlist: proactive management –Default at proxy origination –Customers in a high- risk sector | –Watchlist: proactive management

1 For larger business banking customers, we apply the same criteria that we use for Corporate & Commercial Banking.
If needed, we apply additional qualitative assessments as part of JAs in response to situations where known or expected risk factors and data are not considered in
the modelling process. See 'Judgemental Adjustments (JAs)' below for more on this.
Backstop criteria
As a backstop, we classify all exposures more than 30 or 90 DPD in at least Stage 2 or in Stage 3, respectively. This means that we do not rebut the backstop
presumptions in IFRS 9 (i.e. credit risk has significantly increased if contractual payments are more than 30 DPD) relating to either a SICR or default.
Improvement in credit risk or cure
We transfer Stage 3 exposures to Stage 2 or Stage 1 when we no longer consider them to be credit impaired. We transfer Stage 2 exposures to Stage 1 when we no
longer consider them to have suffered a SICR. Where we identified a SICR using quantitative criteria, we transfer the exposures to Stage 1 when they no longer meet
the original PD-based transfer criteria. Where we identified a SICR using qualitative criteria, the issues that led to the transfer must be cured before we transfer the
exposure to Stage 1. For a loan to exit forbearance, it must meet the conditions set out in the section ‘Forbearance’ in the 'Credit risk' section of the Risk review.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 58

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Judgemental Adjustments (JAs) (audited)
We use a range of methods to identify whether we need a JA. These include regular reviews of model monitoring tools, changes in the period, trend analysis,
comparisons against forecasts, and inputs from expert teams who manage key portfolio risks. We only recognise a JA if its expected impact is over £1m and keep it
in place until we no longer need it. This is usually when we build it into our core credit model or the conditions that led to raising the JA no longer exist.
Our Risk Provisions & Forecasting team calculate JAs to ensure they are incremental to the core credit model and calculated in a consistent and controlled manner.
We apply standard end-user computing controls to JAs expected to be in place for more than six months. The CRPF reviews and approves all JAs on a quarterly basis.

| Retail & Business Banking |  |  |  |
|  | Everyday Banking | Consumer Finance | Corporate & Commercial Banking | Corporate Centre | Total
| Mortgages | Credit Cards | Other
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Modelled ECL | 104 | 160 | 115 | 74 | 110 | — | 563
Individually assessed | 8 | — | — | — | 180 | — | 188
ECL before Judgemental Adjustments | 112 | 160 | 115 | 74 | 290 | — | 751
Judgemental Adjustments |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Affordability and Cost of Living | 2 | — | 6 | — | 1 | — | 9
Adjustments to modelled forecast parameters | 23 | (5) | 13 | (11) | 5 | — | 25
Corporate single large exposure | — | — | — | — | 27 | — | 27
Total Judgemental Adjustments | 25 | (5) | 19 | (11) | 33 | — | 61
Total ECL | 137 | 155 | 134 | 63 | 323 | — | 812
Total JAs as a percentage of Total ECL (%) |  |  |  |  |  |  | 8

2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Modelled ECL | 127 | 149 | 122 | 69 | 142 | — | 609
Individually assessed | 6 | — | — | — | 162 | — | 168
ECL before Judgemental Adjustments | 133 | 149 | 122 | 69 | 304 | — | 777
Judgemental Adjustments |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Affordability and Cost of Living | 11 | — | 6 | — | 14 | — | 31
Adjustments to modelled forecast parameters | 28 | 1 | 8 | — | — | — | 37
Corporate single large exposure | — | — | — | — | 24 | — | 24
Total Judgemental Adjustments | 39 | 1 | 14 | — | 38 | — | 92
Total ECL | 172 | 150 | 136 | 69 | 342 | — | 869
Total JAs as a percentage of Total ECL (%) |  |  |  |  |  |  | 11

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 59

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Judgemental Adjustments
– Affordability and Cost of Living: In 2025, Bank Rate continued to gradually reduce, with inflation stabilising and overall credit performance across UK retail
lending remained resilient. As a result, we reduced the Affordability and Cost of Living JAs, consistent with the improved macroeconomic outlook and continued
portfolio stability
– Adjustments to modelled forecast parameters: In 2025, our model monitoring framework identified where modelled outputs are not considered a true
representation of the risks present in the current economic environment, resulting in under and over estimations. In addition, we introduced a new JA to
recalibrate LGDs in Consumer Finance.
– Corporate single large exposure: This JA safeguards against individual large exposures defaulting over a short period. It was used for one case in 2025. This JA
was replenished in 2025 to reflect the risk of single name defaults, incurring high losses, as UK corporate insolvencies have risen to a 30-year high and
government support schemes have ceased. We continue to assess the risk over the medium term based on actual experience and refine the estimate based on
changes in our portfolio credit quality and loan size mix.
Climate change
In the last few years we continued to assess the risks to asset valuations in the customer loan book from both transitional and physical risks associated with climate
change. Similar to previous years, at 31 December 2025, we did not consider it appropriate to recognise a climate risk related JA for the following reasons:
– The behavioural life of the loan book is less than five years. Any material transitional risks are generally regarded to be relevant over a longer timeframe than five
years and, as such, the risk predominantly relates to assets yet to be written;
– There have been no observed default events or SICRs due to climate change for any part of the loan book;
– The absolute exposure to fossil fuel industries is not material. On an individually assessed basis, clients in these industries are highly rated and their markets
remain highly liquid;
– The residual value of automotive vehicles might be impacted by diesel obsolescence and the transition to electric vehicles. The residual value risk is already set to
capture the inherent risk of diesel obsolescence and measurement uncertainty of electric vehicles;
– ECL calculations are based on forward-looking economic scenarios developed by management covering a period of five years, during which timeframe climate
change risks may not crystallise;
– The proportion of our mortgage loans subject to flood and subsidence risk is not considered material. The terms of our mortgage lending also require
homeowners to have an active flood protection at any point of the contract. This assessment relies upon availability of risk cover from private insurers and Flood
Re. The potential risk may increase over time if flooding due to climate change increases and/or insurance market circumstances change.
Internal credit risk rating for corporate borrowers (audited)
We use our internal rating to determine the Probability of Default for a client.
Individually assessed corporate exposures (audited)
We assess the ECL requirement for single name corporate exposures on an individual basis when they meet our definition of default and are transferred into
Stage 3. In 2025, we also enhanced our approach to individually assess the ECL requirements for high Leveraged Finance Transactions in Stage 2. Individual
assessment uses the latest specific data about the counterparty's estimated future cash flows, and collateral valuations, to determine a probability weighted ECL
based on a best, worst and mid case outco me. For all these individually assessed loans, the ECL allowance was £180m at 31 December 2025 (2024: £162m). Had
management assumed the best or worst outcome for loss estimates, the ECL allowance could have been within a range of £92m to £316m (2024: £63m to
£291m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 60

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Sensitivity of ECL allowance to economic scenarios and weights (audited)
The ECL allowance is sensitive to the methods, assumptions and estimates underlying its calculation. For example, management could have applied different
probability weights to the economic scenarios. In addition, the ECL allowance for residential mortgages is significantly affected by the HPI assumptions which
determine the valuation of collateral used in the calculations.
Had management used different assumptions on probability weights and HPI, a larger or smaller ECL charge would have resulted that may have had a material
impact on the ECL allowance and profit before tax.
Scenario sensitivity
The tables below show the ECL allowances that would have arisen had management applied a 100% weight to each economic scenario. The allowances were
calculated using a stage allocation appropriate to each scenario and differs from the probability-weighted stage allocation used to determine the ECL allowance
shown above. For exposures subject to individual assessment, the distribution of ECLs which could reasonably be expected has also been considered, assuming no
change in the number of cases subject to individual assessment, and within the context of a potential best to worst case outcome.

| Upside | Base case | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | Weighted
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Exposure | 293,493 | 293,493 | 293,493 | 293,493 | 293,493
Retail & Business Banking | 201,290 | 201,290 | 201,290 | 201,290 | 201,290
Of which: |  |  |  |  |
– Mortgages | 180,339 | 180,339 | 180,339 | 180,339 | 180,339
Consumer Finance | 4,979 | 4,979 | 4,979 | 4,979 | 4,979
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 27,361 | 27,361 | 27,361 | 27,361 | 27,361
Corporate Centre | 59,863 | 59,863 | 59,863 | 59,863 | 59,863
ECL | 730 | 761 | 899 | 1,119 | 812
Retail & Business Banking | 357 | 381 | 483 | 689 | 426
Of which: |  |  |  |  |
– Mortgages | 87 | 100 | 177 | 366 | 137
Consumer Finance | 62 | 62 | 64 | 64 | 63
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 311 | 318 | 352 | 366 | 323
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | — | —

| Upside | Base case | Downside 1 | Downside 2 | Weighted
2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Exposure | 283,860 | 283,860 | 283,860 | 283,860 | 283,860
Retail & Business Banking | 196,732 | 196,732 | 196,732 | 196,732 | 196,732
Of which: |  |  |  |  |
– Mortgages | 176,026 | 176,026 | 176,026 | 176,026 | 176,026
Consumer Finance | 4,759 | 4,759 | 4,759 | 4,759 | 4,759
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 26,307 | 26,307 | 26,307 | 26,307 | 26,307
Corporate Centre | 56,062 | 56,062 | 56,062 | 56,062 | 56,062
ECL | 741 | 774 | 921 | 1,524 | 869
Retail & Business Banking | 380 | 403 | 517 | 1,051 | 458
Of which: |  |  |  |  |
– Mortgages | 112 | 128 | 218 | 705 | 172
Consumer Finance | 67 | 68 | 69 | 70 | 69
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 294 | 303 | 335 | 403 | 342
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | — | —

2025 compared to 2024
ECL reduced by £57m, reflecting reductions across almost all portfolios. The decrease was mainly driven by mortgages due to refinance-related JA releases,
economic updates and the sale of high RWA mortgages in Q3-25.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 61

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

HPI sensitivity
Given the relative size of our residential mortgage portfolio, management considers that changes in HPI assumptions used to calculate the modelled ECL allowance
for residential mortgages would have the most significant impact on the modelled ECL allowance. The table below shows the modelled ECL impact on the profit
before tax of applying an immediate and permanent house price increase/decrease to our unweighted base case scenario, and assumes no changes to the stage
allocation of exposures.

| Increase/decrease in house prices
| +20% | +10% | -10% | -20%
Increase/(decrease) in profit before tax | £m | £m | £m | £m
2025 | 38 | 24 | (43) | (126)
2024 | 34 | 21 | (38) | (112)

2025 compared to 2024
The impairment model assumes that low LTV accounts experience a similar loss even when HPI decreases, and the impact on the ECL is limited. These results are
consistent with the prior period, although updated economic forecasts project slightly larger fluctuations.
Measuring ECL (audited)
For our mortgages and CCB portfolios, where accounts are not in default at the reporting date, we estimate a quarterly ECL for each exposure and for each quarter
over the forecast period. The lifetime ECL is the sum of the quarterly ECLs over the forecast period, while the 12-month ECL is limited to the first four quarters. We
calculate each quarterly ECL as the discounted value for the relevant forecast month of the product of the following factors:

Factor | Description
Survival rate (SR) | The probability that the exposure has not closed or defaulted since the reporting date.
Probability of default (PD) | The likelihood of a borrower defaulting in the following quarter, assuming it has not closed or defaulted since the reporting date. For each quarter in the forecast period, we estimate the quarterly PD from a range of factors. These include key risk drivers for the exposure, as well as the expected evolution of the account risk with maturity and factors for changing economics. We support this with historical data analysis.
Exposure at default (EAD) | The amount we expect to be owed if a default, or sale in the case of retail mortgages, event occurs. We determine EAD for each quarter of the forecast period by the expected payment profile, which varies by product. For amortising products, we base it on the borrower’s contractual repayments over the forecast period. We adjust this for any expected overpayments on Stage 1 accounts that the borrower may make and for any arrears we expect if the account was to default. For revolving products, or amortising products with an off-balance sheet element, we determine EAD using the balance at default and the contractual exposure limit. We vary these assumptions by product and base them on analysis of recent default data.
Loss given default (LGD) | Our expected loss if a default event were to occur. We express it as a percentage and calculate it based on factors that we have observed to affect the likelihood and/or value of any subsequent write-offs, which vary according to whether the product is secured or unsecured. If the product is secured, we consider collateral values as well as the historical discounts to market/book values due to forced sales type.

We use the original effective interest rate as the discount rate. For accounts in default, we use the EAD as the reporting date balance. We also calculate an LGD to
reflect the default status of the account, considering the current DPD and loan-to-value. PD and SR are not required for accounts in default.
Forecast period
We base the forecast period for amortising facilities on the remaining contract term. For revolving facilities, we base it on the behavioural, rather than contractual,
characteristics of the facility type.
Forward-looking information
Our assessments of a SICR and the calculation of ECL allowances incorporate forward-looking data. We perform historical analysis and identify the key economic
variables that impact credit risk and ECL allowances for each portfolio. These can include house price growth, GDP, unemployment rate and BoE Bank Rate. Where
applicable, we incorporate these economic variables and their associated impacts into our models.
Economic forecasts have the most impact on ECL measurement for residential mortgages and, to a lesser extent, corporate loans. This is due to the long
behavioural lives and large size of these portfolios. Economic forecasts have less impact on ECL for other portfolios due to their shorter lives and smaller size.
Grouping of instruments for losses measured on a collective basis
We measure ECL at the individual financial instrument level. However, where we use internal capital or similar models as the basis for our ECL models, this typically
results in a large number of relatively small homogenous groups. We typically group instruments where they share risk characteristics using statistical models
and assess them for impairment collectively. We use this approach for all our Retail & Business Banking and Consumer Finance portfolios and SME customers in
Corporate & Commercial Banking.
We calculate separate collective provisions for instruments in Stages 1, 2 and 3 where the instrument is not individually assessed.
For all our portfolios (whether we assess them for impairment individually or collectively) we use four forward-looking economic scenarios.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 62

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Governance around ECL impairment allowances (audited)
Our Risk Methodology team developed our ECL models (except for the external models we use, such as OGEM which we described earlier in ‘Our forecasting
approach’), and our Independent Validations team reviews all material models. As model users, our Risk Provisioning & Forecasting team run the models to
calculate our ECL each month. The models are sensitive to changes in credit conditions and reflect management judgements that give rise to measurement
uncertainty in our ECL, as set out above. The following committees and forums review the provision drivers and ensure that the ECL remains appropriate:
– Model Risk Control Forum reviews and approves new models and model changes. It also reviews the use of OGEM as a reliable model on which to base our
other forecast macroeconomic variables. We use it across all stress testing and planning, so it is subject to model risk criteria.
– ALCO reviews and approves the base case used in the economic scenarios we use to calculate forward-looking scenarios.
– CRPF reviews and approves the economic scenarios and probability weights we use to calculate forward-looking scenarios. It also reviews management
judgements and approves ECL impairment allowances.
– Board Audit Committee reviews and challenges the appropriateness of the estimates and judgements made by management.
For more on the governance around specific elements of the ECL impairment allowances, including the frequency of, and thresholds for, reviews, including by these
committees and forums, see the detailed sections above.
How we assess the performance of our ECL estimation process
We assess the reasonableness of our ECL provisions and the results of our Staging analysis using a range of methods. These include:
– Benchmarking: we compare our coverage levels with our peers
– Stand-back testing: we monitor the level of our coverage against actual write-offs
– Back-testing: we compare key drivers periodically as part of model monitoring
– Monitoring trends: we track ECL and Stage classification over time and against our internal budgets and forecasts, with triggers set accordingly.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 63

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

SANTANDER UK GROUP LEVEL – CREDIT RISK REVIEW
The credit risk balances in these credit risk review sections include interest we have charged to the customer’s account, but not accrued interest that we have not
charged to the account yet, unless otherwise stated.
Our maximum and net exposure to credit risk (audited)
The tables below show the main differences between our maximum and net exposure to credit risk. They show the effects of collateral, netting, and risk transfer to
mitigate our exposure. The tables only show the financial assets that credit risk affects and to which the impairment requirements in IFRS 9 are applied.
For balance sheet assets, the maximum exposure to credit risk is the carrying value after impairment loss allowances. Off-balance sheet exposures are mortgage
offers, guarantees, formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments. For off-balance sheet guarantees, the maximum exposure is the maximum
amount that we would have to pay if the guarantees were called on. For formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments that are irrevocable over the
life of the facility, the maximum exposure is the total amount of the commitment.

| Maximum exposure |  |  |  |  |
| Balance sheet asset |  | Off-balance sheet |  | Collateral 1 |  |
| Gross amounts | Loss allowance | Net amounts |  | Gross amounts | Loss allowance | Net amounts |  | Cash | Non-cash | Netting 2 | Net exposure
2025 | £bn | £bn | £bn |  | £bn | £bn | £bn |  | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
Cash and balances at central banks | 29.4 | — | 29.4 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 29.4
Financial assets at amortised cost: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers: 3 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Residential Mortgages 4 | 167.3 | (0.1) | 167.2 |  | 13.1 | — | 13.1 |  | — | (169.9) | — | 10.4
– Corporate loans | 20.4 | (0.2) | 20.2 |  | 7.7 | — | 7.7 |  | — | (15.7) | — | 12.2
– Finance leases | 4.3 | (0.1) | 4.2 |  | — | — | — |  | — | (4.2) | — | —
– Accrued interest and other adjustments | 0.8 | — | 0.8 |  | 0.4 | — | 0.4 |  | — | — | — | 1.2
– Other unsecured loans | 5.5 | (0.3) | 5.2 |  | 14.7 | (0.1) | 14.6 |  | — | — | — | 19.8
– Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander group subsidiaries and JVs | 5.0 | — | 5.0 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 5.0
Total loans and advances to customers | 203.3 | (0.7) | 202.6 |  | 35.9 | (0.1) | 35.8 |  | — | (189.8) | — | 48.6
– Loans and advances to banks | 1.0 | — | 1.0 |  | 0.7 | — | 0.7 |  | — | — | — | 1.7
– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading | 17.7 | — | 17.7 |  | 2.2 | — | 2.2 |  | — | (16.5) | (1.2) | 2.2
– Other financial assets at amortised cost | 4.0 | — | 4.0 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 4.0
Total financial assets at amortised cost | 226.0 | (0.7) | 225.3 |  | 38.8 | (0.1) | 38.7 |  | — | (206.3) | (1.2) | 56.5
Financial assets at fair value at FVOCI: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Debt securities | 5.2 | — | 5.2 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 5.2
Total financial assets at FVOCI | 5.2 | — | 5.2 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 5.2
Total | 260.6 | (0.7) | 259.9 |  | 38.8 | (0.1) | 38.7 |  | — | (206.3) | (1.2) | 91.1
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Cash and balances at central banks | 29.9 | — | 29.9 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 29.9
Financial assets at amortised cost: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers: 3 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Residential Mortgages 4 | 165.2 | (0.2) | 165.0 |  | 10.8 | — | 10.8 |  | — | (168.0) | — | 7.8
– Corporate loans | 18.6 | (0.3) | 18.3 |  | 7.8 | — | 7.8 |  | — | (14.9) | — | 11.2
– Finance leases | 4.2 | (0.1) | 4.1 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 4.1
– Accrued interest and other adjustments | 0.8 | — | 0.8 |  | 0.4 | — | 0.4 |  | — | — | — | 1.2
– Other unsecured loans | 6.6 | (0.2) | 6.4 |  | 14.2 | (0.1) | 14.1 |  | — | — | — | 20.5
– Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander group subsidiaries and JVs | 4.8 | — | 4.8 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 4.8
Total loans and advances to customers | 200.2 | (0.8) | 199.4 |  | 33.2 | (0.1) | 33.1 |  | — | (182.9) | — | 49.6
– Loans and advances to banks | 1.0 | — | 1.0 |  | 0.5 | — | 0.5 |  | — | — | — | 1.5
– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading | 10.3 | — | 10.3 |  | 2.0 | — | 2.0 |  | — | (10.3) | (0.1) | 1.9
– Other financial assets at amortised cost | 3.4 | — | 3.4 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 3.4
Total financial assets at amortised cost | 214.9 | (0.8) | 214.1 |  | 35.7 | (0.1) | 35.6 |  | — | (193.2) | (0.1) | 56.4
Financial assets at FVOCI: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Debt securities | 9.0 | — | 9.0 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 9.0
Total financial assets at FVOCI | 9.0 | — | 9.0 |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | 9.0
Total | 253.8 | (0.8) | 253.0 |  | 35.7 | (0.1) | 35.6 |  | — | (193.2) | (0.1) | 95.3

1 The forms of collateral we take to reduce credit risk include: residential and commercial property; other physical assets, including motor vehicles; liquid securities, including those transferred under reverse
repurchase agreements; cash, including cash used as collateral for derivative transactions; and receivables. Charges on residential property are most of the collateral we take.
2 We can reduce credit risk exposures by applying netting. We do this mainly for derivative and repurchase transactions with financial institutions. For derivatives and securities finance transactions, we use standard
master netting agreements. For more on this, see ‘Credit risk mitigation’ in the ‘Credit risk – Credit risk management’ section.
3 Balances include interest we have charged to the customer’s account and accrued interest that we have not charged to the account yet.
4 The collateral value shown against advances secured on residential property is limited to the balance of each associated individual loan. It does not include the impact of over–collateralisation (where the collateral
has a higher value than the loan balance) and includes collateral we would receive on draw down of certain off–balance sheet commitments.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 64

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The tables below show the main differences between our maximum and net exposure to credit risk on the financial assets that credit risk affects and to which the
impairment requirements in IFRS 9 are not applied.

| Balance sheet asset gross amount |  | Collateral 1 | Netting 2 | Net exposure
|  | Cash | Non-cash
2025 | £bn |  | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
Financial assets at FVTPL: |  |  |  |  |  |
– Derivative financial instruments | 0.9 |  | (0.4) | — | (0.4) | 0.1
– Other financial assets at FVTPL | 0.1 |  | — | — | — | 0.1
Total | 1.0 |  | (0.4) | — | (0.4) | 0.2
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |
Financial assets at FVTPL: |  |  |  |  |  |
– Derivative financial instruments | 1.2 |  | (0.7) | — | (0.4) | 0.1
– Other financial assets at FVTPL | 0.1 |  | — | — | — | 0.1
Total | 1.3 |  | (0.7) | — | (0.4) | 0.2

1 The forms of collateral we take to reduce credit risk include: liquid securities, including those transferred under reverse repurchase agreements; cash, including cash used as collateral for derivative transactions;
and receivables.
2 We can reduce credit risk exposures by applying netting. We do this mainly for derivative and repurchase transactions with financial institutions. For derivatives and securities finance transactions, we use standard
master netting agreements. They allow us to set off our credit risk exposure to a counterparty against our obligations to the counterparty in relation to transactions under the master netting agreement in the event
of default. This gives us a lower net credit exposure. They may also reduce settlement exposure. For more on this, see ‘Credit risk mitigation’ in the ‘Credit risk – Credit risk management’ section.
Single credit rating scale
In the table below, we use a single rating scale to ensure we are consistent across all our credit risk portfolios in how we report the risk of default. It has eight
grades for non–defaulted exposures, from 9 (lowest risk) to 2 (highest risk). We define each grade by an upper and lower PD value and we scale the grades so that
the default risk increases by a factor of ten every time the grade number drops by two steps. For example, grade 9 has an average PD of 0.010%, and grade 7 has an
average PD of 0.100%. We give defaulted exposures a grade 1 and a PD value of 100%. In the final column of the table, we show the approximate equivalent credit
rating grade used by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services (S&P).

Santander UK risk grade | PD range |
Mid | Lower | Upper | S&P equivalent
% | % | %
9 | 0.010 | 0.000 | 0.021 | AAA to AA+
8 | 0.032 | 0.021 | 0.066 | AA to AA-
7 | 0.100 | 0.066 | 0.208 | A+ to BBB
6 | 0.316 | 0.208 | 0.658 | BBB- to BB
5 | 1.000 | 0.658 | 2.081 | BB-
4 | 3.162 | 2.081 | 6.581 | B+ to B
3 | 10.000 | 6.581 | 20.811 | B-
2 | 31.623 | 20.811 | 99.999 | CCC to C
1 (Default) | 100.000 | 100.000 | 100.000 | D

The PDs in the table above relate to Economic Capital (EC) PD mappings, calculated based on the average PD over an economic cycle. This is different to the IFRS 9
PDs which are calculated at a point in time using forward looking economic scenarios. Where possible, the EC PD values are aligned to the regulatory capital
models; however, any regulatory floors are removed and PDs are defined at every possible rating rather than grouped into rating buckets.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 65

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Rating distribution (audited)
The tables below show the credit rating of our financial assets to which the impairment requirements in IFRS 9 apply. Financial assets with low risk concentrations
are not included and are all investment grade. JAs are incorporated in the balances. For more on the credit rating profiles of key portfolios, see the credit risk review
section for each business segment.

| Santander UK risk grade |  | Loss allowance | Total
| 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 to 1 | Other 1,2
2025 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
Exposures - On balance sheet
Financial assets at amortised cost: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
–Loans and advances to customers 2 | 11.2 | 31.6 | 80.9 | 46.1 | 15.4 | 6.2 | 5.0 | 6.9 | (0.7) | 202.6
–Stage 1 | 11.0 | 31.0 | 77.9 | 41.0 | 12.4 | 2.9 | 0.7 | 6.8 | (0.1) | 183.6
–Stage 2 | 0.2 | 0.6 | 3.0 | 5.1 | 3.0 | 3.3 | 2.1 | 0.1 | (0.3) | 17.1
–Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 2.2 | — | (0.3) | 1.9
Of which mortgages: | 10.6 | 29.7 | 75.5 | 39.3 | 6.7 | 3.0 | 2.4 | 0.1 | (0.1) | 167.2
–Stage 1 | 10.4 | 29.1 | 72.4 | 34.3 | 4.3 | 0.4 | 0.1 | — | — | 151.0
–Stage 2 | 0.2 | 0.5 | 3.1 | 5.0 | 2.4 | 2.6 | 1.0 | — | — | 14.8
–Stage 3 | — | 0.1 | — | — | — | — | 1.3 | 0.1 | (0.1) | 1.4
Total off–balance sheet | 10.1 | 8.9 | 8.5 | 4.0 | 1.9 | 0.9 | 0.7 | 3.8 | (0.1) | 38.7
–Stage 1 | 10.1 | 8.8 | 8.3 | 3.8 | 1.7 | 0.7 | 0.4 | 3.8 | — | 37.6
–Stage 2 | — | 0.1 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.2 | — | (0.1) | 1.0
–Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | 0.1

| Santander UK risk grade |  | Total | Coverage Ratio
| 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 to 1 | Other 1,2
2025 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | %
ECL - On balance sheet
Financial assets at amortised cost: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Loans and advances to customers 2 | — | — | — | — | 0.2 | 0.1 | 0.4 | — | 0.7 | 0.3
– Stage 1 | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1
– Stage 2 | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | — | 0.3 | 1.7
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.3 | — | 0.3 | 13.6
Of which mortgages: | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | 0.1 | 0.1
– Stage 1 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
– Stage 2 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | 0.1 | 6.7
Total off–balance sheet | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | 0.1 | 0.3
– Stage 1 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
– Stage 2 | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | 0.1 | 9.1
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 66

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

| Santander UK risk grade |  | Loss allowance |
| 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 to 1 | Other 1,2 | Total
2024 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
Exposures - On balance sheet |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Financial assets at amortised cost: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Loans and advances to customers 2 | 5.8 | 31.3 | 81.8 | 46.4 | 15.6 | 6.8 | 5.4 | 7.1 | (0.8) | 199.4
– Stage 1 | 5.7 | 30.6 | 78.1 | 40.5 | 12.4 | 2.8 | 0.6 | 6.9 | (0.1) | 177.5
– Stage 2 | 0.1 | 0.7 | 3.7 | 5.9 | 3.2 | 3.9 | 2.4 | 0.1 | (0.3) | 19.7
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 2.4 | 0.1 | (0.4) | 2.2
Of which mortgages: | 5.2 | 29.8 | 76.5 | 40.8 | 6.5 | 3.3 | 3.1 | — | (0.2) | 165.0
– Stage 1 | 5.1 | 29.3 | 72.9 | 35.0 | 4.0 | 0.4 | — | — | — | 146.7
– Stage 2 | 0.1 | 0.5 | 3.6 | 5.8 | 2.5 | 2.9 | 1.3 | — | (0.1) | 16.6
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1.8 | — | (0.1) | 1.7
Total off–balance sheet | 6.9 | 8.9 | 9.0 | 4.2 | 1.9 | 0.8 | 0.7 | 3.3 | (0.1) | 35.6
– Stage 1 | 6.9 | 8.8 | 8.8 | 4.0 | 1.7 | 0.5 | 0.4 | 3.3 | — | 34.4
– Stage 2 | — | 0.1 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.3 | 0.2 | — | (0.1) | 1.1
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | 0.1

| Santander UK risk grade |  |  | Coverage Ratio
| 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 to 1 | Other 1,2 | Total
2024 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | %
ECL - On balance sheet |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Financial assets at amortised cost: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Loans and advances to customers 2 | — | — | — | — | 0.2 | 0.1 | 0.5 | — | 0.8 | 0.4
– Stage 1 | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1
– Stage 2 | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.1 | — | 0.3 | 1.5
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.4 | — | 0.4 | 18.2
Of which mortgages: | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1 | — | 0.2 | 0.1
– Stage 1 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
– Stage 2 | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | 0.1 | 0.6
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | 0.1 | 5.9
Total off–balance sheet | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | 0.1 | 0.3
– Stage 1 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
– Stage 2 | — | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | — | — | 0.1 | 9.1
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —

1 Includes Joint Ventures and Business Banking (including BBLs balances). We use scorecards for these items, rather than rating models.
2 Includes interest we have charged to the customer’s account and accrued interest we have not charged to the account yet.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 67

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Credit performance (audited)

| Customer Loans | 12 month Gross write- offs | Loan Loss Allowances
| Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 1
2025 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | % | £m | £m
Retail & Business Banking | 173.5 | 156.2 | 15.7 | 1.6 | 0.95 | 168 | 384
– Mortgages | 167.3 | 151.0 | 14.8 | 1.5 | 0.88 | 15 | 137
– Credit Cards | 3.1 | 2.6 | 0.4 | 0.1 | 2.88 | 55 | 137
– Unsecured Personal Loans | 2.0 | 1.8 | 0.2 | — | 1.07 | 65 | 57
– Overdrafts | 0.4 | 0.2 | 0.2 | — | 6.87 | 24 | 37
– Business Banking | 0.7 | 0.6 | 0.1 | — | 5.65 | 9 | 16
Consumer Finance | 5.0 | 4.6 | 0.4 | — | 0.96 | 27 | 63
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 18.9 | 16.9 | 1.4 | 0.6 | 3.42 | 53 | 282
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | — | 0.15 | — | —
Total Drawn | 197.4 | 177.7 | 17.5 | 2.2 | 1.18 | 248 | 729
Retail & Business Banking | 27.8 | 27.0 | 0.8 | — |  | — | 42
– Mortgages | 13.1 | 12.8 | 0.3 | — |  | — | —
– Credit Cards | 11.6 | 11.3 | 0.3 | — |  | — | 18
– Unsecured Personal Loans | — | — | — | — |  | — | —
– Overdrafts | 2.9 | 2.7 | 0.2 | — |  | — | 23
– Business Banking | 0.2 | 0.2 | — | — |  | — | 1
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | — |  | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 8.4 | 8.1 | 0.3 | — |  | — | 41
Corporate Centre | 2.6 | 2.6 | — | — |  | — | —
Total Undrawn | 38.8 | 37.7 | 1.1 | — |  | — | 83
Total | 236.2 | 215.4 | 18.6 | 2.2 |  | 248 | 812

2024 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | % | £m | £m
Retail & Business Banking | 171.7 | 152.2 | 17.6 | 1.9 | 1.17 | 156 | 421
– Mortgages | 165.1 | 146.7 | 16.7 | 1.7 | 1.08 | 9 | 172
– Credit Cards | 2.8 | 2.3 | 0.5 | — | 2.75 | 51 | 135
– Unsecured Personal Loans | 2.1 | 1.9 | 0.2 | — | 1.20 | 60 | 63
– Overdrafts | 0.5 | 0.3 | 0.2 | — | 7.40 | 26 | 37
– Business Banking | 1.2 | 1.0 | — | 0.2 | 7.10 | 10 | 14
Consumer Finance | 4.8 | 4.5 | 0.3 | — | 0.77 | 25 | 69
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 18.0 | 15.2 | 2.1 | 0.7 | 3.96 | 49 | 294
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
Total Drawn | 194.5 | 171.9 | 20.0 | 2.6 | 1.42 | 230 | 784
Retail & Business Banking | 25.0 | 24.3 | 0.7 | — |  | — | 37
– Mortgages | 10.8 | 10.5 | 0.3 | — |  | — | —
– Credit Cards | 10.9 | 10.7 | 0.2 | — |  | — | 15
– Unsecured Personal Loans | — | — | — | — |  | — | —
– Overdrafts | 3.1 | 2.9 | 0.2 | — |  | — | 20
– Business Banking | 0.2 | 0.2 | — | — |  | — | 2
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | — |  | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 8.3 | 7.7 | 0.5 | 0.1 |  | — | 48
Corporate Centre | 2.4 | 2.4 | — | — |  | — | —
Total Undrawn | 35.7 | 34.4 | 1.2 | 0.1 |  | — | 85
Total | 230.2 | 206.3 | 21.2 | 2.7 |  | 230 | 869

1 Stage 3 ratio is the sum of Stage 3 drawn and Stage 3 undrawn assets divided by the sum of total drawn assets and Stage 3 undrawn assets.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 68

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Arrears over 90 days past due

| 31 December 2025 |  | 31 December 2024
% |  | %
Retail & Business Banking |  |  |
– Mortgages | 0.65 |  | 0.80
– Credit Cards | 0.55 |  | 0.56
– Unsecured Personal Loans | 0.78 |  | 0.88
– Overdrafts | 3.09 |  | 3.05
– Business Banking | 3.83 |  | 3.89
Consumer Finance | 0.44 |  | 0.53
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 1.04 |  | 1.04

2025 compared to 2024
Mortgage loans in Stage 2 and 3 decreased, supported by the Q3-25 sale of high RWA mortgage assets. Stage 2 ratios increased across the
smaller retail unsecured portfolios, mainly overdrafts, due to an increase in the SICR criteria for non-arrears Stage 2 loans. CCB loans in Stage 2
and 3 decreased, driven by overall improvement in asset quality.
ECL provision
The ECL provision at 31 December 2025 decreased by £57m to £812m (2024: £869m), reflecting reductions across almost all portfolios. The decrease was mainly
driven by mortgages due to refinance-related JA releases, economic updates and the sale of high RWA mortgages in Q3-25.
Gross write-off utilisation of £248m (2024: £230m) was largely driven by unsecured retail.
Key movements in exposures in 2025 by Stage were:
- Stage 1 exposures increased mainly due to higher Mortgage new business.
- Stage 2 exposures reduced driven by the unwinding of the Mortgages Refinance JA moving customers back into stage 1 and an asset sale in Q3 2025.
- Stage 3 exposures reduced in 2025 primarily due to Mortgages driven by the asset sale in Q3 2025.
For more on the credit performance of our key portfolios by business segment, see the credit risk review section for each business segment.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 69

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Credit quality (audited)
Total on-balance sheet exposures at 31 December 2025 comprised £197.4bn of customer loans, loans and advances to banks of £1.0bn, £21.7bn of sovereign
assets measured at amortised cost, £5.2bn of assets measured at FVOCI, and £29.4bn of cash and balances at central banks.

| Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m
Exposures |  |  |  |
On-balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 156,212 | 15,657 | 1,592 | 173,461
Consumer Finance | 4,595 | 336 | 48 | 4,979
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 16,859 | 1,445 | 623 | 18,927
Corporate Centre | 57,305 | — | — | 57,305
Total on-balance sheet | 234,971 | 17,438 | 2,263 | 254,672
Off–balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking 1 | 27,026 | 752 | 51 | 27,829
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 8,074 | 334 | 26 | 8,434
Corporate Centre | 2,558 | — | — | 2,558
Total off–balance sheet 2 | 37,658 | 1,086 | 77 | 38,821
Total exposures | 272,629 | 18,524 | 2,340 | 293,493
ECL |  |  |  |
On-balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 54 | 207 | 123 | 384
Consumer Finance | 14 | 21 | 28 | 63
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 53 | 35 | 194 | 282
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total on-balance sheet | 121 | 263 | 345 | 729
Off–balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 11 | 29 | 2 | 42
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 25 | 9 | 7 | 41
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total off–balance sheet | 36 | 38 | 9 | 83
Total ECL | 157 | 301 | 354 | 812
Coverage ratio 3 | % | % | % | %
On-balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | — | 1.3 | 7.7 | 0.2
Consumer Finance | 0.3 | 6.2 | 58.4 | 1.3
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 0.3 | 2.4 | 31.1 | 1.5
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total on-balance sheet | 0.1 | 1.5 | 15.2 | 0.3
Off–balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | — | 3.9 | 2.7 | 0.1
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 0.3 | 2.7 | 28.1 | 0.5
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total off-balance sheet | 0.1 | 3.5 | 11.4 | 0.2
Total coverage | 0.1 | 1.6 | 15.1 | 0.3

1 Off-balance sheet exposures include £8.8bn of residential mortgage offers in the pipeline.
2 Off-balance sheet amounts consist of contingent liabilities and commitments. For more, see Note 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
3 ECL as a percentage of the related exposure.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 70

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Total on-balance sheet exposures at 31 December 2024 comprised £194.5bn of customer loans, loans and advances to banks of £1.0bn, £13.7bn of sovereign
assets measured at amortised cost, £9.0bn of assets measured at FVOCI, and £29.9bn of cash and balances at central banks.

| Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total
2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m
Exposures |  |  |  |
On-balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 152,198 | 17,571 | 1,955 | 171,724
Consumer Finance | 4,389 | 334 | 36 | 4,759
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 15,280 | 2,098 | 651 | 18,029
Corporate Centre | 53,699 | — | — | 53,699
Total on-balance sheet | 225,566 | 20,003 | 2,642 | 248,211
Off–balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking 1 | 24,211 | 745 | 52 | 25,008
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 7,743 | 470 | 65 | 8,278
Corporate Centre | 2,363 | — | — | 2,363
Total off–balance sheet 2 | 34,317 | 1,215 | 117 | 35,649
Total exposures | 259,883 | 21,218 | 2,759 | 283,860
ECL |  |  |  |
On-balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 52 | 223 | 146 | 421
Consumer Finance | 16 | 27 | 26 | 69
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 55 | 71 | 168 | 294
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total on-balance sheet | 123 | 321 | 340 | 784
Off–balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | 12 | 24 | 1 | 37
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 18 | 14 | 16 | 48
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total off–balance sheet | 30 | 38 | 17 | 85
Total ECL | 153 | 359 | 357 | 869
Coverage ratio 3 | % | % | % | %
On-balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | — | 1.3 | 7.5 | 0.2
Consumer Finance | 0.4 | 8.2 | 71.2 | 1.4
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 0.4 | 3.4 | 25.9 | 1.6
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total on-balance sheet | 0.1 | 1.6 | 12.9 | 0.3
Off–balance sheet |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking | — | 3.2 | 2.6 | 0.1
Consumer Finance | — | — | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 0.2 | 3.0 | 24.2 | 0.6
Corporate Centre | — | — | — | —
Total off-balance sheet | 0.1 | 3.1 | 14.6 | 0.2
Total coverage | 0.1 | 1.7 | 13.0 | 0.3

1 Off-balance sheet exposures include £6.1bn of residential mortgage offers in the pipeline.
2 Off-balance sheet amounts consist of contingent liabilities and commitments. For more, see Note 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
3 ECL as a percentage of the related exposure.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 71

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Stage 2 analysis
The following table analyses our Stage 2 exposures and ECL allowance by the reason the exposure is classified as Stage 2.

2025 | Backstop | Quantitative | Qualitative | JAs | Total
30 DPD | PD deterioration | PD threshold | Forbearance | Other 1 | Mortgage Refinancing
Retail & Business Banking | Exposure £m | 463 | 8,945 | 389 | 485 | 4,965 | 410 | 15,657
ECL £m | 17 | 120 | 27 | 5 | 36 | 2 | 207
Of which -Mortgages | Exposure £m | 394 | 8,365 | 281 | 474 | 4,855 | 410 | 14,779
ECL £m | 5 | 40 | 3 | 3 | 16 | 2 | 69
Consumer Finance | Exposure £m | 31 | 170 | 13 | 2 | 120 | — | 336
ECL £m | 8 | 8 | 4 | — | 1 | — | 21
Corporate & Commercial Banking | Exposure £m | 92 | 771 | 90 | 22 | 470 | — | 1,445
ECL £m | — | 16 | 6 | — | 13 | — | 35
Corporate Centre | Exposure £m | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
ECL £m | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
Total Drawn | Exposure £m | 586 | 9,886 | 492 | 509 | 5,555 | 410 | 17,438
ECL £m | 25 | 144 | 37 | 5 | 50 | 2 | 263
Undrawn | ECL £m | — | 23 | 6 | 1 | 8 | — | 38
Total Reported | Exposure £m | 616 | 10,504 | 536 | 551 | 5,907 | 410 | 18,524
ECL £m | 25 | 167 | 43 | 6 | 58 | 2 | 301

2024 | Backstop | Quantitative | Qualitative | JAs | Total
30 DPD | PD deterioration | PD Threshold | Forbearance | Other 1 | Mortgage Refinancing
Retail & Business Banking | Exposure £m | 592 | 9,434 | 478 | 308 | 4,955 | 1,804 | 17,571
ECL £m | 20 | 133 | 29 | 5 | 25 | 11 | 223
Of which -Mortgages | Exposure £m | 504 | 8,834 | 350 | 298 | 4,898 | 1,804 | 16,688
ECL £m | 7 | 48 | 3 | 3 | 12 | 11 | 84
Consumer Finance | Exposure £m | 30 | 155 | — | — | 149 | — | 334
ECL £m | 10 | 11 | — | — | 6 | — | 27
Corporate & Commercial Banking | Exposure £m | 54 | 930 | 61 | 57 | 996 | — | 2,098
ECL £m | 1 | 38 | 7 | 1 | 24 | — | 71
Corporate Centre | Exposure £m | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
ECL £m | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
Total Drawn | Exposure £m | 676 | 10,519 | 539 | 365 | 6,100 | 1,804 | 20,003
ECL £m | 31 | 182 | 36 | 6 | 55 | 11 | 321
Undrawn | ECL £m | 1 | 23 | 6 | 2 | 6 | — | 38
Total Reported | Exposure £m | 701 | 11,180 | 605 | 434 | 6,494 | 1,804 | 21,218
ECL £m | 32 | 205 | 42 | 8 | 61 | 11 | 359

1 Mainly consists of Qualitative triggers for Mortgages, over-indebted customers c£2.6bn (2024: c£2.5bn)and Interest-only accounts 24 months pre-maturity c£1.4bn (2024: c£1.3bn), and for CCB customers
operating in a high-risk sector c£0.2bn (2024:c£0.7bn).
Where balances satisfy more than one of the criteria above for determining a SICR, we have assigned the corresponding gross carrying amount and ECL allowance in
order of the categories presented.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 72

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Reconciliation of exposures, loss allowance and net carrying amounts (audited)
The table below shows the relationships between disclosures in this Credit risk review section which refer to drawn exposures and the associated ECL allowance ,
and the total assets as presented in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. The Credit risk review disclosures exclude Joint ventures, as they carry low credit risk and
therefore have an immaterial ECL, and Other items, mainly accrued interest that we have not yet charged to the customer's account, and cash collateral.

| On-balance sheet |  | Off-balance sheet
| Exposures | Loss allowance | Net carrying amount |  | Exposures | Loss allowance
2025 | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Retail & Business Banking 1 | 173,461 | 384 | 173,077 |  | 27,829 | 42
Consumer Finance | 4,979 | 63 | 4,916 |  | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 18,927 | 282 | 18,645 |  | 8,434 | 41
Corporate Centre | 57,305 | — | 57,305 |  | 2,558 | —
Total exposures presented in Credit Quality tables | 254,672 | 729 | 253,943 |  | 38,821 | 83
Intercompany balances (including joint ventures) |  |  | 5,055 |  |  |
Other items 2 |  |  | 916 |  |  |
Adjusted net carrying amount |  |  | 259,914 |  |  |
Assets classified at FVTPL |  |  | 934 |  |  |
Non-financial assets 3 |  |  | 5,989 |  |  |
Total assets per the Consolidated Balance Sheet |  |  | 266,837 |  |  |
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |
Retail & Business Banking 1 | 171,724 | 421 | 171,303 |  | 25,008 | 37
Consumer Finance | 4,759 | 69 | 4,690 |  | — | —
Corporate & Commercial Banking | 18,029 | 294 | 17,735 |  | 8,278 | 48
Corporate Centre | 53,699 | — | 53,699 |  | 2,363 | —
Total exposures presented in Credit Quality tables | 248,211 | 784 | 247,427 |  | 35,649 | 85
Intercompany balances (including joint ventures) |  |  | 4,832 |  |  |
Other items 2 |  |  | 848 |  |  |
Adjusted net carrying amount |  |  | 253,107 |  |  |
Assets classified at FVTPL |  |  | 1,340 |  |  |
Non-financial assets 3 |  |  | 5,497 |  |  |
Total assets per the Consolidated Balance Sheet |  |  | 259,944 |  |  |

1 Off-balance sheet exposures include offers in the pipeline, undrawn flexible mortgage products and credit cards.
2 Other includes accrued interest of £725m (2024: £714m).
3 Non-financial assets include £80m (2024:£738m) of Macro hedge of interest rate risk.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 73

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL (audited)
The following table shows changes in total on and off-balance sheet exposures, subject to ECL assessment, and the corresponding ECL, in the period. The table
presents total gross carrying amounts and ECLs at a Santander UK group level. We present segmental views in the sections below.

| Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total
Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL
£m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 259,883 | 153 | 21,218 | 359 | 2,759 | 357 | 283,860 | 869
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 2 | (7,088) | (10) | 7,088 | 10 | — | — | — | —
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 2 | 6,231 | 78 | (6,231) | (78) | — | — | — | —
Transfers to Stage 3 2 | (239) | (1) | (852) | (31) | 1,091 | 32 | — | —
Transfers from Stage 3 2 | 2 | — | 290 | 17 | (292) | (17) | — | —
Transfers of financial instruments | (1,094) | 67 | 295 | (82) | 799 | 15 | — | —
Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer 3 | — | (69) | — | 83 | — | 103 | — | 117
Change in economic scenarios 4 | — | (10) | — | 7 | — | (5) | — | (8)
Change to ECL models | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
New lending and assets purchased 5 8 | 54,405 | 41 | 1,086 | 38 | 44 | 13 | 55,535 | 92
Redemptions, repayments and assets sold 6 8 | (31,104) | (29) | (4,267) | (79) | (1,042) | (61) | (36,413) | (169)
Changes in risk parameters and other movements 7 | (9,461) | 4 | 192 | (25) | 371 | 180 | (8,898) | 159
Assets written off 6 | — | — | — | — | (591) | (248) | (591) | (248)
At 31 December 2025 | 272,629 | 157 | 18,524 | 301 | 2,340 | 354 | 293,493 | 812
Net movement in the period | 12,746 | 4 | (2,694) | (58) | (419) | (3) | 9,633 | (57)
ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement |  | 4 |  | (58) |  | 245 |  | 191
Less: Discount unwind |  | — |  | — |  | (21) |  | (21)
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs |  | — |  | — |  | 23 |  | 23
Total ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement |  | 4 |  | (58) |  | 247 |  | 193

At 1 January 2024 | 268,211 | 170 | 23,595 | 461 | 3,071 | 361 | 294,877 | 992
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 2 | (11,911) | (11) | 11,911 | 11 | — | — | — | —
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 2 | 9,395 | 118 | (9,395) | (118) | — | — | — | —
Transfers to Stage 3 2 | (434) | (2) | (845) | (34) | 1,279 | 36 | — | —
Transfers from Stage 3 2 | 35 | 2 | 417 | 34 | (452) | (36) | — | —
Transfers of financial instruments | (2,915) | 107 | 2,088 | (107) | 827 | — | — | —
Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer 3 | — | (107) | — | 96 | — | 122 | — | 111
Change in economic scenarios 4 | — | (20) | — | (44) | — | — | — | (64)
Change to ECL models | (2,287) | (5) | 2,361 | 37 | (74) | (26) | — | 6
New lending and assets purchased 5 8 | 33,894 | 43 | 1,170 | 58 | 164 | 40 | 35,228 | 141
Redemptions, repayments and assets sold 6 8 | (38,081) | (44) | (4,663) | (69) | (1,242) | (79) | (43,986) | (192)
Changes in risk parameters and other movements 7 | 1,061 | 9 | (3,333) | (73) | 355 | 169 | (1,917) | 105
Assets written off 6 | — | — | — | — | (342) | (230) | (342) | (230)
At 31 December 2024 | 259,883 | 153 | 21,218 | 359 | 2,759 | 357 | 283,860 | 869
Net movement in the period | (8,328) | (17) | (2,377) | (102) | (312) | (4) | (11,017) | (123)
ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement |  | (17) |  | (102) |  | 226 |  | 107
Less: Discount unwind |  | — |  | — |  | (24) |  | (24)
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs |  | — |  | — |  | (12) |  | (12)
Total ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement |  | (17) |  | (102) |  | 190 |  | 71

1 Exposures that have attracted an ECL, and as reported in the Credit Quality table above.
2 Changes to assumptions in the period. Isolates the impact on ECL from changes to the economic variables for each scenario, the scenarios themselves, and the probability weights from all other movements.
Also includes the impact of quarterly revaluation of collateral. The impact of changes in economics on exposure Stage allocations are shown in Transfers of financial instruments.
3 Total impact of facilities that moved Stage(s) in the period. This means, for example, that where risk parameter changes (model inputs) or model changes (methodology) result in a facility moving Stage, the full
impact is reflected here (rather than in Other). Stage flow analysis only applies to facilities that existed at both the start and end of the period. Transfers between Stages are based on opening balances and ECL at
the start of the period. Relates to the revaluation of ECL following the transfer of an exposure from one Stage to another.
4 Exposures and ECL of facilities that did not exist at the start of the period but did at the end. Amounts in Stage 2 and 3 represent assets which deteriorated in the period after origination in Stage 1
5 Residual movements on existing facilities that did not change Stage in the period, and which were not acquired in the period. Includes the net increase or decrease in the period of the mortgage pipeline, cash at
central banks, the impact of changes in risk parameters in the period, unwind of discount rates and increases in ECL requirements of accounts which ultimately were written off in the period.
6 Exposures and ECL for facilities that existed at the start of the period but not at the end.
7 Residual movements on existing facilities that did not change Stage in the period, and which were not acquired in the period. Includes the net increase or decrease in the period of the mortgage pipeline, cash at
central banks, the impact of changes in risk parameters in the period, unwind of discount rates and increases in ECL requirements of accounts which ultimately were written off in the period.
8 New lending and assets purchased and Redemptions, repayments and assets sold categories include internal transfers.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 74

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

COUNTRY RISK EXPOSURES (audited)
We manage our country risk exposure under our global limits framework. We set our Risk Appetite for each country, considering factors that may affect its risk
profile. These can include political events, macroeconomics and the nature of the risk. We actively manage exposures if we need to.
The table below shows our total exposures, which are the total of balance sheet and off–balance sheet values. We calculate balance sheet values in line with IFRS
(i.e. after netting allowed under IAS 32) except for credit provisions which we add back. Off–balance sheet values are undrawn facilities and letters of credit. The
table excludes balances with central banks, cash at hand, interests in other entities, intangible assets, property, plant and equipment, tax assets, retirement benefit
assets and other assets.
We classify location by country of risk – the country where each client has its main business or assets. That is unless there is a full risk transfer guarantee in place. If
so, we use the guarantor’s country of domicile. If a client has operations in many countries, we use their country of incorporation.
The table below includes balances with other Banco Santander group members. We deal with other Banco Santander group members in the ordinary course of
business. We do this where we have a particular business advantage or expertise and where they can offer us commercial opportunities. These transactions also
arise where we support the activities of, or with, larger multinational corporate clients and financial institutions which may deal with other Banco Santander group
members. We conduct these activities on the same terms as for similar transactions with third parties, and in a way that manages the credit risk within limits
acceptable to the Board and the PRA.

| 2025 | 2024
| £bn | £bn
UK | 282.6 | 271.5
Rest of Europe | 12.1 | 11.4
Rest of world | 4.8 | 6.9
Total | 299.5 | 289.8

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 75

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

RETAIL & BUSINESS BANKING – CREDIT RISK REVIEW
We provide detailed credit risk analysis for Retail & Business Banking in separate sections below for Mortgages, our largest portfolio, and our Everyday Banking portfolio.
Retail & Business Banking: Mortgages – Credit Risk Review
We offer mortgages to people who want to buy a property and offer additional borrowing (known as further advances) to existing mortgage customers. The
property must be in the UK.
Borrower profile (audited)

| Stock |  | New business 1
| 2025 |  | 2024 |  | 2025 |  | 2024
| £m | % |  | £m | % |  | £m | % |  | £m | %
Home movers 2 | 69,963 | 42 |  | 69,354 | 42 |  | 10,516 | 41 |  | 6,736 | 45
Remortgagers 3 | 47,242 | 28 |  | 45,226 | 27 |  | 9,572 | 38 |  | 4,353 | 29
First-time buyers | 34,776 | 21 |  | 35,702 | 22 |  | 3,426 | 14 |  | 3,262 | 22
Buy-to-let | 15,287 | 9 |  | 14,931 | 9 |  | 1,718 | 7 |  | 567 | 4
| 167,268 | 100 |  | 165,213 | 100 |  | 25,232 | 100 |  | 14,918 | 100

Movement in mortgage lending | £bn
1 January 2025 | 165.2
New business | 25.3
Redemptions and repayments | (23.2)
31 December 2025 | 167.3

| 2025 |  | 2024
Proportion of mortgage internal transfers retained online | 79% |  | 77%

|  | 2025 |  | 2024
Internal transfers (£bn) 4 |  |  | 36.0 |  | 32.2
Further advances and flexi drawdowns (£bn) |  |  | 1.0 |  | 0.8
First-time buyers - gross lending (£bn ) |  |  | 3.4 |  | 3.3

1 The 2024 values exclude advances, flexible drawdowns and fees
2 Home movers’ include both existing customers moving house and taking out a new mortgage with us, and customers who switch their mortgage to us when they move house.
3 Remortgagers’ are new customers who are taking a new mortgage with us.
4 Internal remortgages are where we moved our customers with maturing mortgages onto new ones.
2025 compared to 2024
In 2025 , mortgage asset stock increased with new business exceeding redemptions and repayments. New business increased in all sectors, with remortgages
causing the largest proportion of overall increase. The borrower profile remained stable.
Interest rate profile (audited)
The interest rate profile of our maturing mortgage asset stock was:

| 2025 |  | 2024
| £m | % |  | £m | %
Fixed rate | 153,172 | 92 |  | 148,495 | 90
Of which maturing: |  |  |  |  |
– < 12 months | 41,262 | 25 |  | 37,656 | 23
– Later than 1 year but no later than 3 years | 83,529 | 50 |  | 84,704 | 51
– Later than 3 years but no later than 4 years | 11,431 | 7 |  | 11,122 | 7
– Later than 4 years but no later than 5 years | 14,011 | 8 |  | 11,645 | 7
– Later than 5 years | 2,939 | 2 |  | 3,368 | 2
Variable rate | 10,227 | 6 |  | 12,105 | 7
Standard Variable Rate (SVR) | 2,434 | 1 |  | 3,007 | 2
Follow on Rate (FoR) | 1,435 | 1 |  | 1,606 | 1
| 167,268 | 100 |  | 165,213 | 100

2025 compared to 2024
We continued to see customers refinance from reversion to fixed-rate products in 2025, influenced by high interest rates. Demand for fixed-rate products increased,
particularly with shorter fixed rate terms.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 76

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Geographical distribution (audited)
The geographical distribution of our mortgage asset stock and new business was:

| Stock |  | New business 1
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
Region | £bn | £bn |  | £bn | £bn
London | 43.9 | 42.7 |  | 6.6 | 4.1
Midlands and East Anglia | 23.4 | 23.1 |  | 3.6 | 2.0
North | 21.8 | 21.7 |  | 3.4 | 1.9
Northern Ireland | 2.2 | 2.3 |  | 0.3 | 0.1
Scotland | 6.0 | 6.0 |  | 1.0 | 0.6
South East excluding London | 52.7 | 52.3 |  | 7.6 | 4.6
South West, Wales and other | 17.3 | 17.1 |  | 2.7 | 1.6
| 167.3 | 165.2 |  | 25.2 | 14.9

1 The 2024 values exclude advances, flexible drawdown and fees.
2025 compared to 2024
The portfolio's geographical distribution continued to represent a broad footprint across the UK, with a concentration around London and the South East. The loan-
to-income multiple of mortgage lending in the year, based on average earnings of new business at inception was 2.91(2024: 2.93).
Mortgage loan size (audited)
The split of our mortgage asset by size was:

Mortgage loan size | 2025 |  | 2024
>£1.0m | 3% |  | 2%
£0.5m to £1.0m | 11% |  | 10%
£0.25m to £0.5m | 32% |  | 31%
<£0.25m | 54% |  | 57%
Average loan size (stock) 1 | £201k |  | £193k
Average loan size (new business) | £254k |  | £246k

1 Average initial advance of existing stock.
Loan-to-value analysis (audited)
This table shows the LTV distribution for the gross carrying amount and the related ECL of our total mortgage portfolio and Stage 3 mortgages, and new business.
We also show the collateral value and average LTV. We use our estimate of the property value at the balance sheet date and include fees that have been added to
the loan. For flexible products, we only include the drawn amount, not undrawn limits.

| 2025 |  | 2024
| Stock | Stage 3 | New Business |  | Stock | Stage 3 | New Business
| Total | ECL | Total | ECL |  | Total | ECL | Total | ECL
LTV | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Up to 50% | 75,743 | 29 | 705 | 10 | 5,373 |  | 76,122 | 33 | 880 | 13 | 3,407
>50-60% | 33,122 | 17 | 270 | 6 | 4,375 |  | 33,067 | 21 | 317 | 8 | 2,394
>60-70% | 27,776 | 21 | 210 | 9 | 3,803 |  | 29,171 | 27 | 254 | 10 | 2,311
>70-80% | 18,466 | 19 | 122 | 7 | 5,214 |  | 17,132 | 27 | 150 | 12 | 3,458
>80-90% | 9,385 | 15 | 64 | 7 | 4,352 |  | 7,989 | 19 | 72 | 8 | 2,445
>90-100% | 2,503 | 10 | 30 | 4 | 2,099 |  | 1,452 | 12 | 38 | 7 | 888
>100% | 273 | 26 | 49 | 14 | 16 |  | 280 | 33 | 56 | 20 | 15
| 167,268 | 137 | 1,450 | 57 | 25,232 |  | 165,213 | 172 | 1,767 | 78 | 14,918
Collateral value 1 | 167,234 |  | 1,441 |  | 25,232 |  | 165,176 |  | 1,756 |  | 14,918
| % |  | % |  | % |  | % |  | % |  | %
Average balance weighted LTV 2 | 52 |  | 52 |  | 65 |  | 51 |  | 51 |  | 64

1 Collateral value is limited to the balance of each loan and excludes the impact of any over-collateralisation. Includes collateral against loans in negative equity of £240m (2024: £244m).
2 Balance weighted LTV = (Loan 1 balance x (Loan 1 Balance/Loan 1 latest property valuation) + (Loan 2 balance x (loan 2 balance/Loan 2 latest property valuation) + ...) /(Loan 1 balance + Loan 2 balance+...).
The balance weighted average LTV of new business in the period in London was 64% (2024: 64%).
2025 compared to 2024
Collateral quality remained strong in 2025, with reductions in both ECL and Stage 3 balances. Average balance weighted LTVs of stock were broadly flat, whilst
new business contribution increased due to an improved trading strategy covering price competitiveness, propositions, and service. We monitor the profile of new
lending and act as needed to ensure the LTV mix of completions is in line with our risk appetite.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 77

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Credit performance
For credit performance details, see the Credit performance section in Santander UK Group level – Credit risk review.
Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL (audited)
The following tables show changes in total on and off-balance sheet exposures and ECL in the period. The footnotes to the Santander UK group level table on page
73 also apply to these tables.

| Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total
Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL
£m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 157,268 | 10 | 16,973 | 84 | 1,785 | 78 | 176,026 | 172
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 2 | (5,651) | — | 5,651 | — | — | — | — | —
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 2 | 4,863 | 14 | (4,863) | (14) | — | — | — | —
Transfers to Stage 3 2 | (123) | — | (465) | (5) | 588 | 5 | — | —
Transfers from Stage 3 2 | — | — | 235 | 6 | (235) | (6) | — | —
Transfers of financial instruments | (911) | 14 | 558 | (13) | 353 | (1) | — | —
Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer 3 | — | (14) | — | 14 | — | 9 | — | 9
Change in economic scenarios 4 | — | (6) | — | — | — | (4) | — | (10)
Change to ECL models | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
New lending and assets purchased 5 8 | 34,589 | 6 | 586 | 5 | 23 | 1 | 35,198 | 12
Redemptions, repayments and assets sold 6 8 | (20,975) | — | (3,125) | (20) | (652) | (21) | (24,752) | (41)
Changes in risk parameters and other movements 7 | (6,137) | 1 | 49 | (1) | 21 | 10 | (6,067) | 10
Assets written off 6 | — | — | — | — | (66) | (15) | (66) | (15)
At 31 December 2025 | 163,834 | 11 | 15,041 | 69 | 1,464 | 57 | 180,339 | 137
Net movement in the period | 6,566 | 1 | (1,932) | (15) | (321) | (21) | 4,313 | (35)
ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement |  | 1 |  | (15) |  | (6) |  | (20)
Less: Discount unwind |  | — |  | — |  | (3) |  | (3)
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs |  | — |  | — |  | 41 |  | 41
Total ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement |  | 1 |  | (15) |  | 32 |  | 18
At 1 January 2024 | 161,163 | 24 | 17,997 | 110 | 2,028 | 108 | 181,188 | 242
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 2 | (9,873) | (1) | 9,873 | 1 | — | — | — | —
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 2 | 7,899 | 20 | (7,899) | (20) | — | — | — | —
Transfers to Stage 3 2 | (230) | — | (524) | (7) | 754 | 7 | — | —
Transfers from Stage 3 2 | 3 | — | 268 | 9 | (271) | (9) | — | —
Transfers of financial instruments | (2,201) | 19 | 1,718 | (17) | 483 | (2) | — | —
Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer 3 | — | (19) | — | 31 | — | 15 | — | 27
Change in economic scenarios 4 | — | (15) | — | (29) | — | 1 | — | (43)
Change to ECL models | (1,859) | (3) | 1,869 | 21 | (10) | (37) | — | (19)
New lending and assets purchased 5 8 | 21,758 | 4 | 315 | 3 | 33 | 1 | 22,106 | 8
Redemptions, repayments and assets sold 6 8 | (21,925) | (1) | (3,162) | (14) | (762) | (27) | (25,849) | (42)
Changes in risk parameters and other movements 7 | 332 | 1 | (1,764) | (21) | 46 | 28 | (1,386) | 8
Assets written off 6 | — | — | — | — | (33) | (9) | (33) | (9)
At 31 December 2024 | 157,268 | 10 | 16,973 | 84 | 1,785 | 78 | 176,026 | 172
Net movement in the period | (3,895) | (14) | (1,024) | (26) | (243) | (30) | (5,162) | (70)
ECL (release)/charge to the Income Statement |  | (14) |  | (26) |  | (21) |  | (61)
Less: Discount unwind |  | — |  | — |  | (3) |  | (3)
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs |  | — |  | — |  | 36 |  | 36
Total ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement |  | (14) |  | (26) |  | 12 |  | (28)

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 78

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Loan modifications
Forbearance 1
The following table sets out the financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at lifetime ECL. (audited)

| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Financial assets modified in the period: |  |
– Amortised cost before modification | 542 | 555
–Net modification loss | 2 | 2
Financial assets modified since initial recognition: |  |
– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12 months ECL in the period | 338 | 260

The balances at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024, analysed by their staging and the forbearance we applied, were:

| Capitalisation | Term extension | Interest-only | Concessionary interest rate | Reduced repayment plan | Total | Loss allowances
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Stage 2 | 186 | 184 | 186 | 41 | 261 | 858 | 6
Stage 3 | 209 | 86 | 45 | 41 | 293 | 674 | 25
| 395 | 270 | 231 | 82 | 554 | 1,532 | 31
Proportion of portfolio | 0.2% | 0.2% | 0.1% | 0.1% | 0.3% | 0.9% |
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Stage 2 | 231 | 186 | 201 | 23 | 145 | 786 | 6
Stage 3 | 203 | 141 | 53 | 104 | 156 | 657 | 27
| 434 | 327 | 254 | 127 | 301 | 1,443 | 33
Proportion of portfolio | 0.3% | 0.2% | 0.2% | 0.1% | 0.2% | 0.9% |

1 We base forbearance type on the first forbearance on the accounts.
At 31 December 2025, the proportion of the mortgage portfolio in forbearance was 0.9% (2024: 0.9%) and the proportion of accounts in forbearance for more than
six months that had made their last six months’ contractual payments was 80% (2024: 83%). The weighted average LTV of all accounts in forbearance was 46%
(2024: 45%) compared to the weighted average portfolio LTV of 52% (2024: 51%).
At 31 December 2025, the carrying value of mortgages classified as multiple forbearance was £13m (2024: £9m).
2025 compared to 2024
In 2025, the proportion of the mortgage portfolio in forbearance remained flat. We completed the sale of £1.2bn of high RWA mortgage loans in Q3-25. As many of
these loans were subject to forbearance, the sale caused a reduction in forbearance stock. This was offset by an increase in the stock of reduced repayment plans
which were classified as forbearance from Q4-24.
Other loan modifications
Santander UK supports the Mortgage Charter which was published in July 2023. There were no modification gains or losses arising from the Mortgage Charter.
We made two customer support solutions available as part of the Mortgage Charter, allowing customers who are up to date with their payments to make interest-
only payments for six months or extend their mortgage term to reduce their monthly payments. The following table summarises such loan modifications.

| 2025 | 2024
| Term Extension | Interest-only | Term Extension | Interest-only
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Stage 1 | 48 | 786 | 115 | 1,257
Stage 2 | 7 | 286 | 21 | 461
Stage 3 | 1 | 13 | 1 | 22
| 56 | 1,085 | 137 | 1,740

There were no other loan modifications made in 2025 and 2024.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 79

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Portfolios of particular interest – Mortgages
Introduction
We are mainly a residential prime lender and we do not originate sub-prime or second charge mortgages. Despite that, some types of mortgages have higher risks
and others stand out for different reasons. These are:

Product | Description
Interest-only loans | With an interest-only mortgage, the customer pays interest every month, but the principal is only required to be repaid at the end of the mortgage term. Some mortgages have a part that is interest-only, with the rest being a normal repayment mortgage. We mitigate the risk from new interest-only mortgages by having lower maximum LTVs. For most applicants, the maximum LTV is 50%. For high net worth customers, it can be up to 75%. When a customer plans to repay their mortgage by selling the property, we require a minimum equity buffer of £300k. We also remind customers that they have to arrange to repay the principal at the end of the mortgage. We send them messages with their annual mortgage statements, and we contact them throughout the mortgage term to encourage them to tell us how they plan to repay. We increase the frequency of contact as the loan approaches maturity. If customers know they will not be able to repay their mortgage when it ends, or if their mortgage has already passed the date when it should have ended, we talk to them. If we think it is in their interests and they can afford it, we look at other ways to manage it, such as turning the mortgage into a repayment one and extending it. If the customer is waiting for their way to repay it, such as an investment plan, to mature, we may permit an extension.
Part interest-only, part repayment loans | Customers with part interest-only, part repayment mortgages still have to pay back a lump sum at the end of their mortgage for the interest-only part. This means these loans have a higher credit risk as we depend on the customers to pay back a lump sum. We design new account LTV maximums to mitigate this risk. We also make sure the customer has a plausible repayment plan before we lend to them and stays on track for the loan term. We mitigate the risk from these loans in similar ways to those we use for interest-only mortgages. The maximum LTV for new loans is 85%. For most applicants, up to 50% of that can be interest-only. For high net worth customers, it can be up to 75%. When a customer plans to repay the interest- only element of their mortgage by selling the property, we require a minimum equity buffer of £300k. We manage communications and extension options in similar ways to those we use for interest-only mortgages.
Flexible loans | Flexible mortgages allow customers to pay more or less than their usual amount each month, or even to take ‘payment holidays’ when they pay nothing at all. There are conditions on when and how much customers can draw down, and they do not have to take or draw down the whole loan all at once. A customer can ask us to raise their credit limit, but that means we will go through our full credit approval process. We can also lower a customer’s credit limit at any time, so it never goes above 90% of the property’s current market value. We no longer offer flexible loans for new mortgages. This is an area of interest if any customers might be using these facilities to self-forbear, such as regularly drawing down small amounts. We reflect signs that the credit risk has significantly increased in our ECL calculations.
Loans with an LTV >100% | In some cases, property prices have fallen, so mortgages we gave in the past with lower LTVs now have LTVs greater than 100%. Where the mortgage balance is more than the property is now worth, we cannot recover the full value of the loan by repossessing and selling the property. This means there is a higher credit risk on these loans, so we monitor them as part of our assessment of ongoing portfolio performance.
Buy-to-Let (BTL) loans | We have specific policies for BTL and focus on non-professional landlords. We have prudent lending criteria and the maximum LTV is 75%. The first applicant must earn a minimum of £25,000 per year, and we require proof of income in all cases. We also use a BTL affordability rate as part of our lending assessment. This means that the rental income must cover the monthly mortgage interest payments by a prescribed amount when calculated using a stressed interest rate. We regularly review the prescribed amount and adjust it as needed.

Climate change
The value of property collateral for mortgages might be affected by physical risks, such as flood and subsidence risk, as well as transitional risks including evolving
energy performance standards. We tested resilience through our in-house climate models in 2025 and assessed physical and transition risk to deliver granular
insights. Our analysis indicated that while climate related risks have the potential to intensify other risk factors, we remain resilient within the context of the
scenarios examined, supported by our stable average LTV ratio and the flood reinsurance scheme.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 80

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Credit performance (audited)

2025 | Total | Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Stage 3 ratio | Properties in possession | Balance weighted LTV (indexed)
| £m | £m | £m | £m | % | £m | %
Mortgage portfolio | 167,268 | 151,039 | 14,779 | 1,450 | 0.88 | 74 | 52
Of which: Portfolio of particular interest 1 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
–Interest only | 35,637 | 29,866 | 5,155 | 616 | 1.74 | 35 | 49
–Part interest-only, part repayment 2 | 11,495 | 9,978 | 1,357 | 160 | 1.40 | 9 | 53
–Flexible | 3,504 | 2,508 | 828 | 168 | 5.19 | 11 | 37
–LTV >100% | 273 | 88 | 136 | 49 | 17.91 | 18 | 116
–Buy-to-let | 15,287 | 14,166 | 1,070 | 51 | 0.33 | 4 | 59
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Mortgage portfolio | 165,213 | 146,758 | 16,688 | 1,767 | 1.08 | 46 | 51
Of which: Portfolio of particular interest 1 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
–Interest only | 36,188 | 29,802 | 5,572 | 814 | 2.27 | 23 | 48
–Part interest-only, part repayment 2 | 11,873 | 10,112 | 1,542 | 219 | 1.85 | 8 | 52
–Flexible | 4,333 | 3,190 | 933 | 210 | 5.25 | 8 | 38
–LTV >100% | 280 | 75 | 149 | 56 | 20.15 | 10 | 117
–Buy-to-let | 14,931 | 13,672 | 1,204 | 55 | 0.37 | 2 | 59

1 Where a loan falls into more than one category, we include it in all the categories that apply.
2 Mortgage balance includes both the interest-only part of £8,769m (2024: £9,046m) and the non-interest-only part of the loan.
2025 compared to 2024
In 2025, the combined total proportion of interest-only loans, part interest-only, part repayment loans and flexible loans decreased to 30.3% (2024: 31.7%).
BTL mortgage balance s increased by £0.4bn to £15.3bn (2024: £14.9bn) driven by our pivot to growth strategy and affordability improvements. In 2025, the
balance weighted average LTV of mortgage total new BTL lending was 60% (2024: 59%).
Forbearance 1
The balances at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024 were:

| Interest-only 2 | Flexible | LTV >100% | Buy-to-Let
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m
Total | 239 | 43 | 8 | 18
– Stage 2 | 103 | 17 | 1 | 8
– Stage 3 | 136 | 26 | 7 | 10
2024 |  |  |  |
Total | 272 | 56 | 9 | 18
– Stage 2 | 115 | 19 | 2 | 8
– Stage 3 | 157 | 37 | 7 | 10

1 Where a loan falls into more than one category, we have included it in all the categories that apply.
2 Comprises full interest-only loans and part interest-only, part repayment loans.
2025 compared to 2024
Mortgage forbearance stock reduced mainly due to portfolio sales and the improvement of our risk profile.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 81

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Retail & Business Banking: Everyday Banking – Credit Risk Review
Credit performance (audited)
For credit performance details, see the Credit performance section in Santander UK Group level - Credit risk review. In addition, we monitor the following credit
performance metrics that are specific to Everyday Banking:

|  |  |  |  | 2025 |  | 2024
BBLS with 100% Government Guarantee (£bn) |  |  |  |  | 0.6 |  | 1.1
% of credit card customers that repay balance in full each month (unaudited) |  |  |  |  | 54% |  | 56%
UPL average customer balance (£) |  |  |  |  | 6,000 |  | 6,000

2025 compared to 2024
Business Banking loans continued to reduce due to the pay down of the Bounce Back Loans (BBL) portfolio.
Loan modifications
Forbearance
The following table sets out the financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at lifetime ECL. (audited)

| Credit cards | Overdrafts | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m
Financial assets modified in the period: |  |  |
– Amortised cost before modification | 18 | 13 | 31
– Net modification loss | 12 | 4 | 16
Financial assets modified since initial recognition: |  |  |
– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12m ECL in the period | 1 | — | 1
2024 |  |  |
Financial assets modified in the period: |  |  |
– Amortised cost before modification | 14 | 9 | 23
– Net modification loss | 18 | 6 | 24
Financial assets modified since initial recognition: |  |  |
– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12m ECL in the period | 2 | 1 | 3

The balances at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024 were:

|  | Other unsecured |
| Business banking | Personal loans | Credit cards | Overdrafts | Total other unsecured | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Total | 6 | 1 | 70 | 26 | 97 | 103
– Stage 2 | — | 1 | 15 | 10 | 26 | 26
– Stage 3 | 6 | — | 55 | 16 | 71 | 77
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |
Total | 3 | 2 | 57 | 22 | 81 | 84
– Stage 2 | — | 1 | 11 | 5 | 17 | 17
– Stage 3 | 3 | 1 | 46 | 17 | 64 | 67

Other loan modifications
There were no other loan modifications made in 2025.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 82

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

CONSUMER FINANCE – CREDIT RISK REVIEW
Credit performance (audited)
For credit performance details, see the Credit performance section in Santander UK Group level - Credit risk review. In addition, we monitor the following credit
performance metrics that are specific to Consumer Finance:

| 2025 |  | 2024
Consumer (auto) finance new business gross lending (£m) | 2,029 |  | 1,593
Wholesale loans (stock finance) to car dealerships as approximate % of the Consumer loan book | 13.8% |  | 9.7%
% of lending collateralised on the vehicle | 98% |  | 95%
Average Consumer (auto) finance loan size (£) | 19,551 |  | 16,045

2025 compared to 2024
In 2025, there was increased volume of new business, with larger quantities of electric vehicles and a marginal increase in the proportion of wholesale balances as
a % of the loan book.
The risk profile was stable in terms of our credit scoring acceptance policies. The overall risk performance was good with the vast majority of customers paying.
Loan modifications (audited)
Forbearance
At 31 December 2025 the amount of forborne assets net of deferred income was £11m (2024: £5.4m).
Other loan modifications
There were no other loan modifications made in 2025.
The gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the ECL allowance changed to a 12-month measurement at 31 December 2025 was £2m (2024: £6m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 83

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

CORPORATE & COMMERCIAL BANKING – CREDIT RISK REVIEW
Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL (audited)
The following tables show changes in total on and off-balance sheet exposures and ECL in the period. The footnotes to the Santander UK group level table on page
73 also apply to these tables.

| Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total
Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL
£m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 23,023 | 73 | 2,568 | 85 | 716 | 184 | 26,307 | 342
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 3 | (681) | (3) | 681 | 3 | — | — | — | —
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 3 | 797 | 14 | (797) | (14) | — | — | — | —
Transfers to Stage 3 3 | (32) | — | (291) | (12) | 323 | 12 | — | —
Transfers from Stage 3 3 | — | — | 22 | 2 | (22) | (2) | — | —
Transfers of financial instruments | 84 | 11 | (385) | (21) | 301 | 10 | — | —
Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer 4 | — | (9) | — | 12 | — | 44 | — | 47
Change in economic scenarios 2 | — | (2) | — | 2 | — | (1) | — | (1)
Change to ECL models | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | —
New lending and assets purchased 5 | 11,687 | 14 | 207 | 2 | 6 | 3 | 11,900 | 19
Redemptions, repayments and assets sold 7 | (6,105) | (10) | (732) | (29) | (237) | (24) | (7,074) | (63)
Changes in risk parameters and other movements 6 | (3,756) | 1 | 121 | (7) | 77 | 38 | (3,558) | 32
Assets written offs 7 | — | — | — | — | (214) | (53) | (214) | (53)
At 31 December 2025 | 24,933 | 78 | 1,779 | 44 | 649 | 201 | 27,361 | 323
Net movement in the period | 1,910 | 5 | (789) | (41) | (67) | 17 | 1,054 | (19)
ECL (release)/charge to the Income Statement |  | 5 |  | (41) |  | 70 |  | 34
Less: Discount unwind |  | — |  | — |  | (11) |  | (11)
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs |  | — |  | — |  | 5 |  | 5
Total ECL (release)/charge to the Income Statement |  | 5 |  | (41) |  | 64 |  | 28

| Stage 1 | Stage 2 | Stage 3 | Total
| Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL | Exposures 1 | ECL
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2024 | 22,567 | 76 | 3,965 | 132 | 745 | 172 | 27,277 | 380
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2 3 | (1,101) | (3) | 1,101 | 3 | — | — | — | —
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 3 | 781 | 13 | (781) | (13) | — | — | — | —
Transfers to Stage 3 3 | (84) | (1) | (230) | (12) | 314 | 13 | — | —
Transfers from Stage 3 3 | 24 | 1 | 121 | 18 | (145) | (19) | — | —
Transfers of financial instruments | (380) | 10 | 211 | (4) | 169 | (6) | — | —
Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer 4 | — | (9) | — | (4) | — | 54 | — | 41
Change in economic scenarios 2 | — | (3) | — | (7) | — | (1) | — | (11)
Change to ECL models | (222) | (2) | 286 | (11) | (64) | 12 | — | (1)
New lending and assets purchased 5 | 8,485 | 20 | 552 | 21 | 118 | 29 | 9,155 | 70
Redemptions, repayments and assets sold 7 | (5,203) | (24) | (1,149) | (29) | (254) | (42) | (6,606) | (95)
Changes in risk parameters and other movements 6 | (2,224) | 5 | (1,297) | (13) | 82 | 15 | (3,439) | 7
Assets written off 7 | — | — | — | — | (80) | (49) | (80) | (49)
At 31 December 2024 | 23,023 | 73 | 2,568 | 85 | 716 | 184 | 26,307 | 342
Net movement in the period | 456 | (3) | (1,397) | (47) | (29) | 12 | (970) | (38)
ECL (release)/charge to the Income Statement |  | (3) |  | (47) |  | 61 |  | 11
Less: Discount unwind |  | — |  | — |  | (12) |  | (12)
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs |  | — |  | — |  | 5 |  | 5
Total ECL (release)/charge to the Income Statement |  | (3) |  | (47) |  | 54 |  | 4

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 84

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Committed exposures
Rating distribution (audited)
These tables show our credit risk exposure according to our internal rating scale (see the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section) for each portfolio.
On this scale, the higher the rating, the better the quality of the counterparty.

| Santander UK risk grade |
| 9 | 8 | 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 to 1 | Other | Total 1
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
SME and mid corporate | — | 449 | 903 | 3,364 | 4,172 | 3,069 | 1,604 | 36 | 13,597
Commercial Real Estate | — | — | 802 | 2,589 | 2,360 | 411 | 134 | — | 6,296
Social Housing | 120 | 2,032 | 5,581 | — | — | — | — | — | 7,733
| 120 | 2,481 | 7,286 | 5,953 | 6,532 | 3,480 | 1,738 | 36 | 27,626
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Stage 1 | 120 | 2,481 | 7,278 | 5,910 | 6,219 | 2,710 | 444 | 36 | 25,198
– Stage 2 | — | — | 8 | 43 | 313 | 770 | 645 | — | 1,779
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 649 | — | 649
2024
SME and mid corporate | — | 253 | 723 | 3,170 | 4,295 | 3,013 | 1,589 | 82 | 13,125
Commercial Real Estate | — | — | 567 | 1,913 | 2,460 | 620 | 309 | — | 5,869
Social Housing | 13 | 1,983 | 5,868 | — | — | — | — | — | 7,864
| 13 | 2,236 | 7,158 | 5,083 | 6,755 | 3,633 | 1,898 | 82 | 26,858
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Stage 1 | 13 | 2,236 | 7,115 | 4,991 | 6,159 | 2,597 | 382 | 82 | 23,575
– Stage 2 | — | — | 43 | 92 | 596 | 1,036 | 800 | — | 2,567
– Stage 3 | — | — | — | — | — | — | 716 | — | 716

1 Credit risk exposures include derivatives exposures. For invoice finance the credit risk exposures represent the full facility limit present on the credit agreement papers, a total limit before consideration of
underlying collaterals and application of prepayment caps for any given point.
Geographical distribution (audited)
We typically classify geographical location according to the counterparty’s country of domicile unless a full risk transfer guarantee is in place, in which case we use
the guarantor’s country of domicile instead. At 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024 this is mainly focused in the UK.
Credit risk mitigation (audited)

| Gross exposure | Collateral | Net exposure
| Stage 3 | Stage 3 | Stage 3
2025 | £m | £m | £m
SME and mid corporate | 572 | 141 | 431
Commercial Real Estate | 77 | 74 | 3
| 649 | 215 | 434

2024 |  |  |
SME and mid corporate | 639 | 209 | 430
Commercial Real Estate | 77 | 71 | 6
| 716 | 280 | 436

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 85

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Credit performance (audited)
For credit performance details, see the Credit performance section in Santander UK Group level – Credit risk review.
Loan modifications
Forbearance
The following table sets out the financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at lifetime ECL. (audited)

| 2025 |  | 2024
| £m |  | £m
Financial assets modified in the period: |  |  |
– Amortised cost before modification | 160 |  | 232
– Net modification loss | 15 |  | 5
Financial assets modified in the period (multiple forbearance): |  |  |
– Amortised cost before modification | 126 |  | 145
– Net modification loss | 3 |  | 7
Financial assets modified since initial recognition: |  |  |
– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12-month ECL in the period | 10 |  | 15

We only make forbearance arrangements for lending to customers. The balances at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024, analysed by their staging and the
forbearance we applied, were:

| 2025 |  | 2024
| £m |  | £m
Stock 1 |  |  |
– Term extension | 103 |  | 102
– Interest-only | 193 |  | 229
– Other payment rescheduling | 381 |  | 373
| 677 |  | 704
Of which: |  |  |
– Stage 1 | — |  | 40
– Stage 2 | 218 |  | 228
– Stage 3 | 459 |  | 436
| 677 |  | 704
Proportion of portfolio | 2.5% |  | 2.6%

1 We base forbearance type on the first forbearance we applied. Tables only show accounts open at the period-end. Amounts are drawn balances and include off balance sheet balances.
CORPORATE CENTRE – CREDIT RISK REVIEW
Committed exposures
Rating distribution (audited)
Corporate Centre committed exposures mainly comprise Sovereign exposures and Structured Products (High Quality Liquid Assets, mainly Asset Backed Securities
and covered bonds) managed as part of our Eligible Liquidity Pool. These are low risk, high quality, investment grade exposures, the majority with a credit rating of 8
or 9 according to our internal rating scale (see the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section).
Credit performance (audited)
For credit performance details, see the Credit performance section in Santander UK Group level – Credit risk review.
Loan modifications (audited)
There were no loan modifications made in 2025 and 2024.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 86

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Liquidity risk

| Overview Liquidity risk is the risk that we do not have sufficient liquid financial resources available to meet our obligations as they fall due, or we can only secure such resources at high cost. In this section, we describe our key liquidity risks, including our sources and uses of liquidity, and how we manage liquidity risk. We also analyse our key liquidity metrics, including our LCRs and our eligible liquidity pools. We then explain our funding strategy and structure and we analyse our wholesale funding. Finally, we analyse how we have encumbered some of our assets to support our funding activities. |  |  | Key metrics LCR of 162% ( 2024 : 154%) RFB DoLSub LCR of 157% ( 2024 : 151% ) RFB DoLSub LCR eligible liquidity pool of £47.4bn (2024: £44.4bn ) RFB DoLSub NSFR of 135% (2024: 135%) Wholesale funding with maturity <1 year £13.1bn (2024: £19.6bn ) |

OUR KEY LIQUIDITY RISKS (audited)
Through our Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) framework, we manage our market liquidity risks, funding or structural liquidity risk and contingent liquidity risk, wherever
they arise. This can be in retail and corporate deposit outflows, outflows in wholesale secured and unsecured funding and off-balance sheet activities. Other risks
our framework covers include funding concentrations, intra-day cash flows, intra-group commitments and support, franchise retention and cross currency risk.
Our main sources of liquidity
Customer deposits finance most of our customer lending. Although these funds are mostly callable, in practice they give us a stable and predictable core of funding.
This is due to the nature of retail accounts and the breadth of our retail customer relationships.
We have a strong wholesale funding investor base, diversified across product types and geographies. Through the wholesale markets, we have active relationships
in many sectors including banks, other financial institutions, corporates, pensions and investment funds. We access the wholesale funding markets by issuing
capital, senior unsecured debt, covered bonds, structured notes and short-term funding. We also access these markets through securitisations of certain assets of
Santander UK plc and our operating subsidiaries. For more on our programmes, see Notes 14, 25 and 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
We generate funding on the strength of our own balance sheet, our own profitability and our own network of investors. In addition, we have access to UK
Government funding schemes as well as the Bank of England's lending facilities. We comply with rules set by the PRA, other regulators, and Banco Santander
standards. While we consolidate, manage and monitor liquidity risk centrally, we also manage and monitor it in the business area it comes from.
Our main uses of liquidity
Our main uses of liquidity are to fund our lending, to pay interest and dividends, and to repay debt. Our ability to pay dividends depends on various factors. These
include our regulatory capital needs, the level of our distributable reserves, and our financial performance.
LIQUIDITY RISK MANAGEMENT
We manage liquidity risk on a consolidated basis in our CFO division, which is our centralised function for managing funding, liquidity and capital. We created our
governance, oversight and control frameworks, and our LRA, on the same consolidated basis.
Under the PRA’s liquidity rules, Santander UK plc and its subsidiary Cater Allen Limited form the RFB Domestic Liquidity Sub-group (the RFB DoLSub), which allows
them to collectively meet regulatory requirements to manage liquidity risk. Each member of the RFB DoLSub will support the other by transferring surplus liquidity
in times of stress.
Risk appetite
Our LRA is based on the principles of liquidity management we use to manage our balance sheet. It also supports our need to meet or exceed regulatory rules. In
line with our liquidity management principles, we avoid over-reliance on funding from a single product, customer or counterparty. We also maintain enough
unencumbered customer assets to support current and future funding and collateral requirements and maintain enough capacity to monetise liquid assets and
other counterbalancing capacity on a timely basis.
Our LRA is proposed to the Risk division and the Board, and approved under advice from the Board Risk Committee. Our LRA, in the context of our overall Risk
Appetite, is reviewed and approved by the Board each year, or more often if needed.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 87

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Risk measurement
We use a number of metrics to manage liquidity risk. These include market and internal Early Warning Indicators (EWIs) that include qualitative and quantitative
measures such as outflows in retail and corporate deposits, funding concentration metrics, LCR and LRA metrics. They also include structural metrics, such as our
level of encumbered assets and our Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR).
Ongoing business management
Within our framework of prudent funding and liquidity management, we manage our activities to our LRA. We have clear responsibilities for short-term funding,
medium-term funding, encumbrance, collateral and liquid asset management. This ensures we manage liquidity risks as part of our daily operations, strategy and
planning.
Our liquidity management framework is split between short-term and strategic activities. Our short-term activities focus on intra-day collateral management and
maintaining liquid assets to cover unexpected demands on cash in a stress, such as large and unexpected deposit withdrawals by customers and loss of wholesale
funding. Our strategic activities focus on ensuring we are not over reliant on any one source for funding and that we avoid excessive concentrations in the maturity
of our funding.
We regularly test the liquidity of our eligible liquidity pool, in line with PRA rules and Basel guidelines. We do this by realising some of the assets by repurchase or
outright sale to the market. We make sure that over any 12-month period we realise a significant part of our eligible liquidity pool. As well as our eligible liquidity
pool, we always hold a portfolio of unencumbered liquid assets. Our LRA and PRA requirements determine the size and composition of this portfolio. These assets
give us a source of contingent liquidity, as we can realise some of them in a stress to create liquidity by repurchase or outright sale to the market.
Stress testing
Our liquidity stress testing framework is central to our LRA measurement and monitoring. To fit with our Risk Appetite, the liquidity outflows that come from these
stress tests must be fully covered with high-quality liquid assets, other liquid assets and appropriate management actions.
Our Risk division runs a range of stress tests. Our LRA stress test consists of three tests that cover idiosyncratic, market-wide and combined scenarios.
Our other tests consider scenarios such as a global economic slowdown that results in reduced confidence in banks, a slowdown in a major economy or a decline
in access to liquidity. We consider the scenarios on both an acute and protracted basis. We also run severe combined stress tests which look at both a deep and
prolonged UK recession that results in a reduction in wholesale funding availability and an idiosyncratic shock that would lead to retail and commercial outflows.
We also run climate change stresses. These include severe physical risks which result in a reduction in retail deposits, increased use of corporate lending facilities
and an increase in mortgage defaults, and a scenario where there is disorderly transition to net zero, resulting in supply shocks and data transparency concerns.
We also run a technological stress, in which disruptions to the traditional banking system due to digital innovations and adverse social media coverage could lead to
a banking crisis and outflows of retail and corporate deposits.
We also conduct sensitivity analysis and reverse stress testing for instant liquidity shocks by each key liquidity risk. We do this to understand the impacts they would
have on our LRA and our regulatory liquidity metrics. As part of this, we monitor our LCR and our NSFR to ensure we continue to meet the requirements in the event
of a liquidity stress.
Risk mitigation (audited)
The Board aims to make our balance sheet resilient at all times and for it to be perceived as such by stakeholders. This preserves our short and long-term viability.
The Board recognises that, as we are involved in maturity transformation, we cannot hold enough liquidity to cover all possible stress scenarios. The Board requires
us to hold enough liquidity to make sure we will survive three plausible but severe stress scenarios (our LRA stress test, described above). We do this by maintaining
a prudent balance sheet structure and approved liquid resources.
Recovery and Resolution framework
The CFO is the accountable SMF for recovery and resolution and the related work is managed by the CFO division. The work is overseen by the Board Audit
Committee and the Board. We review and refresh our recovery plan each year. It sets out the risks, the indicators we use to monitor those risks, and the actions that
are available to mitigate a capital, liquidity or combined stress event. We are confident that we have sufficient credible and executable options to respond to a wide
range of stresses, be they market-wide or idiosyncratic, in a timely and effective manner. Recovery indicators are both qualitative and quantitative and we have
embedded them into our risk frameworks. We monitor our recovery capacity, headroom to recovery triggers and recovery indicators regularly. If needed, we would
invoke recovery early to mitigate the effects of a stress and restore our financial position and balance sheet strength.
Our resolution capabilities are underpinned by comprehensive governance, testing and assurance arrangements, which seek to ensure that we maintain and
enhance our resolution readiness on an ongoing basis.
Risk monitoring and reporting (audited)
We monitor liquidity risk daily, weekly and monthly. We do this through different committees and levels of management, including ALCO and the BRC.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 88

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

LIQUIDITY RISK REVIEW
Liquidity Coverage Ratio
This table shows our LCR at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024.

| 2025 |  | 2024
RFB DoLSub LCR 2 | £bn |  | £bn
Eligible liquidity pool (liquidity value) 1 | 46.9 |  | 43.7
Net stress outflows | (29.9) |  | (28.9)
Surplus | 17.0 |  | 14.8
Eligible liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net cash flows | 157% |  | 151%

1 The liquidity value is calculated by applying an applicable haircut to the carrying value.
2 The RFB LCR was 162% (2024: 154%).
LCR eligible liquidity pool
This table shows the carrying value of our eligible liquidity pool assets at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024 . It also shows the weighted average carrying
value in the year.

RFB DoLSub | Carrying value | Weighted average carrying value in the year
| 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024
| Level 1 | Level 2 | Total | Level 1 | Level 2 | Total | Total | Total
| £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
Cash and balances at central banks | 28.4 | — | 28.4 | 29.0 | — | 29.0 | 28.8 | 30.8
Government bonds | 14.8 | 0.4 | 15.2 | 10.2 | 0.9 | 11.1 | 15.0 | 13.7
Supranational bonds and multilateral development banks | 0.3 | — | 0.3 | 0.4 | — | 0.4 | 0.4 | 0.2
Covered bonds | 1.1 | 1.6 | 2.7 | 1.4 | 1.7 | 3.1 | 3.0 | 2.9
Asset-backed securities | — | 0.8 | 0.8 | — | 0.8 | 0.8 | 0.8 | 0.7
| 44.6 | 2.8 | 47.4 | 41.0 | 3.4 | 44.4 | 48.0 | 48.3

We hedge term duration in the LCR eligible liquidity pool with swaps. We use swaps to offset mark to market movements due to interest rate changes.
Currency analysis
This table shows the carrying value of our eligible liquidity pool by major currencies at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024. The composition of the pool is
consistent with the currency profile of our net liquidity outflows.

RFB DoLSub | US Dollar | Euro | Sterling | Other | Total
| £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
2025 | 2.9 | 0.6 | 42.5 | 1.4 | 47.4
2024 | 1.2 | 1.2 | 40.8 | 1.2 | 44.4

RFB DoLSub Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)

| 2025 |  | 2024
| % |  | %
RFB DoLSub NSFR | 135 |  | 135

2025 compared to 2024
We remain in a strong liquidity position. We hold sufficient liquid resources and have adequate governance and controls in place to manage the liquidity risks arising
from our business and strategy. At 31 December 2025, the LCR and NSFR significantly exceeded regulatory requirements. LCR of 166% (Dec-24: 156%) increased
largely due to a reduction in the customer funding gap in 2025.
Our Eligible Liquidity Pool includes a portfolio of longer-dated UK Gilts to support ongoing HQLA requirements, with a notional value at 31 December 2025 was
£3.6bn (2024: £3.0bn). We account for them on a 'Hold-To-Collect-Cash-flows' basis.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 89

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

FUNDING RISK MANAGEMENT
Funding strategy
Our funding strategy continues to be based on maintaining a conservatively structured balance sheet and diverse sources of funding to meet the needs of our
business strategy and plans. The CFO Division maintains a funding plan that complies with the LRA and regulatory liquidity and capital requirements.
Most of our funding comes from customer deposits. We source the rest from a mix of secured and unsecured funding in the wholesale markets. Overall, this means
that we do not rely too heavily on wholesale funds. We manage funding requirements by targeting a specific Liquidity Coverage Ratio, we ensure maturities are
prefunded and capital/Minimum Requirements for Eligible Liabilities (MREL) requirements for Santander UK Group Holdings plc and internal MREL for Santander UK
plc are prioritised. We also have controls to limit our asset encumbrance from our secured funding operations.
As part of maintaining a diverse funding base, we raise funding in a number of currencies, including EUR and USD, and convert it into sterling through currency
swaps to fund our commercial assets which are largely sterling denominated.
Our base of stable retail and corporate deposits is a key funding source for us. We leverage our large and diverse customer base to offer products that give us a
long-term sustainable source of funding. We do this by focusing on building long-term relationships. At 31 December 2025, 90% of our total core retail customer
liabilities were covered by the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the FSCS).
Behavioural maturities
The contractual maturity of our balance sheet assets and liabilities highlights the maturity transformation that underpins the role of banks to lend long term, but to
fund themselves mainly with shorter-term liabilities, like customer deposits. We do this by diversifying our funding operations across a wide customer base, both
in numbers and by type of depositor. In practice, the behavioural profiles of many liabilities show more stability and longer maturity than their contractual maturity.
This is especially true of many retail and corporate deposits that, while they may be repayable on demand or at short notice, have shown good stability even in
times of stress. We model behaviour profiles using our experience of customer behaviour. We use this data to determine the funds transfer pricing rates at which
we reward and charge our business units for sources and uses of funds. We apply this rate until a customer changes to a different product or service offered by us or
by one of our competitors.
We continue to maintain the quality of our retail, commercial and wholesale deposits. We aim to deepen our customer relationships across all customer segments.
We do this to lengthen the contractual and behavioural profile of our liability base.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 90

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

FUNDING RISK REVIEW
Our funding strategy continues to be based on maintaining a conservatively structured balance sheet and diverse sources of funding to meet the needs of our
business strategy and plans. The CFO Division maintains a funding plan that complies with our LRA and regulatory liquidity and capital requirements.
Wholesale funding
Reconciliation of wholesale funding to the balance sheet (audited)
This table reconciles our wholesale funding to our balance sheet at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024.

|  | Balance sheet line item
| Funding analysis | Deposits by banks 1 | Deposits by customers 2 | Repurchase agreements - non trading | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | Debt securities in issue | Subordinated liabilities | Other equity instruments 3
2025 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
Deposits by banks | 0.6 | 0.6 | — | — | — | — | — | —
Certificates of deposit and commercial paper | 4.1 | — | — | — | — | 4.1 | — | —
Senior unsecured | 14.3 | — | 1.4 | — | 0.5 | 12.4 | — | —
Covered bonds | 18.9 | — | — | — | — | 18.9 | — | —
Securitisation and structured issuance | 6.7 | — | — | — | — | 6.7 | — | —
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
- RMBS and ABS | 5.6 | — | — | — | — | 5.6 | — | —
TFSME | 3.9 | 3.9 | — | — | — | — | — | —
Subordinated liabilities and equity | 3.8 | — | — | — | — | — | 1.9 | 1.9
Total wholesale funding | 52.3 | 4.5 | 1.4 | — | 0.5 | 42.1 | 1.9 | 1.9
Repos | 9.0 | — | — | 9.0 | — | — | — | —
Foreign exchange and hedge accounting | (1.0) | — | — | — | — | (1.0) | — | —
Other | 3.3 | 2.1 | — | — | 0.8 | 0.3 | 0.1 | —
Balance sheet total | 63.6 | 6.6 | 1.4 | 9.0 | 1.3 | 41.4 | 2.0 | 1.9
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by banks | 1.4 | 1.4 | — | — | — | — | — | —
Certificates of deposit and commercial paper | 4.5 | — | — | — | — | 4.5 | — | —
Senior unsecured | 12.2 | — | 1.8 | — | 0.4 | 10.0 | — | —
Covered bonds | 17.4 | — | — | — | — | 17.4 | — | —
Securitisation and structured issuance | 5.1 | — | — | — | — | 5.1 | — | —
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
- RMBS and ABS | 3.9 | — | — | — | — | 3.9 | — | —
TFSME | 11.0 | 11.0 | — | — | — | — | — | —
Subordinated liabilities and equity | 4.1 | — | — | — | — | — | 2.2 | 1.9
Total wholesale funding | 55.7 | 12.4 | 1.8 | — | 0.4 | 37.0 | 2.2 | 1.9
Repos | 8.6 | — | — | 8.6 | — | — | — | —
Foreign exchange and hedge accounting | (0.4) | — | — | — | — | (0.6) | 0.2 | —
Other | 1.6 | 1.6 | — | — | 0.7 | (0.7) | — | —
Balance sheet total | 65.5 | 14.0 | 1.8 | 8.6 | 1.1 | 35.7 | 2.4 | 1.9

1 Consists of Perpetual Capital Securities. See Note 32 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
2 This is included in our balance sheet total of £187,300m (2024:£180,967m).
3 Other consists of items in the course of transmission and other deposits. See Note 21 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 91

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Maturity profile of wholesale funding (audited)
This table shows our main sources of wholesale funding. It does not include securities finance agreements. The table is based on exchange rates at issue and
scheduled repayments and call dates. It does not reflect the final contractual maturity of the funding.
For details of the maturities of financial liabilities and off-balance sheet commitments, see Note 38 to the Consolidated Financial Statements .

| ≤ 1 month | >1 and ≤ 3 months | >3 and ≤ 6 months | >6 and ≤ 9 months | >9 and ≤ 12 months | Sub-total ≤ 1 year | >1 and ≤ 2 years | >2 and ≤ 5 years | >5 years | Total
2025 | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn
Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc 1 |  |  |  |  |  |
Senior unsecured | 0.5 | — | 0.7 | — | 0.8 | 2.0 | 2.0 | 5.7 | 1.3 | 11.0
Subordinated liabilities and equity (incl. AT1) | — | 0.2 | — | — | — | 0.2 | 0.9 | 2.0 | — | 3.1
| 0.5 | 0.2 | 0.7 | — | 0.8 | 2.2 | 2.9 | 7.7 | 1.3 | 14.1
Other Santander UK plc |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by banks | — | — | — | 0.4 | 0.2 | 0.6 | — | — | — | 0.6
Certificates of deposit and commercial paper | 0.5 | 3.1 | 0.5 | — | — | 4.1 | — | — | — | 4.1
Senior unsecured | — | — | — | — | 0.1 | 0.1 | 0.7 | 2.3 | 0.2 | 3.3
Covered bonds | — | 2.8 | 0.8 | 0.2 | 0.1 | 3.9 | 6.2 | 7.2 | 1.6 | 18.9
Securitisation & structured issuance 2 | — | 0.5 | 0.7 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 1.6 | 1.5 | 3.0 | — | 6.1
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– RMBS and ABS | — |  | 0.1 | 0.2 | 0.2 | 0.5 | 1.5 | 3.0 | — | 5.0
TFSME | — | — | — | — | — | — | 2.5 | — | 1.4 | 3.9
Subordinated liabilities | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 0.2 | 0.5 | 0.7
| 0.5 | 6.4 | 2.0 | 0.8 | 0.6 | 10.3 | 10.9 | 12.7 | 3.7 | 37.6
Other group entities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Securitisation & structured issuance 3 | — | — | 0.6 | — | — | 0.6 | — | — | — | 0.6
Total at 31 December 2025 | 1.0 | 6.6 | 3.3 | 0.8 | 1.4 | 13.1 | 13.8 | 20.4 | 5.0 | 52.3
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Secured | — | 3.3 | 2.0 | 0.4 | 0.3 | 6.0 | 10.2 | 10.3 | 3.0 | 29.5
– Unsecured | 1.0 | 3.3 | 1.3 | 0.4 | 1.1 | 7.1 | 3.6 | 10.1 | 2.0 | 22.8
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Total at 31 December 2024 | 3.3 | 4.8 | 1.8 | 1.2 | 8.5 | 19.6 | 9.0 | 22.0 | 5.1 | 55.7
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Secured | 0.9 | 0.5 | 1.3 | 0.2 | 7.2 | 10.1 | 6.8 | 14.1 | 2.5 | 33.5
– Unsecured | 2.4 | 4.3 | 0.5 | 1.0 | 1.3 | 9.5 | 2.2 | 7.9 | 2.6 | 22.2

1 99% of senior unsecured debt issued from Santander UK Group Holdings plc has been downstreamed to Santander UK plc as ‘secondary non-preferential debt’ in line with the guidelines from the Bank of England
for Internal MREL.
2 Includes funding from mortgage-backed securitisation vehicles where Santander UK plc is the asset originator.
3 Includes funding from asset-backed securitisation vehicles where entities other than Santander UK plc are the asset originator.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 92

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Currency composition of wholesale funds (audited)
This table shows our wholesale funding by major currency at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024.

| 2025 |  | 2024
| Sterling | US Dollar | Euro | Other |  | Sterling | US Dollar | Euro | Other
| % | % | % | % |  | % | % | % | %
Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc
Senior unsecured | 19 | 68 | 12 | 1 |  | 25 | 62 | 12 | 1
Subordinated liabilities and equity (incl. AT1) | 94 | 6 | — | — |  | 89 | 11 | — | —
| 36 | 54 | 9 | 1 |  | 42 | 48 | 9 | 1
Other Santander UK plc |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by banks | 1 | 97 | 1 | 1 |  | 1 | 97 | 2 | —
Certificates of deposit and commercial paper | 36 | 64 | — | — |  | 24 | 67 | 8 | 1
Senior unsecured | 49 | — | 51 | — |  | 80 | — | 20 | —
Covered bonds | 49 | 8 | 39 | 4 |  | 48 | 9 | 40 | 3
Securitisation & structured issuance | 100 | — | — | — |  | 100 | — | — | —
TFSME | 100 | — | — | — |  | 100 | — | — | —
Subordinated liabilities | 77 | 23 | — | — |  | 76 | 24 | — | —
| 61 | 13 | 24 | 2 |  | 65 | 15 | 18 | 2
Other group entities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Securitisation & structured issuance | 100 | — | — | — |  | 100 | — | — | —
Total | 55 | 24 | 20 | 1 |  | 60 | 23 | 16 | 1

Term issuance (audited)
In 2025, our external term issuance (sterling equivalent) was:

| Sterling | US Dollar | Euro | Other | Total 2025 |  | Total 2024
| £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn | £bn |  | £bn
Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Senior unsecured | — | 3.0 | — | — | 3.0 |  | 0.8
Subordinated debt and equity (inc. AT1) | 0.5 | — | — | — | 0.5 |  | 0.4
| 0.5 | 3.0 | — | — | 3.5 |  | 1.2
Other Santander UK plc |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Securitisations and other secured funding | 1.7 | — | — | — | 1.7 |  | 1.2
Of which: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– RMBS and ABS | 1.7 | — | — | — | 1.7 |  | 1.2
Covered bonds | 1.0 | — | 1.7 | — | 2.7 |  | 5.9
Senior unsecured 1 | 0.3 | — | 1.7 | — | 2.0 |  | 0.1
| 3.0 | — | 3.4 | — | 6.4 |  | 7.2
Other group entities |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Securitisations | 0.6 | — | — | — | 0.6 |  | —
Total gross issuances | 4.1 | 3.0 | 3.4 | — | 10.5 |  | 8.4

1 Credit linked notes are not included in the Term issuance table. As a result, 2024 has been restated to exclude £0.4bn of CLN issuance.
2025 compared to 2024
Together with our immediate parent, Santander UK Group Holdings plc, o ur overall funding strategy remains to develop and sustain a diversified funding base. We
also need to fulfil regulatory requirements as well as support our credit ratings. We have stable and diversified wholesale funding programmes.
We issued £10.5bn Sterling equivalent term issuance in 2025, including Covered Bond, RMBS, AT1 and Senior Unsecured issuances. We repaid £7.1bn in TFSME in
2025, with an outstanding balance of £3.9bn at 31 December 2025, of which £2.5bn is due for repayment in 2027 and £1.4bn is due in 2031. We expect to issue
£8.0 to 12.0 bn of term issuance in 2026, including the £1.25bn equivalent issued in January 2026.
At 31 December 2025, 75% (2024 : 65%) of wholesale funding had a maturity of greater than one year, with an overall residual duration of 32 months (2024: 37
months).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 93

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Encumbrance
We encumber an asset if we pledge or transfer it as collateral against a liability. This means it is no longer available to secure funding, meet our collateral needs
or be sold to reduce funding needs. Being able to pledge or transfer assets as collateral is a key part of a bank’s operations. The main ways we encumber assets are
that we: enter into securitisation, covered bonds, and repurchase agreements to access medium and long-term funding; enter into short-term funding transactions
(including repurchase agreements and stock borrowing) as part of our liquidity management; pledge collateral as part of participating in payment and settlement
systems; access Central Bank facilities; and post collateral as part of derivatives activity. We control levels of encumbrance by setting a minimum level of
unencumbered assets after we factor in our funding plans, whether we can use our assets for our future collateral needs, the impact of a stress and our current
encumbrance level.
Assets classified as readily available for encumbrance include cash and securities in our eligible liquidity pool. All other loans and advances are classified as not
readily available for encumbrance, however, they may still be suitable for use in secured funding structures.
Encumbrance of customer loans and advances
We issued securitised products to a diverse investor base through our prime mortgage-backed and other asset-backed funding programmes. We raised funding
with mortgage-backed notes, both issued to third parties and retained – the latter being central bank eligible collateral for funding purposes in other Bank of
England facilities. We also have a covered bond programme, under which we issue securities to investors secured by a pool of residential mortgages. For more on
these programmes, see Notes 14 and 25 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
On-balance sheet encumbered assets (audited)

| Encumbered with counterparties other than central banks | Assets positioned at central banks 3
| Covered bonds | Securitisations | Other | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Cash and balances at central banks 1,2 | — | — | 1,440 | 1,440 | —
Loans and advances to customers | 27,428 | 9,038 | 100 | 36,566 | 41,857
Loans and advances to banks | — | — | 238 | 238 | —
Other financial assets at amortised cost | — | — | 1,282 | 1,282 | —
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | — | — | 2,349 | 2,349 | 551
Total assets | 27,428 | 9,038 | 5,409 | 41,875 | 42,408

2024 |  |  |  |  |
Cash and balances at central banks 1,2 | — | — | 1,580 | 1,580 | —
Loans and advances to customers | 25,695 | 7,026 | 68 | 32,789 | 49,888
Loans and advances to banks | — | — | 139 | 139 | —
Other financial assets at amortised cost | — | — | 1,529 | 1,529 | —
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | — | — | 3,920 | 3,920 | 584
Total assets | 25,695 | 7,026 | 7,236 | 39,957 | 50,472

1 Encumbered cash and balances at central banks include minimum cash balances we have to hold at central banks for regulatory purposes.
2 Readily realisable cash and balances at central banks are amounts held at central banks as part of our liquidity management activities.
3 Comprises pre-positioned assets and encumbered assets.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 94

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Capital risk

| Overview Capital risk is the risk that we do not have an adequate amount or quality of capital to meet our internal business objectives, regulatory requirements and market expectations. In this section, we set out how we are regulated. We explain how we manage capital on a standalone basis as a subsidiary in the Banco Santander group. We then analyse our capital resources and key capital ratios including our RWAs. |  |  | Key metrics CET1 capital ratio of 15.8% (2024: 14.9%) Total qualifying regulatory capital of £14.3bn (2024: £13.7 bn)

Regulatory supervision
For capital purposes, we are subject to prudential supervision by the PRA, as a UK banking group, and by the European Central Bank (ECB) as part of the
Banco Santander group. The ECB supervises Banco Santander as part of the Single Supervisory Mechanism (SSM). Although we are part of the Banco Santander
group, we do not have a guarantee from Banco Santander SA and we operate as a standalone subsidiary. As we are part of the UK sub-group regulated by the PRA,
we have to meet the PRA capital requirements on a standalone basis. We also have to show the PRA that we can withstand capital stresses without the support of
our ultimate parent, Banco Santander SA. Reinforcing our corporate governance framework, the PRA exercises oversight through its rules and regulations on the
Board and senior management appointments.
Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the holding company of Santander UK plc and is the head of the Santander UK group for regulatory capital and leverage
purposes. Santander UK plc is the head of the ring-fenced bank sub-group and is subject to regulatory capital and leverage rules in relation to that sub-group.
Our basis of consolidation for our capital disclosures is substantially the same as for our Consolidated Financial Statements.
CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT
Risk appetite
The Board is responsible for capital management strategy and policy and ensuring that we monitor and control our capital within regulatory and internal limits.
We manage our funding and maintain capital adequacy on a standalone basis. We operate within the capital risk framework and appetite approved by our Board.
This reflects the environment we operate in, our strategy for each material risk and the potential impact of adverse scenarios or stresses on our capital.
Management of capital requirements (audited)
Our capital risk appetite aims to maintain capital levels appropriate to the level of stress applied, and the expected regulatory response. In:
– An adverse economic stress, which we expect once in 20 years, we should remain profitable and exceed all regulatory capital minimums at all times.
– A very severe economic stress, which we expect once in 100 years, designed to test any specific weaknesses of our business model, we should meet all
regulatory capital minimums at all times. This is subject to using regulatory buffers designed to absorb losses in such a stress.
Risk measurement
We apply Banco Santander’s approach to capital measurement and risk management for CRD IV. Santander UK plc is classified as a large subsidiary of Banco
Santander SA. For more on the CRD IV risk measurement of our exposures, see Banco Santander’s Pillar 3 report. For more on our capital, see our Additional Capital
and Risk Management Disclosures on our website: aboutsantander.co.uk.
Management of capital resources (audited)
We use a mix of regulatory and EC ratios and limits, internal buffers and restrictions to manage our capital resources. We also take account of the costs of differing
capital instruments and capital management techniques. We also use these to shape the best structure for our capital needs. We decide how to allocate our capital
resources as part of our strategic planning process. We base this in part on the relative returns on capital using both EC and regulatory capital measures. We plan
for severe stresses and we set out what action we would take if an extremely severe stress threatened our viability and solvency. This could include not paying
dividends, selling assets, reducing our business and issuing more capital.
Key metrics
The main metrics we use to measure capital risk are CET1 capital ratio, total capital ratio and UK leverage ratio. We continue to be in excess of overall capital
requirements, minimum leverage requirements and minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities (Internal MREL).
Stress testing
Each year we create a capital plan, as part of our ICAAP. We share our ICAAP with the PRA. The PRA then tells us how much capital (Pillar 2), and of what quality,
it thinks we should hold on top of our Pillar 1 requirements and buffer levels. We also develop a series of economic scenarios to stress test our capital needs and
confirm that we have enough regulatory capital to meet our projected and stressed capital needs and to meet our obligations as they fall due.
Our CISA was developed to understand the impact of climate change on our business. We invested in a strategic solution which delivers the capability to run long-
term horizon multi-scenario assessments which reflect a range of climate outcomes. These outcomes cover shorter and longer-term horizons and reflect physical
and transition risks. The CISA outputs are used in our ICAAP exercises for climate risk and help us prioritise our actions for the next five years.
We augment our regulatory minimum capital with internal buffers. We hold buffers to ensure we have enough time to act against unexpected changes.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 95

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Risk mitigation
We designed our capital risk framework, policies and procedures to ensure that we operate within our Risk Appetite. We manage capital transferability between our
subsidiaries in line with our business strategy, risk and capital management policies, and UK laws and regulations. There are no legal restrictions on us moving
capital resources promptly, or repaying liabilities, between the Company and its subsidiaries except for loans and distributions between Santander UK entities in the
ring-fenced bank sub-group and Santander UK entities that are not members of the ring-fenced bank sub-group, where the PRA is required to assess the impact
of proposed distribution prior to payment. For details on our Recovery framework in the event of a capital stress, see 'risk mitigation' in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section.
Capital support arrangements
At 31 December 2025, Santander UK plc, Cater Allen Limited, Santander ISA Managers Limited and certain other non-regulated subsidiaries of Santander UK plc
were party to a capital support deed dated 3 December 2024 which was effective from 3 December 2024 (the RFB Sub-Group Capital Support Deed). These parties
were permitted by the PRA to form a core UK group as defined in the PRA Rulebook, a permission which expires on 3 December 2027. Exposures of each of the
regulated entities to other members of the core UK group are exempt from large exposure limits that would otherwise apply and these exposures are risk-weighted
at 0%. Where applicable this permission also provides for intra-group exposures to be excluded from the leverage exposure measure. The purpose of the RFB Sub-
Group Capital Support Deed is to facilitate the prompt transfer of available capital resources from, or repayment of liabilities by, the non-regulated entities to any of
the regulated entities in the event that one of the regulated entities breached or was at risk of breaching its capital resources or risk concentrations requirements.
Risk monitoring and reporting
We monitor and report regularly against our capital plan. We do this to identify any change in our business performance that might affect our capital. Each quarter,
we also review the economic assumptions we use to create and stress test our capital plan. We do this to identify any potential reduction in our capital headroom.
CAPITAL RISK REVIEW
Meeting evolving capital requirements
We target a CET1 management buffer of sufficient size to absorb volatility in CET1 deductions, capital supply and capital demand whilst remaining above the
current and expected future regulatory CET1 requirement. Distribution restrictions would be expected to be applied if we were unable to meet both our minimum
requirement, which consists of the Pillar 1 minimum plus Pillar 2A, the CRD IV buffers consisting of the Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB), the Countercyclical Capital
Buffer (CCyB), and the Other Systemically Important Institutions Buffer (O-SII).
Impact of IFRS 9 on regulatory capital
Our ECL methodology takes account of forward-looking data and covers a range of possible economic outcomes, and so provision movements may result in
increased pro-cyclicality of risk-based capital and leverage ratios. However, the impact is currently mitigated by our surplus of IRB model regulatory expected losses
over provisions for exposures using the IRB approach. For such exposures (which include residential mortgages) the adverse impact on CET1 capital of provision
increases from reserve movements is offset by the related reduction of the negative CET1 capital adjustment for regulatory expected loss amounts.
We reflect projections of ECL provisions in our capital position forecasting under base case and stress scenarios for ICAAP and capital management purposes. We
also consider the dynamics of ECL in how we assess and manage capital risk. A period of economic instability, such as that seen in early 2020 due to the impacts of
the Covid-19 pandemic, could significantly impact our results and our financial assets. It could also impact the amount of capital we have to hold. We consider the
volatility of ECL in our capital planning strategy.
Key capital ratios

| 2025 |  | 2024
| % |  | %
CET1 capital ratio | 15.8 |  | 14.9
AT1 | 2.8 |  | 2.8
Tier 2 | 2.7 |  | 3.3
Total capital ratio | 21.3 |  | 21.0
Total subordination available to Santander UK plc senior unsecured bondholders as a % of RWAs | 21.3 |  | 21.0
Return on assets - profit after tax divided by average total assets | 0.40 |  | 0.36

Regulatory capital resources (audited)
This table shows our qualifying regulatory capital:

| 2025 |  | 2024
| £m |  | £m
CET1 capital | 10,601 |  | 9,791
AT1 capital | 1,860 |  | 1,860
Tier 1 capital | 12,461 |  | 11,651
Tier 2 capital | 1,854 |  | 2,093
Total capital 1 | 14,315 |  | 13,744

1 Capital resources include a transitional IFRS 9 benefit at 31 December 2025 of £nil (2024: £12.2m).
Risk-weighted assets
Total RWAs at 31 December 2025 were £67.2bn (2024: £65.5bn) which are consistent with our regulatory filings.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 96

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Market risk

| Overview Market risk comprises non-traded market risk and traded market risk. Non-traded market risk is the risk of loss of income, economic or market value due to changes to interest rates in the non-trading book or to changes in other market risk factors (e.g. credit spread and inflation risk), where such changes would affect our net worth through a change to revenues, assets, liabilities, and off-balance sheet exposures in the non-trading book. Traded market risk is the risk of changes in market factors that affect the value of the positions in the trading book. We have no significant traded market risk exposure. In this section, we set out which of our assets and liabilities are exposed to non-traded and traded market risk. Then we explain how we manage these risks, including our structural hedge, and discuss our key market risk metrics. |  |  | Key metrics Net Interest Income (NII) sensitivity to +100bps was £281m and to ‑100bps was £(195)m (2024: £167m and £(201)m). Economic Value of Equity (EVE) sensitivity to +100bps was £(449)m and to ‑100bps was £540m (2024: £(496)m and £425m). |

Balance sheet allocation by market risk classification(audited)
We classify all assets and liabilities exposed to market risk as non-traded market risk, except for specific portfolios that must be classified as trading books for
regulatory purposes (such as portfolios involving the sale of derivatives or derivative-based products to clients). Some assets are also measured at fair value for
accounting reasons, such as those held in the eligible liquidity pool. For accounting purposes, we classify all derivatives as held for trading unless they are
designated as being in a hedging relationship. For more, see Note 11 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
NON-TRADED MARKET RISK
OUR KEY NON-TRADED MARKET RISKS (audited)
Non-traded market risk mainly arises from providing banking products and services to our customers, as well as our structural balance sheet exposures. The risk
arises in all our business segments. In Retail & Business Banking, Consumer Finance and Corporate & Commercial Banking, it is a by-product of us writing customer
business and we transfer most of these risks to Corporate Centre for central management. The only types of non-traded market risks we retain in these business
areas relate to short-term mismatches caused by forecasting variances such as prepayment risk and launch risk. These occur when customers repay their loans
earlier than expected, or when the actual take-up of new products differs from projections. Corporate Centre also manages our structural balance sheet exposures,
including interest rate risk, foreign exchange and Income Statement volatility risk. Interest rate risk includes margin compression risk, which is a Top risk for
Santander UK particularly in a falling rate environment where we are unable to reprice our deposits as quickly as mortgage assets.
Our non-traded market risk categories are:

Category | Description
Interest rate risk | Interest rate risk mainly consists of yield curve risk, which arises from timing mismatches in the repricing of fixed and variable rate assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet instruments. It also includes margin compression risk, which arises when we are unable to reprice our deposits in line with our assets.
Spread risk | Spread risk arises when the value of assets or liabilities which are accounted for at fair value (either through Other Comprehensive Income or through profit and loss) is affected by changes in the credit spreads. These spreads represent the difference between the discount rate used to value the asset or liability, and the corresponding underlying interest rate curve.
Foreign exchange risk | Our banking business is mainly conducted in sterling, so we have limited exposure to foreign exchange risk. Where exposure does arise from activities such as raising money in foreign currencies and holding high quality foreign currency bonds in the eligible liquidity pool, we buy or sell relevant currencies and use derivatives to manage the exposure to within low limits. For more on this, see ‘Wholesale Funding’ in the ‘Liquidity Risk’ section.
Income statement volatility risk | Most of the assets and liabilities in our banking book are measured at amortised cost. However, we sometimes use derivatives to manage their risk profiles. As all derivatives are accounted for at fair value, differences in their accounting treatment can create volatility in the Income Statement, even when the derivative serves as an economic hedge of the underlying asset or liability.

NON-TRADED MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT
Risk appetite
Our Structural and Market Risk framework sets out our high-level arrangements and standards for managing, controlling and overseeing non-traded market risk
(also known as structural risk), and is part of our overall Risk Framework. Our Risk Appetite defines the controls, risk limits and key risk metrics used to control non-
traded market risk. We express our risk appetite by the income and value sensitivity limits we set at both Santander UK and Banco Santander group levels.
Risk measurement
We mainly measure our exposures through NII and EVE sensitivity metrics, supported by VaR risk measures and stress testing. We regularly review our risk metrics,
models and underlying assumptions to ensure they continue to reflect the risks inherent in the current rate environment and meet regulatory expectations.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 97

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

NII and EVE sensitivities (audited)
The calculations for NII and EVE sensitivities to interest rate movements involve many assumptions, including expected customer behaviour (such as early
repayment of loans) and the projected evolution and repricing of our balance sheet. These assumptions are a key part of our overall control framework, so we
update and review them regularly. Our NII and EVE sensitivities include the interest rate risk from all our banking book positions. Our banking book positions
generate almost all our reported net interest income.

Net Interest Income (NII) sensitivity
– NII sensitivity is an income-based measure used to forecast the changes to interest income and interest expense under different rate scenarios. It shows the combined impact on net interest income over a given period – typically 12 or 36 months.
– We calculate NII sensitivity as the change in NII for a defined set of instantaneous parallel and non-parallel shifts in the yield curve.

EVE sensitivity
– EVE sensitivity measures the change in the net present value of all the interest rate sensitive items in the banking book balance sheet for a defined set of instantaneous parallel and non-parallel yield curve shifts.

The limitations of sensitivities
We use sensitivity metrics to measure the impact of standard, instantaneous, parallel shifts in relevant yield curves. The advantage of using standard parallel shifts
is that they provide a consistent and comparable view of our market risk exposure. We also run non-parallel stress tests, to calculate the impact of other scenarios
over different time horizons.
Value at Risk (VaR) (audited)

VaR
– VaR estimates possible losses from market changes under normal (non-stressed) conditions.
– We use a historical simulation approach based on two years of historical daily price movements, and reported at a 99% confidence level.

The limitations of VaR
VaR is a standard risk measure, but it has limitations including:
– It assumes that historical data provides a reliable indicator of future outcomes.
– It uses end of day positions and may miss potentially higher risks arising during the day.
– It does not capture the losses on the 1% of days beyond the 99% confidence interval).
– It considers one day price movements which is reasonable for our business but does not cover positions that we could not sell or hedge quickly, or products
whose prices cannot be observed.
Back-testing – comparing VaR estimates with actual profit and loss
We regularly compare VaR estimates with actual profit and loss results to confirm the accuracy of our models. If discrepancies arise, we investigate and adjust the
models as necessary.
Stress testing
Stress testing is an essential part of our risk management approach. It helps us to measure the potential impact of more extreme but plausible events and market
movements. Limits are set to reflect our risk appetite and are expressed relative to the loss given a stress event, thereby restricting how much risk we take.
Stress testing scenarios
Simple stress tests such as parallel yield curve shifts provide a clear and consistent view of risk and serve as a benchmark for setting limits. More complex stresses
such as multi-factor and multi-time period scenarios help us to assess our exposure to specific potential events and can test outcomes that we might not capture
through parallel stresses or VaR-type measures. We use stress tests to estimate losses in extreme market events beyond the confidence level used in VaR models.
We can adapt our stress tests to reflect concerns such as climate change risk, other macroeconomic and geopolitical events or changing market conditions. We run
individual business area stresses and Santander UK-wide scenarios.
Other ways of measuring risk
As well as using sensitivities and stress tests, we can measure non-traded market risk using net notional positions to provide a simple view of our exposure.
However we would generally need to combine with other risk measures to cover all aspects of a risk profile, such as projected changes over time. Other metrics we
can use include Earnings at Risk (EaR) which is similar to VaR but focuses on changes in income rather than value.
Risk mitigation (audited)
Our largest residual interest rate risk exposure arises from structural deposit balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including
current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity). We manage the risk, including margin compression risk, through Santander UK plc’s
structural hedge which is designed to stabilise the NII on these balances. The structural hedge is achieved by investing these balances in a rolling portfolio of fixed
rate assets or receive fixed pay variable interest rate swaps. By locking in fixed returns for defined periods, the structural hedge secures a portion of future NII and
helps smooth the impact of interest rate changes on overall performance. The notional and duration of the structural hedge is reviewed regularly by ALCO.
We hedge the interest rate risk of the securities we hold for liquidity and investment purposes using interest rate swaps. We retain spread exposures, and these are
the key drivers of the VaR and stress tests used to assess the risk of the portfolio. We mitigate Income Statement volatility mainly through hedge accounting and
measure hedge accounting ineffectiveness using VaR, monitored against a trigger and reported monthly. For our accounting policies for derivatives and hedge
accounting, see Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
We hedge our foreign currency funding positions back to sterling, so residual foreign exchange positions tend to be minimal. These exposures could be, for
example, to ‘spot’ foreign exchange rates or to cross currency basis. We monitor foreign exchange risk against absolute net exposures and VaR-based limits
and triggers.
For more on this, see ‘Funding strategy‘ and ‘Term issuance’ in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section.
Risk monitoring and reporting (audited)
We monitor our non-traded market risks using NII and EVE sensitivities, VaR and stress tests. We report them against limits and triggers to senior management
daily and to ALCO and ERCC each month. The VaR we report captures all key sources of volatility (including interest rate and spread risks) to fully reflect
potential volatility.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 98

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

NON-TRADED MARKET RISK REVIEW
Interest rate risk
Yield curve risk
The table below shows how our net interest income would be affected by a 100bps parallel shift (both up and down) applied instantaneously to the yield curve at
31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024. Sensitivity to parallel shifts represents the amount of risk in a way that we think is both simple and scalable.

| 2025 |  | 2024
| +100bps | -100bps |  | +100bps | -100bps
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
NII sensitivity (audited) 1 | 281 | (195) |  | 167 | (201)
EVE sensitivity | (449) | 540 |  | (496) | 425

1 Based on modelling assumptions of repricing behaviour.
Interest rate repricing gap
The table below shows the interest rate repricing gap of our balance sheet by repricing buckets.

| 3 months | 1 year | 3 years | 5 years | >5years | Not sensitive | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Assets | 97,363 | 50,635 | 92,376 | 24,699 | 10,692 | 14,890 | 290,655
Liabilities | 109,861 | 50,799 | 57,023 | 42,180 | 3,282 | 25,576 | 288,721
Off-balance sheet | 3,402 | 9,750 | (24,075) | 12,780 | (3,791) | — | (1,934)
Net gap | (9,096) | 9,586 | 11,278 | (4,701) | 3,619 | (10,686) | —

2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Assets | 93,430 | 51,502 | 93,136 | 21,899 | 8,357 | 15,118 | 283,442
Liabilities | 110,187 | 51,152 | 52,767 | 43,930 | 2,081 | 24,157 | 284,274
Off-balance sheet | 4,673 | 2,414 | (20,185) | 15,835 | (1,905) | — | 832
Net gap | (12,084) | 2,764 | 20,184 | (6,196) | 4,371 | (9,039) | —

Spread risk
The table below shows the risk metrics covering the portfolios of securities we hold for liquidity and investment purposes.

| 2025 |  | 2024
| £m |  | £m
VaR 1 | 5 |  | 5
Stressed Loss 2 | 76 |  | 110

1 1 Day, 95%, Confidence interval. 520 Day Series.
2 Measured as the worst loss from internal stress scenario suite.
We regularly review our risk models and metrics including the scenarios and underlying modelling assumptions we use, to ensure they continue to reflect the risks
in the current economic environment, and incorporate regulatory expectations.
2025 compared to 2024
In 2025, we continued to actively manage our structural hedge in order to manage interest rate risk. Our structural hedge position decreased to £103bn at 31
December 2025 (31 December 2024: £110bn), with an average duration of 2.3 years (31 December 2024: 2.4 years). Our structural hedge position keeps us well
positioned for further Bank Rate reductions.
NII sensitivity is adversely exposed to down-shock scenarios, driven by margin compression of deposits, partially offset by the structural position. A marginal
reduction in the structural position protection since 2024 improved the up-shock scenario and worsened the down-shock scenario. However the down shock NII
sensitivity has benefited over the year from future repricing expectations.
EVE sensitivity reflects the potential impact on economic value due to the structural mismatch of assets and non-rate sensitive liabilities (excluding equity) over the
longer term. EVE excludes equity as a source of non-rate sensitive funding; as equity is invested into the structural position, the metric typically reflects an adverse
exposure to rising rate scenarios. The exposure reduced in 2025 due to the marginal reduction in structural position protection.
TRADED MARKET RISK
We have no significant traded market risk exposure. The small risk we have is from providing permitted financial services to permitted customers. Traded market
risk can reduce our net income from movements in interest rates, credit spreads, and foreign exchange rates.
We have two trading desks. The Link Desk transacts derivatives with our corporate clients. The Structured Products Group (SPG) sells investments mainly to retail
investors, through our UK branches and other channels. We hedge risks from customer trades, mostly with Banco Santander SA. We calculate market risk capital
using standard rules.
The Internal VaR for exposure to traded market risk at 31 December 2025 was less than £1m (2024: less than £1m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 99

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Pension risk

| Overview Pension risk is the risk caused by our statutory, contractual or other liabilities with respect to a pension scheme (whether set up for our employees or those of a related company or otherwise). It also refers to the risk that we will need to make payments or other contributions with respect to a pension scheme due to a moral obligation or for some other reason. In this section, we explain how we manage pension risk, including our investment and hedging strategies. We also discuss our key metrics and developments in the year. |  |  | Key metrics Funding Deficit at Risk was £760m (2024: £830m) Funded defined benefit pension scheme accounting surplus was £524m (2024: £439m) |

OUR KEY PENSION RISKS
Pension risk is one of our key financial risks. Santander UK plc is the sponsor of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme (the Scheme), a defined benefit scheme.
Our risk is that, over the long-term, the Scheme’s assets are not enough to meet its liabilities as they fall due. If this happens, we could have to (or choose to) make
extra contributions. We might also need to hold more capital to reflect this risk.
The Scheme, risk metrics and regulatory capital can be sensitive to changes in the assumptions of the risk categories shown below.

Categories | Description
Interest rate risk | The risk that a decrease in (long-term) interest rates causes an increase in the value of the Scheme’s liabilities that are not matched by an increase in the value of its assets.
Inflation risk | Annual pension increases are directly linked to RPI or CPI. The risk is that an increase in inflation causes an increase in the value of the Scheme’s liabilities that are not matched by an increase in the value of its assets.
Longevity risk | The Scheme’s liabilities are in respect of current and past employees and are expected to stretch beyond 2080 due to the long-term nature of the obligation. Therefore, the Scheme’s liabilities are also impacted by changes to the life expectancy of Scheme members over time.
Investment risk | The risk that the return on the Scheme’s assets is insufficient to meet the liabilities.

For more on our defined benefit schemes, including sensitivity analysis of our key actuarial assumptions, see Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Defined contribution schemes
We also have defined contribution schemes for some of our employees. These schemes carry far less market risk for us, although we are still exposed to
operational and reputational risks. For more on our defined contribution schemes, see Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
The impact of our defined benefit schemes on capital
We take account of the impact of pension risk on our capital as part of our planning and stress testing process, considering measures such as the impact on CET1
and Pillar 2A, and also where relevant the impact on the related measures such as the leverage ratio.
Our defined benefit pension schemes affect capital in two ways:
– We treat an IAS 19 deficit as a liability on our balance sheet. We recognise deficit movements in Other Comprehensive Income, so this reduces shareholders’
equity and CET1 capital. We treat an IAS 19 surplus as an asset. This increases shareholders’ equity, but it is deducted in determining CET1 capital. An IAS 19
surplus/deficit is partially offset by a deferred tax liability/asset. These may be recognised for calculating CET1 capital depending on our overall tax position.
– The PRA takes pension risk into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment in the annual ICAAP exercise. Pillar 2A is part of our overall regulatory requirement for
CET1 capital, Tier 1 capital and total capital. For more on our regulatory requirements, see the ‘Capital risk’ section.
PENSION RISK MANAGEMENT
For details of how the Scheme is governed and operates, see Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Risk appetite
Our Risk Appetite is a key consideration in all decisions and risk management activities related to the Scheme. Our pension risk appetite is reviewed by our Pension
Forum at least once a year. It is then sent to the Board for approval. We measure pension risk on both a technical provisions (funding) basis and an accounting
(IAS 19) basis. We manage pension risk on both the accounting and the funding basis. Both bases are inputs into our capital calculations.
Risk measurement
Our key risk metrics include:

Key risk metrics | Description
Funding Deficit at Risk | We use a VaR and a forward-looking stress testing framework to model the Scheme’s assets and liabilities to show the potential deterioration in the funding position.

In addition to investing in liquid debt markets, the Scheme invests in certain assets whose values are not based on market observable data, such as investments
in private equity funds and property. For more on this, see Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The risks of these assets are included in the metrics
described above.
We perform stress tests for regulators, including for ICAAPs and PRA stress tests. For more on our stress testing, see the 'Risk governance' section.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 100

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Climate change scenario testing gives us the capacity to simulate risk exposures over an extended time horizon. The Trustee has a target to achieve net zero by
2050, which it factors into its decision making.
Risk mitigation
The key tools we use to maintain the above key risk metrics within appetite are:

Key tools | Description
Investment strategies | – The Trustee developed the following investment objectives to reflect their main duty to act in the best interests of Scheme beneficiaries: – To maintain a diversified portfolio of assets of appropriate quality, security, liquidity and profitability to generate income and capital growth to meet, with new contributions from members and employers, the cost of current and future benefits that the Scheme provides – To limit the risk that the assets fail to meet the liabilities – To invest in a manner appropriate to the nature and duration of the expected future retirement benefit payments under the Scheme – To minimise the Scheme's long-term costs by maximising asset returns net of fees and expenses whilst reflecting the objectives above. – The investment strategy is regularly reviewed, and its impact on Funding Deficit at Risk is considered.
Hedging strategies | –The Trustee employs asset-liability matching arrangements including the use of liability driven investment strategies, and has a hedging strategy to reduce key market risks, mainly interest rate and inflation risk, but also currency and longevity risk. We monitor available collateral and liquidity with the objective of ensuring we have sufficient collateral and/or liquidity available to meet any margin calls.
Environmental, social and governance (ESG) | –The Trustee has established a Sustainability Committee which is responsible for overseeing the Scheme’s policies, regulatory obligations and priorities in respect of climate change and wider ESG related matters.

We look at the impact on our risk metrics when determining the appropriateness of the investment and hedging strategies.
Risk monitoring and reporting
We monitor pension risk each month and report on it at the Pension Forum, ERCC and, where thresholds are exceeded (or likely to be), to the Board Risk
Committee and the Board in line with our pension risk appetite. This also includes quarterly monitoring of corporate credit exposures to assess any concentrations
of risk. We discuss any remedial action with the Trustee. In addition, we monitor the performance of third parties who support the valuation of the Scheme’s assets
and liabilities.
PENSION RISK REVIEW
2025 compared to 2024
The underlying level of risk in the Scheme reduced in 2025. This was mainly driven by continuing disposals of illiquid assets, including the sales of some commercial
property, private equity and infrastructure assets.
Our main focus is to ensure the Scheme achieves the right balance between risk and reward whilst minimising the impact on our capital and financial position. At 31
December 2025, the Funding Deficit at Risk decreased to £760m (2024: £830m), mainly due to illiquid asset disposals in 2025. We also increased our US dollar
hedging to reduce our exposure to currency volatility.
We also monitor the potential impact from variations in the IAS 19 position on CET1 capital. All core sections remained in pension surplus in 2025 with the driver of
the CET1 capital being the Scheme's unfunded liabilities, in line with 2024. For more on the impact of our defined benefit Scheme on capital, see the 'Capital risk'
section.
The Scheme's collateral and liquidity position continued to be monitored closely in light of the increase in long-term gilt yields seen over the second half of 2024
which remained at similar levels in 2025. The Scheme remained sufficiently collateralised in 2025.
The Scheme continues to assess opportunities to insure liabilities through buy‑In contracts. While none were completed in 2025, this remains an area of active
consideration within the Scheme’s broader de‑risking strategy.
The accounting position improved slightly in 2025. At 31 December 2025, the Scheme sections in surplus had an aggregate surplus of £524m (2024: £439m) while
there were no sections which had a deficit (2024: none).There were also unfunded liabilities of £22m (2024: £23m).
For more on our pension schemes, including the asset allocation and our accounting assumptions, see Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 101

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Strategic and business risk

| Overview Strategic and business risk is the risk of loss or underperformance against planned objectives; damage arising from strategic decisions or their poor implementation that impact the long-term interests of our key stakeholders, or from an inability to adapt to external developments. In this section, we describe our key strategic and business risks and explain how we manage them. We also describe developments in the year. |

OUR KEY STRATEGIC AND BUSINESS RISKS
Strategic and business risk could impact our long-term success if it caused our business model to become ineffective, out of date, or inconsistent with our goals.
This could happen if we are unable to identify threats arising from the economy, competitors, regulations, and/or changes in technology and customer expectations.
We could be exposed to this risk if we misjudge our capabilities, or the ability to implement our strategy, or pursue initiatives that do not fit with our business model
or miss opportunities we could benefit from.
STRATEGIC AND BUSINESS RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk management | Description
Risk appetite | We have a medium-low appetite for strategic and business risk. This limits the risks we are prepared to take to achieve our strategic objectives and is aligned to our balanced, customer-centric business model.
Risk measurement | Our Board and senior management regularly review potential risks in our operations and plans to ensure we stay within risk appetite.
Risk mitigation | We manage strategic and business risk by having a clear and consistent strategy that takes account of external factors and our own capabilities. We have an effective planning process which ensures we adapt our strategy to reflect changes in risks and opportunities.
Risk monitoring and reporting | We closely track our business environment, including long-term trends that might affect us in the future. As part of this, we report a range of indicators.

STRATEGIC AND BUSINESS RISK REVIEW
2025 compared to 2024
In 2025, we accelerated our transformation focused on our three core pillars and delivered changes towards serving our customers better by offering them the best
products at the best value and with a frictionless digital experience:
– Commercial Transformation: Creating stronger customer propositions, with our mobile app achieving its highest-ever mobile Net Promoter Score (NPS),
reflecting our ability to meet evolving customer needs.
– Operational Transformation: Building enhanced capabilities by continuing to leverage Banco Santander’s best-in-class technology, while rolling out multiple AI
use cases across all functions.
– Cultural Transformation: continuing to build a high performance culture, rolling out global domains across business segments, fostering empowerment and
opportunities for our people to develop new skills.
The proposed acquisition of TSB marks a significant step forward in our transformation journey and demonstrates a clear signal of the Banco Santander group’s
commitment to the UK. Subject to regulatory approvals, we intend to ensure that the additional scale enables us to deliver the best possible bank for our customers,
colleagues, shareholders, and the communities we serve.
Our strategy is anchored in delivering for all our stakeholders: Customers expect a bank that is always available, that is easy to deal with and offers value; our
colleagues want to be part of a high-performance team; and our shareholders look for structural profitability greater than cost of equity through-the-cycle. With all
our initiatives, we continue to drive a customer-centric transformation and evolve into a technology-driven organisation.
The regulatory agenda remains demanding, with multiple ongoing projects to ensure continued compliance. Our day-to-day supervision in H1-25 focused on
Financial Crime, Consumer Duty, our hybrid mortgage model, and model management more broadly. Following the announcement of the proposed TSB acquisition,
regulatory engagement intensified in H2-25, with a particular focus on change-in-control filings and approvals. This will remain a key area of focus in 2026. We
continue prioritising good customer outcomes across all activities. With the FCA’s consultation on Motor Finance redress nearing completion, we will continue to
engage and implement the required actions once the FCA publishes the consultation outcome and redress scheme later in 2026.
The UK banking market continues to evolve rapidly, with increasing convergence at both ends of the market. Larger peers are leveraging scale and balance-sheet
diversification, while digital banks are building customer scale through innovative experiences and highly efficient operating models. Against this backdrop, we have
continued to diversify our asset base, grow fee income, and return to asset growth funded by increasing liabilities, while driving operational efficiencies.
In 2025, we launched several new customer propositions, including Edge Explorer, our value-added current account with lifestyle benefits; Edge Home
enhancements for homebuyers and brokers; our classic Business Current Account; and digital onboarding for cards. In Corporate and Commercial Banking, building
on the success of Santander Navigator in the UK, we launched Navigator Global, an end-to-end, digital-first, human-led platform designed to support ambitious
businesses as they expand internationally. We believe our customer-focused strategy and adaptable, innovative approach position us well for continued success.
We remain focused on supporting customer needs, improving efficiency, and building a responsible and sustainable business. This will enable us to respond to
changing customer expectations and deliver improved returns over the long term.
Banco Santander outlined its 2026-28 strategic plan at its Investor Day in London on 25 February 2025, marking the next phase of its value creation. The plan builds
on the successful delivery of its 2023–25 strategic cycle and sets a roadmap for structurally higher returns over the coming years. We are finalising our own
strategy which we will finalise once the proposed acquisition of TSB receives regulatory approval. A key focus for us will be on successfully integrating TSB while
supporting customers and colleagues, and delivering our synergy commitments.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 102

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Reputational risk

| Overview Reputational risk is the risk of damage to the way Santander UK is perceived by public opinion, by our employees, clients, investors, or any other interested party. In this section, we describe our key reputational risks and explain how we manage them. We also describe developments in the year. |

OUR KEY REPUTATIONAL RISKS
Reputational risks can arise from internal and external factors. We seek to manage our reputation proactively, underpinned by our aim to be a responsible bank, and
through our reputational risk framework. Reputational risk is not static; today’s decisions may be judged by different standards tomorrow. We build this into our risk
culture, evaluation and sanction procedures.
REPUTATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk management | Description
Risk appetite | –We have a low appetite for reputational risk, which is agreed by the Board at least each year.
Risk measurement | –We assess our exposure to reputational risk daily. We base this on expert judgement and analysis of social, print, and broadcast media, and the views of political and market commentators. We also commission independent third parties to analyse our activities and those of our UK peers to identify reputational events, a decline in our reputation, and sector or thematic issues that impact our business. We also measure the perception of Santander UK by key stakeholders through regular interactions and review staff sentiment each year.
Risk mitigation | –Our business units consider reputational risk as part of their operational risk and control assessments. We also consider it as part of our new product reviews. Our Corporate Communications and Responsible Banking, Legal and Compliance and Marketing teams help business units to mitigate the risk and agree action plans as needed, as part of their role to protect our brand and reputation.
Risk monitoring and reporting | –We monitor and report reputational risks and issues on a timely basis. Our Reputational Risk Forum reviews and escalates key issues to ERCC, RBC and the Board. We also report regularly to ExCo on Sustainability and Public Affairs policies.

Our Reputational and ESG risk policies define how we create long-term value while managing those risks. Our ESG policy covers Oil & Gas, Power Generation &
Transmission, Mining & Metals and Soft Commodities. For example, financing is prohibited for project-related financing for new CFPP projects worldwide and we
will only work with new clients with CFPPs to provide specific financing for renewable energy projects.
REPUTATIONAL RISK REVIEW
2025 compared to 2024
Our ongoing transformation programme continues to be a key driver of reputational risk, particularly branch closures, as we announced a further round of closures
in March 2025. Scrutiny of this was heightened due to speculation at the beginning of 2025 that Santander might leave the UK. Changes to our business banking
account, redundancies made across Santander UK, as well as the departures of our CEO and Chair also attracted significant external attention. To mitigate risks, we
prepared extensive communication materials ahead of all key announcements, and regularly communicated our messages to external stakeholders.
We also experienced reputational pressure focused on lending to defence firms. To mitigate this, we clearly communicated to our stakeholders the principles under
which we lend to this sector.
We also continued to manage the reputational risk associated with historical motor finance commission payments. This issue continued to be a key focus as plans
have now been set out for a potential redress regime. For more details, see Notes 27 and 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
The proposed acquisition of TSB will be a key area of focus in 2026. We are fully committed to ensuring a seamless integration following completion of the
proposed acquisition. Maintaining the highest levels of service for customers across both banks will be a key priority, and we will support all colleagues through the
transition.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 103

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Operational risk

| Overview Operational risk is the risk of loss or adverse impact due to inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or external events. Operational resilience is the ability to prevent disruption occurring to the extent practicable; adapt systems and processes to continue to provide services and functions in the event of an incident; return to normal running promptly when a disruption is over; and learn and evolve from both incidents and near misses. Operational resilience is the outcome of executing sound operational risk practices. In this section, we describe our key operational risks and explain how we manage them, with a focus on our top operational risks. We also describe our operational risk event losses and developments in the year. |

OUR KEY OPERATIONAL RISKS
Operational risk is inherent in our business. As a result, we manage it in line with our stated Risk Appetite, rather than eliminate it entirely. Operational risk events
can have a financial impact and can also affect our business objectives, customer service, customer outcomes and regulatory obligations. These events can include
product mis-selling, fraud, process failures, system downtime and damage to assets or external events.
Our key operational risks are divided into 10 categories:

Category | Description
Business and Operational Continuity | Business & Operational Continuity risk is the risk of failure to deliver a satisfactory levels of service, without interruption, during operationally disruptive/crisis events, or to effectively respond to a crisis event in a manner which minimises harm due to inadequate contingency arrangements, or a lack of crisis response preparedness
Cyber and Information Security | Cyber and Information Security risk is the risk of loss in the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of our information, data, or systems due to information and cyber security events by either internal or external actors resulting in poor customer outcomes, poor employee outcomes, business impacts including operational disruption. This includes events affecting our suppliers where they result in a confidentiality, integrity or availability impact to our information, data or systems
Data Management | Data Management Risk is the risk of business decisions, processes and outputs that are inappropriate/incorrect due to inaccurate, incomplete, irretrievable, or untimely data
Financial Statement and Tax Reporting | Financial Statement and Tax Reporting risk is the risk of inaccurate and/or untimely financial statements and/or tax filing due to errors, poor data quality, mis-representation and breaches in reporting requirements
IT | IT risk is the risk of detriment to the availability, integrity and agility-to-change/adapt our technology services, systems, information and applications due to failures in using, managing, operating and deploying our own or third party provided technology services, systems, information and applications
Legal | Legal risk is the risk of non-compliance with legislation or contractual terms, failure to protect assets or mishandling of legal proceedings due to errors, failure to take action in a timely manner, inadequate design and/or execution of systems, controls or operational processes or legal risk management practices
Payments Processing | Payment Processing risk is the risk of failed, incomplete, inaccurate, or untimely execution or settlement of payments due to inadequate processes or systems, human error or capacity constraints
Premises and Physical Security | Premises & Physical Security risk is the risk of injuries to customers, employees and other persons, damage to the bank's buildings and property/ assets or failure of property infrastructure or utility supplies due to internal or external events including equipment malfunction, deterioration in the condition of property, adverse weather, natural disasters or civil unrest
Third Party | Third Party risk is the risk of failed or inadequate service provision from a supplier, or non-adherence by a supplier to the bank’s expected level of conduct due to a lack of clarity regarding the bank’s service delivery expectations, a poor supplier control environment to support service delivery, poor financial management by the supplier, or poor culture and behaviours of the supplier, and/or internal or external events
Transformation and Change | Transformation & Change risk is the risk of a poorly designed and/or executed transformation portfolio due to the inadequate management, design, build, testing, deployment or implementation of change

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 104

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT
We manage our operational risks (and other Non-Financial risks (NFRs)) in line with our NFR framework, as follows:
Non-Financial Risk Management
Our NFR framework (formerly known as the Operational Risk and Resilience framework) sets out our high-level arrangements and standards to manage operational
risks, and is part of our overall Risk Framework. Our Risk Appetite sets the risk limits and key risk metrics for non-financial risks.
Risk appetite
We maintain NFR appetite across Santander UK through Board approved Risk Appetite Statements. These are in place for all principal risks and describe the
extent and type of activities that can be undertaken. The Risk Appetite statements consist of qualitative statements of appetite supported by risk limits and triggers
which operate as a defence against excessive risk taking. Risk measures and their associated limits are an integral part of embedding risk appetite in day-to-day risk
management decisions.
We set a clear tolerance in line with business activities, and we also set lower-level triggers, parameters and quantitative thresholds across our business areas.
We monitor our risk profile and performance against the risk appetite, and we have processes to identify, assess, manage, and report risks and events. We
incorporate Banco Santander group principles and standards, regulatory requirements, and best practice, where applicable. Coverage across the seven CRD IV loss
event types is comprehensive and aligns to the principal risks approved by ERCC.
Our policies directly support the qualitative aspects of Risk Appetite. They define expectations, guidance and standards and support consistency of permissible risk
taking across the business.
Risk measurement
The key components of the operational risk toolset we use to measure risks under our NFR framework are:

NFR risk toolset | Description
Operational risk and control assessments | Our business units identify and assess their operational risks to ensure they manage and control them within our operational risk appetite, and prioritise actions needed. Every area must identify and record their material risks, assess their controls for adequacy and then accept the risk or plan to address any deficiencies. We perform independent testing of our most important controls to ensure enhanced rigour and challenge of how effectively they are mitigating our largest risks. We also use operational risk assessments and risk rating tools as key parts of change risk management.
Risk scenario analysis | We perform this across business units. It involves a top-down assessment of our key operational risks. We update our scenarios each year. The analysis gives us insight into rare but high impact events and allows us to understand potential impacts and address issues. Our Operational risk scenario analysis covers major Operational risks that are extreme but plausible and requires participants across the business to consider and assess the financial and qualitative impacts on Santander UK, in the event these exposures were to materialise. We complete the scenario analysis for risk management and regulatory purposes. We also use it as a business tool for their own stress testing to help understand the largest exposures and agree key actions required to prevent, control or mitigate risks. We review and update our scenarios each year to ensure they still represent our key operational risk exposures.
Key indicators (metrics) | Key indicators and their tolerance levels give us an objective view of risk exposure or the strength of a control at any point in time. They also show trends and give us early warning of potential increasing risk exposures. Our business-wide risk appetite indicators are of primary importance which show adherence to our Risk Appetite statements.
Operational risk event and loss management | Operational risk events occur when our controls do not operate as we planned and this leads to customer impact, financial loss, regulatory impacts and/or damage to our reputation. We use data from these processes to identify and correct any control weaknesses. We also use root cause analysis to identify emerging themes, to prevent or reduce the impacts of recurrence and to support risk and control assessments, scenario analysis and risk reporting. Our operational risk loss appetite sets the level of total operational risk loss (expected and unexpected) in any given year (on a 12-month rolling basis) that we consider to be acceptable. We track actual losses against our appetite, and we escalate as needed.

Risk mitigation
Mitigation Is a critical aspect of ensuring that our risk profile remains within our Risk Appetite. Risk mitigation strategies are discussed and agreed at various Risk
committees within Santander.
When we consider strategies, cost and benefits, we also consider residual risks (those retained) and secondary risks (which may be consequential). Monitoring
and review processes are in place to evaluate results. Early identification and effective management are critical to successful mitigation. We assess the effects of
changes for materiality impact and those assessed as high or medium high impact are managed closely.

Mitigation tools | Description
Training and competence | We train our staff and require them to maintain a suitable level of competence to ensure customers can achieve appropriate outcomes. We invest in all our people to ensure that we achieve our mandatory risk objectives and that everyone acknowledges their personal responsibility to manage risk. We focus on ensuring we train our colleagues to recognise and support customers who may be vulnerable, or who may be experiencing financial stress, financial difficulty or financial abuse. We also have a dedicated Specialist Support Team that offers guidance to colleagues helping customers who may need more tailored solutions.
Action management | Where risk exposures are outside our Risk Appetite, our business units identify, assess, manage and monitor material actions to reduce the exposure back to within appetite.
Event root cause analysis | Where new material and significant events are reported, steps are taken to identify the root cause of the event. This enables a read across and the sharing of lessons learned with appropriate mitigating actions taken to address the root cause and successfully resolve the event, and enhancements made to the control environment to prevent re-occurrence.
Emerging risk monitoring | We monitor key threats, developments, and risks, including consideration of which risk types or Business areas may be impacted or stressed by them.
Risk based insurance | Where appropriate, we use insurance to complement other risk mitigation measures.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 105

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

We manage our operational risks in line with our NFR framework, as outlined earlier. In addition, to mitigate specific cybersecurity risks, we have the following
tailored approach:

Category | Risk mitigation
Cybersecurity | Protecting our customers, systems and data remains a top priority for us. We operate a layered information and cybersecurity defence which is aligned to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
| We constantly look to adapt our capabilities to the evolving threats. We do this by gathering intelligence on threat actors, motives, and their attack techniques. We protect our most critical people, assets, and data with preventative controls in line with the identified threats. We also assume that breaches will happen in any case, and so we seek to mitigate these by ensuring their timely detection and that appropriate response and recovery activities are in place. We do this by leveraging industry standard threat analysis, identifying specific real-life scenarios, developing detailed response playbooks, and testing them regularly using bank-wide simulation exercises involving up to the CEO. Cybersecurity controls are also thoroughly captured in policies, standards, guidelines and procedures available to all staff.
| Third parties are vital for the functioning and resilience of our business. As such, we operate a dedicated risk and control assessment prior to, and during, the lifecycle of engagements. This ensures the controls operated by the third party are in line with our policies and integrated with our processes as needed. These include, amongst others, business continuity, incident reporting and regulatory compliance.
| We regularly assess the state of our environment by reviewing the maturity of our controls in line with our internal risk management framework. We engage with regulatory authorities through regular oversight meetings and we participate in the CBEST programme. The CBEST programme aims to evaluate the resilience of firms and financial market infrastructures through testing performed by accredited and independent specialist firms. We also have a team of penetration testers in our Internal Audit function, that reviews our cybersecurity risks and controls, and reports the results to the BAC. We participate in industry recognised intelligence sharing groups with other banks (e.g. Cyber Defence Alliance), and we speak regularly to government agencies.
| We campaign to raise awareness and give customers the knowledge they need to avoid becoming victims of cybersecurity incidents. As part of this, we run customer education campaigns and offer advice through our online security operations centre. We also have a cybersecurity insurance policy to give us comprehensive cover to respond to and recover losses and damages from security breaches.
| Our Chief Information Security Officer (CISO) is responsible for the day-to-day running of security operations and the immediate response to information and cybersecurity incidents. The CISO relies on a comprehensive specialist team, supported by cybersecurity controls and capabilities available from the Banco Santander group CISO team in Spain.
| The CISO and most staff who manage cybersecurity risk across all lines of defence are industry specialists with substantial experience in leadership and technical aspects. This experience is gained via previous cybersecurity related roles in top global financial organisations, global multinationals, UK government security agencies, UK regulators, such as the PRA, industry leading cybersecurity risk management suppliers, and relevant university education. Many hold specialist security certifications that are kept relevant by attending dedicated training and specialist conferences.
| The CISO is responsible for cybersecurity risk operations and risk management and falls under the COO SMF accountability framework. The Chief Compliance and NFR Officer (CCO) holds SMF16 prescribed accountability and is responsible to the CRO for management and oversight activities for Non-financial risks enacted by the CISO and the COO to ensure they remain within appetite.
| The CISO and the COO report regularly and frequently to the Board, ExCo, BRC and ERCC. They provide detailed commentaries on the threat environment, key incidents across the industry, geopolitical considerations, the overall residual risk, progress on key projects, the control environment position, and appetite going forward. In addition, BRC and ERCC receive monthly cybersecurity updates as part of the standard risk reporting suite.
| The CISO and the COO escalate material cybersecurity incidents affecting us and our suppliers via our internal incident escalation and management procedure with direct notifications to the CRO and other executive management.
| The Board and BRC include members who have substantial experience of technology risk, including Non-Executive Directors and the Chief Operating and Technology Officer. We also provide targeted training for Board members, senior management and other employees to enhance their knowledge per the evolving and emerging threat landscape.

Risk monitoring and reporting
Regulators continue to emphasise the importance of effective risk culture, personal accountability and the adoption and enforcement of risk-based requirements
and adequate internal reporting processes and procedures. Monitoring and Reporting is a key part of how we manage risk. We can identify exposures through our
Non-Financial Risk and control assessments, risk scenario analysis, key indicators, change risk assessments and incidents and events.
Subject matter experts across the business engage across risk management and monitoring activities and support effective communication of policy changes. We
report exposures for each business unit through regular risk and control forums. These include details of the risks, level of exposure and how we plan to mitigate
them. We prioritise and highlight events that have a material impact on our customers, reputation or finance by reporting them to key executives and committees.
We use The Standardised Approach (TSA) to calculate our Pillar 1 operational risk capital. We use an internal model aligned to the CRD IV advanced measurement
approach to validate our Pillar 2 capital needs.
Our crisis management framework covers all levels of the business. It sets out possible triggers and how we will manage a crisis, and we test it at least annually.
If an event occurs, our business continuity plans help us recover as quickly as possible and we undertake post incident reviews to identify learnings.
We closely monitor emerging threats that could affect future operations and performance. We act to mitigate potential risks as and when required. We also carry
out further in depth analysis, including stress testing of exposures.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 106

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

OPERATIONAL RISK REVIEW
2025 compared to 2024
Operational risk event losses by Basel category
The table below shows our operational risk losses in 2025 and 2024 for reportable events with an impact over £10,000, by CRD IV loss event types. The data is
presented in line with the Basel 2.5 requirement to aggregate and recognise losses in the year of the first point of recognition, rather than in any subsequent year(s)
in which further costs are recognised under IFRS. Due to the nature of risk events that keep evolving, prior year losses are updated:

| 2025 |  | 2024
| Value % | Volume % |  | Value % | Volume %
Internal fraud | — | — |  | 1 | —
External fraud | 32 | 83 |  | 73 | 87
Employment practices and workplace safety | 1 | 3 |  | 1 | 1
Clients, products and business practices | 58 | 5 |  | 11 | 3
Damage to physical assets | — | — |  | 2 | 1
Business disruption and systems failures | — | — |  | 2 | —
Execution, delivery, and process management | 9 | 9 |  | 10 | 8
| 100 | 100 |  | 100 | 100

The value of operational losses above £10,000 in 2025 increased 182% in value and reduced 6% in volume compared to 2024. Significant provision charges for
historical motor finance commission payments were accounted for under IFRS in 2025 and 2024; however, for Basel 2.5 purposes, these were recognised in 2023.
Operational Resilience
We continued to assess the resilience of our Important Business Services using a broad range of severe but plausible disruption scenarios, including successful
cyber-attack and loss of third party scenarios, to ensure that our contingency and recovery strategies are effective in minimising harm to our customers, any risk to
the safety and soundness of the firm or to the orderly functioning or stability to the UK market. We continued to strengthen our resilience position, through
investment in our IT estate and enhancing assurance and validation of the resilience of our third party suppliers.
Cybersecurity
We continued to enhance our threat prevention controls and test our business area recovery plans against a range of scenarios. We see increasing ransomware
attacks across all sectors, driven by compromises in supply chain tools, and expect this trend to remain. We continued to invest in skills and resources to manage
cybersecurity risks and monitor cybersecurity threats, including from the geopolitical environment. In 2025, no material information security or cyber incidents
occurred, however like any other organisation we remain exposed to the threat of attack and the possibility of breaches.
Data Management
In 2025, we continued to monitor and mitigate data risk through enhanced governance structures and processes. We remained focused on building a strong data
foundation for the future by prioritising the critical data universe. This was supported by a new operating model including business process ownership with
enhanced focus on end-to-end controls. Our multi-year data programme delivered in line with the data strategy driven by the Chief Data Officer, with a renewed
focus on improving the quality and architecture of the key data underpinning our critical business and regulatory processes.
IT
Over the past 3 years, we made significant progress in addressing key IT risks through a programme of remediation activities. In 2025, we made further
improvements in reducing both IT-related incidents and technology obsolescence. As part of our strategy, we also leveraged technology services provided by Banco
Santander to simplify our IT estate and increase efficiency.
Legal
Our legal risk profile remained heightened, reflecting the number and value of legal risks that we managed. The Santander UK group's exposure to legal risk is
principally driven by the material litigation matters outlined in Note 27 – Provisions and Note 30 - Contingent Liabilities and Commitments. In H2-25, a judgment in
the large-scale and complex PPI related litigation brought by AXA was handed down by the High Court on 25 July 2025 (elements of which are the subject of an
appeal and cross-appeal to the Court of Appeal) and a judgment in the appeal of the Court of Appeal's decision in Hopcraft, Wrench and Johnson related to motor
finance commission litigation was handed down by the Supreme Court on 1 August 2025 (following which the FCA announced it intended to consult on a redress
scheme under s.404 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000). The impact and implications of these decisions for Santander UK are outlined in Notes 27 and
30. We continued to respond to developments in relation to the German criminal tax investigation relating to historical dividend tax arbitrage transactions. We
continued to monitor and manage our legal risk in relation to thematic Court actions and FOS complaints related to fraud, mortgages and unaffordable lending,
including a judicial review of an FOS decision on the scope of its jurisdiction to consider and award redress in relation to alleged acts and omissions more than 6
years prior to the date of the complaint. While litigated PPI claim volumes remained stable, we continued successfully to respond to attempts by claimant law firms
to re-open cases subject to the FCA redress regime for PPI complaints. The legal and regulatory environment in which the Santander UK group business operates is
evolving and we are evaluating and responding to these developments, including the Employment Rights Act 2025, the Data (Use and Access) Act 2025, the
implementation of failure to prevent fraud offence under the Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2024, and the HM Treasury consultation on changes
to the Consumer Credit Act 1974.
Third Party Supplier
We continued to rely extensively on third parties for a range of goods and services provided by both Banco Santander and external suppliers. In 2025, we
continuously monitored our suppliers against a set of controls and metrics to manage our risk exposure.
Transformation and change
In 2025, we continued to simplify, digitise processes and customer journeys, reduce costs, extend internal capabilities and ensure a resilient operating model as part
of our ongoing transformation. We focused on ensuring transformation and change is safely and sustainably transitioned into our business without impacting our
risk profile.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 107

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Economic crime risk

| Overview Economic crime risk is the collective term used for Financial Crime risk and Fraud risk. Financial Crime risk is the risk that we are used to facilitate criminal activities. These include money laundering, terrorist financing, proliferation financing, sanctions evasion, facilitation of tax evasion, bribery and corruption. Fraud risk is the risk associated with attempted or successful fraud being committed against the RFB, a customer or a third party. Within Santander UK, fraud is defined as getting a financial benefit by use of deception or dishonesty with the intention to deprive or disadvantage the RFB, its customers or other parties. In addition, fraud loss is the loss from successful fraud. In this section, we describe our key economic crime risks and explain how we manage them. We also describe developments in the year. |

OUR KEY ECONOMIC CRIME RISKS
Financial crime is a high priority risk for us, and addressing it is a key priority for senior management. We remain committed to countering it by maintaining robust
systems and controls, and conducting business in line with regulatory and legal requirements. We adopt a risk-based approach in line with UK and international
laws and standards. Failure to meet our legal and regulatory obligations could result in criminal or civil penalties against Santander UK or individuals, as well as
affecting our customers and the communities we serve.
Fraud can be committed by first parties (our customers), second parties (people known to our customers or us), third parties (people unknown to our customers or
us), and internally by our staff or associated persons. We are committed to protecting ourselves and our customers from fraud and to mitigating our fraud risk in an
ever-evolving external fraud environment.
Our main economic crime risk categories are:

Category | Description
Money laundering | We are used by criminals to transform the proceeds of crime into seemingly legitimate money or other assets.
Terrorist financing | We are used by terrorists to deposit, distribute or collect funds that are used to fund their activity.
Sanctions | We do not identify payments, customers or entities that are subject to economic or financial sanctions.
Bribery and corruption | We fail to put in place effective controls to prevent or detect bribery and corruption.
Facilitation of tax evasion | We fail to put in place effective systems and controls to prevent the facilitation of tax evasion.
Fraud | An attempted or successful fraud is committed against us, a customer or a third party.
Failure to prevent fraud | We fail to put in place effective systems and controls to prevent fraud.

ECONOMIC CRIME RISK MANAGEMENT
We manage our economic crime risks in line with our NFR framework, as outlined earlier. In addition, we have financial crime and fraud policies tailored to the key
risks and we maintain a control framework in line with a standalone economic crime risk framework. We continue to partner with public authorities, the Home
Office and the wider financial services industry to pool expertise and data to mitigate specific financial crime and fraud risks. We are also involved in partnerships
such as the Joint Money Laundering Intelligence Taskforce (JMLIT) which supports public-private collaboration to tackle financial crime.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 108

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

ECONOMIC CRIME RISK REVIEW
2025 compared to 2024
Financial Crime
We understand the importance of doing our part to protect our customers and the communities we serve from the social and economic impacts of financial crime.
As such, financial crime risk management remains one of our top risks and a key focus area for senior management and the Board. We continue to prioritise and
remain vigilant in addressing financial crime risks and actively partner with industry, law enforcement and government to deter, detect and disrupt financial crime
and terrorist financing. In 2025, we:
– Continued enhancing our risk management capabilities, significantly reducing residual risk and focusing on returning to Board Risk Appetite, adequate resources
and key deliverables across the remediation plan.
– Invested in our financial crime systems and controls including continued improvements to customer data and the introduction of simplified and digitised
customer due diligence processes for new and existing customers.
– Continued to enhance our sanctions systems and controls in response to internal and external lessons learned from the sanctions developments in 2025, notably
the continued impacts of the Russia sanctions and increased use of OFSI powers.
– Adapted our financial crime policies to reflect the latest external requirements, best practice and Banco Santander policy requirements.
– Maintained our focus on providing colleagues with the appropriate skills, knowledge and qualifications to support our efforts to fight financial crime through
enhanced and targeted training lead by our Economic Crime Academy.
– Actively participated in external policy and strategy discussions with external groups, including maintaining membership of the senior UK Finance Economic Crime
Product and Service Board and holding the chair or vice-chair position at various economic crime focused Committees and Panels.
– Led and collaborated in working groups with other industry players, with diverse membership including banking only, cross-sectoral, and in public-private groups
with the public sector.
– Continued being active members of the collaborative industry and NCA Data Fusion project, seconding data scientists and intelligence specialists to the NCA to
analyse and develop intelligence within the Joint Analysis and Data Analytics Taskforces. The Data Fusion project is also supported by senior leaders at project,
strategic and Board level.
– Participated in the industry pilot testing of the sharing and requesting provisions of the ECCTA Legislation provisions co-ordinated by UK Finance. This resulted in
new intelligence being both, received and shared, from which action can be taken to explore and manage financial crime risks.
– Remained a committed member of the JMLIT and other public-private information sharing initiatives with law enforcement and industry, to exchange and
analyse data on high-end money laundering and wider economic threats.
Fraud
Fraud risk losses remain a material driver of our operational risk loss position, in line with the wider UK financial services industry. Social engineering techniques
used by fraudsters are a significant threat to customers and are outside of our controls, which is driven by an increase in the sophistication of attempted fraud. This
is also reflected in the rising status of fraud which, in 2025, was 44% of all reported crime in the UK, which increased from 41% in 2024. As a result, in 2025, we:
– Continued to play a collaborative role in fraud management amongst other industry partners, through UK Finance and Stop Scams UK, alongside our
customer awareness campaigns on the most common fraud scams. This is further supported by continued focus on preventative measures in response to fraud
attacks, especially proactive education and awareness, with a key part of our strategy including the ability to present customers with warnings specific to their
payment journey.
– Increased our industry association commitment to ensure it is at each of the strategic, policy, and operational levels. This is done to ensure Santander UK remains
at the forefront of industry best practice in fraud risk management, customer care and customer treatment, while serving as a strong voice and trusted partner to
the public sector alongside industry peers in reform and collaboration discussions.
– Maintained focus on our public awareness campaigns, which use both our own channels and the media. In 2025, we launched the Santander Scamtracker, a
quarterly report from Santander UK, detailing trends in Authorised Push Payment (APP) scams, revealing the latest tactics, affected regions, and customer
demographics, helping to warn customers about emerging threats such as fake job offers or purchase scams for tickets.
– Reviewed and enhanced our policies, processes and controls to confirm we met the expectations of firms subject to the new "Failure to Prevent Fraud" corporate
offence, introduced through the Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 109

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Model risk

| Overview Model risk is the risk that the predictions from models may be inaccurate, causing sub-optimal decisions to be made; or that a model may be used inappropriately. In this section, we describe our key model risks and explain how we manage them. We also describe developments in the year. |

OUR KEY MODEL RISKS
A model is a quantitative repeatable method or system that relies on assumptions to process input data into estimates of uncertain outcomes. Our key model risks
arise from inadequate or flawed design leading to weaknesses and limitations in our models, implementation errors or poor deployment of the models, or the
incorrect or inappropriate use of a model. Model risk can also arise from poor-quality data, inappropriate assumptions, or changes in the external environment that
make historical relationships less valid. These could lead to reputational damage, regulatory non-compliance, a deterioration in our prudential position, or financial
losses. The most material models we use help us calculate our regulatory capital and credit losses, and perform stress tests.
We continue to see increasing interest in using Artificial Intelligence (AI) which is informing our approach to understanding emerging model risks, such as
interpretability - the ability to understand why an algorithm made a particular prediction.
MODEL RISK MANAGEMENT
We manage our model risks in line with our NFR framework, as outlined earlier. The model risk framework is designed to ensure robust oversight, control and
accountability across the model lifecycle. The framework is underpinned by policies and procedures designed to mitigate specific model risks, including those
covering model risk management, materiality and tiering, model development and change, validation, and internal ratings-based (IRB) rating system changes.
In line with our risk organisational structure, our first line of defence is responsible for managing model risk within our risk appetite, embedding the framework
and performance monitoring to identify deterioration. The second line of defence provides independent oversight through the model risk function, setting the
framework and policies, defining risk appetite, and conducting periodic reviews and governance. The third line of defence assesses periodically the robustness of
the model risk management framework, compliance with policies and regulatory requirements, and material changes.
MODEL RISK REVIEW
2025 compared to 2024
In 2025, model risk remained a significant focus as we continued to work on the regulatory agenda, focusing on models to reflect the most accurate and recent
data. The PRA’s Model Risk Supervisory Statement (SS1/23) policy has been in effect since May 2024 and we have aligned our framework, policies and procedures
to it. We continue to embed enhancements across our business, and refine our approach in line with a phased implementation, to ensure ongoing alignment with
supervisory expectations and delivery of remediation activities. We continued to recognise model risk as a key risk and maintained a strong management and
oversight framework that is embedded across all three lines of defence.
In 2025, we continued to redevelop key regulatory capital models and our unsecured provision models. In line with SS1/23, we continued to embed a robust post-
model adjustment framework, including independent review of adjustments made to ECL to mitigate against weaknesses and limitations.
We introduced further machine learning and generative AI solutions in 2025, to continue to improve operational efficiency.
The continued growth of AI presents opportunities to enhance customer outcomes and operational effectiveness. Building on enhancements delivered in 2025, the
focus will be on further strengthening the model risk management framework, reinforcing model robustness, performance monitoring, and explainability to ensure
models remain accurate, reliable, and appropriately governed in an evolving landscape.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 110

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Compliance risk

| Overview We manage compliance risk (previously known as conduct and regulatory risk) types under a single framework. Compliance risk is the risk of our decisions and behaviours leading to detriment or poor outcomes for our customers. It also refers to the risk of failing to maintain high standards of market behaviour and integrity. Compliance risk is the risk of financial or reputational loss, or imposition of our conditions on regulatory permissions, due to failing to comply with applicable codes, regulator's rules, guidance and regulatory expectations. In this section, we describe where our key compliance risks can originate from and set out how we manage them. We also describe developments in the year. |

OUR KEY COMPLIANCE RISKS
We are committed to ensuring that Consumer Duty is embedded across the business and to delivering good customer outcomes. Compliance risk can stem from
errors in our product design, sales practices, post-sale servicing, operational processes, complaint handling, and the failure to supervise, monitor or control the
activities of our employees. All of these may result in the risk that we do not deliver good outcomes for our customers, align to the expectations of our regulators
or observe the required standards of market behaviour. Understanding the drivers of compliance risk enables us to ensure our frameworks are robust and help
mitigate the risk of customer harm.
Our key compliance risks are divided into five categories:

Category | Description
Conduct and Consumer Duty | Conduct and Consumer Duty Risk is the risk that our decisions and behaviours lead to a detrimental or poor outcome for our customers and clients and/or fail to uphold and maintain high standards of market integrity. This is recognised as a cross-cutting risk in Santander UK Group Holdings plc's framework.
Customer / Client Protection | Customer / Client Protection Risk is the risk of inability to deliver good customer outcomes across the full customer lifecycle including product design, pricing and value, communications, customer support, and post-sale servicing due to failures of people, processes, policies, systems and controls resulting in financial loss, reputational damage, regulatory fines, sanctions & scrutiny, customer loss & detriment, operational inefficiencies.
Compliance Standards | Compliance Standards is the risk of non-compliance with applicable financial services regulations including failure to maintain adequate systems and controls, failure to meet supervisory oversight expectations, maintain market integrity and the protection of stakeholder interests due to failures of people, processes, policies, systems and controls resulting in financial loss, reputational damage, regulatory fines, sanctions & scrutiny, customer loss & detriment, operational inefficiencies.
Data Privacy and Protection | Data Privacy and Protection Risk is the risk of failure to comply with data protection legislation, requirements, codes, guidance and supervisory expectations due to failures in the process of collecting, organising, managing, storing and safeguarding personal data resulting in business impacts including operational disruption, financial loss/increased costs, regulatory scrutiny and / or sanctions, reputational damage, legal claims or internal / external stakeholder impacts undermining customer trust.
People | People Risk is the risk of insufficient staff capacity and capability, undesired employee behaviours, lack of diversity and inclusion, non- compliance with employment legislation (incl. Health and Safety requirements) due to ineffective design and/or execution of people management processes, and internal/external events resulting in poor customer outcomes, poor employee outcomes, business impacts including operational disruption, financial loss/increased costs, regulatory scrutiny and / or sanctions, reputational damage, legal claims or internal / external stakeholder impacts.

COMPLIANCE RISK MANAGEMENT
We manage our Compliance risks in line with our NFR framework, as outlined earlier. In addition, to mitigate specific Compliance risks, we have the following
tailored policies:

Policies | Description
Conduct and Consumer Duty policy | This policy outlines the requirements, expectations and behaviours we must comply with to deliver good outcomes for our customers employees, shareholders and communities and to meet our obligations of the Financial Conduct Authorities Consumer Duty.
Customer / Client Protection and Compliance Standards Policy | This policy defines the requirements that we must adhere to, to deliver good customer outcomes across the full customer lifecycle including product design, pricing and value, communications, customer support, and post-sale servicing. It also sets out the expectations that we must comply with applicable financial services regulations including maintaining adequate systems and controls, and meeting supervisory oversight expectations.
Product and Service Approval and Review policy, including Fair Value standard for regulated products (Retail customers) | Our Product and Services Approval and Review policy sets out the requirements which must be adhered to before launching a new product or service initiative or making changes to these and throughout their lifecycle. The supporting fair value standard details our approach to assessing whether a regulated product provides fair value to our retail customers, considering all stages of value during the product design phase, and on a regular basis.
Fair treatment of vulnerable customers | Some customers may be impacted financially or personally as a result of their circumstances. Our Vulnerable Customer Standard gives business units a clear and consistent view of what vulnerability can mean and situations when customers may need more support. Our guidelines focus on identifying characteristics of vulnerability, understanding customer needs and the support and flexibility we can give to help. In addition to mandatory training, we train our customer-facing staff using real customer scenarios to enable our people to deal with a wide range of sensitive issues. Our online Vulnerable Customer Support Tool gives our people more guidance and support, and our Specialist Support Team gives guidance for the most complex situations. We also consider vulnerability in every initiative and adapt our technology to the needs of customers with vulnerability characteristics in our design and testing stages. We work with charities, authorities, trade associations and other specialists to develop our understanding of vulnerability.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 111

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

COMPLIANCE RISK REVIEW
2025 compared to 2024
We manage the compliance risk (previously known as conduct and regulatory risk) types in one framework. Compliance risk also includes data privacy and
people risk.
Conduct & Consumer Duty
– Throughout 2025 we delivered a number of enhancements to our products and services across business and support areas to ensure we continue delivering
good customer outcomes. These include improving, simplifying and digitising customer journeys, and adjusting fees and charges to continue offering fair value to
our customers.
Customer/Client Protection
– We announced changes as part of our Branch transformation programme, which reflect how customers bank with us. Through these changes, we continue
to ensure customers receive the right support and continue to invest in customer communication channels, including our branch network, Work Cafes and
community bankers, digital chat and telephone banking services. Santander UK actively participates in schemes to ensure the long-term future of access to cash,
including supporting the set-up of shared banking hubs and wider engagement with LINK and industry partners.
– We continue to proactively contact customers who may be at risk of experiencing early signs of financial distress, to try and help them avoid longer term financial
difficulty by referring them to internal and external sources of assistance, alongside ongoing customer engagement and support plans.
– We have further enhanced our Customer Outcome Monitoring and Customer Testing to strengthen our ability to identify and report any areas of potential
customer harm, poor outcomes or customer experiences. We have ensured that timely decisions and action are taken to address any potential harms.
Compliance Standards
– Santander UK continues to maintain open and regular dialogue with its regulators and engage with policy makers to ensure the UK regulatory regime enables us
to better support our customers and deliver economic growth.
– We are committed to adhering to our regulatory requirements, including maintaining adequate systems and controls and where we identify instances of non-
compliance, we take timely action to remediate.
Data Privacy and Protection
We remain committed to protecting the personal data we collect and use, and respecting the data protection rights of our customers, our people and others
associated with us. Our data protection policy and processes reflect current data protection laws and regulations, and all of our people and third-parties we share
personal data with are required to comply with them.
People
People risk continues to be influenced by the scale and complexity of organisational transformation, including changes to our site and office attendance strategy,
and preparation for the planned integration of TSB. Wellbeing-related absence has been broadly stable during the year, and colleague support has been enhanced
through expanded occupational health services, employee assistance provision and the introduction of private medical insurance for eligible colleagues. Attrition
was closely monitored, with particular focus on critical and senior roles, supported by strengthened succession planning, retention measures and workforce
planning. The Group continued to evolve its Employee Value Proposition, including free health assessments and financial wellbeing support, recognising the
importance of workforce resilience to operational performance, customer outcomes and regulatory compliance.
Accounting position
For more on our provisions, see Note 27 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. For more on our contingent liabilities, see Note 30 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 112

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Financial statements

In this section |  |
Audit report |  | 113
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (PCAOB ID 876) |  | 123
Primary financial statements |  | 134
| Consolidated Income Statement |  | 134
| Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income |  | 135
| Consolidated Balance Sheet |  | 136
| Consolidated Cash Flow Statement |  | 137
| Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity |  | 138
| Company Balance Sheet |  | 139
| Company Cash Flow Statement |  | 140
| Company Statement of Changes in Equity |  | 141
Notes to the financial statements |  | 142

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 113

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Independent auditors’ report to the members of Santander UK plc
Report on the audit of the financial statements
Opinion
In our opinion, Santander UK plc’s group financial statements and company financial statements (the “financial statements”):
– give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and of the company’s affairs as at 31 December 2025 and of the group’s profit and the group’s and company’s
cash flows for the year then ended;
– have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies
Act 2006; and
– have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual Report, which comprise:
– the Consolidated and Company Balance Sheets as at 31 December 2025 ;
– the Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated and Company Cash Flow Statements and the
Consolidated and Company Statements of Changes in Equity for the year then ended; and
– the notes to the financial statements, comprising material accounting policy information and other explanatory information.
Our opinion is consistent with our reporting to the Board Audit Committee.
Separate opinion in relation to IFRSs as issued by the IASB
As explained in note 1 to the financial statements, the group and company, in addition to applying UK-adopted international accounting standards, have also applied
international financial reporting standards (IFRSs) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).
In our opinion, the group and company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as issued by the IASB.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under ISAs (UK) are further
described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Independence
We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, which includes
the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these requirements.
To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided.
Other than those disclosed in note 7, we have provided no non-audit services to the group and company or their controlled undertakings in the period under audit.
Our audit approach
Overview
Audit scope
– The scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of audit procedures performed were determined by our risk assessment, the significance of components
due to risk or size and other qualitative factors (including history of misstatement through fraud or error).
– We performed audit procedures over components considered to be significant due to risk or size in the context of the group (full scope audit) or in the context of
individual primary statement account balances (audit of one or more account balances).
– Our audit plan was discussed with the Board Audit Committee in June 2025 and updates were provided at later stages of the audit. We executed the planned
approach and concluded based on the results of our testing, ensuring that sufficient audit evidence had been obtained to support our opinion. We discussed our
approach and the results of our audit with the Board Audit Committee. We also discussed the key audit matters at the conclusion of the audit.
Key audit matters
– Expected credit loss allowance for loans and advances to customers (group and company)
– Valuation of defined benefit pension surplus (group and company)
– Impairment assessment of goodwill (group and company)
– Specific customer remediation, litigation and regulatory matters (group and company)
– Valuation of intercompany derivatives measured using significant unobservable inputs (company)
Materiality
– Overall group materiality: £80 million (2024: £80 million) based on approximately 5% of adjusted profit before tax (2024: 5% of adjusted profit before tax).
– Overall company materiali ty: £76 m illion (2024: £76 million) based on approximately 5% of adjusted profit before tax (2024: 5% of adjusted profit before tax),
capped at the level which is used for the audit of the company as a component of the overall group.
– Performance materiality: £60 million (2024: £60 million) (group) and £57 million (2024: £57 million) (company).
The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements of the current
period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including those which had
the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters, and any
comments we make on the results of our procedures thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
This is not a complete list of all risks identified by our audit.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 114

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The key audit matters below are consistent with last year.

Key audit matter | How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Expected credit loss allowance for loans and advances to customers (group and company) |
Refer to the Board Audit Committee Chair’s report, credit risk section of the risk review, note 1 (Accounting Policies), and note 13 (Loans and Advances to customers). Credit Impairment allowances represent management’s best estimate of the expected credit loss (ECL) within each portfolio at the balance sheet date. Management uses a number of models and judgemental adjustments (JAs) to achieve compliance with the requirements of IFRS 9. Determination of the ECL is complex and a number of significant judgements are involved in the estimation process. The assumptions made to determine the forward looking economic scenarios and the probability weightings, taking into account a range of plausible economic recovery paths, have a significant impact on ECL provisions. As a result, we consider the judgements and assumptions used in the determination of forward looking macroeconomic scenarios and the probability weights in relation to the residential mortgage and corporate and commercial bank (CCB) loan portfolios to represent a key audit matter. The residential mortgage and CCB ECL models include complex and judgemental assumptions. We consider the appropriateness of key assumptions over future write-off rates used in the Loss Given Default (LGD) models for residential mortgages and the CCB portfolio to represent a key audit matter. In the CCB loan portfolios, individual impairment assessments are performed for certain credit impaired loans and advances which are categorised as Stage 3. Assumptions are required to be made in determining the level of any allowance and we consider the key audit matter to relate to key judgements involved in determining the estimated loss for the individually assessed cases, specifically around future cash-flow assumptions, which may include the valuation of collateral. | Testing of key controls We understood and evaluated the design of key controls over the determination of the ECL and tested their operating effectiveness. These controls included: – Model performance monitoring controls, including testing model estimates against actual outcomes; – The Asset and Liability Committee’s review and approval of the base case economic assumptions; – Review and approval of the appropriateness of the individually assessed provisions and the key assumptions used; and – The Credit Risk Provisions Forum's review and approval of the outer economic scenarios and weightings, significant judgements & estimates and the overall assessment of ECL outputs. In addition, we performed the procedures described below: Forward looking economic scenarios and scenario probability weightings (CCB and residential mortgages) – We used economics experts and credit risk modelling specialists to critically assess the reasonableness of the multiple economic scenarios and scenario probability weightings adopted by management; – We considered external economic data and consensus forecasts to assess whether management’s forecasts appropriately reflect the different possible paths that the economy could take; and – We compared the base scenario assumptions to other external consensus forecasts, and we considered the inferred GDP ‘time to recovery’ for each scenario based on historical distributions when evaluating the probability weights. Key assumptions used in the LGD models (CCB and residential mortgages) We evaluated the key assumptions used in the LGD models, with the support of our credit risk specialists, which included the following procedures: – A conceptual review of the LGD assumptions; – Inspected model monitoring results and independently replicated key elements of model monitoring; – Independently replicated management's methodology for all accounts in the residential mortgage and CCB portfolios to evaluate the appropriate implementation of the LGD models and assumptions; – Assessed the reasonableness of management's JA to the key LGD assumptions for the residential mortgage portfolio; and – Compared CCB LGDs to industry data. Individually assessed corporate Stage 3 cases (CCB) For a sample of credit impaired loans: – We evaluated the specific circumstances of the borrower and determined whether key judgements were appropriate; – We assessed the significant assumptions used to estimate the discounted cash flow projections, and where appropriate we involved experts to assess the underlying collateral or business valuations; and – We re-performed management’s impairment calculations and tested key inputs.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 115

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Key audit matter | How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Valuation of defined benefit pension surplus (group and company) |
Refer to note 1 (Accounting Policies) and note 28 (Retirement Benefit Plans). The group operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes, which in aggregate are in a surplus position of £502m as at 31 December 2025. The main scheme is the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme (the scheme). Defined benefit obligation (DBO): The valuation of the DBO of the scheme is dependent on a number of forward looking assumptions, the most significant of which are the discount rate, inflation and life expectancy. These assumptions are unobservable and complex to estimate due to the long duration of the pension obligation. Significant judgement is required in their determination and small changes in these assumptions can have a material impact on the valuation of the DBO. Management updates the valuation of the DBO, including assumptions incorporated within, each year with the assistance of external experts. The valuation of the defined benefit obligation is complex and judgemental and therefore represents a key audit matter. Retirement benefit assets: The scheme holds investments in certain illiquid assets, including commercial real estate and private equity funds, with underlying investments including private equity funds, unquoted corporate bonds and other assets not quoted in active markets. The valuations of these assets are derived from inputs or data that are unobservable. The commercial real estate is valued using bespoke and subjective valuation methods taking both the nature of the properties and the tenancy schedules as inputs to derive their fair value. The valuation of the investments in private equity funds is performed by the respective investment managers and is typically subject to a delay. These valuations are performed on either a Bid or Net Asset Value (NAV) basis, and are complex due to the subjectivity required in valuing the underlying unquoted investments, including the selection of unobservable inputs used in the valuation. Where necessary, these valuations are adjusted for any known cash movements and other movements in fair value arising during the period between the valuation date and the balance sheet date. The lack of observable inputs, subjectivity required in their valuation and in the case of private equity investments, the lag in valuation, gives rise to a high level of estimation uncertainty and therefore represents a key audit matter. | Testing of key controls We understood and evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of key controls relevant to the determination of the significant assumptions used in calculating the valuation of the DBO, and the valuation of the illiquid retirement benefit assets. These controls included: – Assessing the reasonableness and appropriateness of assumptions incorporated in the measurement of the DBO; – Reviewing on a quarterly basis the reasonableness and appropriateness of movements in the DBO. – Assessing on an annual basis the reliability of investment manager valuations by comparing the previous unaudited valuations received from investment managers against subsequently received audited financial statements prepared as at the equivalent date; – Assessing the reasonableness of the property valuations obtained from the custodian, by comparing them on a quarterly basis against the valuation obtained from management’s property valuer expert. Differences are analysed and investigated; and – Assessing on an annual basis the appropriateness of lagged valuations and potential fair value movements since the last valuation date with reference to relevant market information, such as industry indices. In addition, we performed the procedures described below: Defined benefit obligation – We used sensitivity analysis to determine the impact of alternative assumptions; – We used actuarial experts to evaluate the reasonableness and appropriateness of significant assumptions in the measurement of the DBO, including benchmarking against independently determined ranges of acceptable assumptions and consideration of external market data; – We considered the objectivity and competence of management’s actuarial expert. We reviewed the expert’s IAS 19 report and discussed with the expert the methods adopted to determine the valuation of the DBO as at the balance sheet date, including assumptions incorporated within; and – We evaluated the appropriateness of related financial statement disclosures. Retirement benefit assets: For commercial real estate, we: – Obtained the valuation report prepared by management's expert; – For a sample of properties, and with the support of our own expert, assessed the reasonableness of the valuation methodology adopted and key assumptions used by the valuer in order to conclude on the reasonableness and appropriateness of the valuation recorded as at the balance sheet date; and – Considered the objectivity and competence of management’s property valuation expert. For investments in private equity funds, we: – Obtained third-party confirmations directly from the respective investment managers and compared these against management’s reported valuations; – Where necessary, we recalculated management’s valuation and compared it to the third-party confirmations; – We understood and tested material adjustments recorded, including those recognised to account for capital changes in the period between the valuation and the balance sheet date where there was a time lag; – Assessed whether there was evidence which corroborated or contradicted the valuation recorded. For example; we compared previous unaudited valuations received from investment managers against audited financial statements prepared as at the equivalent date (where available) and analysed potential fair value movements since the last valuation date with reference to relevant market information, such as quoted indices and recent transactions; and – Where available, reviewed controls reports for the relevant investment managers.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 116

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Key audit matter | How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Impairment assessment of goodwill (group and company) |
Refer to the Board Audit Committee Chair’s report, note 1 (Accounting Policies) and note 19 (Intangible Assets). The goodwill balance was £1.2bn at 31 December 2025, which c.98% relates to the Personal Financial Services ('PFS') Cash Generating Unit ('CGU') within the Retail & Business Banking segment within Santander UK plc. The carrying value of goodwill is contingent on the estimates of future cash flows and profitability which are forecasted using assumptions that require significant management judgement. These assumptions and judgements are inherently uncertain and are impacted by the wider economic environment, including developments in the UK economy and the banking market as interest rates continue to fall, and uncertainty around the timing and quantum of future base rate changes. Management's impairment assessment used a value in use (VIU) methodology, concluding that no impairment existed as at 31 December 2025. The calculation of the VIU is complex and involves subjective assumptions, specifically, the determination of certain cash flow forecasts and the discount rate. Due to the magnitude of this balance and the judgements, this impairment assessment represents a key audit matter. | Testing of key controls We understood and evaluated the design and implementation of the key controls over the goodwill impairment assessment and the significant assumptions used in calculating the value in use. Impairment assessment of goodwill We evaluated management’s assessment and conclusion in the context of the requirements of IAS 36. Our work included the following: – We engaged experts to evaluate the appropriateness and reasonableness of the methodology and key assumptions used in the determination of the carrying value and VIU of the Personal Financial Services CGU, including: – determining an independent range for the discount rate using external data sources and peer bank data, and comparing it to the rate used by management; and – assessing the appropriateness of the methodology and adjustments for estimating the regulatory capital requirements and the apportionment made for capital retained in the business. – We agreed the cash flow forecasts to the Board approved three-year plan, and tested the reasonableness of adjustments to the plan included in the VIU model; – We evaluated the reasonableness and supportability of the cash flow forecasts, including comparing performance in recent years to the budgets and three-year plans for the equivalent periods to assess the historical accuracy of the budgeting and forecasting process; and – We assessed the reasonableness and supportability of the assumptions in the cash flow forecasts by engaging our economics experts to assess the economic assumptions in the plan, and by comparing key market assumptions against external data points and our understanding of the business’ strategy.
Specific customer remediation, litigation and regulatory matters (group and company) |
Refer to the Board Audit Committee Chair’s report, note 1 (Accounting Policies), note 27 (Provisions), note 30 (Contingent Liabilities and Commitments). Included within Provisions is the group’s best estimate of the cost of present obligations related to past events, including the impact of legal actions, customer remediation and regulatory investigations. Significant judgement may be required when accounting for provisions, including in determining whether a present obligation exists, and in estimating the probability and amount of any outflows. These judgements are based on the specific facts available and often require specialist professional advice. There can be a wide range of possible outcomes and uncertainties, particularly in relation to legal actions and regulatory investigations. As a result, it is sometimes not possible to make reliable estimates of the likelihood and amount of any potential outflows or not practicable to disclose an estimate of the financial effect of a contingent liability. The key matters are in relation to whether a reliable estimate of any outflows can be formed for an investigation by German authorities into tax arbitrage transactions, and the estimation of the provision for expected customer remediation costs in relation to historical commission arrangements on motor financing, most notably in relation to the scenarios chosen and weightings applied in estimating the provision. The potential cost to the group of each of these matters is material and due to the judgements in respect of these exposures represents a key audit matter. | Testing of key controls We understood and evaluated the design and implementation of the key controls over the assessment of the specific legal and customer remediation matters against the requirements of IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. We tested the operating effectiveness of management’s control related to the assessment of the ability to form a reliable estimate for the legal matter against the requirements of IAS 37 including the review and challenge of the assumptions used and conclusions reached. In addition, we performed the procedures described below: Specific customer remediation, litigation and regulatory matters Evaluated and challenged the provisioning methodologies and underlying assumptions used by management. Where no provision was made, we challenged management’s conclusion in the context of the requirements of IAS 37. Our work included the following: – We understood the status of the customer remediation and the legal matter; – We evaluated management’s assessment of the potential outcomes and associated probabilities; – We evaluated the advice received from management's external legal experts. We held discussions with these experts to confirm our understanding of their views on certain judgements applied by management and obtained a written confirmation of the key facts and status of each matter; – In relation to the investigation by German authorities, we engaged experts to assist us in evaluating the conclusions reached by management and the advice provided by management’s external legal experts. – In relation to the motor finance provision, we tested the data inputs and mathematical accuracy of the model and assessed the reasonableness of assumptions used in calculating the estimate, specifically those related to the scenarios chosen and weightings applied; and – We reviewed selected reports provided to governance committees and we discussed the status of the key matters with the Board Audit Committee. Given the uncertainty associated with the calculation of the provisions and the contingent liabilities, we evaluated the disclosures made in the financial statements. We considered the completeness of information disclosed, in particular where management concluded that it was not practicable to estimate and disclose the potential financial effect.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 117

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Key audit matter | How our audit addressed the key audit matter
Valuation of intercompany derivatives measured using significant unobservable inputs (company) |
Refer to Note 1 (Accounting policies) and Note 38 (Financial instruments). The company recognises on its balance sheet derivative financial instruments transacted with subsidiary undertakings as part of its covered bond programme. These instruments are measured at fair value. As explained in Note 38 to the financial statements, some of these derivative financial instruments are measured using valuation techniques that incorporate assumptions that are not evidenced by prices from observable current market transactions in the same instrument and are not based on observable market data. As such, the valuation requires the application of a significant degree of judgement. The significant unobservable inputs used in valuing these instruments are the weighted average rate expected to be paid on the mortgage portfolio over time, including assumptions regarding the prepayment and replenishment of mortgages in the portfolio, and the forecasted rates payable on these mortgages. As of 31 December 2025, the value of instruments which are sensitive to such inputs comprised derivative financial liabilities of £1.1bn. We determined that the measurement of the fair value for these derivatives represents a key audit matter given the degree of judgement in applying the relevant valuation technique and the fact that changing one or more of the significant unobservable inputs in the valuation models to reasonably possible alternative assumptions would change the fair values significantly. | Testing of key controls: We understood and evaluated the design and of key controls over the determination of the fair value and tested their operating effectiveness. These controls included: – Model performance monitoring controls, including analysis over changes in the model's inputs based on market conditions. In addition, we engaged our valuation experts to support us in performing the procedures described below: – Assessed the conceptual soundness and appropriateness of the model methodology applied to determine the fair value. – Evaluated whether the model implementation was consistent with the documented methodology by performing an independent replication of the model. – Evaluated the appropriateness of the assumptions adopted as at 31 December 2025, including the weighted average mortgage rate payable. This evaluation included our experts forming an independent expectation for unobservable inputs used to determine these assumptions and assessing the reasonableness of the assumptions against this expectation.

How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial statements as a whole, taking into
account the structure of the group and the company, the accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which they operate.
The group comprises the company and a number of subsidiaries which predominantly operate within the UK. The company is the largest operating subsidiary within
the group. We considered which entities (“components”) required a full scope audit either due to being individually significant due to size or due to their risk
characteristics, including a consideration of the history of misstatements due to fraud or error, in the context of the group’s consolidated financial statements. We
identified the significant audit risks and key audit matters which all relate to either the company, or Santander Consumer (UK) plc. Ultimately, we determined that
we would perform a full scope audit of the company, and Santander Consumer (UK) plc. For these components the work is largely performed by engagement teams
in the UK, led by the group audit partner and the Santander Consumer (UK) plc partner, with the teams structured in line with the group’s operating segments.
We then considered any non-significant components in the group that had either financially significant or unusual account balances. No such components were
identified.
Certain processes and controls supporting the group’s operations are performed as part of Banco Santander S.A.'s wider processes and controls in Spain, including
the hosting and monitoring of certain IT systems. In such instances, we instructed the auditor of centralised activities, located in Spain, to perform certain audit
procedures over these group operations.
As part of the planning and execution phases of the audit, we worked closely with the teams in Spain, and the UK to ensure that the procedures performed on our
behalf were sufficient for our purposes. We reviewed the results of their work and held meetings with the auditors to discuss their findings.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 118

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The impact of climate risk on our audit
The group, in alignment with the parent company, Banco Santander, S.A., has set out ambitions to be a net zero bank across all activities by 2050. Further
information on this ambition is provided in the Sustainability section, which starts on page 14.
In planning and executing our audit, we considered the group’s governance framework and risk assessment processes. This, together with our discussions with our
own climate risk experts, provided us with an understanding of the potential impacts of climate change on the financial statements. We specifically considered the
potential impact on the mortgage lending, corporate lending and consumer finance portfolios. We determined that the key financial statement line items and
estimates which were most likely to be impacted by climate risks were those associated with expected credit losses and related future cash flows. In the current
reporting period, the group concluded that it does not consider there to be a material impact on its critical judgements and accounting estimates in relation to
climate related risks, and that the more notable impacts of climate change on the business are expected to arise in the medium to long term based on their
scenarios analysis.
Whilst the group is targeting net zero carbon emissions across all its activities by 2050, the plans to achieve this continue to be refined. The group has started to
quantify some impacts that may arise, however, the future financial impacts are uncertain given the medium to long term time horizon. We discussed with
management and the Board Audit Committee that the estimated financial impacts of climate change will need to be frequently reassessed, and our expectation is
that climate change disclosures will continue to evolve as greater understanding of the actual and potential impacts on the group’s future operations is obtained.
We read the climate risk disclosures included in the other information within the Annual Report to ascertain whether the disclosures are materially consistent with
the financial statements and our knowledge from our audit.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 119

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. These, together with qualitative
considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement line
items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate, on the financial statements as a whole.
Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

| Financial statements - group | Financial statements - company
Overall materiality | £80 million (2024: £80 million). | £76 million (2024: £76 million).
How we determined it | Approximately 5% of adjusted profit before tax (2024: 5% of adjusted profit before tax) | Approximately 5% of adjusted profit before tax (2024: 5% of adjusted profit before tax), capped at the level which is used for the audit of the company as a component of the overall group.
Rationale for benchmark applied | We set materiality using a benchmark of profit before tax (PBT), adjusted for certain non-recurring items, as these items do not reflect the underlying business performance and are not expected to recur. Adjusted PBT is a generally accepted benchmark for determining audit materiality. | We set materiality using a benchmark of profit before tax (PBT), adjusted for certain items including gains recognised by the company on certain intercompany derivative positions held with certain subsidiary undertakings. Adjusted PBT is a generally accepted benchmark for determining audit materiality.

For each component in the scope of our group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall group materiality. The range of materiality allocated
across components was between £35 million and £76 million.
We use performance materiality to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds
overall materiality. Specifically, we use performance materiality in determining the scope of our audit and the nature and extent of our testing of account balances,
classes of transactions and disclosures, for example in determining sample sizes. Our performance materiality was 75% (2024: 75%) of overall materiality,
amounting to £60 million (2024: £60 million) for the group financial statements and £57m (2024: £57m) for the company financial statements.
In determining the performance materiality, we considered a number of factors - the history of misstatements, risk assessment and aggregation risk and the
effectiveness of controls - and concluded that an amount at the upper end of our normal range was appropriate.
We agreed with the Board Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £4 million (group audit) (2024:
£4 million) and £4 million (company audit) (2024: £4 million) as well as misstatements below those amounts that, in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative
reasons.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 120

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Conclusions relating to going concern
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group's and the company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:
– A risk assessment to identify factors that could impact the going concern basis of accounting, including the current and forecast financial performance, regulatory
metrics and the sector in which the group operates;
– Understanding and evaluation of the group's strategic plans, the group's stress testing of liquidity and regulatory capital performed;
– Enquiries of regulators and review of selected regulatory correspondence, including the key reports provided to governance forums, and testing of the total
capital resources and liquidity financing facilities;
– Consideration of credit rating agency ratings; and
– Reviewing the appropriateness of the disclosures made in the Annual Report in relation to going concern.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast
significant doubt on the group's and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements
are authorised for issue.
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial
statements is appropriate.
However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this conclusion is not a guarantee as to the group's and the company's ability to continue as a
going concern.
In relation to the directors’ reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation
to the directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.
Reporting on other information
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our auditors’ report thereon. The directors are
responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, accordingly, we do not express an audit
opinion or, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, any form of assurance thereon.
In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information
is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify an
apparent material inconsistency or material misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to conclude whether there is a material misstatement of the
financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material
misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report based on these responsibilities.
With respect to the Strategic report and Directors' report, we also considered whether the disclosures required by the UK Companies Act 2006 have been included.
Based on our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006 requires us also to report certain opinions and matters as described below.
Strategic report and Directors' report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic report and Directors' report for the year ended
31 December 2025 is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we did not identify any material
misstatements in the Strategic report and Directors' report.
Corporate governance statement
ISAs (UK) require us to review the directors’ statements in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the corporate governance statement
relating to the company’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code, which the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority specify
for review by the auditor. Our additional responsibilities with respect to the corporate governance statement as other information are described in the Reporting on
other information section of this report.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the corporate governance statement, included within
the Director's report, is materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit, and we have nothing material to add or
draw attention to in relation to:
– The directors’ confirmation that they have carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks;
– The disclosures in the Annual Report that describe those principal risks, what procedures are in place to identify emerging risks and an explanation of how these
are being managed or mitigated;
– The directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether they considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing
them, and their identification of any material uncertainties to the group’s and company’s ability to continue to do so over a period of at least twelve months from
the date of approval of the financial statements;
– The directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the group's and company’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate;
and
– The directors’ statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the company will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they
fall due over the period of its assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.
Our review of the directors’ statement regarding the longer-term viability of the group and company was substantially less in scope than an audit and only
consisted of making inquiries and considering the directors’ process supporting their statement; checking that the statement is in alignment with the relevant
provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code; and considering whether the statement is consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge and
understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit.
In addition, based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the corporate governance statement is
materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge obtained during the audit:
– The directors’ statement that they consider the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable, and provides the information necessary for
the members to assess the group’s and company's position, performance, business model and strategy;
– The section of the Annual Report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems; and
– The section of the Annual Report describing the work of the Board Audit Committee.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 121

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

We have nothing to report in respect of our responsibility to report when the directors’ statement relating to the company’s compliance with the Code does not
properly disclose a departure from a relevant provision of the Code specified under the Listing Rules for review by the auditors.
Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit
Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors' responsibilities, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in accordance
with the applicable framework and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. The directors are also responsible for such internal control as they
determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as
applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the
company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.
Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or
error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if,
individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to
detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including
fraud, is detailed below.
Based on our understanding of the group and industry, we identified that the principal risks of non-compliance with laws and regulations related to breaches of
banking laws and regulations, including regulatory reporting requirements and conduct of business, and we considered the extent to which non-compliance might
have a material effect on the financial statements. We also considered those laws and regulations that have a direct impact on the financial statements such as the
Companies Act 2006 and relevant tax legislation. We evaluated management’s incentives and opportunities for fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements
(including the risk of override of controls), and determined that the principal risks were related to posting inappropriate journal entries, and management bias in
significant accounting estimates. The group engagement team shared this risk assessment with the component auditors so that they could include appropriate
audit procedures in response to such risks in their work. Audit procedures performed by the group engagement team and/or component auditors included:
– Making inquiries of the group's management, including the Chief Financial Officer, Internal Audit, those charged with governance, and General Counsel, in
relation to known or suspected instances of non-compliance with laws and regulation and fraud;
– Evaluation of the completeness of matters identified by management which might impact financial reporting, including but not restricted to, the procedures
below:
– Evaluation and testing of the operating effectiveness of certain entity level controls designed to prevent and detect irregularities in financial reporting, in
particular their code of conduct and whistleblowing helpline;
– Assessment of matters reported on the group’s whistleblowing helpline and the results of management’s investigation of such matters;
– Observing the effectiveness of key governance forums, reviewing management information presented and reviewing minutes from meetings of the Board of
Directors, Executive Committee, Board Audit Committee, Board Risk Committee, Board Results Committee, Responsible Banking Committee and the Assets
and Liabilities Committee;
– Reviewing key correspondence with the Financial Conduct Authority and Prudential Regulation Authority as well as meeting with, and making enquiries of
these regulators during the year;
– Assessing for bias in significant accounting estimates, in particular in relation to the expected credit loss allowance for loans and advances to customers, specific
customer remediation, litigation and regulatory matters, the valuation of the defined benefit pension surplus, the impairment assessment of goodwill and the
valuation of intercompany derivatives measured using significant unobservable inputs (company) (see related key audit matters above);
– Identifying and testing journal entries based on a defined risk criteria set, including journals posted using unusual account combinations, unusual words
describing the journal posted, and unexpected users posting journals; and
– Incorporating an element of unpredictability into the nature, timing and/or extent of our testing.
There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described above. We are less likely to become aware of instances of non-compliance with laws and
regulations that are not closely related to events and transactions reflected in the financial statements. Also, the risk of not detecting a material misstatement due
to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, forgery or intentional
misrepresentations, or through collusion.
Our audit testing might include testing complete populations of certain transactions and balances, possibly using data auditing techniques. However, it typically
involves selecting a limited number of items for testing, rather than testing complete populations. We will often seek to target particular items for testing based on
their size or risk characteristics. In other cases, we will use audit sampling to enable us to draw a conclusion about the population from which the sample is
selected.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This
description forms part of our auditors’ report.
Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies
Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this
report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.
Other required reporting
Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
– we have not obtained all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
– adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
– certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
– the company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 122

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Appointment
We were first appointed by the company for the financial year ended 31 December 2016. Our uninterrupted engagement covers 10 financial years.
Other matter
The company is required by the Financial Conduct Authority Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules to include these financial statements in an annual financial
report prepared under the structured digital format required by DTR 4.1.15R - 4.1.18R and filed on the National Storage Mechanism of the Financial Conduct
Authority. This auditors’ report provides no assurance over whether the structured digital format annual financial report has been prepared in accordance with those
requirements.
Ian Godsmark (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
London
9 March 2026

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 123

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Santander UK plc
Opinion on the Financial Statements
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of 31 December 2025 and 2024, and
the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in equity and consolidated
cash flow statements for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2025, including the related notes (collectively referred to as the “consolidated
financial statements”). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of 31
December 2025 and 2024, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2025 in conformity with
(i) International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and (ii) UK-adopted International Accounting Standards.
Basis for Opinion
These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s
consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and
regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.
We conducted our audits of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and
perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or
fraud. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. As part of our audits, we are
required to obtain an understanding of internal control over financial reporting but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the
Company's internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion.
Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and
performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the
consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as
evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
Critical Audit Matters
The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the consolidated financial statements that were communicated
or required to be communicated to the Board Audit Committee and that (i) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the consolidated financial
statements and (ii) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgements. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way
our opinion on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate
opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.
Credit impairment loss allowance on loans and advances to customers
As described in Notes 1, 13 and 27 to the consolidated financial statements, an expected credit loss ('ECL') is recognised for financial assets measured at amortised
cost. The measurement of ECL reflects: a probability weighted amount that is determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes; the time value of money; and
reasonable and supportable information that is available without undue cost or effort at the reporting date about past events, current conditions and forecasts of
future economic conditions. Management calculates ECL using the following factors: a survival rate ('SR'), a probability of default ('PD'), the exposure at default
(‘EAD’) and a loss given default (‘LGD’). The application of the ECL impairment methodology for calculating credit impairment loss allowances is susceptible to
change from period to period and requires management to make judgemental assumptions in determining the estimates. The key estimates made by management
in applying the ECL impairment methodology for the residential mortgages and Corporate and Commercial Bank ('CCB') portfolios are: (i) the forward looking
multiple economic scenarios; (ii) the probability weights assigned to multiple economic scenarios; and (iii) the expected future cash flows and collateral valuations
of individually assessed corporate exposures. The LGD is expressed as a percentage and is calculated based on value of subsequent write offs. The ECL allowance
was £813 million as of 31 December 2025.
The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the credit impairment loss allowance on loans and advances to customers
is a critical audit matter are due to the following significant judgements in assumptions being applied by management in the residential mortgages and CCB
portfolios: (i) the forward looking economic scenarios; (ii) the probability weights applied to those scenarios; (iii) the key assumptions used in the LGD models
related to subsequent write offs; and (iv) individual corporate provisions. This in turn led to a high degree of auditor judgement, subjectivity and effort in performing
procedures and evaluating audit evidence related to the methodology and judgement in assumptions used to determine the allowance; and the audit effort
involved the use of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge.
Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial
statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the credit impairment loss allowance on loans and advances to customers.
These procedures also included, among others, testing management’s process for estimating expected credit losses; evaluating the appropriateness of model
methodologies; testing the completeness and accuracy of underlying data used in determining the accounting estimate; evaluating the reasonableness of
management’s assumptions related to (i) forward looking multiple economic scenarios; (ii) the probability weights applied to multiple economic scenarios; (iii) the
subsequent write offs incorporated into the LGD model; and (iv) expected future cash flows and collateral valuations of individually assessed corporate exposures;
and evaluating the disclosures made in the consolidated financial statements in relation to the credit impairment loss allowance on loans and advances to
customers. Professionals with specialised skill and knowledge were used to assist in evaluating the reasonableness of the forward-looking economic scenarios,
probability weight assumptions, key assumptions used in the LGD model related to subsequent write offs, and expected future cash flows and collateral valuations
on individually assessed corporate loans.
Valuation of defined benefit pension surplus
As described in Notes 1 and 28 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes. The main scheme is
the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme (the “Scheme”). The funded defined benefit pension surplus was £502 million as of 31 December 2025. Any surplus or
deficit of scheme assets over liabilities is recognised in the balance sheet as an asset (surplus) or liability (deficit). Management estimates the present value of the
defined benefit obligation by projecting forward the growth in current accrued pension benefits to reflect inflation and salary growth to the date of pension
payment. This is then discounted to present value. In determining the value of scheme liabilities, demographic and financial assumptions are made by management
about the life expectancy of the beneficiaries, inflation and discount rates. The scheme invests in certain assets whose values are not based on market observable
data. These assets include investments in private equity funds and bonds, as well as property, and infrastructure, which are valued by reference to the latest
manager statements provided by the managers, adjusted for any cash movements since the latest valuation, with the exception of property, where the underlying
asset valuations are determined by an independent expert.
The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the valuation of the defined benefit pension surplus is a critical audit
matter are the significant judgements made by management in determining (i) the life expectancy of the beneficiaries, inflation and discount rate assumptions; and

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 124

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

(ii) the fair value of the assets with no market observable valuation inputs, including adjustments for any potential fair value movements since the last valuation
date. This, in turn, led to significant auditor judgement, subjectivity and effort in performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence. The audit effort involved the
use of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge.
Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial
statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the valuation of the defined benefit pension obligation and the valuation of
assets with no market observable data. These procedures also included, among others, evaluating the defined benefit pension obligation by (1) testing the
completeness, accuracy and relevance of the underlying data; and (2) involving professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in (a) assessing the
appropriateness of the methodologies used by management to determine the inflation rate, the discount rate and life expectancy assumptions; (b) developing an
independent range for these assumptions; and (c) comparing the independent range for these assumptions to management's assumptions to evaluate the
reasonableness of management’s assumptions. Procedures over directly held property included, among others (i) the involvement of professionals with specialised
skill and knowledge to assist in assessing the appropriateness of the methodology and reasonableness of the key assumptions used by management’s expert valuer
for property; and (ii) evaluating the reasonableness of the valuation for a sample of properties. For the other assets with no market observable valuation inputs, the
procedures included, among others, (i) obtaining third-party confirmations of the valuation directly from investment managers and comparing these against
management’s reported values; (ii) recalculating management’s valuation calculations and comparing our recalculation to the third-party confirmations, and, if
applicable, testing material capital changes in the period between the valuation date and the entity’s balance sheet date; and (iii) assessing other evidence regarding
the valuations, such as performing a retrospective review of historical valuations used by management against the audited fund financial statements as at the
equivalent date and reviewing controls reports for the investment managers, where available.
Goodwill impairment assessment - for the personal financial services cash generating unit
As described in Notes 1 and 19 to the consolidated financial statements, the carrying value of goodwill relating to the personal financial services (‘PFS’) cash
generating unit (“CGU”) was £1.2 billion as of December 31, 2025. Management undertakes an annual assessment to evaluate whether the carrying value of
goodwill is impaired, carrying out this assessment more frequently if reviews identify indicators of impairment or when events or changes in circumstances dictate.
Impairment is required where the carrying amount of goodwill exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount of the CGU was determined based on the
value in use (“VIU”) methodology at each testing date. The VIU is calculated by discounting the cash flow projections for the CGU. The goodwill impairment
assessment is based on key judgements including the testing methodology, planning assumptions and internal capital allocations. The estimation of future cash
flows and the level to which they are discounted is inherently uncertain and requires significant judgement and is subject to potential change over time. Estimates
include forecast cash flows for the CGU and discount rates which factor in risk-free rates and applicable risk premiums.
The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the goodwill impairment assessment for the PFS CGU is a critical audit
matter are due to the significant judgements by management in developing (i) the forecast cash flows and (ii) the discount rate. This, in turn, led to significant
auditor judgement, subjectivity and effort in performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence related to management’s judgements and assumptions. In
addition, the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge.
Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial
statements. These procedures included, among others (i) testing management’s process for determining the carrying value of the PFS CGU, including internal
capital allocations; (ii) evaluating the appropriateness of the methodology used to estimate the VIU; (iii) testing the completeness and accuracy of underlying data
used in the model; (iv) comparing an independent range of assumptions for the discount rate to management’s rate to evaluate the reasonableness of
management’s discount rate; (v) evaluating the reasonableness of the forecasted cash flows, including comparing performance in recent years to the 3 years-plan
for the equivalent periods and (vi) assessing the appropriateness of the related disclosures. Professionals with specialised skill and knowledge assisted in the
evaluation of the reasonableness of the discount rate and assessing the determination of the carrying value of the PFS CGU.
Specific customer remediation, litigation and regulatory matters
As described in Notes 1, 27 and 30 to the consolidated financial statements, as of 31 December 2025, the provision for customer remediation, litigation and other
regulatory matters of XXX million includes, among other items, provisions relating to a court claim and complaints in respect of historical motor finance broker
commissions for Santander Consumer (UK) plc. There is also an ongoing investigation in relation to the historical involvement of Santander UK plc, Santander
Financial Services plc and Cater Allen International Limited in German dividend tax arbitrage transactions for which management has determined that there are
uncertainties that mean it is not currently possible to make a reliable assessment of the size of any potential liability. Significant judgement may be required when
accounting for provisions, including in determining whether a present obligation exists, determining the likely outcome of future legal decisions and in estimating
the probability, timing, nature and amount of any outflows that may arise from past events. These judgements are based on the specific facts available and often
require specialist professional advice. There can be a wide range of possible outcomes and uncertainties, particularly in relation to legal actions, and regulatory and
consumer credit matters.
The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the specific customer remediation, litigation and regulatory matters is a
critical audit matter are the significant judgements made by management when estimating the probability, timing, nature and amount of any outflows for the
motor finance broker commissions court claim and complaints, and the German dividend tax arbitrage investigation. This in turn led to a high degree of auditor
judgement, subjectivity and effort in performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence related to management’s assessment of the specific customer
remediation, litigation and regulatory matters.
Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial
statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to management’s assessment of the specific customer remediation, litigation
and regulatory matters against the requirements of IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. These procedures also included, among others
(i) inquiries of internal legal counsel on the developments in respect to the significant case; (ii) obtaining and evaluating letters of audit inquiry from external legal
counsel; (iii) evaluating the reasonableness of management’s assessment regarding the probability of an outflow and the estimated amount of the obligation,
whether a reliable estimate can be formed; and (iv) evaluating the sufficiency of the disclosures made in relation to the matter.
[/s/] PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
London, United Kingdom
9 March 2026
We have served as the Company's auditor since 2016.
Note: The draft Critical Audit Matters (CAMs) presented herein are necessarily preliminary based upon the incomplete nature of our audit and may change upon
finalisation of our audit. Accordingly, the information contained in these draft CAMs (i) may not be reflective of final conclusions or language relative to the current
period audit, (ii) should not be viewed or relied upon as forming the basis for our audit conclusions or opinion, and (iii) may not be reflective of the matters or
content that may ultimately be reported as [a] CAMs upon completion of our audit.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 125

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 126

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 127

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 128

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 129

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 130

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 131

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 132

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 133

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 134

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Consolidated Income Statement
For the year ended 31 December

|  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| Notes | £m | £m | £m
Interest and similar income | 3 | 11,541 | 12,439 | 11,617
Interest expense and similar charges | 3 | (7,161) | (8,127) | (6,959)
Net interest income |  | 4,380 | 4,312 | 4,658
Fee and commission income | 4 | 752 | 733 | 804
Fee and commission expense | 4 | (419) | (481) | (501)
Net fee and commission income |  | 333 | 252 | 303
Other operating income | 5 | 16 | 93 | 135
Total operating income |  | 4,729 | 4,657 | 5,096
Operating expenses before credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | 6 | (2,457) | (2,548) | (2,456)
Credit impairment charges | 8 | (193) | (71) | (205)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges | 8 | (597) | (689) | (335)
Total credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | 8 | (790) | (760) | (540)
Profit before tax |  | 1,482 | 1,349 | 2,100
Tax on profit | 9 | (396) | (378) | (559)
Profit after tax |  | 1,086 | 971 | 1,541

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 135

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
For the year ended 31 December

|  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| Notes | £m | £m | £m
Profit after tax |  | 1,086 | 971 | 1,541
Other comprehensive income/(expense) that may be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently: |  |  |  |
Movement in fair value reserve (debt instruments): |  |  |  |
- Change in fair value |  | 49 | (20) | 89
- Income statement transfers |  | (33) | 5 | (105)
- Taxation | 9 | (5) | 4 | 5
|  | 11 | (11) | (11)
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |
- Effective portion of changes in fair value | 11 | 197 | (457) | (169)
- Income statement transfers | 11 | 536 | 500 | 1,248
- Taxation |  | (204) | (12) | (299)
|  | 529 | 31 | 780
Cost of hedging: |  |  |  |
- Cost of hedging (losses) |  | (22) | — | —
- Income statement transfers |  | 1 | — | —
- Taxation |  | 1 | — | —
|  | (20) | — | —
Currency translation on foreign operations |  | (1) | — | —
Net other comprehensive income that may be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently |  | 519 | 20 | 769
Other comprehensive (expense)/income that will not be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently: |  |  |  |
Pension remeasurement: |  |  |  |
- Change in fair value | 28 | (100) | (402) | (598)
- Taxation | 9 | 28 | 113 | 167
|  | (72) | (289) | (431)
Own credit adjustment: |  |  |  |
- Change in fair value |  | (1) | (17) | (15)
- Taxation | 9 | — | 5 | 4
|  | (1) | (12) | (11)
Net other comprehensive (expense) that will not be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently |  | (73) | (301) | (442)
Total other comprehensive income/(expense) net of tax |  | 446 | (281) | 327
Total comprehensive income |  | 1,532 | 690 | 1,868

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 136

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Consolidated Balance Sheet
At 31 December 2025

|  | 2025 | 2024
| Notes | £m | £m
Assets |  |  |
Cash and balances at central banks |  | 29,376 | 29,881
Derivative financial instruments | 11 | 870 | 1,204
Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss | 12 | 64 | 136
Loans and advances to banks |  | 1,048 | 1,032
Loans and advances to customers | 13 | 202,609 | 199,408
Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading | 16 | 17,678 | 10,338
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 17 | 3,987 | 3,408
Macro hedge of interest rate risk |  | (80) | (738)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income |  | 5,216 | 9,040
Interests in other entities | 18 | 293 | 289
Intangible assets | 19 | 1,511 | 1,539
Property, plant and equipment | 20 | 1,511 | 1,563
Current tax assets | 9 | 355 | 506
Retirement benefit assets | 28 | 524 | 439
Other assets |  | 1,857 | 1,887
Assets held for sale | 40 | 18 | 12
Total assets |  | 266,837 | 259,944
Liabilities |  |  |
Deposits by banks | 21 | 6,628 | 13,993
Deposits by customers | 22 | 187,300 | 180,967
Repurchase agreements - non-trading | 23 | 9,029 | 8,617
Derivative financial instruments | 11 | 687 | 702
Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss | 24 | 1,250 | 1,055
Debt securities in issue | 25 | 41,388 | 35,673
Macro hedge of interest rate risk |  | 60 | 47
Other liabilities | 26 | 2,173 | 1,852
Provisions | 27 | 683 | 611
Deferred tax liabilities | 9 | 437 | 246
Retirement benefit obligations | 28 | 22 | 23
Subordinated liabilities | 29 | 2,032 | 2,385
Total liabilities |  | 251,689 | 246,171
Equity |  |  |
Share capital | 31 | 3,105 | 3,105
Share premium | 31 | 1,119 | 5,620
Other equity instruments | 32 | 1,860 | 1,860
Other reserves |  | 186 | (333)
Retained earnings |  | 8,878 | 3,521
Total equity |  | 15,148 | 13,773
Total liabilities and equity |  | 266,837 | 259,944

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
The Financial Statements were approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 9 March 2026 and signed on its behalf by:

Mahesh Aditya | Angel Santodomingo
Chief Executive Officer | Chief Financial Officer
Company Registered Numb er: 02294747 |

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 137

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
For the year ended 31 December

|  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| Notes | £m | £m | £m
Cash flows from operating activities |  |  |  |
Profit before tax |  | 1,482 | 1,349 | 2,100
Adjustments for: |  |  |  |
Non-cash items included in profit |  |  |  |
– Depreciation and amortisation | 6 | 322 | 300 | 290
– Loss from disposal of mortgage portfolio |  | — | 31 | —
– Provisions for other liabilities and charges |  | 597 | 689 | 335
– Impairment losses |  | 207 | 94 | 195
– Other non-cash items |  | (4) | 65 | (749)
– Pension charge for defined benefit pension schemes |  | 8 | 13 | 13
|  | 1,130 | 1,192 | 84
Net change in operating assets and liabilities: |  |  |  |
– Cash and balances at central banks |  | 140 | 731 | (88)
– Derivative assets |  | 334 | 228 | 975
– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss |  | 72 | 130 | 40
– Loans and advances to banks and customers |  | (3,403) | 8,065 | 12,112
– Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading |  | (7,340) | 2,130 | (5,120)
– Other assets |  | (70) | 118 | (141)
– Deposits by banks and customers |  | (1,130) | (16,059) | (13,504)
– Repurchase agreements - non-trading |  | 412 | 206 | 429
– Derivative liabilities |  | (15) | (116) | (133)
– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss |  | 241 | 179 | 102
– Debt securities in issue |  | 38 | 212 | 962
– Other liabilities |  | (299) | (1,403) | (67)
|  | (11,020) | (5,579) | (4,433)
Corporation taxes paid | 9 | (46) | (240) | (537)
Effects of exchange rate differences |  | (344) | (53) | (518)
Net cash flows from operating activities |  | (8,798) | (3,331) | (3,304)
Cash flows from investing activities |  |  |  |
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets |  | (407) | (528) | (385)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets |  | 161 | 148 | 175
Purchase of financial assets at amortised cost and financial assets at FVOCI |  | (1,981) | (10,343) | (10,899)
Proceeds from sale and redemption of financial assets at amortised cost and financial assets at FVOCI |  | 5,184 | 6,183 | 8,362
Net cash flows from investing activities |  | 2,957 | (4,540) | (2,747)
Cash flows from financing activities |  |  |  |
Issue of other equity instruments | 33 | 500 | 400 | —
Issue of debt securities and subordinated notes |  | 9,833 | 8,425 | 5,276
Issuance costs of debt securities and subordinated notes |  | (24) | (28) | (18)
Repayment of debt securities and subordinated notes |  | (4,219) | (6,539) | (3,539)
Repurchase of other equity instruments | 33 | (500) | (500) | —
Dividends paid on ordinary shares | 10 | (26) | (1,311) | (1,530)
Dividends paid on preference shares and other equity instruments |  | (132) | (129) | (123)
Principal elements of lease payments | 33 | (22) | (33) | (47)
Net cash flows from financing activities |  | 5,410 | 285 | 19
Change in cash and cash equivalents |  | (431) | (7,586) | (6,032)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year |  | 29,181 | 36,781 | 42,871
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents |  | (12) | (14) | (58)
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year |  | 28,738 | 29,181 | 36,781
Cash and cash equivalents consist of: |  |  |  |
Cash and balances at central banks |  | 29,376 | 29,881 | 38,214
Less: restricted balances |  | (1,440) | (1,580) | (2,311)
|  | 27,936 | 28,301 | 35,903
Other cash equivalents: Loans and advances to banks - non-trading |  | 802 | 880 | 878
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year |  | 28,738 | 29,181 | 36,781

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 138

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

|  |  |  | Other reserves |
| Share capital | Share premium | Other equity instruments | Fair value | Cash flow hedging | Cost of hedging | Currency translation | Retained earnings |
| Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,860 | (17) | (317) | — | 1 | 3,521 | 13,773
Profit after tax | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1,086 | 1,086
Other comprehensive income/(expense), net of tax: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
- Fair value reserve (debt instruments) | — | — | — | 11 | — | — | — | — | 11
- Cash flow hedges | — | — | — | — | 529 | — | — | — | 529
- Cost of hedging | — | — | — | — | — | (20) | — | — | (20)
- Pension remeasurement | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (72) | (72)
- Own credit adjustment | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1) | (1)
- Currency translation on foreign operations | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1) | — | (1)
Total other comprehensive income/(expense) | — | — | — | 11 | 529 | (20) | (1) | (73) | 446
Total comprehensive income/(expense) | — | — | — | 11 | 529 | (20) | (1) | 1,013 | 1,532
Capital reduction | — | (4,501) | — | — | — | — | — | 4,501 | —
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 500 | — | — | — | — | — | 500
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (500) | — | — | — | — | — | (500)
Other | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1 | 1
Dividends on ordinary shares | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (26) | (26)
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (132) | (132)
At 31 December 2025 | 3,105 | 1,119 | 1,860 | (6) | 212 | (20) | — | 8,878 | 15,148
At 1 January 2024 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,956 | (6) | (348) | — | 1 | 4,295 | 14,623
Profit after tax | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 971 | 971
Other comprehensive (expense)/income, net of tax: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
- Fair value reserve (debt instruments) | — | — | — | (11) | — | — | — | — | (11)
- Cash flow hedges | — | — | — | — | 31 | — | — | — | 31
- Pension remeasurement | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (289) | (289)
- Own credit adjustment | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (12) | (12)
Total other comprehensive (expense)/income | — | — | — | (11) | 31 | — | — | (301) | (281)
Total comprehensive (expense)/income | — | — | — | (11) | 31 | — | — | 670 | 690
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 400 | — | — | — | — | — | 400
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (496) | — | — | — | — | (4) | (500)
Dividends on ordinary shares | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1,311) | (1,311)
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (129) | (129)
At 31 December 2024 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,860 | (17) | (317) | — | 1 | 3,521 | 13,773
At 1 January 2023 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,956 | 5 | (1,128) | — | 1 | 4,848 | 14,407
Profit after tax | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1,541 | 1,541
Other comprehensive (expense)/income, net of tax: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
- Fair value reserve (debt instruments) | — | — | — | (11) | — | — | — | — | (11)
- Cash flow hedges | — | — | — | — | 780 | — | — | — | 780
- Pension remeasurement | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (431) | (431)
- Own credit adjustment | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (11) | (11)
Total other comprehensive (expense)/income | — | — | — | (11) | 780 | — | — | (442) | 327
Total comprehensive (expense)/income | — | — | — | (11) | 780 | — | — | 1,099 | 1,868
Other | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1 | 1
Dividends on ordinary shares | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1,530) | (1,530)
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | (123) | (123)
At 31 December 2023 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,956 | (6) | (348) | — | 1 | 4,295 | 14,623

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 139

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Company Balance Sheet
At 31 December 2025

|  | 2025 | 2024
| Notes | £m | £m
Assets |  |  |
Cash and balances at central banks |  | 29,376 | 29,881
Derivative financial instruments | 11 | 967 | 1,482
Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss | 12 | 40 | 100
Loans and advances to banks |  | 990 | 926
Loans and advances to customers | 13 | 222,467 | 217,780
Reverse repurchase agreements – non-trading | 16 | 17,678 | 10,338
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 17 | 5,754 | 5,206
Macro hedge of interest rate risk |  | (224) | (910)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income |  | 5,216 | 9,040
Interests in other entities | 18 | 1,281 | 1,257
Intangible assets | 19 | 1,469 | 1,498
Property, plant and equipment | 20 | 926 | 973
Current tax assets | 9 | 395 | 528
Retirement benefit assets | 28 | 524 | 439
Other assets |  | 1,759 | 1,803
Assets held for sale | 40 | 18 | 12
Total assets |  | 288,636 | 280,353
Liabilities |  |  |
Deposits by banks | 21 | 11,126 | 19,521
Deposits by customers | 22 | 211,643 | 201,215
Repurchase agreements non-trading | 23 | 9,029 | 8,617
Derivative financial instruments | 11 | 2,132 | 2,607
Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss | 24 | 1,250 | 1,055
Debt securities in issue | 25 | 35,797 | 31,833
Macro hedge of interest rate risk |  | 27 | (9)
Other liabilities | 26 | 1,949 | 1,789
Provisions | 27 | 238 | 313
Deferred tax liabilities | 9 | 372 | 130
Retirement benefit obligations | 28 | 22 | 23
Subordinated liabilities | 29 | 2,033 | 2,386
Total liabilities |  | 275,618 | 269,480
Equity |  |  |
Share capital | 31 | 3,105 | 3,105
Share premium | 31 | 1,119 | 5,620
Other equity instruments | 32 | 1,860 | 1,860
Other reserves |  | 180 | (306)
Retained earnings |  | 6,754 | 594
Total shareholders’ equity |  | 13,018 | 10,873
Total liabilities and equity |  | 288,636 | 280,353

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Financial Statements.
The profit after tax of the Company was £1,890m (2024: £313m). As permitted by Section 408 of the UK Companies Act 2006, the Company’s Income Statement
has not been presented.
The Financial Statements were approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 9 March 2026 and signed on its behalf by:

Mahesh Aditya | Angel Santodomingo
Chief Executive Officer | Chief Financial Officer

Company Registered Number: 02294747

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 140

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Company Cash Flow Statement
For the year ended 31 December

|  | 2025 | 2024
| Notes | £m | £m
Cash flows from operating activities |  |  |
Profit before tax |  | 2,342 | 659
Adjustments for: |  |  |
Non-cash items included in profit |  |  |
– Depreciation and amortisation | 6 | 241 | 238
– Loss from disposal of mortgage portfolio |  | — | 31
– Provisions for other liabilities and charges |  | 374 | 356
– Impairment losses |  | 191 | 164
– Other non-cash items |  | (108) | (282)
– Pension charge for defined benefit pension schemes |  | 8 | 13
|  | 706 | 520
Net change in operating assets and liabilities: |  |  |
– Cash and balances at central banks |  | 140 | 731
– Derivative assets |  | 515 | 213
– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss |  | 60 | 116
– Loans and advances to banks and customers |  | (4,807) | 5,947
– Reverse repurchase agreements – non-trading |  | (7,340) | 2,130
– Other assets |  | (89) | 64
– Deposits by banks and customers |  | 1,938 | (12,320)
– Repurchase agreements – non-trading |  | 412 | 206
– Derivative liabilities |  | (475) | 633
– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss |  | 241 | 179
– Debt securities in issue |  | 43 | 218
– Other liabilities |  | (424) | (1,377)
|  | (9,786) | (3,260)
Corporation taxes paid | 9 | (48) | (172)
Effects of exchange rate differences |  | (344) | (53)
Net cash flows from operating activities |  | (7,130) | (2,306)
Cash flows from investing activities |  |  |
Investments in other entities |  | (25) | —
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets |  | (188) | (221)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets |  | 18 | 5
Purchase of financial assets at amortised cost and financial assets at FVOCI |  | (2,153) | (11,325)
Proceeds from sale and redemption of financial assets at amortised cost and financial assets at FVOCI |  | 5,384 | 7,048
Net cash flows from investing activities |  | 3,036 | (4,493)
Cash flows from financing activities |  |  |
Issue of other equity instruments | 33 | 500 | 400
Issue of debt securities and subordinated notes |  | 8,132 | 7,175
Issuance costs of debt securities and subordinated notes |  | (24) | (28)
Repayment of debt securities and subordinated notes |  | (4,219) | (6,439)
Repurchase of other equity instruments | 33 | (500) | (500)
Dividends paid on ordinary shares | 10 | (26) | (1,311)
Dividends paid on preference shares and other equity instruments |  | (132) | (129)
Principal elements of lease payments | 33 | (20) | (31)
Net cash flow from financing activities |  | 3,711 | (863)
Change in cash and cash equivalents |  | (383) | (7,662)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year |  | 29,077 | 36,753
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents |  | (12) | (14)
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year |  | 28,682 | 29,077
Cash and cash equivalents consist of: |  |  |
Cash and balances at central banks |  | 29,376 | 29,881
Less: regulatory minimum cash balances |  | (1,440) | (1,580)
|  | 27,936 | 28,301
Other cash equivalents: Loans and advances to banks - non-trading |  | 746 | 776
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year |  | 28,682 | 29,077

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 141

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Company Statement of Changes in Equity
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  |  | Other reserves |  |
| Share capital | Share premium | Other equity instruments | Fair value | Cash flow hedging | Cost of hedging | Retained earnings | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,860 | (16) | (290) | — | 594 | 10,873
Profit after tax | — | — | — | — | — | — | 1,890 | 1,890
Other comprehensive income/(expense) net of tax: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
- Fair value reserve (debt instruments) | — | — | — | 10 | — | — | — | 10
- Cash flow hedges | — | — | — | — | 480 | — | — | 480
- Cost of hedging | — | — | — | — | — | (4) | — | (4)
- Pension remeasurement | — | — | — | — | — | — | (72) | (72)
- Own credit adjustment | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1) | (1)
Total other comprehensive income/(expense) | — | — | — | 10 | 480 | (4) | (73) | 413
Total comprehensive income/(expense) | — | — | — | 10 | 480 | (4) | 1,817 | 2,303
Capital reduction | — | (4,501) | — | — | — | — | 4,501 | —
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 500 | — | — | — | — | 500
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (500) | — | — | — | — | (500)
Dividends on ordinary shares | — | — | — | — | — | — | (26) | (26)
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments | — | — | — | — | — | — | (132) | (132)
At 31 December 2025 | 3,105 | 1,119 | 1,860 | (6) | 190 | (4) | 6,754 | 13,018
At 1 January 2024 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,956 | (6) | (191) | — | 2,022 | 12,506
Profit after tax | — | — | — | — | — | — | 313 | 313
Other comprehensive (expense) net of tax: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
- Fair value reserve (debt instruments) | — | — | — | (10) | — | — | — | (10)
- Cash flow hedges | — | — | — | — | (99) | — | — | (99)
- Pension remeasurement | — | — | — | — | — | — | (289) | (289)
- Own credit adjustment | — | — | — | — | — | — | (12) | (12)
Total other comprehensive (expense) | — | — | — | (10) | (99) | — | (301) | (410)
Total comprehensive (expense)/income | — | — | — | (10) | (99) | — | 12 | (97)
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 400 | — | — | — | — | 400
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (496) | — | — | — | (4) | (500)
Other | — | — | — | — | — | — | 4 | 4
Dividends on ordinary shares | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1,311) | (1,311)
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments | — | — | — | — | — | — | (129) | (129)
At 31 December 2024 | 3,105 | 5,620 | 1,860 | (16) | (290) | — | 594 | 10,873

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Financial Statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 142

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES
These financial statements are prepared for Santander UK plc (the Company) and the Santander UK plc group (the Santander UK group) under the UK Companies Act
2006. The principal activity of the Santander UK group is the provision of a wide range of banking and financial services to personal, business and corporate
customers. Santander UK plc is a public company, limited by shares and incorporated and registered in England and Wales having a registered office at 2 Triton
Square, Regent’s Place, London, NW1 3AN. It is an operating company undertaking banking and financial services transactions.
Basis of preparation
These financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities it controls (its subsidiaries) made up to 31 December each year. The
consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis using the historical cost convention, except for financial assets and liabilities that
have been measured at fair value. An assessment of the appropriateness of the adoption of the going concern basis of accounting is disclosed in the statement of
going concern in the Directors’ report.
Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
The consolidated financial statements of the Santander UK group and the separate financial statements of the Company comply with UK-adopted International
Accounting Standards (IAS). The financial statements are also prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB),
including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee, as there are no applicable differences from IFRS as issued by the IASB for the periods
presented.
Disclosures required by IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure’ relating to the nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments, and IAS 1 ‘Presentation
of Financial Statements’ relating to objectives, policies and processes for managing capital, have been included in the Risk review section of this Annual Report and
marked as (audited). This information, and information in the Shareholder information section marked as (audited) forms an integral part of these financial
statements, and is covered by the Independent auditors' report.
Climate change
Santander UK continues to develop its assessment of the potential impacts that climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy may have on the assets
and liabilities recognised and presented in its financial statements.
Santander UK is mindful of its responsibilities as a responsible lender and is focused on aligning with the objectives of the Paris Agreement on climate change and to
support the UK’s transition to a climate-resilient, net zero economy.
Santander UK's current climate change strategy focuses on three main areas to achieve Banco Santander's ambition to reach net zero emissions by 2050:
1. Managing climate risks by integrating climate considerations into risk management frameworks, screening and stress testing our portfolio for climate related
financial risks, and setting risk appetites to help steer our portfolio in line with the Paris Agreement,
2. Supporting our customers’ transition by developing products and services that promote a reduction in CO 2 emissions, and
3. Reducing emissions in our operations and supply chain by focusing on continuous improvement in our operations, and environmental and energy management
systems in accordance with ISO14001 and 15001, promoting responsible procurement practices and employee engagement.
Santander UK's current climate change strategy and its view of the risks associated with climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy are reflected in
its critical judgements and accounting estimates, although climate change risk did not require any material adjustments at 31 December 2025 and 2024, consistent
with management's assessment that climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy are not currently expected to have a meaningful impact on the
viability of the Santander UK group in the medium term.
At 31 December 2025 and 2024, management specifically considered the potential impact of climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy on:
– Loans and advances to customers (see Note 13 and the credit risk section of the Risk review). Some climate change risks arise due to the requirements of IFRS 9
and others relate to specific portfolios and sectors:
– ECL calculations are based on forward-looking economic scenarios developed by management covering a period of five years, during which timeframe climate
change risks may not crystallise;
– For mortgages in Retail & Business Banking and commercial real estate lending in Corporate & Commercial Banking, the value of property collateral might be
affected by physical impacts related to the frequency and scale of extreme weather events, such as flood and subsidence risk, or changing environmental
performance standards for property.
– For automotive loans in Consumer Finance, the residual value of automotive vehicles might be impacted by diesel obsolescence and the transition to electric
vehicles.
– For corporate lending in Corporate & Commercial Banking, certain sectors give rise to fossil fuel exposures, such as Oil & Gas, Mining & Extraction and Power
Generation.
– Goodwill impairment assessment (see Note 19). Estimates underpinning the determination of whether or not goodwill balances are impaired are partly based on
forecast business performance beyond the time horizon for management's detailed plans.
– Unity Place our corporate headquarters in Milton Keynes was built with sustainability at its core. All property assets are evaluated annually for potential flood
damage and are currently considered low risk.
Future changes to Santander UK's climate change strategy may impact Santander UK's critical judgements and accounting estimates and result in material changes
to financial results and the carrying values of certain assets and liabilities in future reporting periods.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 143

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Change in accounting policy
IFRS 9 Hedge Accounting
On 1 October 2025, the Santander UK group voluntarily adopted the hedge accounting requirements established by IFRS 9. Santander UK continues to apply IAS 39
fair value hedge accounting to portfolio hedges of interest rate risk. The adoption of IFRS 9 hedge accounting provides reliable and more relevant information to
users of the financial statements by better aligning hedge accounting with Santander UK's risk management strategies. The change aligns with the hedge
accounting policy applied by Santander UK’s ultimate parent Banco Santander SA.
The main changes from IAS 39 for the Santander UK group are: the mandatory separation of the time value of options (when the hedged risk is the intrinsic value),
the separation of the forward element of foreign exchange forward contracts for all such types of hedges, the separation of the foreign currency basis spread of a
foreign exchange derivative for each hedging relationship, the performance of hedge effectiveness testing on a prospective basis only, and the inability to
voluntarily de-designate hedging relationships.
The application of IFRS 9 hedge accounting has not had a material impact on the Santander UK group's financial statements but resulted in the creation of a Cost of
Hedging reserve within equity. Comparatives have not been restated.
Recent accounting developments
Lack of Exchangeability (Amendments to IAS 21)
The Santander UK group has applied the following amendment for the first time for their reporting period commencing 1 January 2025:
– Effective from 1 January 2025, Santander UK has adopted the IASB's amendment to IAS 21 which helps entities determine whether a currency is exchangeable
into another currency, and which spot exchange rate to use when it is not. The amendments did not have a material impact on Santander UK's operations or
financial statements.
Future accounting developments
The IASB issued the following new/amended accounting standards which are not yet mandatory for reporting periods commencing 1 January 2025:
– Effective 1 January 2026: ‘Amendments to the Classification and Measurement of Financial Instruments’ (Amendments to IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ and IFRS
7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’)- the amendments set out changes to settling financial liabilities using an electronic payment system, assessing contractual
cash flow characteristics of financial assets including those with environmental, social and governance (ESG)-linked features and requiring additional disclosures
for certain financial instruments. The amendments were endorsed for use in the UK on 15 April 2025. The Santander UK group has chosen not to early adopt the
new standard.
– Effective 1 January 2027: IFRS 18 ‘Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements’ - the new standard will replace IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial
Statements’ and introduces changes to the categories for classifying income and expenses and subtotals presented in the income statement and new or
amended disclosures in respect of management-defined performance measures and specified expenses by nature. IFRS 18 was endorsed for use in the UK on 10
December 2025. The Santander UK group has chosen not to early adopt the new standard.
The Santander UK group will assess the new/amended accounting standards to determine their potential impacts on the financial statements when they become
effective or if they are otherwise early adopted when available.
Comparative information
As required by US public company reporting requirements, these financial statements include two years of comparative information for the consolidated income
statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in equity, consolidated statement of cash flows and related
notes.
Material accounting policy information
The following material accounting policies have been applied in preparing these financial statements. For material accounting policies which involve the application
of judgements or accounting estimates that are determined to be critical to the preparation of these financial statements see 'Critical judgements and accounting
estimates'.
Consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities (including structured entities) controlled by it and its
subsidiaries. The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries which meet the definition of a business.
Business combinations between entities under common control (i.e. fellow subsidiaries of Banco Santander SA, the ultimate parent) are outside the scope of IFRS 3
- ‘Business Combinations’, and there is no other guidance for such transactions under IFRS. The Santander UK group elects to account for business combinations
between entities under common control at their book values in the acquired entity by including the acquired entity’s results from the date of the business
combination and not restating comparatives. Reorganisations of entities within the Santander UK group are also accounted for at their book values.
Credit protection entities established as part of significant risk transfer (SRT) transactions are not consolidated by the Santander UK group in cases where third party
investors have the exposure, or rights, to all of the variability of returns from the performance of the entities.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 144

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Revenue recognition
a) Interest income and expense
Interest and similar income and expense are recognised in the income statement using the effective interest rate method for: all financial instruments measured at
amortised cost; debt instruments measured at FVOCI; and the effective part of any related accounting hedging instruments.
Interest income is calculated by applying the effective interest rate to the gross carrying amount of financial assets, except for financial assets that have
subsequently become credit-impaired (i.e. Stage 3), for which interest revenue is calculated by applying the effective interest rate to their amortised cost (i.e. net of
the ECL provision). For more information on stage allocations of credit risk exposures, see ‘Significant increase in credit risk’ in the ‘Santander UK group level - credit
risk management’ section of the Risk review.
b) Fee and commission income and expense
Fees and commissions that are not an integral part of the effective interest rate are recognised when the service is performed. Most fee and commission income is
recognised at a point in time. Certain commitment, upfront and management fees are recognised over time but are not material. For retail and corporate products,
fee and commission income consists principally of collection services fees, commission on foreign currencies, commission and other fees received from retailers for
processing credit card transactions, fees received from other credit card issuers for providing cash advances for their customers through the Santander UK group’s
branch and ATM networks, annual fees payable by credit card holders and fees for non-banking financial products.
For insurance products, fee and commission income consists principally of commissions and profit share arising from the sale of building and contents insurance
and life protection insurance. Commissions arising from the sale of buildings and contents insurance are recognised over the period of insurance cover, adjusted to
take account of cancelled policies. Profit share income from the sale of buildings and contents insurance which is not subject to any adjustment is recognised when
the profit share income is earned. Commissions and profit share arising from the sale of life protection insurance is subject to adjustment for cancellations of
policies within 3 years from inception.
Fee and commission income which forms an integral part of the effective interest rate of a financial instrument (for example certain loan commitment fees) is
recognised as an adjustment to the effective interest rate and recorded in ‘Interest income’.
c) Other operating income
Other operating income includes all gains and losses from changes in the fair value of financial assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss
(comprising financial assets and liabilities held for trading, trading derivatives and other financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit or loss), together
with related interest income, expense, dividends, and changes in fair value of any derivatives managed in conjunction with these assets and liabilities. Other
operating income also includes hedge ineffectiveness arising from fair value and cash flow hedging, income from operating lease assets, and profits and losses
arising on the sales of property, plant and equipment and subsidiary undertakings.
Defined benefit pension schemes (see 'Critical judgements and accounting estimates')
A defined benefit scheme is a pension scheme that guarantees an amount of pension benefit to be provided, usually as a function of one or more factors such as
age, years of service or compensation. Pension costs are charged to ‘Administration expenses’, within the line item ‘Operating expenses before impairment losses,
provisions and charges’ with the net interest on the defined benefit asset or liability included within ‘Net interest income’ in the income statement. The asset or
liability recognised in respect of defined benefit pension schemes is the present value of the defined benefit obligation at the balance sheet date, less the fair value
of scheme assets. The defined benefit obligation is calculated annually by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method. The assets of the schemes
are measured at their fair values at the balance sheet date.
The present value of the defined benefit obligation is estimated by projecting forward the growth in current accrued pension benefits to reflect inflation and salary
growth to the date of pension payment, then discounted to present value using the yield applicable to high-quality AA rated corporate bonds of the same currency
and which have terms to maturity closest to the terms of the scheme liabilities, adjusted where necessary to match those terms. In determining the value of
scheme liabilities, demographic and financial assumptions are made by management about life expectancy, inflation, discount rates, pension increases and
earnings growth, based on past experience and future expectations. Financial assumptions are based on market conditions at the balance sheet date and can
generally be derived objectively.
Demographic assumptions require a greater degree of estimation and judgement to be applied to externally derived data. Any surplus or deficit of scheme assets
over liabilities is recognised in the balance sheet as an asset (surplus) or liability (deficit). An asset is only recognised to the extent that the surplus can be recovered
through reduced contributions in the future or through refunds from the scheme.
Share-based payments
The Santander UK group engages in cash-settled and equity-settled share-based payment transactions in respect of services received from certain of its employees.
Shares of the Santander UK group’s parent, Banco Santander SA are purchased in the open market by the Santander UK group (for the Employee Sharesave scheme)
or are purchased by Banco Santander SA or another Banco Santander subsidiary (including awards granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Deferred
Shares Bonus Plan) to satisfy share options or awards as they vest.
Options granted under the Employee Sharesave scheme and awards granted under the Transformation Incentive Plan are accounted for as cash-settled share-
based payment transactions. Awards granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan and Deferred Shares Bonus Plan are accounted for as equity-settled share-based
payment transactions.
The fair value of the options granted under the Employee Sharesave scheme is determined using an option pricing model, which takes into account the exercise
price of the option, the current share price, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the Banco Santander SA share price over the life of the option and the
dividend growth rate. The fair value of the awards granted for the Long-Term Incentive Plan was determined at the grant date using an option pricing model, which
takes into account the share price at grant date, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the Banco Santander SA share price over the life of the award
and the dividend growth rate.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 145

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Goodwill and other intangible assets (for goodwill see 'Critical judgements and accounting estimates')
Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition, as well as the fair value of any interest previously held, over the fair value of the share of the
identifiable net assets of the acquired subsidiary, or business at the date of acquisition. Goodwill on the acquisition of subsidiaries and businesses is included
in intangible assets. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually, or more frequently when events or changes in circumstances dictate and carried at cost less
accumulated impairment losses. Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity or business include the carrying amount of goodwill relating to the entity or
business sold.
Other intangible assets are recognised if they arise from contractual or other legal rights or if they are capable of being separated or divided from Santander UK and
sold, transferred, licensed, rented or exchanged. The value of such intangible assets, where they are available for use, is amortised on a straight-line basis generally
over a three-year useful economic life and the assets are reviewed annually for impairment indicators and tested for impairment where indicators are present.
Other intangible assets that are not yet available for use are tested for impairment annually or more frequently when events or changes in circumstances dictate.
Software development costs are capitalised when they are direct costs associated with identifiable and unique software products that are expected to provide
future economic benefits, and the cost of those products can be measured reliably. These costs include payroll, materials, services and directly attributable
overheads. Internally developed software meeting these criteria and externally purchased software, are classified in intangible assets on the balance sheet and
amortised on a straight-line basis generally over a three-year useful life unless the software is an integral part of the related computer hardware, in which case
it is treated as property, plant and equipment as described below. Capitalisation of costs ceases when the software is capable of operating as intended. Costs of
maintaining software are expensed as incurred.
Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment include owner-occupied properties (including leasehold properties), office fixtures and equipment and computer software. Property,
plant and equipment also includes operating leases where the Santander UK group is the lessor and right-of-use assets where the Santander UK group is the lessee.
Internally developed software meeting the criteria set out in ‘Goodwill and other intangible assets’ above and externally purchased software are classified in
property, plant and equipment where the software is an integral part of the related computer hardware (for example, the operating system of a computer).Classes
of property, plant and equipment are depreciated on a straight-line basis over their useful life, as follows:

Owner-occupied properties | Not exceeding 50 years
Office fixtures and equipment | 3 to 35 years
Computer software | Generally 3 years
Right-of-use assets | Shorter of the lease term or the useful life of the underlying asset
Operating lease assets - vehicles | 1 to 5 years

Depreciation is not charged on freehold land. Depreciation of operating lease assets where the Santander UK group is the lessor is described in 'Leases' below.
Financial instruments (for impairment of debt instrument financial assets see 'Critical judgements and accounting estimates: Credit impairment losses')
a) Initial recognition and measurement
Financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised when the Santander UK group becomes a party to the contractual terms of the instrument. The Santander UK
group determines the classification of its financial assets and liabilities at initial recognition and measures a financial asset or financial liability at its fair value plus or
minus, in the case of a financial asset or financial liability not at FVTPL, transaction costs that are incremental and directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of
the financial asset or financial liability. Transaction costs of financial assets and financial liabilities carried at FVTPL are expensed in profit or loss. Immediately after
initial recognition, an expected credit loss (ECL) allowance is recognised for financial assets measured at amortised cost and investments in debt instruments
measured at FVOCI. Corporate current accounts and instant access deposit accounts in notional pooling arrangements are managed on a net basis and are
presented as a single unit of account.
A regular way purchase or sale is a purchase or sale of a financial asset under a contract whose terms require delivery of the asset within the timeframe established
generally by regulation or convention in the marketplace concerned. Regular way purchases and sales of financial assets measured at amortised cost are recognised
on settlement date; all other regular way purchases and sales of financial assets are recognised on trade date.
b) Financial assets and liabilities
i) Classification and subsequent measurement
The Santander UK group classifies its financial assets in the measurement categories of amortised cost, FVOCI and FVTPL.
Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified as FVTPL where there is a requirement to do so or where they are otherwise designated at FVTPL on initial
recognition. Financial assets and financial liabilities which are required to be held at FVTPL include:
– Financial assets and financial liabilities held for trading.
– Debt instruments that do not have solely payments of principal and interest (SPPI) characteristics. Otherwise, such instruments are measured at amortised cost
or FVOCI, and
– Equity instruments that have not been designated as held at FVOCI.
Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified as held for trading if they are derivatives or if they are acquired or incurred principally for the purpose of
selling or repurchasing in the near-term, or form part of a portfolio of financial instruments that are managed together and for which there is evidence of short-
term profit taking.
In certain circumstances, other financial assets and financial liabilities are designated at FVTPL where this results in more relevant information. This may arise
because it significantly reduces a measurement inconsistency that would otherwise arise from measuring assets or liabilities or recognising the gains or losses on
them on a different basis, where the assets and liabilities are managed and their performance evaluated on a fair value basis or, in the case of financial liabilities,
where it contains one or more embedded derivatives which are not closely related to the host contract.
The classification and measurement requirements for financial asset debt and equity instruments and financial liabilities are set out below.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 146

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Financial assets: debt instruments
Debt instruments are those instruments that meet the definition of a financial liability from the issuer’s perspective, such as loans and debt securities which consist
mainly of government bonds and covered bonds. Classification and subsequent measurement of debt instruments depend on the Santander UK group’s business
model for managing the asset, and the cash flow characteristics of the asset.
Business model
The business model reflects how the Santander UK group manages the assets in order to generate cash flows and, specifically, whether the Santander UK group’s
objective is solely to collect the contractual cash flows from the assets or is to collect both the contractual cash flows and cash flows arising from the sale of the
assets. If neither of these is applicable, such as where the financial assets are held for trading purposes, then the financial assets are classified as part of an ‘other’
business model and measured at FVTPL. Factors considered in determining the business model for a group of assets include past experience on how the cash flows
for these assets were collected, how the assets’ performance is evaluated and reported to key management personnel, and how risks are assessed and managed.
SPPI
Where the business model is to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows or to collect contractual cash flows and sell, the Santander UK group assesses whether
the assets’ cash flows represent SPPI. In making this assessment, the Santander UK group considers whether the contractual cash flows are consistent with a basic
lending arrangement (i.e. interest includes only consideration for the time value of money, credit risk, other basic lending risks and a profit margin that is consistent
with a basic lending arrangement). Where the contractual terms introduce exposure to risk or volatility that is inconsistent with a basic lending arrangement, the
related asset is classified and measured at FVTPL.
Financial assets with embedded derivatives are considered in their entirety when determining whether their cash flows are SPPI.
Based on these factors, the Santander UK group classifies its debt instruments into one of the following measurement categories:
– Amortised cost - Financial assets that are held for collection of contractual cash flows where those cash flows represent SPPI, and that are not designated at
FVTPL, are measured at amortised cost. The carrying amount of these assets is adjusted by any ECL recognised and measured as presented in Note 13. Interest
income from these financial assets is included in ‘Interest and similar income’ using the effective interest rate method. When estimates of future cash flows are
revised, the carrying amount of the respective financial assets is adjusted to reflect the new estimate discounted using the original effective interest rate. Any
changes are recognised in the income statement.
– FVOCI - Financial assets that are held for collection of contractual cash flows and for selling the assets, where the assets’ cash flows represent SPPI, and that are
not designated at FVTPL, are measured at FVOCI. Movements in the carrying amount are recognised in OCI, except for the recognition of impairment gains or
losses, interest revenue and foreign exchange gains and losses which are recognised in profit or loss. When the financial asset is derecognised, the cumulative
gain or loss previously recognised in OCI is reclassified from equity to profit or loss and recognised in ‘Other operating income’. Interest income from these
financial assets is included in ‘Interest and similar income’ using the effective interest rate method.
– FVTPL - Financial assets that do not meet the criteria for amortised cost or FVOCI are measured at FVTPL. A gain or loss on a debt instrument that is subsequently
measured at FVTPL, including any debt instruments designated at fair value, is recognised in profit or loss and presented in the income statement in ‘Other
operating income’ in the period in which it arises.
The Santander UK group reclassifies financial assets when and only when its business model for managing those assets changes. The reclassification takes place
from the start of the first reporting period following the change. Such changes are expected to be very infrequent.
Financial assets: equity instruments
Equity instruments are instruments that meet the definition of equity from the issuer’s perspective, being instruments that do not contain a contractual obligation to
pay cash and that evidence a residual interest in the issuer’s net assets. All equity investments are subsequently measured at FVTPL; management may elect, at
initial recognition, to irrevocably designate an equity investment at FVOCI but has not currently done so. When this election is used, fair value gains and losses are
recognised in OCI and are not subsequently reclassified to profit or loss, including on disposal. ECLs (and reversal of ECLs) are not reported separately from other
changes in fair value. Dividends, when representing a return on such investments, continue to be recognised in profit or loss as other income when the right to
receive payments is established. Gains and losses on equity investments at FVTPL are included in ‘Other operating income’ in the income statement.
Financial liabilities
Financial liabilities, which include deposits by banks, deposits by customers, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities, are classified as subsequently
measured at amortised cost, except for:
– Financial liabilities at FVTPL (see Note 24): this classification is applied to derivatives and other financial liabilities designated as such at initial recognition. Gains or
losses on financial liabilities designated at FVTPL are presented partially in other comprehensive income (the amount of change in the fair value of the financial
liability that is attributable to changes in the credit risk of that liability) and partially in profit or loss (the remaining amount of change in the fair value of the
liability).
– Financial liabilities arising from the transfer of financial assets which did not qualify for derecognition, whereby a financial liability is recognised for the
consideration received for the transfer. In subsequent periods, the Santander UK group recognises any expense incurred on the financial liability, and
– Financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments.
Preference shares which carry a contractual obligation to transfer economic benefits are classified as financial liabilities and are presented in subordinated liabilities.
The coupon on these preference shares is recognised in the income statement as interest expense on an amortised cost basis using the effective interest method.
Contracts involving the receipt of cash on which customers receive an index-linked return are accounted for as equity index-linked deposits. The principal products
are Capital Guaranteed/Protected Products, which give the customers a limited participation in the upside growth of an equity index. In the event the index falls in
price, a cash principal element is guaranteed/protected. The equity index-linked deposits contain embedded derivatives. These embedded derivatives, in
combination with the principal cash deposit element, are designed to replicate the investment performance profile tailored to the return agreed in the contracts
with customers. The cash principal element is accounted for as deposits by customers at amortised cost. The embedded derivatives are separated from the host
instrument and are separately accounted for as derivatives.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 147

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Sale and repurchase agreements (including stock borrowing and lending)
Securities sold subject to a commitment to repurchase them at a predetermined price (repos) under which substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership
are retained by the Santander UK group remain on the balance sheet and a liability is recorded in respect of the consideration received. Securities purchased
under commitments to resell (reverse repos) are not recognised on the balance sheet and the consideration paid is recorded as an asset. The difference between
the sale and repurchase price is treated as trading income in the income statement, except where the repo is not treated as part of the trading book, in which case
the difference is recorded in interest income or expense.
Securities lending and borrowing transactions are generally secured, with collateral in the form of securities or cash advanced or received. Securities borrowed
are not reflected on the balance sheet. Collateral in the form of cash received or advanced is recorded as a deposit or a loan. Collateral in the form of securities is
not recognised.
Day One profit adjustments
The fair value of a financial instrument on initial recognition is generally its transaction price (that is, the fair value of the consideration given or received). However,
sometimes the fair value will be based on other observable current market transactions in the same instrument, without modification or repackaging, or on a
valuation technique whose variables include only data from observable markets, such as interest rate yield curves, option volatilities and currency rates. When such
evidence exists, the Santander UK group recognises a trading gain or loss at inception (Day One gain or loss), being the difference between the transaction price and
the fair value. When significant unobservable parameters are used, the entire Day One gain or loss is deferred and is recognised in the income statement over the
life of the transaction until the transaction matures, is closed out, the valuation inputs become observable, or an offsetting transaction is entered into.
ii) Impairment of debt instrument financial assets
The Santander UK group assesses on a forward-looking basis the ECL associated with its debt instrument assets carried at amortised cost and FVOCI and with the
exposure arising from financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments. The Santander UK group recognises a loss allowance for such losses at each reporting
date. The measurement of ECL reflects:
– An unbiased and probability-weighted amount that is determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes.
– The time value of money, and
– Reasonable and supportable information that is available without undue cost or effort at the reporting date about past events, current conditions and forecasts of
future economic conditions.
Grouping of instruments for losses measured on a collective basis
We typically group instruments and assess them for impairment collectively where they share risk characteristics (as described in the Credit risk section of the Risk
review) using one or more statistical models. Where we have used internal capital or similar models as the basis for our ECL models, this typically results in a large
number of relatively small homogenous groups which are determined by the permutations of the underlying characteristics in the statistical models. We calculate
separate collective provisions for instruments in Stages 1, 2 and 3 where the instrument is not individually assessed, as described below.
Individually assessed impairments (IAIs)
We individually assess significant Stage 3 cases and also include high leveraged finance transactions in Stage 2 from 2025. We do this for Corporate & Commercial
Banking cases, but not for Business Banking cases in Retail & Business Banking which we assess collectively. To calculate the estimated loss, we estimate the future
cash flows under several scenarios each of which uses case-specific factors and circumstances. We then probability-weight the net present value of the cash flows
under each scenario to arrive at a weighted average provision requirement. We update our assessment process every quarter and more frequently if there are
changes in circumstances that might affect the scenarios, cash flows or probabilities we apply.
For more on how ECL is calculated, see the Credit risk section of the Risk review.
– Write-off
For secured loans, a write-off is only made when all collection procedures have been exhausted and the security has been sold and/or a claim made on any
mortgage indemnity guarantee or other insurance. In the corporate loan portfolio, there may be occasions where a write-off occurs for other reasons, such as
following a consensual restructure or refinancing of the debt or where the debt is sold for strategic reasons into the secondary market at a value lower than its
face value.
There is no threshold based on past due status beyond which all secured loans are written off as there can be significant variations in the time needed to enforce
possession and sale of the security, especially due to the different legal frameworks that apply in different regions of the UK. For unsecured loans, a write-off is
only made when all internal avenues of collecting the debt have been exhausted. Where appropriate the debt is passed over to external collection agencies. A
past due threshold is applied to unsecured debt where accounts that are 180 days past due are written off unless there is a dispute awaiting resolution. Contact is
made with customers with the aim to achieve a realistic and sustainable repayment arrangement. Litigation and/or enforcement of security is usually carried out
only when the steps described above have been undertaken without success.
All write-offs are assessed / made on a case-by-case basis, taking account of the exposure at the date of write-off, after accounting for the value from any
collateral or insurance held against the loan. The exception to this is in cases where fraud has occurred, where the exposure is written off once investigations
have been completed and the probability of recovery is minimal. The time span between discovery and write-off will be short and may not result in an
impairment loss allowance being raised. The write-off policy is regularly reviewed. Write-offs are charged against previously established loss allowances.
– Recoveries
Recoveries of credit impairment charges are not included in the impairment loss allowance but are taken to income and offset against credit impairment charges.
Recoveries of credit impairment charges are classified in the income statement as ‘Credit impairment charges’.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 148

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

iii) Modifications of financial assets
The treatment of a renegotiation or modification of the contractual cash flows of a financial asset normally depends upon whether the renegotiation or modification
is due to financial difficulties of the borrower or for other commercial reasons.
– Contractual modifications due to financial difficulties of the borrower: where the Santander UK group modifies the contractual conditions to enable the
borrower to fulfil their payment obligations, the asset is not derecognised. The gross carrying amount of the financial asset is recalculated as the present value of
the renegotiated/modified contractual cash flows that are discounted at the financial asset’s original EIR and any gain or loss arising from the modification is
recognised in the income statement.
– Contractual modifications for other commercial reasons: an assessment is performed to determine whether the terms of the new agreement are substantially
different from the terms of the existing agreement, after considering changes in the cash flows arising from the modified terms and the overall instrument risk
profile. Where terms are substantially different, such modifications are treated as a new transaction resulting in derecognition of the original financial asset, and
the recognition of a ‘new’ financial asset with any difference between the carrying amount of the derecognised asset and the fair value of the new asset is
recognised in the income statement as a gain or loss on derecognition. Where terms are not substantially different, the carrying value of the financial asset is
adjusted to reflect the present value of modified cash flows discounted at the original EIR with any gain or loss arising from modification recognised immediately
in the income statement.
Any other contractual modifications, such as where a regulatory authority imposes a change in certain contractual terms or due to legal reasons, are assessed on a
case-by-case basis to establish whether or not the financial asset should be derecognised.
iv) Derecognition other than on a modification
Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive cash flows have expired or the Santander UK group has transferred its contractual right to receive the
cash flows from the assets and either: (1) substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred; or (2) the Santander UK group has neither
retained nor transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards but has transferred control.
Financial liabilities are derecognised when extinguished, cancelled or expired.
c) Financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments
Financial guarantee contracts are contracts that require the issuer to make specified payments to reimburse the holder for a loss it incurs because a specified debtor
fails to make payments when due, in accordance with the terms of a debt instrument. Such financial guarantees are given to banks, financial institutions and others
on behalf of customers to secure loans, overdrafts and other banking facilities.
Financial guarantee contracts are initially measured at fair value and subsequently measured at the higher of the amount of the loss allowance, and the premium
received on initial recognition less income recognised in accordance with the principles of IFRS 15. Loan commitments are measured as the amount of the loss
allowance (determined in accordance with IFRS 9 as described in Credit risk section of the Risk review). The Santander UK group has not provided any commitment
to provide loans at a below-market interest rate, or that can be settled net in cash or by delivering or issuing another financial instrument.
For financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments, the loss allowance is recognised as a provision and charged to credit impairment charges in the income
statement. The loss allowance in respect of revolving facilities is classified in loans and advances to customers to the extent of any drawn balances. The loss
allowance in respect of undrawn amounts is classified in provisions. When amounts are drawn, any related loss allowance is transferred from provisions to loans
and advances to customers.
Derivative financial instruments (derivatives)
Derivatives are contracts or agreements whose value is derived from one or more underlying indices or asset values inherent in the contract or agreement, which
require no or little initial net investment and are settled at a future date. Transactions are undertaken in interest rate, cross currency, equity, residential property and
other index-related swaps, forwards, caps, floors, swaptions, as well as credit default and total return swaps, equity index contracts and exchange traded interest
rate futures, and equity index options.
Derivatives are held for risk management purposes. Derivatives are classified as held for trading unless they are designated as being in a hedge accounting
relationship. The Santander UK group chooses to designate certain derivatives as in a hedging relationship if they meet specific criteria, as further described in
‘Hedge accounting’ below.
Derivatives are recognised initially (on the date on which a derivative contract is entered into), and are subsequently remeasured, at their fair value. Fair values
of exchange-traded derivatives are obtained from quoted market prices. Fair values of over-the-counter derivatives are estimated using valuation techniques,
including discounted cash flow and option pricing models.
Certain derivatives may be embedded in hybrid contracts. If the hybrid contract contains a host that is a financial asset, then the Santander UK group assesses the
entire contract as described in the financial asset section above for classification and measurement purposes. Otherwise, embedded derivatives are treated as
separate derivatives when their economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of the host contract; the terms of the embedded derivative would
meet the definition of a stand-alone derivative if they were contained in a separate contract; and the combined contract is not held for trading or designated at fair
value. These embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement. Contracts containing embedded
derivatives are not subsequently reassessed for separation unless either there has been a change in the terms of the contract which significantly modifies the cash
flows (in which case the contract is reassessed at the time of modification) or the contract has been reclassified (in which case the contract is reassessed at the time
of reclassification).
All derivatives are carried as assets when their fair value is positive and as liabilities when their fair value is negative, except where netting is permitted. The method
of recognising fair value gains and losses depends on whether derivatives are held for trading or are designated as hedging instruments and, if the latter, the nature
of the risks being hedged. Gains and losses from changes in the fair value of derivatives held for trading are recognised in the income statement and included in
Other operating income.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 149

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Offsetting financial assets and liabilities
Financial assets and liabilities including derivatives are offset and the net amount reported in the balance sheet when there is a legally enforceable right to set off
the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The Santander UK group is party
to a number of arrangements, including master netting arrangements under industry standard agreements which facilitate netting of transactions in jurisdictions
where netting agreements are recognised and have legal force. These netting arrangements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and
liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis.
Hedge accounting
From 1 October 2025, the Santander UK group voluntarily adopted IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements, except for portfolio hedges of interest rate risk which
continue to apply IAS 39 requirements.
The Santander UK group applies hedge accounting to represent, to the maximum possible extent permitted under accounting standards, the economic effects of its
risk management strategies. Derivatives are used to hedge exposures to interest rates, inflation, and exchange rates.
At the time a financial instrument is designated as a hedge (i.e. at the inception of the hedge), the Santander UK group formally documents the relationship between
the hedging instrument(s) and hedged item(s), its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge. The documentation includes the identification
of each hedging instrument and respective hedged item, the nature of the risk being hedged (including the benchmark interest rate being hedged in a hedge of
interest rate risk), how the hedging instrument’s effectiveness in offsetting the exposure to changes in the hedged item’s fair value attributable to the hedged risk is
to be assessed (including an analysis of potential sources of ineffectiveness), and the hedge ratio. Hedges accounted for under IFRS 9 are required to be effective on
a prospective basis, in line with risk management strategy, whilst IAS 39 hedging relationships are required to be highly effective on both a prospective and
retrospective basis.
The Santander UK group discontinues hedge accounting when the hedging instrument matures, is sold, or when the hedging relationship becomes ineffective
because it no longer aligns with the risk management objective. In such cases, the derivative is treated as a trading derivative.
If a hedging relationship no longer meets the effectiveness requirements but the risk management objective remains, the Santander UK group may rebalance or
adjust the hedge ratio to once again meet effectiveness requirements without discontinuing the hedging relationship.
For portfolio hedges of interest rate risk which continue to be accounted for under IAS 39, the Santander UK group may also voluntarily de-designate hedge
relationships by ceasing to designate the financial instrument as a hedge.
A hedging instrument is generally designated in its entirety, as the factors contributing to its fair value are interdependent. IFRS 9 allows certain components of the
fair value of a hedging instrument to be excluded:
(i)Separation of intrinsic and time value of an option, designating only the intrinsic value as the hedging instrument, which is mandatory if the intrinsic value is
designated;
(ii)Separation of the forward and spot elements of a forward contract, designating only the spot element as the hedging instrument, determined for each hedging
relationship; and
(iii)Separation of the foreign currency basis spread of a currency derivative, excluding it from the designation of the hedging instrument, determined for each
hedging relationship.
The separation of these components improves hedge effectiveness and allows an alternative accounting treatment for the excluded component, consisting of
recording its value changes in “Other comprehensive income - cost of hedging” and recognising it in the consolidated income statement according to the nature of
the hedged item, either over time, when the hedged transaction occurs, or when the hedge relationship ends.
Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation, the derivatives may be designated
as either: (i) hedges of the change in fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or firm commitments (fair value hedges); (ii) hedges of the variability in highly
probable future cash flows attributable to a recognised asset or liability, or a forecast transaction (cash flow hedges); or (iii) a hedge of a net investment in a foreign
operation (net investment hedges). The Santander UK group applies fair value and cash flow hedge accounting but not hedging of a net investment in a foreign
operation.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 150

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

a) Fair value hedge accounting
Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with the changes in the
fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk.
Where the hedged item is measured at amortised cost, the fair value changes due to the hedged risk adjust the carrying amount of the hedged asset or liability.
Changes in the fair value of portfolio hedged items are presented separately in the consolidated balance sheet in macro hedge of interest rate risk and recognised in
the income statement. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk
are no longer recognised in the income statement. For fair value hedges of interest rate risk, the cumulative adjustment that has been made to the carrying amount
of the hedged item is amortised to the income statement using the effective interest method over the period to maturity. For portfolio hedged items, the cumulative
adjustment is amortised to the income statement using the straight-line method over the period to maturity.
b) Cash flow hedge accounting
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of qualifying cash flow hedges is recognised in other comprehensive income in the cash flow hedging reserve.
The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement.
Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified to the income statement in the periods in which the hedged item affects profit or loss. When a hedging instrument
expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity
and is recognised in the income statement when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer
expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement. The Santander UK group is exposed
to variability in future cash flows attributable to i) interest rate and inflation risks on its GBP floating rate assets and liabilities ii) foreign currency risk on debt
issuances denominated in foreign currency and iii) equity price risk from operating the Employee Sharesave scheme. Cash flow hedging is used to hedge the
variability in cash flows arising from these risks.
Securitisation transactions
The Santander UK group has entered into arrangements where undertakings have issued mortgage-backed and other asset-backed securities or have entered
into funding arrangements with lenders in order to finance specific loans and advances to customers. The Santander UK group has also entered into synthetic
securitisation arrangements, as part of significant risk transfer (SRT) transactions to reduce its risk-weighted assets, where undertakings have issued credit-linked
notes, and in some cases deposited the funds raised as collateral, for credit protection in respect of specific loans and advances to customers. As the Santander UK
group has retained substantially all the risks and rewards of the underlying assets, such financial instruments continue to be recognised on the balance sheet, and a
liability recognised for the proceeds of the funding transaction, or in the case of SRT transactions, collateral deposited.
Impairment of non-financial assets
At each balance sheet date, or more frequently when events or changes in circumstances dictate, property plant and equipment (including operating lease assets)
and intangible assets (including goodwill) are assessed for indicators of impairment. If indications are present, these assets are subject to an impairment review.
The impairment review comprises a comparison of the carrying value of the asset or cash generating unit with its recoverable amount: the higher of the asset’s or
cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in use. The cash-generating unit represents the lowest level at which non-financial assets, including
goodwill, are monitored for internal management purposes and is not larger than an operating segment.
The fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the
measurement date. Value in use is calculated by discounting management’s expected future cash flows obtainable as a result of the asset’s continued use (after
making allowance for increases in regulatory capital requirements), including those resulting from its ultimate disposal, at a market-based discount rate on a pre-
tax basis. The recoverable amounts of goodwill have been based on value in use calculations.
For conducting goodwill impairment reviews, cash generating units are the lowest level at which management monitors the return on investment on assets.
Leases (as lessor)
Operating lease assets are recorded at cost and the difference between cost and residual value (RV) is depreciated over the life of the asset. Operating lease rental
income and depreciation is recognised on a straight-line basis over the life of the asset. After initial recognition, residual values are reviewed regularly, and any
changes are recognised prospectively through remaining depreciation charges.
Amounts due from lessees under finance leases and hire purchase contracts are recorded as receivables at the amount of the Santander UK group’s net investment
in the leases. Finance lease income is allocated to accounting periods to reflect a constant periodic rate of return on the Santander UK group’s net investment
outstanding in respect of the leases and hire purchase contracts. A provision is recognised to reflect a reduction in any anticipated unguaranteed RV. A provision is
also recognised for voluntary termination of the contract by the customer, where appropriate.
Income taxes, including deferred taxes
The tax expense represents the sum of the income tax currently payable and deferred income tax.
A current tax liability for the current or prior period is measured at the amount expected to be paid to the tax authorities. Where the amount of the final tax liability is
uncertain or where a position is challenged by a taxation authority, the liability recognised is the most likely outcome. Where a most likely outcome cannot be
determined, a weighted average basis is applied.
Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled, or the asset is realised based on rates enacted or
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the income statement, except when it relates to items recognised in other
comprehensive income or directly in equity, in which case the deferred tax is also recognised in other comprehensive income or directly in equity.
Deferred and current tax assets and liabilities are only offset when they arise in the same tax reporting group and where there is both the legal right and the
intention to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 151

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Cash and cash equivalents
For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprise balances with not more than three months maturity from the date of acquisition,
including cash and non-restricted balances with central banks and loans and advances to banks. Balances with central banks represent amounts held at the Bank of
England as part of the Santander UK group’s liquidity management activities. It includes reserves collateralised accounts in respect of Santander UK’s participation in
certain payments schemes which are required to be maintained with the Bank of England and are restricted balances.
Provisions and contingent liabilities (see 'Critical judgements and accounting estimates')
Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that a transfer of economic benefits will be
necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated.
Customer remediation provisions are made for the estimated cost of making redress payments with respect to the past sales of products, using conclusions such
as the number of claims, the number of those that will be upheld, the estimated average settlement per case and other related costs. Provision is made for the
anticipated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs, when an obligation exists. An obligation exists when the Santander UK group has a detailed formal
plan for restructuring a business, has raised valid expectations in those affected by the restructuring, and has started to implement the plan or announce its
main features.
When a leasehold property ceases to be used in the business, provision is made where the unavoidable costs of the future obligations relating to the lease are
expected to exceed anticipated rental income. The net costs are discounted using market rates of interest to reflect the long-term nature of the cash flows.
Loan commitments are measured as the amount of the loss allowance, determined in line with IFRS 9 as set out in the Credit risk section of the Risk review.
Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by certain future events or present obligations where the transfer of economic
benefit is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised but are disclosed unless they are remote.
Critical judgements and accounting estimates
The preparation of Santander UK's consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires management to make judgements and assumptions in
applying the accounting policies that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Due to the inherent uncertainty in making estimates,
actual results reported in future periods may be based on amounts which differ from those estimates. Estimates, judgements and assumptions are continually
evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the
circumstances. Management has considered the impact of developments in principal risks and uncertainties, as set out in the Risk review, on critical judgements and
accounting estimates.
The significant judgements, apart from those involving estimation, made by management in applying Santander UK's accounting policies in these financial
statements (key judgements) and the key sources of estimation uncertainty that may have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying
amount of assets and liabilities within the next financial year (key estimates), which together are considered critical to Santander UK's results and financial position,
are as follows:
a) Credit impairment allowance
The application of the ECL impairment methodology for calculating credit impairment allowances is highly susceptible to change from period to period. The
methodology requires management to make judgemental assumptions in determining the estimates. Any significant difference between the estimated amounts
and actual amounts could have a material impact on the future financial results and financial condition.

Key judgements | – Establishing the criteria for a significant increase in credit risk (SICR) and, for corporate borrowers, internal credit risk rating
| – Determining the need for any judgemental adjustments
Key estimates | – Forward-looking multiple economic scenario assumptions
| – Probability weights assigned to multiple economic scenarios
| – Expected future cash flows for individually assessed Stage 3 corporate exposures
| – Collateral valuations of individually assessed Stage 3 corporate exposures

For more on each of these key judgements and estimates, see 'Critical Judgements and accounting estimates applied in calculating ECL' in the ‘Credit risk – credit
risk management’ section of the Risk review.
Sensitivity of ECL allowance
For detailed disclosures, see 'Sensitivity of ECL allowance' in the ‘Credit risk - credit risk management’ section of the Risk review.
b) Provisions and contingent liabilities

Key judgements | – Determining whether a present obligation exists
| – Determining the likely outcome of future legal decisions
Key estimates | – Probability, timing, nature and amount of any outflows that may arise from past events

Included in the provisions in Note 27 are amounts in respect of management’s best estimates of liability relating to a legal dispute regarding the historical use of
discretionary commission arrangements by Santander Consumer (UK) plc and property and redundancy provisions relating to the transformation of our branch
network. Note 30 provides disclosure relating to ongoing factual issues and reviews that could impact the timing and amount of any outflows. It includes disclosure
relating to an investigation in relation to the historical involvement of Santander UK plc, Santander Financial Services plc and Cater Allen International Limited (all
subsidiaries of Santander UK Group Holdings plc) in German dividend tax arbitrage transactions, and legal disputes regarding allocation of responsibility for a
specific PPI portfolio of complaints and the historical use of discretionary commission arrangements by Santander Consumer (UK) plc.
These judgements are based on the specific facts available and often require specialist professional advice. There can be a wide range of possible outcomes and
uncertainties, particularly in relation to legal actions, regulatory, and customer remediation matters. As a result, on extremely rare occasions it is not possible to
make reliable estimates of the likelihood and amount of any potential outflows, or to calculate any resulting sensitivities. For more on each of these key judgements
and estimates, see Notes 27 and 30.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 152

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

c) Retirement benefit plans
The Santander UK group operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes as described in Note 28 and estimates their position as described in the accounting
policy 'Defined benefit pension schemes’.

Key judgements | – Setting the criteria for constructing the corporate bond yield curve used to determine the discount rate
| – Determining the methodology for setting the inflation assumption
Key estimates | – Discount rate applied to future cash flows
| – Rate of price inflation
| – Expected lifetime of the schemes' members
| – Valuation of pension fund assets whose values are not based on market observable data

For more on each of these key judgements and estimates, see Note 28 .
Sensitivity of defined benefit pension scheme estimates
For detailed disclosures, see ‘Actuarial assumption sensitivities’ in Note 28 . The Scheme is invested in certain assets whose values are not based on market
observable data, such as investments in private equity funds and property. Due diligence has been conducted to confirm that the values obtained in respect of these
assets represent fair value. Given the nature of these investments, we are unable to prepare sensitivities on how their values could vary as market conditions or
other variables change.
d) Goodwill
The carrying amount of goodwill is based on the application of judgements including the basis of goodwill impairment calculation assumptions. Santander UK
undertakes an annual assessment to evaluate whether the carrying amount of goodwill is impaired, carrying out this assessment more frequently if reviews identify
indicators of impairment or when events or changes in circumstances dictate.

Key judgement | – Determining the basis of goodwill impairment testing methodology, including the need for planning assumptions and internal capital allocations
Key estimates | – Forecast cash flows for cash generating units
| – Discount rates which factor in risk-free rates and applicable risk premiums
| All of these variables are subject to fluctuations in external market rates and economic conditions beyond management’s control

Santander UK group undertakes an annual assessment to evaluate whether the carrying amount of goodwill is impaired, carrying out this assessment more
frequently if reviews identify indicators of impairment or when events or changes in circumstances dictate.
The estimation of future cash flows and the level to which they are discounted is inherently uncertain and requires significant judgement and is subject to potential
change over time.
For more on each of these key judgements and estimates, see Note 19 .
Sensitivity of goodwill
For detailed disclosures, see ‘Sensitivities of key assumptions in calculating value in use (VIU)' in Note 19.
e) Valuation of intercompany derivatives (Company)
The application of the methodology for estimating the fair value of covered bond pool and securitisation funding swaps is highly susceptible to change from period
to period. The methodology requires management to make judgemental assumptions in determining the estimates. Any significant difference between the
estimated amounts and actual amounts could have a material impact on the future financial results and financial condition.

Key judgements: | Identifying significant unobservable inputs
| Determining appropriate valuation techniques
Key estimate: | Weighted average mortgage rate payable

For more on each of these key judgements and estimates, see Note 38.
Sensitivity of level 3 intercompany derivative valuation estimates
For detailed disclosures, see ‘Effect of changes in significant unobservable assumptions to reasonably possible alternatives’ in Note 38.
As discussed above, the fair value of financial instruments are, in certain circumstances, measured using valuation techniques that incorporate assumptions that are
not evidenced by prices from observable current market transactions in the same instrument and are not based on observable market data and, as such require the
application of a degree of judgement. Changing one or more of the inputs to the valuation models to reasonably possible alternative assumptions would change the
fair values significantly.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 153

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

2. SEGMENTS
Santander UK’s principal activity is financial services, mainly in the UK. The business is managed and reported on the basis of four segments, which are strategic
business units that offer different products and services, have different customers and require different technology and marketing strategies. Geographical
information is not provided, as substantially all of Santander UK’s activities are in the UK.
– Retail & Business Banking consists of two business units, Mortgages and Everyday Banking. Mortgages provides UK residential mortgages for customers with
good credit quality (prime lending) mostly to owner occupiers and buy-to-let mortgages for non-professional landlords. Everyday Banking provides banking
services and unsecured lending to individuals and small businesses with annual turnover up to £6.5m, such as loans, credit cards and overdrafts, as well as
wealth management for high-net-worth clients.
– Consumer Finance provides prime auto consumer financing for cars, vans, motorbikes and leisure vehicles through Santander Consumer (UK) plc (SCUK).
Through our joint ventures, Hyundai Capital UK Ltd and Volvo Car Financial Services UK Limited, we provide retail point of sale customer finance and wholesale
finance facilities (stock finance).
– Corporate & Commercial Banking provides banking products and services including loans, overdrafts, treasury services, invoice finance, trade and supplier
finance, to SMEs, mid-sized and larger corporates typically with annual turnover up to £500m, Commercial Real Estate and Social Housing customers.
– Corporate Centre provides treasury services for asset and liability management of our balance sheet. Exposures include financial institutions (derivatives and
other treasury products), structured products, and sovereign and supranational assets chosen for diversification and liquidity. It also provides mainly residential
Crown Dependencies mortgages to individuals in Jersey and the Isle of Man.
Retail & Business Banking delivers products through our omni-channel presence comprising branches, ATMs, telephony, digital and intermediary channels.
Consumer Finance business is primarily introduced by car dealerships acting as our intermediary along with a small amount of new business introduced via digital
channels. Corporate and Commercial Banking expertise is provided by relationship managers, product specialists and through digital and telephony channels, and
covers clients' needs both in the UK and overseas.
The segmental data is prepared on a statutory basis of accounting, in line with the accounting policies set out in Note 1. Transactions between segments are on
normal commercial terms and conditions. Internal charges and internal UK transfer pricing adjustments are reflected in the results of each segment and eliminate
on consolidation. Revenue sharing agreements are used to allocate external customer revenues to a segment on a reasonable basis. Funds are ordinarily
reallocated between segments, resulting in funding cost transfers disclosed in operating income. Interest charged for these funds is based on Santander UK’s cost
of wholesale funding. Interest income and interest expense have not been reported separately. The majority of segment revenues are interest income in nature and
net interest income is relied on primarily to assess segment performance and to make decisions on the allocation of segment resources.
Results by segment
For the year ended 31 December

| Retail & Business Banking | Consumer Finance | Corporate & Commercial Banking | Corporate Centre | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Net interest income | 3,506 | 129 | 677 | 68 | 4,380
Non-interest income/(expense) | 176 | 181 | 117 | (125) | 349
Total operating income/(expense) | 3,682 | 310 | 794 | (57) | 4,729
Operating expenses before credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | (1,918) | (150) | (374) | (15) | (2,457)
Credit impairment charges | (133) | (8) | (28) | (24) | (193)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges | (340) | (228) | (68) | 39 | (597)
Total credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | (473) | (236) | (96) | 15 | (790)
Profit/(loss) before tax | 1,291 | (76) | 324 | (57) | 1,482
Revenue/(expense) from external customers | 4,204 | 781 | 647 | (903) | 4,729
Inter-segment (expense)/revenue | (522) | (471) | 147 | 846 | —
Total operating income/(expense) | 3,682 | 310 | 794 | (57) | 4,729
Revenue from external customers includes the following fee and commission income 1: |  |  |  |  |
– Current account and debit card fees | 415 | — | 49 | — | 464
– Insurance, protection and investments | 48 | — | — | — | 48
– Credit cards | 100 | — | — | — | 100
– Non-banking and other fees 2 | 5 | 38 | 92 | 5 | 140
Total fee and commission income | 568 | 38 | 141 | 5 | 752
Fee and commission expense | (395) | (8) | (5) | (11) | (419)
Net fee and commission income/(expense) | 173 | 30 | 136 | (6) | 333
At 31 December 2025 |  |  |  |  |
Customer loans | 173,462 | 4,979 | 18,927 | (1) | 197,367
Customer deposits | 155,652 | — | 24,414 | 3,536 | 183,602
Average number of full-time equivalent staff | 13,802 | 762 | 2,092 | — | 16,656

1 The disaggregation of fees and commission income as shown above is not included in reports provided to the chief operating decision maker but is provided to show the split by reportable segments.
2 Non-banking and other fees include mortgages (except mortgage account fees), consumer finance, commitment commission, asset finance invoice finance and trade finance.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 154

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

| Retail & Business Banking | Consumer Finance | Corporate & Commercial Banking | Corporate Centre | Total
2024 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Net interest income | 3,426 | 144 | 694 | 48 | 4,312
Non-interest income/(expense) | 121 | 182 | 128 | (86) | 345
Total operating income/(expense) | 3,547 | 326 | 822 | (38) | 4,657
Operating expenses before credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | (1,976) | (152) | (417) | (3) | (2,548)
Credit impairment charges | (50) | (17) | (4) | — | (71)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges | (297) | (332) | (50) | (10) | (689)
Total credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | (347) | (349) | (54) | (10) | (760)
Profit/(loss) before tax | 1,224 | (175) | 351 | (51) | 1,349
Revenue/(expense) from external customers | 3,711 | 754 | 562 | (370) | 4,657
Inter-segment (expense)/revenue | (164) | (428) | 260 | 332 | —
Total operating income/(expense) | 3,547 | 326 | 822 | (38) | 4,657
Revenue from external customers includes the following fee and commission income 1: |  |  |  |  |
– Current account and debit card fees | 424 | — | 50 | — | 474
– Insurance, protection and investments | 48 | — | — | — | 48
– Credit cards | 92 | — | — | — | 92
– Non-banking and other fees 2 | 3 | 28 | 73 | 15 | 119
Total fee and commission income | 567 | 28 | 123 | 15 | 733
Fee and commission expense | (442) | (7) | (10) | (22) | (481)
Net fee and commission income/(expense) | 125 | 21 | 113 | (7) | 252
At 31 December 2024 |  |  |  |  |
Customer loans | 171,724 | 4,759 | 18,029 | — | 194,512
Customer deposits | 151,815 | — | 22,137 | 2,781 | 176,733
Average number of full-time equivalent staff | 15,993 | 773 | 2,494 | — | 19,260

| Retail & Business Banking | Consumer Finance | Corporate & Commercial Banking | Corporate Centre | Total
2023 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Net interest income/(expense) | 3,716 | 156 | 841 | (55) | 4,658
Non-interest income/(expense) | 182 | 192 | 135 | (71) | 438
Total operating income/(expense) | 3,898 | 348 | 976 | (126) | 5,096
Operating expenses before credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | (1,813) | (141) | (351) | (151) | (2,456)
Credit impairment charges | (149) | (15) | (40) | (1) | (205)
Provisions for other liabilities and charges | (233) | (18) | (15) | (69) | (335)
Total credit impairment charges, provisions and charges | (382) | (33) | (55) | (70) | (540)
Profit/(loss) before tax | 1,703 | 174 | 570 | (347) | 2,100
Revenue from external customers | 3,597 | 663 | 712 | 124 | 5,096
Inter-segment revenue/(expense) | 301 | (315) | 264 | (250) | —
Total operating income/(expense) | 3,898 | 348 | 976 | (126) | 5,096
Revenue from external customers includes the following fee and commission income 1: |  |  |  |  |
– Current account and debit card fees | 493 | — | 49 | — | 542
– Insurance, protection and investments | 47 | — | — | — | 47
– Credit card fees | 94 | — | — | — | 94
– Non-banking and other fees 2 | 3 | 25 | 79 | 14 | 121
Total fee and commission income | 637 | 25 | 128 | 14 | 804
Fee and commission expense | (458) | (6) | (11) | (26) | (501)
Net fee and commission income/(expense) | 179 | 19 | 117 | (12) | 303
At 31 December 2023 |  |  |  |  |
Customer loans | 179,887 | 5,228 | 17,939 | — | 203,054
Customer deposits | 158,329 | — | 24,066 | 5,050 | 187,445
Average number of full-time equivalent staff | 16,330 | 816 | 2,376 | 24 | 19,546

1 The disaggregation of fees and commission income as shown above is not included in reports provided to the chief operating decision maker but is provided to show the split by reportable segments.
2 Non-banking and other fees include mortgages (except mortgage account fees), consumer finance, commitment commission, asset finance, invoice finance and trade finance.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 155

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The table below shows the relationship between Customer assets and Loans and advances to customers as presented in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. Customer
assets exclude joint ventures, as they carry low credit risk and therefore have an immaterial ECL, and Other items, mainly accrued interest that we have not yet
charged to the customer's account and cash collateral. It also shows the relationship between customer liabilities (see above) and Deposits by customers as
presented in the Consolidated Balance Sheet.

| Assets | Liabilities
| 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Customer balances (gross) | 197,367 | 194,512 | 183,602 | 176,733
Loan loss allowance | (729) | (784) | — | —
Customer balances (net) | 196,638 | 193,728 | 183,602 | 176,733
Intercompany balances (including joint ventures) | 5,054 | 4,832 | 3,145 | 3,632
Accrued interest | 725 | 714 | 928 | 854
Other items | 192 | 134 | (375) | (252)
Loans and advances to customers / Deposits by customers | 202,609 | 199,408 | 187,300 | 180,967

3. NET INTEREST INCOME
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Interest and similar income: |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | 8,891 | 9,290 | 8,767
Loans and advances to banks | 1,155 | 1,523 | 1,751
Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading | 873 | 987 | 626
Other | 622 | 639 | 473
Total interest and similar income 1 | 11,541 | 12,439 | 11,617
Interest expense and similar charges: |  |  |
Deposits by customers | (3,787) | (4,276) | (3,230)
Deposits by banks | (415) | (839) | (1,165)
Repurchase agreements - non-trading | (594) | (644) | (538)
Debt securities in issue | (2,189) | (2,171) | (1,852)
Subordinated liabilities | (172) | (193) | (169)
Other | (4) | (4) | (5)
Total interest expense and similar charges 2 | (7,161) | (8,127) | (6,959)
Net interest income | 4,380 | 4,312 | 4,658

1 Includes £274m (2024: £296m , 2023: £230m) of interest income on financial assets at FVOCI.
2 Includes £460m (2024: £762m, 2023: £706m) of interest expense on the effective part of derivatives hedging debt issuances and £3m (2024: £3m, 2023: £3m) of interest expense on lease liabilities.
4. NET FEE AND COMMISSION INCOME
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Fee and commission income: |  |  |
Current account and debit card fees | 464 | 474 | 542
Insurance, protection and investments | 48 | 48 | 47
Credit cards | 100 | 92 | 94
Non-banking and other fees 1 | 140 | 119 | 121
Total fee and commission income | 752 | 733 | 804
Total fee and commission expense | (419) | (481) | (501)
Net fee and commission income | 333 | 252 | 303

1 Non-banking and other fees include mortgages (except mortgage account fees), consumer finance, commitment commission, asset finance, invoice finance and trade finance.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 156

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

5. OTHER OPERATING INCOME
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Net (losses) on financial instruments designated at fair value through profit or loss 1 | (82) | (38) | (57)
Net gains/(losses) on financial instruments mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss 2 | 7 | (12) | (11)
Hedge ineffectiveness | (31) | 22 | 19
Net gain on sale of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 1 | — | —
Income from operating lease assets | 124 | 113 | 117
Other | (3) | 8 | 67
| 16 | 93 | 135

1 Net (losses) on financial instruments designated at fair value through profit or loss includes losses of £47m on deposits (2024: £16m losses, 2023 £24m losses), losses of £34m on debt securities (2024: £22m
losses, 2023: £32m losses).
2 Net gains on financial instruments mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss include gains of £1m on debt securities (2024: £7m gains, 2023: £5m gains).
Net gains on financial instruments mandatorily at FVTPL includes fair value losses of £9m (2024: losses of £21m, 2023: losses of £12m) on embedded derivatives
bifurcated from certain equity index-linked deposits, as described in the derivatives accounting policy in Note 1. The embedded derivatives are economically hedged,
the results of which are also included in this line item and amounted to gains of £9m (2024: gains of £21m, 2023: gains of £12m). As a result, in 2025, 2024 and
2023 the net fair value movements recognised on the equity index-linked deposits and the related economic hedges were £nil.

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Exchange rate differences in the consolidated income statement on items not at fair value through profit or loss | 562 | 495 | 1,288
These are principally offset by related releases from the cash flow hedge reserve: | (536) | (500) | (1,248)

In 2025 and 2024, no subordinated liabilities were repurchased as part of ongoing liability management exercises (2023: profit of £4m).
In 2025, Other includes £4m of losses on the sale of property as part of our transformation (2024: £8m losses; 2023: £nil).
6. OPERATING EXPENSES BEFORE CREDIT IMPAIRMENT CHARGES, PROVISIONS AND CHARGES
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group |  |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023 |  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Staff costs: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Wages and salaries | 785 | 866 | 839 |  | 733 | 813 | 787
Performance-related payments | 175 | 164 | 162 |  | 168 | 159 | 156
Social security costs | 131 | 122 | 115 |  | 124 | 116 | 109
Pension costs - defined contribution plans | 74 | 79 | 71 |  | 70 | 74 | 67
Pension costs - defined benefit plans | 8 | 13 | 13 |  | 8 | 13 | 12
Other personnel costs | 25 | 33 | 41 |  | 25 | 32 | 40
| 1,198 | 1,277 | 1,241 |  | 1,128 | 1,207 | 1,171
Other administration expenses | 937 | 971 | 925 |  | 898 | 937 | 890
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment | 322 | 300 | 290 |  | 241 | 238 | 220
| 2,457 | 2,548 | 2,456 |  | 2,267 | 2,382 | 2,281

Staff costs
Performance-related payments include bonuses paid in cash and share awards granted under the arrangements described in Note 35. Included in this are equity-
settled share-based payments, none of which related to option-based schemes. These are disclosed in the table below as ‘Shares awards’. Performance-related
payments above include amounts related to deferred performance awards as follows:

| Costs recognised in 2025 |  | Costs expected to be recognised in 2026 or later
| Arising from awards in current year | Arising from awards in prior year | Total |  | Arising from awards in current year | Arising from awards in prior year | Total
| £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Cash | 2 | 9 | 11 |  | 5 | 4 | 9
Shares | 2 | 8 | 10 |  | 4 | 5 | 9
| 4 | 17 | 21 |  | 9 | 9 | 18

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 157

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The following table shows the amount of bonus awarded to employees for the performance year 2025. In the case of deferred cash and shares awards, the final
amount paid to an employee is influenced by forfeiture provisions and any performance conditions to which the awards are subject. The deferred shares award
amount is based on the fair value of the awards at the date of grant.

| Expenses charged in the year |  | Expenses deferred to future periods |  | Total
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Cash award - not deferred | 145 | 140 |  | — | — |  | 145 | 140
– deferred | 11 | 8 |  | 9 | 14 |  | 20 | 22
Shares award - not deferred | 9 | 9 |  | — | — |  | 9 | 9
– deferred | 10 | 7 |  | 9 | 13 |  | 19 | 20
Total discretionary bonus | 175 | 164 |  | 18 | 27 |  | 193 | 191

Other share-based payments consist of options granted under the Employee Sharesave scheme which comprise the Santander UK group’s cash-settled share-based
payments. For more, see Note 35.
The average number of full-time equivalent staff in the year is set out in Note 2. For the Company, the average number of full-time equivalent staff was 15,792
(2024: 18,378, 2023: 18,631).
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment
In 2025, depreciation, amortisation and impairment included depreciation of £75m (2024: £75m, 2023: £64m) on operating lease assets (where the Santander UK
group is the lessor) with a carrying amount of £573m at 31 December 2025 (2024: £574m, 2023: £488m). See Note 20 for the depreciation on right-of-use assets
and their carrying value.
Other administration expenses includes £17m (2024: £18m, 2023: £19m) related to short-term leases.
In 2025, depreciation, amortisation and impairment included an impairment charge of £nil (2024: £nil, 2023: £25m) associated with branch and head office site
closures as part of our transformation. For more, see Note 20.
For the Company, in 2025, depreciation, amortisation and impairment included an impairment charge of £nil (2024: £nil, 2023: £25m) associated with branch and
head office site closures as part of our transformation.
7. AUDIT AND OTHER SERVICES
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Audit fees: |  |  |
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for the audit of the Santander UK group’s annual financial statements | 13.5 | 13.8 | 13.9
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for other services to the Santander UK group: |  |  |
– Audit of the Santander UK group's subsidiaries | 0.8 | 0.6 | 0.6
Total audit fees 1 | 14.3 | 14.4 | 14.5
Non-audit fees: |  |  |
Audit-related assurance services | 2.5 | 0.6 | 0.7
Other assurance services | 0.3 | 1.0 | 0.5
Other non-audit services | — | 0.6 | 0.1
Total non-audit fees | 2.8 | 2.2 | 1.3

1 2025 audit fees included £0.1m (2024: £0.1m , 2023: £0.7m) which related to the prior years.
Audit fees payable for the statutory audit of Santander UK plc were £12.2m (2024: £12.9m, 2023: £12.7m).
Audit-related assurance services mainly comprised services performed in connection with review of the financial information of the Company and reporting to the
Company's UK regulators.
Other non-audit services mainly comprised services performed in support of various debt issuance programmes.
Of the total non-audit fees, £0.2m (2024: £0.2m, 2023: £0.3m) accords with the definition of 'Audit Fees' per US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)
guidance, £2.5m (2024: £2.0m, 2023: £1.0m) accords with the definition of 'Audit related fees' per that guidance and £93,300 (2024: £48,300, 2023: £12,550)
accords with the definition of 'All other fees' per that guidance.
In 2025 , the Company's auditors earned £1.8m ( 2024 : £1.8m , 2023 : £1.6m ), in relation to incremental work undertaken in support of the audit of Banco Santander SA.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 158

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

8. CREDIT IMPAIRMENT CHARGES AND PROVISIONS
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Credit impairment charges/(write-backs): |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | 209 | 87 | 191
Recoveries of loans and advances, net of collection costs | (14) | (23) | 10
Off-balance sheet credit exposures (See Note 27) | (2) | 7 | 4
| 193 | 71 | 205
Provisions for other liabilities and charges (excluding off-balance sheet credit exposures) (See Note 27) | 563 | 687 | 334
Charge for residual value and voluntary termination | 34 | 2 | 1
| 597 | 689 | 335
| 790 | 760 | 540

In 2025, 2024 and 2023 there were no material credit impairment charges on Loans and advances to banks, Non-trading reverse repurchase agreements, Other
financial assets at amortised cost and Financial assets at FVOCI.
9. TAXATION
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Current tax: |  |  |
UK corporation tax on profit for the year | 386 | 205 | 475
Adjustments in respect of prior years | (14) | (47) | (15)
Total current tax | 372 | 158 | 460
Deferred tax: |  |  |
Charge for the year | 23 | 187 | 106
Adjustments in respect of prior years | 1 | 33 | (7)
Total deferred tax | 24 | 220 | 99
Tax on profit | 396 | 378 | 559

The standard rate of UK corporation tax was 28% for banking entities and 25% for non-banking entities (2024: 28% for banking entities and 25% for non-banking
entities; 2023: 27.75% for banking entities and 23.5% for non-banking entities) following the introduction of a surcharge on banking companies in 2016. Taxation
for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the relevant jurisdictions.
The Santander UK group’s effective tax rate for 2025 was 26.7% (2024: 28.0%, 2023: 26.6%). Tax on profit differs from that calculated at the statutory rate as
follows:
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Profit before tax | 1,482 | 1,349 | 2,100
Tax calculated at the statutory rate of 25% (2024: 25%, 2023: 23.5%) | 371 | 337 | 494
Bank surcharge on profits | 56 | 41 | 85
Non-deductible preference dividends paid | 9 | 9 | 9
Non-deductible UK Bank Levy | 11 | 12 | 10
Non-deductible conduct remediation, fines and penalties | (15) | 3 | 13
Other non-deductible costs and non-taxable income | 14 | 26 | 2
Effect of change in tax rate on deferred tax provision | — | — | 2
Tax relief on dividends in respect of other equity instruments | (37) | (36) | (34)
Adjustment to prior year provisions | (13) | (14) | (22)
Tax on profit | 396 | 378 | 559

It is not anticipated that the OECD Pillar Two rules which became effective from 1 January 2024 will impact the Santander UK group. The Santander UK group has
applied the amendments to IAS 12 relating to Pillar Two, issued in May 2023, and no additional disclosures arise.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 159

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Current tax assets
Movements in current tax assets during the year were as follows:

|  | Group |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January | 506 | 490 | 528 | 568
Income statement charge | (372) | (158) | (369) | (198)
Other comprehensive income charge | (14) | (47) | — | —
Corporate income tax paid | 46 | 240 | 48 | 172
Other movements | 189 | (19) | 188 | (14)
At 31 December | 355 | 506 | 395 | 528

The amount of corporation income tax paid differs from the tax charge for the period as a result of the timing of payments due to the tax authorities, the effects of
movements in deferred tax, current tax recognised directly in other comprehensive income and adjustments to prior period current tax provisions. In 2025 other
movements for both Santander UK group and Company includes £170m relating to amounts payable to related parties in respect of group relief (2024: £nil).
Santander UK group engages in discussion, and co-operates, with HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) in their oversight of the Santander UK group's tax matters. The
accounting policy for recognising provisions for any tax risks identified is described in Note 1. It is not expected that there will be any material movement in such
provisions within the next 12 months.
The Santander UK group consistently applies the UK’s Code of Practice on Taxation for Banks. For more information, see our Taxation Strategy on our website
aboutsantander.co.uk.
Deferred tax
The table below shows the deferred tax balances including the movement in the deferred tax account during the year. Deferred tax balances are presented in the
balance sheet after offsetting assets and liabilities where the Santander UK group and Company has the legal right to offset and intends to settle on a net basis.

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
| Fair value of financial instruments | Pension remeasurement | Cash flow hedges | Fair value reserve | Intangible assets | Accelerated tax depreciation | Other temporary differences | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | (152) | (117) | 110 | 8 | (72) | (6) | (17) | (246)
Income statement credit/(charge) | 9 | (51) | — | — | (8) | (14) | 40 | (24)
Transfers/reclassifications | — | — | 3 | 1 | — | — | (4) | —
Credited/(charged) to other comprehensive income | — | 28 | (190) | (5) | — | — | — | (167)
At 31 December 2025 | (143) | (140) | (77) | 4 | (80) | (20) | 19 | (437)
At 1 January 2024 | (8) | (186) | 73 | 3 | (70) | 18 | (16) | (186)
Income statement charge | (144) | (44) | — | — | (2) | (24) | (6) | (220)
Transfers/reclassifications | — | — | 2 | 1 | — | — | — | 3
Credited to other comprehensive income | — | 113 | 35 | 4 | — | — | 5 | 157
At 31 December 2024 | (152) | (117) | 110 | 8 | (72) | (6) | (17) | (246)

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
| Fair value of financial instruments | Pension remeasurement | Cash flow hedges | Fair value reserve | Intangible assets | Accelerated tax depreciation | Other temporary differences | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | (74) | (117) | 112 | 8 | (72) | (8) | 21 | (130)
Income statement (charge)/credit | (24) | (51) | — | — | (8) | (18) | 19 | (82)
Credited/(charged) to other comprehensive income | — | 28 | (184) | (4) | — | — | — | (160)
At 31 December 2025 | (98) | (140) | (72) | 4 | (80) | (26) | 40 | (372)
At 1 January 2024 | (11) | (186) | 74 | 4 | (70) | 13 | 35 | (141)
Income statement charge | (63) | (44) | — | — | (2) | (21) | (18) | (148)
Transfers/reclassifications | — | — | — | — | — | — | (1) | (1)
Credited to other comprehensive income | — | 113 | 38 | 4 | — | — | 5 | 160
At 31 December 2024 | (74) | (117) | 112 | 8 | (72) | (8) | 21 | (130)

The deferred tax assets and liabilities above have been recognised in both the Company and the Santander UK group on the basis that sufficient future taxable
profits are forecast within the foreseeable future, in excess of the profits arising from the reversal of existing taxable temporary differences, to allow for the
utilisation of the assets as they reverse. Based on the conditions at the balance sheet date, management determined that a reasonably possible change in any of the
key assumptions underlying the estimated future taxable profits in the Santander UK group’s three-year plan (described in Note 19) would not cause a reduction in
the deferred tax assets recognised.
In 2025 and 2024, unrecognised deferred tax assets on capital losses carried forward were £nil.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 160

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

10. DIVIDENDS ON ORDINARY SHARES
Dividends on ordinary shares declared and paid in the year were as follows:
For the year ended 31 December

|  |  | Group and Company
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023 |  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| Pence per share | Pence per share | Pence per share |  | £m | £m | £m
In respect of current year - first interim | 0.08 | 1.78 | 1.32 |  | 26 | 554 | 410
In respect of current year - second interim | — | 2.44 | 3.61 |  | — | 757 | 1,120
| 0.08 | 4.22 | 4.93 |  | 26 | 1,311 | 1,530

In December 2025, £26m of dividends were paid on the Company's ordinary shares in issue (2024: £1,311m, 2023: £1,530m) as, in anticipation of the proposed
acquisition of TSB by Santander UK (subject to regulatory approvals and other consents), the Board passed a resolution in August 2025 to cancel the interim
dividends that had been declared at 30 June 2025. In 2025, none (2024: £804m, 2023: £750m) of the dividends were special dividends. These were paid following
review and approval by the Board in line with our dividend policy.
11. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
a) Use of derivatives
Santander UK undertakes derivative activities primarily to provide customers with risk management solutions and to manage and hedge its own risks. These
derivative activities do not give rise to significant open positions in portfolios of derivatives. Any residual position is managed to ensure that it remains within
acceptable risk levels, with matching transactions used to achieve this where necessary. When entering into derivatives, Santander UK employs the same credit risk
management procedures to assess and approve potential credit exposures that are used for traditional lending.
b) Analysis of derivatives
The table below includes the notional amounts of transactions outstanding at the balance sheet date; they do not represent actual exposures.

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
| 2025 |  | 2024
|  | Fair value |  |  | Fair value
| Notional amount | Assets | Liabilities |  | Notional amount | Assets | Liabilities
| £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Derivatives held for trading: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Exchange rate contracts | 9,341 | 85 | 118 |  | 13,755 | 238 | 156
Interest rate contracts | 25,372 | 198 | 336 |  | 29,296 | 294 | 489
Inflation rate contracts | 171 | 16 | 30 |  | — | — | —
Equity and credit contracts | 568 | 94 | 21 |  | 681 | 124 | 21
Total derivatives held for trading | 35,452 | 393 | 505 |  | 43,732 | 656 | 666
Derivatives held for hedging |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Designated as fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Exchange rate contracts | 4,099 | 86 | 16 |  | 1,712 | 42 | 8
Interest rate contracts | 169,084 | 564 | 479 |  | 146,172 | 1,055 | 477
Inflation rate contracts | 1,850 | 69 | — |  | — | — | —
| 175,033 | 719 | 495 |  | 147,884 | 1,097 | 485
Designated as cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Exchange rate contracts | 18,343 | 500 | 378 |  | 21,535 | 698 | 266
Interest rate contracts | 37,508 | 316 | 367 |  | 54,267 | 326 | 928
Inflation rate contracts | — | — | — |  | 1,794 | 70 | —
| 55,851 | 816 | 745 |  | 77,596 | 1,094 | 1,194
Total derivatives held for hedging | 230,884 | 1,535 | 1,240 |  | 225,480 | 2,191 | 1,679
Derivative netting 1 | — | (1,058) | (1,058) |  | — | (1,643) | (1,643)
Total derivatives | 266,336 | 870 | 687 |  | 269,212 | 1,204 | 702

1 Derivative netting excludes the effect of cash collateral, which is offset against the gross derivative position. The amount of cash collateral received that had been offset against the gross derivative assets was
£827m (2024: £489m) and the amount of cash collateral paid that had been offset against the gross derivative liabilities was £23m (2024: £32m).
At 31 December 2025, the fair value of derivative assets included amounts due from Banco Santander group entities of £599m (2024: £544m) and the fair value of
derivative liabilities included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £292m (2024: £244m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 161

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
| 2025 |  |  |  | 2024
|  |  | Fair value |  |  | Fair value
| Notional amount | Assets | Liabilities |  | Notional amount | Assets | Liabilities
| £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Derivatives held for trading: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Exchange rate contracts | 28,677 | 480 | 542 |  | 31,646 | 553 | 300
Interest rate contracts | 71,108 | 320 | 1,527 |  | 69,248 | 358 | 2,589
Inflation rate contracts | 171 | 16 | 30 |  | — | — | —
Equity and credit contracts | 568 | 94 | 21 |  | 681 | 124 | 21
Total derivatives held for trading | 100,524 | 910 | 2,120 |  | 101,575 | 1,035 | 2,910
Derivatives held for hedging |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Designated as fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Exchange rate contracts | 2,854 | 47 | 16 |  | 1,524 | 41 | 4
Interest rate contracts | 166,223 | 490 | 478 |  | 144,346 | 1,013 | 464
Inflation rate contracts | 1,850 | 69 | — |  | — | — | —
| 170,927 | 606 | 494 |  | 145,870 | 1,054 | 468
Designated as cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Exchange rate contracts | 9,890 | 244 | 278 |  | 12,931 | 649 | 152
Interest rate contracts | 29,984 | 265 | 298 |  | 46,549 | 317 | 720
Inflation rate contracts | — | — | — |  | 1,794 | 70 | —
| 39,874 | 509 | 576 |  | 61,274 | 1,036 | 872
Total derivatives held for hedging | 210,801 | 1,115 | 1,070 |  | 207,144 | 2,090 | 1,340
Derivative netting 1 | — | (1,058) | (1,058) |  | — | (1,643) | (1,643)
Total derivatives | 311,325 | 967 | 2,132 |  | 308,719 | 1,482 | 2,607

1 Derivative netting excludes the effect of cash collateral, which is offset against the gross derivative position. The amount of cash collateral received that had been offset against the gross derivative assets was
£827m (2024: £489m) and the amount of cash collateral paid that had been offset against the gross derivative liabilities was £23m (2024: £32m).
At 31 December 2025, for the Company, the fair value of derivative assets included amounts due from Banco Santander group entities of £599m (2024: £544m)
and the fair value of derivative liabilities included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £292m (2024: £244m).
For information about the impact of netting arrangements on derivative assets and liabilities in the table above, see Note 39.
The table below analyses the notional and fair values of derivatives by trading and settlement method.

Notional |  |  |
| Traded over the counter | Asset | Liability |
| Settled by central counterparties | Not settled by central counterparties | Total | Traded over the counter | Traded over the counter
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Exchange rate contracts | — | 31,783 | 31,783 | 671 | 512
Interest rate contracts | 219,306 | 12,658 | 231,964 | 20 | 124
Inflation rate contracts | 2,021 | — | 2,021 | 85 | 30
Equity and credit contracts | — | 568 | 568 | 94 | 21
| 221,327 | 45,009 | 266,336 | 870 | 687
2024 |  |  |  |  |
Exchange rate contracts | — | 37,002 | 37,002 | 978 | 430
Interest rate contracts | 217,159 | 12,576 | 229,735 | 32 | 251
Inflation rate contracts | 1,794 | — | 1,794 | 70 | —
Equity and credit contracts | — | 681 | 681 | 124 | 21
| 218,953 | 50,259 | 269,212 | 1,204 | 702

c) Analysis of derivatives designated as hedges
Santander UK applies hedge accounting on both a fair value and cash flow basis depending on the nature of the underlying exposure. We establish the hedge ratio
by matching the notional of the derivative with the underlying position being hedged. Only the designated risk is hedged and therefore other risks, such as credit risk
are managed but not hedged. For interest rate hedges, the designated hedged risk is determined with reference to the underlying benchmark rate.
Fair value hedges
Portfolio hedges of interest rate risk
Santander UK holds portfolios of fixed rate assets and liabilities which expose it to changes in fair value due to movements in market interest rates. We manage
these exposures by entering into interest rate swaps. Each portfolio contains assets or liabilities that are similar in nature and share the risk exposure that is
designated as being hedged.
The interest rate risk component is the change in fair value of fixed rate instruments for changes in the designated benchmark rate. Such changes are usually the
largest component of the overall change in fair value. Separate hedges are maintained for each underlying currency. Effectiveness is assessed by comparing
changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to changes in the designated benchmark interest rate, with changes in the fair value of the interest rate
swaps.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 162

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Micro hedges of interest rate risk and foreign currency risk
Santander UK accesses international markets to obtain funding, to issue fixed rate debt or to invest in fixed rate debt of other issuers as part of maintaining a
portfolio of HQLA (High Quality Liquid Assets) in its functional currency and other currencies. We are therefore exposed to changes in fair value due to changes in
market interest rates and/or foreign exchange rates, principally in USD and EUR, which we mitigate through the use of receive fixed/pay floating rate interest rate
swaps and/or receive fixed/pay floating rate cross currency swaps.
The interest rate risk component is the change in fair value of the fixed rate debt due to changes in the benchmark rate. The foreign exchange component is the
change in the fair value of the fixed rate debt issuance due to changes in foreign exchange rates prevailing from the time of execution. Effectiveness is assessed by
using linear regression techniques to compare changes in the fair value of the debt caused by changes in the benchmark interest rate and foreign exchange rates,
with changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps and/or cross currency swaps.
Hedges of inflation risk
Santander UK has exposure to inflation arising on UK inflation-linked gilts, that is hedged by entering into inflation swaps. Fair value hedging is applied whereby the
inflation swap is hedging variability in cash flows of the inflation-linked gilt due to change in GBP RPI. Effectiveness is assessed by using linear regression techniques
to compare changes in the fair value of the inflation-linked gilts attributable to the hedged risk, with changes in the fair value of the inflation linked swaps.
Cash flow hedges
Hedges of interest rate risk
Santander UK manages its exposure to the variability in cash flows of floating rate assets and liabilities attributable to movements in market interest rates by
entering into interest rate swaps. The interest rate risk component is determined with reference to the underlying benchmark rate attributable to the floating rates
asset or liability. Designated benchmark rates referenced are currently SONIA or BoE base rate. Effectiveness is assessed by comparing changes in the fair value of
the interest rate swap with changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk, applying a hypothetical derivative method using linear
regression techniques.
Hedges of foreign currency risk
As Santander UK obtains funding in international markets, we assume significant foreign currency risk exposure, mainly in USD and EUR. In addition, Santander UK
also holds debt securities for liquidity purposes which assumes foreign currency exposure, principally in JPY, CAD and CHF.
Santander UK manages the exposures to the variability in cash flows of foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities to movements in foreign exchange rates
by entering into either foreign exchange contracts (spot, forward and swaps) or cross-currency swaps. These instruments are entered into to match the cash flow
profile and maturity of the estimated interest and principal repayments of the hedged item.
The foreign currency risk component is the change in cash flows of the foreign currency debt arising from changes in the relevant foreign currency forward
exchange rate. Such changes constitute a significant component of the overall changes in cash flows of the instrument. Effectiveness is assessed by comparing
changes in the fair value of the foreign exchange contracts (spot, forward and swaps) or cross currency swaps with changes in the fair value of the hedged debt
attributable to the hedged risk applying a hypothetical derivative method using linear regression techniques.
Possible sources of hedge ineffectiveness
For both fair value and cash flow hedges, hedge ineffectiveness can arise from hedging derivatives with a non-zero fair value at the date of initial designation. In
addition, for:
Fair value hedges
Hedge ineffectiveness can also arise due to differences in discounting between the hedged item and the hedging instrument as cash collateralised swaps discount
using Overnight Indexed Swaps discount curves not applied to the hedged item; and where counterparty credit risk impacts the fair value of the derivative but not
the hedged item. For portfolio hedges of interest rate risk, it can also arise due to differences in the expected and actual volume of prepayments.
Cash flow hedges
Hedge ineffectiveness can also arise due to differences in the timing of cash flows between the hedged item and the hedging instrument. For micro hedges of
interest rate risk, it can also arise due to differences in the basis of cash flows between the hedged item and the hedging instrument.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 163

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Maturity profile and average price/rate of hedging instruments
The following table sets out the maturity profile and average price/rate of the hedging instruments used in the Santander UK group’s hedging strategies:

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
2025 | Hedging Instruments | ≤1 month | >1 and ≤3 months | >3 and ≤12 months | >1 and ≤5 years | >5 years | Total
Fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | 12,649 | 10,884 | 60,547 | 75,678 | 3,581 | 163,339
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | 4.15% | 4.70% | 4.02% | 3.51% | 3.75% |
| Average fixed interest rate - EUR | — | 0.22% | — | 0.62% | 4.37% |
| Average fixed interest rate - USD | — | — | — | 4.09% | 1.33% |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | 12 | 13 | 199 | 3,086 | 789 | 4,099
| Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | 12 | 13 | 113 | 2,968 | 789 | 3,895
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | 1.18 | 1.14 | 1.16 | 1.18 | 1.18 |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.25 | 1.35 | 1.29 |
| Average fixed interest rate - EUR | 1.78% | 3.25% | 4.08% | 3.51% | 2.82% |
| Average fixed interest rate - USD | — | — | 4.99% | 4.39% | 4.36% |
Inflation risk/Interest rate risk | Inflation derivative contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 1,850 | 1,850
Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 1,850 | 1,850
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | — | — | — | — | 5.00% |
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 261 | — | 2,174 | 30,622 | 3,550 | 36,607
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | 4.38% | — | 3.15% | 3.88% | 4.48% |
FX risk | Exchange rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | 1,730 | 12,429 | 2,716 | 16,875
| Average GBP - CHF exchange rate | — | — | 1.12 | 1.11 | — |
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | — | — | 1.18 | 1.17 |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.33 | 1.27 | 1.37 |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | 76 | 1,183 | 209 | 1,468
| Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | 743 | 158 | 901
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | — | 1.17 | 1.20 | — |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | — | 1.32 | 1.54 |
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | — | — | 2.86% | 3.10% | 4.59% |
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts- Nominal amount (£m) | 4,174 | 6,301 | 53,531 | 77,233 | 3,409 | 144,648
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | 3.75% | 4.29% | 4.50% | 3.87% | 3.65% |
| Average fixed interest rate - EUR | 0.20% | (0.35)% | (0.45)% | 0.58% | 4.37% |
| Average fixed interest rate - USD | 1.68% | 1.53% | 1.53% | 5.76% | 0.45% |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | 88 | 128 | 1,018 | 478 | 1,712
| Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | 88 | 86 | 872 | 478 | 1,524
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | 1.14 | 1.16 | 1.16 | 1.18 |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | — | 1.32 | 1.28 |
| Average fixed interest rate - EUR | — | — | 1.35% | 3.30% | 2.94% |
| Average fixed interest rate - USD | — | — | — | 4.83% | 4.38% |
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | 4,300 | 3,366 | 11,598 | 28,336 | 3,587 | 51,187
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | 4.59% | 4.05% | 4.76% | 3.70% | 4.35% |
FX risk | Exchange rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | 258 | 792 | 4,927 | 10,976 | 1,306 | 18,259
| Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 958 | 958
| Average GBP - JPY exchange rate | 178.37 | 179.99 | 187.64 | — | — |
| Average GBP - CHF exchange rate | — | — | 1.09 | 1.11 | — |
| Average GBP - CAD exchange rate | — | — | 1.76 | — | — |
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | 1.20 | 1.19 | 1.18 | 1.16 |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.24 | 1.30 | 1.39 |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | 826 | 394 | 534 | 1,104 | 418 | 3,276
| Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | 826 | — | 327 | 799 | 170 | 2,122
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | 1.12 | 1.37 | 1.16 | 1.21 | 1.18 |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.54 | 1.32 | 1.54 |
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | 1.48% | 2.76% | 2.65% | 2.74% | 4.81% |
Inflation risk | Inflation derivative contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 1,794 | 1,794
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | — | — | — | — | 4.98% |

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 164

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
2025 | Hedging Instruments | ≤1 month | >1 month and ≤3 months | >3 and ≤12 months | >1 and ≤5 years | >5 years | Total
Fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 12,647 | 9,897 | 60,537 | 74,947 | 3,504 | 161,532
| Average fixed interest rate – GBP | 4.15% | 4.60% | 4.02% | 3.49% | 3.75% |
| Average fixed interest rate – EUR | — | 0.22% | — | 0.62% | — |
| Average fixed interest rate – USD | — | — | — | 4.09% | 1.33% |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 12 | 13 | 112 | 1,928 | 789 | 2,854
| Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 12 | 13 | 112 | 1,915 | 789 | 2,841
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | 1.18 | 1.14 | 1.15 | 1.16 | 1.18 |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.25 | 1.35 | 1.29 |
| Average fixed interest rate – EUR | 1.78% | 3.25% | 3.21% | 2.97% | 2.82% |
| Average fixed interest rate – USD | — | — | 4.99% | 4.39% | 4.36% |
Inflation risk/interest rate risk | Inflation derivative contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 1,850 | 1,850
Interest rate contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 1,850 | 1,850
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | — | — | — | — | 5.00% |
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 261 | — | 1,144 | 25,621 | 2,058 | 29,084
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | 4.38% | — | 2.93% | 4.01% | 4.37% |
FX risk | Exchange rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | 743 | 6,914 | 1,189 | 8,846
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | — | — | 1.18 | — |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.41 | 1.28 | 1.37 |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | 30 | 805 | 209 | 1,044
| Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | 743 | 157 | 900
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | — | 1.32 | 1.54 |
| Average fixed interest rate – GBP | — | — | 2.84% | 2.60% | 4.59% |
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 4,172 | 6,296 | 53,514 | 75,503 | 3,337 | 142,822
| Average fixed interest rate – GBP | 3.75% | 4.29% | 4.50% | 3.83% | 3.65% |
| Average fixed interest rate – EUR | 0.20% | (0.35)% | (0.45)% | 0.58% | — |
| Average fixed interest rate – USD | 1.68% | 1.53% | 1.53% | 5.76% | 0.45% |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | 88 | 86 | 872 | 478 | 1,524
| Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | 88 | 86 | 872 | 478 | 1,524
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | 1.14 | 1.16 | 1.16 | 1.18 |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | — | 1.32 | 1.28 |
| Average fixed interest rate - EUR | — | — | 0.80% | 3.06% | 2.94% |
| Average fixed interest rate - USD | — | — | — | 4.83% | 4.38% |
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 4,300 | 3,366 | 11,598 | 22,305 | 2,727 | 44,296
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | 4.59% | 4.06% | 4.76% | 3.83% | 4.33% |
FX risk | Exchange rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | 258 | 792 | 4,927 | 4,634 | 479 | 11,090
| Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 958 | 958
| Average GBP - JPY exchange rate | 179.37 | 179.99 | 187.64 | — | — |
| Average GBP - CHF exchange rate | — | — | 1.09 | — | — |
| Average GBP - CAD exchange rate | — | — | 1.76 | — | — |
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | 1.20 | 1.19 | 1.18 | — |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.29 | 1.32 | 1.39 |
Interest rate/FX risk | Exchange rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | 394 | 327 | 895 | 225 | 1,841
| Interest rate contracts – Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | 327 | 799 | 169 | 1,295
| Average GBP - EUR exchange rate | — | 1.37 | — | — | — |
| Average GBP - USD exchange rate | — | — | 1.54 | 1.32 | 1.54 |
| Average fixed interest rate – GBP | — | 2.22% | 3.34% | 2.62% | 4.59% |
Inflation risk | Inflation derivative contracts - Nominal amount (£m) | — | — | — | — | 1,794 | 1,794
| Average fixed interest rate - GBP | — | — | — | — | 4.98% |

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 165

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Net gains or losses arising from fair value and cash flow hedges included in other operating income

|  |  | Group |  |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023 |  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
£m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Fair value hedging: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
(Losses)/Gains on hedging instruments | (551) | 193 | (1,879) |  | (626) | 220 | (1,920)
Gains/(Losses) on hedged items attributable to hedged risks | 523 | (168) | 1,896 |  | 589 | (201) | 1,927
Fair value hedging ineffectiveness | (28) | 25 | 17 |  | (37) | 19 | 7
Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness | (3) | (3) | 2 |  | (3) | (4) | —
| (31) | 22 | 19 |  | (40) | 15 | 7

Hedge ineffectiveness can be analysed by risk category as follows:

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
|  |  | 2025 |  |  |  | 2024 |  |  |  | 2023
| Change in FV of hedging instruments | Change in FV of hedged items | Recognised in income statement |  | Change in FV of hedging instruments | Change in FV of hedged items | Recognised in income statement |  | Change in FV of hedging instruments | Change in FV of hedged items | Recognised in income statement
| £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | (528) | 499 | (29) |  | 167 | (151) | 16 |  | (1,865) | 1,877 | 12
Interest rate/FX risk | 9 | (8) | 1 |  | 26 | (17) | 9 |  | (14) | 19 | 5
Inflation rate risk/interest rate risk | (32) | 32 | — |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | —
| (551) | 523 | (28) |  | 193 | (168) | 25 |  | (1,879) | 1,896 | 17

|  |  |  |  | Group
|  | Hedging Instruments | Recognised in Income Statement | Reclassified from reserves to income
| Income statement line item affected by reclassification | Change in FV | Recognised in OCI
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |
2025 |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Net interest income | 465 | (469) | (4) | (305)
FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (287) | 295 | 8 | (151)
Interest rate/FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (66) | 59 | (7) | (89)
Inflation Risk | Net Interest Income | 82 | (82) | — | 9
|  | 194 | (197) | (3) | (536)
2024 |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Net interest income | (764) | 761 | (3) | (488)
FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | 414 | (405) | 9 | 216
Interest rate/FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (181) | 172 | (9) | (231)
Inflation Risk | Net Interest Income | 71 | (71) | — | 3
|  | (460) | 457 | (3) | (500)
2023 |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Net interest income | 466 | (445) | 21 | (469)
FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (396) | 377 | (19) | (392)
Interest rate/FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (237) | 237 | — | (387)
|  | (167) | 169 | 2 | (1,248)

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 166

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
|  |  | 2025 |  |  |  | 2024 |  |  |  | 2023
| Change in FV of hedging instruments | Change in FV of hedged items | Recognised in income statement |  | Change in FV of hedging instruments | Change in FV of hedged items | Recognised in income statement |  | Change in FV of hedging instruments | Change in FV of hedged items | Recognised in income statement
| £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | (553) | 521 | (32) |  | 186 | (171) | 15 |  | (1,907) | 1,916 | 9
Interest rate/FX risk | (41) | 36 | (5) |  | 34 | (30) | 4 |  | (13) | 11 | (2)
Inflation rate risk/Interest rate risk | (32) | 32 | — |  | — | — | — |  | — | — | —
| (626) | 589 | (37) |  | 220 | (201) | 19 |  | (1,920) | 1,927 | 7

|  |  |  |  | Company
|  | Hedging Instruments | Recognised in Income Statement | Reclassified from reserves to income
| Income statement line item affected by reclassification | Change in FV | Recognised in OCI
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |
2025 |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Net interest income | 394 | (398) | (4) | (204)
FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (312) | 315 | 3 | (277)
Interest rate/FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (101) | 99 | (2) | (124)
Inflation Risk | Net Interest Income | 82 | (82) | — | 9
|  | 63 | (66) | (3) | (596)
2024 |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Net interest income | (616) | 614 | (2) | (333)
FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | 587 | (582) | 5 | 523
Interest rate/FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (54) | 47 | (7) | (64)
Inflation Risk | Net Interest Income | 71 | (71) | — | 3
|  | (12) | 8 | (4) | 129
2023 |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk | Net interest income | 418 | (416) | 2 | (312)
FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (204) | 200 | (4) | (205)
Interest rate/FX risk | Net interest income/other operating income | (168) | 170 | 2 | (277)
|  | 46 | (46) | — | (794)

In 2025, cash flow hedge accounting of £nil (2024: £nil) had to cease due to the hedged cash flows no longer being expected to occur.
The following table provides a reconciliation by risk category of components of equity and analysis of OCI items (before tax) resulting from hedge accounting.

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Balance at 1 January | (453) | (496) |  | (399) | (262)
Effective portion of changes in fair value: |  |  |  |  |
– Interest rate risk | 469 | (761) |  | 398 | (614)
– Foreign currency risk | (295) | 405 |  | (315) | 582
– Interest rate/foreign currency risk | (59) | (172) |  | (99) | (47)
– Inflation risk | 82 | 71 |  | 82 | 71
| 197 | (457) |  | 66 | (8)
Income statement transfers: |  |  |  |  |
– Interest rate risk | 305 | 488 |  | 204 | 333
– Foreign currency risk | 151 | (216) |  | 277 | (523)
– Interest rate/foreign currency risk | 89 | 231 |  | 124 | 64
– Inflation risk | (9) | (3) |  | (9) | (3)
| 536 | 500 |  | 596 | (129)
Balance at 31 December | 280 | (453) |  | 263 | (399)

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 167

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Hedged exposures
Santander UK hedges its exposures to various risks, including interest rate risk and foreign currency risk, as set out in the following table.

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
|  |  |  |  | 2025 |  |  |  |  |  | 2024
|  | Accumulated FV hedge adjustments | Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness |  |  | Accumulated FV hedge adjustments | Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness
| Carrying value | Hedged item | Portfolio hedge of interest rate risks | Of which Discontinued hedges |  | Carrying value | Hedged item | Portfolio hedge of interest rate risks | Of which Discontinued hedges
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Fair value hedges |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | 72,604 | — | (76) | (24) | 552 |  | 62,773 | — | (731) | (290) | (154)
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 2,103 | (25) | (6) | (5) | 21 |  | 1,667 | (45) | (7) | (7) | (44)
Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading | 8,802 | — | 2 | — | 2 |  | 6,423 | — | (1) | — | (1)
Other financial assets at FVOCI | 2,010 | (87) | — | (74) | 42 |  | 2,100 | (131) | — | (95) | (18)
Deposits by customers | (29,620) | — | (27) | — | (53) |  | (21,726) | 18 | 9 | 1 | (1)
Debt securities in issue | (3,758) | 70 | (32) | (38) | (60) |  | (3,811) | 150 | (54) | (77) | 52
Subordinated liabilities | (505) | (18) | (1) | (28) | (6) |  | (511) | (12) | (1) | (36) | 15
Interest rate/FX risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at FVOCI | 1,898 | 7 | — | — | 46 |  | 1,503 | 16 | — | — | (30)
Debt securities in issue | (2,284) | (5) | — | (8) | (53) |  | (200) | (9) | — | (14) | 13
Inflation risk/Interest rate risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 1,884 | 12 | — | — | 32 |  | — | — | — | — | —
Other financial assets at FVOCI | 83 | (1) | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | — | —
| 53,217 | (47) | (140) | (177) | 523 |  | 48,218 | (13) | (785) | (518) | (168)

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
|  |  | 2025 |  |  |  | 2024
| Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness | Cash flow hedge reserve | Balances on cash flow hedge reserve for discontinued hedges |  | Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness | Cash flow hedge reserve | Balances on cash flow hedge reserve for discontinued hedges
Hedged item balance sheet line item | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | (205) | (79) | — |  | 361 | (497) | 2
Cash and balances at central banks | (207) | 112 | (27) |  | 464 | (192) | (50)
Deposits by banks | 2 | — | — |  | (4) | — | —
Repurchase agreements - non trading | (59) | 104 | 104 |  | (60) | 52 | —
FX risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at FVOCI | (84) | — | — |  | (487) | 1 | —
Highly probable forecast transactions | (5) | 1 | — |  | 4 | — | —
Debt securities in issue | 383 | 36 | — |  | 78 | 181 | —
Interest rate/FX risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Debt securities in issue/loans and advances to customers | (47) | (3) | — |  | 148 | (12) | —
Deposits by customers | 58 | (13) | — |  | 21 | (37) | —
Subordinated liabilities/loans and advances to customers | 49 | (19) | 48 |  | 3 | (16) | 51
Inflation risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at amortised cost | (81) | 139 | 139 |  | (70) | 66 | —
Other financial assets at FVOCI | (1) | 2 | 2 |  | (1) | 1 | —
| (197) | 280 | 266 |  | 457 | (453) | 3

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 168

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
|  |  |  |  | 2025 |  |  |  |  |  | 2024
|  | Accumulated FV hedge adjustments | Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness |  |  | Accumulated FV hedge adjustments | Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness
| Carrying value | Hedged item | Portfolio hedge of interest rate risks | Of which Discontinued hedges |  | Carrying value | Hedged item | Portfolio hedge of interest rate risks | Of which Discontinued hedges
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Fair value hedges |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | 72,525 | — | (220) | (169) | 552 |  | 62,694 | — | (903) | (461) | (153)
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 2,103 | (25) | (6) | (6) | 21 |  | 1,667 | (45) | (7) | (7) | (44)
Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading | 8,802 | — | 2 | — | 2 |  | 6,423 | — | (1) | — | (1)
Other financial assets at FVOCI | 2,010 | (87) | — | (74) | 42 |  | 2,100 | (131) | — | (95) | (18)
Deposits by customers | (29,112) | — | (27) | — | (53) |  | (21,726) | 18 | 10 | 1 | (1)
Debt securities in issue | (1,948) | 25 | — | — | (37) |  | (2,035) | 64 | — | — | 32
Subordinated liabilities | (506) | (18) | — | (27) | (6) |  | (512) | (13) | — | (35) | 14
Interest rate/FX risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at FVOCI | 1,898 | 7 | — | — | 46 |  | 1,503 | 17 | — | — | (30)
Debt securities in issue | (1,010) | 3 | — | — | (10) |  | — | — | — | — | —
Inflation risk/Interest rate risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 1,884 | 12 | — | — | 32 |  | — | — | — | — | —
Other financial assets at FVOCI | 83 | (1) | — | — | — |  | — | — | — | — | —
| 56,729 | (84) | (251) | (276) | 589 |  | 50,114 | (90) | (901) | (597) | (201)

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
|  |  | 2025 |  |  |  | 2024
| Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness | Cash flow hedge reserve | Balances on cash flow hedge reserve for discontinued hedges |  | Change in value to calculate hedge ineffectiveness | Cash flow hedge reserve | Balances on cash flow hedge reserve for discontinued hedges
Hedged item balance sheet line item | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Interest rate risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | (111) | (65) | — |  | 214 | (312) | 2
Cash and balances at central banks | (230) | 112 | (27) |  | 464 | (191) | (50)
Deposits by banks | 2 | — | — |  | (4) | — | —
Repurchase agreements - non trading | (59) | 104 | 104 |  | (60) | 52 | —
FX risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at FVOCI | (84) | — | — |  | (487) | 1 | —
Highly probable forecast transactions | (5) | 1 | — |  | 4 | — | —
Debt securities in issue | 404 | 9 | — |  | (99) | 48 | —
Interest rate/FX risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Debt securities in issue/loans and advances to customers | (6) | — | — |  | 23 | (2) | —
Deposits by customers | 57 | (13) | (1) |  | 21 | (38) | (1)
Subordinated liabilities/loans and advances to customers | 48 | (26) | 42 |  | 3 | (23) | 43
Inflation risk: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Other financial assets at amortised cost | (81) | 139 | 139 |  | (70) | 65 | —
Other financial assets at FVOCI | (1) | 2 | 2 |  | (1) | 1 | —
| (66) | 263 | 259 |  | 8 | (399) | (6)

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 169

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Cost of Hedging

|  |  | Group |  |  | Company
|  |  | 2025 |  |  | 2025
| Components of hedging derivatives excluded from hedge designation | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Balance at 1 January |  |  | — |  |  | —
Transfers to cost of hedging reserve: |  |  |  |  |  |
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |
Foreign currency risk | Time-period related | 24 |  |  | 8 |
| Transaction-related | — |  |  | — |
|  |  | 24 |  |  | 8
Equity risk | Time-period related | — |  |  | — |
| Transaction-related | — |  |  | — |
|  |  | — |  |  | —
|  |  | 24 |  |  | 8
Fair value hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |
Foreign currency risk | Time-period related | (2) |  |  | (2) |
| Transaction-related | — |  |  | — |
|  |  | (2) |  |  | (2)
|  |  | (2) |  |  | (2)
|  |  | 22 |  |  | 6
Transfers out of cost of hedging reserve: |  |  |  |  |  |
Cash flow hedges: |  |  |  |  |  |
Foreign currency risk | Time-period related | (1) |  |  | (1) |
| Transaction-related | — |  |  | — |
|  |  | (1) |  |  | (1)
Equity risk | Time-period related | — |  |  | — |
| Transaction-related | — |  |  | — |
|  |  | — |  |  | —
|  |  | (1) |  |  | (1)
|  |  | (1) |  |  | (1)
Tax |  |  | (1) |  |  | (1)
Balance at 31 December |  |  | 20 |  |  | 4

12. OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Loans and advances to customers: |  |  |  |  |
Loans to housing associations | — | 4 |  | — | 4
Other loans | 40 | 40 |  | 40 | 40
| 40 | 44 |  | 40 | 44
Debt securities | — | 56 |  | — | 56
Other debt instruments | 24 | 36 |  | — | —
| 64 | 136 |  | 40 | 100

For the Santander UK group, other financial assets at FVTPL comprised £nil (2024: £60m) of financial assets designated at FVTPL and £64m (2024: £76m) of
financial assets mandatorily held at FVTPL. For the Company, other financial assets at FVTPL comprised £nil (2024: £60m) of financial assets designated at FVTPL
and £40m (2024: £40m) of financial assets mandatorily held at FVTPL.
Loans and advances to customers principally represent other loans, being a portfolio of roll-up mortgages. These are managed, and have their performance
evaluated, on a fair value basis in accordance with a documented investment strategy, and information about them is provided on that basis to management.
In 2025, 2024 and 2023, the net loss in the year attributable to changes in credit risk for loans and advances at FVTPL was £nil. The cumulative net loss attributable
to changes in credit risk for loans and advances at FVTPL at 31 December 2025 was £3m (2024: £3m 2023: £3m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 170

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

13. LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS

| Group |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Loans secured on residential properties | 167,284 | 165,214 |  | 167,284 | 165,214
Corporate loans | 20,450 | 18,550 |  | 19,413 | 17,778
Finance leases | 4,251 | 4,222 |  | — | —
Other unsecured loans | 5,566 | 6,601 |  | 5,513 | 6,521
Accrued interest and other adjustments | 760 | 796 |  | 906 | 961
Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries and joint ventures | 5,043 | 4,814 |  | 7 | 3
Amounts due from Santander UK Group Holdings plc | 11 | 18 |  | 11 | 18
Amounts due from subsidiaries | — | — |  | 29,999 | 27,999
Loans and advances to customers | 203,365 | 200,215 |  | 223,133 | 218,494
Credit impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers | (729) | (784) |  | (666) | (714)
Residual value and voluntary termination provisions on finance leases | (27) | (23) |  | — | —
Net loans and advances to customers | 202,609 | 199,408 |  | 222,467 | 217,780

At 31 December 2025, loans and advances to customers included amounts due from Banco Santander group entities of £5,055m (2024: £4,834m).
For movements in expected credit losses, see the 'Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL' table in the Santander UK group level – Credit risk
review section of the Risk review.
Finance lease and hire purchase contract receivables may be analysed as follows:

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
| 2025 |  | 2024
| Gross investment | Unearned finance income | Net investment |  | Gross investment | Unearned finance income | Net investment
| £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
No later than one year | 1,362 | (202) | 1,160 |  | 1,400 | (208) | 1,192
Later than one year and not later than two years | 1,337 | (202) | 1,135 |  | 1,423 | (215) | 1,208
Later than two years and not later than three years | 1,086 | (164) | 922 |  | 1,220 | (184) | 1,036
Later than three years and not later than four years | 972 | (147) | 825 |  | 721 | (109) | 612
Later than four years and not later than five years | 135 | (21) | 114 |  | 115 | (17) | 98
Later than five years | 112 | (17) | 95 |  | 90 | (14) | 76
| 5,004 | (753) | 4,251 |  | 4,969 | (747) | 4,222

At 31 December 2025 and 2024, the Company had no finance lease and hire purchase contract receivables.
The Santander UK group enters into finance leasing arrangements primarily for the financing of motor vehicles and a range of assets for its corporate customers.
Included in the carrying value of net investment in finance leases and hire purchase contracts is £1,804m (2024: £1,748m) of unguaranteed RV at the end of the
current lease terms, which is expected to be recovered through re-payment, re-financing or sale. Finance income on the net investment in finance leases was
£324m (2024: £308m, 2023: £266m).
Finance lease receivable balances are secured over the asset leased. The Santander UK group is not permitted to sell or repledge the asset in the absence of default
by the lessee. The Directors consider that the carrying amount of the finance lease receivables approximates to their fair value.
Included within loans and advances to customers are advances assigned to bankruptcy remote structured entities and Abbey Covered Bonds LLP. These loans
provide security to issues of covered bonds and mortgage-backed or other asset-backed securities issued by the Santander UK group. For more, see Note 14.
At 31 December 2025 and 2024, the Santander UK group had contracted with lessees for the following future undiscounted minimum lease payments receivable
under operating leases.

| Group |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
No later than one year | 20 | 27 |  | 19 | 25
Later than one year and not later than two years | 17 | 21 |  | 16 | 20
Later than two years and not later than three years | 12 | 17 |  | 11 | 16
Later than three years and not later than four years | 7 | 7 |  | 6 | 7
Later than four years and not later than five years | 5 | 5 |  | 4 | 4
Later than five years | 11 | 11 |  | 7 | 7
| 72 | 88 |  | 63 | 79

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 171

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

14. SECURITISATIONS AND COVERED BONDS
The information in this Note relates to securitisations and covered bonds for consolidated structured entities, used to obtain funding or collateral. It excludes
securitisations and structured entities relating to credit protection transactions.
The Santander UK group uses structured entities to securitise some of the mortgage and other loans to customers that it originates. The Santander UK group also
issues covered bonds, which are guaranteed by, and secured against, a pool of the Santander UK group’s mortgage loans transferred to Abbey Covered Bonds LLP.
The Santander UK group issues mortgage-backed securities, other asset-backed securities and covered bonds mainly in order to obtain diverse, low-cost funding,
but also to use as collateral for raising funds via third party bilateral secured funding transactions or for liquidity purposes in the future. The Santander UK group has
successfully used bilateral secured transactions as an additional form of medium-term funding; this has allowed the Santander UK group to further diversify its
medium-term funding investor base.
Loans and advances to customers include portfolios of residential mortgage loans, and receivables derived from credit agreements with retail customers for the
purchases of financed vehicles, which are subject to non-recourse finance arrangements. These loans and receivables have been purchased by, or assigned to,
structured entities or Abbey Covered Bonds LLP and have been funded primarily through the issue of mortgage-backed securities, other asset-backed securities or
covered bonds. No gain or loss has been recognised as a result of these sales. The structured entities and Abbey Covered Bonds LLP are consolidated as subsidiary
undertakings. The Company and its subsidiaries do not own directly, or indirectly, any of the share capital of any of the structured entities.
a) Securitisations
i) Master trust structures
The Santander UK group makes use of master trust structures, whereby a pool of residential mortgage loans is assigned to a trust company by the asset originator.
A funding entity acquires a beneficial interest in the pool of assets held by the trust company with funds borrowed from qualifying structured entities, which at the
same time issue asset-backed securities to third-party investors or the Santander UK group.
Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries receive payments from the securitisation companies in respect of fees for administering the loans, and payment of deferred
consideration for the sale of the loans. Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries have no right or obligation to repurchase any securitised loan, except if certain
representations and warranties given by Santander UK plc or its subsidiaries at the time of transfer are breached and, in certain cases, if there is a product switch or
further advance, if a securitised loan is in arrears for over two months or if a securitised loan does not comply with regulatory requirements.
ii) Other securitisation structures
The Santander UK group also makes use of auto loan securitisations, whereby pools of auto loans originated by members of the Santander UK group are sold to
special purpose vehicles by members of the Santander UK group. The special purpose vehicle funds the purchase of the auto loans by issuing Variable Funding
Notes to third-party investors. A proportion of the remaining exposure is retained by members of the Santander UK group. Members of the Santander UK group also
receive payments from the special purpose vehicles in respect of fees for administering the auto loans, and payment of deferred consideration for the sale of the
securitised auto loans. The members of the Santander UK group have no right or obligation to repurchase any securitised loans, except if certain representations and
warranties given at the time of sale are breached and, in certain cases, if there has been a subsequent variation in the terms of the underlying auto loans not
permitted under the sale agreements related to the auto loan securitisations.
b) Covered bonds
Santander UK plc also issues covered bonds, which are its direct, unsecured and unconditional obligation. The covered bonds benefit from a guarantee from Abbey
Covered Bonds LLP. Santander UK plc makes a term advance to Abbey Covered Bonds LLP equal to the sterling proceeds of each issue of covered bonds. Abbey
Covered Bonds LLP uses the proceeds of the term advance to purchase portfolios of residential mortgage loans and their security from Santander UK plc. Under the
terms of the guarantee, Abbey Covered Bonds LLP has agreed to pay an amount equal to the guaranteed amounts when the same shall become due for payment,
but which would otherwise be unpaid by Santander UK plc.
c) Analysis of securitisations and covered bonds
The Santander UK group’s principal securitisation programmes and covered bond programme, together with the balances of the advances subject to securitisation
(or for the covered bond programme assigned) and the carrying value of the notes in issue at 31 December 2025 and 2024 are listed below. The gross assets in the
Santander UK group table below were transferred from the Company to the securitisations and covered bond programme vehicles but do not qualify for
derecognition from the Company.

Group
| Gross assets |  | External notes in issue |  | Notes held within the Group
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Mortgage-backed master trust structures: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Holmes | 7,090 | 5,109 |  | 4,887 | 3,379 |  | 562 | 389
– Fosse | 1,845 | 2,383 |  | 201 | — |  | 1,204 | 1,408
| 8,935 | 7,492 |  | 5,088 | 3,379 |  | 1,766 | 1,797
Other asset-backed securitisation structures: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Repton | 760 | 718 |  | 550 | 550 |  | — | —
Total securitisation programmes | 9,695 | 8,210 |  | 5,638 | 3,929 |  | 1,766 | 1,797
Covered bond programme: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme | 27,428 | 25,695 |  | 19,201 | 17,211 |  | 1,224 | 1,224
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes | 37,123 | 33,905 |  | 24,839 | 21,140 |  | 2,990 | 3,021

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 172

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Company
| Gross assets |  | External notes in issue |  | Notes held within the Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Covered bond programme: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme | 27,428 | 25,695 |  | 19,248 | 17,300 |  | 1,224 | 1,224
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes | 27,428 | 25,695 |  | 19,248 | 17,300 |  | 1,224 | 1,224

The following table sets out the internal and external issuances and redemptions in 2025 and 2024 for each securitisation and covered bond programme.

Group
| Internal issuances |  | External issuances |  | Internal redemptions |  | External redemptions
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m |  | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Mortgage-backed master trust structures: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Holmes | 172 | 106 |  | 1,500 | 1,250 |  | — | 17 |  | — | —
– Fosse | — | 894 |  | — | — |  | — | 865 |  | — | 100
Covered bond programme: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme | — | — |  | 2,687 | 5,890 |  | — | 41 |  | 1,152 | 3,359
| 172 | 1,000 |  | 4,187 | 7,140 |  | — | 923 |  | 1,152 | 3,459

In January 2025, £200m of the Fosse retained notes were sold to an external counterparty.

Company
|  | External issuances |  | Internal redemptions |  | External redemptions
|  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
|  | £m | £m |  | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Covered bond programme: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme |  | 2,687 | 5,890 |  | — | 41 |  | 1,152 | 3,359
|  | 2,687 | 5,890 |  | — | 41 |  | 1,152 | 3,359

Holmes Funding Ltd has a beneficial interest of £5,407m (2024: £3,735m) in the residential mortgage loans held by Holmes Trustees Ltd. The remaining share of
the beneficial interest in residential mortgage loans held by Holmes Trustees Ltd belongs to Santander UK plc.
Fosse Funding (No.1) Ltd has a beneficial interest of £1,394m (2024: £1,394m) in the residential mortgage loans held by Fosse Trustee (UK) Ltd. The remaining
share of the beneficial interest in residential mortgage loans held by Fosse Trustee (UK) Ltd belongs to Santander UK plc.
The Holmes securitisation companies have cash deposits of £182m (2024: £126m), which have been accumulated to finance the redemption of a number of
securities issued by the Holmes securitisation companies. The share of Holmes Funding Ltd in the trust assets is therefore reduced by this amount.
The Fosse securitisation companies have cash deposits of £47m (2024: £48m), which have been accumulated to finance the redemption of a number of securities
issued by the Fosse securitisation companies. The share of Fosse Funding (No.1) Ltd’s beneficial interest in the assets held by Fosse Trustee (UK) Ltd is therefore
reduced by this amount.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 173

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

15. TRANSFERS OF FINANCIAL ASSETS NOT QUALIFYING FOR DERECOGNITION
The Santander UK group enters into transactions in the normal course of business by which it transfers recognised financial assets directly to third parties or to
structured entities. These transfers may give rise to the full or partial derecognition of those financial assets. Transferred financial assets that do not qualify for
derecognition include (i) securities held by counterparties as collateral under repurchase agreements, (ii) securities lent under securities lending agreements, and
(iii) loans transferred under securitisation or covered bond arrangements where the Santander UK group retains a continuing involvement in such transferred
assets.
As a result of these sale and repurchase and securities lending transactions, the Santander UK group cannot use, sell or pledge the transferred assets for the
duration of the transaction. The Santander UK group remains exposed to interest rate risk and credit risk on these pledged instruments. The counterparty’s recourse
is not limited to the transferred assets.
The Santander UK group securitisation and covered bond transfers do not qualify for derecognition. The Santander UK group remains exposed to credit risks arising
from the mortgage loans or credit agreements and retains control of the transferred assets. Circumstances in which the Santander UK group has continuing
involvement in the transferred assets may include retention of servicing rights over the transferred assets (the servicing fee in respect of which is dependent on the
amount or timing of the cash flows collected from, or the non-performance of, the transferred assets), entering into a derivative transaction with the securitisation
or covered bond vehicle, retaining an interest in the securitisation or covered bond vehicle or providing a cash reserve fund. Where the Santander UK group has
continuing involvement, it continues to recognise the transferred assets to the extent of its continuing involvement and recognises an associated liability. The net
carrying amount of the transferred assets and associated liabilities reflects the rights and obligations that the Santander UK group retained.
The carrying amount of the assets transferred under securitisation and covered bond arrangements and associated financial liabilities is set out in Note 14 c). The
following table analyses the carrying amount of other financial assets that did not qualify for derecognition and their associated financial liabilities:

|  |  |  |  | Group
| 2025 |  | 2024
| Assets | Liabilities |  | Assets | Liabilities
Nature of transaction | £m | £m | £m | £m
Sale and repurchase agreements | 1,295 | 1,280 |  | 1,346 | (1,372)
Securities lending agreements | 2,160 | 1,857 |  | 3,304 | (2,807)

|  |  |  |  | Company
| 2025 |  | 2024
| Assets | Liabilities |  | Assets | Liabilities
Nature of transaction | £m | £m | £m | £m
Sale and repurchase agreements | 1,295 | 1,280 |  | 1,346 | (1,372)
Securities lending agreements | 2,160 | 1,857 |  | 2,358 | (2,307)

16. REVERSE REPURCHASE AGREEMENTS – NON-TRADING

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Agreements with banks | 3,973 | 1,363 |  | 3,973 | 1,363
Agreements with customers | 13,705 | 8,975 |  | 13,705 | 8,975
| 17,678 | 10,338 |  | 17,678 | 10,338

At 31 December 2025, reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading included amounts due from Banco Santander group entities of £1m (2024: £nil).
17. OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Asset backed securities | — | — |  | 1,767 | 1,798
Debt securities | 3,987 | 3,408 |  | 3,987 | 3,408
0 | 3,987 | 3,408 |  | 5,754 | 5,206

A significant portion of the debt securities are held in our eligible liquidity pool and consist mainly of government bonds and covered bonds.
The Company’s asset backed securities include investments in debt securities issued by Santander UK structured entities.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 174

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

18. INTERESTS IN OTHER ENTITIES

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
£m | £m | £m | £m
Subsidiaries | — | — |  | 1,281 | 1,257
Joint Ventures | 293 | 289 |  | — | —
| 293 | 289 |  | 1,281 | 1,257

The Santander UK group consists of a parent company, Santander UK plc, incorporated and domiciled in the UK and a number of subsidiaries and joint ventures held
directly and indirectly by it.
Details of subsidiaries and joint ventures are set out in the Shareholder Information section and form an integral part of these financial statements.
Details of subsidiaries benefitting from an audit exemption according to section 479A of the Companies Act 2006 are also set out in the Shareholder Information
section and form an integral part of these financial statements.
a) Interests in subsidiaries
The Company holds directly or indirectly 100% of the issued ordinary share capital of its principal subsidiaries. All companies operate principally in their country of
incorporation or registration.
The movement in the Company’s interests in subsidiaries was as follows:

|  | Company
| Cost | Carrying amount
| £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 1,257 | 1,257
Additions | 24 | 24
At 31 December 2025 | 1,281 | 1,281
At 1 January 2024 | 1,220 | 1,220
Capital contribution | 37 | 37
At 31 December 2024 | 1,257 | 1,257

Interests in consolidated structured entities
Structured entities are formed by Santander UK to accomplish specific and well-defined objectives. Santander UK consolidated these structured entities when the
substance of the relationship indicates control, as described in Note 1. In addition to the structured entities disclosed in Note 14 which are used for securitisation
and covered bond programmes, the only other structured entities consolidated by Santander UK are described below. All the external assets and liabilities in these
entities are included in the financial statements and in relevant Notes. Other than as set out below, no significant judgements were required with respect to control
or significant influence.
b) Interests in joint ventures
Santander UK does not have any individually material interests in joint ventures. In 2025, Santander UK’s share in the profit after tax of its joint ventures was £4m
(2024: £45m) before elimination of transactions between Santander UK and the joint ventures. At 31 December 2025, the carrying amount of Santander UK’s
interest was £293m (2024: £289m). At 31 December 2025 and 2024, the joint ventures had no commitments and contingent liabilities.
c) Interests in unconsolidated structured entities
Structured entities sponsored by the Santander UK group
Santander UK has interests in structured entities which it sponsors but does not control. Santander UK considers itself a sponsor of a structured entity when it
facilitates the establishment of the structured entity. Other than as set out below, no significant judgements were required with respect to control or significant
influence. The structured entities sponsored but not consolidated by Santander UK are as follows:
i) Santander (UK) Common Investment Fund (the Fund)
The Fund is a common investment fund that was established to hold the assets of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme. The Fund is not consolidated by
Santander UK, but its assets of £7,431m (2024: £7,591m) are accounted for as part of the defined benefit assets and obligations recognised on Santander UK’s
balance sheet. For more on the Fund, see Note 28. As the Fund holds the assets of the pension scheme, it is outside the scope of IFRS 10. Santander UK’s maximum
exposure to loss is the carrying amount of the assets held.
ii) Credit protection entities
Santander UK has established four (2024: five) unconsolidated credit protection entities, which are Designated Activity Companies limited by shares, incorporated in
Ireland. Each entity has issued a series of credit linked notes varying in seniority which reference portfolios of Santander UK group loans. Concurrently, these entities
sell credit protection to Santander UK in respect of the referenced loans and, in return for a fee, are liable to make protection payments to Santander UK upon the
occurrence of a credit event in relation to any of the referenced loans.
Credit linked notes, which amounted to £175m (2024: £226m), are all held by third party investors. Funds raised by the sale of the credit linked notes are deposited
with Santander UK as collateral for the credit protection.
Deposits and associated guarantees in respect of the credit linked notes are included in ‘Deposits by customers’ (see Note 22).
The entities are not consolidated by Santander UK because the third-party investors have the exposure, or rights, to all of the variability of returns from the
performance of the entities. No assets are transferred to, or income received from, these entities. Since the credit linked notes are fully cash collateralised,
Santander UK’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to any unamortised fees paid to the entities in connection with the credit protection outlined above.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 175

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Structured entities not sponsored by the Santander UK group
Santander UK also has interests in structured entities which it does not sponsor or control. These consist of holdings of mortgage and other asset backed securities
issued by entities that were established and/or sponsored by other unrelated financial institutions. These securities comprise the asset backed securities held by the
Company included in Note 17. Management has concluded that the Santander UK group has no control or significant influence over these entities and that the
carrying value of the interests held in these entities represents the maximum exposure to loss.
19. INTANGIBLE ASSETS
a) Goodwill

|  |  | Group |  |  |  | Company
| Cost | Accumulated impairment | Carrying amount |  | Cost | Accumulated impairment | Carrying amount
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 and 31 December 2025 | 1,269 | (70) | 1,199 |  | 1,194 | (25) | 1,169

Impairment of goodwill
In 2025 and 2024, for the Santander UK group, no impairment of goodwill was recognised. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually, or more frequently, if
reviews identify an impairment indicator or when events or changes in circumstances dictate. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually at 31 December, with a
review for impairment indicators at 30 June. Impairment is required where the carrying value of goodwill exceeds its recoverable amount.
For the Company, an impairment of £21m was recognised in 2024.
In 2025, the annual review identified that the uncertain macroeconomic and geopolitical environment increases the risk around the UK economic trajectory, and its
potential impact on the carrying value of goodwill as impairment indicators for all cash-generating units (CGUs).
Basis of the recoverable amount
The recoverable amount of all CGUs was determined based on a value in use (VIU) methodology at each testing date. For each CGU, the VIU is calculated by
discounting management’s cash flow projections for the CGU. The cash flow projections also take account of increased internal capital allocations needed to achieve
internal and regulatory capital targets including the leverage ratio. The key assumptions used in the VIU calculation for each CGU are set out below. The Retail &
Business Banking segment consists of the Private Banking CGU and the rest of Retail & Business Banking, known as the Personal Financial Services CGU.
Carrying amount of Goodwill and discount rate by CGU in the VIU calculation:

|  | Goodwill |  |  | Discount rate
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
CGU | £m | £m |  | % | %
Personal Financial Services | 1,169 | 1,169 |  | 12.3 | 12.1
Private Banking | 30 | 30 |  | 9.2 | 10.0
| 1,199 | 1,199 |  |  |

The CGUs do not carry on their balance sheets any other intangible assets with indefinite useful lives.
Management’s judgement in estimating the forecast cash flows of a CGU
The cash flow projections for the purpose of impairment testing for each CGU are derived from the latest 3-year plan presented to the Board. The Board challenges
and endorses management’s planning assumptions in light of internal capital allocations needed to support Santander UK’s strategy, current market conditions
and the macroeconomic outlook. For the goodwill impairment tests conducted at 31 December 2025, the determination of the carrying amount of the Personal
Financial Services CGU was based on an allocation of regulatory capital and management’s cash flow projections until the end of 2028. The assumptions included
in the cash flow projections reflect an allocation to the cost of capital to support future growth, as well as the expected impact of recent events in the UK economic
environment on the financial outlook within which the CGUs operate. The cash flow projections are supported by Santander UK’s base case economic scenario. For
more on the base case economic scenario, including our forecasting approach and the assumptions in place at 31 December 2025, see the Credit risk – Santander
UK group level section of the Risk review. The cash flow projections take into account the likely impact of recent changes to the BoE Bank Rate, inflation and also
consider the impact of future climate change.
Cash flow projections for the purpose of impairment testing do not take account of any adverse outcomes arising from contingent liabilities (see Note 30), whose
existence will be confirmed by uncertain future events or where any obligation is not probable or otherwise cannot be measured reliably, nor do they take account
of the benefits arising from Santander UK’s transformation plans that had not yet been implemented or committed at 31 December 2025.
Discount rate
The rate used to discount the forecast cash flows is based on the cost of equity assigned to each CGU, which is derived using a capital asset pricing model (CAPM)
and calculated on a post-tax basis. The CAPM depends on a number of inputs reflecting financial and economic variables, including the risk-free rate and a premium
to reflect the inherent risk of the business being evaluated. These variables are based on the market’s assessment of the economic variables and management’s
judgement. The inputs to the CAPM are observable on a post-tax basis. In determining the discount rate, management has identified the cost of equity associated
with market participants that closely resemble our CGUs and adjusted them for tax to arrive at the pre-tax equivalent rate. The pre-tax equivalent rate applicable to
the Personal Financial Services CGU was 16.7% (2024:16.5%) and Private Banking CGU was 13.0% (2024: 15.1%). The Private Banking CGU has a different discount
rate compared to the Personal Financial Services CGU because they operate in different markets and therefore have different comparables.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 176

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Growth rate beyond initial cash flow projections
The growth rate for periods beyond the initial cash flow projections is used to extrapolate the forecast cash flows in perpetuity because of the long-term perspective
of CGUs. In line with the accounting requirements, management uses the UK Government’s official estimate of UK long-term average GDP growth rate, as this is
lower than management's estimate of the long-term average growth rate of the business. The estimated UK long-term average GDP growth rate has regard to the
long-term impact of inherent uncertainties, such as elevated wage growth, weak productivity, large government debt burden and fragile business and consumer
confidence.
Goodwill arising on the acquisition of Personal Financial Services and Private Banking
The VIU of each CGU remains higher than the carrying value of the related goodwill. The VIU review at 31 December 2025 did not indicate the need for an
impairment in the Company’s goodwill balances. Management considered the level of headroom and the uncertainty relating to the respective estimates of the VIU
for those CGUs but determined that there was a sufficient basis to conclude that no impairment was required.
Sensitivities of key assumptions in calculating the value in use
At 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024, the VIU of the Personal Financial Services CGU was sensitive to reasonably possible changes in the key assumptions
supporting the recoverable amount.
The table below presents a summary of the key assumptions underlying the most sensitive inputs to the model for the Personal Financial Services CGU, the main
risks associated with each and details of a reasonably possible change in assumptions, such as a decrease in mortgage new business. The sensitivity analysis
presented below has been prepared on the basis that a change in each key assumption would not have a consequential impact on other assumptions used in the
impairment review. However, due to the interrelationships between some of the assumptions, a change in one of the assumptions might impact one or more of the
other assumptions and could result in a larger or smaller overall impact.
Reasonably possible changes in key assumptions

CGU | Input | Key assumptions | Associated risks | Reasonably possible change
Personal Financial Services | Cash flow projections | – Bank Rate – UK house price growth – UK mortgage loan market growth – UK unemployment rate – Position in the market – Regulatory capital levels. | – Uncertain market outlook – Higher interest rate environment impact on customer affordability – Customer remediation and regulatory action outcomes – Uncertain regulatory capital requirements. | – Cash flow projections decrease by 5% (2024: 10%).
Discount rate | – Discount rate used is a reasonable estimate of a suitable market rate for the profile of the business. | – Market rates of interest rise. | – Discount rate increases by 100 basis points (2024: increased by 100 basis points).

At 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024, a reasonably possible change in the key assumptions in relation to the VIU calculation for the goodwill balance in the
Personal Financial Services CGU would have resulted in a decrease in headroom as follows.

|  | Decrease in headroom
|  | 2025 | 2024
CGU | Reasonably possible change | £m | £m
Personal Financial Services | Cash flow projections decrease by 5% ( 2024 : 10% ) | 438 | 764
| Discount rate increases by 100 basis points ( 2024 : increased by 100 basis points ) | 723 | 622

Sensitivity of Value in use changes to current assumptions to achieve £nil headroom
Although there was no impairment of goodwill relating to the Personal Financial Services CGU or the Private Banking CGU at 31 December 2025, the test for the
Personal Financial Services CGU remains sensitive to some of the assumptions used, as described above. In addition, the changes in assumptions detailed below for
the discount rate and cash flow projections would eliminate the current headroom. As a result, there is a risk of impairment in the future should business
performance or economic factors diverge from forecasts.
In 2025, there was an increase in headroom driven by higher cash flow forecasts.
The sensitivity analysis presented below has been prepared on the basis that a change in each key assumption would not have a consequential impact on other
assumptions used in the impairment review. However, due to the interrelationships between some of the assumptions, a change in one of the assumptions might
impact one or more of the other assumptions and could result in a larger or smaller overall impact.

2025 | Carrying value | Value in use | Headroom | Increase in discount rate | Decrease in forecast cash flows
CGU | £m | £m | £m | bps | %
Personal Financial Services | 8,072 | 8,752 | 680 | 94 | 8

2024 |  |  |  |  |
Personal Financial Services | 7,294 | 7,639 | 345 | 53 | 5

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 177

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

b) Other intangibles

|  |  | Group |  |  |  | Company
| Cost | Accumulated amortisation/ impairment | Carrying amount |  | Cost | Accumulated amortisation/ impairment | Carrying amount
£m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 756 | (416) | 340 |  | 795 | (466) | 329
Additions | 106 | — | 106 |  | 100 | — | 100
Disposals | (44) | 39 | (5) |  | (44) | 40 | (4)
Charge | — | (129) | (129) |  | — | (125) | (125)
At 31 December 2025 | 818 | (506) | 312 |  | 851 | (551) | 300
At 1 January 2024 | 1,339 | (990) | 349 |  | 1,382 | (1,047) | 335
Additions | 120 | — | 120 |  | 116 | — | 116
Disposals | (703) | 700 | (3) |  | (703) | 700 | (3)
Charge | — | (126) | (126) |  | — | (119) | (119)
At 31 December 2024 | 756 | (416) | 340 |  | 795 | (466) | 329

Other intangibles which consist of computer software, include computer software under development of £80m (2024: £99m), of which £35m is internally
generated (2024: £20m). For the Company, other intangibles include computer software under development of £79m (2024: £99m), of which £17m is internally
generated (2024: £19m).
The impairment charge of £nil (2024: £5m) relates to computer software no longer expected to yield future economic benefits. For the Company, the impairment
charge of £nil (2024: £3m) relates to computer software no longer expected to yield future economic benefits.
20. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

|  |  |  |  |  | Group
| Property | Office fixtures and equipment | Computer software | Operating lease assets | Right-of-use assets | Total 1
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Cost: |  |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2025 | 941 | 892 | 7 | 716 | 270 | 2,826
Additions | 2 | 65 | — | 213 | 22 | 302
Reclassification to assets held for sale | (15) | — | — | — | — | (15)
Disposals | (20) | (38) | (1) | (225) | (15) | (299)
At 31 December 2025 | 908 | 919 | 6 | 704 | 277 | 2,814
Accumulated depreciation and impairment: |  |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2025 | 238 | 685 | 7 | 142 | 191 | 1,263
Charge for the year | 22 | 55 | — | 70 | 18 | 165
Impairment during the year | 16 | 4 | — | 5 | 3 | 28
Reclassification to assets held for sale | (7) | — | — | — | — | (7)
Disposals | (18) | (37) | (1) | (86) | (4) | (146)
At 31 December 2025 | 251 | 707 | 6 | 131 | 208 | 1,303
Carrying amount | 657 | 212 | — | 573 | 69 | 1,511

|  |  |  |  |  | Group
| Property | Office fixtures and equipment | Computer software | Operating lease assets | Right-of-use assets | Total 1
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Cost: |  |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2024 | 918 | 877 | 67 | 635 | 263 | 2,760
Additions | 35 | 47 | — | 304 | 21 | 407
Disposals | (20) | (41) | (60) | (223) | (14) | (358)
Other | 8 | 9 | — | — | — | 17
At 31 December 2024 | 941 | 892 | 7 | 716 | 270 | 2,826
Accumulated depreciation and impairment: |  |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2024 | 226 | 653 | 67 | 147 | 173 | 1,266
Charge for the year | 21 | 60 | — | 75 | 18 | 174
Impairment during the year | (5) | (3) | — | — | — | (8)
Disposals | (11) | (33) | (60) | (80) | — | (184)
Other | 7 | 8 | — | — | — | 15
At 31 December 2024 | 238 | 685 | 7 | 142 | 191 | 1,263
Carrying amount | 703 | 207 | — | 574 | 79 | 1,563

1 In 2025 and 2024, property included investment properties of £16m.
See Note 27 for further details on the property provision made as part of transforming our branch network.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 178

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  | Company
| Property | Office fixtures and equipment | Computer software | Right-of-use assets | Total 1
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Cost: |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2025 | 931 | 869 | 1 | 254 | 2,055
Additions | 2 | 65 | — | 21 | 88
Reclassification from assets held for sale | (15) | — | — | — | (15)
Disposals | (16) | (38) | (1) | (13) | (68)
At 31 December 2025 | 902 | 896 | — | 262 | 2,060
Accumulated depreciation: |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2025 | 234 | 662 | 1 | 185 | 1,082
Charge for the year | 22 | 55 | — | 16 | 93
Impairment during the year | 16 | 4 | — | 3 | 23
Reclassification from assets held for sale | (7) | — | — | — | (7)
Disposals | (16) | (37) | (1) | (3) | (57)
At 31 December 2025 | 249 | 684 | — | 201 | 1,134
Carrying amount | 653 | 212 | — | 61 | 926
Cost: |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2024 | 913 | 854 | 61 | 247 | 2,075
Additions | 35 | 47 | — | 20 | 102
Disposals | (20) | (41) | (60) | (13) | (134)
Other | 3 | 9 | — | — | 12
At 31 December 2024 | 931 | 869 | 1 | 254 | 2,055
Accumulated depreciation: |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January 2024 | 228 | 630 | 61 | 168 | 1,087
Charge for the year | 21 | 60 | — | 17 | 98
Impairment during the year | (5) | (3) | — | — | (8)
Disposals | (11) | (33) | (60) | — | (104)
Other | 1 | 8 | — | — | 9
At 31 December 2024 | 234 | 662 | 1 | 185 | 1,082
Carrying amount | 697 | 207 | — | 69 | 973

1 In 2025 and 2024, property included investment properties of £16m.
21. DEPOSITS BY BANKS

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Items in the course of transmission 1 | 572 | 523 |  | 555 | 517
Deposits held as collateral | 442 | 682 |  | 442 | 682
Other deposits 2 | 5,613 | 12,787 |  | 4,791 | 12,781
Amounts due to other Santander UK Group Holdings plc subsidiaries | 1 | 1 |  | 5,338 | 5,541
| 6,628 | 13,993 |  | 11,126 | 19,521

1 Includes £503m (2024: £476m) of balances relating to settlement activities.
2 Includes balance drawn from the TFSME of £3.9bn (2024: £11.0bn).
At 31 December 2025, deposits by banks included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £1,264m (2024: £361m).
22. DEPOSITS BY CUSTOMERS

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m | £m | £m
Demand and time deposits 1 | 184,155 | 177,335 |  | 179,090 | 172,222
Amounts due to other Santander UK Group Holdings plc subsidiaries | 182 | 122 |  | 30,990 | 26,933
Amounts due to Santander UK Group Holdings plc 2 | 1,373 | 1,793 |  | 1,373 | 1,793
Amounts due to fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries and joint ventures | 1,590 | 1,717 |  | 190 | 267
| 187,300 | 180,967 |  | 211,643 | 201,215

1 Includes capital amount guaranteed / protected equity index-linked deposits of £87m (2024: £173m ).
2 Includes downstreamed funding from our immediate parent company Santander UK Group Holdings plc.
At 31 December 2025, deposits by customers included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £3,145m (2024: £3,632m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 179

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

23. REPURCHASE AGREEMENTS – NON-TRADING

| Group and Company
| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Agreements with banks | 3,557 | 2,336
Agreements with customers | 5,472 | 6,281
| 9,029 | 8,617

At 31 December 2025, repurchase agreements - non-trading included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £20m (2024: £9m).
24. OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

| Group and Company
| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Structured Notes Programmes | 331 | 355
Structured deposits | 824 | 605
Zero Amortising Guaranteed Notes | 95 | 95
| 1,250 | 1,055

At 31 December 2025, other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £16m (2024: £18m).
For the Santander UK group and the Company, in 2025 and 2024 all the other financial liabilities were designated at FVTPL.
Gains and losses arising from changes in the credit spread of securities issued by the Santander UK group reverse over the contractual life of the debt, provided that
the debt is not repaid at a premium or a discount. The net loss during the year attributable to changes in the Santander UK group’s own credit risk on the above
securities was £1m (2024: £17m loss, 2023: £21m loss). The cumulative net loss attributable to changes in the Santander UK group’s own credit risk on the above
securities at 31 December 2025 was £5m (2024: £4m loss, 2023: £6m loss).
At 31 December 2025, the amount that would be required to be contractually paid at maturity of the securities above was £35m (2024: £76m) below the carrying
value.
25. DEBT SECURITIES IN ISSUE

| Group |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Medium-term notes: |  |  |  |  |
– US $30bn Euro Medium Term Note Programme | 308 | 696 |  | 308 | 696
– Euro €30bn Euro Medium Term Note Programme | 1,982 | — |  | 1,982 | —
| 2,290 | 696 |  | 2,290 | 696
Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc: |  |  |  |  |
– Euro €30bn Euro Medium Term Note Programme | 2,960 | 2,997 |  | 2,960 | 2,997
– US SEC-registered Debt Programme - Santander UK plc | 6,646 | 5,929 |  | 6,646 | 5,929
| 11,896 | 9,622 |  | 11,896 | 9,622
Euro €35bn Global Covered Bond Programme | 19,201 | 17,211 |  | 19,248 | 17,300
US $20bn Commercial Paper Programmes | 2,411 | 3,274 |  | 2,411 | 3,274
Certificates of deposit | 1,607 | 1,196 |  | 1,607 | 1,196
Credit linked notes | 635 | 441 |  | 635 | 441
Securitisation programmes | 5,638 | 3,929 |  | — | —
| 41,388 | 35,673 |  | 35,797 | 31,833

At 31 December 2025, debt securities in issue included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £9,626m (2024: £9,036m).
26. OTHER LIABILITIES

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Lease liabilities | 72 | 88 |  | 63 | 79
Other | 2,101 | 1,764 |  | 1,886 | 1,710
| 2,173 | 1,852 |  | 1,949 | 1,789

At 31 December 2025, other liabilities included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £273m (2024: £67m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 180

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

27. PROVISIONS

| Group
| Customer remediation | Litigation and other regulatory | Regulatory levies and fees | Bank Levy | Property | ECL on undrawn facilities and guarantees | Restructuring | Other | Total
£m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 348 | 112 | 2 | 4 | 28 | 85 | 18 | 14 | 611
Additional provisions (See Note 8) | 198 | 40 | 95 | 36 | 18 | 5 | 93 | 208 | 693
Provisions released (See Note 8) | (2) | (83) | — | — | (2) | (7) | — | (4) | (98)
Utilisation and other | (76) | (31) | (91) | (74) | (13) | — | (90) | (201) | (576)
Recharge 1 | — | — | — | 14 | — | — | — | — | 14
Reclassification from provisions to other assets | — | — | — | 39 | — | — | — | — | 39
At 31 December 2025 | 468 | 38 | 6 | 19 | 31 | 83 | 21 | 17 | 683

1 Recharge in respect of the UK Bank Levy paid on behalf of other UK entities in the Banco Santander group.
Provisions expected to be settled within no more than 12 months after 31 December 2025 were £352m (2024: £208m).

| Company
| Customer remediation | Litigation and other regulatory | Regulatory levies and fees | Bank Levy | Property | ECL on undrawn facilities and guarantees | Restructuring | Other | Total
£m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 55 | 111 | 2 | — | 28 | 85 | 18 | 14 | 313
Additional provisions | 48 | 12 | 95 | 32 | 18 | 5 | 90 | 170 | 470
Provisions released | (2) | (83) | — | — | (2) | (7) | — | (3) | (97)
Utilisation and other | (60) | (16) | (91) | (71) | (13) | — | (87) | (163) | (501)
Recharge 1 | — | — | — | 14 | — | — | — | — | 14
Reclassification from provisions to other assets | — | — | — | 39 | — | — | — | — | 39
At 31 December 2025 | 41 | 24 | 6 | 14 | 31 | 83 | 21 | 18 | 238

1 Recharge in respect of the UK Bank Levy paid on behalf of other UK entities in the Banco Santander group.
Provisions expected to be settled by the Company within no more than 12 months after 31 December 2025 were £138m (2024: £203m).
a) Customer remediation
Motor Finance Broker Commissions
Following the Financial Conduct Authority’s (FCA) Motor Market review in 2019 which resulted in a change in rules in January 2021, Santander Consumer (UK) plc
(SCUK) received several county court claims and complaints in respect of its historical use of discretionary commission arrangements (DCAs) prior to the 2021 rule
changes. In January 2024, the FCA commenced a review of the use of DCAs between lenders and credit brokers (the FCA Review). Pending the conclusion of its
review, the FCA paused the handling of motor finance commission related complaints. The pause is currently in place until 31 May 2026. A claim was issued against
SCUK, Santander UK plc and others in the Competition Appeal Tribunal, alleging that SCUK’s historical DCAs in respect of used car financing operated in breach of the
Competition Act 1998. This is currently paused until the end of March 2026 reflecting the extended timeline of the FCA’s Review and subsequent Consultation (see
below).
On 1 August 2025, the Supreme Court handed down its judgment in Hopcraft, Wrench and Johnson (Hopcraft) that motor dealers acting as credit brokers do not
owe fiduciary or disinterested duties to their customers and, as a consequence, commission payments by lenders to motor dealers would not be unlawful on that
basis. In addition, the Supreme Court held that an unfair relationship under s.140A of the Consumer Credit Act 1974 had arisen in one of the cases on its facts and
awarded the amount of the commission paid by the lender plus interest at a commercial rate as the remedy. It also confirmed that the test for unfairness was highly
fact sensitive and it outlined a series of non-exhaustive factors to consider in assessing unfair relationships in this context (indicating that no or partial disclosure
was not necessarily enough on its own to constitute an unfair relationship).
Following the Supreme Court’s judgment, on 3 August 2025 the FCA announced that it aimed to publish a consultation on an industry wide redress scheme in early
October, and that this consultation would be open for six weeks. In early September 2025, the appeal to the Court of Appeal of the High Court’s judicial review of a
final decision by the Financial Ombudsman Service against another lender (which alongside the Supreme Court case was highly relevant to the outcome of the FCA’s
Review) was discontinued.
Further to the publication of the FCA’s consultation paper on 7 October 2025 regarding a proposed industry-wide motor finance consumer redress scheme
(Consultation), the Santander UK group has reassessed the potential financial impact arising from motor finance related redress payments.
The Santander UK group recognised a provision of £295m in its financial results for 2024. This provision was determined based upon the information then available.
It included estimates for operational and legal costs and potential awards based on various scenarios and used a range of assumptions, including the possible
outcome of the appeal to the Supreme Court in 2025 of the Court of Appeal’s decision in Hopcraft.
The Santander UK group responded to the Consultation on 12 December 2025 and continues to engage constructively with the FCA about its Consultation
proposals. Based on its detailed consideration, the Santander UK group considers that there remains significant uncertainty regarding the ultimate outcome of the
Consultation. The Santander UK group has updated its range of scenarios which has resulted in an additional estimated charge of £183m, increasing the total
provision to £461m. This continues to include estimates for operational and legal costs and potential awards reflecting an increased likelihood of a higher number
of cases than had previously been predicted as eligible for redress as well as an increased possibility that a remedy is sought to be imposed which extends beyond
reversing any damaging financial consequences caused by any unfair relationships. The provision is based on various scenarios using a range of assumptions,
including potential changes to the proposed scheme following responses to the Consultation or publication of the FCA’s final scheme rules.
There continue to be significant uncertainties as to the nature, extent and timing of redress payments. The ultimate financial impact could be materially higher or
lower than the amount provided.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 181

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  | Increase / (decrease) in provision
|  | 2025
Assumption | Change in assumption | £m
Claim rate | 5% increase | 18
Claim rate | 5% decrease | (18)

The claim rate represents the proportion of customers who make a request for reimbursement and is a critical judgement and accounting estimate that could
materially change the ultimate financial impact.
We have assumed the claim rate in our provision is in line with a write and invite redress scheme with claim rates at 85%.
Mortgages
Provisions were also recognised in 2025 for customer remediation relating to our mortgage book. These provisions remain subject to change as additional data
becomes available and remediation boundaries are finalised.
b) Litigation and other regulatory
Litigation and other regulatory provisions principally comprised of amounts in respect of litigation and other regulatory charges, operational loss and operational
risk provisions, and related expenses. A number of uncertainties exist with respect to these provisions given the uncertainties inherent in litigation and other
regulatory matters, that affect the amount and timing of any potential outflows with respect to which provisions have been established. These provisions are
reviewed at least quarterly.
In 2025 there were net releases of £43m (2024: £39m charge) for legal provisions.
c) Regulatory levies and fees
Regulatory levies and fees are payable to regulatory bodies such as the FCA, PRA and Bank of England in the ordinary course of business. In 2025 there were charges
of £95m (2024: £44m) including £50m (2024: £nil) relating to FCA fees.
d) Bank Levy
In 2025, a rate of 0.05% (2024: 0.05%) was charged on long term chargeable equity and liabilities and 0.10% on short-term chargeable liabilities (2024: 0.10%).
e) Property
Property provisions include leasehold vacant property provisions, dilapidation provisions for leased properties within the scope of IFRS 16 and decommissioning and
disposal costs relating to vacant freehold properties. Leasehold vacant property provisions are made by reference to an estimate of any expected sub-let income,
compared to the head rent, and the possibility of disposing of Santander UK’s interest in the lease, taking into account conditions in the property market.
Property provisions include a charge of £16m relating to transformation activity in 2025 (2024: release of £2m). In 2025, these charges consisted of costs relating
to leasehold head office closures, along with decommissioning costs relating to freehold head office sites which are either closing or consolidating.
f) ECL on undrawn facilities and guarantees
Provisions include expected credit losses relating to guarantees given to third parties and undrawn loan commitments.
g) Restructuring
Restructuring provisions relate to severance costs associated with transformation and organisational changes. The provision includes a charge of £88m as part of
our transformation to improve future returns, focused on simplifying, digitising and automating the bank.
h) Other
Other provisions include provisions that do not fit into any of the other categories, such as fraud losses and some categories of operational losses. In 2025, Other
provisions included charges for operational risk provisions of £153m (2024: £161m), including fraud losses of £122m (2024: £122m).
Transforming our Branch Network
In 2025 we announced changes to our branch network to enable the bank to better serve the changing needs of its customers. Starting in June 2025, the changes
involve the closure of 95 branches, with new Community Bankers providing local communities with ongoing face-to-face support in these locations. Our refreshed
network will consist of 350 branches, including 290 full-service branches, 36 reduced-hours branches, 18 counter-free branches and 6 Work Cafés. As part of these
changes, approximately 750 of our colleagues have been placed at risk of redundancy, with support provided to those impacted, including assistance in finding
redeployment roles within the bank, access to specialist outplacement support, and dedicated wellbeing support. As a result, we have taken £63m in charges in
2025 including £25m in redundancy provisions and £17m in property provisions which are included in the table shown above. The remaining £21m relates to the
impairment of property, see Note 20.
28. RETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS
The amounts recognised in the balance sheet were as follows:

| Group and Company
| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Assets/(liabilities) |  |
Funded defined benefit pension scheme - surplus | 524 | 439
Unfunded pension and post-retirement medical benefits | (22) | (23)
Total net assets | 502 | 416

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 182

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

a) Defined contribution pension plans
The majority of employees are members of a defined contribution Master Trust, LifeSight. This is the plan into which eligible employees are enrolled automatically.
The assets of LifeSight are held in separate trustee-administered funds. Funds arising from Additional Voluntary Contributions (AVCs) are largely held within the
main defined benefit scheme operated by the Santander UK group.
An expense of £74m (2024: £79m) was recognised for defined contribution plans in the year and is included in staff costs within operating expenses (see Note 6).
b) Defined benefit pension schemes
The Santander UK group operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes. The main scheme is the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme (the Scheme). It
comprises seven legally segregated sections. The scheme covers 6% (2024: 6%) of the Santander UK group’s current employees and is a funded defined benefit
scheme which is closed to new members. Members accrue final salary benefits for each year of service in the Scheme, according to a salary definition which varies
across the sections.
The corporate trustee of the Scheme is Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme Trustees Limited (the Trustee), a private limited company incorporated in 1996 and a
wholly owned subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc. The principal duty of the Trustee is to act in the best interests of the members of the Scheme. The
Trustee board comprises six (2024: six) Directors selected by Santander UK Group Holdings plc, plus four (2024: four) member-nominated Directors selected from
eligible members who apply for the role.
The assets of the Scheme are held independently of the Santander UK group’s assets in separate trustee administered funds. Investment strategy across the
sections of the Scheme remains under regular review. Responsibility for investment decisions, policy and strategy rests with the Trustee of the Scheme who is
required under the Pensions Act 2004 to prepare a statement of investment principles. The defined benefit pension schemes expose the Santander UK group to
risks such as investment risk, interest rate risk, longevity risk and inflation risk. The Santander UK group does not hold any insurance policies over the defined benefit
pension schemes and has not entered into any significant transactions with them.
For IAS 19, an accounting valuation of the assets and liabilities of the defined benefits schemes is prepared at each balance sheet date. For funding purposes,
formal actuarial valuations are carried out on at least a triennial basis. Both valuations are carried out by independent professionally qualified actuaries. The Scheme
Trustee is responsible for the funding actuarial valuations and in doing so considers, or relies in part on, a report of a third-party expert. The latest triennial funding
valuation for the Scheme at 31 March 2025 was finalised in November 2025, with an overall scheme deficit of £75m. The next scheduled triennial funding
valuation will be at 31 March 2028. Any funding surpluses can be recovered by Santander UK plc from the Scheme through refunds as the Scheme is run off over
time or could be used to pay for the cost of benefits which are accruing.
The main differences between the assumptions used for assessing the defined benefit liabilities for the funding valuation and those used for IAS 19 are that the
financial and demographic assumptions used for the funding valuation are generally more prudent than those used for the IAS 19 valuation.
The total amount (credited) / charged to the income statement was as follows:

|  |  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Net interest income | (27) | (34) | (54)
Current service cost | 8 | 13 | 13
Past service and GMP costs | — | — | 1
Administration costs | 8 | 9 | 7
| (11) | (12) | (33)

The amounts recognised in other comprehensive income were as follows:

|  | Group
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Loss on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense) | 359 | 1,217 | 352
Actuarial gains arising from changes in demographic assumptions | (163) | (113) | (51)
Actuarial losses arising from experience adjustments | 86 | 84 | 91
Actuarial (gains)/losses arising from changes in financial assumptions | (182) | (786) | 206
| 100 | 402 | 598

Movements in the present value of defined benefit scheme obligations were as follows:

| Group and Company
| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
At 1 January | (7,380) | (8,201)
Current service cost paid by Santander UK plc | (8) | (13)
Interest cost | (398) | (371)
Employer salary sacrifice contributions | (2) | (4)
– Changes in demographic assumptions | 163 | 113
– Experience adjustments | (86) | (84)
– Changes in financial assumptions | 182 | 786
Benefits paid | 402 | 394
At 31 December | (7,127) | (7,380)

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 183

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Movements in the fair value of the schemes’ assets were as follows:

| Group and Company
| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
At 1 January | 7,796 | 8,858
Interest income | 425 | 405
Contributions paid by employer and scheme members | 177 | 153
Administration costs paid | (8) | (9)
Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense) | (359) | (1,217)
Benefits paid | (402) | (394)
At 31 December | 7,629 | 7,796

The composition and fair value of the schemes’ assets by category was:

| Group and Company
| Quoted prices in active markets |  | Prices not quoted in active markets |  | Total |  | Valuation
2025 | £m | % |  | £m | % |  | £m | % |  | technique
Overseas equities | — | — |  | 585 | 8 |  | 585 | 8 |  | A,C
Corporate bonds | 2,282 | 30 |  | 151 | 2 |  | 2,433 | 32 |  | A,C
Government fixed interest bonds | 1,717 | 23 |  | — | — |  | 1,717 | 23 |  | A
Government index-linked bonds | 4,509 | 59 |  | — | — |  | 4,509 | 59 |  | A
Property | — | — |  | 848 | 11 |  | 848 | 11 |  | B
Derivatives | — | — |  | (6) | — |  | (6) | — |  | A
Cash | — | — |  | 918 | 12 |  | 918 | 12 |  | A
Repurchase agreements 1 | — | — |  | (3,629) | (48) |  | (3,629) | (48) |  | A
Infrastructure | 62 | 1 |  | 3 | — |  | 65 | 1 |  | B,C
Annuities | — | — |  | 262 | 3 |  | 262 | 3 |  | D
Longevity swap | — | — |  | (76) | (1) |  | (76) | (1) |  | D
Other | — | — |  | 3 | — |  | 3 | — |  | C
| 8,570 | 113 |  | (941) | (13) |  | 7,629 | 100 |  | —
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Overseas equities | — | — |  | 776 | 10 |  | 776 | 10 |  | A,C
Corporate bonds | 2,511 | 33 |  | 186 | 2 |  | 2,697 | 35 |  | A,C
Government fixed interest bonds | 1,348 | 17 |  | — | — |  | 1,348 | 17 |  | A
Government index-linked bonds | 4,444 | 58 |  | — | — |  | 4,444 | 58 |  | A
Property | — | — |  | 1,073 | 14 |  | 1,073 | 14 |  | B
Derivatives | — | — |  | (18) | — |  | (18) | — |  | A
Cash | — | — |  | 341 | 4 |  | 341 | 4 |  | A
Repurchase agreements 1 | — | — |  | (3,328) | (43) |  | (3,328) | (43) |  | A
Infrastructure | — | — |  | 112 | 1 |  | 112 | 1 |  | B,C
Annuities | — | — |  | 267 | 3 |  | 267 | 3 |  | D
Longevity swap | — | — |  | (83) | (1) |  | (83) | (1) |  | D
Other | — | — |  | 167 | 2 |  | 167 | 2 |  | C
| 8,303 | 108 |  | (507) | (8) |  | 7,796 | 100 |  |

1 Sale and repurchase agreements net of purchase and resale agreements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 184

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Valuation techniques
The main methods for measuring the fair value of the Scheme’s assets at 31 December 2025 and 2024 are set out below.
A. The asset valuation is provided by the asset manager. The valuation is based on observable market data, and where relevant is typically based on bid price values,
or the single price if only one price is available.
B. The underlying asset valuations are prepared by an independent expert, adjusted for any cash movements where necessary since the latest valuation.
C. Assets are valued by reference to the latest manager statements provided by the managers, adjusted for any cash movements since the latest valuation.
D. Assets relating to insured liabilities are valued by the actuaries based on our year-end accounting assumptions.
The 'Other' category includes cash receivables in 2025 from secondary market sales in 2024.
A number of insurance transactions have been entered into that have been included in the asset valuation under annuities and Longevity swap.
At 31 December 2025 and 2024 , as highlighted above, the Scheme was invested in certain assets whose values are not based on market observable data, such as
investments in private equity funds and bonds, as well as commercial real estate, property funds, and infrastructure. The valuation of these assets relies on
unobservable data as these assets do not have a readily available quoted price in an active market. A large proportion of the property is directly held and valued
using a bespoke valuation method taking both the nature of the properties and the tenancy schedules as inputs to derive the fair value. Where there is a time lag
between the net asset value and the balance sheet date, management adjusts the value of the assets for any cash movements. Due diligence has been conducted
to ensure the values obtained in respect of these assets are appropriate and represent fair value. Given the nature of these investments, we are unable to prepare
sensitivities on how their values could vary as market conditions or other variables change.
A strategy is in place to manage interest rate and inflation risk relating to the liabilities. The Scheme also hedges a proportion of its foreign exchange exposure to
manage currency risk. At 31 December 2025 the currency forwards had a notional value of £772m ( 2024 : £709m ). In 2025 , we reduced our investments in property
infrastructure and private equity.
The Santander UK group’s pension schemes did not directly hold any equity securities of the Company or any of its related parties at 31 December 2025 and 2024 .
The Santander UK group’s pension scheme assets do not include any property or other assets that are occupied or used by the Santander UK group.
Funding
In November 2022, in compliance with the Pensions Act 2004, the Trustee and the Santander UK group agreed to a new recovery plan in respect of the Scheme and
a schedule of contributions following the finalisation of the 31 March 2022 actuarial valuation. The funding target for this actuarial valuation is for the Scheme to
have sufficient assets to make payments to members in respect of the accrued benefits as and when they fall due. In accordance with the terms of the Trustee
agreement in place at the time, the Santander UK group contributed £174m in 2025 ( 2024 : £150m ) to the Scheme, of which £148m (2024: £119m) was in respect
of agreed deficit repair contributions. A new valuation at 31 March 2025 was agreed in November 2025 with a new schedule of contributions applying from 28
November 2025. The funding target was maintained as above. Under this valuation a single deficit contribution is due in March 2026 to address any remaining
underfunding. Contingent contributions may also be due if there is underperformance from the not quoted assets . The Santander UK group also meets Scheme
administration expenses. The funding valuation is used to judge the amount of cash contributions the Santander UK group needs to put into the pension scheme. It
will always be different to the IAS 19 accounting position, which is an accounting rule concerning employee benefits and shown on the balance sheet of our
financial statements.
Actuarial assumptions
The principal actuarial assumptions used for the Scheme were:

| Group and Company
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| % | % | %
To determine benefit obligations 1: |  |  |
– Discount rate for scheme liabilities | 5.6 | 5.5 | 4.6
– General price inflation | 2.9 | 3.1 | 3.0
– General salary increase | 1.0 | 1.0 | 1.0
– Expected rate of pension increase | 2.8 | 3.0 | 3.0

| Years | Years | Years
Longevity at 60 for current pensioners, on the valuation date: |  |  |
– Males | 27.2 | 26.9 | 27.0
– Females | 29.1 | 29.8 | 29.8
Longevity at 60 for future pensioners currently aged 40, on the valuation date: |  |  |
– Males | 28.7 | 28.5 | 28.6
– Females | 30.6 | 31.3 | 31.3

1 The discount rate and inflation-related assumptions set out in the table above reflect the assumptions calculated based on the Scheme’s duration and cash flow profile as a whole. The actual assumptions used
were determined for each section independently based on each section’s duration and cash flow profile.
The majority of the liability movement in 2025 was due to the decreased inflation rate reflecting changes in market conditions and updated longevity assumptions.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 185

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Discount rate for scheme liabilities
The rate used to discount the retirement benefit obligation for accounting purposes is based on the annual yield at the balance sheet date of high-quality corporate
bonds on that date. There are only a limited number of higher quality Sterling-denominated corporate bonds, particularly those that are longer-dated. Therefore, in
order to set a suitable discount rate, we need to construct a corporate bond yield curve. The model which we use to construct the curve uses corporate bond data
but excludes convertible bonds, asset-backed bonds and government related bonds. The curve is then constructed from this data by extrapolating the spot rates
from 30 years to 50 years by holding the spread above nominal gilt spot rates constant. From 50 years onwards, it is assumed that spot rates remain constant.
When considering an appropriate assumption, we project forward the expected cash flows of each section of the Scheme and adopt a single equivalent cash flow
weighted discount rate for each section, subject to management judgement.
General price inflation
Consistent with our discount rate methodology, we set the inflation assumption using the expected cash flows for each section of the Scheme, fitting them to an
inflation curve to give a weighted average inflation assumption. We then deduct an inflation risk premium to reflect the compensation holders of fixed rate
instruments expect to receive for taking on the inflation risk. This premium is subject to a cap, to better reflect management’s view of inflation expectations.
General salary increase
From 1 March 2015, a cap on pensionable pay increases of 1% each year was applied to staff in the Scheme.
Expected rate of pension increase
The pension increase assumption methodology uses a stochastic model, which is calibrated to consider both the observed historical volatility term structure and
derivative pricing. The model allows for the likelihood that high or low inflation in one year, feeds into inflation remaining high or low in the next year.
Mortality assumptions
The mortality assumptions are based on an independent analysis of the Scheme’s actual mortality experience, carried out as part of the triennial actuarial valuation,
together with recent evidence from the Continuous Mortality Investigation. An allowance is then made for expected future improvements to life expectancy based
on the Continuous Mortality Investigation Tables. Following this review the S4 Light all pensioners amounts mortality table was adopted with appropriate
adjustments to reflect the actual mortality experience. At 31 December 2025 the assumption for future improvements was updated and the CMI 2024 projection
model adopted, with an initial addition to improvements of 0.25% per annum, and a long-term rate of future improvements to life expectancy of 1.25% for male
and female members.
In 2022, the methodology for setting the demographic assumptions was changed to better represent current expectations, following a review carried out by the
Trustee as part of the 2022 triennial valuation. This review resulted in changes in the assumptions for family statistics, early retirement and the withdrawal
assumption. The assumptions were reviewed as part of the 2025 funding valuation which indicated no changes were required so were retained at 31 December
2025.
Actuarial assumption sensitivities
The sensitivity analyses below have been determined based on reasonably possible changes of the respective assumptions occurring at the end of the reporting
period, while holding all other assumptions constant.

|  | Group and Company
|  | (Decrease)/increase
|  | 2025 | 2024
Assumption | Change in pension obligation at period end from | £m | £m
Discount rate | 50 bps increase | (377) | (413)
General price inflation | 50 bps increase | 305 | 316
Mortality | Each additional year of longevity assumed | 195 | 190

The 50 bps sensitivity to the inflation assumption includes the corresponding impact of changes in future pension increase assumptions before and after retirement.
The sensitivity analysis presented above may not be representative of the actual change in the defined benefit obligation as it is unlikely that the changes in
assumptions would occur in isolation of one another as some of the assumptions may be correlated. Furthermore, in presenting the sensitivity analysis, the present
value of the defined benefit obligation has been calculated using the projected unit credit method at the end of the reporting period, which is the same method used
to calculate the defined benefit obligation recognised in the balance sheet. There were no changes in the methods and assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity
analyses from prior years.
The benefits expected to be paid in each of the next five years, and in the aggregate for the five years thereafter are:

Year ending 31 December | £m
2026 | 503
2027 | 423
2028 | 439
2029 | 460
2030 | 475
Five years ending 2035 | 2,445

The average duration of the defined benefit obligation at 31 December 2025 was 12.0 years (2024: 12.7 years).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 186

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

29. SUBORDINATED LIABILITIES

| Group |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
£325m Sterling preference shares | 343 | 343 |  | 343 | 343
Undated subordinated liabilities | 205 | 205 |  | 205 | 205
Dated subordinated liabilities | 1,484 | 1,837 |  | 1,485 | 1,838
| 2,032 | 2,385 |  | 2,033 | 2,386

At 31 December 2025, subordinated liabilities included amounts due to Banco Santander group entities of £1,532m (2024: £1,879m).
In 2025, certain debt securities and subordinated liabilities were repurchased, resulting in a loss of £3m (2024: nil).
The above securities will, in the event of the winding up of the issuer, be subordinated to the claims of depositors and all other creditors of the issuer, other than
creditors whose claims rank equally with, or are junior to, the claims of the holders of the subordinated liabilities. The subordination amongst each of the
subordinated liabilities upon a winding up of the issuer is specified in their respective terms and conditions.
In 2025 and 2024, the Santander UK group had no defaults of principal, interest or other breaches with respect to its subordinated liabilities. No repayment or
purchase by the issuer of the subordinated liabilities may be made prior to their stated maturity without the consent of the PRA.
Undated subordinated liabilities

|  |  | Group |  |  | Company
|  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| First call date | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
10.0625% Exchangeable capital securities | n/a | 205 | 205 |  | 205 | 205
|  | 205 | 205 |  | 205 | 205

In common with other debt securities issued by Santander UK group companies and notwithstanding the issuer’s first call dates in the table above, in the event of
certain tax changes affecting the treatment of payments of interest on subordinated liabilities in the UK, the 10.0625% Exchangeable capital securities are
redeemable on any interest payment date – each in whole at the option of Santander UK, at their principal amount together with any accrued interest.
The 10.0625% Exchangeable capital securities are exchangeable into fully paid 10.375% non-cumulative non-redeemable sterling preference shares of £1 each, at
the option of Santander UK, on the business day immediately following any interest payment date.
Dated subordinated liabilities

| Group |  |  | Company
|  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| Maturity | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
4.75% Subordinated notes | 2025 | — | 332 |  | — | 332
7.95% Subordinated notes | 2029 | 177 | 189 |  | 177 | 189
6.50% Subordinated notes | 2030 | 1 | 1 |  | 1 | 1
5.875% Subordinated notes | 2031 | 8 | 7 |  | 9 | 8
5.625%Subordinated notes | 2045 | 210 | 226 |  | 210 | 226
7.869% Subordinated notes | 2033 | 319 | 314 |  | 319 | 314
8.296% Subordinated notes | 2033 | 769 | 768 |  | 769 | 768
|  | 1,484 | 1,837 |  | 1,485 | 1,838

The dated subordinated liabilities are redeemable in whole at the option of Santander UK in the event of certain tax changes affecting the treatment of payments of
interest on the subordinated liabilities in the UK, at their principal amount together with any accrued interest.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 187

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

30. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND COMMITMENTS

|  | Group |  |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Guarantees given to subsidiaries | — | — |  | 5,044 | 5,185
Guarantees given to third parties | 716 | 493 |  | 716 | 493
Formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments | 38,105 | 35,156 |  | 38,094 | 35,155
| 38,821 | 35,649 |  | 43,854 | 40,833

At 31 December 2025, the Santander UK group had credit impairment loss provisions relating to guarantees given to third parties and undrawn loan commitments.
See Note 27 for more details.
Where the items set out below can be reliably estimated, they are disclosed in the table above.
Guarantees given to subsidiaries
Santander UK plc has guaranteed the payment of any liabilities to Cater Allen Limited’s account holders. This guarantee expires on 31 December 2027. Customer
deposit balances on or before 31 December 2025 will remain guaranteed after the expiry date.
Santander UK plc has also undertaken, for the purposes of section 479C of the Companies Act 2006 (the Act), the guarantee of the payment of all outstanding
liabilities to which certain direct or indirect subsidiaries were subject at 31 December 2024, until they are satisfied in full, in order to allow those subsidiaries to
benefit from the audit exemption provided for by Section 479A of the Act for the year ended 31 December 2024. The subsidiaries benefiting from this guarantee are
listed in the Shareholder information section of this Annual Report.
Guarantees given to third parties
Guarantees given to third parties consist primarily of letters of credit, bonds and guarantees granted as part of normal product facilities which are offered to
customers.
Formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments are also granted as part of normal product facilities which are offered to customers. Retail facilities comprise
undrawn facilities granted on flexible mortgages, bank overdrafts and credit cards. On flexible mortgages, the credit limit is set at the point of granting the loan
through property value and affordability assessments.
Ongoing assessments are made to ensure that credit limits remain appropriate considering any change in the security value or the customer’s financial
circumstances. For unsecured overdraft facilities and credit cards, the facilities are granted based on new business risk assessment and are reviewed more
frequently based on internal, as well as external data. Corporate facilities can comprise standby and revolving facilities which are subject to ongoing compliance
with covenants and may require the provision of agreed security.
FSCS
The FSCS is the UK’s independent statutory compensation fund for customers of authorised financial services firms and pays compensation if a firm is unable to pay
certain claims against it. The FSCS is funded by levies on the industry and recoveries and borrowings where appropriate.
Loan representations and warranties
In connection with the securitisations and covered bond transactions described in Note 14, the Santander UK group entities selling the relevant loans into the
applicable securitisation or covered bond portfolios make representations and warranties with respect to such loans, as of the date of the sale of the loans into the
applicable portfolio. These representations and warranties cover, among other things, the relevant Santander UK group entity's ownership of the loan, the absence
of a material breach or default by the relevant borrower, the loan’s compliance with applicable laws, and absence of material disputes with respect to the relevant
borrower, asset or loan. The specific representations and warranties made by Santander UK group companies which act as sellers of loans in these securitisations
and covered bond transactions depend in each case on the nature of the transaction and the requirements of the transaction structure.
In the event that there is a material breach of the representations and warranties given by Santander UK plc as seller of loans under the residential mortgage-
backed securitisations or the covered bond programme included in Note 14, or if such representations and warranties prove to be materially untrue at the date
when they were given, Santander UK plc may be required to repurchase the affected mortgage loans (generally) at their outstanding principal balance plus accrued
interest). These securitisations and covered bond programme are collateralised by prime residential mortgage loans. Santander UK plc is principally a retail prime
lender and has no appetite or product offering for any type of sub-prime business.
Similarly, under the auto loan securitisations in Note 14, in the event that there is a breach or inaccuracy in respect of a representation or warranty relating to the
loans, the relevant Santander UK group entity who sold the auto loans into the securitisation portfolio will be required to repurchase such loans from the structure
(also at their outstanding principal balance plus accrued interest). In addition to breaches of representation and warranties, under the auto loan securitisations, the
seller may also have a repurchase obligation if certain portfolio limits are breached (which include, amongst other things, limits as to the size of a loan given to an
individual customer, LTV ratio, average term to maturity and average seasoning).
In the case of a repurchase of a loan from the relevant securitisation or covered bond programmes, the Santander UK group may bear any subsequent credit loss on
such loan. The Santander UK group manages and monitors its securitisation and covered bond activities closely to minimise potential claims.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 188

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Other legal, regulatory or tax matters
Santander UK engages in discussion, and co-operates with the FCA, PRA, CMA and other regulators and government agencies in various jurisdictions in their
supervision and review of Santander UK including reviews exercised under statutory powers, regarding its interaction with past and present customers, both as part
of general thematic work and in relation to specific products, services and activities. During the ordinary course of business, Santander UK is also subject to
complaints and threatened legal proceedings brought by or on behalf of current or former employees, customers, investors or other third parties. In addition,
Santander UK is subject to audits, reviews, challenges and tax, regulatory or law enforcement investigations or proceedings by relevant regulators or government
agencies in various jurisdictions. All such matters are assessed periodically to determine the likelihood of Santander UK incurring a liability.
In those instances where it is concluded that it is not yet probable that a quantifiable payment will be made, for example because the facts are unclear or further
time is required to fully assess the merits of the case or to reasonably quantify the expected payment, no provision is made. In addition, where it is not currently
practicable to estimate the possible financial effect of these matters, no provision is made.
Motor finance broker commissions
As set out in Note 27, Santander UK has recognised a provision for motor finance commission payments. There continue to be significant uncertainties as to the
extent of remediation action. As such, the ultimate financial impact could be materially higher or lower than the amount provided. Based on Management's range of
scenarios, the unweighted provision for the upper range estimate would result in an increase in provision from £461m to £646m.
German dividend tax arbitrage transactions
In June 2018 the Cologne Criminal Prosecution Office and the German Federal Tax Office commenced an investigation in relation to the historical involvement of
Santander UK plc, Santander Financial Services plc and Cater Allen International Limited (all subsidiaries of Santander UK Group Holdings plc) in German dividend tax
arbitrage transactions (known as cum/ex transactions). These transactions allegedly exploited a loophole of a specific German settlement mechanism through
short-selling and complex derivative structuring which resulted in the German government either refunding withholding tax where such tax had not been paid or
refunding it more than once. The German authorities are investigating numerous institutions and individuals in connection with alleged transactions and practices
which may be found to be illegal under German law.
During 2025 we continued to cooperate with the German authorities and, with the assistance of external experts, to progress an internal investigation into the
matters in question. From Santander UK plc’s perspective, t he investigation is focused principally on the period 2009-2011 and remains on-going. There remain
factual issues to be resolved which may have legal consequences including potentially material financial liabilities. These issues create uncertainties which mean
that it is difficult to predict the resolution of the matter including timing or the significance of the possible impact. These uncertainties mean it is not currently
practicable to make a reliable assessment of the size of any related potential liability. Any potential losses, claims or expenses suffered or incurred by Santander
Financial Services plc in respect of these matters have been fully indemnified by Santander UK plc, as part of the ring-fencing transfer scheme between Santander
UK plc, Santander Financial Services plc and Banco Santander SA.
Payment Protection Insurance claim
AXA France IARD and AXA France Vie (former GE Capital Corporation Group entities (GE Capital), known as Financial Insurance Company Ltd (FICL) and Financial
Assurance Company Ltd (FACL), acquired by AXA SA in 2015) (together, AXA France) brought a claim against (i) Santander Cards UK Limited (formerly known as GE
Capital Bank Limited (GECB), which was acquired by Banco Santander SA in 2008 and subsequently transferred to Santander UK plc); and (ii) Santander Insurance
Services UK Limited (a Banco Santander SA subsidiary) (SISUK and together with GECB the Santander Entities). The claim relates to the allocation of liability for
compensation and associated costs in respect of a large number of PPI policies distributed by GECB pre-2005, which were underwritten by FICL and FACL.
On 25 July 2025, the Commercial Court of England and Wales handed down its judgment in relation to the claim brought by AXA France (the Judgment). It found
against SISUK in relation to AXA France’s claim pursuant to an indemnity in an agency agreement entered between GECB, FICL and FACL in 2000 and novated by
GECB to SISUK in 2010. It also found GECB negligent in the sale of PPI policies, but this element of the claim was time barred to PPI policies sold in the period
between 2002 and 2005 and overlaps with the indemnity claim.
In October 2025, the Santander Entities obtained permission to appeal the findings in the Judgment relating to the application of the indemnity arising from PPI
sales occurring before the indemnity had been agreed in December 2000 (Santander Appeal). In January 2026, AXA France obtained permission to cross-appeal the
Commercial Court’s rejection of AXA France’s contribution claim made under the Civil Liability (Contribution) Act 1978 against Santander Cards UK Limited. If the
Santander Entities and AXA are both successful in their respective appeals, subject to any further appeal and defences which may be available to the Santander
Entities, the Court of Appeal may find that Santander Cards UK Limited has a liability in contribution to AXA France for an amount to be determined by the Court.
With respect to the Santander Appeal and AXA France’s cross-appeal, there are points of legal interpretation to be resolved and, in the case of the cross-appeal,
factual points to be determined. In addition to the significant uncertainties outlined above as to whether any exposure for Santander Cards UK Limited will arise, it is
noted that any such exposure would represent a reallocation of the costs already paid and recognised by other entities within the Banco Santander SA Group. The
significant uncertainties make it difficult to predict the timing or the significance of the possible impact for the Santander UK group. With that context (and subject to
the foregoing), the Santander UK group notes that its maximum potential exposure is approximately £528m. A decision on the Santander Appeal and AXA France’s
cross appeal is expected in H2 2026.
No customers have suffered loss as a consequence of the claim brought by AXA France or the Judgment, nor does it impact upon past redress paid to customers for
PPI complaints.
Other
In 2016, Visa Europe Ltd was sold to Visa Inc. As a member and shareholder of Visa Europe Ltd, Santander UK received upfront consideration made up of cash and
convertible preferred stoc k. The convertible preferred stock is now held by Santander Equity Investments Limited (SEIL), outside the ring-fenced bank. Conversion of
the preferred stock into Class A Common Stock of Visa Inc. depends on the outcome of litigation against Visa involving UK & Ireland multilateral interchange fees
(UK&I MIFs).
In addition, Santander UK and certain other UK&I banks have agreed to indemnify Visa Inc. in the event that the preferred stock is insufficient to meet the costs of
this litigation. Visa Inc. has recourse to this indemnity once more than €1bn of losses relating to UK&I MIFs have arisen or once the total value of the preferred stock
issued on closing has been reduced to nil. Santander UK's liability under this indemnity is capped at €40m. At this stage, our assessment is that the litigation will not
give rise to more than €1bn of losses relating to UK&I MIFs, which would mean that the indemnity would not be called upon. However, the potential impact of the
litigation is still not certain, and therefore it is still possible that the indemnity could be called upon.
As part of the sale of subsidiaries, businesses and other entities, and as is normal in such circumstances, Santander UK plc (and/or, where relevant, its subsidiaries)
has given warranties and/or indemnities to the purchasers.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 189

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Obligations under stock borrowing and lending agreements
Obligations under stock borrowing and lending agreements represent contractual commitments to return stock borrowed. These obligations are offset by a
contractual right to receive stock under other contractual agreements. See Note 34.
Other off-balance sheet commitments
The Santander UK group has commitments to lend at fixed interest rates which expose us to interest rate risk. For further information, see the Risk review.
Capital support arrangements
At 31 December 2025, Santander UK plc, Cater Allen Limited, Santander ISA Managers Limited and certain other non-regulated subsidiaries of Santander UK plc
were party to a capital support deed dated 3 December 2024 which was effective from 3 December 2024 (the RFB Sub-Group Capital Support Deed). These parties
were permitted by the PRA to form a core UK group as defined in the PRA Rulebook, a permission which expires on 3 December 2027. Exposures of each of the
regulated entities to other members of the core UK group are exempt from large exposure limits that would otherwise apply and these exposures are risk-weighted
at 0%. Where applicable this permission also provides for intra-group exposures to be excluded from the leverage exposure measure. The purpose of the RFB Sub-
Group Capital Support Deed is to facilitate the prompt transfer of available capital resources from, or repayment of liabilities by, the non-regulated entities to any of
the regulated entities in the event that one of the regulated entities breached or was at risk of breaching its capital resources or risk concentrations requirements.
Liquidity support arrangement
Under the PRA’s liquidity rules, Santander UK plc and its subsidiary Cater Allen Limited form the RFB Domestic Liquidity Sub-group (the RFB DoLSub), which allows
them to collectively meet regulatory requirements to manage liquidity risk. Each member of the RFB DoLSub will support the other by transferring surplus liquidity
in times of stress.
31. SHARE CAPITAL

| Group and Company
| Ordinary shares of £0.10 each |  | Total
Issued and fully paid share capital | No. | £m |  | £m
At 31 December 2024, 1 January 2025 and 31 December 2025 | 31,051,768,866 | 3,105 |  | 3,105

| Group and Company
2025 | 2024
Share premium | £m | £m
1 January 2025 | 5,620 | 5,620
Reduction | (4,501) | —
31 December 2025 | 1,119 | 5,620

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carries no right to fixed income. The Company’s £325m sterling preference shares are classified as
Subordinated Liabilities as described in Note 29.
On 18 September 2025, the High Court of Justice, Chancery Division confirmed the reduction of the share premium account of Santander UK plc. The share premium
account was reduced by £4,501m and retained earnings were increased by the same amount.
32. OTHER EQUITY INSTRUMENTS

|  |  | Group and Company
| Interest rate | Next call date | 2025 | 2024
| % |  | £m | £m
AT1 securities: |  |  |  |
- £500m Perpetual Capital Securities | 6.30 | March 2025 | — | 500
- £210m Perpetual Capital Securities | 4.25 | March 2026 | 210 | 210
- £750m Perpetual Capital Securities | 6.50 | June 2027 | 750 | 750
- £400m Perpetual Capital Securities | 8.75 | Sept 2029 | 400 | 400
- £500m Perpetual Capital Securities | 7.63 | Sept 2030 | 500 | —
|  |  | 1,860 | 1,860

AT1 securities
The AT1 securities issued by the Company were subscribed for by its immediate parent company, Santander UK Group Holdings plc. The AT1 securities are perpetual
and pay a quarterly distribution. At each distribution payment date, the Company can decide whether to pay the distribution, which is non-cumulative, in whole or in
part. The distribution rate resets every five years. The securities will be automatically written down and the investors will lose their entire investment in the
securities should the CET1 capital ratio of the Santander UK prudential consolidation group, or the Company (calculated on a solo basis), fall below 7%.
In February 2025, Santander UK Group Holdings plc issued £500m 7.63% Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities, which were fully subscribed by the
Company’s immediate parent company, Banco Santander SA, and in March 2025 redeemed the £500m 6.30% Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities.
All AT1 securities are redeemable at the option of the Company, and only with the consent of the PRA.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 190

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

33. NOTES TO CASH FLOWS
Changes in liabilities and equity arising from financing activities
The table below shows the changes in liabilities arising from financing activities. The changes in equity arising from financing activities are set out in the
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity.

|  |  |  |  | Group
| Balance sheet line item |  |
| Debt securities in issue | Subordinated liabilities | Other equity instruments | Lease liabilities | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January | 35,673 | 2,385 | 1,860 | 88 | 40,006
Proceeds from issue of debt securities | 9,809 | — | — | — | 9,809
Repayment of debt securities | (3,917) | — | — | — | (3,917)
Repayment of subordinated liabilities | — | (302) | — | — | (302)
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 500 | — | 500
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (500) | — | (500)
Principal elements of lease payments | — | — | — | (22) | (22)
Liability-related other changes | 176 | (5) | — | 6 | 177
Non-cash changes: |  |  |  |  |
– Unrealised foreign exchange | (546) | (54) | — | — | (600)
– Other changes | 193 | 8 | — | — | 201
At 31 December | 41,388 | 2,032 | 1,860 | 72 | 45,352

2024 |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January | 33,910 | 2,386 | 1,956 | 111 | 38,363
Proceeds from issue of debt securities | 8,397 | — | — | — | 8,397
Repayment of debt securities | (6,539) | — | — | — | (6,539)
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 400 | — | 400
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (500) | — | (500)
Principal elements of lease payments | — | — | — | (33) | (33)
Liability-related other changes | 283 | 1 | — | 10 | 294
Non-cash changes: |  |  |  |  |
– Unrealised foreign exchange | (395) | 3 | — | — | (392)
– Other changes | 17 | (5) | 4 | — | 16
At 31 December | 35,673 | 2,385 | 1,860 | 88 | 40,006

2023 |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January | 31,531 | 2,332 | 1,956 | 125 | 35,944
Proceeds from issue of debt securities | 4,208 | — | — | — | 4,208
Repayment of debt securities | (2,568) | — | — | — | (2,568)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities | — | 1,050 | — | — | 1,050
Repayment of subordinated liabilities | — | (971) | — | — | (971)
Principal elements of lease payments | — | — | — | (47) | (47)
Liability-related other changes | 1,004 | 25 | — | 33 | 1,062
Non-cash changes: |  |  |  |  |
– Unrealised foreign exchange | (651) | (22) | — | — | (673)
– Other changes | 386 | (28) | — | — | 358
At 31 December | 33,910 | 2,386 | 1,956 | 111 | 38,363

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 191

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  | Company
| Balance sheet line item |  |
| Debt securities in issue | Subordinated liabilities | Other equity instruments | Lease liabilities | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
At 1 January | 31,833 | 2,386 | 1,860 | 79 | 36,158
Proceeds from issue of debt securities | 8,108 | — | — | — | 8,108
Repayment of debt securities | (3,917) | — | — | — | (3,917)
Repayment of subordinated liabilities | — | (302) | — | — | (302)
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 500 | — | 500
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (500) | — | (500)
Principal elements of lease payments | — | — | — | (20) | (20)
Liability-related other changes | 171 | (5) | — | 4 | 170
Non-cash changes: |  |  |  |  |
– Unrealised foreign exchange | (546) | (54) | — | — | (600)
– Other changes | 148 | 8 | — | — | 156
At 31 December | 35,797 | 2,033 | 1,860 | 63 | 39,753

2024 |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January | 31,228 | 2,387 | 1,956 | 100 | 35,671
Proceeds from issue of debt securities | 7,147 | — | — | — | 7,147
Repayment of debt securities | (6,439) | — | — | — | (6,439)
Issue of other equity instruments | — | — | 400 | — | 400
Repurchase of other equity instruments | — | — | (500) | — | (500)
Principal elements of lease payments | — | — | — | (31) | (31)
Liability-related other changes | 276 | 1 | — | 10 | 287
Non-cash changes: |  |  |  |  |
– Unrealised foreign exchange | (395) | 3 | — | — | (392)
– Other changes | 16 | (5) | 4 | — | 15
At 31 December | 31,833 | 2,386 | 1,860 | 79 | 36,158

2023 |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January | 30,721 | 2,336 | 1,956 | 115 | 35,128
Proceeds from issue of debt securities | 2,158 | — | — | — | 2,158
Repayment of debt securities | (2,282) | — | — | — | (2,282)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities | — | 1,050 | — | — | 1,050
Repayment of subordinated liabilities | — | (971) | — | — | (971)
Principal elements of lease payments | — | — | — | (45) | (45)
Liability-related other changes | 990 | 25 | — | 30 | 1,045
Non-cash changes: |  |  |  |  |
– Unrealised foreign exchange | (651) | (22) | — | — | (673)
– Other changes | 292 | (31) | — | — | 261
At 31 December | 31,228 | 2,387 | 1,956 | 100 | 35,671

Footnotes to the consolidated cash flow statement
Net cash flows from operating activities includes interest received of £11,486m (2024: £12,370m, 2023: £11,395m), interest paid of £6,899m (2024: £8,033m,
2023: £6,326m) and dividends received of £nil (2024: £nil, 2023: £nil).
Total cash outflow for leases was £25m (2024: £36m, 2023: £50m).
Footnotes to the Company cash flow statement
Net cash flows from operating activities includes interest received of £12,102m (2024: £12,975m, 2023: £11,828m), interest paid of £6,960m (2024: £7,931m,
2023: £6,327m) and dividends received of £162m (2024: £240m, 2023: £420m).
Total cash outflow for leases was £23m (2024: £34m, 2023: £47m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 192

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

34. ASSETS CHARGED AS SECURITY FOR LIABILITIES AND COLLATERAL ACCEPTED AS
SECURITY FOR ASSETS
The following transactions are conducted under terms that are usual and customary to collateralised transactions including, where relevant, standard securities
lending and repurchase agreements.
a) Assets charged as security for liabilities
The financial assets below are analysed between those assets accounted for on-balance sheet and off-balance sheet.

| Group |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
On-balance sheet: |  |  |  |  |
Cash and balances at central banks | 1,440 | 1,580 |  | 1,440 | 1,580
Loans and advances to banks | 238 | 139 |  | 235 | 139
Loans and advances to customers - securitisations and covered bonds (See Note 14) | 36,466 | 32,721 |  | — | —
Loans and advances to customers - other | 6,512 | 14,846 |  | 6,512 | 14,846
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 1,282 | 1,529 |  | 1,282 | 1,529
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 2,900 | 4,504 |  | 2,900 | 4,504
Total on-balance sheet | 48,838 | 55,319 |  | 12,369 | 22,598
Total off-balance sheet | 9,653 | 9,564 |  | 9,653 | 9,564

Santander UK provides assets as collateral in the following areas of the business.
Sale and repurchase agreements
Santander UK also enters into sale and repurchase agreements and similar transactions of debt securities. Upon entering into such transactions, Santander UK
provides collateral in excess of the borrowed amount. The carrying amount of assets that were so provided at 31 December 2025 was £15,243m (2024:
£16,987m), of which £2,474m (2024: £2,472m) was classified in ‘Loans and advances to customers – securitisations and covered bonds’ in the table above.
Securitisations and covered bonds
As described in Note 14, Santander UK plc and certain of its subsidiaries issue securitisations and covered bonds through or involving structured entities. At 31
December 2025, there were £37,123m (2024: £33,905m) of gross assets in these secured programmes and £657m (2024: £1,184m) of these related to internally
retained issuances that were available for use as collateral for liquidity purposes in the future.
At 31 December 2025, £2,975m (2024: £3,003m) of notes issued under securitisation and covered bond programmes had been retained internally, a proportion of
which had been used as collateral via third party bilateral secured funding transactions, which totalled £1,500m at 31 December 2025 (2024: £1,500m), or for use
as collateral for liquidity purposes in the future.
Stock borrowing and lending agreements
Asset balances under stock borrowing and lending agreements represent stock lent by Santander UK. These balances amounted to £7,133m at 31 December 2025
(2024: £15,860m) and are offset by contractual commitments to return stock borrowed or cash received.
Derivatives and other business
In addition to the arrangements described above, collateral is also provided in the normal course of derivative business to counterparties. At 31 December 2025,
£2,122m (2024: £1,787m) of such collateral in the form of cash had been provided by Santander UK and is included in the table above.
b) Collateral accepted as security for assets
The collateral held as security for assets, analysed between those liabilities accounted for on balance sheet and off-balance sheet, was:

| Group |  | Company
| 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m |  | £m | £m
On-balance sheet: |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by banks | 442 | 682 |  | 442 | 682
Deposits by customers | 117 | — |  | 17 | —
Total on-balance sheet | 559 | 682 |  | 459 | 682
Total off-balance sheet | 17,708 | 14,392 |  | 17,708 | 14,392

Purchase and resale agreements
Santander UK also enters into purchase and resale agreements and similar transactions of debt securities. Upon entering into such transactions, Santander UK
receives collateral in excess of the loan amount. The level of collateral held is monitored daily and if required, further calls are made to ensure the market values of
collateral remains at least equal to the loan balance. The subsidiaries are permitted to sell or repledge the collateral held in the absence of default. At 31 December
2025, the fair value of such collateral received was £16,410m (2024: £13,221m). Of the collateral received, almost all was sold or repledged. The subsidiaries have
an obligation to return collateral that they have sold or pledged.
Stock borrowing and lending agreements
Obligations representing contractual commitments to return stock borrowed by the Santander UK group amounted to £1,298m at 31 December 2025 (2024:
£1,171m) and are offset by a contractual right to receive stock lent.
Derivatives business
In addition to the arrangements described, collateral is also received from counterparties in the normal course of derivative business. At 31 December 2025, £559m
(2024: £682m) of such collateral in the form of cash had been received by Santander UK and is included in the table.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 193

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Lending activities
In addition to the collateral held as security for assets, the Santander UK group may obtain a charge over a customer’s property in connection with its lending
activities. Details of these arrangements are set out in the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.
35. SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION
The Santander UK group operates share schemes and arrangements for eligible employees. The main current schemes are the Sharesave Schemes, the Deferred
Shares Bonus Plan, the Partnership Shares scheme and the Transformation Incentive Plan. All the share options and awards relate to shares in Banco Santander SA.
The amount charged to the income statement in respect of share-based payment transactions is set out in Note 6.
At 31 December 2025, the carrying amount of liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions, excluding any cash element was £64m (2024: £24m), of
which £12m had vested at 31 December 2025 (2024: £1m).
a) Sharesave Schemes
The Santander UK group launched its seventeenth HM Revenue & Customs approved Sharesave invitation under Banco Santander SA sponsorship in September
2025. Sharesave invitations have been offered since 2008 under broadly similar terms. However, in 2025 only a three-year term was offered. Eligible employees
may enter into contracts to save between £5 and £500 per month. At the end of a fixed term of three or five years after the grant date, the employees can use these
savings to buy shares in Banco Santander SA at a discount, calculated in accordance with the rules of the scheme. The option price is calculated as the average
middle market quoted price of Banco Santander SA shares over the first three dealing days prior to invitation and discounted by up to 20%. This year, a 10% discount
was applied. The vesting of awards under the scheme depends on continued employment with the Banco Santander group. Participants in the scheme have six
months from the date of vesting to exercise the option.
The table below summarises movements in the number of options, and changes in weighted average exercise price over the same period.

|  | 2025 |  |  | 2024
| Number of options | Weighted average exercise price |  | Number of options | Weighted average exercise price
| ‘000 | £ |  | ‘000 | £
Outstanding at 1 January | 25,689 | 2.39 |  | 27,139 | 2.19
Granted | 3,324 | 6.35 |  | 4,991 | 3.36
Exercised | (9,966) | 1.90 |  | (4,004) | 2.29
Forfeited/expired | (1,554) | 2.88 |  | (2,437) | 2.37
Outstanding at 31 December | 17,493 | 3.38 |  | 25,689 | 2.39
Exercisable at 31 December | 1,886 | 2.10 |  | 1,115 | 2.36

The weighted average share price at the date the options were exercised was £7.78 (2024: £3.64).
The following table summarises the range of exercise prices and weighted average remaining contractual life of the options at 31 December 2025 and 2024.

|  | 2025 |  |  | 2024
Range of exercise prices | Weighted average remaining contractual life | Weighted average exercise price |  | Weighted average remaining contractual life | Weighted average exercise price
Years | £ |  | Years | £
£1 to £2 | 1 | 1.86 |  | 2 | 1.85
£2 to £3 | 2 | 2.74 |  | 2 | 2.71
£3 to £4 | 3 | 3.36 |  | 4 | 3.36
£6 to £7 | 3 | 6.35 |  | 0 | —

The fair value of each option at the date of grant is estimated using an analytical model that also reflects the correlation between EUR and GBP. This model uses
assumptions on the share price, the EUR/GBP FX rate, the EUR/GBP risk-free interest rate, dividend yields, the expected volatilities of both the underlying shares and
EUR/GBP for the expected lives of options granted. The weighted average grant-date fair value of options granted during the year was £0.44 (2024: £0.23).
b) Deferred shares bonus plan
Deferred bonus awards are designed to align employee performance with shareholder value and encourage increased retention of senior employees. Those
employees who are designated as Material Risk Takers receive part of their annual bonus as a deferred award comprising 50% in shares and 50% in cash. Either
40% (for any variable pay award of less than £660,000) or 60% (for the portion of any variable pay award greater than £660,000) is deferred over a four- or five-
year period from the anniversary of the initial award. Deferred bonus awards in shares or share options are subject to an additional one-year retention period from
the point of delivery. Any deferred awards are dependent on continued employment and subject to Santander UK's discretion, and the vesting of deferred bonus
awards is subject to potential performance adjustment.
c) Partnership Shares scheme
A Partnership Shares scheme is operated for eligible employees under the Share Incentive Plan (SIP) umbrella. Participants can choose to invest up to £1,800 per tax year
(or no more than 10% of an employee’s salary for the tax year) from pre-tax salary to buy Banco Santander SA shares. Shares are held in trust for the participants. There
are no vesting conditions attached to these shares, and no restrictions as to when the shares can be removed from the trust. However, if a participant chooses to sell the
shares before the end of five years, they will be liable for the taxable benefit received when the shares are taken out of the trust. The shares can be released from trust
after five years free of income tax and national insurance contributions. At 31 December 2025, 2,815,000 shar es were outstanding (2024: 3,662,718 shares).
d) Transformation Incentive Plan
Awards under this one-off long-term incentive plan were granted in 2021, 2022 and 2023 with performance assessed over the period 1 January 2021 to 31
December 2023. Awards for Material Risk Takers were granted half in cash and half in share-based awards (linked to the Banco Santander SA share price) and will
vest in accordance with regulatory requirements. The liability arising from share-based payment transactions, excluding any cash element was £13.4m (2024:
£5.2m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 194

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

36. TRANSACTIONS WITH DIRECTORS AND OTHER KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL
a) Remuneration of Directors and Other Key Management Personnel
The remuneration of the Directors and Other Key Management Personnel (KMP) of the Santander UK group is set out in aggregate below.

| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
Directors’ remuneration | £ | £ | £
Salaries and fees | 6,069,144 | 4,879,413 | 4,733,761
Performance-related payments | 5,060,084 | 2,871,476 | 1,002,607
Other fixed remuneration (pension and other allowances & non-cash benefits)1 | 1,201,186 | 516,442 | 222,538
Total remuneration | 12,330,414 | 8,267,331 | 5,958,906

| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
Directors' and Other Key Management Personnel compensation | £ | £ | £
Short-term employee benefits | 24,409,887 | 21,742,485 | 18,449,360
Post-employment benefits | 1,123,802 | 868,368 | 858,437
Compensation for loss of office 2 | 3,000 | — | —
Total compensation | 25,536,689 | 22,610,853 | 19,307,797

1 Included in Other fixed remuneration is an employer pension contribution to a defined contribution scheme of £292,540 (2024: £122,915).
2 During 2025 legal fees of £3,000 were paid to one KMP in connection to loss of office. In 2024 and 2023, no compensation for loss of office was paid to Directors or Other KMPs. No payments to past directors have
been made in respect of 2025 or 2024.
In 2025, the remuneration, excluding pension contributions, of the highest paid Director, was £3,422,838 (2024: £3,160,709, 2023: £2,640,491) of which
£1,686,482 (2024: £1,431,612, 2023: £1,002,607) was performance related. In 2025, the accrued defined benefit pension relating to the highest paid director was
£nil (2024: £nil, 2023: £nil).
b) Retirement benefits
Defined benefit pension schemes are provided to certain employees. See Note 28 for details of the schemes and the related costs and obligations. No director
has a deferred pension benefit accruing under a defined benefit scheme. Ex-gratia pensions paid to former Directors of Santander UK plc in 2025, which have been
provided for previously, amounted to £445,951 (2024: £430,904; 2023: £327,462). Since the Company became part of the Banco Santander group, the Board has
not awarded any new ex-gratia pensions.
c) Transactions with Directors, Other Key Management Personnel and each of their connected persons
Directors, Other KMP (defined as the Executive Committee of Santander UK plc who served during the year) and their connected persons have undertaken the
following transactions with the Santander UK group in the ordinary course of business.

|  | 2025 |  |  | 2024
No. | £000 |  | No. | £000
Secured loans, unsecured loans and overdrafts |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January | 10 | 996 |  | 8 | 1,075
Net movements | 1 | 316 |  | 2 | (79)
At 31 December | 11 | 1,312 |  | 10 | 996
Deposit, bank and instant access accounts and investments |  |  |  |  |
At 1 January | 19 | 1,780 |  | 17 | 1,702
Net movements | 2 | 790 |  | 2 | 78
At 31 December | 21 | 2,570 |  | 19 | 1,780

In 2025 and 2024, no Director held any interest in the shares of any company in the Santander UK group and no Director exercised or was granted any rights to
subscribe for shares in any company in the Santander UK group. In addition, in 2025 and 2024, no Directors exercised share options over shares in Banco Santander
SA, the ultimate parent company of the Company.
Secured loans, unsecured loans and overdrafts are made to Directors, Other KMP and their connected persons, in the ordinary course of business, with terms
prevailing for comparable transactions and on the same terms and conditions as applicable to other employees in the Santander UK group. Such loans do not
involve more than the normal risk of collectability or present any unfavourable features. Amounts deposited by Directors, Other KMP and their connected persons
earn interest at the same rates as those offered to the market or on the same terms and conditions applicable to other employees in the Santander UK group.
Deposits, bank and instant access accounts and investments are entered into by Directors, Other KMP and their connected persons on normal market terms and
conditions, or on the same terms and conditions as applicable to other employees in Santander UK group.
In 2025 and 2024, two Directors had loans with a principal amount of £380,067 outstanding at 31 December 2025 (2024: £180,000). In 2025, four Other KMPs had
loans (2024: two), with a principal amount of £883,163 outstanding at 31 December 2025 (2024: £781,285).
In 2025 and 2024, there were no other transactions, arrangements or agreements with Santander UK in which Directors, Other KMP or their connected persons had
a material interest. In addition, in 2025 and 2024, no Director had a material interest in any contract of significance with Santander UK other than a service contract
or appointment letter, as appropriate.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 195

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

37. RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURES
a) Parent undertaking and controlling party
The Company’s immediate parent is Santander UK Group Holdings plc, a company incorporated in England and Wales. Its ultimate parent and controlling party is
Banco Santander SA, a company incorporated in Spain. The smallest and largest groups into which the Santander UK group’s results are included are the group
accounts of Santander UK Group Holdings plc and Banco Santander SA respectively, copies of which may be obtained from Shareholder Relations, 2 Triton Square,
Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN, on the corporate website (aboutsantander.co.uk) or on the Banco Santander corporate website (santander.com).
b) Transactions with related parties
Transactions with related parties during the year and balances outstanding at the year-end:

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
| Interest, fees and other income received |  | Interest, fees and other expenses paid |  | Amounts owed by related parties |  | Amounts owed to related parties
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023 |  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
£m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Ultimate parent | (19) | (23) | (8) |  | 321 | 138 | 414 |  | 730 | 587 |  | (1,834) | (944)
Immediate parent | (6) | (7) | (7) |  | 594 | 526 | 504 |  | — | — |  | (12,275) | (12,392)
Fellow subsidiaries | (38) | (42) | (38) |  | 310 | 228 | 203 |  | 62 | 68 |  | (573) | (346)
Joint ventures | (287) | (258) | (183) |  | 76 | 84 | 55 |  | 5,038 | 4,812 |  | (1,485) | (1,567)
| (350) | (330) | (236) |  | 1,301 | 976 | 1,176 |  | 5,830 | 5,467 |  | (16,167) | (15,249)

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
| Interest, fees and other income received |  | Interest, fees and other expenses paid |  | Amounts owed by related parties |  | Amounts owed to related parties
| 2025 | 2024 | 2023 |  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024
£m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
Ultimate parent | (20) | (12) | (8) |  | 291 | 127 | 414 |  | 730 | 587 |  | (1,019) | (944)
Immediate parent | (6) | (7) | (7) |  | 594 | 526 | 504 |  | — | — |  | (12,275) | (12,392)
Subsidiaries | (1,371) | (1,311) | (1,014) |  | 784 | 2,535 | 1,359 |  | 31,883 | 30,090 |  | (37,593) | (34,274)
Fellow subsidiaries | (34) | (37) | (33) |  | 300 | 221 | 197 |  | 58 | 60 |  | (573) | (345)
Joint ventures | — | — | — |  | 1 | 1 | 1 |  | 1 | 1 |  | (85) | (117)
| (1,431) | (1,367) | (1,062) |  | 1,970 | 3,410 | 2,475 |  | 32,672 | 30,738 |  | (51,545) | (48,072)

For more on this, see Note 11 Derivative Financial Statements, Note 13 Loans and advances to customers, Note 21 Deposit by banks, Note 22 Deposits by
customers, Note 23 Repurchase agreements - non-trading, Note 24 Other Financial liabilities at Fair Value Through Profit or Loss, Note 25 Debt Securities in Issue,
Note 26 Other liabilities, Note 29 Subordinated Liabilities and Note 32 Other Equity Instruments.
The above transactions were made in the ordinary course of business, on substantially the same terms as for comparable transactions with third party
counterparties, and within limits acceptable to the PRA. Such transactions do not involve more than the normal risk of collectability or present any unfavourable
features.
Santander (CF Trustee) Limited entered into an unsecured committed liquidity facility with Santander UK plc for £300m with a maturity date of 4 November 2026.
This facility provides an alternate source of short-term liquidity for day-to-day operational needs. At the balance sheet date, no drawings had been made from this
facility.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 196

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

38. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
a) Fair value measurement and hierarchy
(i) Fair value measurement
The fair value of financial instruments is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market
participants at the measurement date in the principal, or in its absence, the most advantageous market to which Santander UK has access at that date. The fair value
of a liability reflects its non-performance risk.
Financial instruments valued using observable market prices
If a quoted market price in an active market is available for an instrument, the fair value is calculated as the current exit price multiplied by the number of units of
the instrument held.
Financial instruments valued using a valuation technique
In the absence of a quoted market price in an active market, management uses internal models to make its best estimate of the price that the market would set
for that financial instrument. In order to make these estimations, various techniques are employed, including extrapolation from observable market data and
observation of similar financial instruments with similar characteristics. Wherever possible, valuation parameters for each product are based on prices directly
observable in active markets or that can be derived from directly observable market prices. Chosen valuation techniques incorporate all the factors that market
participants would take into account in pricing transactions.
Santander UK manages certain groups of financial assets and liabilities on the basis of its net exposure to either market risks or credit risk. As a result, it has elected
to use the exception under IFRS 13 which permits the fair value measurement of a group of financial assets and financial liabilities on the basis of the price that
would be received to sell a net long position for a particular risk exposure or paid to transfer a net short position for a particular risk exposure in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date under current market conditions.
(ii) Fair value hierarchy
Santander UK applies the following fair value hierarchy that prioritises the inputs to valuation techniques used in measuring fair value. The hierarchy establishes
three categories for valuing financial instruments, giving the highest priority to unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities and the
lowest priority to unobservable inputs. The three categories are: quoted prices in active markets (Level 1), internal models based on observable market data (Level
2) and internal models based on other than observable market data (Level 3). If the inputs used to measure an asset or a liability fall to different levels within the
hierarchy, the classification of the entire asset or liability will be based on the lowest level input that is significant to the overall fair value measurement of the asset
or liability.
Santander UK categorises assets and liabilities measured at fair value within the fair value hierarchy based on the inputs to the valuation techniques as follows:
Level 1 Unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in an active market that Santander UK can access at the measurement date. Active markets
are assessed by reference to average daily trading volumes in absolute terms and, where applicable, by reference to market capitalisation for the
instrument.
Level 2 Quoted prices in inactive markets, quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities, recent market transactions, inputs other than quoted market prices for
the asset or liability that are observable either directly or indirectly for substantially the full term, and inputs to valuation techniques that are derived
principally from or corroborated by observable market data through correlation or other statistical means for substantially the full term of the asset or
liability.
Level 3 Significant inputs to the pricing or valuation techniques are unobservable. These unobservable inputs reflect the assumptions that market participants
would use when pricing assets or liabilities and are considered significant to the overall valuation.
Changes in the observability of significant valuation inputs during the reporting period may result in a transfer of assets and liabilities within the fair value hierarchy.
The Santander UK group recognises transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy when there is a significant change in either its principal market or the level
of observability of the inputs to the valuation techniques at the end of the reporting period.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 197

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

b) Valuation techniques
The main valuation technique s employed in internal models to measure the fair value of the financial instruments at 31 December 2025 and 2024 are set out
below. In substantially all cases, the principal inputs into these models are derived from observable market data. Santander UK did not make any material changes
to the valuation techniques and internal models it used in 2025, 2024 and 2023.
A. In the valuation of financial instruments requiring static hedging (for example interest rate, currency derivatives and property derivatives) and in the valuation
of loans and advances and deposits, the ‘present value’ method is used. Expected future cash flows are discounted using the interest rate curves of the
applicable currencies or forward house price index levels, as well as credit spreads. The interest rate curves are generally observable market data and
reference yield curves derived from quoted interest rates in appropriate time bandings, which match the timings of the cash flows and maturities of the
instruments.
B. In the valuation of equity financial instruments requiring dynamic hedging (principally equity securities, options and other structured instruments), proprietary
local volatility and stochastic volatility models are used. These types of models are widely accepted in the financial services industry. Observable market inputs
used in these models include the bid-offer spread, foreign currency exchange rates, volatility and correlation between indices. In limited circumstances, other
inputs may be used in these models that are based on unobservable market data, such as the Halifax’s UK HPI volatility, HPI forward growth, HPI spot rate,
mortality, and mean reversion.
C. In the valuation of financial instruments exposed to interest rate risk that require either static or dynamic hedging (such as interest rate swaps, caps and
floors), the present value method (swaps), and Black’s model (caps/floors) are used. These types of models are widely accepted in the financial services
industry. The significant inputs used in these models are observable market data, including appropriate interest rate curves, volatilities, correlations and
exchange rates. In limited circumstances, other inputs may be used in these models that are based on unobservable market data, such as HPI volatility, HPI
forward growth, HPI spot rate and mortality.
D. In the valuation of linear instruments such as credit risk and fixed-income derivatives, credit risk is measured using dynamic models similar to those used in
the measurement of interest rate risk. In the case of non-linear instruments, if the portfolio is exposed to credit risk such as credit derivatives, the probability
of default is determined using the credit default spread market. The main inputs used to determine the underlying cost of credit of credit derivatives are
quoted credit risk premiums and the correlation between the quoted credit derivatives of various issuers.
The fair values of the financial instruments arising from Santander UK’s internal models take into account, among other things, contract terms and observable
market data, which include such factors as bid-offer spread, interest rates, credit risk, exchange rates, the quoted market price of equity securities, and volatility.
In all cases, when it is not possible to derive a valuation for a particular feature of an instrument, management uses judgement to determine the fair value of
the particular feature. In exercising this judgement, a variety of tools are used including proxy observable data, historical data and extrapolation techniques.
Extrapolation techniques take into account behavioural characteristics of equity markets that have been observed over time, and for which there is a strong case to
support an expectation of a continuing trend in the future. Estimates are calibrated to observable market prices when they become available.
Santander UK believes its valuation methods are appropriate and consistent with other market participants. Nevertheless, the use of different valuation methods or
assumptions, including imprecision in estimating unobservable market inputs, to determine the fair value of certain financial instruments could result in different
estimates of fair value at the reporting date and the amount of gain or loss recorded for a particular instrument. Most of the valuation models are not significantly
subjective, because they can be tested and, if necessary, recalibrated by the internal calculation of and subsequent comparison to market prices of actively traded
securities, where available.
c) Control framework
Fair values are subject to a control framework designed to ensure that they are either determined or validated by a function independent of the risk-taker. To this
end, ultimate responsibility for the determination of fair values lies with the Risk Department. For all financial instruments where fair values are determined by
reference to externally quoted prices or observable pricing inputs to models, independent price determination or verification is utilised. In inactive markets, direct
observation of a traded price may not be possible. In these circumstances, Santander UK will source alternative market information to validate the financial
instrument’s fair value, with greater weight given to information that is considered to be more relevant and reliable.
The factors that are considered in this regard include:
– The extent to which prices may be expected to represent genuine traded or tradeable prices
– The degree of similarity between financial instruments
– The degree of consistency between different sources
– The process followed by the pricing provider to derive the data
– The elapsed time between the date to which the market data relates and the balance sheet date
– The manner in which the data was sourced.
The source of pricing data is considered as part of the process that determines the classification of the level of a financial instrument. Consideration is given to the
quality of the information available that provides the current mark-to-model valuation and estimates of how different these valuations could be on an actual trade,
taking into consideration how active the market is. For spot assets that cannot be sold due to illiquidity, forward estimates are discounted to estimate a realisable
value over time. Adjustments for illiquid positions are regularly reviewed to reflect changing market conditions.
For fair values determined using a valuation model, the control framework may include as applicable, independent development and / or validation of: (i) the logic
within the models; (ii) the inputs to those models; and (iii) any adjustments required outside the models. Internal valuation models are validated independently
within the Risk Department. A validation report is produced for each model-derived valuation that assesses the mathematical assumptions behind the model, the
implementation of the model and its integration within the trading system.
d) Fair values of financial instruments carried at amortised cost
The following tables analyse the fair value of the financial instruments carried at amortised cost at 31 December 2025 and 2024, including their levels in the fair
value hierarchy - Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3. Cash and balances at central banks, which consist of demand deposits with the Bank of England, together with cash in
tills and ATMs, have been excluded from the table as the carrying amount is deemed an appropriate approximation of fair value.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 198

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
|  |  |  | 2025 |  |  |  |  | 2024
|  | Fair value |  | Carrying |  |  |  | Fair value |  | Carrying
| Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total | value |  | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total | value
£m | £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | — | — | 203,426 | 203,426 | 202,609 |  | — | — | 198,376 | 198,376 | 199,408
Loans and advances to banks | — | 1,048 | — | 1,048 | 1,048 |  | — | 1,032 | — | 1,032 | 1,032
Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading | — | 17,696 | — | 17,696 | 17,678 |  | — | 10,342 | — | 10,342 | 10,338
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 3,747 | — | — | 3,747 | 3,987 |  | 3,190 | — | — | 3,190 | 3,408
| 3,747 | 18,744 | 203,426 | 225,917 | 225,322 |  | 3,190 | 11,374 | 198,376 | 212,940 | 214,186
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by customers | — | 117 | 187,849 | 187,966 | 187,300 |  | — | 185 | 180,282 | 180,467 | 180,967
Deposits by banks | — | 6,630 | — | 6,630 | 6,628 |  | — | 13,934 | 39 | 13,973 | 13,993
Repurchase agreements - non-trading | — | 9,039 | — | 9,039 | 9,029 |  | — | 8,622 | — | 8,622 | 8,617
Debt securities in issue | 25,874 | 14,618 | 1,421 | 41,913 | 41,388 |  | 21,173 | 12,910 | 1,771 | 35,854 | 35,673
Subordinated liabilities | 1,065 | 1,161 | 187 | 2,413 | 2,032 |  | 1,129 | 10 | 1,622 | 2,761 | 2,385
| 26,939 | 31,565 | 189,457 | 247,961 | 246,377 |  | 22,302 | 35,661 | 183,714 | 241,677 | 241,635

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
|  |  |  |  | 2025 |  |  |  |  |  | 2024
|  |  | Fair value |  | Carrying |  |  |  | Fair value |  | Carrying
| Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total | value |  | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total | value
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | — | — | 223,075 | 223,075 | 222,467 |  | — | — | 216,851 | 216,851 | 217,780
Loans and advances to banks | — | 990 | — | 990 | 990 |  | — | 926 | — | 926 | 926
Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading | — | 17,696 | — | 17,696 | 17,678 |  | — | 10,342 | — | 10,342 | 10,338
Other financial assets at amortised cost | 3,747 | 1,593 | — | 5,340 | 5,754 |  | 3,190 | 1,977 | — | 5,167 | 5,206
| 3,747 | 20,279 | 223,075 | 247,101 | 246,889 |  | 3,190 | 13,245 | 216,851 | 233,286 | 234,250
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by customers | — | 17 | 212,293 | 212,310 | 211,643 |  | — | 185 | 200,530 | 200,715 | 201,215
Deposits by banks | — | 11,127 | — | 11,127 | 11,126 |  | — | 13,922 | 5,579 | 19,501 | 19,521
Repurchase agreements - non-trading | — | 9,039 | — | 9,039 | 9,029 |  | — | 8,621 | — | 8,621 | 8,617
Debt securities in issue | 20,968 | 14,480 | 859 | 36,307 | 35,797 |  | 17,870 | 12,846 | 1,379 | 32,095 | 31,833
Subordinated liabilities | 1,065 | 1,161 | 187 | 2,413 | 2,033 |  | 1,129 | 10 | 1,598 | 2,737 | 2,386
| 22,033 | 35,824 | 213,339 | 271,196 | 269,628 |  | 18,999 | 35,584 | 209,086 | 263,669 | 263,572

The carrying value above of any financial assets and liabilities that are designated as hedged items in a portfolio (or macro) fair value hedge relationship excludes
gains and losses attributable to the hedged risk, as this is included as a separate line item on the balance sheet.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 199

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Valuation methodology for financial instruments carried at amortised cost
The valuation approach to specific categories of financial instruments is described below.
Assets:
Loans and advances to customers
The approach to estimating the fair value of loans and advances to customers has been determined by discounting expected cash flows to reflect either current
market rates or credit spreads relevant to the specific industry of the borrower. The determination of their fair values is an area of considerable estimation and
uncertainty as there is no observable market and values are significantly affected by customer behaviour.
i) Advances secured on residential property
The fair value of the mortgage portfolio is calculated by discounting contractual cash flows by different spreads for each LTV Band, after taking account of expected
customer prepayment rates. The spread is based on new business interest rates derived from publicly available competitor market information.
ii) Corporate loans
The determination of the fair values of performing loans is calculated by discounting the contractual cash flows and also deducting other costs relating to expected
credit losses, cost of capital, credit risk capital, operational risk capital, cost of funding and operating costs.
iii) Other loans
These consist of unsecured personal loans, credit cards, overdrafts and consumer (auto) finance. The weighted average lives of these portfolios are typically short
and relate to relatively new business. For unsecured personal loans and consumer (auto) finance loans, a small surplus or deficit has been recognised based on the
differential between existing portfolio margins and the current contractual interest rates.
Loans and advances to banks
These comprise secured loans, short-term placements with banks including collateral and unsettled financial transactions. The secured loans have been valued
based on a discounted spread for the term of the loans using valuation technique A as described above. The carrying amount of the other items is deemed a
reasonable approximation of their fair value, as the transactions are very short-term in duration.
Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading
The fair value of the reverse repurchase agreements - non trading has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above, using a spread appropriate to
the underlying collateral.
Other financial assets at amortised cost
These consist of asset-backed securities and debt securities. The asset-backed securities can be complex products and in some instances are valued with the
assistance of an independent, specialist valuation firm. These fair values are determined using industry-standard valuation techniques, including discounted
cash flow models. The inputs to these models used in these valuation techniques include quotes from market makers, prices of similar assets, adjustments for
differences in credit spreads, and additional quantitative and qualitative research. The debt security investments consist of a portfolio of government debt securities.
The fair value of this portfolio has been determined using quoted market prices.
Liabilities:
Deposits by customers
The majority of deposit liabilities are payable on demand and therefore can be deemed short-term in nature with the fair value equal to the carrying value. Certain
of the deposit liabilities are at a fixed rate until maturity. The deficit/surplus of fair value over carrying value of these liabilities has been estimated by reference to
the market rates available at the balance sheet date for similar deposit liabilities of similar maturities. The fair value of such deposit liabilities has been estimated
using valuation technique A as described above.
Deposits by banks
The fair value of deposits by banks, including repos, has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above, discounted at the appropriate credit spread.
Repurchase agreements - non-trading
The fair value of the repurchase agreements - non trading has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above, discounted at a spread appropriate
to the underlying collateral.
Debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities
Where reliable prices are available, the fair value of debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities has been calculated using quoted market prices. Where
reliable prices are not available, internal models have been used to determine fair values, which take into account, among other things, contract terms and
observable market data, which include such factors as interest rates, credit risk and exchange rates. In all cases, when it is not possible to derive a valuation for a
particular feature of an instrument, management uses judgement to determine the fair value of the particular feature. In exercising this judgement, a variety of
tools are used including proxy observable data.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 200

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

e) Fair values of financial instruments measured at fair value
The following tables summarise the fair values of the financial assets and liabilities accounted for at fair value at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024,
analysed by their levels in the fair value hierarchy - Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3.

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
|  | 2025 |  | 2024 |
|  | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total |  | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total | Valuation
|  | £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | technique
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | Exchange rate contracts | — | 671 | — | 671 |  | — | 978 | — | 978 | A
| Interest rate contracts | — | 1,078 | — | 1,078 |  | — | 1,675 | — | 1,675 | A & C
| Inflation rate contracts | — | 85 | — | 85 |  | — | 70 | — | 70 | A
| Equity and credit contracts | — | 64 | 30 | 94 |  | — | 89 | 35 | 124 | B & D
| Netting | — | (1,058) | — | (1,058) |  | — | (1,643) | — | (1,643) |
|  | — | 840 | 30 | 870 |  | — | 1,169 | 35 | 1,204 |
Other financial assets at FVTPL | Loans and advances to customers | — | — | 40 | 40 |  | — | — | 44 | 44 | A
| Debt securities and other debt instruments | — | — | 24 | 24 |  | — | 56 | 36 | 92 | A, B & D
|  | — | — | 64 | 64 |  | — | 56 | 80 | 136 |
Financial assets at FVOCI | Debt securities | 5,017 | 199 | — | 5,216 |  | 8,805 | 201 | 34 | 9,040 | D
|  | 5,017 | 199 | — | 5,216 |  | 8,805 | 201 | 34 | 9,040 |
Total assets at fair value |  | 5,017 | 1,039 | 94 | 6,150 |  | 8,805 | 1,426 | 149 | 10,380 |
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | Exchange rate contracts | — | 512 | — | 512 |  | — | 430 | — | 430 | A
| Interest rate contracts | — | 1,182 | — | 1,182 |  | — | 1,894 | — | 1,894 | A & C
| Inflation rate contracts | — | 30 | — | 30 |  | — | — | — | — | A
| Equity and credit contracts | — | 8 | 13 | 21 |  | — | 7 | 14 | 21 | B & D
| Netting | — | (1,058) | — | (1,058) |  | — | (1,643) | — | (1,643) |
|  | — | 674 | 13 | 687 |  | — | 688 | 14 | 702 |
Other financial liabilities at FVTPL | Debt securities in issue | — | 331 | — | 331 |  | — | 355 | — | 355 | A
| Structured deposits | — | 824 | — | 824 |  | — | 605 | — | 605 | A
| Zero Amortising Guaranteed Notes | — | 95 | — | 95 |  | — | 95 | — | 95 | D
|  | — | 1,250 | — | 1,250 |  | — | 1,055 | — | 1,055 |
Total liabilities at fair value |  | — | 1,924 | 13 | 1,937 |  | — | 1,743 | 14 | 1,757 |

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 201

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
|  | 2025 |  | 2024 |
|  | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total |  | Level 1 | Level 2 | Level 3 | Total | Valuation
|  | £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | technique
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | Exchange rate contracts | — | 771 | — | 771 |  | — | 1,243 | — | 1,243 | A
| Interest rate contracts | — | 1,075 | — | 1,075 |  | — | 1,685 | 3 | 1,688 | A & C
| Inflation rate contracts | — | 85 | — | 85 |  | — | 70 | — | 70 | A
| Equity and credit contracts | — | 64 | 30 | 94 |  | — | 89 | 35 | 124 | B & D
| Netting | — | (1,058) | — | (1,058) |  | — | (1,643) | — | (1,643) |
|  | — | 937 | 30 | 967 |  | — | 1,444 | 38 | 1,482 |
Other financial assets at FVTPL | Loans and advances to customers | — | — | 40 | 40 |  | — | — | 44 | 44 | A
| Debt securities and other debt instruments | — | — | — | — |  | — | 56 | — | 56 | C
|  | — | — | 40 | 40 |  | — | 56 | 44 | 100 |
Financial assets at FVOCI | Debt securities | 5,017 | 199 | — | 5,216 |  | 8,805 | 201 | 34 | 9,040 | D
|  | 5,017 | 199 | — | 5,216 |  | 8,805 | 201 | 34 | 9,040 |
Total assets at fair value |  | 5,017 | 1,136 | 70 | 6,223 |  | 8,805 | 1,701 | 116 | 10,622 |
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | Exchange rate contracts | — | 836 | — | 836 |  | — | 456 | — | 456 | A
| Interest rate contracts | — | 1,235 | 1,068 | 2,303 |  | — | 1,933 | 1,840 | 3,773 | A & C
| Inflation rate contracts | — | 30 | — | 30 |  | — | — | — | — | A
| Equity and credit contracts | — | 8 | 13 | 21 |  | — | 7 | 14 | 21 | B
| Netting | — | (1,058) | — | (1,058) |  | — | (1,643) | — | (1,643) |
|  | — | 1,051 | 1,081 | 2,132 |  | — | 753 | 1,854 | 2,607 |
Other financial liabilities at FVTPL | Debt securities in issue | — | 331 | — | 331 |  | — | 355 | — | 355 | A
| Structured deposits | — | 824 | — | 824 |  | — | 605 | — | 605 | A
| Zero Amortising Guaranteed Notes | — | 95 | — | 95 |  | — | 95 | — | 95 | D
|  | — | 1,250 | — | 1,250 |  | — | 1,055 | — | 1,055 |
Total liabilities at fair value |  | — | 2,301 | 1,081 | 3,382 |  | — | 1,808 | 1,854 | 3,662 |

Transfers between levels 1 and 2 of the fair value hierarchy
In 2025 and 2024, there were no significant transfers of financial instruments between levels 1 and 2 of the fair value hierarchy.
f) Fair value adjustments
The internal models incorporate assumptions that Santander UK believes would be made by a market participant to establish fair value. Fair value adjustments
are adopted when Santander UK considers that there are additional factors that would be considered by a market participant that are not incorporated in the
valuation model.
Santander UK classifies fair value adjustments as either ‘risk-related’ or ‘model-related’. The fair value adjustments form part of the portfolio fair value and are
included in the balance sheet values of the product types to which they have been applied.
The fair value adjustments are set out in the following table:

Group
| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Risk-related: |  |
- Bid-offer and trade specific adjustments | 9 | 6
- Uncertainty | 4 | 4
- Credit risk adjustment | 1 | 1
- Funding fair value adjustment | 1 | —
| 15 | 11

Company
| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Risk-related: |  |
- Bid-offer and trade specific adjustments | 9 | 8
- Uncertainty | 4 | 4
- Credit risk adjustment | 1 | 1
- Funding fair value adjustment | 1 | —
| 15 | 13

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 202

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Risk-related adjustments
Risk-related adjustments are driven, in part, by the magnitude of Santander UK’s market or credit risk exposure, and by external market factors, such as the size of
market spreads.
(i) Bid-offer and trade specific adjustments
Portfolios are marked at bid or offer, as appropriate. Valuation models will typically generate mid-market values. The bid-offer adjustment reflects the cost
that would be incurred if substantially all residual net portfolio market risks were closed using available hedging instruments or by disposing of or unwinding
the position. For debt securities, the bid-offer spread is based on a market price at an individual security level. For other products, the major risk types are identified.
For each risk type, the net portfolio risks are first classified into buckets, and then a bid-offer spread is applied to each risk bucket based upon the market bid-offer
spread for the relevant hedging instrument.
(ii) Uncertainty
Certain model inputs may be less readily determinable from market data, and/or the choice of model itself may be more subjective. In these circumstances, a
range of possible values exists that the financial instrument or market parameter may assume, and an adjustment may be needed to reflect the likelihood that
in estimating the fair value of the financial instrument, market participants would adopt more conservative values for uncertain parameters and/or model
assumptions than those used in the valuation model.
(iii) Credit risk adjustment
Credit risk adjustments comprise credit and debit valuation adjustments. The credit valuation adjustment (CVA) is an adjustment to the valuation of OTC derivative
contracts to reflect within fair value the possibility that the counterparty may default, and Santander UK may not receive the full market value of the transactions.
The debit valuation adjustment (DVA) is an adjustment to the valuation of the OTC derivative contracts to reflect within the fair value the possibility that Santander
UK may default, and that Santander UK may not pay full market value of the transactions.
Santander UK calculates a separate CVA and DVA for each Santander UK legal entity, and within each entity for each counterparty to which the entity has exposure.
Santander UK calculates the CVA by applying the probability of default of the counterparty to the expected positive exposure to the counterparty, and multiplying
the result by the loss expected in the event of default i.e. LGD. Conversely, Santander UK calculates the DVA by applying the PD of the Santander UK group, to the
expected positive exposure of the counterparty to Santander UK and multiplying the result by the LGD. Both calculations are performed over the life of the potential
exposure.
For most products Santander UK uses a simulation methodology to calculate the expected positive exposure to a counterparty. This incorporates a range of
potential exposures across the portfolio of transactions with the counterparty over the life of the portfolio. The simulation methodology includes credit mitigants
such as counterparty netting agreements and collateral agreements with the counterparty.
(iv) Funding fair value adjustment (FFVA)
The FFVA is an adjustment to the valuation of OTC derivative positions to include the net cost of funding uncollateralised derivative positions. This is calculated by
applying a suitable funding cost to the expected future funding exposure of any uncollateralised component of the OTC derivative portfolio.
Day One profit adjustments
Day One profit adjustments are adopted where the fair value estimated by a valuation model is based on one or more significant unobservable inputs. Day One
profit adjustments are calculated and reported on a portfolio basis.
The timing of recognition of deferred Day One profit and loss is determined individually. It is deferred until either the instrument’s fair value can be determined
using market observable inputs or is realised through settlement. The financial instrument is subsequently measured at fair value, adjusted for the deferred Day
One profit and loss. Subsequent changes in fair value are recognised immediately in the Income Statement without immediate reversal of deferred Day One profits
and losses.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 203

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

g) Internal models based on information other than market data (Level 3)
The table below provides an analysis of financial instruments valued using internal models based on information other than market data together with further
details on the valuation techniques used for each type of instrument. Each instrument is initially valued at transaction price:

|  |  |  |  |  | Group
|  |  | Balance sheet value |  | Fair value movements recognised in profit/(loss)
|  |  | 2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
Balance sheet line item | Category | Financial instrument product type | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
1. Derivative assets | Equity and credit contracts | Reversionary property interests | 30 | 35 |  | 1 | 6 | 12
2. FVTPL assets | Loans and advances to customers | Roll-up mortgage portfolio | 20 | 22 |  | (1) | (1) | (2)
3. FVTPL assets | Loans and advances to customers | Other loans | 20 | 22 |  | 2 | — | 4
4. FVTPL assets | Debt securities | Reversionary property securities | 24 | 36 |  | — | 2 | (3)
5. FVOCI assets | Debt Instruments | Other securities | — | 34 |  | — | — | —
|  |  | 94 | 149 |  | 2 | 7 | 11
Other Level 3 assets |  |  | — | — |  | — | — | (1)
Other Level 3 liabilities |  |  | (13) | (14) |  | 1 | (5) | (2)
Total net assets |  |  | 81 | 135 |  |  |  |
Total income/(expense) |  |  |  |  | 3 | 2 | 8

Valuation techniques (Group)
1. Derivative assets – Equity and credit contracts
These are valued using a probability weighted set of HPI forward prices, which are assumed to be a reasonable representation of the increase in value of the
Santander UK group’s reversionary interest portfolio underlying the derivatives. The probability used reflects the likelihood of the homeowner vacating the property
and is calculated from mortality rates and acceleration rates which are a function of age and gender, obtained from the relevant mortality tables. Indexing is felt
to be appropriate due to the size and geographical dispersion of the reversionary interest portfolio. These are determined using HPI Spot Rates adjusted to reflect
estimated forward growth. Non-seasonally adjusted (NSA) national and regional HPI are used in the valuation model to avoid any subjective judgement in the
adjustment process, which is made by Markit, which publishes the Halifax House Price Index.
The inputs used to determine the value of the reversionary property derivatives are HPI spot, HPI forward growth and mortality rates. The principal pricing
parameter is HPI forward growth.
2. FVTPL assets – Loans and advances to customers – roll-up mortgage portfolio
These represent roll-up mortgages (sometimes referred to as lifetime mortgages), which are an equity release scheme under which a property owner takes out a
loan secured against their home. The owner does not have to make any interest payments during their lifetime in which case the fixed interest payments are rolled
up into the mortgage. The loan or mortgage (capital and rolled-up interest) is repaid upon the owner’s vacation of the property, and the value of the loan is only
repaid from the value of the property. This is known as a ‘no negative equity guarantee’. Santander UK suffers a loss if the sale proceeds from the property are
insufficient to repay the loan, as it is unable to pursue the homeowner’s estate or beneficiaries for the shortfall.
The value of the mortgage ‘rolls up’ or accretes until the owner vacates the property. In order to value the roll-up mortgages, Santander UK uses a probability-
weighted set of European option prices (puts) determined using the Black-Scholes model, in which the ‘no negative equity guarantee’ are valued as short put
options. The probability weighting applied is calculated from mortality rates and acceleration rates as a function of age and gender, taken from mortality tables.
The inputs used to determine the value of these instruments are HPI spot, HPI forward growth, HPI volatility, mortality rates and repayment rates. The principal
pricing parameter is HPI forward growth. The HPI forward growth rate used is unobservable and is the same as used in the valuation of Instrument 1 above. The
other parameters do not have a significant effect on the value of the instruments.
3. FVTPL assets – Loans and advances to customers – other loans
These relate to loans to transport and education companies. The fair value of these loans is estimated using the ‘present value’ model based on a credit curve
derived from current market spreads. Loan specific credit data is unobservable, so a proxy population is applied based on industry sector and credit rating.
4. FVTPL assets – Debt securities
These consist of reversionary property securities and are an equity release scheme, where the property owner receives an upfront lump sum in return for paying a
fixed percentage of the sales proceeds of the property when the owner vacates the property. These reversionary property securities are valued using a probability-
weighted set of HPI forward prices which are assumed to be a reasonable representation of the increase in value of Santander UK’s reversionary interest portfolio
underlying the derivatives. The probability weighting used reflects the probability of the homeowner vacating the property through death or moving into care and is
calculated from mortality rates and acceleration factors which are a function of age and gender, obtained from the relevant mortality table.
The inputs used to determine the value of these instruments are HPI spot, HPI forward growth and mortality rates. The principal pricing parameter is HPI forward
growth. Discussion of the HPI spot rate, HPI forward growth rate and mortality rates for this financial instrument is the same as Instrument 1 above. An adjustment
is also made to reflect the specific property risk. Specific property risk is from the difference between the specific properties in the portfolio, and the average price as
expressed in the regionally weighted house price index.
5. FVOCI assets – Debt instruments
These consist of asset-back securities where third-party prices are not available or reliable. The fair value is estimated using market standard cash flow models with
input parameter assumptions which include prepayment speeds, default rates, discount margins derived from comparable securities with similar vintage, collateral
type, and credit ratings.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 204

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  | Company
|  |  | Balance sheet value |  | Fair value movements recognised in profit/(loss)
2025 | 2024 |  | 2025 | 2024 | 2023
Balance sheet line item | Category | Financial instrument product type | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
1. Derivative assets | Interest rate contracts | Securitisation swaps | — | 3 |  | — | (131) | 131
2. Derivative asset | Equity and credit contracts | Reversionary property interests | 30 | 35 |  | 1 | 6 | 12
3. FVTPL Assets | Loans and advances to customers | Roll-up mortgage portfolio | 20 | 22 |  | (1) | (1) | (2)
4. FVTPL Assets | Loans and advances to customers | Other loans | 20 | 22 |  | 2 | — | 4
5. FVOCI Assets | Debt securities | Other securities | — | 34 |  | — | — | —
6. Derivative liabilities | Interest rate contracts | Securitisation swaps | (1,068) | (1,840) |  | 772 | (749) | (61)
|  |  | (998) | (1,724) |  | 774 | (875) | 84
Other Level 3 assets |  |  | — | — |  | — | — | 4
Other Level 3 liabilities |  |  | (13) | (14) |  | 1 | (5) | (6)
Total net assets | (1,011) | (1,738) |  |  |  |
Total (expense)/income |  |  |  |  |  | 775 | (880) | 82

Valuation techniques (Company)
1 & 6. Derivative assets / liabilities - Interest rate contracts
For covered pool swap and securitisation funding swap models, the valuation is created using internal prepayment speeds and rate projections to estimate future
mortgage flows which are subsequently discounted using net present value techniques based upon current market levels.
2. Derivative assets – Equity and credit contracts
See Group valuation technique 1.
3. FVTPL assets – Loans and advances to customers – roll-up mortgage portfolio
See Group valuation technique 2.
4 & 5. FVTPL assets – Loans and advances to customers – other loans/debt securities
See Group valuation technique 3 & 4.
Reconciliation of fair value measurement in Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy
The following table sets out the movements in Level 3 financial instruments in 2025 and 2024:

|  |  |  |  |  | Group |
| Assets |  | Liabilities
| Derivatives | Other financial assets at FVTPL | Financial assets at FVOCI | Total |  | Derivatives | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 35 | 80 | 34 | 149 |  | (14) | (14)
Total gains/(losses) recognised: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Fair value movements 1 | 1 | 1 | — | 2 |  | 1 | 1
Transfers out | — | — | (32) | (32) |  | — | —
Settlements | (6) | (17) | (2) | (25) |  | — | —
At 31 December 2025 | 30 | 64 | — | 94 |  | (13) | (13)
Gains recognised in profit or loss/other comprehensive income relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year 1 | 1 | 1 | — | 2 |  | 1 | 1

At 1 January 2024 | 36 | 95 | — | 131 |  | (10) | (10)
Total gains/(losses) recognised: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Fair value movements 1 | 6 | 1 | — | 7 |  | (5) | (5)
Purchases | — | — | 34 | 34 |  | — | —
Settlements | (7) | (16) | — | (23) |  | 1 | 1
At 31 December 2024 | 35 | 80 | 34 | 149 |  | (14) | (14)
Gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss/other comprehensive income relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year 1 | 6 | 1 | — | 7 |  | (5) | (5)

1 Fair value movements relating to derivatives and other financial assets at FVTPL are recognised in other operating income in the income statement.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 205

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
|  |  |  | Assets |  | Liabilities
| Derivatives | Other financial assets at FVTPL | Financial assets at FVOCI | Total |  | Derivatives | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m
At 1 January 2025 | 38 | 44 | 34 | 116 |  | (1,854) | (1,854)
Total gains/(losses) recognised: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Fair value movements 1 | 1 | 1 | — | 2 |  | 773 | 773
Transfers out | — | — | (32) | (32) |  | — | —
Settlements | (9) | (5) | (2) | (16) |  | — | —
At 31 December 2025 | 30 | 40 | — | 70 |  | (1,081) | (1,081)
Gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss/other comprehensive income relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year 1 | 1 | 1 | — | 2 |  | 773 | 773

At 1 January 2024 | 168 | 46 | — | 214 |  | (1,080) | (1,080)
Total gains/(losses) recognised: |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Fair value movements 1 | (125) | (1) | — | (126) |  | (754) | (754)
Purchases | 2 | — | 34 | 36 |  | (22) | (22)
Settlements | (7) | (1) | — | (8) |  | 2 | 2
At 31 December 2024 | 38 | 44 | 34 | 116 |  | (1,854) | (1,854)
(Losses) recognised in profit or loss/other comprehensive income relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year 1 | (125) | (1) | — | (126) |  | (754) | (754)

1 Fair value movements relating to derivatives and other financial assets at FVTPL are recognised in other operating income in the income statement. Fair value movements relating to financial assets at FVOCI are
recognised in the movement in fair value reserve (debt instruments). Derivative fair value movements comprise unrealised fair value losses of £177m (2024: £1,950m) and coupon settlements of £950m (2024:
£1,196m).

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 206

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Effect of changes in significant unobservable assumptions to reasonably possible alternatives (Level 3)
As discussed above, the fair value of financial instruments are, in certain circumstances, measured using valuation techniques that incorporate assumptions that are
not evidenced by prices from observable current market transactions in the same instrument and are not based on observable market data and, as such require the
application of a degree of judgement. Changing one or more of the inputs to the valuation models to reasonably possible alternative assumptions would change the
fair values significantly. The following table shows the sensitivity of these fair values to reasonably possible alternative assumptions.
Favourable and unfavourable changes are determined on the basis of changes in the value of the instrument as a result of varying the levels of the unobservable
input as described in the table below. The potential effects do not take into effect any hedged positions.

|  |  |  | Company
|  | Significant unobservable input |  | Sensitivity
|  |  | Assumption value |  | Favourable changes | Unfavourable changes
| Fair value |  |  | Weighted average |
2025 | £m | Assumption description | Range 1 | Shift | £m | £m
1. Derivative liabilities - Interest rate contracts: | (1,068) | Weighted Average Mortgage Rate Payable | 2% - 7% | 4% | 0.5% | 345 | (345)
– Securitisation swaps |  |  |  |  |  |
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |
1. Derivative assets – Interest rate contracts: | 3 | Weighted Average Mortgage Rate Payable | 5% - 6% | 5% | 0.5% | 20 | (20)
– Securitisation swaps |  |  |  |  |  |
2. Derivative liabilities - Interest rate contracts: | (1,840) | Weighted Average Mortgage Rate Payable | 2% - 7% | 4% | 0.5% | 384 | (384)
– Securitisation swaps |  |  |  |  |  |

1 The range of actual assumption values used to calculate the weighted average disclosure.
h) Maturities of financial liabilities and off-balance sheet commitments
The table below analyses the maturities of the undiscounted cash flows relating to financial liabilities and off-balance sheet commitments of Santander UK based
on the remaining period to the contractual maturity date at the balance sheet date. Deposits by customers largely consist of retail deposits. This table is not
intended to show the liquidity of Santander UK .

|  |  |  |  |  | Group
| On demand | Not later than 3 months | Later than 3 months and not later than 1 year | Later than 1 year and not later than 5 years | Later than 5 years | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Financial liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | — | 77 | 104 | 452 | 134 | 767
Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss | — | 172 | 114 | 707 | 438 | 1,431
Deposits by customers | 177,747 | 4,072 | 2,818 | 2,612 | 238 | 187,487
Deposits by banks | 696 | 726 | 969 | 3,299 | 1,668 | 7,358
Repurchase agreements – non trading | — | 6,584 | 2,524 | — | — | 9,108
Debt securities in issue | — | 6,677 | 3,166 | 27,747 | 11,462 | 49,052
Subordinated liabilities | — | 33 | 98 | 621 | 2,623 | 3,375
Lease liabilities | — | — | 21 | 46 | 14 | 81
Total financial liabilities | 178,443 | 18,341 | 9,814 | 35,484 | 16,577 | 258,659
Off-balance sheet commitments given | 3,757 | 22,766 | 1,330 | 7,602 | 3,366 | 38,821
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |
Financial liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | — | 165 | 136 | 317 | 173 | 791
Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss | 10 | 3 | 135 | 556 | 524 | 1,228
Deposits by customers | 169,285 | 3,487 | 4,004 | 4,451 | 355 | 181,582
Deposits by banks | 1,352 | 1,561 | 7,618 | 4,459 | — | 14,990
Repurchase agreements – non trading | — | 7,894 | 762 | — | — | 8,656
Debt securities in issue | — | 5,907 | 1,959 | 26,332 | 7,761 | 41,959
Subordinated liabilities | — | 27 | 628 | 332 | 1,895 | 2,882
Lease liabilities | — | — | 28 | 58 | 17 | 103
Total financial liabilities | 170,647 | 19,044 | 15,270 | 36,505 | 10,725 | 252,191
Off-balance sheet commitments given | 4,007 | 19,088 | 916 | 8,391 | 3,247 | 35,649

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 207

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  | Company
| On demand | Not later than 3 months | Later than 3 months and not later than 1 year | Later than 1 year and not later than 5 years | Later than 5 years | Total
2025 | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Financial liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | — | 121 | 120 | 720 | 1,657 | 2,618
Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss | — | 172 | 114 | 707 | 438 | 1,431
Deposits by customers | 200,560 | 4,350 | 2,487 | 4,293 | 247 | 211,937
Deposits by banks | 6,011 | 632 | 719 | 2,764 | 1,667 | 11,793
Repurchase agreements – non trading | — | 6,584 | 2,524 | — | — | 9,108
Debt securities in issue | — | 6,628 | 2,748 | 26,712 | 5,284 | 41,372
Subordinated liabilities | — | 24 | 71 | 540 | 2,522 | 3,157
Lease liabilities | — | — | 19 | 42 | 10 | 71
Total financial liabilities | 206,571 | 18,511 | 8,802 | 35,778 | 11,825 | 281,487
Off-balance sheet commitments given | 8,328 | 22,775 | 1,364 | 8,021 | 3,366 | 43,854
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |
Financial liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial instruments | — | 159 | 135 | 387 | 2,577 | 3,258
Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss | 10 | 3 | 135 | 556 | 524 | 1,228
Deposits by customers | 188,933 | 3,780 | 4,173 | 4,089 | 910 | 201,885
Deposits by banks | 6,880 | 1,561 | 7,618 | 4,459 | — | 20,518
Repurchase agreements – non trading | — | 7,894 | 762 | — | — | 8,656
Debt securities in issue | — | 5,865 | 1,535 | 25,575 | 3,548 | 36,523
Subordinated liabilities | — | 27 | 628 | 332 | 1,895 | 2,882
Lease liabilities | — | — | 27 | 56 | 12 | 95
Total financial liabilities | 195,823 | 19,289 | 15,013 | 35,454 | 9,466 | 275,045
Off-balance sheet commitments given | 8,730 | 19,104 | 916 | 8,837 | 3,246 | 40,833

As the above table is based on contractual maturities, no account is taken of call features related to subordinated liabilities. In addition, the repayment terms of debt
securities may be accelerated in line with relevant covenants. Further, no account is taken of the possible early repayment of Santander UK’s mortgage-backed non-
recourse finance which is redeemed by Santander UK as funds become available from redemptions of the residential mortgages. Santander UK has no control over
the timing and amount of redemptions of residential mortgages.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 208

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

39. OFFSETTING FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
The following table shows the impact of netting arrangements on:
– All financial assets and liabilities that are reported net on the balance sheet
– All derivative financial instruments and repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing agreements that are subject to enforceable master netting
arrangements or similar agreements, but do not qualify for balance sheet netting.
The table identifies the amounts that have been offset in the balance sheet and those amounts that are covered by enforceable netting arrangements (offsetting
arrangements and financial collateral) but do not qualify for netting under the requirements described above.
For derivative contracts, the ‘Financial instruments’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as
the ISDA Master Agreement or derivative exchange or clearing counterparty agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can
be offset and close-out netting applied across all outstanding transactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.
Financial collateral refers to cash and non-cash collateral obtained, typically daily or weekly, to cover the net exposure between counterparties by enabling the
collateral to be realised in an event of default or if other predetermined events occur. For repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured
lending and borrowing, the ‘Financial instruments’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as
global master repurchase agreements and global master securities lending agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can
be offset and close-out netting applied across all outstanding transactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.
Financial collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which are legally transferred and can be liquidated if a counterparty defaults.
Santander UK engages in a variety of counterparty credit mitigation strategies in addition to netting and collateral arrangements. Therefore, the net amounts
presented in the tables below do not represent Santander UK’s total credit exposure.

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Group
| Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements | Assets not subject to enforceable netting arrangements 2 |
| Effects of offsetting on balance sheet |  | Related amounts not offset |
| Gross amounts | Amounts offset | Net amounts on balance sheet |  | Financial instruments | Financial collateral 1 | Net amount | Balance sheet total 3
2025 | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial assets | 1,890 | (1,058) | 832 |  | (415) | (370) | 47 | 38 | 870
Reverse repurchase, securities borrowing & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 20,967 | (3,289) | 17,678 |  | (1,167) | (16,511) | — | — | 17,678
Loans and advances to customers and banks⁴ | 3,959 | (588) | 3,371 |  | — | — | 3,371 | 200,286 | 203,657
| 26,816 | (4,935) | 21,881 |  | (1,582) | (16,881) | 3,418 | 200,324 | 222,205
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial liabilities | 1,731 | (1,058) | 673 |  | (415) | (182) | 76 | 14 | 687
Repurchase, securities lending & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 12,318 | (3,289) | 9,029 |  | (1,167) | (7,862) | — | — | 9,029
Deposits by customers and banks⁴ | 588 | (588) | — |  | — | — | — | 193,928 | 193,928
| 14,637 | (4,935) | 9,702 |  | (1,582) | (8,044) | 76 | 193,942 | 203,644
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial assets | 2,799 | (1,643) | 1,156 |  | (407) | (711) | 38 | 48 | 1,204
Reverse repurchase, securities borrowing & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 16,175 | (5,837) | 10,338 |  | (63) | (10,275) | — | — | 10,338
Loans and advances to customers and banks⁴ | 5,421 | (635) | 4,786 |  | — | — | 4,786 | 195,654 | 200,440
| 24,395 | (8,115) | 16,280 |  | (470) | (10,986) | 4,824 | 195,702 | 211,982
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial liabilities | 2,325 | (1,643) | 682 |  | (407) | (127) | 148 | 20 | 702
Repurchase, securities lending & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 14,454 | (5,837) | 8,617 |  | (63) | (8,554) | — | — | 8,617
Deposits by customers and banks⁴ | 635 | (635) | — |  | — | — | — | 194,960 | 194,960
| 17,414 | (8,115) | 9,299 |  | (470) | (8,681) | 148 | 194,980 | 204,279

1 Financial collateral is reflected at its fair value but has been limited to the net balance sheet exposure so as not to include any over-collateralisation.
2 This column includes contractual rights of set-off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.
3 The balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and ‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.
4 The amounts offset within loans and advances to customers/banks or deposits by customers/banks relate to offset mortgages which are classified as either and that are subject to netting.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 209

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

|  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  | Company
| Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements | Assets not subject to enforceable netting arrangements 2 |
| Effects of offsetting on balance sheet |  | Related amounts not offset |
| Gross amounts | Amounts offset | Net amounts on balance sheet |  | Financial instruments | Financial collateral 1 | Net amount | Balance sheet total 3
2025 | £m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial assets | 1,987 | (1,058) | 929 |  | (514) | (370) | 45 | 38 | 967
Reverse repurchase, securities borrowing & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 20,967 | (3,289) | 17,678 |  | (1,167) | (16,511) | — | — | 17,678
Loans and advances to customers and banks 4 | 3,959 | (588) | 3,371 |  | — | — | 3,371 | 220,086 | 223,457
| 26,913 | (4,935) | 21,978 |  | (1,681) | (16,881) | 3,416 | 220,124 | 242,102
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial liabilities | 3,177 | (1,058) | 2,119 |  | (514) | (182) | 1,423 | 13 | 2,132
Repurchase, securities lending & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 12,318 | (3,289) | 9,029 |  | (1,167) | (7,862) | — | — | 9,029
Deposits by customers and banks 4 | 588 | (588) | — |  | — | — | — | 222,769 | 222,769
| 16,083 | (4,935) | 11,148 |  | (1,681) | (8,044) | 1,423 | 222,782 | 233,930
2024 |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial assets | 3,078 | (1,643) | 1,435 |  | (686) | (711) | 38 | 47 | 1,482
Reverse repurchase, securities borrowing & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 16,175 | (5,837) | 10,338 |  | (63) | (10,275) | — | — | 10,338
Loans and advances to customers and banks 4 | 5,421 | (635) | 4,786 |  | — | — | 4,786 | 213,920 | 218,706
| 24,674 | (8,115) | 16,559 |  | (749) | (10,986) | 4,824 | 213,967 | 230,526
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Derivative financial liabilities | 4,230 | (1,643) | 2,587 |  | (686) | (127) | 1,774 | 20 | 2,607
Repurchase, securities lending & similar agreements: |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
– Amortised cost | 14,454 | (5,837) | 8,617 |  | (63) | (8,554) | — | — | 8,617
Deposits by customers and banks 4 | 635 | (635) | — |  | — | — | — | 220,736 | 220,736
| 19,319 | (8,115) | 11,204 |  | (749) | (8,681) | 1,774 | 220,756 | 231,960

1 Financial collateral is reflected at its fair value but has been limited to the net balance sheet exposure so as not to include any over-collateralisation.
2 This column includes contractual rights of set-off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.
3 The balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and ‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.
4 The amounts offset within loans and advances to customers/banks or deposits by customers/banks relate to offset mortgages which are classified as either and that are subject to netting.
40. ASSETS HELD FOR SALE
Sale of property
The sale of the whole of Santander House, Milton Keynes is expected to complete in 2026. As such, the Santander UK group classified Santander House, which is
included in the Corporate Centre segment and carried at the sales price, as held for sale.
At 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024, assets held for sale comprised:

| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Assets |  |
Property, plant and equipment | 18 | 12
| 18 | 12

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 210

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

41. EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE
There have been no significant events between 31 December 2025 and the date of approval of these financial statements which would require a change to or
additional disclosure in the financial statements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 211

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Shareholder information

In this section |
Subsidiaries and related undertakings | 212
Forward-looking statements | 214
Alternative Performance Measures (APMs) | 215
Glossary | 216
Risk factors | 217
Regulation of the Santander UK group | 234
Articles of Association | 236
Board of Directors | 237
New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) Corporate Governance | 241
Additional balance sheet and cash flow analysis | 244
Other information | 242
Glossary of financial services industry terms | 252
Disclosure pursuant to Section 219 of the Iran Threat Reduction and Syria Human Rights Act (ITRA) | 258
Cross-reference to Form 20-F | 259

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 212

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Subsidiaries and related undertakings (audited)
In accordance with Section 409 of the Companies Act 2006, details of the Company’s subsidiaries and related undertakings at 31 December 2025 are set out below.
This section forms an integral part of the financial statements.
Subsidiaries
All subsidiaries are owned 100% and consolidated by Santander UK.
Incorporated and registered in England and Wales:

| Registered office 1 | Direct/Indirect ownership | Share class through which ownership is held | Proportion of ownership interest
Name of subsidiary | %
2 & 3 Triton Limited (In Liquidation) | E | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Abbey National Nominees Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Abbey National Property Investments | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Alliance & Leicester Personal Finance Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Cater Allen Limited | A | Indirect | Ordinary £1 | —
First National Tricity Finance Limited | A | Indirect | Ordinary £1 | —

Navigator Global Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | —
Santander Asset Finance plc | A | Direct | Ordinary £0.10 | 100
Santander Cards Limited | A | Indirect | Ordinary £1 | —
Santander Cards UK Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Santander Consumer (UK) plc | B | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Santander Consumer Credit Services Limited | A | Indirect | Ordinary £1 | —
Santander Estates Limited | F | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Santander Global Consumer Finance Limited | A | Indirect | Ordinary £0.0001 | —
Santander Guarantee Company (In Liquidation) | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Santander Lending Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Santander Private Banking UK Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Santander UK Operations Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100
Santander UK (Structured Solutions) Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £0.01 | 100
|  |  | Preference £0.01 | 100
Santander UK Technology Limited | A | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100

1 Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address.
Incorporated and registered outside England and Wales:

| Registered office 1 |  | Share class through which ownership is held | Proportion of ownership interest
Name of subsidiary | %
Santander Cards Ireland Limited | H | Indirect | Ordinary €1 | 100
|  |  | Ordinary €1.27 | 100
Santander ISA Managers Limited | G | Direct | Ordinary £1 | 100

1 Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address, including the country.
Subsidiaries benefitting from an audit exemption according to section 479A of the Companies Act 2006

Name of subsidiary | Company number
Santander Estates Limited | 02304569
Santander Global Consumer Finance Limited | 00048468
Santander UK Operations Limited | 04137550
Santander UK Technology Limited | 05212726
Santander Private Banking UK Limited | 02582000

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 213

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Other subsidiary undertakings
All entities are registered in England and Wales except for Motor Securities 2018-1 Designated Activity Company which is registered in Ireland.
The Company and its subsidiaries do not own directly, or indirectly, any of the share capital of any of the entities, however they are consolidated by the Santander
UK group because the substance of the relationship indicates control, as described in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

| Registered |  | Registered
Name of entity | office 1 | Name of entity | office 1
Abbey Covered Bonds (Holdings) Limited | D | Holmes Funding Limited | A
Abbey Covered Bonds (LM) Limited | D | Holmes Holdings Limited | A
Abbey Covered Bonds LLP | A | Holmes Master Issuer plc | A
Fosse (Master Issuer) Holdings Limited | C | Holmes Trustees Limited | A
Fosse Funding (No.1) Limited | C | MAC No.1 Limited | A
Fosse Master Issuer plc | C | Repton 2023-1 Limited | C
Fosse Trustee (UK) Limited | A |  |

1 Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address.
Related undertakings
All of these entities, which are registered in England and Wales, are accounted for by the equity method of accounting, with 50% ownership being held.

| Registered office 1 | Direct/ Indirect ownership | Share class through which ownership is held | Proportion of ownership interest
Name of entity | %
Hyundai Capital UK Limited | I | Indirect | Ordinary £1 | —
Volvo Car Financial Services UK Limited | J | Indirect | Ordinary £1 | —

1 Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address.
Overseas branches
The Company has no overseas branches.
Key of registered office addresses

A | 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN |  |
B | Santander House, 86 Station Road, Redhill RH1 1SR |  |
C | 1 Bartholomew Lane, London EC2V 2AX |  |
D | Wilmington Trust SP Services (London) Limited, 1 Kings Arms Yard, London EC2R 7AF |  |
E | Griffins Tavistock House North, Tavistock Square, London, WC1H 9HR |  |
F | Carlton Park, Narborough, Leicester LE19 0AL |  |
G | 287 St. Vincent Street, Glasgow, Scotland G2 5NB |  |
H | 3 Dublin Landings, North Wall Quay, Dublin 1, Ireland |  |
I | London Court, 39 London Road, Reigate RH2 9AQ |  |
J | Scandinavia House, Norreys Drive, Maidenhead, Berkshire SL6 4FL |  |

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 214

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Forward-looking statements
The Company and its subsidiaries (together Santander UK) may from time to time make written or oral forward-looking statements. The Company makes written
forward-looking statements in this Annual Report and may also make forward-looking statements in its periodic reports to the SEC on Forms 20-F and 6-K, in its
offering circulars and prospectuses, in press releases and other written materials and in oral statements made by its officers, directors or employees to third parties.
Examples of such forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to:
– projections or expectations of revenues, costs, profit or (loss), earnings or (loss) per share, dividends, capital structure or other financial items or ratios
– statements of plans, objectives or goals of Santander UK or its management, including those related to products or services
– statements of future economic performance, and
– statements of assumptions underlying such statements.
Words such as ‘believes’, ‘anticipates’, ‘expects’, ‘intends’, ‘aims’, ‘plans’, ‘targets’ and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements, but
are not the exclusive means of identifying such statements.
By their very nature, forward-looking statements are not statements of historical or current facts; they cannot be objectively verified, are speculative and involve
inherent risks and uncertainties, both general and specific, and risks exist that the predictions, forecasts, projections and other forward-looking statements will not
be achieved. Santander UK cautions readers that a number of important factors could cause actual results to differ materially from the plans, objectives,
expectations, estimates and intentions expressed in such forward-looking statements made by Santander UK or on its behalf. Some of these factors, which could
affect Santander UK’s business, financial condition and/or results of operations, are considered in detail in the Risk review, and include:
– the effects of UK economic conditions and disruptions in the global economy and global financial markets
– the effects of the UK’s withdrawal from the European Union
– the effects of climate change
– the effects of competition from other financial institutions, including new entrants into the financial services sector
– Santander UK’s ability to maintain its competitive position depending, in part, on the success of new products and services Santander UK offers its customers and
its ability to continue offering products and services from third parties
– the extent to which Santander UK’s loan portfolio is subject to risk of prepayment
– the risk of damage to Santander UK's reputation
– the risk that Santander UK is unable to manage the growth of its operations
– the extent to which regulatory capital, liquidity and leverage requirements, and any changes to these requirements may affect Santander UK
– liquidity constraints and Santander UK’s ability to access funding on acceptable financial terms
– the effects of an adverse movement in external credit ratings assigned to Santander UK or any of its debt securities
– the effects of any changes in the pension liabilities and obligations of Santander UK
– the effects of fluctuations in interest rates and other market risks
– the extent to which Santander UK may be required to record negative changes in positions recorded at fair value for its financial assets due to changes in market
conditions
– Santander UK’s ability to control the level of non-performing or poor credit quality loans and whether Santander UK’s loan loss reserves are sufficient to cover
loan losses
– the risk that the value of the collateral, including real estate, securing Santander UK’s loans may not be sufficient and that Santander UK may be unable to realise
the full value of the collateral securing its loan portfolio
– the effects of the financial services laws, regulations, government oversight, administrative actions and policies and any changes thereto in each location or
market in which Santander UK operates
– the risk that Santander UK may become subject to the provisions of the Banking Act 2009, including the bail-in and write-down powers thereunder
– the effects of any failure to comply with laws and regulations relating to anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, anti-bribery and corruption, sanctions, fraud and
preventing the facilitation of tax evasion, or the risk of any failure to prevent, detect or deter any illegal or improper activities
– the effects of taxation (and any changes to tax) in each location in which Santander UK operates
– Santander UK’s exposure to any risk of loss and damage from civil litigation and/or criminal legal and regulatory proceedings
– the risk of failing to successfully apply or to improve Santander UK’s credit risk management systems
– the risk that Santander UK’s data management policies and procedures are not sufficiently robust
– the effect of cybersecurity on Santander UK’s business
– the risks related to the developing fields of artificial intelligence and machine learning
– the risks arising from any non-compliance with Santander UK’s regulations, policies, from any employee misconduct, human error, negligence and deliberate acts
of harm or dishonesty, including fraud
– the risk of failing to effectively manage changes in Santander UK’s information technology infrastructure and management information systems in a timely
manner
– Santander UK’s exposure to unidentified or unanticipated risks despite its risk management policies, procedures and methods and Santander UK’s exposure to
risks related to errors in its risk modelling
– the risks arising from Santander UK’s reliance on third parties for important infrastructure support, products and services
– the ability of Santander UK to recruit, retain and develop appropriate senior management and skilled personnel
– the effects of any inaccuracy within the judgements and accounting estimates which underpin aspects of the financial statements, and the consequent risk of any
material misstatement of Santander UK’s financial results
– the effect of any change in accounting standards.
Please refer to our latest filings with the SEC (including, without limitation, the Risk Factors section in this Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31
December 2025) for a discussion of certain risk factors and forward-looking statements. Undue reliance should not be placed on forward-looking statements when
making decisions with respect to any Santander UK member and/or its securities. Investors and others should take into account the inherent risks and uncertainties
of forward-looking statements and should carefully consider the foregoing non-exhaustive list of important factors. Forward-looking statements speak only as of
the date on which they are made and are based on the knowledge, information available and views taken on the date on which they are made; such knowledge,
information and views may change at any time. Santander UK does not undertake any obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statement, whether as a
result of new information, future events or otherwise.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 215

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)
In addition to the financial information prepared under IFRS, this Annual Report contains non-IFRS financial measures that constitute APMs, as defined in European
Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA) guidelines. The financial measures contained in this Annual Report that qualify as APMs have been calculated using the
financial information of the Santander UK group but are not defined or detailed in the applicable financial information framework or under IFRS.
A description of the Santander UK group’s APMs and their calculation, is set out below.

APM | Description and calculation
Non-interest income | Net fee and commission income plus other operating income.
Stage 1 ratio | Sum of Stage 1 drawn assets divided by the sum of total drawn assets.
Stage 2 ratio | Sum of Stage 2 drawn assets divided by the sum of total drawn assets.
Stage 3 ratio | Sum of Stage 3 drawn and undrawn assets divided by the sum of total drawn assets and Stage 3 undrawn assets.
Wholesale funding | Deposits by customers reported in Corporate Centre, debt securities in issue, subordinated liabilities, AT1 issuance and Central Bank facilities, TFSME and indexed-long term repos used for funding.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 216

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Glossary
Our glossary of industry and other main terms is available on our website: santander.co.uk/uk/about-santander-uk/investor-relations-glossary.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 217

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Risk factors
An investment in Santander UK plc (the Company) and its subsidiaries (us, we or Santander UK) involves a number of risks, the material ones of which are set out
below.
Geopolitical and macroeconomic risks
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects are materially impacted by economic conditions in the UK and disruptions in the global
economy and global financial markets
Santander UK’s business activities are concentrated in the UK, where it offers a range of banking and financial products and services to UK retail and corporate
customers. As a consequence, Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects are significantly affected by general economic and political conditions
in the UK.
The UK economy improved at the start of 2025 after a slow second half in 2024, which had been driven, in part, by uncertainty surrounding the UK Government’s
Autumn Budget, which reduced confidence. However, the economy has been subject to volatile events such as additional tariffs imposed by the US and higher costs
to businesses resulting from increases in the minimum wage and employer National Insurance Contributions. As such, there remains a risk that the UK economy will
see lower growth in 2026 with interest rates falling less quickly than expected as inflation remains persistent, Brexit continuing to impact exports and geopolitical
events disrupting markets and lowering business and household confidence. Interest rates have risen sharply since 2022 and although interest rates have started to
decrease, there remains a risk that increases will be needed in the future and in particular there remains a risk that increases will be needed if rising inflation
returns. This would put further pressure on household finances for some of Santander UK's customers due to a sharp rise of the costs, or a continuation of higher
costs for refinancing their mortgage or a continuation of these higher costs and significantly higher costs of borrowing overall. Continued higher mortgage rates
could also dampen demand in the housing market, leading to further drops in new business or steeper falls in house prices, reducing the value of the collateral
Santander UK holds against mortgages. These risks could create further downward pressure on the economy; for example: a large surge in business failures with
knock-on effects for the labour market resulting in high rates of unemployment that affect the ability of customers to pay their debts, which could also contribute to
negative multiplier effects through delayed investment and spending; and a stronger push towards protectionism as governments look to protect home industries.
This could also lead to a longer-term turn in the credit cycle with a broader contraction of credit as lenders attempt to protect themselves from increased losses. In
addition, the UK economy and banking sector are impacted by the political environment and related government policy. For example, there has been an increase in
business costs as a result of increased contributions for employer's National Insurance, which will impact Santander UK's customers and the wider economy.
In particular, Santander UK faces, among others, the following risks in any period of economic uncertainty (including the effect of those risks on gross domestic
product, inflation, unemployment and house prices):
– Reduced demand for Santander UK’s products and services – particularly the potential for reduced mortgage market volumes.
– Inability of Santander UK’s borrowers to make payments on their loans in full or on time.
– The degree of uncertainty concerning economic conditions may adversely affect the accuracy of Santander UK’s estimates, which may, in turn, impact the
reliability of the IFRS 9 model and process to determine the sufficiency of Santander UK’s loan loss allowances.
– Lower house or other asset prices, reducing the value of collateral Santander UK holds on mortgage and other lending.
– Higher and more persistent inflation, reducing Santander UK’s profitability and increasing the cost of living for Santander UK's borrowers.
– The value and liquidity of the portfolio of investment securities that Santander UK holds may be adversely affected.
Santander UK is also exposed to:
– Broader geopolitical issues, which remain heightened with the potential for a further pushback against globalism. Further moves towards unilateralism may also
cause increased tension and/or hostilities between nations, which could negatively impact the global economy and financial markets;
– The continuation or escalation of conflicts between Russia and Ukraine, and in Israel, Iran and the Middle East, including the spread of these conflicts to other
countries in these regions, and/or the emergence of future regional conflicts and wars with global impact, could lead to further increases in energy prices (in
particular, gas prices, if supplies to Europe remain interrupted), add to inflationary pressures and lead to broader UK sanctions on states, companies or individuals
involved in these conflicts;
– US political risks and possible impacts of the current administration, including increased deregulation leading to increased investor focus on UK banking sector
profitability and increased competitive pressures on non-US banks such as Santander UK, the imposition of new tariffs, increases in existing tariffs, retaliatory
tariffs or other measures and trade policies affecting imports of goods and services, could negatively impact the global economy or certain sectors of the
economy and increase the risk of recession;
– Climate change risks which could result in material damage to Santander UK's customers’ property or businesses and materially impact Santander UK's
customers' business models during the transition to a low carbon economy; and
– Social unrest as a result of severe economic disruption.
Adverse changes in the credit quality of Santander UK’s borrowers or counterparties or a general deterioration in UK economic conditions could reduce the
recoverability and value of Santander UK’s assets and require an increase in its level of provisions for expected credit losses. There can be no assurance that
Santander UK will not have to increase its provisions for loan losses in the future as a result of increases in non-performing loans or for other reasons beyond its
control. Material increases in Santander UK’s provision for loan losses and write-off or charge-offs have had and could again have a material adverse effect on its
operations, financial condition and prospects. Any significant reduction in the demand for Santander UK products and services, a sustained downturn in the UK
economy or changes in central bank interest rates could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Economic instability and downturns beyond the UK may also impact the UK economy as a whole. Europe’s manufacturing base is heavily dependent upon natural
gas, and any further restriction in supply and significantly increased costs are expected to have a material adverse impact on the Eurozone economy, which could
lead to disruption and volatility in the global financial markets, as a result of debt sustainability concerns. This could have a material adverse impact on Santander
UK, including Santander UK’s ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to Santander UK, which could have a material adverse effect on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
A recessionary economic environment could also lead to rating downgrades affecting the UK, Santander UK, its customers, investments and/or instruments, causing
capital impacts due to increased RWAs, an increase in the volatility of wholesale markets and the cost of funding.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 218

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The UK’s withdrawal from the European Union (Brexit) could continue to have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition
and prospects
The UK ceased to be a member of the EU in 2020 and a limited trade deal was agreed between the UK and the EU with the relevant new regulations coming into
force on 1 January 2021. The trade deal, however, did not include agreements on certain areas such as financial services and data adequacy.
The Financial Services and Markets Act 2023 (FSMA 2023) established a framework for HM Treasury (HMT) to revoke EU-derived financial services legislation
(known as “assimilated” EU law) and for it to be replaced by Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) and Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) rules. This process of
revoking and replacing assimilated EU law may result in material changes to the UK regulatory regime and the impact of these regulatory developments and
changes on Santander UK is difficult to predict.
Legislative divergence between EU and UK law and regulation arising out of Brexit could cause operational complications, demand additional resources to fulfil the
additional requirements of having to comply with two separate regulatory regimes, and create new compliance risks. For example, in the financial crime space, the
UK did not adopt the EU’s Sixth Anti-Money Laundering Directive, though the UK Government did assert that existing UK anti-money laundering (AML) and counter-
terrorism financing (CTF) laws already met or exceeded the Directive’s requirements. Further areas of divergence can be seen in the UK and EU’s legislative and
regulatory approaches to beneficial ownership transparency and the extent of regulatory focus on emerging threats such as crypto-related and trade-based money
laundering. Ongoing reforms to the UK’s prudential framework for banks may also give rise to further areas of regulatory divergence between the UK and the EU,
along with associated regulatory risks and compliance costs to Santander UK. As set out further in the risk factor “Santander UK is subject to regulatory capital,
liquidity and leverage requirements that could limit its operations, and changes to these requirements may further limit and could have a material adverse effect on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects” below, certain aspects of UK CRR have already been revoked and replaced with PRA rules (which will
take effect on 1 January 2027), and final rules to replace the remainder of the UK CRR were published on 20 January 2026, along with rules relating to the UK’s
implementation of the final Basel 3 reforms. The EU completed the majority of its implementation of the final Basel 3 standards with effect from 1 January 2025.
In 2021, the EU Commission adopted an adequacy decision for the UK, allowing for the continued flow of personal data between the EU and the UK without
additional safeguards or permissions. This decision was renewed in December 2025 for six years with an expiry date of late December 2031, if not further renewed.
If the EU Commission’s adequacy decision for the UK is not further renewed, this could impact personal data flows from entities in the EU to Santander UK in the UK.
In the event this occurs, it may result in additional costs to Santander UK in order to facilitate those data flows, to the extent those data flows are impacted, with the
UK being subject to EU transfer rules as a non-adequate jurisdiction.
Furthermore, the continuing impact of Brexit on the wider UK economy may have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s customers and counterparties, as well
as on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK faces risks from the impact of climate change, which could materially affect Santander UK’s business operations, reputation, clients and
customers, as well as the creditworthiness of its counterparties
Climate risk is a risk that manifests through other principal risks. Climate change could expose Santander UK to financial risk either through its physical or
transitional effects. Transition risks could be further accelerated by the occurrence of changes in the physical climate.
Physical risks from climate change arise from climate and weather-related events, such as heatwaves, droughts, floods, landslides, storms, sea level rise, coastal
erosion and subsidence. These risks could impact Santander UK's customers in the form of lower revenues due to transport problems, supply chain disruption and
other impacts that strain production and lower revenues and higher costs for its customers owing to workers' health, safety, absenteeism and other workforce-
related problems. These risks could also lead to damage to Santander UK's customers’ property or operations, which could impair asset values and the
creditworthiness of customers leading to increased default rates, delinquencies, write-offs and impairment charges in Santander UK’s portfolios. In addition,
Santander UK’s premises and resilience may also suffer physical damage due to weather-related events leading to increased costs for Santander UK.
Transition risks arise from the process of adjustment towards a low-carbon economy. Santander UK may face significant and rapid developments in stakeholder
expectations, policy, law and regulation which could impact the lending activities Santander UK undertakes, as well as the risks associated with its lending
portfolios, and the value of Santander UK’s financial assets. Reputation risk could arise from a failure to meet changing societal, investor or regulatory demands,
including contagion risk from the wider Banco Santander SA Group. In particular, the last few years have seen an increase in upcoming climate-related disclosure
requirements that Santander UK and Banco Santander SA (as the ultimate parent of Santander UK) will need to comply with (for example, additional requirements
emerging from the PRA's new rules on enhancing banks' and insurers' approaches to managing climate-related risks (within PS25/25 and SS5/25, which repeals
SS3/19), the IFRS Sustainability Disclosure Standards proposed as the UK Sustainability Reporting Standards (UK SRS), the European Banking Authority's (EBA)
Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) Pillar 3 disclosures rules, the EU Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) and the FCA’s Sustainability
Disclosure Requirements regime). An increased focus on climate change will likely include a greater focus on associated environmental crimes, such as illegal
logging and the illegal wildlife trade. These developments create additional indirect financial crime risks for banks such as Santander UK, as the proceeds of such
crimes may be laundered.
Banco Santander SA has an ambition to become a net zero bank by 2050. As such, Santander UK Group Holdings plc is implementing and reporting at a group level
(including Santander UK plc) against the TCFD recommendations and has disclosed targets to manage climate-related risks and opportunities. Santander UK
continues to enhance its disclosures to meet future requirements such as the UK SRS. Santander UK continues to embed climate considerations into its strategy,
business model, the products and services it provides to customers and its financial and non-financial risk management processes (including processes to measure
and manage the various financial and non-financial risks Santander UK faces as a result of climate change). Santander UK does this primarily through its internal
transition plan, which is aligned to the UK Government's Transition Plan Taskforce guidelines. Within this Santander UK assesses the internal and external factors
that will impact the alignment of its lending portfolios to the UN Paris Agreement, including the acceleration of the UK Government’s clean power 2030 action plan.
Failure to adequately embed risks associated with climate change into its risk framework to appropriately measure, manage and disclose the various financial and
operational risks it faces as a result of climate change, or failure to adapt Santander UK’s strategy and business model to the changing regulatory requirements and
market expectations on a timely basis, may have a material and adverse impact on Santander UK’s level of business growth, competitiveness, profitability, capital
requirements, cost of funding, and financial condition. Achieving Santander UK’s climate-related ambitions will also depend on a number of factors outside its
control, including (among other things) availability of data to measure and assess the climate impact on Santander UK’s customers, advancements of low-carbon
transition technologies and public policies to support the energy transition in the markets where Santander UK operates. Santander UK continues to assess this as
part of its transition planning process. If these external factors and other changes do not occur, or do not occur on a timely basis, Santander UK may fail to achieve its
climate-related ambitions and this could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s business growth, competitiveness, profitability, financial condition and
reputation.
For further details on Santander UK’s approach to climate change see “Sustainability – Climate-related Financial Disclosures" in the Sustainability section.
Business model risks
Santander UK is exposed to competition from other financial institutions, including new entrants into the financial services sector

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 219

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The UK banking market continues to evolve rapidly, with increasing competition across both traditional and digital players. Larger peers are strengthening their
scale through bolt-on acquisitions and balance sheet diversification, while digital banks are expanding customer bases through innovative propositions and efficient
operating models
Santander UK is undertaking a multi-year transformation to diversify revenue streams, digitalise product channels, and automate and simplify processes. The
transformation programme leverages Santander UK group technology platforms and capabilities, providing access to scale and expertise. Certain services, including
IT and Financial Crime operations, are also outsourced to the Santander UK group. While this supports delivery at a lower cost to serve and enhance customer
experience, it also increases operational dependency on the Santander UK group.
Santander UK’s balance sheet mix remains different from peers. The balance sheet is more heavily concentrated in mortgages, while larger banks maintain more
diversified asset portfolios and are growing non-mortgage segments such as unsecured lending, cards, and SME financing. On the liability side, Santander UK has a
higher cost of deposits, reflecting a smaller proportion of non-interest-bearing balances. The loan to deposit ratio exceeds 100%, which may compress revenue
margins through higher funding costs. Fee income also represents a smaller share of total income relative to peers investing to expand into the business areas of
Wealth, Cards, and Business Banking. Digital banks continue to scale and broaden their product offerings, increasing the risk of reduced primary-bank relationships
and lower transaction activity among current account customers.
Our transformation involves significant reduction in workforce as a result of AI, data driven, automation and simplification initiatives. However, it is essential that
these transformation initiatives are able to deliver the expected benefits, and that we are able to retain and engage the right talent going forward. There can be no
assurance that the transformation will deliver the benefits sought from it or that the transformation will progress on the timescale and trajectory currently
anticipated.
The proposed integration of TSB into Santander UK (subject to regulatory approval) is expected to accelerate transformation and strengthen our market position. For
risks related to the acquisition of TSB refer to the risk factor “If Santander UK is unable to manage the growth of its operations, this could have a material adverse
impact on its profitability” below.
These factors, individually or combined, could put pressure on margins, delay transformation benefits, or adversely affect Santander UK’s financial performance,
operations, and strategic objectives.
Santander UK’s ability to maintain its competitive position depends, in part, on the success of new products and services it offers its customers and its
ability to continue offering products and services from third parties
The success of Santander UK’s operations and its profitability depends, in part, on the success of new products and services it offers to customers and the way in
which it offers and provides its existing products and services. The increasing availability of a wide range of digital/online products and services for customers within
the market, requires banks like Santander UK to enhance their offerings in order to both retain and attract new customers. However, Santander UK cannot
guarantee that its products and services or the way in which it offers or provides its products and services, will continue to meet the needs or preferences of
customers as these may change over time.
Santander UK may not develop new products, or amend the key features of existing products, in a way that meet its customers’ changing needs in a timely manner.
As Santander UK expands the range of its products and services, some of which may be at an early stage of development in the UK market, it will be exposed to
known, new and potentially increasingly complex risks, including conduct, reputational and operational risk as well as development costs. Equally, Santander UK
may not take appropriate action to change or withdraw products when they become obsolete, outdated or unattractive reducing their competitiveness and
potentially increasing risks in relation to legacy customer journeys and systems.
The use of third parties by Santander UK to offer products or services or to support part of the customer journey presents additional risks to its business, particularly
in terms of data management and security. However, if Santander UK were not to engage with third parties to offer specialist services in this way, strategic and
competitive opportunities and advantages may be missed.
Any or all of the above factors, individually or collectively, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK’s loan portfolio is subject to risk of prepayment
Santander UK’s loan portfolio is subject to prepayment risk resulting from the ability of a borrower or issuer to prepay a debt obligation prior to maturity. As a result,
Santander UK could be required to amortise net premiums into income over a shorter period of time, thereby reducing the corresponding asset yield and net interest
income and there is a risk that Santander UK is not able to accurately forecast amortisation schedules for these purposes which may affect its profitability.
Prepayment risk also has a significant adverse impact on credit card and mortgage loans, since prepayments could shorten the weighted average life of these
assets, which may result in a mismatch with Santander UK’s funding obligations and reinvestment at lower yields. The risk of prepayment and its impact on
Santander UK's ability to accurately forecast amortisation schedules is inherent in Santander UK’s commercial activity and an increase in prepayments or a failure
to accurately forecast amortisation schedules could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Damage to Santander UK’s reputation could cause harm to its business prospects
Maintaining a positive reputation is critical to attracting and retaining customers, investors and employees and conducting business transactions with
counterparties. Damage to Santander UK’s reputation could materially and adversely affect Santander UK’s perception among current and potential clients,
investors, vendors, partners, regulators and other third parties, which in turn could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operating results, financial
condition, and prospects as well as damage Santander UK’s customers' and investors' confidence and the market price of Santander UK’s securities. Damage to
the reputation of Santander UK or Banco Santander SA (as the ultimate parent of Santander UK), the reputation of affiliates operating under the ‘Santander’ brand
or any of its other brands could therefore cause significant harm to Santander UK’s business and prospects. Harm to Santander UK’s reputation can arise directly or
indirectly from numerous sources, including, among others, employee misconduct (including the possibility of employee fraud), litigation, regulatory interventions
and enforcement action, negative political coverage, failure to deliver minimum standards of service and quality, loss or compromise of customer data, disruption to
service due to a cyberattack, wider IT failures, compliance failures, third-party fraud, financial crime, breach of legal or regulatory requirements, unethical behaviour
(including adopting inappropriate sales and trading practices), and the activities of customers, suppliers and counterparties and the perception of the financial
services industry as a whole. Further, negative publicity regarding Santander UK, whether true or not, may result in harm to Santander UK’s operations, financial
condition and prospects. Santander UK’s reputation could also suffer if Santander UK is the subject of negative coverage in the media or from political stakeholders,
whether it has merit or not.
If Santander UK is unable to manage the growth of its operations, this could have a material adverse impact on its profitability
Santander UK allocates management and planning resources to developing strategic plans for organic growth and identifying potential opportunities for
acquisitions, disposals, or business restructurings. In July 2025, Santander UK announced the proposed acquisition of TSB (subject to regulatory approval).
The proposed integration of TSB into Santander UK (subject to regulatory approval) is expected to accelerate transformation and strengthen our market position.
Successful delivery will require maintaining a stable operating model, ensuring a smooth customer transition, preserving franchise value, and realising planned
synergies while obtaining regulatory approvals within expected timelines. Delays in regulatory approval or execution could impact integration progress. Running the

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 220

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

integration will also require significant management attention alongside ongoing transformation initiatives, which may impact the availability of resources for and
divert management attention from other efforts and initiatives. For example, Santander UK has already paused existing corporate development projects to create
capacity for the integration of TSB.
Santander UK continues to evaluate other inorganic growth opportunities – such as acquisitions, disposals, and partnerships – that align with its strategic priorities
and create value for customers and shareholders. However, suitable opportunities may not be identified, and transactions or partnerships may not be executed on
favourable terms or may fail to complete. Participation in transactions that do not conclude can also disrupt operations and divert management attention.
Assessments of potential acquisitions or partnerships are based on limited information and forward-looking assumptions that may prove to be inaccurate. The
ability to realise expected benefits from any such acquisitions and partnerships will depend in part on the successful integration of acquired businesses or
partnerships and alignment with Santander UK’s strategic and operational frameworks. The success of such initiatives, including the integration of TSB, is, in part,
subject to political, economic, and market factors that are beyond Santander UK’s control, and there can be no assurance that anticipated synergies or returns will
materialise. There may also be unforeseen difficulties in integrating operations and systems, unexpected liabilities or contingencies relating to the acquired
business (including in relation to legal claims and regulatory investigations) and challenges in retaining key employees and customers.
Santander UK's ability to manage growth and execute its strategy effectively depends on its capacity to:
– Manage operations and workforce efficiently;
– Maintain and expand its customer base;
– Execute strategic priorities on time and in full;
– Conduct robust due diligence and valuation of potential targets;
– Secure funding for strategic initiatives;
– Integrate new entities or investments successfully;
– Align and scale IT systems to support an enlarged business;
– Apply risk management policies consistently and efficiently across a broader group; and
– Pursue opportunities within capital constraints at the Santander UK group level.
Any or all of these factors, individually or collectively, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Capital and liquidity risk
Santander UK is subject to regulatory capital, liquidity and leverage requirements that could limit its operations, and changes to these requirements may
further limit and could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects
Capital Requirements Regulation and Capital Requirements Directive IV
Santander UK is subject to capital adequacy requirements applicable to banks and banking groups under assimilated (retained EU) law and is supervised in this
respect by the PRA. Santander UK is required to maintain a minimum ratio of Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital to risk-weighted assets, Tier 1 capital to risk-
weighted assets, total capital to risk-weighted assets and Tier 1 capital (leverage) to total adjusted assets for leverage purposes. Any failure by Santander UK to
maintain such ratios above prescribed regulatory minimum levels may result in administrative actions or sanctions. These could potentially include requirements
on Santander UK to cease all or certain lines of new business, to raise new capital resources or, in certain circumstances, a requirement for Santander UK's existing
capital instruments (potentially including Santander UK’s debt securities) to be subjected to bail-in or write-down (for more information, see the risk factor entitled
‘Santander UK may become subject to the provisions of the Banking Act 2009 (the Banking Act), including bail-in and write-down powers’).
The EU Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV Directive) and the Capital Requirements Regulation (the CRR and together with the CRD IV Directive, CRD IV)
implemented changes proposed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the Basel Committee) to the capital adequacy framework, known as ‘Basel III’ in
the EU. The European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 converted the directly applicable elements of CRD IV into UK law on 31 December 2020 and preserved existing
UK law implementing the CRD IV directive. Certain elements of the CRR which were ‘onshored’ in this way were transposed into the PRA rules. The CRR has since
been amended through a series of EU regulations, including the Capital Requirements Regulation 2 (CRR 2) and Capital Requirements Regulation 3 (CRR 3), and the
CRD IV Directive has been amended by the Capital Requirements Directive V (CRD V Directive) and Capital Requirements Directive VI (CRD VI Directive).
In implementing CRD IV and the revised versions of CRD IV, the PRA has required the capital resources of UK banks to be maintained at levels which exceed the base
capital requirements prescribed by CRD IV and to cover relevant risks in their business. In addition, a series of capital buffers have been established under CRD IV and
PRA rules to ensure a bank can withstand a period of stress. As a result of BoE stress testing exercises and as part of its exercise of UK macro-prudential capital
regulation tools, or through supervisory actions by the PRA, Santander UK could be required to increase its capital resources further, which could have a material
adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) and Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)
The LCR is intended to ensure that a bank maintains an adequate level of unencumbered, high quality liquid assets which can be used to offset the net cash
outflows the bank could encounter under a short-term significant liquidity stress scenario. The current minimum requirement for LCR is set at 100%. Santander UK
is also required to maintain available stable funding equal to at least 100% of its required stable funding under the NSFR. Santander UK’s current liquidity position is
in excess of the minimum requirements set by the PRA, but there can be no assurance that future changes to the applicable liquidity requirements would not have
an adverse effect on Santander UK’s financial performance.
Leverage ratios
The Financial Services Act 2012 provides the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE with certain macro-prudential tools for the management of systemic
risk including quarterly setting of the countercyclical capital buffer rate and powers of direction relating to leverage ratios. All major UK banks and banking
groups (including Santander UK) are required to hold enough Tier 1 capital (75% of which must be CET1 capital) to satisfy a minimum leverage ratio requirement
of 3.25% and enough CET1 capital to satisfy a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer of 35% of each bank’s institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate.
The PRA requires UK globally systemically important banks (G-SIBs) and Ring Fenced Bodies (as defined in the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (FSMA)) to
hold enough CET1 capital to meet an Additional Leverage Ratio Buffer (ALRB) of 35% of the institution-specific G-SIB buffer rate or Other Systemically Important
Institutions (O-SII) buffer rate following the implementation of the CRD V Directive on 28 December 2020 (previously the Systemic Risk Buffer rate) and for
consolidated groups which include a Ring Fenced Body to hold enough CET1 capital to meet the ALRB.
On 2 December 2025, the FPC published its Financial Stability Report, accompanied by a Financial Stability in Focus (FSiF) paper. In these documents, the Committee
indicated that several areas of the UK capital framework may be reviewed and, where appropriate, amended in the future. These areas include, without limitation,
enhancing the usability of regulatory buffers; reviewing the UK leverage ratio framework; assessing the interaction of capital requirements that are linked to UK
domestic exposures; introducing automatic indexation of regulatory thresholds to limit prudential drag as the economy grows; reviewing how the Basel 3.1 output
floor applies at the ring-fenced sub-group level; and supporting the PRA’s work on risk-weight modelling for mortgage lending following DP1/25. The FPC can also
direct the PRA to adjust capital requirements in relation to particular sectors through the imposition of sectoral capital requirements. Action taken in the future by

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 221

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

the FPC in exercise of any of its powers could result in the regulatory capital requirements applied to Santander UK being further increased, which could have a
material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
On 5 March 2025, the PRA published CP 2/25 "Leverage Ratio: changes to the retail deposits threshold for application of the requirement" in which it proposed to
increase the £50 billion retail deposits threshold to £70 billion. On 12 November 2025, the PRA published PS 22/25 providing its feedback and, among other things,
setting the final retail deposits threshold at £75 billion and introducing a three-year averaging mechanism for the calculation of firms' retail deposits, with such
policy having taken effect on 1 January 2026.
Further regulatory changes
Regulators in the UK and worldwide have proposed that additional loss absorbency requirements should be applied to systemically important institutions to ensure
that there is sufficient loss absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution. The BoE is required to set the Minimum Requirement for Eligible Liabilities
(MREL) for all institutions. The BoE required most major banks, since 1 January 2022, to comply with end-state MREL requirements, including Santander UK plc and
Santander UK Group Holdings plc.
Regulators and legislators in the UK have produced a range of proposals for future legislative and regulatory reform which could force Santander UK to comply
with certain operational restrictions or take steps to raise further capital or increase Santander UK’s expenses and could therefore have a material adverse effect on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. These changes, which could affect Santander UK as a whole, include the UK's implementation of the
remaining Basel III standards. The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision has approved a series of significant changes to the Basel regulatory capital framework
subsequent to Basel III from 7 December 2017, colloquially known as Basel IV or Basel 3.1 which revise the process for determining capital requirements. On 30
November 2022, the PRA published a consultation paper (CP 16/22) on the implementation of the Basel 3.1 standards in the UK, which was followed in December
2023 and September 2024 by two Policy Statements (PS17/23 and PS9/24 respectively) containing near-final rules. On 17 January 2025, the PRA announced that it
was delaying the implementation of the Basel 3.1 rules by a year until 1 January 2027, with the transitional period reduced from four to three years so that it will
continue to end on 31 December 2029. CRD IV requirements adopted in the UK may change further and there may be changes to the way in which the PRA
continues to interpret and apply these requirements to UK banks (including with regard to individual model approvals or otherwise).
There is a risk that changes to the UK’s capital adequacy regime (including any increase to minimum leverage ratios and/or as a result of the PRA’s Basel 3.1
reforms) may result in increased minimum capital requirements, which could reduce available capital for new business purposes and adversely affect Santander
UK’s cost of funding, profitability and ability to pay dividends, or other discretionary payments on its capital instruments, continued organic growth (including
increased lending), or pursue acquisitions or other strategic opportunities. Santander UK could be required to restructure its balance sheet to reduce capital charges
incurred pursuant to the PRA’s rules or raise additional capital, but at increased cost and subject to prevailing market conditions. In addition, any changes to the
eligibility criteria for Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital may affect Santander UK’s ability to raise Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital and impact the recognition of existing Tier 1 and Tier 2
capital resources in the calculation of Santander UK’s capital position. Furthermore, increased capital requirements may negatively affect Santander UK’s return on
equity and other financial performance indicators.
Santander UK’s business could be affected if its capital is not managed effectively or if these measures limit Santander UK’s ability to manage its balance sheet and
capital resources effectively or to access funding on commercially acceptable terms. Effective management of Santander UK’s capital position is important to
Santander UK’s ability to operate its business, to continue to grow organically and to pursue its business strategy. There is a risk that implementing and maintaining
existing and new liquidity requirements, such as through enhanced liquidity risk management systems, may incur significant costs, and more stringent
requirements to hold liquid assets may materially affect Santander UK’s lending business as more funds may be required to acquire or maintain a liquidity buffer,
thereby reducing future profitability. This could in turn adversely impact Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Liquidity and funding risks are inherent in Santander UK’s business and could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial
condition and prospects
Liquidity risk is the risk that Santander UK either does not have available sufficient financial resources to meet its obligations as they fall due or can secure them only
at excessive cost. This risk is inherent in any retail and commercial banking business and can be heightened by a number of factors such as over-reliance on a
particular source of funding, changes in credit ratings or market-wide phenomena such as market dislocation. Santander UK performs comprehensive internal
stress testing in order to ensure that it maintains funding profiles and holds a liquid asset buffer in order to manage this risk. However, unforeseen systemic market
factors like those experienced during the last financial crisis make it difficult to eliminate these risks completely. There can be no assurance that such circumstances
will not recur or that they will occur in the same way, but past experience and comprehensive stress testing regimes help Santander UK to consider and manage the
potential impacts on its liquidity position. Liquidity constraints may affect Santander UK’s operations and its ability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements or may
limit growth possibilities. Disruption and volatility in the global financial markets could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s ability to access capital and
liquidity on financial terms acceptable to it and in addition to increased funding costs, may result in a shortening in the term of funding it raises.
Santander UK’s cost of funding is related to prevailing interest rates and to its credit spreads. Increases in interest rates and Santander UK’s credit spreads can
significantly increase the cost of its funding. Changes in Santander UK’s credit spreads can be market-driven or idiosyncratic in nature and may be influenced by
perceptions of its creditworthiness rather than any underlying change in Santander UK’s financial position. Changes to interest rates and Santander UK’s credit
spreads occur continuously and may be unpredictable and highly volatile. Market predictions of future central bank policy rate paths may impact Santander UK’s
cost of funding, even if central bank actions do not ultimately follow market predictions.
If wholesale markets financing ceases to be available, or becomes excessively expensive, Santander UK may be forced to raise the rates it pays on deposits, with a
view to attracting more customers and/or to sell assets, potentially at depressed prices or to reduce growth plans. Santander UK’s cost of funding might also be
impacted by increased competition for retail and corporate deposits.
In response to the Covid-19 pandemic, the BoE introduced the Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises (TFSME).
Santander UK is continuing to repay drawings ahead of contractual maturities in 2027 and 2031 and at 31 December 2025, Santander UK had £3.9bn of drawings
outstanding (£2.5bn in 2027 and £1.4bn in 2031), having repaid £7.1bn in 2025. (£6.0bn in 2024, £8.0bn in 2023 and £6.9bn in 2022). Santander UK will have to
replace these remaining drawings via wholesale market issuance, other BoE liquidity facilities or through management of the customer funding gap.
Each of the factors described above could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK, including its ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms
acceptable to it and, more generally, on its operations, financial condition and prospects.
Further, Santander UK aims for a funding structure that is consistent with its assets, avoids excessive reliance on short-term wholesale funding, attracts enduring
retail and commercial deposits and provides diversification in products and tenor. Santander UK therefore relies, and will continue to rely, on retail and commercial
deposits to fund a significant proportion of lending activities. The on-going availability of this type of funding is sensitive to a variety of factors outside Santander
UK’s control, such as general economic conditions and the confidence of depositors in the economy and in the financial services industry in general, confidence in
Santander UK specifically, Santander UK’s credit rating and the availability and extent of deposit guarantees, as well as competition between banks for deposits or
competition with other products, such as mutual funds or, if launched, central bank digital currency. A change in any of these factors could significantly increase the

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 222

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

amount of commercial deposit withdrawals in a short period of time, thereby reducing its ability to access deposit funding on appropriate terms, or at all, in the
future, and therefore have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK’s liquidity planning assumes that customers will continue to make a volume of deposits with Santander UK (particularly demand deposits and short-
term time deposits), and Santander UK intends to maintain its emphasis on the use of deposits as a source of funds. The short-term nature of some deposits could
cause liquidity problems for Santander UK in the future if deposits are not made in the volumes anticipated or are withdrawn at short notice or are not renewed. If a
substantial number of depositors withdraw their demand deposits or do not roll over their time deposits upon maturity, there may be a material adverse effect on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. This might increase Santander UK’s requirements for wholesale funding or require the execution of
contingent options to raise additional liquidity, including the potential curtailing of growth plans.
An adverse movement in Santander UK’s external credit rating would likely increase its cost of funding, require Santander UK to post additional collateral or
take other actions under some of its derivative contracts and adversely affect Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects
Credit ratings affect the cost and other terms upon which Santander UK is able to obtain funding. Credit rating agencies regularly evaluate Santander UK, and their
credit ratings of Santander UK and Santander UK’s issued debt are based on a number of factors, including Santander UK’s financial strength, the strength of the UK
economy and conditions affecting the financial services industry generally.
Any downgrade in the external credit ratings assigned to Santander UK or any of Santander UK’s debt securities could have an adverse impact on Santander UK. In
particular, a downgrade in Santander UK’s credit ratings could increase its borrowing costs and could require it to post additional collateral or take other actions
under some of its derivatives, loan facilities or other financial contracts, and could limit its access to capital markets and have a material adverse effect on its
operations, financial condition and prospects. For example, a credit rating downgrade could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s ability to sell or
market certain products, engage in certain longer-term or derivatives transactions and retain its customers or investors, particularly those who need a minimum
rating threshold in order to transact or invest.
Any of these effects of a credit rating downgrade could, in turn, result in outflows and reduce Santander UK’s liquidity and have an adverse effect on Santander UK,
including its operations, financial condition and prospects. For example, Santander UK estimates that at 31 December 2025, if Fitch, Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s
were concurrently to downgrade the long-term credit ratings of Santander UK plc by one notch, and thereby trigger a short-term credit rating downgrade, this could
result in an outflow of £1.4bn of cash and collateral. A hypothetical two notch downgrade would result in a further outflow of £1.2bn of cash and collateral at 31
December 2025. Under the LCR Santander UK holds sufficient liquidity to cover these potential outflows. However, while certain potential impacts are contractual
and quantifiable, the full consequences of a credit rating downgrade are inherently uncertain, as they depend upon numerous dynamic, complex and inter-related
factors and assumptions, including market conditions at the time of any downgrade, whether any downgrade of a firm’s long-term credit rating precipitates
downgrades to its short-term credit rating, whether any downgrade precipitates changes to the way that the financial institutions sector is rated, and assumptions
about the ratings of other financial institutions and the potential behaviours of various customers, investors and counterparties. Actual outflows will also depend
upon certain other factors including any management or restructuring actions that could be taken to reduce cash outflows and the potential liquidity impact from a
loss of unsecured funding (such as from money market funds) or loss of secured funding capacity.
There can be no assurance that the credit rating agencies will maintain Santander UK’s current credit ratings or outlooks. A failure to maintain favourable credit ratings
or outlooks could increase Santander UK’s cost of funding, adversely affect Santander UK’s interest margins, and reduce its ability to secure both long-term and short-
term funding. If a downgrade of a Santander UK member’s long-term credit ratings were to occur, it could also impact the short-term credit ratings of other members of
Santander UK. The occurrence of any of these events could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Negative changes to the UK sovereign credit rating, or the perception that further negative changes may occur, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operations, financial condition, prospects and the marketability and trading value of its securities. This might also have an impact on Santander UK’s own credit rating,
borrowing costs and ability to secure funding. Negative changes to the UK sovereign credit rating, or the perception that further negative changes may occur, could also
have a material effect in depressing consumer confidence, restricting the availability, and increasing the cost, of funding for individuals and companies, further
depressing economic activity, increasing unemployment and reducing asset prices, which could in turn have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations,
financial condition and prospects.
Changes in Santander UK’s pension liabilities and obligations could have a materially adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and
prospects
The majority of current employees are provided with pension benefits through defined contribution arrangements. Under these arrangements Santander UK’s
obligation is limited to the cash contributions paid. Santander UK provides retirement benefits for many of its former and current employees in the UK through a
defined benefit pension scheme established under trust. Santander UK plc is the principal employer under this scheme, but it has only limited control over the rate
at which it pays into the scheme. Under the UK statutory pension funding requirements employers are usually required to contribute to the schemes at the rate they
agree with the scheme trustees although, if they cannot agree, the rate can be set by the Pensions Regulator. The scheme trustees may, in the course of discussions
about future valuations, seek higher employer contributions. The scheme trustees’ power in relation to the payment of pension contributions depends on the terms
of the trust deed and rules governing the scheme, but, in some cases, the trustees may have the unilateral right to set the employer’s relevant contribution.
The Pensions Regulator has the power to issue a financial support direction to companies within a group in respect of the liability of employers participating in UK
defined benefit pension schemes where, amongst other things, that employer is ‘insufficiently resourced’ (as defined for the purposes of the relevant legislation).
Such a financial support direction could require the companies to guarantee or provide security for the pension liabilities of those employers or could require
additional amounts to be paid into the relevant pension schemes in respect of them.
The Pensions Regulator can also issue contribution notices if it is of the opinion that an employer has taken actions, or failed to take actions, deliberately designed to
avoid meeting its pension promises or which are materially detrimental to the scheme’s ability to meet its pension promises. A contribution notice can be issued to
any company or individual that is connected with or an associate of such employer in circumstances where the Pensions Regulator considers it reasonable to issue it
and multiple notices could be issued to connected companies or individuals for the full amount of the debt. The risk of a contribution notice being imposed may
inhibit Santander UK’s freedom to restructure or to undertake certain corporate activities. There is a risk that Santander UK could incur an obligation to make a
contribution to the scheme by virtue of section 75 or 75A of the Pensions Act 1995 as a result of a reorganisation or disposal of Santander UK’s businesses.
Should the value of assets to liabilities in respect of the defined benefit schemes operated by Santander UK record a deficit or an increased deficit (as appropriate),
due to either a reduction in the value of the pension scheme assets (depending on the performance of financial markets) not matched by a fall in the pension
scheme liabilities and/or an increase in the pension scheme liabilities (for example due to changes in legislation, mortality assumptions, discount rate assumptions,
inflation, or other factors) not matched by an increase in the pension scheme assets, this could result in Santander UK having to make increased contributions to
reduce or satisfy the deficits which would divert resources from other areas of Santander UK's business and reduce its capital resources. Changes in inflation and
interest rates in particular pose significant risks to the pension scheme as liabilities would be adversely impacted by an increase in long-term inflation or reduction
in interest rates, and it is inherently problematic to find assets that exactly match inflation and interest rate movements in the liabilities. The pension scheme assets
are also invested in illiquid assets consisting primarily of unlisted credit, private equity and property. The value of these investments can only be known when they
are realised. The value in the accounts is an estimate of the fair value of these investments but the final realised value could be materially different. Although the

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 223

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

trustee of the scheme is obliged to consult with Santander UK before changing the pension scheme's investment strategy, the trustee has the final say and the
ultimate responsibility for investment strategy rests with the trustee. A change in the actual or perceived strength of the employer’s covenant could also result in
Santander UK having to make increased contributions to the scheme. While Santander UK can control a number of the above factors, there are some over which
Santander UK has no or limited control.
Changes in UK legislation and regulation may also affect Santander UK’s position, Specific areas where concerns have been raised are levels of dividends where
there is a pension scheme with a deficit and the length of time taken to address deficits. Changes in legislation or regulation could result in Santander UK having to
make increased contributions to reduce or satisfy the deficits which would divert resources from use in other areas of its business and reduce its capital resources.
Any increase in Santander UK’s pension liabilities and obligations as a result of the foregoing factors could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operations, financial conditions and prospects. There is also a risk of reputational damage if the scheme fails to comply with legislation or if there are any issues
with members or the trustee being dissatisfied.
Market risks
Santander UK is subject to fluctuations in interest rates and other market risks, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations,
financial condition and prospects
Market risk refers to the probability of variations in Santander UK’s net interest income or in the market value of its assets and liabilities due to volatility of interest
rates, credit spreads, exchange rates or equity prices.
Changes in interest rates would affect the following areas, among others, of Santander UK’s business:
– Net interest income
– The value of Santander UK’s derivatives transactions
– The value of Santander UK’s securities holdings
– The value of Santander UK’s loans and deposits
– The volume of loans originated
Interest rates are highly sensitive to many factors beyond Santander UK’s control, including increased regulation of the financial sector, inflation, monetary policies,
domestic and international economic and political conditions. For example, the UK’s Monetary Policy Committee has been selling assets to unwind quantitative
easing; as this balance sheet ’normalisation’ unfolds, there could be unintended consequences for markets and financial stability. Variations in interest rates could
affect the interest earned on Santander UK’s assets and the interest paid on its borrowings, thereby affecting its net interest income, which comprises the majority
of its revenue, reducing its growth rate and profitability and potentially resulting in losses. In addition, costs incurred by Santander UK when putting into place
strategies to reduce interest rate exposure could increase in the future, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition
and prospects.
Increases in interest rates may reduce the volume of loans originated by Santander UK. Sustained high interest rates have historically discouraged customers from
borrowing and have resulted in increased delinquencies in outstanding loans and deterioration in the quality of assets.
Reductions in interest rates could lead to margin compression if such changes are passed on to customer liabilities to a lesser extent than they are passed on to
customer assets. Changes in interest rates may also affect the ability of Santander UK’s customers to prepay or refinance fixed-rate loans, affect the value of its
financial assets and reduce gains or require Santander UK to record losses on sales of Santander UK’s loans or securities, which could have a material adverse effect
on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
In addition, although Santander UK is a UK-centric bank, it has a direct link to the Eurozone through its parent company, which exposes Santander UK to Eurozone
sovereign debt risks, as market concerns over sovereign debt sustainability could drive changes in interest rates and credit spreads. Any significant impact on
interest rates could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Negative changes in positions recorded at fair value could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects
Santander UK has material exposures to securities, derivatives and other investments that are recorded at fair value and are therefore exposed to potential negative
market changes. A widening of market credit spreads, reflecting the prevailing market conditions would negatively impact asset valuations in future periods and
may result in negative changes in the fair values of Santander UK's financial assets. A tightening of Santander UK’s own credit spreads would increase the
magnitude of liabilities, thereby reducing net assets.
In addition, the value ultimately realised by Santander UK on disposal of assets and liabilities recorded at fair value may be lower than their current fair value; for
example, during the last global financial crisis, financial markets were subject to periods of significant stress resulting in steep falls in perceived or actual financial
asset values, particularly due to volatility in global financial markets and the resulting widening of credit spreads.
Santander UK is also exposed to changes in the market value of credit and funding spreads for the valuation of certain derivative contracts, the estimated value of
which is negatively exposed to increases in the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) spread and the Funding Fair Valuation Adjustment (FVA) spread over the lifetime
of the transaction.
Any of these factors could require Santander UK to record negative changes in fair value which could have a material adverse effect on its operations, financial
condition and prospects.
Santander UK is also exposed to changes in UK residential house price index levels, future index growth assumptions and house price index volatility. These impact
the valuations of the portfolios of home reversion plans, lifetime mortgages and associated hedges held by Santander UK. In addition, the home reversion assets
and mortgages are exposed to any changes in underlying mortality assumptions as maturity dates on these are not fixed and are driven by the vacation of the
underlying property on a permanent basis by the plan holder. Specific property risk exists for each individual asset versus the indexed growth assumption at the
point of maturity. Lifetime mortgages additionally have prepayment risk which is managed via a FVA based on historic data.
In addition, to the extent that fair values are determined using financial valuation models, such values may be inaccurate or subject to change, as the data used by
such models may not be available or may become unavailable due to changes in market conditions, particularly for illiquid assets and in times of economic
instability. In such circumstances, Santander UK’s valuation methodologies require it to make assumptions, judgements and estimates in order to establish fair
value.
Reliable assumptions are difficult to make and are inherently uncertain. Moreover, valuation models are complex, making them inherently imperfect predictors of
actual results. Any consequential impairments or write-downs could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 224

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Santander UK invests in debt securities of the UK Government largely for liquidity management purposes. At 31 December 2025, approximately 4% of Santander
UK’s total assets and 48% of Santander UK’s securities portfolio comprised debt securities issued by the UK Government. Any failure by the UK Government to make
timely payments under the terms of these securities, or a significant decrease in their market value, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operations, financial condition and prospects.
Credit risks
If the level of non-performing loans increases or the credit quality of Santander UK’s loans deteriorates in the future, or if Santander UK’s loan loss reserves
are insufficient to cover loan losses, this could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects
Risks arising from changes in credit quality and the recoverability of loans and amounts due from counterparties are inherent in a wide range of Santander UK’s
businesses. Non-performing or low credit quality loans have in the past, had and could continue to have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations,
financial condition and prospects.
In particular, the amount of Santander UK’s reported non-performing loans may increase in the future as a result of growth in Santander UK’s total loan portfolio,
including as a result of loan portfolios that Santander UK may acquire in the future (the credit quality of which may turn out to be worse than Santander UK had
anticipated), or factors beyond Santander UK’s control, such as adverse changes in the credit quality of Santander UK’s borrowers and counterparties, a general
deterioration in the UK or global economic conditions, the impact of political events, events affecting certain industries or events affecting financial markets and
global economies. Broader inflationary pressures or higher interest rates that impact a customer's ability to service debt payments could also lead to increased
arrears in both unsecured and secured products.
There can be no assurance that Santander UK will be able to effectively control the level of impaired loans in, or the credit quality of, its total loan portfolio, which
could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Interest rates payable on a significant portion of Santander UK’s outstanding mortgage loan products fluctuate over time due to, among other factors, changes in
the BoE base rate. As a result, borrowers with variable interest rate mortgage loans are exposed to increased monthly payments when the related mortgage
interest rate adjusts upward. Similarly, borrowers of mortgage loans with fixed or introductory rates adjusting to new interest rates after an initial period are
exposed to the risk of increased monthly payments at the end of this period. Between 2021 and 2023, interest rates attached to both variable and fixed rate
mortgages increased from historic lows. Although rates have eased modestly in recent years, they remain higher than 2020 levels. Customers whose fixed rate
terms ended during periods of higher interest rates have faced increased monthly payments, while customers with variable rates of interest have experienced
fluctuations in their monthly payments. High rates of interest and increases in customers’ monthly payments, alone or in combination, may contribute to higher
delinquency rates and losses for Santander UK, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK’s current loan loss reserves may not be adequate to cover an increase in the amount of non-performing loans or any future deterioration in the overall
credit quality of Santander UK’s total loan portfolio. Santander UK’s loan loss reserves are based on Santander UK’s current assessment of various factors affecting
the quality of its loan portfolio, including its borrowers’ financial condition, repayment abilities, the realisable value of any collateral, the prospects for support from
any guarantor, government macroeconomic policies, interest rates and the legal and regulatory environment. Many of these factors are beyond Santander UK’s
control. As a result, there is no precise method for predicting loan and credit losses, and no assurance can be provided that Santander UK’s current or future loan
loss reserves will be sufficient to cover actual losses.
If Santander UK’s assessment of and expectations concerning the above-mentioned factors differ from actual developments Santander UK may need to increase its
loan loss reserves, which may adversely affect Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. Additionally, in calculating its loan loss reserves,
Santander UK employs qualitative tools and statistical models which may not be reliable in all circumstances, and which are dependent upon data that may not be
complete. If Santander UK is unable to control or reduce the level of its non-performing or poor credit quality loans, this could have a material adverse effect on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
The value of the collateral, including real estate, securing Santander UK’s loans may not be sufficient, and Santander UK may be unable to realise the full
value of the collateral securing Santander UK’s loan portfolio
The value of the collateral securing Santander UK’s loan portfolio may significantly fluctuate or decline due to factors beyond Santander UK’s control, including
macroeconomic factors affecting the UK’s economy. Santander UK’s residential mortgage loan portfolio is one of its principal assets, comprising 84% of Santander
UK’s loan portfolio at 31 December 2025. As a result, Santander UK is highly exposed to developments in the residential property market in the UK. Following the
peak in aggregate UK house prices in 2022, these fell slightly in 2023 but recovered in 2024 and 2025. Continued growth in house prices is expected in 2026 at
similar levels to 2025.
The value of the collateral securing Santander UK’s loan portfolio may also be adversely affected by force majeure events such as natural disasters like floods or
landslides exacerbated by climate change trends. Any force majeure event may cause widespread damage and could have an adverse impact on the economy of the
affected region and may therefore impair the asset quality of Santander UK’s loan portfolio in that area.
Santander UK may also not have sufficiently up-to-date information on the value of collateral, which may result in an inaccurate assessment for impairment losses
on loans secured by such collateral.
If any of the above events were to occur, Santander UK may need to make additional provisions to cover actual impairment losses of its loans, which could have a
material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 225

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Legal and regulatory risks
Santander UK is subject to substantial and evolving regulation and governmental oversight
As a financial services group, Santander UK is subject to extensive financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in the UK, and in each other
location in which Santander UK operates. For a discussion of the principal laws and regulations to which Santander UK is subject, see 'Regulation of the Santander
UK group'. The sector continues to face unprecedented levels of government and regulatory intervention and scrutiny, including changes to the regulations
governing financial institutions and the conduct of business. In addition, regulatory and governmental authorities have continued to consider further enhanced or
new legal or regulatory requirements intended to reduce the probability and impact of future crises (or otherwise assure the stability and operational resilience of
institutions under their supervision), enhance consumer protection, address climate change risks, the risk of greenwashing and environmental, social and
governance risks generally, and improve controls in relation to financial crime-related risks. Santander UK expects regulatory and government intervention in the
banking sector to remain high for the foreseeable future. An intensive approach to supervision is maintained in the UK by the BoE as resolution authority, the PRA,
the FCA, the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA), the Payment Systems Regulator (PSR), the Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) and the Serious Fraud
Office (SFO).
Changes in UK legislation and regulation applicable to the financial sector may also affect Santander UK’s competitive position, particularly if such changes are
implemented before international consensus is reached on key issues affecting the industry. There has been recognition by the UK Government that changes need
to be made to the UK’s regulatory architecture in order to ensure that the UK banking sector remains internationally competitive and is able to grow. This has
resulted in each of the financial services regulators setting out how they plan to improve growth in the sector. For example, the UK has delayed the implementation
of Basel 3.1 to 1 January 2027 in order to assess how it is implemented internationally. HMT also issued a call for evidence in November 2024 on a new “Financial
Services Growth & Competitiveness Strategy” that could result in changes to UK regulation, and since August 2023 the FCA has had a secondary objective to
facilitate the international competitiveness and growth of the UK economy.
As well as being subject to UK regulation, as part of the Banco Santander group, Santander UK is also affected by other regulators such as the Banco de España (the
Bank of Spain) and the European Central Bank (ECB), as well as various legal and regulatory regimes that have extra-territorial effect (most notably the United
States). Extensive legislation and regulations affecting the financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect
Santander UK’s business, including Spain, the US, the EU and other jurisdictions. Because Santander UK is subject to oversight by multiple regulators or government
bodies related to the same conduct or activity, this can increase business uncertainty and the amount of resources needed to ensure Santander UK’s compliance
with the different legal and regulatory regimes.
The manner in which financial services laws, regulations and policies are applied to the operations of financial institutions has gone through great change which is
still being implemented and reviewed. Recent proposals and measures taken by governmental, tax and regulatory authorities and further future changes in
supervision and regulation (in particular in the UK), are beyond Santander UK’s control and could materially affect Santander UK’s business. Santander UK may face
higher compliance costs and the need to carefully manage capacity to readily respond to multiple regulatory or government policy changes simultaneously. Any
legislative or regulatory actions and any required changes to Santander UK’s business operations resulting from such laws, regulations and policies as well as any
deficiencies in Santander UK’s compliance with them could result in significant loss of revenue, could have an impact on Santander UK’s strategy, limit its ability to
pursue business opportunities in which Santander UK might otherwise consider engaging, limit Santander UK’s ability to provide certain products and services and/
or result in enforcement action (including the imposition of financial and other penalties). They may also affect the value of assets that Santander UK holds,
requiring Santander UK to increase its prices thereby reducing demand for Santander UK’s products or otherwise have a material adverse effect on its operations,
financial condition and prospects. Accordingly, there can be no assurance that future changes in laws, regulations and policies or in their interpretation or
application by Santander UK or by regulatory authorities will not adversely affect Santander UK.
Specific examples where regulatory changes and increased regulatory scrutiny could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial
condition and prospects include, but are not limited to:
– Banking Reform: In accordance with the provisions of the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 UK banking groups that hold significant retail deposits
(originally more than £25 billion of “core deposits”), including Santander UK, were required to separate or ‘ring-fence’ their retail banking activities from their
wholesale banking activities by 1 January 2019. Santander UK completed its ring-fencing plans in advance of the legislative deadline of 1 January 2019. However,
given the complexity of the ring-fencing regulatory regime and the material impact on the way Santander UK conducts its business operations in the UK, there is a
risk that Santander UK and/or Santander UK plc may be found to be in breach of one or more ring-fencing requirements. This might occur, for example, if
prohibited business activities are found to be taking place within the ring-fence, mandated retail banking activities are found being carried on in a UK entity
outside the ring-fenced part of the group or Santander UK breached a PRA ring-fencing rule. If Santander UK were found to be in breach of any of the ring-fencing
requirements placed upon it under the ring-fencing regime, it could be subject to supervisory or enforcement action by the PRA, the consequences of which might
include substantial financial penalties, imposition of a suspension or restriction on Santander UK’s UK activities or, in the most serious of cases, the forced
restructuring of the UK group, entitling the PRA (subject to the consent of the UK Government) to require the sale of a Santander ring-fenced bank or other parts
of the UK group. Following the publication of the final report of the Independent Panel on Ring-Fencing and Proprietary Trading on 15 March 2022, HMT
announced its intention to implement certain limited reforms to the ring-fencing regime, including (i) increasing the ring-fencing core deposit threshold from £25
billion to £35 billion, (ii) adding a new secondary ‘trading assets’ condition (exempting from the regime banks with trading assets which do not exceed 10% of
Tier 1 capital), (iii) introducing a de minimis threshold to allow ring-fenced banks to incur an exposure to relevant financial institutions (RFIs) of up to £100,000
per RFI at any one time, and (iv) allowing ring-fenced banks to establish operations outside of the UK or the European Economic Area, have exposure to RFIs that
qualify as small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs) and undertake a wider range of activities such as market standard trade finance activities or inflation
swaps. These reforms entered into force on 4 February 2025 and may lead to further review or amendment of Santander UK’s operational and compliance
arrangements in relation to the regime. In July 2025, the UK Government announced that it was committed to reforming the UK’s ringfencing rules, aimed at
striking the balance between growth and stability. While such reforms could result in the relaxation of certain aspects of the ring-fencing regime, the potential
impact of the proposed reforms on the Santander UK group are not yet known.
– Competition: Competition authorities (which in the UK include the CMA, the FCA and the PSR) can run reviews and investigations into any aspect of Santander
UK’s operations or the functioning of any markets in which Santander UK operates, which could lead to Santander UK being required to change its practices. In
addition, the CMA’s widening focus on market outcomes may also result in increased reviews by the CMA of the markets in which Santander UK operates. The
recently passed Digital Markets, Competition and Consumers Act 2024 (DMCC) which came into force on 6 April 2025, has introduced significant reforms to the
powers of competition authorities in relation to the aforementioned investigations, including substantial new fining powers. The DMCC also introduced other
wide-ranging reforms to the UK’s competition, consumer protection and digital markets regulatory landscape some of which could impact Santander UK’s
business. For instance, the DMCC grants the CMA the power to directly determine whether certain consumer protection laws have been infringed without
needing to go through the courts.
– Payments: Santander UK has been required to make systems changes and update processes to comply with a number of new payment regulations. Within the
UK, the PSR has mandated Santander UK to work on the extension of Confirmation of Payee for all payment service providers (PSPs) in the UK and has introduced
a new APP mandatory reimbursement requirement which aims to reduce the level of customer fraud. Under these standards, Santander UK assumes
responsibility for certain categories of customer losses and any inherent failings in system design may lead to fines from regulators and/or compensation being

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 226

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

paid to customers. Santander UK also expects to see significant developments in the key UK payment systems architecture, with a systems update of the high
value Clearing House Automated Payment System (CHAPS) through the Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS), BACS, the potential development of a UK central
bank digital currency or similar system, and the development of Open Banking payments and other lower value retail payment schemes. In 2024, the UK
Government published its report on the “National Payments Vision”, which sets out its ambitions for the payments sector, and is expected to generate a wider
industry review. In November 2025, HMT, the FCA, the BoE, and the PSR published Strategy for Future of Retail Payments Infrastructure, outlining five strategic
outcomes for the future of the UK’s payments landscape in 2026. This will be followed by the Payments Forward Plan, which will set out a comprehensive and
sequenced roadmap for industry-wide payments initiatives. As demonstrated by other payments initiatives, such as Open Banking and the second Payment
Services Directive (PSD2), reforms in this space have the potential to exacerbate a number of existing risks including data loss/data protection, cybersecurity,
fraud and wider financial crime risk, which in turn could give rise to increased costs, litigation risk and risk of regulatory investigation and enforcement activity.
– Data Privacy: In connection with its processing of personal data, Santander UK is subject to data protection laws and regulations – in particular, the UK GDPR (as
defined and interpreted in accordance with the Data Protection Act 2018) and the Data Protection Act 2018 (DPA). In the event Santander UK breaches any such
data protection laws, it could face significant enforcement action and/or financial penalties as well as reputational damage, which could ultimately have a
material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
– Cybersecurity: Santander UK is subject to cybersecurity regulations and cybersecurity incident reporting requirements. Cybersecurity incident reporting often
require short timeframes and there is a risk that Santander UK will fail to meet the reporting deadlines for any given cybersecurity incident. There will be legal,
reputational and regulatory risks in the event Santander UK, or the third-party providers Santander UK works with, are found to be out of compliance with these
regulations and reporting requirements.
– Consumer Duty: The FCA’s rules and guidance on a broad consumer duty that firms undertaking regulated activities with retail clients must observe (the
Consumer Duty) have been in force for all products and services since 31 July 2024. The Consumer Duty has three elements: (i) a "Consumer Principle", which
reflects the overall standards of behaviour the FCA expects from firms (a firm must act to deliver good outcomes for retail customers), (ii) three cross-cutting
rules that articulate the standards of conduct expected under the Consumer Principle (firms must act in good faith towards retail customers, avoid causing
foreseeable harm to retail customers and enable and support retail customers to pursue their financial objectives), and (iii) four outcomes that build on the
Consumer Principle and cross-cutting rules, comprising a suite of rules and guidance setting more detailed expectations for a firm's conduct in four areas that
represent the key elements of the firm-consumer relationship (product design and governance, price and value, consumer understanding and consumer
support). The Consumer Duty requires firms to end unfair charges and fees, make it as easy to switch or cancel products as it was to take them out in the first
place, provide helpful and accessible customer support, act quickly to respond to customer queries, provide timely, clear and easily understandable information
to customers regarding products and services, provide products and services that are appropriate for their customers, and focus on the real and diverse needs of
their customers, including those in vulnerable circumstances, at every stage and in each interaction. The Consumer Duty also requires firms to monitor, evidence
and report against many of the requirements. Santander UK has fully implemented the Consumer Duty, which required a review of, and changes to, Santander
UK’s products, services, policies, systems and procedures against the FCA requirements. The Consumer Duty affects elements of Santander UK’s business model
and strategy, the products and services it offers and the pricing or costs of those products and services, which may in turn affect the revenue and profits that
Santander UK is able to generate. It may result in an increase in claims to the Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) by customers alleging a breach of the
standards of the Consumer Duty or in regulatory action by the FCA. Santander UK will need to consider and navigate updated guidance and expectations as the
FCA continues to gain insight on firm's implementation of the Consumer Duty.
– Consumer redress: The FOS is the statutory body responsible for handling complaints by retail customers against regulated financial services firms. The FOS is
not bound to follow law or regulation when issuing decisions but rather must decide each complaint based on what is ‘fair and reasonable’ in the circumstances.
As a result, there can be a lack of clarity as to how the FOS will rule on a particular complaint, even where a firm believes that it has been operating within legal
and regulatory requirements. Further, while the FOS is not formally a precedent-setting body, in practice its decisions can set a precedent, requiring firms to
apply the reasoning given in one complaint to similar historic and future complaints. This means that the ramifications of a particular complaint can extend well
beyond the circumstances of the original complainant. However, the FOS will rule on a particular case, even where the bank believes that it is operating within
the legal and regulatory requirements. The FOS is not bound by its past decisions and has the ability to change its approach to cases, which can make it harder for
firms to consistently address complaints. Together, these factors mean that Santander faces legal and regulatory risk and uncertainty as a result of FOS decisions.
The UK Government is reviewing the UK’s redress system particularly with respect to so-called ‘mass redress events’ where there are large numbers of
complaints about the same issue, most recently the FCA and FOS launched a joint consultation to this effect in July 2025, which closed in October 2025.
– Outsourcing and Third-Party Risk Management: In March 2021, the PRA published Supervisory Statement 2/21 on outsourcing and third-party risk
management (SS2/21); these rules were updated in November 2024. SS2/21 is the primary source of reference for Santander UK when interpreting and
complying with its requirements on outsourcing and third-party risk management, although it should be read alongside the EBA guidelines on outsourcing
arrangements, and PRA and FCA rules and guidance on outsourcing. The scope of contracts required to meet the PRA requirements on outsourcing and third-
party risk management extends beyond that set out in the EBA guidelines on outsourcing and also captures material non-outsourcing. SS2/21 also requires that
intragroup outsourcing be subject to the same requirements and expectations as external outsourcing and should not be treated as being inherently less risky. If
Santander UK is unable to meet the PRA or FCA requirements on outsourcing and third-party risk management, it may face supervisory measures, which could in
turn have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. In November 2024, the PRA and FCA published a joint Policy
Statement setting out their final rules for critical third parties. While Santander UK is not captured by the regime, Santander UK does outsource services to
companies that will be captured which may have an impact on Santander UK’s operations and financial condition.
– Operational Resilience: In March 2021, the PRA and the FCA published Supervisory Statement 1/21 (SS1/21) and Policy Statement 21/3 (PS21/3), which set out
their final rules and guidance intended to strengthen operational resilience in the financial services sector; these rules were amended in March 2022. The
operational resilience rules required Santander UK to establish processes to identify its ‘important business services’, being those services which, if disrupted,
could cause intolerable harm to clients or pose a risk to that firm’s safety and soundness or to the stability of the UK financial system. Santander UK has identified
these services and has set impact tolerances for all important business services and delivered a framework and processes to continually assess its ability to
remain within these tolerances in severe but plausible disruption scenarios. On an ongoing basis, if Santander UK is unable to meet the PRA and FCA requirements
relating to operational resilience, it may face supervisory measures, which could in turn have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial
condition and prospects.
– Climate Change: The UK Government is rolling out new sustainability disclosure requirements, which expand on those required under the TCFD framework,
including transition plans to align to net-zero, as well as a new UK green taxonomy, for example, there are additional requirements emerging from the PRA's new
rules on enhancing banks' and insurers' approaches to managing climate-related risks (within Policy Statement S25/25 and Supervisory Statement SS5/25, which
repeal Supervisory Statement SS3/19). Santander UK Group Holdings plc is implementing the recommendations of TCFD on a group level: further reporting will
require additional gathering of data and digitalisation of reporting and there will be legal, reputational and regulatory risks should Santander UK Group Holdings
plc fail to adequately report, or to demonstrate appropriate capabilities to transition and support its customers to transition to a low carbon economy.
– Access to Cash: FSMA 2023 grants the BoE supervisory powers to regulate the UK wholesale cash distribution market, including powers to impose fines and
empowers HMT to designate firms to be subject to FCA oversight for the purpose of ensuring the reasonable provision of cash access (including free cash access).
Santander UK has been designated by HMT for these purposes and accordingly has been subject to the FCA’s access to cash rules since September 2024. The
access to cash regime is likely to have ongoing implications for Santander UK's business decisions and strategy, in particular in relation to Santander UK's branch
network and Santander UK's participation in the wholesale cash distribution market generally. In the event that the BoE imposes any fines with respect to

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 227

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Santander UK’s participation in the wholesale cash distribution market or the FCA were to take enforcement action against Santander UK in relation to retail cash
access, this could result in reputational damage and have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
– Economic Crime: The UK financial crime legislative framework has evolved significantly in recent years and is subject to regular change. Changes may occur
through planned legislative or regulatory reform, for example ongoing HMT consultations on AML Supervisory Reform and amendments to the Money
Laundering Regulations. It may also occur through reactive measures, such as the significant expansion of the UK sanctions regime and associated enforcement
efforts following the invasion of Ukraine and other geopolitical tensions. As such, Santander UK may face higher compliance costs and risks and must carefully
manage its capacity to respond to multiple regulatory changes simultaneously. Any deficiencies in Santander UK’s compliance with such regulatory changes
could result in enforcement action including the imposition of financial or other penalties. Recent changes to the UK financial crime legislative framework include
the introduction of the Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2023 (ECCTA), including the new failure to prevent fraud offence (which came into force
on 1 September 2025), the Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing (Amendment) Regulations 2023 and the Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing (High-
Risk Countries)(Amendment) Regulations 2024. Further changes to the UK financial crime legal and regulatory framework are anticipated later in 2026, most
notably HMT's proposed improvements to the effectiveness of the Money Laundering, Terrorist Financing and Transfer of Funds (Information on the Payer)
Regulations 2017 (MLRs). Other changes have already entered into force. For instance, in November 2024, the FCA updated its Financial Crime Guide, aiming to
provide clearer expectations for firms’ financial crime controls and updated guidance on emerging risks such as sanctions compliance, proliferation finance and
transaction monitoring and in July 2025 the FCA published its updated guidance on the treatment of Politically Exposed Persons. In January 2026, the UK
Government published the UK Anti-Corruption Strategy 2025, detailing its three-pillar approach to tackling corruption, based on: (i) corrupt actors, (ii) tackling UK
vulnerabilities, and (iii) global resilience. The UK Government will also consult on whether to amend the UK’s AML regulations in relation to emerging risks and
the existing whistleblowing framework. More changes may arrive as a result of further strategic initiatives such as an expanded Fraud Strategy, and a new Anti-
Money Laundering and Asset Recovery Strategy, which the UK Government has committed to publishing after conclusion of the Economic Crime Plan 2023-2026.
The Public Authorities (Fraud, Error & Recovery) Bill received Royal Assent on 2 December 2025 and presents significant implications for the financial crime and
Consumer Duty obligations of banks. Following publication of the updated Fraud Strategy, Santander UK expects to see several fraud reforms and workstreams
launched across a multi-year period, including reform to the UK’s anti-money laundering and counter-terrorist financing (AML/CTF) supervisory system by
consolidating supervision for professional services under the FCA’s oversight, which could bring both benefits and challenges to the fraud regulatory regime and
its associated costs for Santander UK. System prioritisation work across the financial crime agenda is also gathering pace following the commencement of an 18-
month pilot in January 2026. The government is also preparing for the UK’s next Financial Action Task Force (FATF) Mutual Evaluation, which will commence in
2026. As a result, we expect there will be legislative and regulatory changes perceived necessary to correct failings or issues identified in the 2018 assessment.
The first of these, replacement of the need for court approval to issue an information order with empowerment of Authorised Officers to issue them, is subject to
a targeted engagement exercise by the Home Office. Santander UK assesses that this will have immediate operational impacts as it will represent an increase in
the number of information orders/notices we receive. Further critical details underpinning an impact assessment of this proposal are still to be developed (e.g.
timescales for responses, penalties for non-compliance etc.). Any expansion of civil or criminal liability under UK financial crime reforms brings with it financial
risk in the form of penalties and reputational risk, while continued compliance with the changing UK financial crime framework may expose Santander UK to
increased operational and compliance costs, each of which could in turn have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and
prospects.
– Challenge to commission-based lending: Santander UK is monitoring the FCA’s review of motor finance commission arrangements which was announced in
January 2024. Following the Supreme Court of the United Kingdom’s judgment in relation to three motor finance commission cases (Hopcraft v Close Brothers,
Wrench v FirstRand Bank Limited and Johnson v FirstRand Bank Limited), the FCA published a consultation (CP25/27) on 7 October 2025 regarding a proposed
industry-wide motor finance consumer redress scheme. Santander UK responded to the consultation on 12 December 2025 and continues to engage
constructively with the FCA in respect of its detailed consideration of the consultation proposals. There remain significant uncertainties as to the nature, extent
and timing of redress payments. The ultimate financial impact of the redress scheme could be materially higher or lower than the amount Santander UK has
recognised as a provision. The impact cannot be accurately assessed in full until potential changes to the proposed scheme following responses to the
consultation or publication of the FCA’s final scheme rules are understood. The final scheme rules are expected to be published by the FCA by the end of March
2026. As a result, Santander UK is subject to the risk of ongoing legal and regulatory uncertainty in relation to historical motor finance commission-based lending.
Santander UK may become subject to the provisions of the Banking Act, including bail-in and write-down powers
The special resolution regime set out in the Banking Act provides HMT, the BoE, the PRA and the FCA with a variety of powers for dealing with UK deposit taking
institutions (and, in certain circumstances, their holding companies) that are failing or likely to fail, including: (i) to take a bank or bank holding company into
temporary public ownership; (ii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a private sector purchaser; or (iii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to
a ‘bridge bank’. The special resolution regime also comprises a separate insolvency procedure and administration procedure each of which is of specific application
to banks. These insolvency and administration measures may be invoked prior to the point at which an application for insolvency proceedings with respect to a
relevant institution could be made.
If an instrument or order were made under the Banking Act in respect of an entity in Santander UK, such instrument or order (as the case may be) may, among other
things: (i) result in a compulsory transfer of shares or other securities or property of such entity; (ii) have an impact on the rights of the holders of shares or other
securities issued by Santander UK or such entity or result in the nullification or modification of the terms and conditions of such shares or securities; or (iii) result in
the de-listing of the shares and/or other securities of such entity. In addition, such an order may affect matters in respect of Santander UK or such entity and/or other
aspects of the shares or other securities of Santander UK or such entity, which may negatively affect the ability of Santander UK or such entity to meet its obligations
in respect of such shares or securities.
Further, amendments to the Insolvency Act 1986 and secondary legislation have introduced changes to the treatment and ranking of certain debts with the result
that certain eligible deposits will rank in priority to the claims of ordinary (i.e. non-preferred) unsecured creditors in the event of an insolvency. This may negatively
affect the ability of unsecured creditors to recover sums due to them in an insolvency scenario.
In addition, the Bank Resolution (Recapitalisation) Act 2025 and related regulatory developments under the UK’s special resolution and depositor protection regimes
may result in Santander UK being subject to additional recapitalisation or funding obligations in a resolution scenario. Such obligations could increase Santander
UK’s costs and have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
If a ‘bail-in’ order were made under the Banking Act as amended by The Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (see further ‘Regulation of Santander UK - The
Banking Act 2009’), such an order would be based on the principle that any creditors affected by the 'bail-in' order should receive no less favourable treatment than
they would have received had the bank entered into insolvency immediately before the coming into effect of the bail-in power. The bail-in power includes the
power to cancel or write-down (in whole or in part) certain liabilities or to modify the terms of certain contracts for the purposes of reducing or deferring the
liabilities of a bank under resolution and the power to convert certain liabilities into shares (or other instruments of ownership) of the bank. The bail-in power under
the Banking Act may potentially be exercised in respect of any unsecured debt securities issued by a bank under resolution or an entity in Santander UK, regardless
of when they were issued. Accordingly, the bail-in power under the Banking Act could be exercised in respect of Santander UK’s debt securities. Public financial
support would only be used as a last resort, if at all, after having assessed and utilised, to the maximum extent practicable, the resolution tools including the bail-in
tool and the occurrence of circumstances in which bail-in powers would need to be exercised in respect of Santander UK or any entity in Santander UK would have a
material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 228

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

The PRA also has the power to make rules requiring a parent undertaking of a bank to make arrangements to facilitate the exercise of resolution powers, including a
power to require a member of a banking group to issue debt instruments. The exercise of such powers could have an impact on the liquidity of Santander UK’s debt
instruments and could materially increase Santander UK’s cost of funding.
In addition, the resolution authorities have the power to require institutions and groups to make structural changes to ensure legal and operational separation of
‘critical functions’ from other functions where necessary, or to require institutions to limit or cease existing or proposed activities in certain circumstances. As a
result, Santander UK is required to identify such ‘critical functions’ as part of its resolution and recovery planning. If used in respect of Santander UK, these ex ante
powers could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK must comply with laws and regulations relating to anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, anti-bribery and corruption, sanctions, fraud and
preventing the facilitation of tax evasion. Failure to prevent, detect or deter any illegal or improper activities could have a material adverse effect on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition or prospects
Santander UK is required to comply with applicable laws and regulations relating to AML, CTF, anti-bribery and corruption, sanctions, preventing the facilitation of
tax evasion, fraud and other laws and regulations in the jurisdictions in which Santander UK operates. These laws and regulations require Santander UK, among
other things, to conduct customer due diligence (both generally during onboarding and on an ongoing basis, and specifically in respect of sanctions and Politically-
Exposed Person screening), to ensure customer and transaction information is appropriately recorded, monitored and kept up to date and to create, update and
implement effective financial crime policies, standards and procedures detailing what is required from those responsible in order to counter financial crime risks
and prevent the facilitation of bribery, tax evasion and fraud by its employees or associated persons. Santander UK's staff are obligated to report suspicious
transactions and activity to the appropriate law enforcement agency. The policies and procedures require the implementation and embedding of effective controls
and monitoring within the businesses of Santander UK, which in turn requires ongoing changes to systems, technology and operational activities.
Santander UK is also required to conduct financial crime training for its staff. Comprehensive and risk based financial crime training at a group-wide and business
unit level is a key element of effective controls, with the FCA providing guidance on expectations within its Financial Crime Guide and the Joint Money Laundering
Steering Group (JMLSG) providing guidance on the practical interpretation of UK AML and CTF legislation. Financial crime is continually evolving, and this requires
proactive and adaptable responses from Santander UK so that it is able to deter, detect and disrupt threats and criminality effectively. Even known threats can never
be fully eliminated, and there may be instances where Santander UK could be used by other parties to engage in money laundering and other illegal or improper
activities. Santander UK’s staff, whom Santander UK rely heavily upon to identify such activities and report them, have varying degrees of experience in recognising
criminal tactics, making effective, bank-wide mandatory and specialist training provided by the Santander UK Economic Crime Academy more pertinent.
Where Santander UK outsources any of its customer due diligence or anti-financial crime operations, it remains responsible and accountable for full compliance and
any breaches. If Santander UK is unable to apply the necessary scrutiny and oversight, or if such oversight proves insufficient to detect illegal or improper activities,
there remains a risk of regulatory breach and this could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK's operations, financial condition and prospects.
Over the last decade, laws and regulations relating to financial crime have become increasingly complex and detailed and Santander UK expects this trend to
continue. Consequently, financial crime risk has become the subject of enhanced regulatory scrutiny and supervision by regulators globally which continues to
intensify. To manage regulatory scrutiny, Santander UK continues to improve its systems, adopt more sophisticated monitoring and enhance the skill set of its
compliance personnel. Navigating the increasing complexity of financial crime regulation is a significant challenge, involving overlapping requirements between
different legislation, and, in some instances, conflicts of laws. The divergence of policy approaches between the EU, UK and US in areas such as AML, and economic
sanctions, such as the evolving financial and trade sanctions imposed on Russia and Belarus due to the war in Ukraine, the easing of sanctions on Syria, the
reimposition of sanctions against Iran by the UK and EU following the ‘snapback’ process as well as the wider geopolitical friction and escalations in Iran, Israel and
the Middle East, requires additional, immediate and longer-term sanctions risk management and compliance efforts for Santander UK. The scale of these sanctions
is unprecedented, complex and poses operational and compliance risks to Santander UK. The EU, UK and US are expected to continue to use sanctions to pursue
their foreign policy interests and objectives, and the imposition of new, additional, and/or enhanced sanctions, as well as the potential lifting of others, is and will
remain unpredictable. Current sanctions and other measures, any new, additional, and/or enhanced sanctions, as well as the existing and potential further
responses from Russia, Iran or other countries to such sanctions, tensions and military actions, have resulted in, and could continue to result in, an increasingly
fragmented macroeconomic, trade and regulatory environment. The heightened regulatory, political and media focus on Santander UK's response to the war in
Ukraine, the Israel-Hamas armed conflict or any other future regional conflicts and wars that have a global impact may also increase Santander UK's exposure to
conduct and reputational risks. If Santander UK is unable to fully comply with applicable laws, regulations and expectations, its regulators and relevant law
enforcement agencies have the ability and authority to pursue civil and criminal proceedings against it, to impose significant fines and other penalties on it. Any of
these outcomes could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
UK AML and CTF legislation continues to evolve, including implementation of the ECCTA in 2024 which initiated reforms to Companies House, that targeted misuse
of UK corporate structures, extended corporate criminal liability and introduced a new “failure to prevent” fraud offence. The Money Laundering and Terrorist
Financing (High-Risk Countries) (Amendment) Regulations 2024 have resulted in direct alignment of the UK’s list of High Risk Third Countries with the “Jurisdictions
subject to a Call for Action” and the “Jurisdictions under Increased Monitoring” lists published by the FATF. The Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing
(Amendment) Regulations 2023 (which came into force in January 2024) clarified the distinction between the treatment of domestic and foreign Politically Exposed
Persons. In September 2025, HMT launched a technical consultation on a draft Statutory Instrument to amend the MLRs, proposing changes to customer due
diligence, pooled client accounts, the definition of ‘High Risk Third Country’, and the strengthening of supervisory information sharing. Changes remain subject to
finalisation and parliamentary time. The final instrument is expected to be laid in early 2026. While legislative changes can offer opportunities to increase
effectiveness and efficiency in the overall anti-financial crime system, there are also risks of divergence from Banco Santander group, and imposition of additional
legislative and regulatory requirements via Banco Santander SA and the EU. Significant change could adversely impact Santander UK’s business by increasing its
operational and compliance costs and reducing the value of its assets and operations, which would in turn have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK has also prepared for the new Failure to Prevent Fraud offence, which came into force on 1 September 2025 as part of the Economic Crime and
Corporate Transparency Act 2023. This will see large companies prosecuted if an “associated person” (including employees, agents, and subsidiaries) commits a
fraud that benefits the organisation, and the organisation did not have reasonable fraud prevention procedures in place. Such reasonable fraud prevention
procedures include establishing and maintaining top-level commitment, conducting risk assessments, implementing proportionate and risk-based fraud prevention
procedures, performing due diligence, ensuring organisation-wide communication, and undertaking ongoing monitoring and review. The potential penalty for a
breach of this offence for the company is an unlimited fine. This legal framework follows a similar legal framework already in place for corporate offences in
relation to facilitation of bribery and tax evasion.
See ‘Santander UK is subject to substantial and evolving regulation and governmental oversight: Financial Crime’ for further detail on potential changes to the UK’s
anti-money laundering and counter-terrorist financing (AML/CTF) regulatory framework.
Santander UK has been, and may in the future be, subject to negative coverage in the media about Santander UK or Santander UK's clients, including with respect to
alleged conduct such as failure to detect and/or prevent any financial crime activities or comply with financial crime compliance regulations. Negative media
coverage of this type about Santander UK, whether it has merit or not, could materially and adversely affect Santander UK’s reputation and perception among

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 229

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

current and potential clients, investors, vendors, partners, regulators and other third parties, which in turn could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operating results, financial condition and prospects as well as damage its customers’ and investors’ confidence and the market price of Santander UK’s securities.
At an operational level, geopolitical, economic, social and technological changes can provide opportunities to financial criminals and alter the risks posed to banks.
For example, war, bribery and corruption can be linked. Military resources can be illegally appropriated and sold, increasing illicit finance flows, and as a result those
benefiting from conflict may use bribery, corruption and coercion to gain access to the financial system. Effective intelligence and monitoring systems within
strengthened public/private partnerships supported by improved national capabilities to share knowledge on emerging risks and information pre-suspicion are
required to help manage these risks. However, there can be no guarantee that any intelligence shared by public authorities or other financial institutions will be
accurate or effective in helping Santander UK to combat financial crime, and if, despite such efforts, Santander UK fails to combat financial crime effectively then this
could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK requires relevant counterparties to maintain and properly apply their own appropriate anti-financial crime procedures to reduce the risk of being used
as a conduit for money laundering without its knowledge. In addition, for certain relevant counterparties’ Santander UK reviews the suitability of their internal
policies and procedures with respect to such matters (for example, under its correspondent banking relationships). There are risks that third parties, such as
suppliers and those considered ‘associated parties’ because they provide a service for or on behalf of Santander UK, could be involved in financial crime. If Santander
UK is associated with, or even accused of being associated with, financial crime (or a business involved in financial crime), its reputation could suffer and it could
become subject to civil or criminal proceedings that could result in penalties, sanctions and legal enforcement (including being added to 'black lists' that would
prohibit certain parties from engaging in transactions with it), any one of which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial
condition and prospects.
Santander UK is subject to tax-related risks
Santander UK is subject to the substance and interpretation of tax laws and is subject to routine review and audit by tax authorities in relation thereto. Santander
UK’s interpretation or application of these tax laws may differ from those of the relevant tax authorities. While Santander UK provides for potential tax liabilities that
may arise on the basis of the amounts expected to be paid to the tax authorities, the amounts ultimately paid may differ materially from the amounts provided
depending on the ultimate resolution of such matters. In general, changes to tax laws and tax rates, including as a result of policy changes by governments and/or
regulators, and penalties for failing to comply with such changes, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and
prospects. Some of these changes may be specific to the banking/financial services sectors and therefore result in Santander UK incurring an additional tax burden
when compared to other industry sectors.
Santander UK is exposed to risk of loss and damage from civil litigation and/or criminal legal and regulatory proceedings
Santander UK faces various legal and regulatory issues that have given rise and may give rise to civil or criminal litigation, arbitration, and/or criminal, tax,
administrative and/or regulatory investigations, inquiries or proceedings. Failure to adequately manage the risks arising in connection with legal and regulatory
issues, including Santander UK’s obligations under existing applicable laws and regulations or its contractual obligations, including arrangements with its customers
and suppliers, or failure to properly implement applicable laws and regulations could result in significant loss or damage including reputational damage, all of
which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Additionally, the current regulatory environment, with the continuing heightened supervisory focus, combined with the forthcoming regulatory change initiatives,
will lead to material operational and compliance costs. Relevant risks include:
– Regulators, agencies and authorities with jurisdiction over Santander UK, including the BoE, the PRA and the FCA, HMT, HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC), the CMA,
the Information Commissioner’s Office, the FOS, the PSR, the SFO, the National Crime Agency (NCA), the Office of Financial Sanctions Implementation (OFSI) or
the courts, may determine that certain aspects of Santander UK’s business have not been or are not being conducted in compliance with applicable laws or
regulations (or that policies and procedures are inadequate to ensure compliance), or, in the case of the FOS, with what is fair and reasonable in the FOS’s opinion.
Changes in policy, laws and regulations including in relation to SME dispute resolution and liability for APP fraud and unauthorised payment fraud, may have
significant consequences and lead to material implementation, operational and compliance costs.
– An adverse finding by a regulator, agency or authority could result in the need for extensive changes in systems and controls, business policies, and practices
coupled with suspension of sales, restrictions on conduct of business and operations, withdrawal of services, customer redress, fines and reputational damage.
– The increased focus on competition law in financial services and concurrent competition enforcement powers for the FCA and PSR may increase the likelihood of
competition law related inquiries or investigations initiated by either the CMA or these authorities. Santander UK may be liable for damages to third parties
harmed by Santander UK’s conduct of business. For competition law, there are efforts by governments across Europe to promote private enforcement as a means
of obtaining redress for harm suffered as a result of competition law breaches. Under the Consumer Rights Act 2015, there is scope for class actions to be used to
allow the claims of a whole class of claimants to be heard in a single action in both follow-on and standalone competition cases. The UK has seen a sharp
increase in recent years in the number of class action claims being issued in the Competition Appeals Tribunal on this basis. The tribunal has granted certification
for most cases that have reached the certification hearing stage to date, including cases that have presented novel competition law theories of harm.
– The alleged historical or current mis-selling of, or misconduct in relation to, financial products, including the alleged mis-selling of Payment Protection Insurance,
the alleged overcharging of interest, or alleged misconduct as a result of having sales practices and/or rewards structures that are deemed to have been
inappropriate, has given rise to and may in the future give rise to a risk of complaints to FOS and/or civil litigation (including claims management company driven
legal or complaints campaigns)(see Note 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for legal actions and regulatory matters). Such matters have given rise to
and may in the future give rise to the risk of regulatory enforcement action requiring Santander UK to amend sales processes, withdraw products or provide
restitution to affected customers, any of which may have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, require additional provisions to be recorded in
Santander UK’s financial statements and could adversely impact future revenues from affected products. For example, related to a recent judgment of the
Supreme Court of the United Kingdom (to which Santander UK was not a party), the FCA consulted on an industry-wide redress scheme regarding motor finance
commission arrangements. It is unclear whether a redress scheme will mitigate the risk of future complaints and / or civil litigation arising in the motor finance
context and from the Supreme Court’s judgment. In the interim there is an increased risk of complaints and / or civil litigation emerging from the Supreme Court
judgment.
– Santander UK may have held and may continue to hold bank accounts for entities or have relationships with entities such as third parties that might be or are
subject to scrutiny from various regulators and authorities, including the SFO, the NCA and regulators in the US and elsewhere, which has led and could in the
future lead to Santander UK’s conduct being reviewed as part of any such scrutiny.
– Santander UK is (and will continue from time to time to be) subject to certain legal or regulatory investigations, inquiries and proceedings, both civil and criminal
including in connection with Santander UK’s lending and payment activities, treatment of customers, relationships with Santander UK’s employees, financial
crime, and other commercial or tax matters (see Note 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for legal actions and regulatory matters). These may be
brought against Santander UK under UK legal or regulatory processes, or under legal or regulatory processes in other jurisdictions, such as the EU and the US, in
circumstances where overseas regulators and authorities may have jurisdiction by virtue of its activities or operations.
– In view of the inherent difficulty of predicting the outcome of legal or regulatory proceedings, particularly where opportunistic claimants seek very large or
indeterminate damages, cases present novel legal theories, involve a large number of parties or are in the early stages of discovery, or where the approaches of
regulators or authorities to legal or regulatory issues and sanctions applied are subject to change, Santander UK cannot state with confidence what the eventual
outcome of any pending matters will be and any such pending matters are not disclosed by name because they are under assessment. Santander UK’s provisions

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 230

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

in respect of any pending legal or regulatory proceedings are made in accordance with relevant accounting requirements. These provisions are reviewed
periodically. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such legal or regulatory proceedings, there can be no assurance that the ultimate resolution of
these matters will not exceed the provisions currently accrued by Santander UK. As a result, the outcome of a particular matter (whether currently provided or
otherwise) could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
– The developing legal and regulatory regime in which Santander UK operates requires it to be compliant across all aspects of its business, including the training,
authorisation and supervision of personnel and the development of systems, processes and documentation. If Santander UK fails to be compliant with relevant
law or regulation, there is a risk of an adverse impact on its business from more proactive regulatory intervention (including by any overseas regulator which
establishes jurisdiction), investigation and enforcement activity leading to sanctions, fines, civil or criminal penalties, or other action imposed by or agreed with
the regulatory authorities, as well as increased costs associated with responding to regulatory inquiries and defending regulatory actions. Customers of financial
services institutions, including Santander UK’s customers, may seek redress if they consider that they have suffered loss for example as a result of the misselling
of a particular product, or through incorrect application or enforcement of the terms and conditions of a particular product or in connection with a competition
law infringement and Santander UK’s rights under a contract with its customers may in certain circumstances be unenforceable or otherwise impaired.
– The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Designated Consumer Bodies) Order 2013 (the Designated Consumer Bodies Order) was made on 16 December
2013 and came into force on 1 January 2014. The Designated Consumer Bodies Order designates the National Association of Citizens Advice Bureaux, the
Consumers’ Association, the General Consumer Council for Northern Ireland and the National Federation of Self Employed and Small Businesses as consumer
bodies that may submit a ‘super-complaint’ to the FCA. A ‘super-complaint’ is a complaint made by any of these designated consumer bodies to the FCA on behalf
of consumers of financial services where it considers that a feature, or a combination of features, of the market for financial services in the UK is seriously
damaging the interests of these customers. Complaints about damage to the interests of individual consumers will continue to be dealt with by the FOS. If a
‘super-complaint’ were to be made against a Santander UK entity by a designated consumer body under the Designated Consumer Bodies Order, any response
published, or action taken by the FCA could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Given the: (i) requirement for compliance with an increasing volume of relevant laws and regulations; (ii) more proactive regulatory intervention and enforcement
and more punitive sanctions and penalties for infringement; (iii) inherent unpredictability of litigation; (iv) evolution of the jurisdiction of FOS and CMA and related
impacts; (v) potential for the development of a voluntary dispute resolution service to oversee the resolution of complaints from SMEs that are outside the FOS’
jurisdiction; (vi) introduction of a voluntary code to enhance protection for customers who are victims of APP fraud; and (vii) high volume of new regulations or policy
changes from multiple regulators and authorities which Santander UK is mandated to implement within compressed timescales; it is possible that related costs or
liabilities could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Operational risks
Failure to successfully apply or to improve Santander UK’s credit risk management systems could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operations, financial condition and prospects
As a commercial banking group, one of the main types of risks inherent in Santander UK’s business is credit risk. For example, an important feature of Santander
UK’s credit risk management system is to employ Santander UK’s own credit rating system to assess the particular risk profile of a customer. This system is primarily
generated internally, but, in the case of counterparties with a global presence, also builds off the credit assessment assigned by other Banco Santander group
members. As this process involves detailed analysis of the customer or credit risk, taking into account both quantitative and qualitative factors, it is subject to human
and IT systems errors. Where exercising their judgement on current or future credit risk behaviour of Santander UK’s customers, Santander UK’s employees may not
always be able to assign a correct credit rating, which may result in a larger exposure to higher credit risks than indicated by Santander UK’s risk rating system.
Santander UK may not be able to detect all possible risks before they occur, or its employees may not be able to effectively apply its credit policies and guidelines
due to limited tools available to Santander UK, which may increase its credit risk.
Any failure to effectively apply, consistently monitor and refine Santander UK’s credit risk management systems may result in an increase in the level of non-
performing loans and higher losses than expected, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK‘s business is subject to risks related to data and adverse impacts on operations if data management policies and procedures are not
sufficiently robust
Santander UK's operations rely on the effective use of data to manage and grow its business and deliver the overall strategy. Santander UK uses data to serve its
customers, satisfy its regulatory requirements and run its operations. If Santander UK's data is not accurate and timely, this could impact its ability to serve
customers, operate with resiliency or meet regulatory requirements. From a business perspective, accurate and detailed customer data is critical for delivering
customer expectations in terms of new and improved products and services. Lack of good quality data could also result in competitive disadvantages by increasing
costs in terms of manual interventions, adjustments, and reconciliations. Investment is being made in data tools and in maturing a strong data culture across the
organisation to address some of the data challenges and prepare a strong foundation for the future. Any such failure to effectively use data or maintain effective
data management policy and procedures could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 231

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Santander UK’s business is subject to risks related to cybersecurity
Santander UK’s systems, software and networks may be vulnerable to unauthorised access, misuse, computer viruses or other malicious code and other events that
could have a security impact. The interception, misuse or mishandling of personal, confidential or proprietary information sent to or received from a client, vendor,
service provider, counterparty or third party could result in legal liability, regulatory action and reputational harm, and therefore have a material adverse impact on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
In particular, in recent years the computer systems of companies and organisations have been targeted by cyber criminals, activists and nation-state-sponsored
groups. Like other financial institutions, Santander UK manages and holds confidential personal information of customers in the conduct of its banking operations,
as well as a large number of assets. Consequently, Santander UK has been, and continues to be, subject to a range of cybersecurity threats, such as ransomware,
malware via the supply chain, phishing and denial of service.
Cybersecurity incidents could result in the loss of significant amounts of customer data and other sensitive information, as well as significant levels of liquid assets
(including cash). In addition, cybersecurity incidents could give rise to the disablement of Santander UK’s digital systems used to service its customers. Any material
disruption or degradation of Santander UK’s systems, software or networks could cause information, including data related to customer requests, to be lost or to be
delivered to Santander UK’s clients with delays or errors, which could reduce demand for Santander UK’s services and products. As attempted attacks continue to
evolve in both scope and sophistication, Santander UK may incur significant costs to modify or enhance its protective measures against such attacks, or to
investigate or remediate any vulnerability or resulting breach, or in communicating any cybersecurity incidents to its customers. If Santander UK fails to effectively
manage its cybersecurity risk, by, for example, failing to adhere to its cybersecurity policies, procedures or controls, the impact could be significant and may include
harm to Santander UK reputation and make Santander UK liable for the payment of customer compensation, regulatory penalties and fines. Factors such as failing
to apply critical security patches from its technology providers, to manage out obsolete technology or to update Santander UK’s processes in response to new
threats could also give rise to these consequences, which, if they occur, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and
prospects. This might also include significant increases in the premiums paid on cyber insurance policies or changes to policy limits and cover.
In addition, Santander UK may also be affected by cybersecurity incidents against national critical infrastructures in the UK or elsewhere, for example, the
telecommunications network or cloud computing service providers used by Santander UK. In common with other financial institutions, Santander UK is dependent
on such networks to provide digital banking services to its customers, connect its systems to suppliers and counterparties, and allow its staff to work remotely. Any
cybersecurity incidents against these networks could negatively affect its ability to service its customers. As Santander UK does not operate these networks it has
limited ability to protect Santander UK’s business from the adverse effects of cybersecurity incidents against it or against its counterparties and key national and
financial market infrastructure. Further, the domestic and global financial services industry, including key financial market infrastructure, may be the target of
cybersecurity disruption and attack by cyber criminals, activists or geopolitical activists looking to cause economic instability.
Further, the risk of cyberattacks on companies and institutions could increase as a result of geopolitical turmoil. For example, Santander UK has faced a heightened
risk of cyberattacks as a result of Russia’s military action against Ukraine; and the Israel-Hamas armed conflict and this risk may be further increased by other future
regional conflicts and wars that have a global impact serve to further heighten such risk. Such attacks could adversely affect Santander UK's ability to maintain or
enhance its cybersecurity and data protection measures. Santander UK continues to see increasing ransomware attacks across sectors driven by supply chain tool
compromises, among other factors, and expect this trend to continue.
Santander UK’s business is subject to risks related to the developing fields of artificial intelligence and machine learning
Artificial intelligence (AI) developments in the banking industry will test Santander UK's preparedness to safely manage and respond to the evolution of AI and
machine learning given the velocity, pace and scale of change. This includes the identification of potential use cases for responsible adoption of AI and machine
learning in Santander UK’s own operations, as well as managing the threats that third party use of AI may pose. The risks caused by AI include, among others, data
poisoning, potential bias, discrimination, misuse and increased exposure to cybersecurity, legal liability and fraud risk. Increased availability of AI malware
technologies may also increase the sophistication and frequency of opportunistic attacks. Santander UK has a planned phase approach to AI over a three-year period
and, to support that, it is improving data quality to enable model development. However, any failure to evaluate, actively manage and closely monitor risk during all
phases of the development and implementation of AI into Santander UK’s operations could introduce new vulnerabilities and security flaws and have a material
adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK is exposed to risk from potential non-compliance with regulations, policies, employee misconduct, human error, negligence and deliberate
acts of harm or dishonesty, including fraud
Santander UK is exposed to risk from potential non-compliance with policies, employee misconduct, human error, negligence and deliberate acts of harm or
dishonesty, including fraud. It is not always possible to deter or prevent employee misconduct or non-compliance with policies and such errors, acts, omissions and
failures and the precautions Santander UK takes to detect and prevent this activity may not always be effective due to employee misconduct and circumvention of
controls. Any instances could result in regulatory sanctions and cause reputational or financial harm and therefore have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operations, financial condition and prospects.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 232

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Any failure to effectively manage changes in Santander UK’s information technology infrastructure and management information systems in a timely
manner could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects
Santander UK’s businesses and its ability to remain competitive depends to a significant extent upon the functionality of its information technology systems,
software and networks and on its ability to upgrade, evolve and expand the capacity of its information technology infrastructure on a timely and cost-effective basis.
The proper functioning of Santander UK’s financial control, risk management, credit analysis and reporting, accounting, customer service, financial crime, conduct
and compliance and other information technology systems, as well as the communication networks between branches and main data processing centres, are
critical to its customers, businesses and its ability to compete. Investments and improvements in Santander UK’s information technology infrastructure are regularly
reviewed with a view to retain competitive advantage and to ensure that resilience remains within acceptable levels. Conversely any failure to effectively improve,
evolve, expand or upgrade its information technology systems, software infrastructure and networks or information technology infrastructure in a timely manner
could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects, and could cause reputational damage to Santander UK.
From time-to-time Santander UK is required to migrate information relating to its customers to new information technology systems. Any failure to manage such
migration effectively and efficiently could have a negative impact on Santander UK’s ability to provide services to its customers and could cause financial and
reputational damage to Santander UK, along with regulatory scrutiny and potential enforcement action.
Santander UK expects changes to its programmes of systems to have an impact on its risk profile, from a technology, environmental, social and corporate
governance and regulatory perspective. Whether it is the opportunities from adoption of cloud technology, systems to support important regulatory initiatives, or
the desire to identify, prioritise and remove obsolete systems from operations, the operational risk associated with changes to programmes of systems is likely to
increase and this will therefore remain an area of key focus in Santander UK’s risk management. While internal controls aim to reduce the risk to acceptable levels,
there can be no assurance that Santander UK will not suffer material losses from such operational risks in the future, which could have a material adverse impact on
Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK may be exposed to unidentified or unanticipated risks despite its risk management policies, procedures and methods and may be exposed to
risk related to errors in Santander UK’s risk modelling
The management of risk is an integral part of Santander UK’s activities. Santander UK seeks to monitor and manage its risk exposure through a variety of risk
reporting systems. For a further description of Santander UK's risk management framework see the ‘Risk review’. While Santander UK employs a broad and
diversified set of risk monitoring and risk mitigation techniques and strategies, they may not be fully effective in mitigating Santander UK’s risk exposure in all
economic market environments or against all types of risk, including risks that Santander UK fails to identify or anticipate.
Some of Santander UK’s tools and metrics for managing risk are based upon its use of observed historical market behaviour. Santander UK applies statistical and
other tools to these observations to arrive at quantifications of its risk exposures. These tools and metrics may fail to predict future risk exposures. These risk
exposures could, for example, arise from factors Santander UK did not anticipate or correctly evaluate in its statistical models. This would limit its ability to manage
its risks. Santander UK’s losses thus could be significantly greater than the historical measures indicate. In addition, Santander UK’s quantified modelling does not
take all risks into account. Santander UK’s more qualitative approach to managing those risks could prove insufficient, exposing it to material, unanticipated losses.
Santander UK could face adverse consequences as a result of decisions, which may lead to actions by management based on models that include errors or are
otherwise inadequately developed, implemented or used, or as a result of the modelled outcome being misunderstood. If existing or potential customers or
counterparties believe its risk management is inadequate, they could take their business elsewhere or seek to limit their transactions with Santander UK. These
occurrences could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK relies on third parties for important infrastructure support, products and services
Third-party providers provide key components of Santander UK’s business infrastructure such as loan and deposit servicing systems, back office and business
process support, information technology production and support, internet connections and network access. Relying on these third-party providers is a source of
operational risk, including with respect to security breaches affecting Santander UK's third parties and other parties that interact with these providers. As the use
and depth of Santander UK’s relationship with third parties increases, including the use of AI and cloud-based services, Santander UK increasingly faces the risk of
operational failure with respect to its systems. Santander UK may be required to take steps to protect the integrity of its operational systems, thereby increasing its
operational costs. In addition, any problems caused by these third parties, including as a result of them not providing Santander UK their services for any reason, or
performing their services poorly, could adversely affect Santander UK’s ability to deliver products and services to customers and otherwise conduct its business,
which could lead to reputational damage, litigation and regulatory investigations and intervention. Replacing these third-party vendors or affiliates could also entail
significant delays and expense. Further, the operational and regulatory risk Santander UK faces as a result of these arrangements may be increased to the extent
that it restructures such arrangements. Any restructuring could involve significant expense to Santander UK and entail significant delivery and execution risk which
could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.
Santander UK relies on recruiting, retaining and developing appropriate senior management and skilled personnel
Santander UK’s ability to attract, develop, and retain appropriately skilled and experienced personnel is critical to the successful delivery of its strategy.
The financial services sector continues to experience strong competition for talent, particularly in specialist areas such as data, technology, and digital. This
competition, together with planned business transformations, increases the risk that Santander UK may be unable to secure or retain the skills of its personnel
required to deliver its business objectives. Furthermore, individuals with these qualities are very sought after by all organisations, not just the banking industry, and
Santander UK’s ability to attract and hire this talent will determine how quickly the bank is able to respond to technological change.
If Santander UK fails or is unable to attract, develop, motivate, and retain qualified professionals, this could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s
operations, financial condition, and prospects.
In addition, the financial services industry has and may continue to experience more stringent regulation of employee compensation, which could have an adverse
effect on Santander UK’s ability to hire or retain the most qualified employees.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 233

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Financial reporting risk
Santander UK’s financial statements are based in part on judgements and accounting estimates which, if inaccurate, could cause material misstatement of
Santander UK’s future financial results and financial condition
The preparation of Santander UK's consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires management to make judgements, estimates and
assumptions in applying the accounting policies that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Due to the inherent uncertainty in
making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based on amounts which differ from those estimates. Estimates, judgements and assumptions
are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under
the circumstances. Management has considered the impact of developments in principal risks and uncertainties, as set out in the Risk review, on critical judgements
and accounting estimates.
The significant judgements, apart from those involving estimation, made by management in applying Santander UK's accounting policies in these financial
statements (key judgements) and the key sources of estimation uncertainty that may have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount
of assets and liabilities within the next financial year (key estimates), which together are considered critical to Santander UK's results and financial position, are set
out in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in 'Critical judgements and accounting estimates'. Any material differences between estimates and actual
results reported in any given financial period, or any material adjustments to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, could result in reputational damage to
Santander UK and could have a material adverse effect on its future financial results and financial condition.
Changes in accounting standards could affect reported earnings
The accounting standard setters and other regulatory bodies periodically change the financial accounting and reporting standards that govern the preparation of
Santander UK’s Consolidated Financial Statements. These changes can materially affect how Santander UK records and reports its financial condition and financial
results. In some cases, Santander UK could be required to apply a new or revised standard retroactively, resulting in the restatement of prior period financial
statements. Any change in reported earnings as a result of the foregoing could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s future financial results and
financial condition.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 234

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Regulation of the Santander UK group
As a financial services group, Santander UK is subject to extensive financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in the UK and in each other
location in which Santander UK operates. An intensive approach to supervision is maintained in the UK by the PRA and the FCA. As well as being subject to UK
regulation, as a result of forming part of the Banco Santander group, Santander UK is also affected by other regulators, such as the Banco de España and the ECB, as
well as various legal and regulatory regimes (including in the US) that have extra-territorial effect. Extensive legislation and implementing regulations affecting the
financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect Santander UK’s business, including Spain, the US, the EU and other
jurisdictions. In the UK and elsewhere, there is continuing political, competitive and regulatory scrutiny of the banking industry. Political involvement in the
regulatory process, in the behaviour and governance of the UK banking sector and in the major financial institutions in which the UK government has a direct
financial interest is likely to continue.
Approach of the FCA
As per FSMA, the FCA's strategic objective is to ensure that the relevant markets function well. In support of this, the FCA has three operational objectives: to secure
an appropriate degree of protection for consumers, to protect and enhance the integrity of the UK financial system; and to promote effective competition in the
interests of consumers. Following the entry into force of FSMA 2023, the FCA also has a secondary competitiveness and growth objective, to facilitate the
international competitiveness and medium- to long-term growth of the UK economy.
The FCA Handbook sets out rules and guidance across a range of issues with which financial institutions are required to comply, including high level principles of
business and detailed conduct of business standards and reporting standards.
Approach of the PRA
As per FSMA, the PRA's general objective is to promote the safety and soundness of the firms which it regulates (with respect to insurers, the PRA also has a second
objective of contributing to the securing of an appropriate degree of protection for policyholders). The PRA also has a secondary objective to facilitate effective
competition in the markets for services provided by PRA authorised firms and, following the entry into force of FSMA 2023, is subject to the same secondary
competitiveness and growth objective as the FCA.
The PRA Rulebook includes rules relating to capital adequacy and liquidity, among several other things.
US regulation
Within the Dodd-Frank Act, the so-called Volcker Rule, prohibits ‘banking entities’, including the Santander UK group, from engaging in certain forms of proprietary
trading or from sponsoring or investing in certain covered funds, in each case subject to certain exemptions, including exemptions permitting foreign banking
entities to engage in trading and fund activities that take place solely outside of the US. The Volcker Rule also contains exclusions and certain exemptions for
market-making, hedging, underwriting, trading in US government and agency obligations as well as certain foreign government obligations, and also permits
ownership interests in certain types of funds to be retained. The Santander UK group has policies, procedures and controls in place designed to achieve compliance
with the Volcker Rule.
The Banking Act 2009
The special resolution regime set out in the Banking Act 2009 provides HMT, the BoE, the PRA and the FCA with a variety of powers for dealing with UK deposit
taking institutions (and, in certain circumstances, their holding companies) that are failing or likely to fail, including: (i) to take a bank or bank holding company into
temporary public ownership; (ii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a private sector purchaser; or (iii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to
a bridge bank. The special resolution regime also comprises a separate insolvency procedure and administration procedure each of which is of specific application to
banks. These insolvency and administration measures may be invoked prior to the point at which an application for insolvency proceedings with respect to a
relevant institution could be made.
The Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 further amended the Banking Act 2009 to introduce a UK ‘bail-in power’ to implement the EU’s Bank Recovery and
Resolution Directive (BRRD), which contains a bail-in power similar to that contained in the Banking Act 2009 and requires EU Member States to provide resolution
authorities with the power to write-down the claims of unsecured creditors of a failing institution and to convert unsecured claims to equity (subject to certain
parameters). The UK bail-in power is an additional power available to the UK resolution authorities under the special resolution regime provided for in the Banking
Act 2009. This enables them to recapitalise a failing institution by allocating losses to such institution’s shareholders and unsecured creditors, subject to the rights
of such shareholders and unsecured creditors to be compensated under a bail-in compensation order.
The Bank Resolution (Recapitalisation) Act 2025, which received royal assent on 15 May 2025, amends FSMA 2000 to empower the BoE to require the FSCS to make
“recapitalisation payments” to the BoE or another person when stabilisation powers are used to achieve a sale or a bridge bank transfer. The PRA published
implementing rules in PS 13/25 on 16 July 2025 and consulted on its depositor protection regime in CP 4/25 on 31 March 2025, with final rules published in PS
24/25 on 18 November 2025 which, among other things, increased the deposit protection limit to £120,000.
Competition
The CMA is the UK’s main competition authority responsible for ensuring that competition and markets work well for consumers. In addition, under the Banking
Reform Act, as of 1 April 2015, the FCA has the power to enforce against breaches of the Competition Act 1998 and to refer markets to the CMA for in-depth
investigation in the areas of financial services in the UK. As of 1 April 2015, the PSR also has an objective and powers equivalent to those of the FCA to promote
competition in the payments industry.
Payments
Santander UK has observed a number of key decisions shaping the future of payments regulation and infrastructure in the UK. Santander UK has also been required
to implement a number of critical systems changes to comply with updates to UK payments regulation in 2025.
In November 2025, HMT, the FCA, the BoE, and the PSR published The Future of Retail Payments Infrastructure, outlining five strategic outcomes for the future of
the UK’s payments landscape. This will be followed by the Payments Forward Plan, which will set out a comprehensive and sequenced roadmap for industry-wide
payments initiatives.
Santander UK also expects significant developments across the UK’s core payments architecture, including systems upgrades of the high-value Clearing House
Automated Payment System (CHAPS); the potential introduction of a UK central bank digital currency or similar systems; and further evolution of Open Banking
payments and other low-value retail payment schemes.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 235

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Financial Crime
Santander UK is subject to all relevant UK legal and regulatory obligations relating to financial crime. Although the UK is no longer obliged to follow EU obligations
and regulations following Britain’s exit from the EU, as a wholly owned subsidiary of an EU headquartered bank, Santander UK is subject to Santander Group policies
which incorporate EU and relevant US legal and regulatory obligations.
In the UK, Santander UK is subject to the Money Laundering, Terrorist Financing and Transfer of Funds (Information on the Payer) Regulations 2017 (MLRs)(as
amended). Recent amendments clarified the distinction between the treatment of domestic and foreign Politically Exposed Persons (PEPs), and replaced the UK’s
list of h igh-risk third countries with a definition that implements and is updated automatically with reference to the FATF's list of High-Risk Jurisdictions subject to a
Call for Action and Jurisdictions under Increased Monitoring. Santander UK is also subject to the Sanctions and Anti-Money Laundering Act 2018 as the primary
legislation in place to establish autonomous sanctions regimes. The UK has several autonomous sanctions regimes Santander UK is required to comply with,
primarily to comply with UN Security Council Resolutions and UK led policy objectives.
Future reform to the MLRs is also on the horizon, following HMT consultation in 2024. It focused on four core themes: making customer due diligence more
proportionate and effective; strengthening system coordination; providing clarity on scope of the MLRs; and reforming registration requirements for the trust
register service. In September 2025 HMT published its response and launched a technical consultation on a draft Statutory Instrument. This includes changes to
customer due diligence, requirements for pooled client accounts, refinement of the definition of ‘High Risk Third Country’ and enhanced supervisory information
sharing. Changes remain subject to finalisation and parliamentary time.
Broader reform of the UK’s AML supervisory regime is forthcoming, which should make the FCA the single body responsible for all AML and CTF supervision for the
legal and accountancy sectors, trust and company service providers, and potentially others. This will not directly affect Santander UK as it is already supervised by
the FCA, though if the desired outcome of improved AML supervision elsewhere materialises, this should bring indirect benefits to Santander UK.
The Public Authorities (Fraud, Error & Recovery) Bill received Royal Assent on 2 December 2025 and presents significant implications for the bank's financial crime
obligations. The Department for Work & Pensions (DWP) is consulting with the financial services industry on the Codes of Practice set to accompany the legislation.
Most notably, DWP will gain powers to compel banks to provide certain account and other information in support of benefit fraud investigations.
The Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act (ECCTA) has initiated reforms to Companies House to combat misuse of UK corporate structures. This includes
the phased introduction of mandatory Companies House identity-verification requirements for Directors and Persons with Significant Control from 18 November
2025. ECCTA also introduced a "failure to prevent fraud" offence, which came into force on 1 September 2025. This offence has extra-territorial reach, similar to the
two existing "failure to prevent" offences of bribery, and the facilitation of tax evasion. The new offence carries an unlimited fine. To avoid liability, organisations
must ensure they have ‘reasonable prevention procedures’ to prevent fraud in place, informed by six principles, including senior-level responsibility, risk assessment
and due diligence. This aligns with the legislative framework of the two other "failure to prevent" offences.
In November 2024, the FCA published a policy statement on updates to its Financial Crime Guide (FCG), aiming to clarify its expectations for firms’ financial crime
controls (such as firms ensuring consistency with their Consumer Duty obligations) and to provide updated guidance on emerging risks including in relation to
sanctions compliance, proliferation finance and transaction monitoring. In July 2025, the FCA published updates to their guidance on the treatment of PEPs,
clarifying aspects of the PEP definition, risk-based due diligence, and customer approval expectations.
The UK published its fourth National Risk Assessment (NRA) of Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing in July 2025. In parallel, the NCA and FCA announced nine
economic crime system priorities for the UK’s regulated sector, including cash-based money-laundering, the exploitation of money mules, and fraud associated with
overseas jurisdictions. These are aligned with the NRA, and were collaboratively developed by the NCA, FCA, Home Office, HMT, UK Finance and industry, including
Santander UK.
In December 2025, the UK Government published the UK Anti-Corruption Strategy 2025, detailing its three-pillar approach to tackling corruption: (i) corrupt actors,
(ii) tackling UK vulnerabilities, and (iii) global resilience. Proposals include the aforementioned reform of the UK's AML supervisory regime. The UK Government will
also consult on whether to amend the UK’s AML regulations in relation to emerging risks and the existing whistleblowing framework.
Recent years have seen sustained regulatory activity and significant legislative changes to the UK’s financial-crime framework, a trend expected to continue through
2026. In addition, further commitments can be expected from a variety of initiatives, including government publications such as the Fraud Strategy, any legislative
or policy measures introduced ahead of the UK’s next FATF Mutual Evaluation and outcomes following international Summits on Fraud (16-17 March 2026) and
Countering Illicit Finance (23-24 June 2026).
Consumer Duty
The FCA’s Consumer Duty has been fully in force for all products and services since 31 July 2024. The Consumer Duty aims to enhance and improve consumer
protections, requiring firms to deliver good outcomes for customers and to consider the needs, characteristics and objectives of the customer and how they behave
at every stage of the customer journey in order to deliver good outcomes. Firms need to consider and navigate updated guidance and expectations as the FCA
continues to gain insights on firms' implementation of the Consumer Duty.
In September 2025, the FCA published a letter to the Chancellor of Exchequer, setting out the FCA’s four-point action plan to reduce the burden of the Consumer
Duty on wholesale firms. The plan includes an FCA consultation in the first half of 2026 on changes to the application and requirements of the Consumer Duty. The
FCA also shared a new webpage on its Consumer Duty focus areas for 2025/2026, setting out its priorities for reform.
In July 2025, the FCA published a Policy Statement (PS25/11) which implements the first outcomes of its Mortgage Rule Review to simplify rules and increase
flexibility for firms, while maintaining protections under the Consumer Duty and making it easier for consumers to manage their mortgages. The FCA has also
removed two pieces of non-Handbook guidance that are no longer necessary in light of the new rules: FG13/7 (Dealing fairly with interest-only mortgage
customers who risk being unable to repay their loan); and FG24/2 (Guidance for firms supporting their existing mortgage borrowers impacted by the rising cost of
living). The amended rules and guidance are set out in the Mortgage Rule Review (Execution-Only, Affordability and Expired Terms) Instrument 2025 (FCA 2025/34),
which came into force immediately. Firms are permitted, but not required, to adopt the new rules which provide them with more flexibility.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 236

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Articles of Association
The following is a summary of the Articles of Association (the Articles) of the Company.
Santander UK plc is a public limited company incorporated and registered in England and Wales under the Companies Act 2006, with registered number 2294747.
The Articles specifically state and limit the objects of the Company which are therefore restricted.
A Director shall not vote on, or be counted in the quorum in relation to, any resolution of the Directors in respect of any contract in which he has an interest, except if
no conflict of interest could reasonably be expected to arise from that interest, or any resolution of the Directors concerning his own appointment, or the settlement
or variation of the terms or the termination of his or her appointment. Directors are entitled to such remuneration as the directors determine for their services to the
Company as directors and for any other service which they undertake for the Company. Directors may delegate to a person or committee the determination of any
fee, remuneration or other benefit which may be paid or provided to any Director. No Director is required to retire by reason of his or her age, nor do any special
formalities apply to the appointment or re-election of any Director who is over any age limit. No shareholding qualification for Directors is required.
The Company may issue shares with such rights or restrictions as may be determined by ordinary resolution or, if no such resolution has been passed or so far as the
resolution does not make specific provision, as the Directors may decide. The Company may by ordinary resolution declare dividends, and the Directors may decide
to declare or pay interim dividends. No dividend may be declared or paid unless it is in accordance with shareholders’ respective rights. If dividends are unclaimed
for twelve years, the right to the dividend ceases. All dividends or other sums which are payable in respect of shares, and unclaimed after having been declared or
become payable, may be invested or otherwise made use of by the Directors for the benefit of the Company until claimed.
Preference shares entitle the holder to receive a preferential dividend payment at a fixed or variable rate, such dividend to be payable on a date determined by the
Board prior to the allotment of the shares. The Board will also determine whether these dividend rights are cumulative or non-cumulative. The holders of any series
of preference shares will only be entitled to receive notice of and to attend any general meeting of the Company if the preference dividend on the preference shares
of such series has not, at the date of the notice of the general meeting, been paid in full in respect of such dividend periods as the Board may prior to allotment
determine, in which case the holders of the preference shares will be entitled to speak and/or vote upon any resolution proposed; or, if a resolution is proposed at
the general meeting for, or in relation to, the winding up of the Company, or varying, altering or abrogating any of the rights, privileges, limitations or restrictions
attached to the preference shares of such series, in which case the holders of the preference shares of such series will be entitled to speak and/or vote only upon
such resolution; or in such other circumstances, and upon and subject to such terms, as the Board may determine prior to allotment. Unless the Board determines,
prior to allotment, that the series of preference shares shall be non-redeemable, each series shall be redeemable at the option of the Company on any date as the
Board may determine prior to the date of allotment. On redemption the Company shall pay the amount due. The formula for calculation of any relevant redemption
premium is set out in the Articles of Association.
On a distribution of assets on winding up of the Company or return of capital (other than on a redemption or purchase by the Company of any of its share capital),
members holding preference shares shall in respect thereof be entitled to receive, out of the surplus assets remaining after payment of the Company’s liabilities, an
amount equal to the amount paid up or credited as paid up on the preference shares together with such premium (if any) as may be determined by the Board prior
to allotment thereof (and so that the Board may determine that such premium is payable only in specified circumstances).
Ordinary shares are transferable. Holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive notice of and to attend any general meeting of the Company. Subject to any
special terms as to voting upon which any shares may be issued or may for the time being be held, or any suspension or any abrogation of special rights, as set out
in the Articles of Association, on a show of hands every member who is present in person at a general meeting of the Company shall have one vote and every proxy
present who has been duly appointed by a member shall have one vote. On a poll every member who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for every
share of which he is the holder.
Subject to the prior rights of holders of preference shares, the Company pays dividends on its ordinary shares only out of its distributable profits and not out of share
capital. Dividends are determined by the Board.
The Company’s Articles of Association authorise it to issue redeemable shares, but the Company’s ordinary shares are not redeemable. Where the shares are partly
paid, the Board may make further calls upon the holders in respect of any sum whether in respect of nominal value or premium that is unpaid on their shares. There
are no provisions discriminating against any existing or prospective shareholder as a result of such shareholder owning a substantial number of shares of any class.
Subject to the provisions of the UK Companies Act 2006, all or any of the rights attached to any class of shares (whether or not the Company is being wound up) may
be varied with the consent in writing of the holders of not less than three-quarters in nominal value of the issued shares of that class or with the sanction of a
special resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of those shares. Additional quorum and voting requirements apply to such meeting.
General meetings shall be called by at least 14 clear days’ notice (that is, excluding the day of the general meeting and the day on which the notice is given). A
general meeting may be called by shorter notice if it is so agreed, in the case of an annual general meeting, by all the shareholders having a right to attend and vote,
or in other cases, by a majority in number of the shareholders having a right to attend and vote, being a majority together holding not less than 95% in nominal
value of the shares giving the right. The notice shall specify the date, time and place of the meeting and the general nature of the business to be transacted.
There are no restrictions on the rights to own securities for either resident or non-resident shareholders, other than those to which they may be subject as a result
of laws and regulations in their home jurisdiction.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 237

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Board of Directors
1 Tom Scholar
Chair
Appointed on 18 July 2025 (Board Chair), previously Independent Non-Executive Director from 16 May 2025.
Skills and experience
Tom is a former civil servant and held the position of Permanent Secretary to the Treasury from 2016 to 2022. During his earlier civil service career he was the UK’s
Executive Director at the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank from 2001 to 2007, Chief of Staff to the Prime Minister from 2007 to 2008, Managing
Director and then Second Permanent Secretary to the Treasury leading the department’s work on financial stability and international issues from 2008 to 2013, and
senior adviser to the Prime Minister on European and global economic issues, and the UK's G7, G20 and EU Sherpa, from 2013 to 2016.
Other principal appointments
Chair of the Board of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Chair of Nomura International plc, Nomura Bank International plc and Nomura Europe Holdings plc.
Board Committee memberships
Board Nomination & Governance Committee (Chair).
2 Mahesh Aditya
Executive Director and Chief Executive Officer
Appointed Chief Executive Officer on 1 March 2026.
Skills and experience
Mahesh joined the Banco Santander group in 2017 as Chief Operating Officer of Santander Holdings USA, Inc and took the position of US Chief Risk Officer in 2018
until 2019 when he became Santander Consumer USA CEO, holding that position until 2023. He has been Santander's Group Chief Risk Officer since 2023. Mahesh
has over 30 years' experience in financial services with a particular focus on international markets Risk Management. He specialises in building organisations,
establishing control processes, project management and managing through a variety of regulatory environments.
Other principal appointments
Chief Executive Officer and Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*.
3 Angel Santodomingo
Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer
Appointed Chief Financial Officer on 5 March 2024.
Skills and experience
Angel joined the Banco Santander group in 2005 as Head of International Development and Asset Management and subsequently became Head of Investor
Relations. In 2014, he moved to Brazil and became CFO and Investor Relations Officer of Banco Santander Brazil, a role he held for nine years as well as Board
Director. In 2023, Angel returned to Spain, becoming Group Head of Strategy and Chief of Staff to the Executive Chair, working directly for the Banco Santander
Group Executive Chair. He has also been Board Director of several companies, CFA Spain President and author of a series of books and articles about Markets,
Finance Analysis and Equity Valuation. He has a Bachelor’s degree in Economics & Finance and is a Chartered Financial Analyst (CFA).
Other principal appointments
Chief Financial Officer and Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 238

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

4 Pedro Castro e Almeida
Banco Santander Nominated Non-Executive Director
Appointed on 1 September 2023.
Skills and experience
Pedro joined Santander Portugal in 1993, holding senior roles in various areas. From 2007 to 2009, he was a member of the boards of Banco Santander Totta and
Banco Santander de Negócios Portugal. Since 2009, Pedro has been a member of the Banco Santander (Portugal) Executive Committee, and has been a member of
its Board since 2010. In January 2019, he was appointed CEO of Banco Santander (Portugal) and Vice Chairman of its Board. He also assumed the role of Santander
Regional Head of Europe from September 2023 until 31 January 2025. Pedro holds a degree in Business Management from ISEG and has studied at business
schools in Europe and the US, namely INSEAD, Harvard Business School and Kellogg School of Management.
Other principal appointments
Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Director of PagoNxt SL*.
5 Lisa Fretwell
Independent Non-Executive Director and Employee Designated Director
Appointed Independent Non-Executive Director on 1 January 2022 and Designated NED chosen to represent the views of the workforce on 1 March 2023.
Skills and experience
Lisa has 25 years’ experience within the financial services, technology, retail, and manufacturing industries in both business and consulting roles. She holds a first-
class honours degree in Chemical engineering from the University of Birmingham and an MBA from Cranfield Business School. She was awarded Business Leader of
the Year by Women in Credit in 2020. Lisa joined Santander from Experian, where she was Managing Director of Experian UK’s Data Business from 2019 - 2021.
Prior to this, she held various senior roles at Cisco for over 10 years, including Vice President of Software and Operations and Managing Director of Consulting
Services and Internet Business Solutions. Lisa also held roles at Capgemini and Procter & Gamble before joining Cisco.
Other principal appointments
Independent Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Non-Executive Director at Restore plc, Member of the Council at the University of
Birmingham and Senior Advisor to Tresmares Capital.
Board Committee memberships
Board Audit Committee, Board Responsible Banking Committee, and Board Remuneration Committee.
6 David Gledhill
Independent Non-Executive Director
Appointed on 1 September 2024.
Skills and experience
David has significant experience in the financial services industry, in retail banking and digital transformation. He has held various senior leadership roles, including
Group Chief Information Officer and Head of Technology and Operations at DBS Bank in Singapore, spending over a decade in that role.
Other principal appointments
Independent Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Non-Executive Director of Singapore Airlines.
Board Committee memberships
Board Responsible Banking Committee, Board Audit Committee, Board Risk Committee, Board Remuneration Committee and Board Special Projects Committee.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 239

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

7 Michelle Hinchliffe
Independent Non-Executive Director and Whistleblowers' Champion
Appointed on 1 June 2023.
Skills and experience
Michelle has over 35 years’ experience in financial services both in the UK and internationally, with a particular focus on Banking and Capital Markets. Until 2022,
she was Lead Partner at KPMG with responsibilities for a range of financial institution clients, reporting under both IFRS and US GAAP. Over the course of her career,
she has been Lead Partner for Barclays, ANZ, Standard Chartered Bank, HSBC Investment Banking & Markets and Citigroup UK. Michelle qualifies as the Board Audit
Committee financial expert as defined in item 16A of Form 20-F.
Other principal appointments
Independent Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Non-Executive Director of BHP Group Limited and Macquarie Group Limited. Member of
the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales. Member of Chartered Accountants Australia and New Zealand. Chair of Institute of Chartered
Accountants in England and Wales Australasia Strategy Advisory Group.
Board Committee memberships
Board Audit Committee (Chair), Board Risk Committee, Board Nomination & Governance Committee and Board Special Projects Committee.
8 Mark Lewis
Independent Non-Executive Director
– Appointed on 16 December 2020.
Skills and experience
Mark brings a track record of digital transformation and growth across multiple consumer businesses and sectors. He was CEO of Moneysupermarket Group plc,
operating regulated marketplaces across financial services, travel and home services. Prior to this, Mark sat on the John Lewis Management Board as Retail Director,
responsible for sales and operations across 48 UK department stores and online channels serving 37 countries. He previously served as Managing Director of eBay
UK and CEO of Collect+.
Other principal appointments
– Independent Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Group Chairman of Iamproperty, Non-Executive Director of Sambla Group, and Non-
Executive Director of Santander Consumer (UK) plc*.
Board Committee memberships
Board Remuneration Committee (Chair), Board Responsible Banking Committee, Board Risk Committee, Board Nomination & Governance Committee and Board
Special Projects Committee.
9 The Rt Hon. the Baroness Morgan of Cotes (Nicola (Nicky) Morgan)
Independent Non-Executive Director, Senior Independent Director, and Consumer Duty Champion
– Appointed on 10 August 2021. She was appointed Senior Independent Director on 20 February 2025.
Skills and experience
Nicky is a former MP, Cabinet Minister and Chair of the House of Commons Treasury Committee and is now a member of the House of the Lords. She is a qualified
solicitor by background and before being elected to Parliament spent 16 years with City law firms, focused on mergers and acquisitions and advisory work. Nicky
possesses significant experience as a senior leader of high-profile large organisations, responsible for setting and overseeing implementation of strategy and
communicating the organisation’s narrative and capabilities. She brings a wealth of experience from both a public and private perspective of the financial services
sector, communications and media, and digital & technology.
Other principal appointments
– Independent Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Non-Executive Director of the Financial Services Compensation Scheme, Chair of the
Careers & Enterprise Company, and Chair of the Council of the Advertising Standards Authority (ASA) Limited.
Board Committee memberships
Board Responsible Banking Committee (Chair), Board Special Projects Committee (Chair), Board Risk Committee and Board Nomination & Governance Committee.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 240

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

10 David Oldfield
Independent Non-Executive Director
Appointed on 1 December 2024.
Skills and experience
David retired from Lloyds Banking Group (LBG) in 2023 after nearly 40 years with them, having joined on the graduate training scheme. He brings a diverse set of
retail banking, commercial banking and operational / technology leadership experiences. In the period 2014 to 2023, as a member of LBG's Group Executive
Committee, David was CEO Retail Banking & Consumer Finance, CEO Commercial Banking and then most latterly Group Chief Operating Officer responsible for
technology, data, strategic transformation, IT security and 3rd party procurement and supplier management.
David had a variety of leadership roles across all areas of LBG including in Technology, Procurement, Strategy, programme and integration delivery, SME & Mid
Markets Banking and Offshore banking. Over the years David chaired multiple legal entities for LBG both in the UK and internationally and, outside of the Group, was
a Non-Executive Director for Motability Operations Group Plc, Chair Cardnet Merchant Services Limited, and Chair of the Wellbeing leadership team for Business in
The Community (BiTC). As LBG's Executive sponsor for disability for 14 years David was awarded a lifetime achievement award in 2023 from the Business Disability
Forum, a leading business membership organisation in disability inclusion. He received an OBE in His Majesty's New Year Honours list in 2025 for services to
workplace mental health and wellbeing, as well as services to disability.
Other principal appointments
Independent Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*.
Board Committee memberships
Board Risk Committee (Chair), Board Audit Committee, Board Remuneration Committee, Board Nomination & Governance Committee and Board Special Projects
Committee.
11 José María Roldán
Independent Non-Executive Director
Appointed on 1 June 2023.
Skills and experience
José María has extensive depth of knowledge and expertise in banking supervision, financial stability and public policy with over 25 years’ experience in the financial
sector in Europe. He was Chairman and CEO of the Spanish Banking Association (2014-2022) and spent 13 years as Director-General at the Banking Regulation and
Financial Stability department of the Bank of Spain, and member of its Executive Board. During his tenure in office at the Bank of Spain, he was part of the Basel
Committee on Banking Supervision. He also previously served as Board Member and Vice President of the European Banking Federation.
José María founded and Chaired the Committee of European Banking Supervisors (CEBS) (the forerunner of the European Banking Authority (EBA)); was President of
the Financial Action Task Force on Money Laundering (FATF) and chaired the former Banking Advisory Committee of the EU.
Other principal appointments
Independent Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Non-Executive Director and Chair of Cater Allen Limited*. Independent Non-Executive
Director of EBN Banco de Negocios SA*.
Board Committee memberships
Board Risk Committee, Board Remuneration Committee and Board Responsible Banking Committee.
12 Pamela Walkden
Banco Santander Nominated Non-Executive Director
Appointed on 1 October 2021.
Skills and experience
Pamela has served in a number of senior management positions at Standard Chartered Bank, including as Group Head of Human Resources, Chief Risk Officer, Group
Treasurer, Group Head of Asset and Liability Management and Regional Markets, Group Head of Internal Audit, Group Head of Corporate Affairs and Group Manager of
Investor Relations. In addition, she served as an independent member of the UK Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) Regulatory Reform Panel, as a member of the
European Banking Authority Stakeholder Group, and was a lay member of the Welfare and Ethics Committee of the Royal Veterinary College.
Other principal appointments
– Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Independent Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Risk Supervision, Regulation and Compliance
Committee in Banco Santander SA*.
Board Committee memberships
Board Nomination & Governance Committee.
* Part of the Banco Santander group.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 241

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) Corporate Governance – differences
in UK and NYSE corporate governance practice
The Company issues notes in the US from time to time pursuant to a shelf registration statement filed with the SEC. As these notes are listed on the NYSE, the
Company is required to comply with NYSE corporate governance standards. Under the NYSE corporate governance standards, the Company must disclose any
significant ways in which its corporate governance practices differ from those followed by US companies under the NYSE corporate governance standards. We
believe the following to be the significant differences between our current corporate governance practices and those applicable to US companies under the NYSE
corporate governance standards.
Under the NYSE corporate governance standards, independent Directors must comprise a majority of the Board. As at 31 December 2025, our Board was comprised
of a Chair (who is also a Non-Executive Director), three Executive Directors and nine Non-Executive Directors. The Chair, Tom Scholar, and seven of the other Non-
Executive Directors, (Lisa Fretwell, Michelle Hinchliffe, Mark Lewis, Nicky Morgan, José María Roldán, David Gledhill and David Oldfield), were independent as
defined in the NYSE corporate governance standards. The other two Non-Executive Directors (Pedro Castro e Almeida and Pamela Walkden) were not independent
according to NYSE corporate governance standards as they are representatives of the ultimate parent company, Banco Santander SA. Mahesh Aditya was appointed
as a Group-nominated Non-Executive Director on 1 October 2025 and subsequently as Chief Executive Officer with effect from 1 March 2026.
The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies have a nominating or corporate governance committee composed entirely of
independent Directors and with a written charter addressing certain corporate governance matters. Applicable UK rules do not require companies without equity
shares listed on the London Stock Exchange, such as the Company, to have a nominating committee. However, the Company has a Board Nomination & Governance
Committee, which leads the process for Board appointments. This Committee has written Terms of Reference setting out its role to identify and nominate
candidates for Board and Board Committee appointments. As at 31 December 2025, the following Directors made up the Board Nomination & Governance
Committee: Tom Scholar (Chair), Michelle Hinchliffe, Nicky Morgan, Mark Lewis, David Oldfield and Pamela Walkden. Five of the Directors were independent
according to NYSE corporate governance standards. The other Director (Pamela Walkden) was not independent according to NYSE corporate governance standards
as she is a representative of the ultimate parent company, Banco Santander SA.
In addition, the Board is responsible for monitoring the effectiveness of the Company’s governance practices and making changes as needed to ensure the
alignment of the Company’s governance system with current best practices. The Board monitors and manages potential conflicts of interest of management, Board
members, shareholders, external advisers and other service providers, including misuse of corporate assets and abuse in related party transactions.
The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies have a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors and with a
written charter addressing certain corporate governance matters. Under its written Terms of Reference, the Company’s Board Remuneration Committee is primarily
responsible for overseeing and supervising Santander UK’s policies and frameworks covering remuneration and reward. As at 31 December 2025, the following
Directors were on the Board Remuneration Committee: Mark Lewis (Chair), Lisa Fretwell, José María Roldán, David Gledhill and David Oldfield. All Directors were
independent according to NYSE corporate governance standards.
The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies have an audit committee that satisfies the requirements of Rule 10A-3 under the US
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (Rule 10A-3), with a written charter addressing certain corporate governance matters, and having a minimum of three
members who are all independent as defined in Rule 10A-3. As a wholly-owned subsidiary of a parent that satisfies the requirements of Rule 10A-3(c)(2), the
Company is exempt from the requirements of Rule 10A-3. However, the Company does have a Board Audit Committee. As at 31 December 2025, the Board Audit
Committee was made up of four Non-Executive Directors: Michelle Hinchliffe (Chair), Lisa Fretwell, David Gledhill and David Oldfield. All members were
independent in 2025 as defined in Rule 10A-3.
The scope of the Board Audit Committee’s Terms of Reference as well as the duties and responsibilities of such committee are more limited than that required of
audit committees under the NYSE corporate governance standards. For example, the Board Audit Committee does not provide an audit committee report as
required by the NYSE corporate governance standards to be included in the Company’s annual proxy statement.
The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies adopt and disclose corporate governance guidelines, including with respect to the
qualification, training and evaluation of their Directors. The NYSE corporate governance standards also require that the Board conducts a self-evaluation at least
annually to determine whether it and its committees are functioning effectively. The Board has undertaken regular reviews of Board effectiveness primarily through
an internal process led by the Chair. During the year the Board conducted an internal evaluation facilitated by the provider, Lintstock, and considered the results,
which concluded that the performance of the Board and its Committees continues to be effective.
A CEO of a US company listed on the NYSE must annually certify that he or she is not aware of any violation by the company of NYSE corporate government
standards. In accordance with NYSE corporate governance standards applicable to foreign private issuers, our CEO is not required to provide the NYSE with such an
annual compliance certification.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 242

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Other information
Major shareholders
At 31 December 2025, the Company was a subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc. On 12 November 2004, Banco Santander SA acquired the then entire
issued ordinary share capital of 1,485,893,636 ordinary shares of 10 pence each. On 12 October 2008, a further 10 billion ordinary shares of 10 pence each were
issued to Banco Santander SA and an additional 12,631,375,230 ordinary shares of 10 pence each were issued to Banco Santander SA on 9 January 2009. On 3
August 2010, 6,934,500,000 ordinary shares of 10 pence each were issued to Santusa Holding SL. With effect from 10 January 2014, Santander UK Group Holdings
Limited, a subsidiary of Banco Santander SA and Santusa Holding SL, became the beneficial owner of 31,051,768,866 of 10 pence each, being the entire issued
ordinary share capital of the Company, by virtue of a share exchange agreement between Santander UK Group Holdings Limited, Banco Santander SA and Santusa
Holding SL. Santander UK Group Holdings Limited became the legal owner of the entire issued ordinary share capital of the Company on 1 April 2014 and on 25
March 2015 became a public limited company and changed its name to Santander UK Group Holdings plc.
Legal proceedings
We are party to various legal proceedings in the ordinary course of business. See Notes 27 and 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Share capital
See Note 31 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Material contracts
We are party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business. For the two years immediately preceding publication of this annual report, there have been no
material contracts entered into outside the ordinary course of business.
Exchange controls
There are no UK laws, decrees or regulations that restrict our export or import of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by us, or that
affect the remittance of dividends or other shareholder payments to non-UK holders of Company shares, except as outlined in the section on Taxation for US
Investors below.
Taxation for US investors
The following is a summary, under current law, of the main UK tax considerations relating to the beneficial ownership by a US taxpayer of the shares of the
Company. This summary is provided for general guidance and does not address investors that are subject to special rules or that do not hold the shares as capital
assets. US residents should consult their local tax advisers, particularly in connection with any potential liability to pay US taxes on disposal, lifetime gift or bequest
of their shares.
UK taxation on dividends
Under UK law, income tax is not withheld from dividends paid by UK companies. Shareholders, whether resident in the UK or not, receive the full amount of the
dividend actually declared.
UK taxation on capital gains
Under UK law, when you sell shares you may be liable to pay either capital gains tax or corporation tax on chargeable gains. However, if you are either (i) an
individual who is not resident in the UK or (ii) a company which is not resident in the UK, you will not be liable to UK tax on any capital gains made on disposal of your
shares. The exception is if the shares are held in connection with a trade or business that is conducted in the UK through a branch or agency (for capital gains tax
purposes) or a permanent establishment (for corporation tax purposes).
UK inheritance tax
Under the current estate and gift tax convention between the US and the UK, shares held by an individual shareholder who is domiciled for the purposes of the
convention in the US and is not for the purposes of the convention a national of the UK will not be subject to UK inheritance tax on:
– The individual’s death or
– On a gift of the shares during the individual’s lifetime.
The exception is if the shares are part of the business property of a permanent establishment of the individual in the UK or, in the case of a shareholder who
performs independent personal services, pertain to a fixed base situated in the UK.
Designated agent
The designated agent for service of process on Santander UK in the United States is C T Corporation System, 28 Liberty St 42nd Floor, New York, NY 10005.
Trustee/paying agent
The names and addresses of the Trustee/paying agent for each class of security registered with the US Securities and Exchange Commission (the SEC) are:
– Senior: Citibank NA, 388 Greenwich Street, New York, NY 10013, United States
– With respect to 7.95% Term Subordinated Securities due October 26, 2029 (US002920AC09): Trustee: The Bank of New York Mellon, One Canada Square,
London E14 5AB, United Kingdom and Paying Agent: Citibank NA, 13th Floor, Citigroup Centre, Canada Square, London E14 5LB, United Kingdom
Documents on display
The Company is subject to the information requirements of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934. In accordance with these requirements, the Company files its
Annual Report and other related documents with the SEC, and which may be accessed at the SEC's website. Information on the operation of the public reference
rooms can be obtained by calling the SEC on +1-202-551-8090 or by looking at the SEC’s website. The SEC maintains an internet site that contains reports, proxy
and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with it. This is accessible at the website: http://www.sec.gov.
None of the websites referred to in this Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2025 (the Form 20-F), including where a link is provided, nor
any of the information contained on such websites is incorporated by reference in the Form 20-F.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 243

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Audit fees
See Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Insider trading policies
The Company has adopted insider trading policies and procedures governing the purchase, sale, and other dispositions of its securities by Directors, Senior
Management and employees that are designed to promote compliance with insider trading laws, rules and regulations, and listing standards applicable to
Santander UK. These policies and procedures are set out in the Santander UK Policy on Market Abuse and Inside Information which is filed as Exhibit 11.1 to this
Annual Report on Form 20-F.
Santander UK monitors inside information as defined under the EU Market Abuse Regulation 2014/596 (EU MAR) as on shored into UK law on 31 December 2020 by
the EU (Withdrawal) Act 2018. Changes to EU MAR were made by the Market Abuse Exit Regulations 2019. Santander UK, as part of its disclosure controls and
procedures, imposes restrictions on trading in its own securities when it has undisclosed inside information and also generally refrains from trading in its own
securities during its regular closed periods.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 244

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Additional balance sheet and cash flow analysis
SECURITIES
Securities are classified in the consolidated balance sheet as other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, other financial assets at amortised cost and
financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
Debt securities at amortised cost - Yields
The following table shows the weighted average yields for debt securities not held at fair value at 31 December 2025.

| Not later than one year | Later than one year and not later than five years | Later than five years and not later than ten years | Later than ten years | Total
| % | % | % | % | %
Weighted average yield |  |  |  |  |
– Debt securities at amortised cost | — | — | 4.37 | 1.26 | 2.43

Weighted average yield is calculated using Total clean price x yield for each maturity bucket / Total clean price for each maturity bucket.
LOANS AND ADVANCES TO BANKS
Loans and advances to banks in the following tables include loans and advances to banks classified as reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading.
Reconciliation to classifications in the consolidated balance sheet

|  | 2025 | 2024
| Note | £m | £m
Financial assets at amortised cost: |  |  |
Loans and advances to banks |  | 1,048 | 1,032
Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading | 16 | 3,973 | 1,363
|  | 5,021 | 2,395

Maturity analysis
The following table shows loans and advances to banks by maturity at 31 December 2025.

| Not later than one year | Later than one year and not later than five years | Later than five years and not later than fifteen years | Later than fifteen years | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Fixed interest rate | 4,341 | — | — | — | 4,341
Variable interest rate | 254 | 418 | 8 | — | 680
| 4,595 | 418 | 8 | — | 5,021

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 245

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS
Loans and advances to customers are classified in the consolidated balance sheet as other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, loans and advances to
customers and reverse repurchase agreements - non trading. Reverse repurchase agreements represent business with professional non-bank customers as part of
the liquidity risk management function. The balance sheet reconciliation below shows Loans and advances to customers net of impairment loss allowances and
Residual Value and Voluntary Termination provisions.
Reconciliation to classifications in the consolidated balance sheet

|  | 2025 | 2024
| Note | £m | £m
Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss | 12 | 40 | 44
Loans and advances to customers | 13 | 202,609 | 199,408
Reverse repurchase agreements - non-trading | 16 | 13,705 | 8,975
|  | 216,354 | 208,427

Maturity analysis
The following table shows loans and advances to customers by maturity at 31 December 2025. Overdrafts are included as ‘on-demand’. Loans and advances are
included at their contractual maturity; no account is taken of a customer’s ability to repay early where it exists.

| Not later than one year | Later than one year and not later than five years | Later than five years and not later than fifteen years | Later than fifteen years | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Loans secured on residential properties | 9,913 | 35,935 | 67,529 | 53,907 | 167,284
Corporate loans | 9,739 | 9,354 | 1,335 | 22 | 20,450
Finance leases | 1,161 | 2,995 | 95 | — | 4,251
Other unsecured advances | 3,876 | 1,601 | 79 | 10 | 5,566
Accrued interest and other adjustments | 760 | — | — | — | 760
Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries and joint ventures | 2,674 | 2,380 | — | — | 5,054
Loans and advances to customers | 28,123 | 52,265 | 69,038 | 53,939 | 203,365

We manage our balance sheet on a behavioural basis, rather than on the basis of contractual maturity. Many loans are repaid before their legal maturity,
particularly advances secured on residential property.
Interest rate sensitivity
The following table shows the interest rate sensitivity of loans and advances to customers due after one year at 31 December 2025.

| Fixed rate | Variable rate | Total
| £m | £m | £m
Loans secured on residential properties | 152,837 | 14,447 | 167,284
Corporate loans | 2,137 | 18,313 | 20,450
Finance leases | 4,251 | — | 4,251
Other unsecured advances | 2,669 | 2,897 | 5,566
Accrued interest and other adjustments | 760 | — | 760
Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries and joint ventures | 5,043 | 11 | 5,054
Loans and advances to customers | 167,697 | 35,668 | 203,365

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 246

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

SUMMARY OF LOAN LOSS EXPERIENCE
Loans accounted for on a non-accrual basis are credit impaired loans. We define a loan as in default (i.e. credit impaired) for purposes of calculating ECL if it is more
than three months past due, or if we have data to make us doubt they can keep up with their payments i.e. they are unlikely to pay. We classify credit impaired loans
as Stage 3. For details of loans classified as Stage 3, see the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review. Interest income on financial assets that have become credit-
impaired (or Stage 3) is calculated by applying the effective interest rate to their amortised cost (i.e. net of the ECL provision).
In 2025, 2024 and 2023 there were no material credit impairment charges on Loans and advances to banks, Non-trading reverse repurchase agreements, Other
financial assets at amortised cost and Financial assets at FVOCI. As a result, the following tables present Loans and advances to customers only.
The following tables show additional ratios and the components used in their calculation for the years ended 31 December 2025, 2024, and 2023.

| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Allowance for credit losses to total loans | 0.38% | 0.41%
Allowance for credit losses | 756 | 807
Total loans outstanding | 197,367 | 194,512
Non-accrual loans to total loans | 1.15% | 1.36%
Non-accrual loans outstanding | 2,263 | 2,642
Total loans outstanding | 197,367 | 194,512
Allowance for credit losses to non-accrual loans | 33.41% | 30.55%
Allowance for credit losses | 756 | 807
Non-accrual loans outstanding | 2,263 | 2,642

| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| £m | £m | £m
Loans secured on residential properties | 0.01% | 0.01% | 0.01%
Net charge-off during the period | 14 | 9 | 11
Average amount outstanding | 166,921 | 169,395 | 177,689
Corporate loans | 0.31% | 0.32% | 0.36%
Net charge-off during the period | 60 | 59 | 68
Average amount outstanding | 19,500 | 18,409 | 18,662
Finance leases | 0.47% | 0.57% | 0.50%
Net charge-off during the period | 20 | 25 | 23
Average amount outstanding | 4,237 | 4,364 | 4,612
Other unsecured advances | 1.35% | 1.98% | 1.74%
Net charge-off during the period | 82 | 137 | 130
Average amount outstanding | 6,084 | 6,934 | 7,452
Amounts due from immediate parent | —% | —% | —%
Net charge-off during the period | — | — | —
Average amount outstanding | 15 | 37 | 28
Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries and joint ventures | —% | —% | —%
Net charge-off during the period | — | — | —
Average amount outstanding | 4,929 | 4,652 | 4,355
Loans and advances to customers | 0.09% | 0.11% | 0.11%
Net charge-off during the period | 176 | 230 | 232
Average amount outstanding | 201,686 | 203,791 | 212,798

Discussion of the factors driving material changes in the ratios above or their components
The factors driving significant changes are discussed as follows:
– Allowance for credit losses, exposures, expected credit losses, Stage 3 exposures and related ratios at a consolidated Santander UK group level can be found in
the commentary sections in 'Credit performance', 'Credit quality' 'Stage 2 analysis' in 'Santander UK group level - credit risk review' in the Risk review.
– More detailed discussion by business segment can be found in the 'Retail & Business Banking: Mortgages - credit risk review', 'Retail & Business Banking:
Everyday Banking - credit risk review', 'Corporate & Commercial Banking - credit risk review' and 'Corporate Centre - credit risk review' sections of the Risk review.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 247

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

DEPOSITS BY CUSTOMERS
The following table shows the average balances and interest rates for deposits by customers by product for the years ended 31 December 2025, 2024, and 2023.

| 2025 |  | 2024 |  | 2023
| Average Balance | Average Interest Rate 1 |  | Average Balance | Average Interest Rate 1 |  | Average Balance | Average Interest Rate 1
| £m | % |  | £m | % |  | £m | %
Demand deposits (including savings and current accounts) | 146,887 | 1.49 |  | 154,434 | 1.82 |  | 161,403 | 1.33
Time deposits | 34,664 | 3.98 |  | 27,695 | 4.74 |  | 23,236 | 3.93
Other deposits | 11,641 | 5.11 |  | 13,492 | 4.78 |  | 15,169 | 4.23
Total average balance 1 | 193,192 | 2.15 |  | 195,621 | 2.44 |  | 199,808 | 1.85

1 Calculated using monthly data.
Some deposits by customers are covered by depositor guarantee arrangements, as follows:

Scheme | Definition
Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) | The FSCS is the UK’s independent statutory compensation fund for customers of PRA authorised financial services firms and pays compensation, up to certain limits, if a firm is unable, or likely to be unable to pay claims against it, for example by depositors. The FSCS is funded by levies on the industry, and recoveries and borrowings where appropriate.

The following table shows the amounts of insured and uninsured total deposits and time deposits excluding intercompany deposits at 31 December 2025 and
2024. The table also shows the amount of time deposits that are uninsured, either because they exceed depositor guarantee scheme compensation limits or
because they are otherwise uninsured.

| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Insured deposits | 134,169 | 123,729
Uninsured deposits | 49,986 | 53,606
Total deposits | 184,155 | 177,335
of which: |  |
Insured time deposits | 28,838 | 20,729
Uninsured time deposits | 9,321 | 7,107
– Excess over guaranteed limit | 4,327 | 4,164
– Otherwise uninsured | 4,994 | 2,943
Total time deposits | 38,159 | 27,836

For the proportion of Retail & Business Banking customer deposits covered by the FSCS, see the Funding risk management section of the Risk review.
The following table shows the maturity of uninsured time deposits at 31 December 2025.

| Under 3 months | 3 to 6 months | 6 to 12 months | Over 12 months | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Deposits by customers | 5,002 | 817 | 1,292 | 2,210 | 9,321

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 248

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

DEPOSITS BY BANKS
Deposits by banks include repurchase agreements - non-trading.
Reconciliation to classifications in the consolidated balance sheet

|  | 2025 | 2024
| Note | £m | £m
Financial liabilities at amortised cost: |  |  |
Deposits by banks | 21 | 6,628 | 13,993
Repurchase agreements - non-trading | 23 | 3,557 | 2,336
|  | 10,185 | 16,329

The following table shows the average balances of and interest rates for deposits by banks for the years ended 31 December 2025, 2024, and 2023.

| 2025 |  | 2024 |  | 2023
| Average Balance | Average Interest Rate 1 |  | Average Balance | Average Interest Rate 1 |  | Average Balance | Average Interest Rate 1
| £m | % |  | £m | % |  | £m | %
Deposits by banks | 14,807 | 4.51 |  | 20,892 | 4.91 |  | 27,878 | 4.42

1 Calculated using monthly data.
At 31 December 2025, deposits by foreign banks were £1,739m (2024: £2,085m, 2023: £2,010m).
All bank deposits are uninsured, as depositor guarantee arrangements do not cover deposits by financial institutions.
The following table shows the maturity of uninsured deposits by banks at 31 December 2025.

| Under 3 months | 3 to 6 months | 6 to 12 months | Over 12 months | Total
| £m | £m | £m | £m | £m
Deposits by banks | 2,447 | 2,575 | 724 | 4,439 | 10,185

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 249

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY
Interest rate sensitivity is the relationship between interest rates and net interest income caused by the periodic repricing of assets and liabilities. Our largest
administered rate items are residential mortgages and retail deposits, many of which bear interest at variable rates.
We mitigate the impact of interest rate movements on net interest income by repricing our variable rate mortgages and variable rate retail deposits separately,
subject to competitive pressures. We also offer fixed-rate mortgages and savings products on which the interest rate is fixed for an agreed period at the start of the
contract. We manage the margin on fixed-rate products by using derivatives matching the fixed-rate profiles. We reduce the risk of prepayment by imposing early
termination charges if the customers end their contracts early.
We manage the risks from movements in interest rates as part of our overall non-trading position. We do this within limits as set out in the Risk review.
Changes in net interest income - volume and rate analysis
The following table shows changes in interest income, interest expense and net interest income, and is presented using asset and liability classifications in the
Consolidated Balance Sheet. It allocates the effects between changes in volume and changes in rate. Volume and rate changes have been calculated on the
movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. The changes
caused by movements in both volume and rate have been allocated to rate changes.

|  |  | 2025 / 2024 |  |  |  | 2024 / 2023
|  | Changes due to (decrease)/ increase in |  |  | Changes due to increase/ (decrease) in
| Total change | Volume | Rate |  | Total change | Volume | Rate
£m | £m | £m |  | £m | £m | £m
Interest income |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers | (522) | (43) | (479) |  | 790 | (200) | 990
of which reverse repurchase agreements | (123) | 59 | (182) |  | 267 | 192 | 75
Loans and advances to banks | (359) | (104) | (255) |  | (134) | (299) | 165
of which reverse repurchase agreements | 9 | (17) | 26 |  | 94 | 47 | 47
Debt securities and other interest earning assets | (17) | 54 | (71) |  | 166 | 122 | 44
Total interest income | (898) | (93) | (805) |  | 822 | (377) | 1,199
Interest expense |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by customers - demand | (618) | (137) | (481) |  | 657 | (93) | 750
Deposits by customers - time | 66 | 330 | (264) |  | 401 | 175 | 226
Deposits by customers - other | (51) | (101) | 50 |  | 2 | (78) | 80
of which repurchase agreements | (114) | 27 | (141) |  | 14 | (52) | 66
Deposits by banks | (360) | (301) | (59) |  | (234) | (318) | 84
of which repurchase agreements | 64 | 12 | 52 |  | 92 | 89 | 3
Debt securities | 86 | 379 | (293) |  | 241 | 83 | 158
Commercial paper | (68) | 20 | (88) |  | 78 | 39 | 39
Subordinated liabilities | (21) | (10) | (11) |  | 24 | 30 | (6)
Other interest-bearing financial liabilities | — | (1) | 1 |  | (1) | — | (1)
Total interest expense | (966) | 179 | (1,145) |  | 1,168 | (162) | 1,330
Net interest income | 68 | (272) | 340 |  | (346) | (215) | (131)

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 250

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET
Year-end balances may not reflect activity throughout the year, so we present Average balance sheets below, using asset and liability classifications from the
Consolidated Balance Sheet. They show averages for our significant categories of assets and liabilities, and the related interest income and expense.

|  |  | 2025 |  |  |  | 2024 |  |  |  | 2023
| Average balance 1 | Interest | Average rate |  | Average balance 1 | Interest | Average rate |  | Average balance 1 | Interest | Average rate
| £m | £m | % |  | £m | £m | % |  | £m | £m | %
Assets |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Loans and advances to customers 2 | 218,498 | 9,562 | 4.38 |  | 219,442 | 10,084 | 4.60 |  | 224,267 | 9,294 | 4.14
of which reverse repurchase agreements | 16,812 | 671 | 3.99 |  | 15,651 | 794 | 5.07 |  | 11,469 | 527 | 4.59
Loans and advances to banks | 33,900 | 1,357 | 4.00 |  | 36,078 | 1,716 | 4.76 |  | 43,043 | 1,850 | 4.30
of which reverse repurchase agreements | 3,720 | 202 | 5.43 |  | 4,070 | 193 | 4.74 |  | 2,763 | 99 | 3.58
Debt securities and other interest earning assets | 11,724 | 622 | 5.31 |  | 10,807 | 639 | 5.91 |  | 8,589 | 473 | 5.51
Total average interest-earning assets, interest income | 264,122 | 11,541 | 4.37 |  | 266,327 | 12,439 | 4.67 |  | 275,899 | 11,617 | 4.21
Credit impairment loss allowances and RV & VT provisions | (914) | — | — |  | (967) | — | — |  | (1,068) | — | —
Derivatives and other non-interest-earning assets | 8,195 | — | — |  | 7,690 | — | — |  | 7,601 | — | —
Other financial assets at FVTPL | 121 | — | — |  | 204 | — | — |  | 264 | — | —
Total average assets | 271,524 | — | — |  | 273,254 | — | — |  | 282,696 | — | —
Liabilities |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |  |
Deposits by customers - demand | (146,887) | (2,187) | 1.49 |  | (154,434) | (2,805) | 1.82 |  | (161,403) | (2,148) | 1.33
Deposits by customers - time | (34,664) | (1,380) | 3.98 |  | (27,695) | (1,314) | 4.74 |  | (23,236) | (913) | 3.93
Deposits by customers - other | (10,933) | (591) | 5.41 |  | (12,977) | (642) | 4.95 |  | (14,787) | (640) | 4.33
of which repurchase agreements | (9,940) | (371) | 3.73 |  | (9,408) | (485) | 5.16 |  | (10,567) | (471) | 4.46
Deposits by banks | (14,153) | (638) | 4.51 |  | (20,249) | (998) | 4.93 |  | (27,308) | (1,232) | 4.51
of which repurchase agreements | (3,619) | (223) | 6.16 |  | (3,365) | (159) | 4.73 |  | (1,445) | (67) | 4.64
Debt securities | (36,320) | (1,960) | 5.40 |  | (30,215) | (1,874) | 6.20 |  | (28,762) | (1,633) | 5.68
Commercial paper | (5,410) | (229) | 4.23 |  | (5,076) | (297) | 5.85 |  | (4,312) | (219) | 5.08
Subordinated liabilities | (2,257) | (172) | 7.62 |  | (2,383) | (193) | 8.10 |  | (2,022) | (169) | 8.36
Other interest-bearing liabilities | (95) | (4) | 4.21 |  | (133) | (4) | 3.01 |  | (130) | (5) | 3.85
Total average interest-bearing liabilities, interest expense | (250,719) | (7,161) | 2.86 |  | (253,162) | (8,127) | 3.21 |  | (261,960) | (6,959) | 2.66
Derivatives and other non-interest-bearing liabilities | (4,907) | — | — |  | (4,633) | — | — |  | (4,609) | — | —
Other financial liabilities at FVTPL | (1,138) | — | — |  | (983) | — | — |  | (854) | — | —
Equity | (14,760) | — | — |  | (14,476) | — | — |  | (15,273) | — | —
Total average liabilities and equity | (271,524) | — | — |  | (273,254) | — | — |  | (282,696) | — | —

1 Average balances are based on monthly data.
2 loans and advances to customers include Stage 3 assets. See the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.
Margin and average spread

| 2025 | 2024 | 2023
| % | % | %
Interest spread 1 | 1.51 | 1.46 | 1.55
Net interest margin 2 | 1.66 | 1.62 | 1.69
Average spread 3 | 105 | 105 | 105

1 Interest spread is the difference between the rate of interest earned on average interest-earning assets and the rate of interest paid on average interest-bearing liabilities.
2 NIM is calculated as net interest income divided by average interest earning assets
3 Average spread is the ratio of average interest-earning assets to interest-bearing liabilities

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 251

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

SUMMARISED CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

| 2025 | 2024
| £m | £m
Net cash flows from operating activities | (8,798) | (3,331)
Net cash flows from investing activities | 2,957 | (4,540)
Net cash flows from financing activities | 5,410 | 285
Change in cash and cash equivalents | (431) | (7,586)

A more detailed Consolidated Cash Flow Statement is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.
The major activities and transactions that affected cash flows in 2025 and 2024 were as follows:
In 2025, the net cash outflows from operating activities of £8,798m resulted from outflows generated from an increase in loans and advances to banks and
customers, an increase in reverse repurchase agreements and a decrease in deposits by banks and customers partially offset by a decrease in derivative assets and
increases in profit before tax, provisions, repurchase agreements and structured deposits. The net cash inflows from investing activities of £2,957m mainly
reflected the net purchase of certain asset-backed securities and debt securities as part of normal liquid asset portfolio management. The net cash inflows from
financing activities mainly reflected net cash flows relating to active capital management and the ongoing repayment of TFSME. These resulted in cash and cash
equivalents decreasing by £431m in the year.
In 2024, the net cash outflows from operating activities of £3,331m resulted from outflows generated from a decrease in deposits by banks and customers partially
offset by a decrease in loans and advances to banks and customers and reverse repurchase agreements and an increase in debt securities and repurchase
agreements. The net cash outflows from investing activities of £4,540m mainly reflected the net purchase of certain asset-backed securities and debt securities as
part of normal liquid asset portfolio management. The net cash inflows from financing activities mainly reflected net cash flows relating to active capital
management and the ongoing repayment of TFSME. These resulted in cash and cash equivalents decreasing by £7,586m in the year.
Cash flow requirements
For details of our cash flow requirements over the next 12 months and in the longer term and how we plan to meet them, see the Liquidity risk section of the Risk
review.
Material cash requirements
Our material commitments under commercial contracts at 31 December 2025 were as follows:
– For cash flows and maturities relating to Derivatives, Deposits by customers, Deposits by banks, Debt securities in issue, Subordinated liabilities and Lease
obligations, see Note 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The maturities of financial liabilities and off-balance sheet commitments table analyses the
maturities of the cash flows based on the remaining period to the contractual maturity date at the balance sheet date. In practice, the behavioural profiles of
many liabilities show more stability and longer maturity than their contractual maturity. This is especially true of many types of retail and corporate deposits that,
while they may be repayable on demand or at short notice, have shown good stability even in times of stress. For further details, see the Liquidity risk section of
the Risk review.
– For details of cash flows and maturities relating to Retirement benefit obligations including employer contributions and funding, see Note 28 to the Consolidated
Financial Statements.
– Purchase obligations: We have entered into outsourcing contracts where, in some cases, there is no minimum specified spending requirement. In these cases,
anticipated spending volumes have been included in purchase obligations. Total purchase obligations, all of which are due within 1 year, were £378m.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 252

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Glossary of financial services industry terms

Term | Definition
Active customers | Active customers are defined as those having an open account, with more than a set minimum balance along with certain specified transactions in the prior month.
Alternative performance measures (APMs) | A financial measure of historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows, other than a financial measure defined or specified under International Financial Reporting Standards.
Any excess in month | Accounts that were overdrawn for more than their overdraft every day in the previous month.
Anti-Money Laundering (AML) | A set of policies and practices to ensure that financial institutions and other regulated entities prevent, detect, and report financial crime and especially money laundering activities.
Arrears | Customers are said to be in arrears when they are behind in fulfilling their obligations with the result that an outstanding loan is unpaid or overdue. Such a customer is also said to be in a state of delinquency. When a customer is in arrears, his entire outstanding balance is said to be delinquent, meaning that delinquent balances are the total outstanding loans on which payments are overdue.
Asset Backed Securities (ABS) | Securities that represent an interest in an underlying pool of referenced assets. The referenced pool can comprise any assets which attract a set of associated cash flows but are commonly pools of residential or commercial mortgages but could also include leases, credit card receivables, motor vehicles or student loans.
Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio | (Loan 1 balance x (Loan 1 Balance/Loan 1 latest property valuation) + (Loan 2 balance x (loan 2 balance/Loan 2 latest property valuation) + ...) / (Loan 1 balance + Loan 2 balance+...)
Basel III | In December 2010, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision issued the Basel III rules text, which presents the details of strengthened global regulatory standards on bank capital adequacy and liquidity. The standards were implemented in the EU in January 2014.
Basis point (bps) | One hundredth of a per cent (i.e. 0.01%), so 100 basis points is 1%. Used in quoting movements in interest rates or yields on securities.
Brexit | The withdrawal of the United Kingdom from the European Union.
Business Banking | Division, managed under Retail & Business Banking, serving enterprises with a turnover of up to £6.5m per annum.
Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV) | An EU legislative package covering prudential rules for banks, building societies and investment firms.
Cash collection | Agents have been instructed to collect cash from the customer.
Colleague engagement | Colleague engagement is measured on annual basis in the Group Engagement Survey (GES), conducted by Mercer for Banco Santander. Results are benchmarked against other firms in the UK financial sector and other high performing firms.
Commercial Paper | An unsecured promissory note issued to finance short-term credit needs. It specifies the face amount paid to investors on the maturity date. Commercial paper can be issued as an unsecured obligation of Santander UK and is usually issued for periods ranging from one week up to nine months. However, the depth and reliability of some CP markets means that issuers can repeatedly roll over CP issuance and effectively achieve longer term funding. CP can be issued in a range of denominations and can be discounted or interest-bearing.
Commercial Real Estate (CRE) | Lending to UK customers, primarily on tenanted property assets, with a focus on the office, retail, industrial and residential sectors.
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital | The called-up share capital and eligible reserves less deductions calculated in accordance with the CRD IV implementation rules as per the PRA Policy Statement PS7/13.
CET1 capital ratio | CET1 capital as a percentage of risk-weighted assets.
Consumer Finance | Provides prime auto consumer financing for individuals, businesses, and automotive distribution networks.
Contractual maturity | The final payment date of a loan or other financial instrument, at which point all the remaining outstanding principal will be repaid and interest is due to be paid.
Corporate Centre | Provides treasury services for asset and liability management of our balance sheet, as well as management of non-core and legacy portfolios.
Corporate & Commercial Banking (CCB) | Provides banking products and services to SMEs, mid-sized and larger corporates, typically with annual turnovers of between £2m and £500m, as well as to Local Authorities and Housing Associations.
Cost to income ratio | Total operating expenses before credit impairment losses and provisions for other liabilities and charges as a percentage of total operating income.
Cost of risk | Cost of risk is credit impairment charge for the 12-month period as a percentage of average gross customer loans. This is a useful measure of the relationship between the size of the credit impairment charge and the book size which investors use as a proxy to compare relative credit risk.
Countercyclical capital buffer | A capital buffer required under Basel III to ensure that capital requirements take account of the macro-financial environment in which banks operate.
Counterparty credit risk | The risk that the counterparty to a transaction may default before completing the satisfactory settlement of the transaction.
Covered bonds | Debt securities backed by a portfolio of mortgages that is segregated from the issuer’s other assets solely for the benefit of the holders of the covered bonds. The Santander UK group issues covered bonds as part of its funding activities.
Credit spread | The yield spread between securities with the same coupon rate and maturity structure but with different associated credit risks, with the yield spread rising as the credit rating worsens. It is the premium over the benchmark or risk-free rate required by the market to accept a lower credit quality.
Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) | Adjustments to the fair values of derivative assets to reflect the creditworthiness of the counterparty.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 253

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Term | Definition
Currency swap | An arrangement in which two parties exchange specific principal amounts of different currencies at inception and subsequently interest payments on the principal amounts. Often, one party will pay a fixed interest rate, while the other will pay a floating exchange rate (though there are also fixed-fixed and floating-floating arrangements). At the maturity of the swap, the principal amounts are usually re-exchanged.
Current Account Switch Service (CASS) guarantee | On 16 September 2013, Bacs (previously Payments Council) launched CASS. The service is free-to-use for consumers, small charities, small businesses and small trusts, and is designed to make switching current accounts from one bank or building society to another, simpler, reliable and hassle-free, thus removing customers’ perceived barriers to switching. The new service is backed by a customer guarantee and aims to increase competition in the high street, support the entry of new banks in the current account marketplace and give customers greater choice if they want to switch.
Customer loans / customer deposits | Money lent to or deposited by all individuals and companies that are not credit institutions. Such funds are predominantly recorded as assets and liabilities in the balance sheet under Loans and advances to customers and Deposits by customers, respectively.
Customer funding gap | Customer loans less customer deposits.
Days past due | One or more days that interest and/or principal payments are overdue based on the contractual terms.
Debt securities | Transferable instruments creating or acknowledging indebtedness. They include debentures, bonds, certificates of deposit, notes and commercial paper. The holder of a debt security is typically entitled to the payment of principal and interest, together with other contractual rights under the terms of the issue, such as the right to receive certain information. Debt securities are generally issued for a fixed term and redeemable by the issuer at the end of that term. Debt securities can be secured or unsecured.
Debt securities in issue | Transferable certificates of indebtedness of the Santander UK group to the bearer of the certificates. These are liabilities of the Santander UK group and include commercial paper, certificates of deposit, bonds, and medium-term notes.
Default | Financial assets in default represent those that are at least 90 days past due in respect of principal or interest and/or where the assets are otherwise considered to be unlikely to pay, including those that are credit impaired.
Default at proxy origination | IFRS 9 requires us to compare lifetime probability of default at origination with our view of lifetime probability of default now. If we do not have data at origination, then a proxy origination is defined.
Defined benefit obligation | The present value of expected future payments required to settle the obligations of a defined benefit plan resulting from employee service.
Defined benefit plan | A pension plan that defines an amount of pension benefit to be provided, usually as a function of one or more factors such as age, years of service or compensation. The employer's obligation can be more or less than its contributions to the fund.
Defined contribution plan | A pension plan under which the Santander UK group pays fixed contributions as they fall due into a separate entity (a fund) and will have no legal or constructive obligations to pay further contributions, i.e. the employer's obligation is limited to its contributions to the fund.
Delinquency | See ‘Arrears’.
Deposits by banks | Money deposited by banks and other credit institutions. They include money-market deposits, securities sold under repurchase agreements, and other short-term deposits. Such funds are recorded as liabilities in the Santander UK group’s balance sheet under Deposits by Banks, Trading Liabilities or Financial Liabilities designated at Fair Value.
Derivative | A contract or agreement whose value changes with changes in an underlying index such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates, share prices or indices and which requires no initial investment or an initial investment that is smaller than would be required for other types of contracts with a similar response to market factors. The principal types of derivatives are: swaps, forwards, futures and options.
Digital sales | Percentage of new contracts executed through digital channels during the period. Digital sales as % of total sales.
Economic capital | An internal measure of the minimum equity and preference capital required for the Santander UK group to maintain its credit rating based upon its risk profile.
Effective tax rate | The tax on profit/(losses) on ordinary activities as a percentage of profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before taxation.
Energy performance certificate (EPC) | A scheme to summarise the energy efficiency of buildings and apply a rating between A – G.
Everyday Banking | Provides banking services and unsecured lending to individuals and small businesses as well alongside wealth management for high-net-worth clients.
Expected credit loss (ECL) | Represents what the credit risk is likely to cost us either over the next 12 months on qualifying exposures, or defaults over the lifetime of the exposure where there is evidence of a significant increase in credit risk since origination.
Expected loss (EL) | The product of the probability of default, exposure at default and loss given default. We calculate each factor in accordance with CRD IV and include direct and indirect costs. We base them on our risk models and our assessment of each customer’s credit quality.
Exposure at default (EAD) | The maximum loss that a financial institution might suffer if a borrower, counterparty or group defaults on their obligations or assets and off- balance sheet positions have to be realised.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 254

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Term | Definition
Fair value adjustment | An adjustment to the fair value of a financial instrument which is determined using a valuation technique (level 2 and level 3) to include additional factors that would be considered by a market participant that are not incorporated within the valuation model.
Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) | The Financial Conduct Authority is a financial regulatory body in the United Kingdom.
Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) | The Financial Services Compensation Scheme is the UK's statutory deposit insurance and investors compensation scheme for customers of authorised financial services firms.
First / Second Charge | First charge (also known as first lien): debt that places its holder first in line to collect compensation from the sale of the underlying collateral in the event of a default on the loan. Second charge (also known as second lien): debt that is issued against the same collateral as a higher charge debt but that is subordinate to it. In the case of default, compensation for this debt will only be received after the first charge has been repaid and thus represents a riskier investment than the first charge.
Follow-on Rate (FoR) | A mortgage product that tracks and is directly linked to the Bank of England base rate.
Forbearance | Forbearance takes place when a concession is made on the contractual terms of a loan in response to an obligor’s financial difficulties.
Full time equivalent | Full time equivalent employee units are the on-job hours paid for employee services divided by the number of ordinary-time hours normally paid for a full-time staff member when on the job (or contract employee where applicable).
Funded / unfunded | Exposures where the notional amount of the transaction is either funded or unfunded. Represents exposures where a commitment to provide future funding has been made and the funds have been released / not released.
Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS) | A scheme designed by the Bank of England and HM Treasury to incentivise banks and building societies to boost their lending to UK households and non-financial companies. It aims to do this by providing funding to banks and building societies for an extended period, with both the price and quantity of funding provided linked to their performance in lending to the UK non-financial sector.
Green Finance | In line with our internal classification system to define what investments can be considered green finance. This includes financing raised and facilitated to renewable energy and other green energy financing; mortgages on properties with A- or B-rated EPC; and financing for electric vehicles, hybrid, and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles (PHEV) with emissions below 50g CO2 /km
Homes | Homes provides prime UK mortgage lending to owner occupiers and buy-to-let landlords with small portfolios.
Impairment loss allowance (Loan loss allowance) | An impairment loss allowance held on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for an expected credit loss in the lending book. An impairment loss allowance may be either individual or collective.
Individually assessed loan impairment provisions | Impairment is measured individually for assets that are individually significant. For these assets, the Santander UK group measures the amount of the impairment loss as the difference between the carrying amount of the asset or group of assets and the present value of the estimated future cash flows from the asset or group of assets discounted at the original effective interest rate of the asset.
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) | The Santander UK group’s own assessment of its regulatory capital requirements, as part of CRD IV. It takes into account the regulatory and commercial environment in which the Santander UK group operates, the Santander UK group’s Risk Appetite, the management strategy for each of the Santander UK group’s material risks and the impact of appropriate adverse scenarios and stresses on the Santander UK group’s capital requirements.
Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP) | The Santander UK group’s own assessment of the prudent level of liquidity that is consistent with the Santander UK group’s LRA. It documents and demonstrates the Santander UK group’s overall liquidity adequacy – an appropriate level of liquid resources, a prudent funding profile and comprehensive management and control of liquidity and funding risks.
Internal ratings-based approach (IRB) | The Santander UK group's method, under the CRD IV framework, for calculating credit risk capital requirements using the Santander UK group’s internal models
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) | A set of international accounting standards developed and issued by the International Accounting Standards Board, consisting of principles-based guidance.
Investment grade | A debt security, treasury bill or similar instrument with a credit rating measured by external agencies of AAA to BBB.
ISDA Master agreement | Standardised contract developed by ISDA (International Swaps and Derivatives Association) used as an umbrella under which bilateral derivatives contracts are entered into.
Judgemental Adjustments | Adjustments made to the ECL estimate outside of the ECL models to reflect management judgements.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 255

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Term | Definition
Level 1 | The fair value of these financial instruments is based on unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in an active market that the Santander UK group has the ability to access at the measurement date.
Level 2 | The fair value of these financial instruments is based on quoted prices in markets that are not active or quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities, recent market transactions, inputs other than quoted market prices for the asset or liability that are observable either directly or indirectly for substantially the full term, and inputs to valuation techniques that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data through correlation or other statistical means for substantially the full term of the asset or liability.
Level 3 | The fair value of these financial instruments is based on inputs to the pricing or valuation techniques that are significant to the overall fair value measurement of the asset or liability are unobservable.
Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) | The LCR is intended to ensure that a bank maintains an adequate level of unencumbered, high quality liquid assets which can be used to offset the net cash outflows the bank could encounter under a short-term significant liquidity stress scenario.
LCR eligible liquidity pool | Assets eligible for inclusion in the LCR as high-quality liquid assets. The LCR eligible liquidity pool also covers both Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 risks.
Loan to value ratio (LTV) | The amount of a first mortgage charge as a percentage of the total appraised value of real property. The LTV ratio is used in determining the appropriate level of risk for the loan and therefore the price of the loan to the borrower. LTV ratios may be expressed in a number of ways, including origination LTV and indexed LTV.
Loss Given Default (LGD) | The fraction of Exposure at Default that will not be recovered following default. LGD comprises the actual loss (the part that is not recovered), together with the economic costs associated with the recovery process. It is calculated as the expected loss divided by EAD for each month of the forecast period. We base LGD on factors that impact the likelihood and value of any subsequent write-offs, which vary according to whether the product is secured or unsecured. If the product is secured, we take into account collateral values as well as the historical discounts to market/book values due to forced sales type.
Master netting agreement | An industry standard agreement which facilitates netting of transactions (such as financial assets and liabilities including derivatives) in jurisdictions where netting agreements are recognised and have legal force. The netting arrangements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis.
Maximum Distributable Amount (MDA) | The maximum distributions which a bank can make to investors when it has insufficient capital to meet its buffer requirements.
Medium-Term Funding (MTF) | Shown at a sterling equivalent value. Consists of senior debt issuance, asset-backed issuance (including securitisation and covered bond issuance) and structured issuance (including firm financing repurchase agreements).
Medium-Term Notes (MTNs) | Corporate notes (or debt securities) continuously offered by a company to investors through a dealer. Investors can choose from differing maturities, ranging from nine months to 30 years. They can be issued on a fixed or floating coupon basis or with an exotic coupon; with a fixed maturity date (non-callable) or with embedded call or put options or early repayment triggers. MTNs are most generally issued as senior, unsecured debt.
Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) | A requirement under the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive for EU resolution authorities to set a minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities for banks, implementing the Financial Stability Board’s Total Loss Absorbing Capacity (TLAC) standard. The purpose of MREL is to help ensure that when banks, building societies and investment firms fail, that failure can be managed in an orderly way while minimising risks to financial stability, disruption to critical economic functions, and risks to public funds.
Mortgages | Refers to residential and buy to let retail mortgages only and excludes social housing and commercial mortgage properties.
Mortgage-Backed Securities (MBS) | Securities that represent interests in groups of mortgages, which may be on residential or commercial properties. Investors in these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and/or principal). When the MBS references mortgages with different risk profiles, the MBS is classified according to the highest risk class.
n.m. | Not meaningful when the change is above 100%.
Net fee and commission income | Fee and commission income minus other fees paid, that are not an integral part of the effective interest rate. For retail and corporate products, fee and commission income consists principally of collection services fees, commission on foreign currencies, commission and other fees received from retailers for processing credit card transactions, fees received from other credit card issuers for providing cash advances for their customers through the Santander UK group’s branch and ATM networks, annual fees payable by credit card holders and fees for non-banking financial products.
Net interest income | The difference between interest received on assets and interest paid on liabilities.
Net Interest Margin (NIM) | Net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.
Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) | The ratio of available stable funding resources to stable funding requirements over a one-year time horizon, assuming a stressed scenario. The Basel III rules require this ratio to be over 100%.
Over the counter (OTC) derivatives | Contracts that are traded (and privately negotiated) directly between two parties, without going through an exchange or other intermediary. They offer flexibility because, unlike standardised exchange-traded products, they can be tailored to fit specific needs.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 256

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Term | Definition
Own credit | The effect of the Santander UK group’s own credit standing on the fair value of financial liabilities.
Past due | A financial asset such as a loan is past due when the counterparty has failed to make a payment when contractually due.
Payment holiday | A period in which a customer has relief from making repayments on a loan. Also known as a payment deferral.
Pillar 1 | The first pillar of the Basel III approach which, provides the approach to the calculation of the minimum capital requirements.
Pillar 2 | The part of the CRD IV Accord which sets out the process by which a bank should review its overall capital adequacy and the processes under which the supervisors evaluate how well financial institutions are assessing their risks and take appropriate actions in response to the assessments.
Pillar 3 | The part of the CRD IV Accord which sets out the disclosure requirements for firms to publish details of their risks, capital and risk management. The aims are greater transparency and strengthening market discipline.
Prime / prime mortgage loans | A description for mortgages granted to the most creditworthy category of borrowers.
Private equity investments | Equity holdings in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange.
Probability of default (PD) | The likelihood of a borrower defaulting in the following year, assuming it has not closed or defaulted since the reporting date. For each month in the forecast period, we estimate the monthly PD from a range of factors. These include the current risk grade for the exposure, which becomes less relevant further into the forecast period, as well as the expected evolution of the account risk with maturity and factors for changing economics. We support this with historical data analysis.
Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) | The UK financial services regulator formed as one of the successors to the FSA. The PRA is part of the Bank of England and is responsible for the prudential regulation and supervision of banks, building societies, credit unions, insurers and major investment firms. It sets standards and supervises financial institutions at the level of the individual firm.
Regulatory capital | The amount of capital that the Santander UK group holds, determined in accordance with rules established by the UK PRA for the consolidated Santander UK group and by local regulators for individual Santander UK group companies.
Remuneration Code | FCA Remuneration Code for dual regulated firms SYSC19D.3.44 and PRA Rulebook-Remuneration Part 15.7.
Repurchase agreement (Repo) | In a sale and repurchase agreement one party, the seller, sells a financial asset to another party, the buyer, under commitments to reacquire the asset at a later date. The buyer at the same time agrees to resell the asset at the same later date. From the seller's perspective such agreements are securities sold under repurchase agreements (repos) and from the buyer's securities purchased under commitments to resell (reverse repos).
Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS) | Securities that represent interests in a group of residential mortgages. Investors in these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and / or principal).
Retail & Business Banking (RBB) | Provides UK mortgage lending and banking services and unsecured lending to individuals and small businesses.
Retail loans | Loans to individuals rather than institutions, including residential mortgage lending and banking and consumer credit.
Risk Appetite | The level of risk (types and quantum) that the Santander UK group is willing to accept (or not accept) to safeguard the interests of shareholders whilst achieving business objectives.
Risk-weighted assets (RWA) | A measure of a bank’s assets adjusted for their associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the Basel Capital Accord as implemented by the PRA.
RoTE | Profit after tax attributable to equity holders of the parent divided by average shareholders’ equity less non-controlling interests, other equity instruments and average goodwill and intangible assets.
Santander UK | Refers to Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries.
Securitisation | A process by which a group of assets, usually loans, are aggregated into a pool, which is used to back the issuance of new securities. A company sells assets to a structured entity which then issues securities backed by the assets, based on their value. This allows the credit quality of the assets to be separated from the credit rating of the original company and transfers risk to external investors. Assets used in securitisations include mortgages to create mortgage-backed securities. Santander UK has established securitisation structures as part of its funding and capital management activities.
Select customers | Customers who have a Select Current Account and pay their main income of at least £5,000 per month into their Select Current Account or keep £75,000 in any Santander investment(s), savings or current account.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 257

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Term | Definition
Significant increase in credit risk (SICR) | Assessed by comparing the risk of default of an exposure at the reporting date to the risk of default at origination (after considering the passage of time).
Sovereign exposures | Exposures to local and central governments, and government guaranteed counterparties.
Stage 1 | Assets have not experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination. A loss allowance equal to a 12-month ECL is applied.
Stage 2 | Assets have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination, but no credit impairment has materialised. A loss allowance equal to the lifetime ECL is applied.
Stage 3 | Assets that are in default and considered credit impaired. A loss allowance equal to the lifetime ECL is applied. Objective evidence of credit impairment is required.
Standardised approach | In relation to credit risk, a method for calculating credit risk capital requirements under CRD IV, using External Credit Assessment Institutions ratings and supervisory risk weights. The Standardised approach is less risk-sensitive than IRB (see 'IRB' above). In relation to operational risk, a method of calculating the operational capital requirement under CRD IV, by the application of a supervisory defined percentage charge to the gross income of eight specified business lines.
Stress testing | Stress testing is a management tool that facilitates a forward-looking perspective on risk management, strategic planning, capital, and liquidity and funding planning.
Structured entity | An entity that has been designed so that voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, such as when any voting rights relate to administrative tasks only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual arrangements.
Structured finance/notes | A structured note is an instrument which pays a return linked to the value or level of a specified asset or index and sometimes offers capital protection if the value declines. Structured notes can be linked to a range of underlying assets, including equities, interest rates, funds, commodities and foreign currency.
Subordinated liabilities | Liabilities which, in the event of insolvency or liquidation of the issuer, are subordinated to the claims of depositors and other creditors of the issuer.
Sub-prime | Loans to borrowers typically having weakened credit histories that include payment delinquencies and potentially more severe problems such as court judgements and bankruptcies. They may also display reduced repayment capacity as measured by credit scores, high debt-to-income ratios, or other criteria indicating heightened risk of default.
Supranational | An international organisation where member states transcend national boundaries or interests to share in decision-making and vote on issues relating to the organisation’s geographical focus.
Standard Variable Rate (SVR) | A mortgage product managed by Santander and not directly linked to the Bank of England base rate.
Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME) | The TFSME allows eligible banks and building societies to access four-year funding at rates very close to Bank Rate.
TfL | Transport for London
Tier 1 capital | A measure of a bank's financial strength defined by the PRA. It captures Common Equity Tier 1 capital plus other Tier 1 securities in issue but is subject to a deduction in respect of material holdings in financial companies.
Tier 2 capital | Defined by the PRA. Broadly, it includes qualifying subordinated debt and other Tier 2 securities in issue, eligible collective impairment allowances, the excess of regulatory impairment allowance over expected loss and deduction of material holdings in financial companies.
Total loss absorbing capacity (TLAC) | An international standard for TLAC issued by the Financial Stability Board, which requires global systemically important banks (G-SIBs) to have sufficient loss-absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution, to minimise impacts on financial stability, maintain the continuity of critical functions and avoid requiring taxpayer support.
Total customers | Defined as those having an open account.
Total wholesale funding | Comprises the sum of all outstanding debt securities, structured issuance (including firm financing repurchase agreements), subordinated debt and capital issuance, TFS and non-customer deposits. Total wholesale funding excludes any collateral received as part of the FLS.
Trading book | Positions in financial instruments held either with trading intent or in order to hedge other elements of the trading book, which must be free of restrictive covenants on their tradability or ability to be hedged.
UK Bank Levy | The government levy that applies to certain UK banks, UK building societies and the UK operations of foreign banks from 1 January 2011. The levy is payable based on a percentage of the chargeable equity and liabilities of the bank at the balance sheet date.
Unencumbered assets | Assets on our balance sheet not used to secure liabilities or otherwise pledged.
Value at Risk (VaR) | An estimate of the potential loss which might arise from market movements under normal market conditions if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day, measured to a confidence level.
Wholesale funding with a residual maturity of less than one year | Wholesale funding which has a residual maturity of less than one year at the balance sheet date.
Write-down | After an advance has been identified as impaired and is subject to an impairment allowance, the stage may be reached whereby it is concluded that there is no realistic prospect of further recovery. Write-downs will occur when, and to the extent that, the whole or part of a debt is considered irrecoverable.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 258

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Disclosure pursuant to Section 219 of the Iran Threat Reduction
and Syria Human Rights Act
Pursuant to Section 219 of the Iran Threat Reduction and Syria Human Rights Act of 2012, which added Section 13(r) to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as
amended (the Exchange Act), an issuer is required to disclose in its annual or quarterly reports, as applicable, whether it or any of its affiliates knowingly engaged in
certain activities, transactions or dealings relating to Iran or with individuals or entities designated pursuant to certain Executive Orders. Disclosure is generally
required even where the activities, transactions or dealings were conducted in compliance with applicable law.
The following activities are disclosed in response to Section 13(r) with respect to the Santander UK group and its affiliates in the Banco Santander group. During the
period covered by this annual report:
– Frozen accounts and transactions: A limited number of accounts for certain customers subsequently designated over time by the US under the Specially
Designated Global Terrorist (SDGT) sanctions programme, were or are maintained with certain non-US affiliates of Santander UK. All such accounts have been
frozen or cancelled to comply with applicable legal requirements.
– Legacy contractual obligations related to guarantees: The Banco Santander group also has certain legacy performance guarantees for the benefit of an Iranian
bank that is currently designated by the US under the Specially Designated Global Terrorist (SDGT) sanctions programme (stand-by letters of credit to guarantee
the obligations – either under tender documents or under contracting agreements – of contractors who participated in public bids in Iran) that were in place prior
to 27 April 2007. The Banco Santander group is not contractually permitted to cancel these arrangements without paying the guaranteed amount. As such, the
Banco Santander group intends to continue to provide the guarantees in accordance with company policy and applicable laws.
In the aggregate, the transactions described above resulted in gross revenues and net profits in the year ended 31 December 2025, which were negligible relative
to the overall revenues and profits of Banco Santander. The Banco Santander group has undertaken significant steps to withdraw from the Iranian market such as
closing its representative office in Iran and ceasing all banking activities therein, including correspondent relationships, deposit taking from Iranian entities and
issuing export letters of credit, except for the legacy transactions described above.

Annual Report 2025 | Santander UK plc | 259

Strategic Report | Sustainability | Governance | Risk review | Financial statements | Shareholder information

Cross-reference to Form 20-F

Form 20-F Item Number and Caption |  | Page
PART I |  |
1 | Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers |  | *
2 | Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable |  | *
3 | Key Information | Capitalisation and indebtedness | *
|  | Reasons for the offer and use of proceeds | *
|  | Risk factors | 217
4 | Information on the Company | History and development of the company | 34
|  | Business overview | [151, 154-159]
|  | Organisational structure | [36, 62, 74, 124]
|  | Property, plants and equipment | [xx]
4A | Unresolved Staff Comments |  | Not applicable
5 | Operating and Financial Review and Prospects | Operating results | 9
|  | Liquidity and capital resources | 86, 94
|  | Research and development, patents and licenses, etc. | [xx]
|  | Trend information | [4, 12, 13]
|  | Critical accounting estimates | 151
6 | Directors, Senior Management and Employees | Directors and senior management | [30]
|  | Compensation | [54]
|  | Board practices | [35]
|  | Employees | [24, 192]
|  | Share ownership | [23, 225]
|  | Disclosure of a registrant’s action to recover erroneously awarded compensation | n/a
7 | Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions | Major shareholders | 242
|  | Related party transactions | 195
|  | Interests of experts and counsel | *
8 | Financial Information | Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information | [171, 172, 173, 174, 285]
|  | Significant Changes | [245]
9 | The Offer and Listing |  | *
10 | Additional Information | Share capital | *
|  | Memorandum and articles of association | 236
|  | Material contracts | 242
|  | Exchange controls | 242
|  | Taxation | 242
|  | Dividends and paying agents | *
|  | Statements by experts | *
|  | Documents on display | 242
|  | Subsidiary Information | 212
|  | Annual Report to Security Holders | Not applicable
11 | Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk |  | 97
12 | Description of Securities Other Than Equity Securities |  | *
PART II |  |
13 | Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies |  | Not applicable
14 | Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds | Not applicable
15 | Controls and Procedures |  | [64]
16A | Audit Committee financial expert |  | [48]
16B | Code of Ethics |  | [63]
16C | Principal Accountant Fees and Services |  | 157
16D | Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees | Not applicable
16E | Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers | Not applicable
16F | Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant |  | Not applicable
16G | Corporate Governance |  | 16
16H | Mine Safety Disclosure |  | Not applicable
16I | Disclosure Regarding Foreign Jurisdictions that Prevent Inspections | Not applicable
16J | Insider Trading Policies |  | [xx]
16K | Cybersecurity |  | [xx]
PART III |  |
17 | Financial Statements |  | Not applicable
18 | Financial Statements |  | 133
19 | Exhibits |  | Filed with SEC
* Not required for an Annual Report.

EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibits1 |
1.1 | Articles of Association of the Company (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.1 to the Company's Form 20-F filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 5 March 2024)
8.1 | List of Subsidiaries - the list of subsidiaries that are consolidated can be found in ‘Subsidiaries and related undertakings’ in the Shareholder information section of the Form 20-F. Details of subsidiaries that are not consolidated can be found in Note 18 ‘Interests in other entities’ in the Financial Statements section of the Form 20-F.
11.1 | Policy on Market Abuse and Inside Information (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 11.1 to the Company's Form 20-F filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 7 March 2025)
12.1 | CEO Certificate pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
12.2 | CFO Certificate pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
13.1 | Certificate pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
15.1 | Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
97.1 | Policy for the Recovery of Erroneously Awarded Compensation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 97.1 to the Company's Form 20-F filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 5 March 2024)
101.INS* | XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH* | XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document
101.CAL* | XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document
101.DEF* | XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document
101.LAB* | XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document
101.PRE* | XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document

1 Documents concerning the Company referred to in the 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F may be inspected at 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN, its principal executive offices and registered
address.
SIGNATURE
The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this
annual report on its behalf.
SANTANDER UK plc

By: |  | [/s/] Mahesh Aditya
|  | Mahesh Aditya
|  | Chief Executive Officer

Dated:12 March, 2026